Hospira, Inc.

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Hospira, Inc. Drugs

Neo-synephrine Hydrochl...

Neo-synephrine Hydrochloride

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Doxorubicin Hydrochlori...

Doxorubicin Hydrochloride

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Amidate

Amidate

Etomidate Injection, USP is intended for administration only by the intravenous route (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). The dose for induction of anesthesia in adult patients and in pediatric patients above the age of ten (10) years will vary between 0.2 and 0.6 mg/kg of body weight, and it must be individualized in each case. The usual dose for induction in these patients is 0.3 mg/kg, injected over a period of 30 to 60 seconds. There are inadequate data to make dosage recommendations for induction of anesthesia in patients below the age of ten (10) years; therefore, such use is not recommended. Geriatric patients may require reduced doses of etomidate.

Smaller increments of intravenous etomidate may be administered to adult patients during short operative procedures to supplement subpotent anesthetic agents, such as nitrous oxide. The dosage employed under these circumstances, although usually smaller than the original induction dose, must be individualized. There are insufficient data to support this use of etomidate for longer adult procedures or for any procedures in pediatric patients; therefore, such use is not recommended. The use of intravenous fentanyl and other neuroactive drugs employed during the conduct of anesthesia may alter the etomidate dosage requirements. Consult the prescribing information for all other such drugs before using.

Premedication: Etomidate Injection, USP is compatible with commonly administered pre-anesthetic medications, which may be employed as indicated. See also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, ADVERSE REACTIONS, and dosage recommendations for maintenance of anesthesia.

Etomidate hypnosis does not significantly alter the usual dosage requirements of neuromuscular blocking agents employed for endotracheal intubation or other purposes shortly after induction of anesthesia.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Nipent

Nipent

It is recommended that patients receive hydration with 500 to 1,000 mL of 5% Dextrose in 0.5 Normal Saline or equivalent before NIPENT administration. An additional 500 mL of 5% Dextrose or equivalent should be administered after NIPENT is given.

The recommended dosage of NIPENT for the treatment of hairy cell leukemia is 4 mg/m2 every other week. NIPENT may be administered intravenously by bolus injection or diluted in a larger volume and given over 20 to 30 minutes. (See Preparation of Intravenous Solution.)

Higher doses are not recommended.

No extravasation injuries were reported in clinical studies.

The optimal duration of treatment has not been determined. In the absence of major toxicity and with observed continuing improvement, the patient should be treated until a complete response has been achieved. Although not established as required, the administration of two additional doses has been recommended following the achievement of a complete response.

All patients receiving NIPENT at 6 months should be assessed for response to treatment. If the patient has not achieved a complete or partial response, treatment with NIPENT should be discontinued.

If the patient has achieved a partial response, NIPENT treatment should be continued in an effort to achieve a complete response. At any time thereafter that a complete response is achieved, two additional doses of NIPENT are recommended. NIPENT treatment should then be stopped. If the best response to treatment at the end of 12 months is a partial response, it is recommended that treatment with NIPENT be stopped.

Withholding or discontinuation of individual doses may be needed when severe adverse reactions occur. Drug treatment should be withheld in patients with severe rash, and withheld or discontinued in patients showing evidence of nervous system toxicity.

NIPENT treatment should be withheld in patients with active infection occurring during the treatment but may be resumed when the infection is controlled.

Patients who have elevated serum creatinine should have their dose withheld and a creatinine clearance determined. There are insufficient data to recommend a starting or a subsequent dose for patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <60 mL/min).

Patients with impaired renal function should be treated only when the potential benefit justifies the potential risk. Two patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearances 50 to 60 mL/min) achieved complete response without unusual adverse events when treated with 2 mg/m2.

No dosage reduction is recommended at the start of therapy with NIPENT in patients with anemia, neutropenia, or thrombocytopenia. In addition, dosage reductions are not recommended during treatment in patients with anemia and thrombocytopenia if patients can be otherwise supported hematologically. NIPENT should be temporarily withheld if the absolute neutrophil count falls during treatment below 200 cells/mm3 in a patient who had an initial neutrophil count greater than 500 cells/mm3 and may be resumed when the count returns to predose levels.

Preparation of Intravenous Solution
1. Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be followed. Several guidelines on this subject have been published. 2-7 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate. Spills and wastes should be treated with a 5% sodium hypochlorite solution prior to disposal. 2. Protective clothing including polyethylene gloves must be worn. 3. Transfer 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection USP to the vial containing NIPENT and mix thoroughly to obtain complete dissolution of a solution yielding 2 mg/mL. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. 4. NIPENT may be given intravenously by bolus injection or diluted in a larger volume (25 to 50 mL) with 5% Dextrose Injection USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP. Dilution of the entire contents of a reconstituted vial with 25 mL or 50 mL provides a pentostatin concentration of 0.33 mg/mL or 0.18 mg/mL, respectively, for the diluted solutions. 5. NIPENT solution when diluted for infusion with 5% Dextrose Injection USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP does not interact with PVC infusion containers or administration sets at concentrations of 0.18 mg/mL to 0.33 mg/mL.
Stability

NIPENT vials are stable at refrigerated storage temperature 2° to 8° C (36° to 46°F) for the period stated on the package. Vials reconstituted or reconstituted and further diluted as directed may be stored at room temperature and ambient light but should be used within 8 hours because NIPENT contains no preservatives.
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of Levofloxacin Injection is 250 mg or 500 mg administered by slow infusion over 60 minutes every 24 hours or 750 mg administered by slow infusion over 90 minutes every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance <50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].
Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function (creatinine clearance ≥50 mL/min) * Due to the designated pathogens [ see Indications and Usage (1)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Moraxella catarrhalis, Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumoniae [ see Indications and Usage (1.2)]. § Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [ see Indications and Usage (1.3)]. ¶ This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia. # This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa; and for AP due to E. coli. Þ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [ see Clinical Studies (14.9)]. ß The safety of levofloxacin in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. à Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis. Higher doses of levofloxacin typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.
Type of Infection*

Dosed Every 24 hours

Duration (days)†

Nosocomial Pneumonia

750 mg

7-14

Community Acquired Pneumonia‡

500 mg

7-14

Community Acquired Pneumonia§

750 mg

5

Acute Bacterial Sinusitis

750 mg

5

500 mg

10-14

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

500 mg

7

Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI)

750 mg

7-14

Uncomplicated SSSI

500 mg

7-10

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

500 mg

28

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶

750 mg

5

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)#

250 mg

10

Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection

250 mg

3

Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure), adult and pediatric patients >50 kgÞ,ß Pediatric patients <50 kg and ≥6 months of ageÞ,ß

500 mgSee Table 2 below (2.2)

60ß 60ß

Plague, adult and pediatric patients >50 kgà Pediatric patients <50 kg and ≥6 months of age

500 mgSee Table 2 below (2.2)

10 to 1410 to 14

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥6 months of age is described below in Table 2.
Table 2: Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥6 months of age * Due to Bacillus anthracis [ see Indications and Usage (1.13)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [ see Clinical Studies (14.9)]. § The safety of levofloxacin in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. ¶ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.
Type of Infection*

Dose

Freq. Once Every

Duration†

Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)‡,§

    Pediatric patients >50 kg

500 mg

24 hours

60 days§

    Pediatric patients <50 kg and ≥6 months of age

8 mg/kg(not to exceed 250 mg per dose)

12 hours

60 days§

Plague¶

    Pediatric patients >50 kg

500 mg

24 hours

10 to 14 days

    Pediatric patients <50 kg and ≥6 months of age

8 mg/kg(not to exceed 250 mg per dose)

12 hours

10 to 14 days

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Adults with Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.
Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min)
Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 hours

Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min

Creatinine Clearance 10 to 19 mL/min

Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD)

750 mg

750 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours

500 mg

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 24 hours

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours

250 mg

No dosage adjustment required

250 mg every 48 hours. If treating uncomplicated

UTI, then no dosage adjustment is required

No information on dosing adjustment isavailable

2.4 Drug Interaction with Chelation Agents: Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin Injection should not be co-administered with any solution containing multivalent cations, e.g., magnesium, through the same intravenous line [see Dosage and Administration (2.6)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

Levofloxacin Injection Caution: Rapid or bolus intravenous infusion of levofloxacin has been associated with hypotension and must be avoided. Levofloxacin Injection should be infused intravenously slowly over a period of not less than 60 or 90 minutes, depending on the dosage. Levofloxacin Injection should be administered only by intravenous infusion. It is not for intramuscular, intrathecal, intraperitoneal, or subcutaneous administration.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Injection Adequate hydration of patients receiving intravenous levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [see Adverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].

2.6 Preparation of Intravenous Product

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Because only limited data are available on the compatibility of Levofloxacin Injection with other intravenous substances, additives or other medications should not be added to Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Single-Use Flexible Containers or infused simultaneously through the same intravenous line. If the same intravenous line is used for sequential infusion of several different drugs, the line should be flushed before and after infusion of Levofloxacin Injection with an infusion solution compatible with Levofloxacin Injection and with any other drug(s) administered via this common line.

Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Single-Use Flexible Containers (5 mg/mL) Levofloxacin Injection is supplied in flexible containers within a foil overwrap. These contain a premixed, ready to use levofloxacin solution in 5% dextrose (D5W) for single-use. The 100 mL premixed flexible containers contain either 250 mg/50 mL or 500 mg/100 mL of levofloxacin solution. The 250 mL flexible container contains 750 mg/150 mL of levofloxacin solution. The concentration of each container is 5 mg/mL. No further dilution of these preparations is necessary. Because the premix flexible containers are for single-use only, any unused portion should be discarded.

Instructions for the Use of Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Flexible Containers:
1. Tear outer wrap at the notch and remove solution container. 2. Check the container for minute leaks by squeezing the inner bag firmly. If leaks are found, or if the seal is not intact, discard the solution, as the sterility may be compromised. 3. Do not use if the solution is cloudy or a precipitate is present. 4. Use sterile equipment. 5. WARNING: Do not use flexible containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.
Preparation for Administration:
1. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 2. Remove cover from port at bottom of container. 3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 4. Suspend container from hanger. 5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber during infusion of Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Flexible Containers. 6. Open flow control clamp to expel air from set. Close clamp. 7. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
Mustela Broad Spectrum ...

Mustela Broad Spectrum Spf 50 Plus Mineral Sunscreen

This insert is for a Pharmacy Bulk Package and is intended for preparing IV admixtures only. Dosage recommendations for intramuscular or direct intravenous injection are for informational purposes only.

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months.

The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

For Administration by Intravenous Infusion – Reconstitute as directed below (Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package) prior to diluting with an intravenous solution.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Stability studies on ampicillin sodium at several concentrations in various intravenous solutions indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at the temperatures noted for the time periods stated.

Room Temperature (25° C)

Diluent

Concentrations

Stability

Periods

Sterile Water for Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

5% Dextrose Injection USP

10 to 20 mg/mL

1 hour

5% Dextrose Injection USP

up to 2 mg/mL

2 hours

5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl Injection USP

up to 2 mg/mL

2 hours

Lactated Ringer’s Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

Refrigerated (4° C)

Diluent

Concentrations

Stability

Periods

Sterile Water for Injection USP

30 mg/mL

48 hours

Sterile Water for Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

72 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

30 mg/mL

24 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

48 hours

Lactated Ringer’s Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

24 hours

5% Dextrose Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

1 hour

5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl Injection USP

up to 10 mg/mL

1 hour

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Ampicillin for Injection, USP. The concentrations should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of ampicillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

Directions For Proper Use Of Pharmacy Bulk Package

This pharmacy bulk package glass bottle contains 10 grams ampicillin and is designed for use in the pharmacy in preparing IV admixtures.
a) Add 94 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP. The resulting solution will contain 100 milligrams ampicillin activity per mL, and is stable up to ONE HOUR at room temperature. b) Dilute further within ONE HOUR to a concentration of 5 mg to 10 mg per mL. See Table for suitable fluid. Use promptly. This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible. c) Using aseptic technique under a laminar flow hood, the closure should be penetrated only one time after reconstitution using a suitable sterile dispensing set; which allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. d) After entry, use entire contents of bottle promptly. The entire contents of the bottle must be dispensed within ONE HOUR of reconstitution. This time limit should begin with the introduction of solvent in the Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle. e) A plastic hanger fitment attached to the pharmacy bulk package provides a suitable hanging device while dispensing contents.
Protect the constituted solution from freezing.

Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

CAUTION: NOT TO BE DISPENSED AS A UNIT.
Nalbuphine Hydrochlorid...

Nalbuphine Hydrochloride

The usual recommended adult dose is 10 mg for a 70 kg individual administered subcutaneously, intramuscularly, or intravenously; this dose may be repeated every 3 to 6 hours as necessary. Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain, physical status of the patient, and other medications which the patient may be receiving (see Interaction With Other Central Nervous System Depressants under WARNINGS). In nontolerant individuals, the recommended single maximum dose is 20 mg with a maximum total daily dose of 160 mg.

The use of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection as a supplement to balanced anesthesia requires larger doses than those recommended for analgesia. Induction doses of nalbuphine hydrochloride range from 0.3 mg/kg to 3 mg/kg intravenously to be administered over a 10 to 15 minute period with maintenance doses of 0.25 to 0.5 mg/kg in single intravenous administrations as required. The use of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection may be followed by respiratory depression which can be reversed with the opioid antagonist naloxone hydrochloride.

Patients Dependent on Opioids: Patients who have been taking opioids chronically may experience withdrawal symptoms upon the administration of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection. If unduly troublesome, opioid withdrawal symptoms can be controlled by the slow intravenous administration of small increments of morphine, until relief occurs. If the previous analgesic was morphine, meperidine, codeine, or other opioid with similar duration of activity, one-fourth of the anticipated dose of nalbuphine hydrochloride can be administered initially and the patient observed for signs of withdrawal, i.e., abdominal cramps, nausea and vomiting, lacrimation, rhinorrhea, anxiety, restlessness, elevation of temperature or piloerection. If untoward symptoms do not occur, progressively larger doses may be tried at appropriate intervals until the desired level of analgesia is obtained with nalbuphine hydrochloride.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Bivalirudin

Bivalirudin

2.1 Recommended Dose

Bivalirudin is for intravenous administration only.

Bivalirudin is intended for use with aspirin (300-325 mg daily) and has been studied only in patients receiving concomitant aspirin.

For patients who do not have HIT/HITTS

The recommended dose of bivalirudin is an intravenous (IV) bolus dose of 0.75 mg/kg, followed by an infusion of 1.75 mg/kg/h for the duration of the PCI/PTCA procedure. Five min after the bolus dose has been administered, an activated clotting time (ACT) should be performed and an additional bolus of 0.3 mg/kg should be given if needed.

GPI administration should be considered in the event that any of the conditions listed in the REPLACE-2 clinical trial description [see Clinical Studies (14.1)] is present.

For patients who have HIT/HITTS

The recommended dose of bivalirudin in patients with HIT/HITTS undergoing PCI is an IV bolus of 0.75 mg/kg. This should be followed by a continuous infusion at a rate of 1.75 mg/kg/h for the duration of the procedure.

For ongoing treatment post procedure

Continuation of the bivalirudin infusion following PCI/PTCA for up to 4 hours post-procedure is optional, at the discretion of the treating physician. After four hours, an additional IV infusion of bivalirudin may be initiated at a rate of 0.2 mg/kg/h (low-rate infusion), for up to 20 hours, if needed.

2.2 Dosing in Renal Impairment

No reduction in the bolus dose is needed for any degree of renal impairment. The infusion dose of bivalirudin may need to be reduced, and anticoagulant status monitored in patients with renal impairment. Patients with moderate renal impairment (30-59 mL/min) should receive an infusion of 1.75 mg/kg/h. If the creatinine clearance is less than 30 mL/min, reduction of the infusion rate to 1 mg/kg/h should be considered. If a patient is on hemodialysis, the infusion rate should be reduced to 0.25 mg/kg/h [see Use In Specific Population (8.6)].

2.3 Instructions for Administration

Bivalirudin is intended for intravenous bolus injection and continuous infusion after reconstitution and dilution. To each 250 mg vial, add 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection, USP. Gently swirl until all material is dissolved. Each reconstituted vial should be further diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose in Water or 0.9% Sodium Chloride for Injection to yield a final concentration of 5 mg/mL (e.g., 1 vial in 50 mL; 2 vials in 100 mL; 5 vials in 250 mL). The dose to be administered is adjusted according to the patient’s weight (see Table 1).

If the low-rate infusion is used after the initial infusion, a lower concentration bag should be prepared. In order to prepare this bag, reconstitute the 250 mg vial with 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection, USP. Gently swirl until all material is dissolved. Each reconstituted vial should be further diluted in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose in Water or 0.9% Sodium Chloride for Injection to yield a final concentration of 0.5 mg/mL. The infusion rate to be administered should be selected from the right-hand column in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Table
Using 5 mg/mL Concentration

Using 0.5 mg/mL Concentration

Weight (kg)

Bolus 0.75 mg/kg (mL)

Infusion 1.75 mg/kg/h (mL/h)

Subsequent Low-rate Infusion 0.2 mg/kg/h (mL/h)

43-47

7

16

18

48-52

7.5

17.5

20

53-57

8

19

22

58-62

9

21

24

63-67

10

23

26

68-72

10.5

24.5

28

73-77

11

26

30

78-82

12

28

32

83-87

13

30

34

88-92

13.5

31.5

36

93-97

14

33

38

98-102

15

35

40

103-107

16

37

42

108-112

16.5

38.5

44

113-117

17

40

46

118-122

18

42

48

123-127

19

44

50

128-132

19.5

45.5

52

133-137

20

47

54

138-142

21

49

56

143-147

22

51

58

148-152

22.5

52.5

60

Bivalirudin should be administered via an intravenous line. No incompatibilities have been observed with glass bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets. The following drugs should not be administered in the same intravenous line with bivalirudin, since they resulted in haze formation, microparticulate formation, or gross precipitation when mixed with bivalirudin: alteplase, amiodarone HCl, amphotericin B, chlorpromazine HCl, diazepam, prochlorperazine edisylate, reteplase, streptokinase, and vancomycin HCl. Dobutamine was compatible at concentrations up to 4 mg/mL but incompatible at a concentration of 12.5 mg/mL.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. Preparations of bivalirudin containing particulate matter should not be used. Reconstituted material will be a clear to slightly opalescent, colorless to slightly yellow solution.

2.4 Storage after Reconstitution

Do not freeze reconstituted or diluted bivalirudin. Reconstituted material may be stored at 2-8ºC for up to 24 hours. Diluted bivalirudin with a concentration of between 0.5 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL is stable at room temperature for up to 24 hours. Discard any unused portion of reconstituted solution remaining in the vial.

2.1 Recommended Dose

Bivalirudin is for intravenous administration only.

Bivalirudin is intended for use with aspirin (300-325 mg daily) and has been studied only in patients receiving concomitant aspirin.

For patients who do not have HIT/HITTS

The recommended dose of bivalirudin is an intravenous (IV) bolus dose of 0.75 mg/kg, followed by an infusion of 1.75 mg/kg/h for the duration of the PCI/PTCA procedure. Five min after the bolus dose has been administered, an activated clotting time (ACT) should be performed and an additional bolus of 0.3 mg/kg should be given if needed.

GPI administration should be considered in the event that any of the conditions listed in the REPLACE-2 clinical trial description [see Clinical Studies (14.1)] is present.

For patients who have HIT/HITTS

The recommended dose of bivalirudin in patients with HIT/HITTS undergoing PCI is an IV bolus of 0.75 mg/kg. This should be followed by a continuous infusion at a rate of 1.75 mg/kg/h for the duration of the procedure.

For ongoing treatment post procedure

Continuation of the bivalirudin infusion following PCI/PTCA for up to 4 hours post-procedure is optional, at the discretion of the treating physician. After four hours, an additional IV infusion of bivalirudin may be initiated at a rate of 0.2 mg/kg/h (low-rate infusion), for up to 20 hours, if needed.

2.2 Dosing in Renal Impairment

No reduction in the bolus dose is needed for any degree of renal impairment. The infusion dose of bivalirudin may need to be reduced, and anticoagulant status monitored in patients with renal impairment. Patients with moderate renal impairment (30-59 mL/min) should receive an infusion of 1.75 mg/kg/h. If the creatinine clearance is less than 30 mL/min, reduction of the infusion rate to 1 mg/kg/h should be considered. If a patient is on hemodialysis, the infusion rate should be reduced to 0.25 mg/kg/h [see Use In Specific Population (8.6)].

2.3 Instructions for Administration

Bivalirudin is intended for intravenous bolus injection and continuous infusion after reconstitution and dilution. To each 250 mg vial, add 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection, USP. Gently swirl until all material is dissolved. Each reconstituted vial should be further diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose in Water or 0.9% Sodium Chloride for Injection to yield a final concentration of 5 mg/mL (e.g., 1 vial in 50 mL; 2 vials in 100 mL; 5 vials in 250 mL). The dose to be administered is adjusted according to the patient’s weight (see Table 1).

If the low-rate infusion is used after the initial infusion, a lower concentration bag should be prepared. In order to prepare this bag, reconstitute the 250 mg vial with 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection, USP. Gently swirl until all material is dissolved. Each reconstituted vial should be further diluted in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose in Water or 0.9% Sodium Chloride for Injection to yield a final concentration of 0.5 mg/mL. The infusion rate to be administered should be selected from the right-hand column in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Table
Using 5 mg/mL Concentration

Using 0.5 mg/mL Concentration

Weight (kg)

Bolus 0.75 mg/kg (mL)

Infusion 1.75 mg/kg/h (mL/h)

Subsequent Low-rate Infusion 0.2 mg/kg/h (mL/h)

43-47

7

16

18

48-52

7.5

17.5

20

53-57

8

19

22

58-62

9

21

24

63-67

10

23

26

68-72

10.5

24.5

28

73-77

11

26

30

78-82

12

28

32

83-87

13

30

34

88-92

13.5

31.5

36

93-97

14

33

38

98-102

15

35

40

103-107

16

37

42

108-112

16.5

38.5

44

113-117

17

40

46

118-122

18

42

48

123-127

19

44

50

128-132

19.5

45.5

52

133-137

20

47

54

138-142

21

49

56

143-147

22

51

58

148-152

22.5

52.5

60

Bivalirudin should be administered via an intravenous line. No incompatibilities have been observed with glass bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets. The following drugs should not be administered in the same intravenous line with bivalirudin, since they resulted in haze formation, microparticulate formation, or gross precipitation when mixed with bivalirudin: alteplase, amiodarone HCl, amphotericin B, chlorpromazine HCl, diazepam, prochlorperazine edisylate, reteplase, streptokinase, and vancomycin HCl. Dobutamine was compatible at concentrations up to 4 mg/mL but incompatible at a concentration of 12.5 mg/mL.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. Preparations of bivalirudin containing particulate matter should not be used. Reconstituted material will be a clear to slightly opalescent, colorless to slightly yellow solution.

2.4 Storage after Reconstitution

Do not freeze reconstituted or diluted bivalirudin. Reconstituted material may be stored at 2-8ºC for up to 24 hours. Diluted bivalirudin with a concentration of between 0.5 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL is stable at room temperature for up to 24 hours. Discard any unused portion of reconstituted solution remaining in the vial.
Linezolid

Linezolid

2.1 General Dosage and Administration

The recommended dosage for linezolid formulations for the treatment of infections is described in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosage Guidelines for Linezolid Injection * Due to the designated pathogens [ see Indications and Usage (1)] † Neonates less than 7 days: Most pre-term neonates less than 7 days of age (gestational age less than 34 weeks) have lower systemic linezolid clearance values and larger AUC values than many full-term neonates and older infants. These neonates should be initiated with a dosing regimen of 10 mg/kg every 12 hours. Consideration may be given to the use of 10 mg/kg every 8 hours regimen in neonates with a suboptimal clinical response. All neonatal patients should receive 10 mg/kg every 8 hours by 7 days of life [ see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Infection*

Dosage and Route of Administration

Recommended Duration of Treatment

(consecutive days)

Pediatric Patients† (Birth through 11 Years of Age)

Adults and Adolescents (12 Years and Older)

Nosocomial pneumonia

10 mg/kg intravenously every 8 hours

600 mg intravenously every 12 hours

10 to 14

Community-acquired pneumonia, including concurrent bacteremia

Complicated skin and skin structure infections

Vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus faecium infections, including concurrent bacteremia

10 mg/kg intravenously every 8 hours

600 mg intravenously every 12 hours

14 to 28

No dose adjustment is necessary when switching from intravenous to oral administration.

2.2 Intravenous Administration

Linezolid Injection is supplied in single-use, ready-to-use container (VisIV™ Container). Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. Check for minute leaks by firmly squeezing the bag. If leaks are detected, discard the solution, as sterility may be impaired. Keep the containers in the overwrap until ready to use. Store at room temperature. Protect from freezing. Linezolid Injection may exhibit a yellow color that can intensify over time without adversely affecting potency.

Linezolid Injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over a period of 30 to 120 minutes. Do not use this intravenous container in series connections. Additives should not be introduced into this solution. If Linezolid Injection is to be given concomitantly with another drug, each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each product.

If the same intravenous line is used for sequential infusion of several drugs, the line should be flushed before and after infusion of Linezolid Injection with an infusion solution compatible with Linezolid Injection and with any other drug(s) administered via this common line.

2.3 Compatibilities

Compatible intravenous solutions include 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, and Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP.

2.4 Incompatibilities

Physical incompatibilities resulted when Linezolid Injection was combined with the following drugs during simulated Y-site administration: amphotericin B, chlorpromazine HCl, diazepam, pentamidine isothionate, erythromycin lactobionate, phenytoin sodium, and trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole. Additionally, chemical incompatibility resulted when Linezolid Injection was combined with ceftriaxone sodium.
Hetastarch In Sodium Ch...

Hetastarch In Sodium Chloride

Dosage for Acute Use in Plasma Volume Expansion

6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is administered by intravenous infusion only. Total dosage and rate of infusion depend upon the amount of blood or plasma lost and the resultant hemoconcentration.

2.1 Adults

The amount usually administered is 500 to 1000 mL. Doses of more than 1500 mL per day for the typical 70 kg patient (approximately 20 mL per kg of body weight) are usually not required. Higher doses have been reported in postoperative and trauma patients where severe blood loss has occurred [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.2 Leukapheresis

250 to 700 mL of 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection with citrate anticoagulant is administered by aseptic addition to the input line of the centrifugation apparatus at a ratio of 1:8 to 1:13 to venous whole blood. The 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection and citrate should be thoroughly mixed to assure effective anticoagulation of blood as it flows through the leukapheresis machine.

2.3 Direction for use for 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection
• Do not use plastic container in series connection. If administration is controlled by a pumping device, care must be taken to discontinue pumping action before the container runs dry or air embolism may result. If administration is not controlled by a pumping device, refrain from applying excessive pressure (>300mmHg) causing distortion to the container such as wringing or twisting. Such handling could result in breakage of the container. • Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Use only if solution is clear and container and seals are intact. • Intended for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. It is recommended that intravenous administration apparatus be replaced at least once every 24 hours. • Withdraw or expel all air from the bag through the medication port prior to infusion if administration is by pressure infusion. • For single use only. The solution contains no bacteriostat, antimicrobial agent or added buffers (except for pH adjustment) and is intended only for single-dose injection. When smaller doses are required the unused portion should be discarded.
CAUTION: Before administering to the patient, review these directions:

Visual Inspection
• Do not remove the plastic infusion container from its overwrap until immediately before use. • Inspect each container. Read the label. Ensure solution is the one ordered and is within the expiration date. • Invert container and carefully inspect the solution in good light for cloudiness, haze, or particulate matter. • Any container which is suspect should not be used.
To Open
1. Tear overwrap down at notch and remove solution container. 2. Check for minute leaks by squeezing solution container firmly. 3. If any leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired.
Preparation for Administration
1. Remove plastic protector from sterile set port at bottom of container. 2. Attach administration set. Refer to complete directions accompanying set.
When stored at room temperature, 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection admixtures of 500-560 mL with citrate concentrations up to 2.5% were compatible for 24 hours. The safety and compatibility of additives other than citrate have not been established.
Linezolid

Linezolid

2.1 General Dosage and Administration

The recommended dosage for linezolid injection for the treatment of infections is described in Table 1. No dose adjustment is necessary when switching from intravenous to oral administration.
Table 1. Dosage Guidelines for Linezolid Injection * Due to the designated pathogens [ see Indications and Usage (1)]
Infection*

Dosage, Route, and Frequency of Administration

Recommended Duration of Treatment

(consecutive days)

Pediatric Patients less than 12 Years of Age

Adults and Adolescents (12 Years and Older)

Nosocomial pneumonia

10 mg/kg intravenously every 8 hours

600 mg intravenously every 12 hours

10 to 14

Community-acquired pneumonia, including concurrent bacteremia

Complicated skin and skin structure infections

Vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus faecium infections, including concurrent bacteremia

10 mg/kg intravenously every 8 hours

600 mg intravenously every 12 hours

14 to 28

The maximum dose for pediatric patients should not exceed the recommended adult dose. The recommended dose is 10 mg per kg intravenously every 8 hours. Linezolid injection in a single use VisIV™ Container should be used only in pediatric patients who require the entire 600 mg dose and not any fraction thereof.

2.2 Intravenous Administration

Linezolid injection is supplied in single-use, ready-to-use container (VisIV™ Container) [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16)]. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. Check for minute leaks by firmly squeezing the bag. If leaks are detected, discard the solution, as sterility may be impaired. Keep the containers in the overwrap until ready to use. Store at room temperature. Protect from freezing. Linezolid injection may exhibit a yellow color that can intensify over time without adversely affecting potency.

Linezolid injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over a period of 30 to 120 minutes. Do not use this intravenous container in series connections. Additives should not be introduced into this solution. If Linezolid injection is to be given concomitantly with another drug, each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each product.

If the same intravenous line is used for sequential infusion of several drugs, the line should be flushed before and after infusion of Linezolid injection with an infusion solution compatible with Linezolid injection and with any other drug(s) administered via this common line.

2.3 Compatibilities

Compatible intravenous solutions include 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, and Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP.

2.4 Incompatibilities

Physical incompatibilities resulted when Linezolid injection was combined with the following drugs during simulated Y-site administration: amphotericin B, chlorpromazine HCl, diazepam, pentamidine isothionate, erythromycin lactobionate, phenytoin sodium, and trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole. Additionally, chemical incompatibility resulted when Linezolid injection was combined with ceftriaxone sodium.

2.1 General Dosage and Administration

The recommended dosage for linezolid injection for the treatment of infections is described in Table 1. No dose adjustment is necessary when switching from intravenous to oral administration.
Table 1. Dosage Guidelines for Linezolid Injection * Due to the designated pathogens [ see Indications and Usage (1)]
Infection*

Dosage, Route, and Frequency of Administration

Recommended Duration of Treatment

(consecutive days)

Pediatric Patients less than 12 Years of Age

Adults and Adolescents (12 Years and Older)

Nosocomial pneumonia

10 mg/kg intravenously every 8 hours

600 mg intravenously every 12 hours

10 to 14

Community-acquired pneumonia, including concurrent bacteremia

Complicated skin and skin structure infections

Vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus faecium infections, including concurrent bacteremia

10 mg/kg intravenously every 8 hours

600 mg intravenously every 12 hours

14 to 28

The maximum dose for pediatric patients should not exceed the recommended adult dose. The recommended dose is 10 mg per kg intravenously every 8 hours. Linezolid injection in a single use VisIV™ Container should be used only in pediatric patients who require the entire 600 mg dose and not any fraction thereof.

2.2 Intravenous Administration

Linezolid injection is supplied in single-use, ready-to-use container (VisIV™ Container) [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16)]. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. Check for minute leaks by firmly squeezing the bag. If leaks are detected, discard the solution, as sterility may be impaired. Keep the containers in the overwrap until ready to use. Store at room temperature. Protect from freezing. Linezolid injection may exhibit a yellow color that can intensify over time without adversely affecting potency.

Linezolid injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over a period of 30 to 120 minutes. Do not use this intravenous container in series connections. Additives should not be introduced into this solution. If Linezolid injection is to be given concomitantly with another drug, each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each product.

If the same intravenous line is used for sequential infusion of several drugs, the line should be flushed before and after infusion of Linezolid injection with an infusion solution compatible with Linezolid injection and with any other drug(s) administered via this common line.

2.3 Compatibilities

Compatible intravenous solutions include 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, and Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP.

2.4 Incompatibilities

Physical incompatibilities resulted when Linezolid injection was combined with the following drugs during simulated Y-site administration: amphotericin B, chlorpromazine HCl, diazepam, pentamidine isothionate, erythromycin lactobionate, phenytoin sodium, and trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole. Additionally, chemical incompatibility resulted when Linezolid injection was combined with ceftriaxone sodium.
Metronidazole

Metronidazole

In elderly patients the pharmacokinetics of metronidazole may be altered and, therefore, monitoring of serum levels may be necessary to adjust the metronidazole dosage accordingly.

Treatment of Anaerobic Bacterial Infections:

The recommended dosage schedule for Adults is:

Loading Dose

15 mg/kg infused over one hour (approximately 1 g for a 70-kg adult).

Maintenance Dose

7.5 mg/kg infused over one hour every six hours (approximately500 mg for a 70-kg adult). The first maintenance dose should be instituted six hours following the initiation of the loading dose.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to oral metronidazole when conditions warrant, based upon the severity of the disease and the response of the patient to treatment with Metronidazole Injection, USP treatment. The usual adult oral dosage is 7.5 mg/kg every six hours (approximately 500 mg for a 70-kg adult).

A maximum of 4 g should not be exceeded during a 24-hour period.

The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 10 days; however, infections of the bone and joint, lower respiratory tract, and endocardium may require longer treatment.

Dosage Adjustments

Patients with Severe Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh C), the metronidazole dose should be reduced by 50% (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Patients Undergoing Hemodialysis

Hemodialysis removes significant amounts of metronidazole and its metabolites from systemic circulation. The clearance of metronidazole will depend on the type of dialysis membrane used, the duration of the dialysis session, and other factors. If the administration of metronidazole cannot be separated from a hemodialysis session, supplementation of metronidazole dosage following a hemodialysis session should be considered, depending on the patient’s clinical situation (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Prophylaxis

For surgical prophylactic use, to prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated colorectal surgery, the recommended dosage schedule for adults is:
a. 15 mg/kg infused over 30 to 60 minutes and completed approximately one hour before surgery; followed by b. 7.5 mg/kg infused over 30 to 60 minutes at 6 and 12 hours after the initial dose.
It is important that (1) administration of the initial preoperative dose be completed approximately one hour before surgery so that adequate drug levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial incision, and (2) Metronidazole Injection, USP be administered, if necessary, at 6-hour intervals to maintain effective drug levels. Prophylactic use of Metronidazole Injection, USP should be limited to the day of surgery only, following the above guidelines.

CAUTION: Metronidazole Injection, USP is to be administered by slow intravenous drip infusion only, either as a continuous or intermittent infusion. I.V. admixtures containing metronidazole and other drugs should be avoided. Additives should not be introduced into this solution. If used with a primary intravenous fluid system, the primary solution should be discontinued during metronidazole infusion. DO NOT USE EQUIPMENT CONTAINING ALUMINUM (e.g., NEEDLES, CANNULAE) THAT WOULD COME IN CONTACT WITH THE DRUG SOLUTION.

Metronidazole Injection, USP is a ready-to-use isotonic solution. NO DILUTION OR BUFFERING IS REQUIRED. Do not refrigerate. Each container of Metronidazole Injection contains 14 mEq of sodium.

Do not use if cloudy or precipitated or if the seal is not intact.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Use sterile equipment. It is recommended that the intravenous administration apparatus be replaced at least once every 24 hours.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)
1. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 2. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 4. Suspend container from hanger. 5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 6. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 7. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 8. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.
Dyloject

Dyloject

Use for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

For intravenous administration only.

For the treatment of acute pain, the recommended dose of Dyloject is 37.5 mg administered by intravenous bolus injection over 15 seconds every 6 hours as needed, not to exceed 150 mg/day.

To reduce the risk of renal adverse reactions, patients must be well hydrated prior to administration of Dyloject.

Visually inspect parenteral drug products for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. If visibly opaque particles, discoloration or other foreign particles are observed, the solution should not be used.
Aminocaproic Acid

Aminocaproic Acid

Intravenous

Aminocaproic Acid Injection, USP is administered by infusion, utilizing the usual compatible intravenous vehicles (e.g., Sterile Water for Injection, Sodium Chloride for Injection, 5% Dextrose or Ringer’s Injection). Although Sterile Water for Injection is compatible for intravenous injection the resultant solution is hypo-osmolar. RAPID INJECTION OF AMINOCAPROIC ACID INJECTION UNDILUTED INTO A VEIN IS NOT RECOMMENDED.

For the treatment of acute bleeding syndromes due to elevated fibrinolytic activity, it is suggested that 16 to 20 mL (4 to 5 g) of aminocaproic acid in 250 mL of diluent be administered by infusion during the first hour of treatment, followed by a continuing infusion at the rate of 4 mL (1 g) per hour in 50 mL of diluent. This method of treatment would ordinarily be continued for about 8 hours or until the bleeding situation has been controlled.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless the solution is clear and seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Fluconazole

Fluconazole

Dosage and Administration in Adults

Multiple Dose

SINCE ORAL ABSORPTION IS RAPID AND ALMOST COMPLETE, THE DAILY DOSE OF FLUCONAZOLE IS THE SAME FOR ORAL (TABLETS AND SUSPENSION) AND INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION. In general, a loading dose of twice the daily dose is recommended on the first day of therapy to result in plasma concentrations close to steady-state by the second day of therapy.

The daily dose of fluconazole for the treatment of infections other than vaginal candidiasis should be based on the infecting organism and the patient’s response to therapy. Treatment should be continued until clinical parameters or laboratory tests indicate that active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection. Patients with AIDS and cryptococcal meningitis or recurrent oropharyngeal candidiasis usually require maintenance therapy to prevent relapse.

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Clinical evidence of oropharyngeal candidiasis generally resolves within several days, but treatment should be continued for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for esophageal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Doses up to 400 mg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least two weeks following resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections: For systemic Candida infections including candidemia, disseminated candidiasis, and pneumonia, optimal therapeutic dosage and duration of therapy have not been established. In open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients, doses of up to 400 mg daily have been used.

Urinary Tract Infections and Peritonitis: For the treatment of Candida urinary tract infections and peritonitis, daily doses of 50 to 200 mg have been used in open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients.

Cryptococcal Meningitis: The recommended dosage for treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis is 400 mg on the first day, followed by 200 mg once daily. A dosage of 400 mg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. The recommended dosage of fluconazole for suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in patients with AIDS is 200 mg once daily.

Prophylaxis in Patients Undergoing Bone Marrow Transplantation: The recommended fluconazole daily dosage for the prevention of candidiasis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation is 400 mg, once daily. Patients who are anticipated to have severe granulocytopenia (less than 500 neutrophils per cu mm) should start fluconazole prophylaxis several days before the anticipated onset of neutropenia, and continue for 7 days after the neutrophil count rises above 1000 cells per cu mm.

Dosage and Administration in Children

The following dose equivalency scheme should generally provide equivalent exposure in pediatric and adult patients:
* Some older children may have clearances similar to that of adults. Absolute doses exceeding 600 mg/day are not recommended. Experience with fluconazole in neonates is limited to pharmacokinetic studies in premature newborns. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) Based on the prolonged half-life seen in premature newborns (gestational age 26 to 29 weeks), these children, in the first two weeks of life, should receive the same dosage (mg/kg) as in older children, but administered every 72 hours. After the first two weeks, these children should be dosed once daily. No information regarding fluconazole pharmacokinetics in full-term newborns is available.
Pediatric Patients

Adults

3 mg/kg

100 mg

6 mg/kg

200 mg

12* mg/kg

400 mg

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Treatment should be administered for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis: For the treatment of esophageal candidiasis, the recommended dosage of fluconazole in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Doses up to 12 mg/kg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least 2 weeks following the resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections: For the treatment of candidemia and disseminated Candida infections, daily doses of 6 to 12 mg/kg/day have been used in an open, noncomparative study of a small number of children.

Cryptococcal Meningitis: For the treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis, the recommended dosage is 12 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 6 mg/kg once daily. A dosage of 12 mg/kg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. For suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in children with AIDS, the recommended dose of fluconazole is 6 mg/kg once daily.

Dosage in Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Fluconazole is cleared primarily by renal excretion as unchanged drug. In patients with impaired renal function who will receive multiple doses of fluconazole, an initial loading dose of 50 to 400 mg should be given. After the loading dose, the daily dose (according to indication) should be based on the following table:

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Percent of Recommended Dose

>50

100%

≤50 (no dialysis)

50%

Regular dialysis

100% after each dialysis

These are suggested dose adjustments based on pharmacokinetics following administration of multiple doses. Further adjustment may be needed depending upon clinical condition.

When serum creatinine is the only measure of renal function available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) should be used to estimate the creatinine clearance in adults:

Males:                                  Weight (kg) x (140-age)                                                      72 x serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females:                                  0.85 x above value

Although the pharmacokinetics of fluconazole has not been studied in children with renal insufficiency, dosage reduction in children with renal insufficiency should parallel that recommended for adults. The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in children:

      K x                                    linear length or height (cm)                                                               serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

(Where K = 0.55 for children older than 1 year and 0.45 for infants.)

Administration

Fluconazole injection may be administered by intravenous infusion. Fluconazole injection has been used safely for up to fourteen days of intravenous therapy. The intravenous infusion of fluconazole should be administered at a maximum rate of approximately 200 mg/hour, given as a continuous infusion.

Fluconazole injections in flexible plastic containers are intended only for intravenous administration using sterile equipment.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use if the solution is cloudy or precipitated or if the seal is not intact.

Directions for IV Use of Fluconazole in Flexible Plastic Containers

Do not remove unit from overwrap until ready for use. The overwrap is a moisture barrier. The inner bag maintains the sterility of the product.

CAUTION: Do not use flexible plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is completed.

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch slit and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually. After removing overwrap, check for minute leaks by squeezing inner bag firmly. If leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired.

DO NOT ADD SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICATION.

Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 2. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: When using a vented administration set, replace bacterial retentive air filter with piercing pin cover. Insert piercing pin with twisting motion until shoulder of air filter housing rests against the outlet port flange. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 4. Suspend container from hanger. 5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 6. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close flow control clamp. 7. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 8. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Desmopressin Acetate

Desmopressin Acetate

Hemophilia A and von Willebrand's Disease (Type I): Desmopressin Acetate Injection 4 mcg/mL is administered as an intravenous infusion at a dose of 0.3 mcg desmopressin acetate/kg body weight diluted in sterile physiological saline and infused slowly over 15 to 30 minutes. In adults and children weighing more than 10 kg, 50 mL of diluent is recommended; in children weighing 10 kg or less, 10 mL of diluent is recommended. Blood pressure and pulse should be monitored during infusion. If Desmopressin Acetate Injection 4 mcg/mL is used preoperatively, it should be administered 30 minutes prior to the scheduled procedure.

The necessity for repeat administration of desmopressin acetate or use of any blood products for hemostasis should be determined by laboratory response as well as the clinical condition of the patient. The tendency toward tachyphylaxis (lessening of response) with repeated administration given more frequently than every 48 hours should be considered in treating each patient.

Fluid restriction should be observed. See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and Geriatric Use.

Diabetes Insipidus: This formulation is administered subcutaneously or by direct intravenous injection. Desmopressin Acetate Injection 4 mcg/mL dosage must be determined for each patient and adjusted according to the pattern of response. Response should be estimated by two parameters: adequate duration of sleep and adequate, not excessive, water turnover.

The usual dosage range in adults is 0.5 mL (2 mcg) to 1 mL (4 mcg) daily, administered intravenously or subcutaneously, usually in two divided doses. The morning and evening doses should be separately adjusted for an adequate diurnal rhythm of water turnover. For patients who have been controlled on intranasal desmopressin acetate and who must be switched to the injection form, either because of poor intranasal absorption or because of the need for surgery, the comparable antidiuretic dose of the injection is about one-tenth the intranasal dose.

Fluid restriction should be observed. See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and Geriatric Use.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Geriatric Use: This drug is known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function. See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Human Pharmacokinetics, CONTRAINDICATIONS, and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use.
Rocuronium Bromide

Rocuronium Bromide

Rocuronium bromide injection is for intravenous use only. This drug should only be administered by experienced clinicians or trained individuals supervised by an experienced clinician familiar with the use, actions, characteristics, and complications of neuromuscular blocking agents. Doses of rocuronium bromide injection should be individualized and a peripheral nerve stimulator should be used to monitor drug effect, need for additional doses, adequacy of spontaneous recovery or antagonism, and to decrease the complications of overdosage if additional doses are administered.

The dosage information which follows is derived from studies based upon units of drug per unit of body weight. It is intended to serve as an initial guide to clinicians familiar with other neuromuscular blocking agents to acquire experience with rocuronium bromide injection.

In patients in whom potentiation of, or resistance to, neuromuscular block is anticipated, a dose adjustment should be considered [see Dosage and Administration (2.5), Warnings and Precautions (5.9, 5.12), Drug Interactions (7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.8, 7.10), and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

2.1 Dose for Tracheal Intubation

The recommended initial dose of rocuronium bromide injection, regardless of anesthetic technique, is 0.6 mg/kg. Neuromuscular block sufficient for intubation (80% block or greater) is attained in a median (range) time of 1 (0.4 to 6) minute(s) and most patients have intubation completed within 2 minutes. Maximum blockade is achieved in most patients in less than 3 minutes. This dose may be expected to provide 31 (15 to 85) minutes of clinical relaxation under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia. Under halothane, isoflurane, and enflurane anesthesia, some extension of the period of clinical relaxation should be expected [see Drug Interactions (7.3)].

A lower dose of rocuronium bromide injection (0.45 mg/kg) may be used. Neuromuscular block sufficient for intubation (80% block or greater) is attained in a median (range) time of 1.3 (0.8 to 6.2) minute(s) and most patients have intubation completed within 2 minutes. Maximum blockade is achieved in most patients in less than 4 minutes. This dose may be expected to provide 22 (12 to 31) minutes of clinical relaxation under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia. Patients receiving this low dose of 0.45 mg/kg who achieve less than 90% block (about 16% of these patients) may have a more rapid time to 25% recovery, 12 to 15 minutes.

A large bolus dose of 0.9 or 1.2 mg/kg can be administered under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia without adverse effects to the cardiovascular system [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.2 Rapid Sequence Intubation

In appropriately premedicated and adequately anesthetized patients, rocuronium bromide injection 0.6 to 1.2 mg/kg will provide excellent or good intubating conditions in most patients in less than 2 minutes [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.3 Maintenance Dosing

Maintenance doses of 0.1, 0.15, and 0.2 mg/kg rocuronium bromide injection, administered at 25% recovery of control T1 (defined as 3 twitches of train-of-four), provide a median (range) of 12 (2 to 31), 17 (6 to 50) and 24 (7 to 69) minutes of clinical duration under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. In all cases, dosing should be guided based on the clinical duration following initial dose or prior maintenance dose and not administered until recovery of neuromuscular function is evident. A clinically insignificant cumulation of effect with repetitive maintenance dosing has been observed [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.4 Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion at an initial rate of 10 to 12 mcg/kg/min of rocuronium bromide injection should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from an intubating dose. Due to rapid redistribution [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] and the associated rapid spontaneous recovery, initiation of the infusion after substantial return of neuromuscular function (more than 10% of control T1), may necessitate additional bolus doses to maintain adequate block for surgery.

Upon reaching the desired level of neuromuscular block, the infusion of rocuronium bromide injection must be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as monitored with the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator. In clinical trials, infusion rates have ranged from 4 to 16 mcg/kg/min.

Inhalation anesthetics, particularly enflurane and isoflurane, may enhance the neuromuscular blocking action of nondepolarizing muscle relaxants. In the presence of steady-state concentrations of enflurane or isoflurane, it may be necessary to reduce the rate of infusion by 30% to 50%, at 45 to 60 minutes after the intubating dose.

Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of rocuronium bromide infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following comparable total doses administered by repetitive bolus injections [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Infusion solutions of rocuronium bromide injection can be prepared by mixing rocuronium bromide injection with an appropriate infusion solution such as 5% glucose in water or lactated Ringers [see Dosage and Administration (2.6)]. These infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of mixing. Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Infusion rates of rocuronium bromide injection can be individualized for each patient using the following tables for three different concentrations of rocuronium bromide injection solution as guidelines:
TABLE 1: Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (0.5 mg/mL)* *   50 mg rocuronium bromide injection in 100 mL solution
Patient Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

(kg)

(lbs)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

15

33

7.2

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

16.2

18

21.6

25.2

28.8

20

44

9.6

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

21.6

24

28.8

33.6

38.4

25

55

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

36

42

48

35

77

16.8

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

37.8

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

50

110

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

72

84

96

60

132

28.8

36

43.2

50.4

57.6

64.8

72

86.4

100.8

115.2

70

154

33.6

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

75.6

84

100.8

117.6

134.4

80

176

38.4

48

57.6

67.2

76.8

86.4

96

115.2

134.4

153.6

90

198

43.2

54

64.8

75.6

86.4

97.2

108

129.6

151.2

172.8

100

220

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

144

168

192
TABLE 2: Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (1 mg/mL)** **   100 mg rocuronium bromide injection in 100 mL solution
Patient Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

(kg)

(lbs)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

15

33

3.6

4.5

5.4

6.3

7.2

8.1

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

20

44

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

25

55

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

18

21

24

35

77

8.4

10.5

12.6

14.7

16.8

18.9

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

50

110

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

36

42

48

60

132

14.4

18

21.6

25.2

28.8

32.4

36

43.2

50.4

57.6

70

154

16.8

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

37.8

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

80

176

19.2

24

28.8

33.6

38.4

43.2

48

57.6

67.2

76.8

90

198

21.6

27

32.4

37.8

43.2

48.6

54

64.8

75.6

86.4

100

220

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

72

84

96
TABLE 3: Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (5 mg/mL)*** ***   500 mg rocuronium bromide injection in 100 mL solution
Patient Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

(kg)

(lbs)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

1

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.7

1.9

15

33

0.7

0.9

1.1

1.3

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.2

2.5

2.9

20

44

1

1.2

1.4

1.7

1.9

2.2

2.4

2.9

3.4

3.8

25

55

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.4

2.7

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

35

77

1.7

2.1

2.5

2.9

3.4

3.8

4.2

5

5.9

6.7

50

110

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

60

132

2.9

3.6

4.3

5

5.8

6.5

7.2

8.6

10.1

11.5

70

154

3.4

4.2

5

5.9

6.7

7.6

8.4

10.1

11.8

13.4

80

176

3.8

4.8

5.8

6.7

7.7

8.6

9.6

11.5

13.4

15.4

90

198

4.3

5.4

6.5

7.6

8.6

9.7

10.8

13

15.1

17.3

100

220

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

2.5 Dosage in Specific Populations

Pediatric Patients

The recommended initial intubation dose of rocuronium bromide injection is 0.6 mg/kg; however, a lower dose of 0.45 mg/kg may be used depending on anesthetic technique and the age of the patient.

For sevoflurane (induction) Rocuronium bromide doses of 0.45 mg/kg and 0.6 mg/kg in general produce excellent to good intubating conditions within 75 seconds. When halothane is used, a 0.6 mg/kg dose of rocuronium bromide injection resulted in excellent to good intubating conditions within 60 seconds.

The time to maximum block for an intubating dose was shortest in infants (28 days up to 3 months) and longest in neonates (birth to less than 28 days). The duration of clinical relaxation following an intubating dose is shortest in children (greater than 2 years up to 11 years) and longest in infants.

When sevoflurane is used for induction and isoflurane/nitrous oxide for maintenance of general anesthesia, maintenance dosing of rocuronium bromide injection can be administered as bolus doses of 0.15 mg/kg at reappearance of T3 in all pediatric age groups. Maintenance dosing can also be administered at the reappearance of T2 at a rate of 7 to 10 mcg/kg/min, with the lowest dose requirement for neonates (birth to less than 28 days) and the highest dose requirement for children (greater than 2 years up to 11 years).

When halothane is used for general anesthesia, patients ranging from 3 months old through adolescence can be administered rocuronium bromide injection maintenance doses of 0.075 to 0.125 mg/kg upon return of T1 to 0.25% to provide clinical relaxation for 7 to 10 minutes. Alternatively, a continuous infusion of rocuronium bromide injection initiated at a rate of 12 mcg/kg/min upon return of T1 to 10% (one twitch present in train-of-four) may also be used to maintain neuromuscular blockade in pediatric patients.

Additional information for administration to pediatric patients of all age groups is presented elsewhere in the label [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

The infusion of rocuronium bromide injection must be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as monitored with the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator. Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of rocuronium bromide infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following similar total exposure to single bolus doses [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Rocuronium bromide injection is not recommended for rapid sequence intubation in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Patients

Geriatric patients (65 years or older) exhibited a slightly prolonged median (range) clinical duration of 46 (22 to 73), 62 (49 to 75), and 94 (64 to 138) minutes under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia following doses of 0.6, 0.9, and 1.2 mg/kg, respectively. No differences in duration of neuromuscular blockade following maintenance doses of rocuronium bromide injection were observed between these subjects and younger subjects, and other reported clinical experience has not identified differences in response between elderly and younger patients, but greater sensitivity of some older individuals cannot be ruled out [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2, 12.3)].

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

No differences from patients with normal hepatic and kidney function were observed for onset time at a dose of 0.6 mg/kg rocuronium bromide injection. When compared to patients with normal renal and hepatic function, the mean clinical duration is similar in patients with end-stage renal disease undergoing renal transplant, and is about 1.5 times longer in patients with hepatic disease. Patients with renal failure may have a greater variation in duration of effect [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Obese Patients

In obese patients, the initial dose of rocuronium bromide injection 0.6 mg/kg should be based upon the patient’s actual body weight [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

An analysis across all US controlled clinical studies indicates that the pharmacodynamics of rocuronium bromide injection are not different between obese and non-obese patients when dosed based upon their actual body weight.

Patients with Reduced Plasma Cholinesterase Activity

Rocuronium metabolism does not depend on plasma cholinesterase so dosing adjustments are not needed in patients with reduced plasma cholinesterase activity.

Patients with Prolonged Circulation Time

Because higher doses of rocuronium bromide injection produce a longer duration of action, the initial dosage should usually not be increased in these patients to reduce onset time; instead, in these situations, when feasible, more time should be allowed for the drug to achieve onset of effect [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

Patients with Drugs or Conditions Causing Potentiation of Neuromuscular Block

The neuromuscular blocking action of rocuronium bromide injection is potentiated by isoflurane and enflurane anesthesia. Potentiation is minimal when administration of the recommended dose of rocuronium bromide injection occurs prior to the administration of these potent inhalation agents. The median clinical duration of a dose of 0.57 to 0.85 mg/kg was 34, 38, and 42 minutes under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen, enflurane and isoflurane maintenance anesthesia, respectively. During 1 to 2 hours of infusion, the infusion rate of rocuronium bromide injection required to maintain about 95% block was decreased by as much as 40% under enflurane and isoflurane anesthesia [see Drug Interactions (7.3)].

2.6 Preparation for Administration of Rocuronium Bromide Injection

Diluent Compatibility

Rocuronium bromide injection is compatible in solution with:

       0.9% NaCl solution                       sterile water for injection       5% glucose in water                      lactated Ringers       5% glucose in saline

Rocuronium bromide injection is compatible in the above solutions at concentrations up to 5 mg/mL for 24 hours at room temperature in plastic bags, glass bottles, and plastic syringe pumps.

Drug Admixture Incompatibility

Rocuronium bromide injection is physically incompatible when mixed with the following drugs:

       amphotericin                                 hydrocortisone sodium succinate       amoxicillin                                   insulin       azathioprine                                  intralipid       cefazolin                                       ketorolac       cloxacillin                                     lorazepam       dexamethasone                             methohexital       diazepam                                      methylprednisolone       erythromycin                                thiopental       famotidine                                    trimethoprim       furosemide                                    vancomycin

If rocuronium bromide injection is administered via the same infusion line that is also used for other drugs, it is important that this infusion line is adequately flushed between administration of rocuronium bromide injection and drugs for which incompatibility with rocuronium bromide injection has been demonstrated or for which compatibility with rocuronium bromide injection has not been established.

Infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of mixing. Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Rocuronium bromide injection should not be mixed with alkaline solutions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Visual Inspection

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and clarity prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use solution if particulate matter is present.
Paricalcitol

Paricalcitol

For intravenous use through hemodialysis vascular access port only.

The recommended starting dose of Paricalcitol Injection is 0.04 mcg/kg to 0.1 mcg/kg (2.8 – 7 mcg) administered through a hemodialysis vascular access port as a bolus dose at any time during dialysis. Dosing should not occur more frequently than every other day. The drug product should not be injected directly into a vein. Dosage should be individualized. If a satisfactory parathyroid hormone (PTH) lowering response is not observed using the recommended starting dose, the dose may be increased by 2 to 4 mcg every 2 to 4 weeks based on PTH levels (refer to Table 1).
Table 1: Suggested Dosage Adjustment
PTH Level at Follow-up Visit

Dosage Adjustment

Above target and PTH increased

Increase

Above target and PTH decreased by less than 30%

Increase

Above target and PTH decreased by 30 to 60%

No Change

Above target and PTH decreased by more than 60%

Decrease

At target and PTH stable

No Change

When initiating Paricalcitol Injection or adjusting Paricalcitol Injection dose, measure serum calcium and phosphorus frequently (e.g., twice weekly) and PTH every 2 to 4 weeks. Once a maintenance dose has been established, serum calcium and phosphorus should be measured at least monthly and plasma PTH every 3 months.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum sodium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, transfer the desired amount to other intravenous fluids to provide the appropriate number of milliequivalents (mEq) of sodium acetate.

Sodium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) in the Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with manual, gravity flow operations and automated compounding devices for preparing intravenous nutritional admixtures. Admixtures must be stored under refrigeration and used within 24 hours after compounding.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Directions for Dispensing From Pharmacy Bulk Package

The Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in the Pharmacy Admixtures Service only. For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose ¾ inch long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. The vials should be suspended as a unit in the laminar flow hood.

A single entry through the vial closure should be made with a sterile dispensing set or transfer device. Transfer individual doses to appropriate intravenous infusion solutions. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage and multiple entries will increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination.

The above process should be carried out under a laminar flow hood using aseptic technique. Discard any unused portion within 4 hours after initial closure entry.
Fentanyl Citrate

Fentanyl Citrate

50 mcg = 0.05 mg = 1 mL

Dosage should be individualized. Some of the factors to be considered in determining the dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, type of anesthesia to be used and the surgical procedure involved. Dosage should be reduced in elderly or debilitated patients (see PRECAUTIONS).

Vital signs should be monitored routinely.
I. Premedication — Premedication (to be appropriately modified in the elderly, debilitated, and those who have received other depressant drugs)—50 mcg to 100 mcg (0.05 mg to 0.1 mg) (1 mL to 2 mL) may be administered intramuscularly 30 to 60 minutes prior to surgery. II. Adjunct to General Anesthesia — See Dosage Range Chart III. Adjunct to Regional Anesthesia — 50 mcg to 100 mcg (0.05 mg to 0.1 mg) (1 mL to 2 mL) may be administered intramuscularly or slowly intravenously, over one to two minutes, when additional analgesia is required. IV. Postoperatively (recovery room) — 50 mcg to 100 mcg (0.05 mg to 0.1 mg) (1 mL to 2 mL) may be administered intramuscularly for the control of pain, tachypnea, and emergence delirium. The dose may be repeated in one to two hours as needed.
Usage in Children: For induction and maintenance in children 2 to 12 years of age, a reduced dose as low as 2 mcg/kg to 3 mcg/kg is recommended.
DOSAGE RANGE CHART
TOTAL DOSAGE (expressed as fentanyl base)

Low Dose -

Moderate Dose -

High Dose -

2 mcg/kg (0.002 mg/kg) (0.04 mL/kg) Fentanyl, in small doses is most useful for minor, but painful, surgical procedures. In addition to the analgesia during surgery, Fentanyl may also provide some pain relief in the immediate postoperative period.

2-20 mcg/kg (0.002‑0.02 mg/kg) (0.04‑0.4 mL/kg) Where surgery becomes more major, a larger dose is required. With this dose, in addition to adequate analgesia, one would expect to see some abolition of the stress response. However, respiratory depression will be such that artificial ventilation during anesthesia is necessary and careful observation of ventilation postoperatively is essential.

20-50 mcg/kg (0.02-0.05 mg/kg) (0.4‑1 mL/kg) During open heart surgery and certain more complicated neurosurgical and orthopedic procedures where surgery is more prolonged, and in the opinion of the anesthesiologist, the stress response to surgery would be detrimental to the well being of the patient, dosages of 20‑50 mcg/kg (0.02-0.05 mg/kg) (0.4‑1 mL/kg) of fentanyl with nitrous oxide/oxygen have been shown to attenuate the stress response as defined by increased levels of circulating growth hormone, catecholamine, ADH, and prolactin. When dosages in this range have been used during surgery, postoperative ventilation and observation are essential due to extended postoperative respiratory depression. The main objective of this technique would be to produce “stress-free” anesthesia.
DOSAGE RANGE CHART
MAINTENANCE DOSAGE (expressed as fentanyl base)

Low Dose -

Moderate Dose -

High Dose -

2 mcg/kg (0.002 mg/kg) (0.04 mL/kg) Additional dosages of fentanyl are infrequently needed in these minor procedures.

2-20 mcg/kg (0.002-0.02 mg/kg) (0.04‑0.4 mL/kg) 25-100 mcg (0.025 to 0.1 mg) (0.5 to 2 mL) may be administered intravenously or intramuscularly when movement and/or changes in vital signs indicate surgical stress or lightening of analgesia.

20-50 mcg/kg (0.02-0.05 mg/kg) (0.4‑1 mL/kg) Maintenance dosage (ranging from 25 mcg (0.025 mg) (0.5 mL) to one half the initial loading dose) will be dictated by the changes in vital signs which indicate stress and lightening of analgesia. However, the additional dosage selected must be individualized especially if the anticipated remaining operative time is short.

As a General Anesthetic:

When attenuation of the responses to surgical stress is especially important, doses of 50 mcg/kg to 100 mcg/kg (0.05 mg/kg to 0.1 mg/kg) (1 mL/kg to 2 mL/kg) may be administered with oxygen and a muscle relaxant. This technique has been reported to provide anesthesia without the use of additional anesthetic agents. In certain cases, doses up to 150 mcg/kg (0.15 mg/kg) (3 mL/kg) may be necessary to produce this anesthetic effect. It has been used for open heart surgery and certain other major surgical procedures in patients for whom protection of the myocardium from excess oxygen demand is particularly indicated, and for certain complicated neurological and orthopedic procedures.

As noted above, it is essential that qualified personnel and adequate facilities be available for the management of respiratory depression.

See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS for use of fentanyl with other CNS depressants, and in patients with altered response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Articaine Hydrochloride...

Articaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

2.1 General Dosing Information

Table 1 (below) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults, administered by submucosal infiltration or nerve block.
Table 1: Recommended Dosages
Procedure

Articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection, USP

Volume (mL)

Total dose of articaine HCl (mg)

Infiltration

0.5 – 2.5

20 – 100

Nerve block

0.5 – 3.4

20 – 136

Oral surgery

1.0 – 5.1

40 – 204

The recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia, degree of muscular relaxation, and condition of the patient. In all cases, the smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given.

The onset of anesthesia and the duration of anesthesia are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Caution should be exercised when employing large volumes because the incidence of side effects may be dose-related.

For most routine dental procedures, articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection containing epinephrine 1:200,000 is preferred. However, when more pronounced hemostasis or improved visualization of the surgical field are required, Articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection containing epinephrine 1:100,000 may be used.

2.2 Maximum Recommended Dosages
• Adults: For normal healthy adults, the maximum dose of articaine HCl administered by submucosal infiltration or nerve block should not exceed 7 mg/kg (0.175 mL/kg). • Pediatric Patients Ages 4 to 16 Years: The quantity of articaine HCl in children ages 4 to 16 years of age to be injected should be determined by the age and weight of the child and the magnitude of the operation. The maximum dose of articaine HCl should not exceed 7 mg/kg (0.175 mL/kg) [ see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. • Safety and effectiveness of artcaine HCl in pediatric patients below the age of 4 years have not been established.
2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

Dose reduction may be required in debilitated patients, acutely ill patients, elderly patients, and pediatric patients commensurate with their age and physical condition. No studies have been performed in patients with renal or liver dysfunction. Caution should be used in patients with severe liver disease [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2), Use in Specific Populations (8.4, 8.5, and 8.6)].

2.1 General Dosing Information

Table 1 (below) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults, administered by submucosal infiltration or nerve block.
Table 1: Recommended Dosages
Procedure

Articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection, USP

Volume (mL)

Total dose of articaine HCl (mg)

Infiltration

0.5 – 2.5

20 – 100

Nerve block

0.5 – 3.4

20 – 136

Oral surgery

1.0 – 5.1

40 – 204

The recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia, degree of muscular relaxation, and condition of the patient. In all cases, the smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given.

The onset of anesthesia and the duration of anesthesia are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Caution should be exercised when employing large volumes because the incidence of side effects may be dose-related.

For most routine dental procedures, articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection containing epinephrine 1:200,000 is preferred. However, when more pronounced hemostasis or improved visualization of the surgical field are required, Articaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection containing epinephrine 1:100,000 may be used.

2.2 Maximum Recommended Dosages
• Adults: For normal healthy adults, the maximum dose of articaine HCl administered by submucosal infiltration or nerve block should not exceed 7 mg/kg (0.175 mL/kg). • Pediatric Patients Ages 4 to 16 Years: The quantity of articaine HCl in children ages 4 to 16 years of age to be injected should be determined by the age and weight of the child and the magnitude of the operation. The maximum dose of articaine HCl should not exceed 7 mg/kg (0.175 mL/kg) [ see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. • Safety and effectiveness of artcaine HCl in pediatric patients below the age of 4 years have not been established.
2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

Dose reduction may be required in debilitated patients, acutely ill patients, elderly patients, and pediatric patients commensurate with their age and physical condition. No studies have been performed in patients with renal or liver dysfunction. Caution should be used in patients with severe liver disease [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2), Use in Specific Populations (8.4, 8.5, and 8.6)].
Dextrose

Dextrose

For peripheral vein administration:

Injection of the solution should be made slowly.

The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight/hour. About 95% of the dextrose is retained when infused at a rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr.

In insulin-induced hypoglycemia, intravenous injection of 10 to 25 grams of dextrose (20 to 50 mL of 50% dextrose) is usually adequate. Repeated doses and supportive treatment may be required in severe cases. A specimen for blood glucose determination should be taken before injecting the dextrose. In such emergencies, dextrose should be administered promptly without awaiting pretreatment test results.

For central venous administration:

For total parenteral nutrition 50% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) after admixture with amino acid solutions via an indwelling catheter with the tip positioned in a large central vein, preferably the superior vena cava, or (b) after dilution with sterile water for injection. Dosage should be adjusted to meet individual patient requirements.

Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyte concentrations and acid-base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants such evaluation.

The maximum rate of dextrose administration which does not result in glycosuria is the same as cited above.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Fentanyl Citrate

Fentanyl Citrate

50 mcg = 0.05 mg = 1 mL

Dosage should be individualized. Some of the factors to be considered in determining the dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, type of anesthesia to be used and the surgical procedure involved. Dosage should be reduced in elderly or debilitated patients (see PRECAUTIONS).

Vital signs should be monitored routinely.
I. Premedication − Premedication (to be appropriately modified in the elderly, debilitated and those who have received other depressant drugs) − 50 to 100 mcg (0.05 to 0.1 mg) (1 to 2 mL) may be administered intramuscularly 30 to 60 minutes prior to surgery. II. Adjunct to General Anesthesia − See Dosage Range Chart. III. Adjunct to Regional Anesthesia − 50 to 100 mcg (0.05 to 0.1 mg) (1 to 2 mL) may be administered intramuscularly or slowly intravenously, over one to two minutes, when additional analgesia is required. IV. Postoperatively (recovery room) − 50 to 100 mcg (0.05 to 0.1 mg) (1 to 2 mL) may be administered intramuscularly for the control of pain, tachypnea and emergence delirium. The dose may be repeated in one to two hours as needed.
Usage in Children: For induction and maintenance in children 2 to 12 years of age, a reduced dose as low as 2 to 3 mcg/kg is recommended.

As a General Anesthetic: When attenuation of the responses to surgical stress is especially important, doses of 50 to 100 mcg/kg (0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg) (1 to 2 mL/kg) may be administered with oxygen and a muscle relaxant. This technique has been reported to provide anesthesia without the use of additional anesthetic agents. In certain cases, doses up to 150 mcg/kg (0.15 mg/kg) (3 mL/kg) may be necessary to produce this anesthetic effect. It has been used for open heart surgery and certain other major surgical procedures in patients for whom protection of the myocardium from excess oxygen demand is particularly indicated, and for certain complicated neurological and orthopedic procedures.

As noted above, it is essential that qualified personnel and adequate facilities be available for the management of respiratory depression.

See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS for use of fentanyl with other CNS depressants, and in patients with altered response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless solution is clear and container undamaged. Discard unused portion.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.

DOSAGE RANGE CHART

TOTAL DOSAGE (expressed as fentanyl base)

Low Dose −

Moderate Dose −

High Dose −

2 mcg/kg (0.002 mg/kg) (0.04 mL/kg). Fentanyl in small doses is most useful for minor, but painful, surgical procedures. In addition to the analgesia during surgery, fentanyl may also provide some pain relief in the immediate postoperative period.

2–20 mcg/kg (0.002–0.02 mg/kg) (0.04–0.4 mL/kg).Where surgery becomes more major, a larger dose is required.With this dose, in addition to adequate analgesia, one would expect to see some abolition of the stress response. However, respiratory depression will be such that artificial ventilation during anesthesia is necessary and careful observation of ventilation postoperatively is essential.

20–50 mcg/kg (0.02‑0.05 mg/kg) (0.4–1 mL/kg). During open heart surgery and certain more complicated neurosurgical and orthopedic procedures where surgery is more prolonged, and in the opinion of the anesthesiologist, the stress response to surgery would be detrimental to the well being of the patient, dosages of 20‑50 mcg/kg (0.02–0.05 mg/kg) (0.4‑1 mL/kg) of fentanyl with nitrous oxide/oxygen have been shown to attenuate the stress response as defined by increased levels of circulating growth hormone, catecholamine, ADH and prolactin. When dosages in this range have been used during surgery, postoperative ventilation and observation are essential due to extended postoperative respiratory depression. The main objective of this technique would be to produce “stress free” anesthesia.

DOSAGE RANGE CHART

MAINTENANCE DOSE (expressed as fentanyl base)

Low Dose −

Moderate Dose −

High Dose −

2 mcg/kg (0.002 mg/kg) (0.04 mL/kg). Additional dosages of fentanyl are infrequently needed in these minor procedures.

2–20 mcg/kg (0.002–0.02 mg/kg) (0.04–0.4 mL/kg). 25 to 100 mcg (0.025 to 0.1 mg) (0.5 to 2 mL) may be administered intravenously or intramuscularly when movement and/or changes in vital signs indicate surgical stress or lightening of analgesia.

20–50 mcg/kg (0.02‑0.05 mg/kg) (0.4–1 mL/kg). Maintenance dosage (ranging from 25 mcg (0.025 mg) (0.5 mL) to one half the initial loading dose) will be dictated by the changes in vital signs which indicate stress and lightening of analgesia. However, the additional dosage selected must be individualized especially if the anticipated remaining operative time is short.
Diprolene

Diprolene

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by either the IV or the IM routes.

For IV administration, the dose can be given by slow intravenous injection over at least 10 to 15 minutes or can also be delivered in greater dilutions with 50 to 100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15 to 30 minutes.

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by deep intramuscular injection (see DIRECTIONS FOR USE-Preparation for Intramuscular Injection section).

The recommended adult dosage of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older: The recommended daily dose of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. The safety and efficacy of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection administered via intramuscular injection in pediatric patients have not been established. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous ampicillin and sulbactam for injection. (see CLINICAL STUDIES section).

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of ampicillin and sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:

Table 5Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patientswith Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2)

Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours)

Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage

≥30

1

1.5 g to 3 g q 6h - q 8h

15 to 29

5

1.5 g to 3 g q 12h

5 to 14

9

1.5 g to h3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males weight (kg) × (140 – age) 72 × serum creatinine

Females 0.85 × above value
Novocain

Novocain

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of NOVOCAIN should be reduced for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional doses should be used when feasible.

For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

For infiltration anesthesia, 0.25% or 0.5% solution; 350 mg to 600 mg is generally considered to be a single safe total dose. To prepare 60 mL of a 0.5% solution (5 mg/mL), dilute 30 mL of the 1% solution with 30 mL sodium chloride injection 0.9%. To prepare 60 mL of a 0.25% solution (2.5 mg/mL), dilute 15 mL of the 1% solution with 45 mL sodium chloride injection 0.9%. An anesthetic solution of 0.5 mL to 1 mL of epinephrine 1:1,000 per 100 mL may be added for vasoconstrictive effect (1:200,000 to 1:100,000). (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

For peripheral nerve block, 0.5% solution (up to 200 mL), 1% solution (up to 100 mL), or 2% solution (up to 50 mL). The use of the 2% solution should usually be limited to cases requiring a small volume of anesthetic solution (10 mL to 25 mL). An anesthetic solution of 0.5 mL to 1 mL of epinephrine 1:1,000 per 100 mL may be added for vasoconstrictive effect (1:200,000 to 1:100,000). (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

THE USUAL TOTAL DOSE DURING ONE TREATMENT SHOULD NOT EXCEED 1,000 MG.

This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use solutions if crystals, cloudiness, or discoloration is observed. Examine solution carefully before use. Reautoclaving increases likelihood of crystal formation. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.

Unused portions of solutions not containing preservatives should be discarded.

Pediatric Use:

In pediatric patients 15 mg/kg of a 0.5% solution for local infiltration is the maximum recommended dose.
Novocaine

Novocaine

As with all local anesthetics, the dose of NOVOCAIN varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, individual tolerance, and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dose needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGE FOR SPINAL ANESTHESIA Extent of Anesthesia NOVOCAIN
10% Solution
Total Dose
(mg)
Site of Injection
(lumbar interspace)
Volume of 10% Solution
(mL)
Volume of Dilution
(mL)
Perineum 0.5 0.5 50 4th Perineum and lower
extremities
1 1 100 3rd or 4th Up to costal margin 2 1 200 2nd, 3rd or 4th
The diluent may be sterile normal saline, sterile distilled water, spinal fluid; and for hyperbaric technique, sterile dextrose solution.

The usual rate of injection is 1 mL per 5 seconds. Full anesthesia and fixation usually occur in 5 minutes.

STERILIZATION

The drug in intact ampuls is sterile. The preferred method of destroying bacteria on the exterior of ampuls before opening is heat sterilization (autoclaving). Immersion in antiseptic solution is not recommended.

Autoclave at 15-pound pressure, at 121°C (250°F), for 15 minutes. The diluent dextrose may show some brown discoloration due to caramelization.

Protect solutions from light.
Tham

Tham

Tham Solution (tromethamine injection) is administered by slow intravenous infusion, by addition to pump-oxygenator ACD blood or other priming fluid or by injection into the ventricular cavity during cardiac arrest. For infusion by peripheral vein, a large needle should be used in the largest antecubital vein or an indwelling catheter placed in a large vein of an elevated limb to minimize chemical irritation of the alkaline solution during infusion. Catheters are recommended.

Dosage and rate of administration should be carefully supervised to avoid overtreatment (alkalosis). Pretreatment and subsequent determinations of blood values (e.g. pH, PCO2, PO2, glucose and electrolytes) and urinary output should be made as necessary to monitor dosage and progress of treatment. In general, dosage should be limited to an amount sufficient to increase blood pH to normal limits (7.35 to 7.45) and to correct acid-base derangements. The total quantity to be administered during the period of illness will depend upon the severity and progression of the acidosis. The possibility of some retention of tromethamine, especially in patients with impaired renal function, should be kept in mind.

The intravenous dosage of Tham Solution (tromethamine injection) may be estimated from the buffer base deficit of the extracellular fluid in mEq/liter determined by means of the Siggaard-Andersen nomogram. The following formula is intended as a general guide:

Tham Solution (mL of 0.3 M) Required =

Body Weight (kg) X

Base Deficit (mEq/liter) X 1.1*

Thus, a 70 kg patient with a buffer base deficit (“negative base excess”) of 5 mEq/liter would require 70 x 5 x 1.1 = 385 mL of Tham Solution containing 13.9 g (115 mEq) of tromethamine. The need for administration of additional Tham Solution is determined by serial determinations of the existing base deficit.

* Factor of 1.1 accounts for an approximate reduction of 10% in buffering capacity due to the presence of sufficient acetic acid to lower pH of the 0.3 M solution to approximately 8.6.

Correction of Metabolic Acidosis Associated with Cardiac Bypass Surgery: An adverse dose of approximately 9.0 mL/kg (324 mg/kg) has been used in clinical studies with Tham Solution (tromethamine injection). This is equivalent to a total dose of 630 mL (189 mEq) for 70 kg patient. A total single dose of 500 mL (150 mEq) is considered adequate for most adults. Larger single doses (up to 1000 mL) may be required in unusually severe cases.

It is recommended that individual doses should not exceed 500 mg/kg (227 mg/lb) over a period of not less than one hour. Thus, for a 70 kg (154 pound) patient the dose should not exceed a maximum of 35 g per hour (1078 mL of a 0.3 M solution). Repeated determinations of pH and other clinical observations should be used as a guide to the need for repeat doses.

Correction of Acidity of ACD Blood in Cardiac Bypass Surgery: The pH of stored blood ranges from 6.80 to 6.22 depending upon the duration of storage. The amount of Tham Solution used to correct this acidity ranges from 0.5 to 2.5 g (15 to 77 mL of a 0.3 M solution) added to each 500 mL of ACD blood used for priming the pump-oxygenator. Clinical experience indicates that 2 g (62 mL of a 0.3 M solution) added to 500 mL of ACD blood is usually adequate.

Correction of Metabolic Acidosis Associated with Cardiac Arrest: In the treatment of cardiac arrest, Tham Solution should be given at the same time that other standard resuscitative measures, including manual systole, are being applied. If the chest is open, Tham Solution is injected directly into the ventricular cavity. From 2 to 6 g (62 to 185 mL of a 0.3 M solution) should be injected immediately. Do not inject into the cardiac muscle.

If the chest is not open, from 3.6 to 10.8 g (111 to 333 mL of a 0.3 M solution) should be injected immediately into a larger peripheral vein. Additional amounts may be required to control acidosis persisting after cardiac arrest is reversed.

Correction of Metabolic Acidosis Associated with RDS in Neonates and Infants: The initial dose of Tham Solution should be based on initial pH and birthweight amounting to approximately 1 mL per kg for each pH unit below 7.4. Further doses have been given according to changes in PaO2, pH and PCO2.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

When used for local anesthesia in dental procedures, the dosage of lidocaine HCl and epinephrine injection depends on the physical status of the patient, the area of the oral cavity to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the oral tissues, and the technique of anesthesia. The least volume of solution that results in effective local anesthesia should be administered; time should be allowed between injections to observe the patient for manifestations of an adverse reaction. For specific techniques and procedures of a local anesthesia in the oral cavity, refer to standard textbooks.

For most routine dental procedures, 2% lidocaine HCl injection with epinephrine 1:100,000 is preferred. However, when greater depth and a more pronounced hemostasis are required, a 1:50,000 epinephrine concentration should be used.

Dosage requirements should be determined on an individual basis. In oral infiltration and/or mandibular block, initial dosages of 1 to 5 mL (½ to 2½ cartridges) of 2% lidocaine HCl injection with epinephrine 1:50,000 or 1:100,000 are usually effective.

In children under 10 years of age it is rarely necessary to administer more than one-half cartridge (0.9 to 1 mL or 18 to 20 mg) of lidocaine HCl and epinephrine injection per procedure to achieve local anesthesia for a procedure involving a single tooth. In maxillary infiltration, this amount will often suffice to the treatment of two or even three teeth. In the mandibular block, however, satisfactory anesthesia achieved with this amount of drug will allow treatment of the teeth in an entire quadrant.

Aspiration is recommended since it reduces the possibility of intravascular injection, thereby keeping the incidence of side effects and anesthetic failures to a minimum.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. Any unused portion of a cartridge of Lidocaine Dental Injection should be discarded.

Maximum Recommended Dosages

Adult: For normal healthy adults, the individual dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should be kept below 500 mg and in any case should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.2 mg/lb) of body weight. When used without epinephrine, the amount of lidocaine HCl administered should be kept below 300 mg and in any case should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight.

Pediatric: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children of less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark’s rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs. the dose of lidocaine should not exceed 75 to 100 mg when calculated according to Clark’s rule. In any case, the maximum dose of lidocaine HCl injection with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.2 mg/lb) of body weight.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of lidocaine injection for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.

The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia, and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of lidocaine hydrochloride injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.

Epidural Anesthesia

For epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage form of lidocaine hydrochloride injection is recommended:

2%, 10 mL single-dose vial

Although this solution is intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, it may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block, provided it is employed as a single-dose unit. This solution contains no bacteriostatic agent.

In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).

Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2-3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of lidocaine injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered.

In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.

MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES: Note: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine.

Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for nonobstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia.

The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and nonobstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS.)

Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs, the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 mg to 100 mg (1.5 mg/lb to 2 mg/lb).

In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored, cloudy and/or contain particulate matter should not be used.

TABLE 1. Recommended Dosages

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection

(without epinephrine)

PROCEDURE

Conc (%)

Vol (mL)

Total Dose (mg)

Infiltration

Percutaneous

0.5 or 1

1-60

5-300

Intravenous regional

0.5

10-60

50-300

Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g.

Brachial

1.5

15-20

225-300

Dental

2

1-5

20-100

Intercostal

1

3

30

Paravertebral

1

3-5

30-50

Pudendal (each side)

1

10

100

Paracervical

Obstetrical analgesia (each side)

1

10

100

Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g.

Cervical (stellate ganglion)

1

5

50

Lumbar

1

5-10

50-100

Central Neural Blocks,

Epidural*

Thoracic

1

20-30

200-300

Lumbar

Analgesia

1

25-30

250-300

Anesthesia

1.5

15-20

225-300

2

10-15

200-300

Caudal

Obstetrical analgesia

1

20-30

200-300

Surgical anesthesia

1.5

15-20

225-300

* Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome).

THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.

STERILIZATION, STORAGE AND TECHNICAL PROCEDURES

Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema.
Foscarnet Sodium

Foscarnet Sodium

CAUTION—DO NOT ADMINISTER FOSCARNET SODIUM BY RAPID OR BOLUS INTRAVENOUS INJECTION. THE TOXICITY OF FOSCARNET SODIUM MAY BE INCREASED AS A RESULT OF EXCESSIVE PLASMA LEVELS. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID UNINTENTIONAL OVERDOSE BY CAREFULLY CONTROLLING THE RATE OF INFUSION. THEREFORE, AN INFUSION PUMP MUST BE USED. IN SPITE OF THE USE OF AN INFUSION PUMP, OVERDOSES HAVE OCCURRED.
Buprenorphine Hydrochlo...

Buprenorphine Hydrochloride

Adults: The usual dosage for persons 13 years of age and over is 1 mL buprenorphine hydrochloride injection (0.3 mg buprenorphine) given by deep intramuscular or slow (over at least 2 minutes) intravenous injection at up to 6-hour intervals, as needed. Repeat once (up to 0.3 mg) if required, 30 to 60 minutes after initial dosage, giving consideration to previous dose pharmacokinetics, and thereafter only as needed. In high-risk patients (e.g., elderly, debilitated, presence of respiratory disease, etc.) and/or in patients where other CNS depressants are present, such as in the immediate postoperative period, the dose should be reduced by approximately one-half. Extra caution should be exercised with the intravenous route of administration, particularly with the initial dose.

Occasionally, it may be necessary to administer single doses of up to 0.6 mg to adults depending on the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. This dose should only be given IM and only to adult patients who are not in a high risk category (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS). At this time, there are insufficient data to recommend single doses greater than 0.6 mg for long-term use.

Children: Buprenorphine hydrochloride has been used in children 2 to 12 years of age at doses between 2 to 6 micrograms/kg of body weight given every 4 to 6 hours. There is insufficient experience to recommend a dose in infants below the age of two years, single doses greater than 6 micrograms/kg of body weight, or the use of a repeat or second dose at 30 to 60 minutes (such as is used in adults). Since there is some evidence that not all children clear buprenorphine faster than adults, fixed interval or "round-the-clock" dosing should not be undertaken until the proper inter-dose interval has been established by clinical observation of the child. Physicians should recognize that, as with adults, some pediatric patients may not need to be remedicated for 6 to 8 hours.

Safety and Handling: Buprenorphine hydrochloride injection is supplied in sealed cartridges and poses no known environmental risk to health care providers. Accidental dermal exposure should be treated by removal of any contaminated clothing and rinsing the affected area with water.

Buprenorphine is a potent narcotic, and like all drugs of this class has been associated with abuse and dependence among health care providers. To control the risk of diversion, it is recommended that measures appropriate to the health care setting be taken to provide rigid accounting, control of wastage, and restriction of access.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) in the Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with manual, gravity flow operations and automated compounding devices for preparing sterile nutrient admixtures.

Potassium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. ECG and serum potassium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of milliequivalents (mEq) of potassium (K+) with an equal number of milliequivalents of acetate (CH3COO-).

Maximum infusion rate: The infusion rate should not exceed 1 mEq/kg/hr.

Normal daily requirements:

                  Newborn:         2-6 mEq/kg/24 hr.

                  Children:         2-3 mEq/kg/24 hr.

                  Adult:     40 – 80 mEq/24 hr.

Intraosseous infusion can be an alternate route for drug administration when intravenous access is not readily available.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Directions for Dispensing From Pharmacy Bulk Package

The Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in the Pharmacy Admixtures Service only. For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose 3/4 inch long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. The vials should be suspended as a unit in the laminar flow hood.

A single entry through the vial closure should be made with a sterile dispensing set or transfer device. Transfer individual doses to appropriate intravenous infusion solutions. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage and multiple entries will increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination.

The above process should be carried out under a laminar flow hood using aseptic technique. Discard any unused portion within 4 hours after initial closure entry.
Dextrose

Dextrose

When possible, glucose concentrations of greater than 12% should be administered by central vein to reduce the risk for phlebitis and thrombosis. 25% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered only by slow intravenous injection.

The dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution, particularly in neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/ hypoglycemia. In the neonate, an injection of 250 to 500 mg (1 to 2 mL)/kg/dose (5 to 10 mL of 25% dextrose in a 5 kg infant) is recommended to control acute symptomatic hypoglycemia (tremors, convulsions, etc.).

Larger or repeated single doses (up to 10 or 12 mL of 25% dextrose) may be required in severe cases or older infants. A specimen for blood glucose determination should be taken before injecting the dextrose. In such emergencies, dextrose should be administered promptly without awaiting pretreatment test results.

Subsequent continuous intravenous infusion of 10% dextrose injection may be needed to stabilize blood glucose levels. Further treatment should be guided by evaluation of the underlying disorder.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Ringers

Ringers

The dose is dependent upon the capacity or surface area of the structure to be irrigated and the nature of the procedure. When used as a vehicle for other drugs, the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Normosol-r

Normosol-r

Normosol-R pH 7.4 is administered by intravenous infusion. It may also be administered subcutaneously. The amount to be infused is based on replacement of losses of extracellular fluid volume in the individual patient. Up to three times the volume of estimated blood loss during and after surgery can be given to correct circulatory volume when there is only a moderate loss of blood.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

(Use aseptic technique)

Remove blue cap from BLU-MED™ sterile medication additive port at bottom of container.

With a needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

The additive port may be protected by an appropriate cover.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique) NOTE: See appropriate I.V. administration set Instructions for Use.

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cap from sterile administration set port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated.

Suspend container.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open clamp. Eliminate air from remainder of set.

Attach set to patient access device.

Begin infusion.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Normosol-r

Normosol-r

Normosol-R pH 7.4 is administered by intravenous infusion. It may also be administered subcutaneously. The amount to be infused is based on replacement of losses of extracellular fluid volume in the individual patient. Up to three times the volume of estimated blood loss during and after surgery can be given to correct circulatory volume when there is only a moderate loss of blood.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

To Administer

Attach administration set per manufacturer’s instructions.

Regulate rate of administration per institutional policy.

WARNING: DO NOT USE FLEXIBLE CONTAINER IN SERIES CONNECTIONS.
Physiosol

Physiosol

The dose is dependent upon the capacity or surface area of the structure to be irrigated and the nature of the procedure. When used as a vehicle for other drugs, the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. See PRECAUTIONS.
Calcium Chloride

Calcium Chloride

10% Calcium Chloride Injection, USP is administered only by slow intravenous injection (not to exceed 1 mL/min), preferably in a central or deep vein.

The usual precautions for intravenous therapy should be observed. If time permits, the solution should be warmed to body temperature. The injection should be halted if the patient complains of any discomfort; it may be resumed when symptoms disappear. Following injection, the patient should remain recumbent for a short time.

The usual adult dosage in hypocalcemic disorders ranges from 200 mg to 1 g (2 − 10 mL) at intervals of 1 to 3 days depending on the response of the patient and/or results of serum ionized calcium determinations. Repeated injections may be required because of rapid excretion of calcium.

The pediatric dosage in hypocalcemic disorders ranges from 2.7 to 5.0 mg/kg hydrated calcium chloride (or 0.136 to 0.252 mEq elemental calcium per kg, or 0.027 to 0.05 mL of 10% Calcium Chloride Injection per kg). No data from clinical trials is available about repeated dosages, though textbook references recommend repeat dosages q 4 to 6 hours.

Caution: 10% Calcium Chloride Injection consists of 1 gram of calcium chloride in a 10 mL syringe, or 100 mg/mL. This concentration represents 27 mg or 1.4 mEq of elemental calcium per mL. Thus, one 10 mL syringe provides 270 mg of elemental calcium. The dosage recommendation in various references is given either as amount of calcium chloride or amount of elemental calcium, and often it is not specified. Ionized calcium concentrations should be measured, to assist in dosage adjustment.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Liposyn Iii

Liposyn Iii

Liposyn III (intravenous fat emulsion) should be administered as part of an intravenous total nutrition program via peripheral vein or central venous catheter.

Adult Patients

Liposyn III can provide up to 60% of daily calories at a dose not to exceed 3 g/kg of body weight per day. The other 40% should be provided by carbohydrate and amino acids.

For the prevention of essential fatty acid deficiency, the recommended daily requirement is approximately 4% of the caloric intake as linoleate. In most adult patients, this can be supplied as 500 mL of Liposyn III 10% or 250 mL of Liposyn III 20% administered three times weekly.

The initial infusion rate for the first 15 minutes should be 1.0 mL/minute for Liposyn III 10% and 0.5 mL/minute for Liposyn III 20%. If no adverse effects are observed during this initial infusion, the rate can be increased to allow no more than 500 mL of Liposyn III 10% or 250 mL of Liposyn III 20% to be given over a period of four to six hours.

Pediatric Patients

Liposyn III can provide up to 60% of daily calories at a dose not to exceed 4 g/kg of body weight per day. The other 40% should be provided by carbohydrate and amino acids.

For the prevention of essential fatty acid deficiency, the recommended daily requirement is approximately 4% of the caloric intake as linoleate. The daily dosage of Liposyn III ranges from 7.5 mL to 15 mL per kilogram for the 10% emulsion and 3.8 mL to 7.5 mL per kilogram for the 20% emulsion, depending upon the size and maturity of the patient.

The infusion should be started at a rate of 0.1 mL/minute for the first 15 minutes. If no adverse effects are observed during this initial infusion, the rate can be increased to allow no more than 100 mL of Liposyn III 10% or 50 mL of Liposyn III 20% per hour.

Administration

See CONTRAINDICATIONS regarding mixing this emulsion with other I.V. fluids or additives.

Liposyn III can be infused into the same central or peripheral vein as the carbohydrate/amino acid solutions by means of a short Y-connector near the infusion site. This allows for mixing of the solutions immediately before entering the vein or for alternation of each solution. Flow rates of each solution should be controlled separately by infusion pumps, if these are used. Fat emulsion may also be infused through a separate peripheral site. If desired, heparin may be added to Liposyn III at a concentration of 1 to 2 units per mL prior to administration. Conventional administration sets contain polyvinyl chloride (PVC) components that have DEHP (diethylhexyl phthalate) as a plasticizer. Fat-containing fluids such as Liposyn extract DEHP from this PVC component, and it may be advisable to consider infusion of Liposyn III through a non-DEHP administration set. Filters should not be used for administration of the emulsion. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Aminosyn Rf

Aminosyn Rf

Dosage

Fat emulsion coadministration should be considered when prolonged (more than 5 days) parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (EFAD). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of EFAD in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Adults: The objective of nutritional management of renal decompensation is to provide sufficient amino acid and caloric support for protein synthesis without exceeding the renal capacity to excrete metabolic wastes.

A dosage of 2.4 to 4.7 grams of nitrogen per day (from essential amino acids) with adequate calories will maintain nitrogen equilibrium in patients with uremia. If more nitrogen and calories are required in severely stressed patients in acute renal failure who cannot eat, higher dosages may be administered provided great care is taken to avoid exceeding limits of fluid intake or glucose tolerance.

In general, dosage should be guided by fluid, glucose and nitrogen tolerances, as well as the metabolic and clinical response. The rate of rise in BUN generally diminishes with infusion of essential amino acids. However, excessive intake of protein or increased protein catabolism may alter this response.

The usual daily dose ranges from 300 to 600 mL of Aminosyn-RF 5.2%, Sulfite-Free, (an amino acid injection — renal formula) equivalent to 2.4 to 4.7 grams of nitrogen in 15.7 to 31 grams of essential amino acids. Adequate calories should be administered simultaneously. Each 500 mL of Aminosyn-RF 5.2% mixed under sterile conditions with 832 mL of Dextrose 70% will provide a solution of 1.95% of Aminosyn-RF 5.2% in 44% dextrose. This mixture provides a calorie-to-nitrogen ratio of 504:1.

Electrolyte supplementation may be required.

Elevated phosphorus, potassium and magnesium levels generally decrease during treatment with Aminosyn-RF 5.2%. Particular care should be taken in the presence of cardiac arrhythmias or digitalis toxicity to assure that sufficient quantities of these electrolytes are provided when necessary.

Compatibility of electrolyte additives to the mixtures of Aminosyn-RF 5.2% and hypertonic dextrose must be considered and potentially incompatible ions (calcium, phosphate) may be added to alternate infusion bottles to avoid precipitation.

Children: Pediatric requirements for Aminosyn-RF 5.2% vary greatly depending upon growth, nutritional state and degree of renal insufficiency. A dosage of 0.5 to 1 gram of essential amino acids per kilogram of body weight per day will meet the requirements of the majority of pediatric patients. Initial daily dosage of Aminosyn-RF 5.2% should be low and increased slowly; more than one gram of essential amino acids per kilogram of body weight per day is not recommended. The total volume of nutritional solution and the rate at which it is administered will vary with the child’s age, nutritional and growth state, as well as the degree of renal failure. See Special Precautions in Pediatric Patients for additional information.

Administration

Aminosyn-RF 5.2% admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide caloric energy requirements may be safely administered via a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava.

Initial infusion rates should be slow, generally 20 to 30 mL/hour for the first 6 to 8 hours. Increments of 10 mL/hour for each hour are suggested up to a maximum rate of 60 to 100 mL/hour. If administration rates fall behind the scheduled 24 hour dosage, no attempt should be made to catch up to the planned intake. The patient’s fluid, nitrogen and glucose tolerance should be the governing factor of the rate of administration. Uremic patients are frequently glucose intolerant especially in association with peritoneal dialysis; insulin may be required to prevent hyperglycemia. When hypertonic dextrose infusion is abruptly discontinued, rebound hypoglycemia may be prevented by administering 5% dextrose.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Aminosyn

Aminosyn

Aminosyn-HBC 7%, Sulfite-Free, (an amino acid injection — high branched chain) is administered intravenously. The total dose depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient's metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, is probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

While Recommended Dietary Allowances for oral protein are approximately 0.8 g/kg of body weight for the healthy adult, protein and caloric requirements in traumatized or malnourished patients may be substantially increased. To satisfy protein needs and promote positive nitrogen balance, the daily dosage level of amino acids for adult patients with adequate caloric intake is approximately 1.5 g/kg of body weight. Severely catabolic states may require higher dosage levels. Such higher doses must be accompanied by frequent laboratory evaluation. Fat emulsion may be administered to help meet energy requirements. Fat emulsion coadministration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (E.F.A.D.). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of E.F.A.D. in patients maintained on fat-free total parenteral nutrition.

For optimum amino acid utilization, sufficient intracellular electrolytes (sodium, magnesium, and phosphate) should be provided. Approximately 60 to 180 mEq of potassium, 10 to 30 mEq of magnesium, and 10 to 40 mM of phosphate/day appear necessary to achieve optimum metabolic response. In addition, sufficient quantities of the major extracellular electrolytes (sodium, calcium and chloride) must be given. In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidoses, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate precursors. The electrolyte content of Aminosyn-HBC 7% must be considered when calculating daily electrolyte intake. Serum electrolytes, including magnesium and phosphorus, should be monitored frequently. If a patient's nutritional intake is primarily parenteral, trace metals and vitamins, especially the water-soluble vitamins, should also be provided.

Central Venous Nutrition: For severely catabolic, depleted patients or those who require long-term parenteral nutrition, central venous nutrition should be considered. Total parenteral nutrition may be started with admixtures containing lower concentrations of dextrose; dextrose concentrations may be gradually increased to approximate estimated energy requirements as the patient’s glucose tolerance increases.

In adults, strongly hypertonic admixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered only by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the superior vena cava. A mixture containing 500 mL of Aminosyn-HBC 7% with 500 mL of concentrated dextrose supplemented with electrolytes, trace metals and vitamins may be administered over a period of approximately 8 hours. If prescribed administration rates should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein requirements, the administration is also governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance, especially during the first few days of therapy. The daily intake of the amino acid/dextrose admixture should be increased gradually to the maximum required dose, based on serial determinations of urine and blood sugar levels. To prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria, certain patients may require exogenous insulin in order to receive adequate calories from hypertonic dextrose. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Peripheral Parenteral Nutrition: For the moderately catabolic, depleted patient in whom aggressive central venous nutrition is not necessary, Aminosyn-HBC 7% may be given by peripheral vein with hypocaloric energy supplements. Dextrose in a final concentration of up to 10% and/or lipid emulsion may be administered.

Fat provides approximately 9 kcal/gram and in long-term therapy (more than 5-7 days) will prevent essential fatty acid deficiency. Parenteral fat emulsion may be administered simultaneously with amino acid-dextrose admixtures via a Y-type administration set to supplement caloric intake. Fat, however, should not provide more than 60% of the total caloric intake.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

The addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection to intravenous infusion is not recommended due to the lack of solubility and resultant precipitation.

Not to exceed 50 mg per minute, intravenously in adults, and not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min in neonates. There is a relatively small margin between full therapeutic effect and minimally toxic doses of this drug.

The solution is suitable for use as long as it remains free of haziness and precipitate. Upon refrigeration or freezing, a precipitate might form; this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. Only a clear solution should be used. A faint yellow coloration may develop; however, this has no effect on the potency of the solution.

In the treatment of status epilepticus, the intravenous route is preferred because of the delay in absorption of phenytoin when administered intramuscularly.

Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

Status Epilepticus

In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70 kg patient). The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6-8 hours.

Recent work in neonates and pediatric patients has shown that absorption of phenytoin is unreliable after oral administration, but a loading dose of 15-20 mg/kg of phenytoin intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10-20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be injected slowly and directly into a large vein through a large-gauge needle or intravenous catheter. Each injection of intravenous phenytoin should be followed by an injection of sterile saline through the same needle or catheter to avoid local venous irritation due to alkalinity of the solution. Continuous infusion should be avoided; the addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection to intravenous infusion fluids is not recommended because of the likelihood of precipitation.

Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression. Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage.

Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous short-acting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of phenytoin.

If administration of Phenytoin Sodium Injection does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia and other appropriate measures should be considered.

Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours.

Neurosurgery

Prophylactic dosage—100 to 200 mg (2 to 4 mL) intramuscularly at approximately 4-hour intervals during surgery and continued during the postoperative period.

When intramuscular administration is required for a patient previously stabilized orally, compensating dosage adjustments are necessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites.

If the patient requires more than a week of IM phenytoin, alternative routes should be explored, such as gastric intubation. For time periods less than one week, the patient shifted back from IM administration should receive one half the original oral dose for the same period of time the patient received IM phenytoin. Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

Following suitable admixture of prescribed additive, the dose is usually dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.
Normosol-r

Normosol-r

Normosol-R is administered by intravenous infusion. It may also be administered subcutaneously. The amount to be infused is based on replacement of losses of extracellular fluid volume in the individual patient. Up to 3 times the volume of estimated blood loss during and after surgery can be given to correct circulatory volume when there is only a moderate loss of blood.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Normosol-R does not contain calcium to avoid precipitation of calcium salts that may occur when certain drugs are added. Solutions which contain calcium in amounts exceeding the normal plasma concentration may enhance clotting on contact with citrated blood. Hence, Normosol-R can be used for starting blood transfusion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

To Administer

Attach administration set per manufacturer’s instructions.

Regulate rate of administration per institutional policy.

WARNING: DO NOT USE FLEXIBLE CONTAINER IN SERIES CONNECTIONS.
Ionosol And Dextrose

Ionosol And Dextrose

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. The nominal dosage level for adults is 30 mL/kg. Ionosol B and 5% Dextrose Injection is administered intravenously.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open:

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

1. Prepare additive port.

2. Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

3. The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

4. Mix container contents thoroughly.

To Administer

1. Attach administration set per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Regulate rate of administration per institutional policy.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Allergy Medicine

Allergy Medicine

Ciprofloxacin should be administered intravenously at dosages described in the appropriate Dosage Guidelines tables.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The determination of dosage and duration for any particular patient must take into consideration the severity and nature of the infection, the susceptibility of the causative microorganism, the integrity of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms, and the status of renal function.
Table 1: Adult Dosage Guidelines 1   Due to the designated pathogens (see Indications and Usage).2   Used in conjunction with metronidazole.3   Begin administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure.
Infection1

Dose

Frequency

Usual Duration

Urinary Tract

200 mg to 400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

7 to 14 days

Lower Respiratory Tract

400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

7 to 14 days

Nosocomial Pneumonia

400 mg

every 8 hours

10 to 14 days

Skin and Skin Structure

400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

7 to 14 days

Bone and Joint

400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

4 to 8 weeks

Complicated Intra-Abdominal2

400 mg

every 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Acute Sinusitis

400 mg

every 12 hours

10 days

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

400 mg

every 12 hours

28 days

Empirical Therapy In FebrileNeutropenic Patients

Ciprofloxacin

400 mg

and

Piperacillin

50 mg/kg

every 8 hours

___________

every 4 hours

7 to 14 days

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure)3

400 mg

every 12 hours

60 days

Plague3

400 mg

every 12 to 8 hours

14 days

Conversion of Intravenous to Oral Dosing in Adults

Patients whose therapy is started with ciprofloxacin injection may be switched to CIPRO Tablets or Oral Suspension when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician (Table 2) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 2: Equivalent AUC Dosing Regimens
Ciprofloxacin Oral Dosage

Equivalent Ciprofloxacin Injection Dosage

250 mg Tablet every 12 hours

200 mg intravenous every 12 hours

500 mg Tablet every 12 hours

400 mg intravenous every 12 hours

750 mg Tablet every 12 hours

400 mg intravenous every 8 hours

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

Dosing and initial route of therapy (that is, IV or oral) for cUTI or pyelonephritis should be determined by the severity of the infection.
Table 3: Pediatric Dosage Guidelines 1   The total duration of therapy for cUTI and pyelonephritis in the clinical trial was determined by the physician. The mean duration of treatment was 11 days (range 10 to 21 days).2   Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure.3   Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Y. pestis.
Infection

Route of Administration

Dose (mg/kg)

Frequency

Total Duration

Complicated Urinary Tract or Pyelonephritis (patients from 1 to 17 years of age)1

Intravenous

6 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg (maximum 400 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing >51 kg)

Every 8 hours

10 to 21 days1

Inhalational Anthrax

(Post-Exposure)2

Intravenous

10 mg/kg

(maximum 400 mg per dose)

Every 12 hours

60 days

Plague2,3

Intravenous

10 mg/kg

(maximum 400 mg per dose)

Every 12 to 8 hours

10 to 21 days

2.3 Dosage Modifications in Patients with Renal Impairment

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternative pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. Nonetheless, some modification of dosage is recommended, particularly for patients with severe renal dysfunction. Dosage guidelines for use in patients with renal impairment are shown in Table 4.
Table 4: Recommended Starting and Maintenance Doses for Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dose

> 30

See Usual Dosage

5 to 29

200 to 400 mg every 18 to 24 hours

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formulas may be used to estimate creatinine clearance:

Men - Creatinine clearance (mL/min) = Weight (kg) x (140 – age)                                                             72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Women - 0.85 x the value calculated for men.

The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

In patients with severe infections and severe renal impairment and hepatic insufficiency, careful monitoring is suggested.

Pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency were excluded from the clinical trial of cUTI and pyelonephritis. No information is available on dosing adjustments necessary for pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency (that is, creatinine clearance of < 50 mL/min/1.73m2).

2.4 Preparation of Ciprofloxacin for Administration

The 2 mg/mL infusion solution in 5% dextrose is available in flexible containers of 100 mL or 200 mL. The solutions in flexible containers do not need to be diluted and may be infused as described below.

If the Y-type or “piggyback” method of administration is used, it is advisable to discontinue temporarily the administration of any other solutions during the infusion of ciprofloxacin. If the concomitant use of ciprofloxacin and another drug is necessary each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each drug.

2.5 Important Administration Instructions

Intravenous Infusion

Ciprofloxacin should be administered to by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes. Slow infusion of a dilute solution into a larger vein will minimize patient discomfort and reduce the risk of venous irritation.

Hydration of Patients Receiving Ciprofloxacin

Adequate hydration of patients receiving ciprofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria has been reported with quinolones [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Adverse Reactions (6.1), Nonclinical Toxicology (13.2) and Patient Counseling Information (17)].
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Important Notes on Administration

Promethazine HCl injection can cause severe chemical irritation and damage to tissues regardless of the route of administration. Irritation and damage can result from perivascular extravasation, unintentional intra-arterial injection, and intraneuronal or perineuronal infiltration (see WARNINGS – Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene).

• The preferred parenteral route of administration for promethazine HCl injection is by deep intramuscular injection.

• Under no circumstances should promethazine HCl injection be given by intra-arterial injection due to the likelihood of severe arteriorospasm and the possibility of resultant gangrene (see WARNINGS – Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene).

• Subcutaneous injection is contraindicated as it may result in tissue necrosis.

• When administered intravenously, promethazine HCl injection should be given in a concentration no greater than 25 mg per mL and at a rate not to exceed 25 mg per minute. It is preferable to inject through the tubing of an intravenous infusion set that is known to be functioning satisfactorily.

• In the event that a patient complains of pain during intravenous injection of promethazine HCl injection, the injection should be stopped immediately to evaluate for possible arterial injection or perivascular extravasation.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use Promethazine HCl Injection if solution has developed color or contains precipitate.

To avoid the possibility of physical and/or chemical incompatibility, consult specialized literature before diluting with any injectable solution or combining with any other medication.

Do not use if there is a precipitate or any sign of incompatibility.

The Carpuject® with Luer Lock is suitable for substances to be administered intravenously or intramuscularly.

Allergic Conditions

The average adult dose is 25 mg. This dose may be repeated within two hours if necessary, but continued therapy, if indicated, should be via the oral route as soon as existing circumstances permit. After initiation of treatment, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The average adult dose for amelioration of allergic reactions to blood or plasma is 25 mg.

Sedation

In hospitalized adult patients, nighttime sedation may be achieved by a dose of 25 to 50 mg of Promethazine HCl Injection.

Nausea and Vomiting

For control of nausea and vomiting, the usual adult dose is 12.5 to 25 mg, not to be repeated more frequently than every four hours. When used for control of postoperative nausea and vomiting, the dosage of analgesics and barbiturates should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions).

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see PRECAUTIONS – Pediatric Use).

Preoperative and Postoperative Use

As an adjunct to preoperative or postoperative medication, 25 to 50 mg of Promethazine HCl Injection in adults may be combined with appropriately reduced doses of analgesics and atropine-like drugs as desired. Dosage of concomitant analgesic or hypnotic medication should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions).

Promethazine HCl is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than two years of age.

Obstetrics

Promethazine HCl Injection in doses of 50 mg will provide sedation and relieve apprehension in the early stages of labor. When labor is definitely established, 25 to 75 mg (average dose, 50 mg) Promethazine HCl Injection may be given with an appropriately reduced dose of any desired narcotic (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions). If necessary, Promethazine HCl Injection with a reduced dose of analgesic may be repeated once or twice at four-hour intervals in the course of a normal labor. A maximum total dose of 100 mg of Promethazine HCl Injection may be administered during a 24-hour period to patients in labor.

Pediatric Patients

Promethazine HCl Injection is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than 2 years of age (see WARNINGS – Respiratory Depression). Caution should be exercised when administering promethazine HCl to pediatric patients 2 years of age or older. It is recommended that the lowest effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride be used in pediatric patients 2 years of age and older and concomitant administration of other drugs with respiratory depressant effects be avoided (see WARNINGS – Respiratory Depression).

In pediatric patients 2 years of age and older, the dosage should not exceed half that of the suggested adult dose. As an adjunct to premedication, the suggested dose is 1.1 mg per kg of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine-like drug (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions). Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in pediatric patients.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Important Notes on Administration

Promethazine HCl injection can cause severe chemical irritation and damage to tissues regardless of the route of administration. Irritation and damage can result from perivascular extravasation, unintentional intra-arterial injection, and intraneuronal or perineuronal infiltration (see WARNINGS – Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene).

• The preferred parenteral route of administration for promethazine HCl injection is by deep intramuscular injection.

• Under no circumstances should promethazine HCl injection be given by intra-arterial injection due to the likelihood of severe arteriorospasm and the possibility of resultant gangrene (see WARNINGS – Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene).

• Subcutaneous injection is contraindicated as it may result in tissue necrosis.

• When administered intravenously, promethazine HCl injection should be given in a concentration no greater than 25 mg per mL and at a rate not to exceed 25 mg per minute. It is preferable to inject through the tubing of an intravenous infusion set that is known to be functioning satisfactorily.

• In the event that a patient complains of pain during intravenous injection of promethazine HCl injection, the injection should be stopped immediately to evaluate for possible arterial injection or perivascular extravasation.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use Promethazine HCl Injection if solution has developed color or contains precipitate.

To avoid the possibility of physical and/or chemical incompatibility, consult specialized literature before diluting with any injectable solution or combining with any other medication.

Do not use if there is a precipitate or any sign of incompatibility.

The iSecure Syringe is suitable for substances to be administered intravenously or intramuscularly.

Allergic Conditions

The average adult dose is 25 mg. This dose may be repeated within two hours if necessary, but continued therapy, if indicated, should be via the oral route as soon as existing circumstances permit. After initiation of treatment, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The average adult dose for amelioration of allergic reactions to blood or plasma is 25 mg.

Sedation

In hospitalized adult patients, nighttime sedation may be achieved by a dose of 25 to 50 mg of Promethazine HCl Injection.

Nausea and Vomiting

For control of nausea and vomiting, the usual adult dose is 12.5 to 25 mg, not to be repeated more frequently than every four hours. When used for control of postoperative nausea and vomiting, the dosage of analgesics and barbiturates should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions).

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see PRECAUTIONS – Pediatric Use).

Preoperative and Postoperative Use

As an adjunct to preoperative or postoperative medication, 25 to 50 mg of Promethazine HCl Injection in adults may be combined with appropriately reduced doses of analgesics and atropine-like drugs as desired. Dosage of concomitant analgesic or hypnotic medication should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions).

Promethazine HCl is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than two years of age.

Obstetrics

Promethazine HCl Injection in doses of 50 mg will provide sedation and relieve apprehension in the early stages of labor. When labor is definitely established, 25 to 75 mg (average dose, 50 mg) Promethazine HCl Injection may be given with an appropriately reduced dose of any desired narcotic (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions). If necessary, Promethazine HCl Injection with a reduced dose of analgesic may be repeated once or twice at four-hour intervals in the course of a normal labor. A maximum total dose of 100 mg of Promethazine HCl Injection may be administered during a 24-hour period to patients in labor.

Pediatric Patients

Promethazine HCl Injection is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than 2 years of age (see WARNINGS – Respiratory Depression). Caution should be exercised when administering promethazine HCl to pediatric patients 2 years of age or older. It is recommended that the lowest effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride be used in pediatric patients 2 years of age and older and concomitant administration of other drugs with respiratory depressant effects be avoided (see WARNINGS – Respiratory Depression).

In pediatric patients 2 years of age and older, the dosage should not exceed half that of the suggested adult dose. As an adjunct to premedication, the suggested dose is 1.1 mg per kg of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine-like drug (see PRECAUTIONS – Drug Interactions). Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in pediatric patients.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam must never be used without individualization of dosage particularly when used with other medications capable of producing central-nervous-system depression.

EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN A PATENT AIRWAY SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE PRIOR TO INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION OF LORAZEPAM (see WARNINGS).

Status Epilepticus

General Advice

Status epilepticus is a potentially life-threatening condition associated with a high risk of permanent neurological impairment, if inadequately treated. The treatment of status, however, requires far more than the administration of an anticonvulsant agent. It involves observation and management of all parameters critical to maintaining vital function and the capacity to provide support of those functions as required. Ventilatory support must be readily available. The use of benzodiazepines, like Lorazepam Injection, is ordinarily only an initial step of a complex and sustained intervention which may require additional interventions, (e.g., concomitant intravenous administration of phenytoin). Because status epilepticus may result from a correctable acute cause such as hypoglycemia, hyponatremia, or other metabolic or toxic derangement, such an abnormality must be immediately sought and corrected. Furthermore, patients who are susceptible to further seizure episodes should receive adequate maintenance antiepileptic therapy.

Any health care professional who intends to treat a patient with status epilepticus should be familiar with this package insert and the pertinent medical literature concerning current concepts for the treatment of status epilepticus. A comprehensive review of the considerations critical to the informed and prudent management of status epilepticus cannot be provided in drug product labeling. The archival medical literature contains many informative references on the management of status epilepticus, among them the report of the working group on status epilepticus of the Epilepsy Foundation of America “Treatment of Convulsive Status Epilepticus” (JAMA 1993; 270:854-859). As noted in the report just cited, it may be useful to consult with a neurologist if a patient fails to respond (e.g., fails to regain consciousness).

Intravenous Injection

For the treatment of status epilepticus, the usual recommended dose of lorazepam injection is 4 mg given slowly (2 mg/min) for patients 18 years and older. If seizures cease, no additional lorazepam injection is required. If seizures continue or recur after a 10- to 15-minute observation period, an additional 4 mg intravenous dose may be slowly administered. Experience with further doses of lorazepam is very limited. The usual precautions in treating status epilepticus should be employed. An intravenous infusion should be started, vital signs should be monitored, an unobstructed airway should be maintained, and artificial ventilation equipment should be available.

Intramuscular Injection

IM lorazepam is not preferred in the treatment of status epilepticus because therapeutic lorazepam levels may not be reached as quickly as with IV administration. However, when an intravenous port is not available, the IM route may prove useful (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism).

Pediatric

The safety of lorazepam in pediatric patients has not been established.

Preanesthetic

Intramuscular Injection

For the designated indications as a premedicant, the usual recommended dose of lorazepam for intramuscular injection is 0.05 mg/kg up to a maximum of 4 mg. As with all premedicant drugs, the dose should be individualized (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS). Doses of other central-nervous-system depressant drugs ordinarily should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). For optimum effect, measured as lack of recall, intramuscular lorazepam should be administered at least 2 hours before the anticipated operative procedure. Narcotic analgesics should be administered at their usual preoperative time. There are insufficient data to support efficacy or make dosage recommendations for intramuscular lorazepam in patients less than 18 years of age; therefore, such use is not recommended.

Intravenous Injection

For the primary purpose of sedation and relief of anxiety, the usual recommended initial dose of lorazepam for intravenous injection is 2 mg total, or 0.02 mg/lb (0.044 mg/kg), whichever is smaller. This dose will suffice for sedating most adult patients and ordinarily should not be exceeded in patients over 50 years of age. In those patients in whom a greater likelihood of lack of recall for perioperative events would be beneficial, larger doses as high as 0.05 mg/kg up to a total of 4 mg may be administered (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS). Doses of other injectable central-nervous-system depressant drugs ordinarily should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). For optimum effect, measured as lack of recall, intravenous lorazepam should be administered 15 to 20 minutes before the anticipated operative procedure.

There are insufficient data to support efficacy or make dosage recommendations for intravenous lorazepam in patients less than 18 years of age; therefore, such use is not recommended.

Dose Administration in Special Populations

Elderly Patients and Patients with Hepatic Disease

No dosage adjustments are needed in elderly patients and in patients with hepatic disease.

Patients with Renal Disease

For acute dose administration, adjustment is not needed for patients with renal disease. However, in patients with renal disease, caution should be exercised if frequent doses are given over relatively short periods of time (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Dose Adjustment Due to Drug Interactions

The dose of lorazepam should be reduced by 50% when coadministered with probenecid or valproate (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

It may be necessary to increase the dose of lorazepam in female patients who are concomitantly taking oral contraceptives.

Administration

When given intramuscularly, Lorazepam Injection, undiluted, should be injected deep in the muscle mass.

Injectable lorazepam can be used with atropine sulfate, narcotic analgesics, other parenterally used analgesics, commonly used anesthetics, and muscle relaxants.

Immediately prior to intravenous use, Lorazepam Injection must be diluted with an equal volume of compatible solution. When properly diluted, the drug may be injected directly into a vein or into the tubing of an existing intravenous infusion. The rate of injection should not exceed 2 mg per minute.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is discolored or contains a precipitate.

Lorazepam injection is compatible for dilution purposes with the following solutions: Sterile Water for Injection, USP; Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.
A-hydrocort

A-hydrocort

This preparation may be administered by intravenous injection, by intravenous infusion, or by intramuscular injection, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. Following the initial emergency period, consideration should be given to employing a longer acting injectable preparation or an oral preparation.

Therapy is initiated by administering A-Hydrocort sterile powder intravenously over a period of 30 seconds (eg, 100 mg) to 10 minutes (eg, 500 mg or more). In general, high-dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient’s condition has stabilized − usually not beyond 48 to 72 hours. Although adverse effects associated with high-dose, short-term corticoid therapy are uncommon, peptic ulceration may occur. Prophylactic antacid therapy may be indicated.

When high-dose hydrocortisone therapy must be continued beyond 48-72 hours, hypernatremia may occur. Under such circumstances it may be desirable to replace hydrocortisone sodium succinate with a corticoid such as methylprednisolone sodium succinate which causes little or no sodium retention.

The initial dose of A-Hydrocort sterile powder is 100 mg to 500 mg, depending on the severity of the condition. This dose may be repeated at intervals of 2, 4 or 6 hours as indicated by the patient’s response and clinical condition. While the dose may be reduced for infants and children, it is governed more by the severity of the condition and response of the patient than by age or body weight but should not be less than 25 mg daily.

Patients subjected to severe stress following corticosteroid therapy should be observed closely for signs and symptoms of adrenocortical insufficiency.

Corticoid therapy is an adjunct to, and not a replacement for, conventional therapy.

Preparation of Solutions

100 mg − For intravenous or intramuscular injection, prepare solution by aseptically adding not more than 2 mL of Bacteriostatic Water for Injection or Bacteriostatic Sodium Chloride Injection to the contents of one vial. Further dilution is not necessary for intravenous or intramuscular injection. For intravenous infusion, first prepare solution by adding not more than 2 mL of Bacteriostatic Water for Injection to the vial; this solution may then be added to 100 to 1000 mL of the following: 5% dextrose in water (or isotonic saline solution or 5% dextrose in isotonic saline solution if patient is not on sodium restriction). In cases where administration of a small volume of fluid is desirable, 100 mg of hydrocortisone sodium succinate may be added to 50 mL of the above diluents. The resulting solutions are stable for at least 4 hours and may be administered either directly or by IV piggyback.

When reconstituted as directed, pH’s of the solutions range from 7 to 8 and the tonicities are: 100 mg vial, .36 osmolar. (Isotonic saline = .28 osmolar.)
Hydromorphone Hydrochlo...

Hydromorphone Hydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Take care when prescribing and administering Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) to avoid dosing errors due to confusion between the different concentrations and between mg and mL, which could result in accidental overdose and death. Take care to ensure the proper dose is communicated and dispensed. When writing prescriptions, include both the total dose in mg and the total volume of the dose.

Selection of patients and administration of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) should be governed by the same principles that apply to the use of similar opioid analgesics to treat patients with acute or chronic pain, and depends upon a comprehensive assessment of the patient. Individualize treatment in every case, using non-opioid analgesics, opioids on an as needed basis and/or combination products, and chronic opioid therapy in a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, and the American Pain Society.

The nature of the pain (severity, frequency, etiology, and pathophysiology), as well as the medical status of the patient, will affect selection of the starting dosage. Opioid analgesics, including Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY), have a narrow therapeutic index in certain patient populations, especially when combined with CNS depressant drugs, and should be reserved for cases where the benefits of opioid analgesia outweigh the known risks.

2.2 Individualization of Dosage

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient’s prior analgesic treatment. Give attention to the following:
• the age, general condition and medical status of the patient; • the patient’s degree of opioid tolerance; • the daily dose, potency, and specific characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously; • concurrent medications; • the type and severity of the patient’s pain; • risk factors for abuse or addiction; including whether the patient has a previous or current substance abuse problem, a family history of substance abuse, or a history of mental illness or depression; • the balance between pain control and adverse reactions.
Periodic reassessment after the initial dosing of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) is required. If pain management is not satisfactory, and opioid-induced adverse events are tolerable, the hydromorphone dose may be increased gradually. If excessive opioid side effects are observed early in the dosing interval, reduce the hydromorphone hydrochloride dose. If this results in breakthrough pain at the end of the dosing interval, the dosing interval may need to be shortened. Dose titration should be guided more by the need for analgesia and the severity of adverse events than the absolute dose of opioid employed.

2.3 Initiation of Therapy in Opioid-Naïve Patients

Always initiate dosing in opioid-naïve patients using standard parenteral formulations of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP. Never administer Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) to opioid-naïve patients.

2.3.1 Subcutaneous or Intramuscular Administration

The usual starting dose of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP is 1 mg to 2 mg every 2 to 3 hours as necessary. Depending on the clinical situation, the initial starting dose may be lowered in patients who are opioid naïve. Adjust the dose according to the severity of pain, the severity of adverse events, as well as the patient’s underlying disease and age.

2.3.2 Intravenous Administration

The initial starting dose is 0.2 to 1 mg every 2 to 3 hours. Intravenous administration should be given slowly, over at least 2 to 3 minutes, depending on the dose. Titrate the dose to achieve acceptable analgesia and tolerable adverse events. The initial dose should be reduced in the elderly or debilitated and may be lowered to 0.2 mg.

2.3.3 Hepatic Impairment

Start patients with hepatic impairment on one-fourth to one-half the usual Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP starting dose depending on the extent of impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3.4 Renal Impairment

Start patients with renal impairment on one-fourth to one-half the usual Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP starting dose depending on the degree of impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Conversion from Prior Opioid

Use the equianalgesic dose table below (Table 1) as a guide to determine the appropriate dose of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY). Convert the current total daily amount(s) of opioid(s) received to an equivalent total daily dose of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) and reduce by one-half due to the possibility of incomplete cross tolerance. Divide the new total amount by number of doses permitted based on dosing interval (e.g. 8 doses for every three-hour dosing). Titrate the dose according to the patient’s response. For opioids not in Table 1, first estimate the daily amount of morphine that is equivalent to the current total daily amount of other opioid(s) received, then use Table 1 to find the approximate equivalent total daily dose of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY).
Table 1: OPIOID ANALGESIC EQUIVALENTS WITH APPROXIMATELY EQUIANALGESIC POTENCY FOR CONVERSION TO HYDROMORPHONE HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION,USP (HIGH POTENCY)* * Dosages, and ranges of dosages represented, are a compilation of estimated equipotent dosages from published references comparing opioid analgesics in cancer and severe pain.
DRUG SUBSTANCE

PARENTERAL DOSE

ORAL DOSE

Morphine Sulfate

10 mg

40 – 60 mg

Hydromorphone HCl

1.3 – 2 mg

6.5 – 7.5 mg

Oxymorphone HCl

1 – 1.1 mg

6.6 mg

Levorphanol tartrate

2 – 2.3 mg

4 mg

Meperidine HCl (Pethidine HCl)

75 – 100 mg

300 – 400 mg

Methadone HCl

10 mg

10 – 20 mg

Nalbuphine HCl

10 – 12 mg

–

Butorphanol tartrate

1.5 – 2.5 mg

–

2.5 Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) (for use in opioid-tolerant patients only)

Do not use Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) for patients who are not tolerant to the respiratory depressant or sedating effects of opioids. Patients considered opioid tolerant are those who are taking at least 60 mg oral morphine/day, 25 mcg transdermal fentanyl/hour, 30 mg oral oxycodone/day, 8 mg oral hydromorphone/day, 25 mg oral oxymorphone/day, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid for one week or longer.

Use Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) only for patients who require the higher concentration and lower total volume of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY).

Because of its high concentration, the delivery of precise doses of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) may be difficult if low doses of hydromorphone are required. Therefore, use Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) only if the amount of Hydromorphone required can be delivered accurately with this formulation.

Base the starting dose for hydromorphone hydrochloride injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) on the prior dose of Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP or on the prior dose of an alternate opioid as described above in Section 2.4 Conversion from Prior Opioid and Table 1.

2.6 Administration

Inspect parenteral drug products visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. A slight yellowish discoloration may develop in Hydromorphone Hydrochloride vials. No loss of potency has been demonstrated. Hydromorphone Hydrochloride Injection, USP (HIGH POTENCY) is physically compatible and chemically stable for at least 24 hours at 25°C, protected from light in most common large-volume parenteral solutions.

500 mg/50 mL Vial

To use this single dose presentation, do not penetrate the stopper with a syringe. Instead, remove both the aluminum flipseal and rubber stopper in a suitable work area such as under a laminar flow hood (or equivalent clean air compounding area). The contents may then be withdrawn for preparation of a single, large-volume parenteral solution. Discard any unused portion in an appropriate manner.
Normosol-r

Normosol-r

Normosol-R is administered by intravenous infusion. It may also be administered subcutaneously. The amount to be infused is based on replacement of losses of extracellular fluid volume in the individual patient. Up to 3 times the volume of estimated blood loss during and after surgery can be given to correct circulatory volume when there is only a moderate loss of blood.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Normosol-R does not contain calcium to avoid precipitation of calcium salts that may occur when certain drugs are added. Solutions which contain calcium in amounts exceeding the normal plasma concentration may enhance clotting on contact with citrated blood. Hence, Normosol-R can be used for starting blood transfusion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

(Use aseptic technique)

Remove blue cap from BLU-MED™ sterile medication additive port at bottom of container.

With a needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

The additive port may be protected by an appropriate cover.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

NOTE: See appropriate IV administration set Instructions for Use.

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cap from sterile administration set port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated.

Suspend container.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open clamp. Eliminate air from remainder of set.

Attach set to patient access device.

Begin infusion.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam must never be used without individualization of dosage particularly when used with other medications capable of producing central-nervous-system depression.

EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN A PATENT AIRWAY SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE PRIOR TO INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION OF LORAZEPAM (see WARNINGS).

Status Epilepticus

General Advice

Status epilepticus is a potentially life-threatening condition associated with a high risk of permanent neurological impairment, if inadequately treated. The treatment of status, however, requires far more than the administration of an anticonvulsant agent. It involves observation and management of all parameters critical to maintaining vital function and the capacity to provide support of those functions as required. Ventilatory support must be readily available. The use of benzodiazepines, like Lorazepam Injection, is ordinarily only an initial step of a complex and sustained intervention which may require additional interventions, (e.g., concomitant intravenous administration of phenytoin). Because status epilepticus may result from a correctable acute cause such as hypoglycemia, hyponatremia, or other metabolic or toxic derangement, such an abnormality must be immediately sought and corrected. Furthermore, patients who are susceptible to further seizure episodes should receive adequate maintenance antiepileptic therapy.

Any health care professional who intends to treat a patient with status epilepticus should be familiar with this package insert and the pertinent medical literature concerning current concepts for the treatment of status epilepticus. A comprehensive review of the considerations critical to the informed and prudent management of status epilepticus cannot be provided in drug product labeling. The archival medical literature contains many informative references on the management of status epilepticus, among them the report of the working group on status epilepticus of the Epilepsy Foundation of America “Treatment of Convulsive Status Epilepticus” (JAMA 1993; 270:854-859). As noted in the report just cited, it may be useful to consult with a neurologist if a patient fails to respond (e.g., fails to regain consciousness).

Intravenous Injection

For the treatment of status epilepticus, the usual recommended dose of lorazepam injection is 4 mg given slowly (2 mg/min) for patients 18 years and older. If seizures cease, no additional lorazepam injection is required. If seizures continue or recur after a 10- to 15-minute observation period, an additional 4 mg intravenous dose may be slowly administered. Experience with further doses of lorazepam is very limited. The usual precautions in treating status epilepticus should be employed. An intravenous infusion should be started, vital signs should be monitored, an unobstructed airway should be maintained, and artificial ventilation equipment should be available.

Intramuscular Injection

IM lorazepam is not preferred in the treatment of status epilepticus because therapeutic lorazepam levels may not be reached as quickly as with IV administration. However, when an intravenous port is not available, the IM route may prove useful (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism).

Pediatric

The safety of lorazepam in pediatric patients has not been established.

Preanesthetic

Intramuscular Injection

For the designated indications as a premedicant, the usual recommended dose of lorazepam for intramuscular injection is 0.05 mg/kg up to a maximum of 4 mg. As with all premedicant drugs, the dose should be individualized (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS). Doses of other central-nervous-system depressant drugs ordinarily should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). For optimum effect, measured as lack of recall, intramuscular lorazepam should be administered at least 2 hours before the anticipated operative procedure. Narcotic analgesics should be administered at their usual preoperative time. There are insufficient data to support efficacy or make dosage recommendations for intramuscular lorazepam in patients less than 18 years of age; therefore, such use is not recommended.

Intravenous Injection

For the primary purpose of sedation and relief of anxiety, the usual recommended initial dose of lorazepam for intravenous injection is 2 mg total, or 0.02 mg/lb (0.044 mg/kg), whichever is smaller. This dose will suffice for sedating most adult patients and ordinarily should not be exceeded in patients over 50 years of age. In those patients in whom a greater likelihood of lack of recall for perioperative events would be beneficial, larger doses as high as 0.05 mg/kg up to a total of 4 mg may be administered (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS). Doses of other injectable central-nervous-system depressant drugs ordinarily should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). For optimum effect, measured as lack of recall, intravenous lorazepam should be administered 15 to 20 minutes before the anticipated operative procedure.

There are insufficient data to support efficacy or make dosage recommendations for intravenous lorazepam in patients less than 18 years of age; therefore, such use is not recommended.

Dose Administration in Special Populations

Elderly Patients and Patients with Hepatic Disease

No dosage adjustments are needed in elderly patients and in patients with hepatic disease.

Patients with Renal Disease

For acute dose administration, adjustment is not needed for patients with renal disease. However, in patients with renal disease, caution should be exercised if frequent doses are given over relatively short periods of time (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Dose Adjustment Due to Drug Interactions

The dose of lorazepam should be reduced by 50% when coadministered with probenecid or valproate (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

It may be necessary to increase the dose of lorazepam in female patients who are concomitantly taking oral contraceptives.

Administration

When given intramuscularly, Lorazepam Injection, undiluted, should be injected deep in the muscle mass.

Injectable lorazepam can be used with atropine sulfate, narcotic analgesics, other parenterally used analgesics, commonly used anesthetics, and muscle relaxants.

Immediately prior to intravenous use, Lorazepam Injection must be diluted with an equal volume of compatible solution. When properly diluted, the drug may be injected directly into a vein or into the tubing of an existing intravenous infusion. The rate of injection should not exceed 2 mg per minute.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is discolored or contains a precipitate.

Lorazepam injection is compatible for dilution purposes with the following solutions: Sterile Water for Injection, USP; Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.
Talwin

Talwin

Adults, Excluding Patients in Labor: The recommended single parenteral dose is 30 mg by intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intravenous route. This may be repeated every 3 to 4 hours. Doses in excess of 30 mg intravenously or 60 mg intramuscularly or subcutaneously are not recommended. Total daily dosage should not exceed 360 mg. Elderly patients may be more sensitive to the analgesic effects of TALWIN than younger patients. Elderly patients generally should be started on low doses of TALWIN and observed closely.

The subcutaneous route of administration should be used only when necessary because of possible severe tissue damage at injection sites (see WARNINGS). When frequent injections are needed, the drug should be administered intramuscularly. In addition, constant rotation of injection sites (e.g., the upper outer quadrants of the buttocks, mid-lateral aspects of the thighs, and the deltoid areas) is essential.

Patients in Labor: A single, intramuscular 30 mg dose has been most commonly administered. An intravenous 20 mg dose has given adequate pain relief to some patients in labor when contractions become regular, and this dose may be given two or three times at two- to three-hour intervals, as needed.

Pediatric Patients Excluding Patients Less Than One Year Old: The recommended single parenteral dose as premedication for sedation is 0.5 mg/kg by intramuscular route.

CAUTION: TALWIN should not be mixed in the same syringe with soluble barbiturates because precipitation will occur.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate Injection, USP in the Ansyr Syringe is intended for intravenous use, but may be administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Its use usually requires titration, using heart rate, PR interval, blood pressure and/or patient’s symptoms as a guide for having reached an appropriate dose.

Adults

Initial single doses in adults vary from around 0.5 mg to 1 mg (5-10 mL of the 0.1 mg/mL solution for antisialagogue and other antivagal effects, to 2 to 3 mg (20-30 mL) of the 0.1 mg/mL solution) as an antidote for organophosporous or muscarinic mushroom poisoning. When used as an antidote, the 2 to 3 mg dose should be repeated no less often than every 20 to 30 minutes until the signs of poisoning are sufficiently lessened or signs of atropine poisoning (see ADVERSE REACTIONS and OVERDOSAGE) occur.

When the recurrent use of atropine is essential in patients with coronary artery disease, the total dose should be restricted to 2 to 3 mg (maximum 0.03 to 0.04 mg/kg) to avoid the detrimental effects of atropine-induced tachycardia on myocardial oxygen demand. For patients with bradyasystolic cardiac arrest, a 1 mg dose of atropine is administered intravenously and is repeated every 3-5 minutes if asystole persists. Three milligrams (0.04 mg/kg) given I.V. is a fully vagolytic dose in most patients. The administration of this dose of atropine should be reserved for patients with bradyasystolic cardiac arrest. Administration of less than 0.5 mg can produce a paradoxical bradycardia because of the central or peripheral parasympathomimetic effects of low doses in adults.

Endotracheal administration of atropine can be used in patients without I.V. access. The recommended adult dose of atropine for endotracheal administration is 1 to 2 mg diluted to a total not to exceed 10 mL of sterile water or normal saline.

Titration intervals of one or two hours are recommended in circumstances that are not life-threatening.

Pediatrics

Dosing information in pediatric populations has not been well studied. Usage history of initial dose has been in the range of 0.01 to 0.03 mg/kg body weight.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and/or discoloration prior to administration (see PRECAUTIONS).
Gentamicin Sulfate In S...

Gentamicin Sulfate In Sodium Chloride

Gentamicin Sulfate in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is administered by intravenous infusion only. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. It is desirable to limit the duration of treatment with aminoglycosides to short term.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults: The recommended dosage of gentamicin sulfate for patients with serious infections and normal renal function is 3 mg/kg/day, administered in three equal doses every eight hours (Table 1).

For patients with life-threatening infections, dosages up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in three or four equal doses. The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated (Table 1).

It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations of gentamicin to determine the adequacy and safety of the dosage. When such measurements are feasible, they should be carried out periodically during therapy to assure adequate but not excessive drug levels. For example, the peak concentration (at 30 to 60 minutes following cessation of infusion) is expected to be in the range of 4 to 6 mcg/mL. When monitoring peak concentrations, dosage should be adjusted so that prolonged levels above 12 mcg/mL are avoided. When monitoring trough concentrations (just prior to the next dose), dosage should be adjusted so that levels above 2 mcg/mL are avoided. Determination of the adequacy of a serum level for a particular patient must take into consideration the susceptibility of the causative organism, the severity of the infection, and the status of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms. In patients with extensive burns, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. In such patients treated with gentamicin, measurement of serum concentrations is recommended as a basis for dosage adjustment.
Table 1 Dosage Schedule Guide For Adults With Normal Renal Function (Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals)
Patient’s

Weight*

kg (lb)

Usual Dose

for Serious

Infections

1 mg/kg q8h

(3 mg/kg/day)

Dose for Life-Threatening

Infections (Reduce as Soon

as Clinically Indicated)

1.7 mg/kg q8h**

(5 mg/kg/day)

mg/dose

q8h

mg/dose

q8h
40 ( 88) 40 66
45

( 99)

45

75

50

(110)

50

83

55

(121)

55

91

60

(132)

60

100

65

(143)

65

108

70

(154)

70

116

75

(165)

75

125

80

(176)

80

133

85

(187)

85

141

90

(198)

90

150

95

(209)

95

158

100

(220)

100

166

* The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass.

** For q6h schedules, dosage should be recalculated.

NOTE: For information concerning the use of gentamicin in infants and children, see Pediatric Gentamicin Sulfate Injection product information.

The usual duration of treatment for all patients is seven to ten days. In difficult and complicated infections, a longer course of therapy may be necessary. In such cases monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is recommended, since toxicity is more apt to occur with treatment extended for more than ten days. Dosage should be reduced if clinically indicated.

The intravenous administration of gentamicin may be particularly useful for treating patients with bacterial septicemia or those in shock. It may also be the preferred route of administration for some patients with congestive heart failure, hematologic disorders, severe burns, or those with reduced muscle mass. For multiple intravenous administration in adults, a single dose of Gentamicin Sulfate in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection may be administered according to individual patient requirements from a premixed flexible bag. The solution may be infused over a period of one-half to two hours.

Gentamicin sulfate should not be physically premixed with other drugs, but should be administered separately in accordance with the recommended route of administration and dosage schedule.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Dosage must be adjusted in patients with impaired renal function to assure therapeutically adequate, but not excessive blood levels. Whenever possible, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be monitored. One method of dosage adjustment is to increase the interval between administration of the usual doses. Since the serum creatinine concentration has a high correlation with the serum half-life of gentamicin, this laboratory test may provide guidance for adjustment of the interval between doses. The interval between doses (in hours) may be approximated by multiplying the serum creatinine level (mg/100 mL) by 8. For example, a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2 mg/100 mL could be given 60 mg (1 mg/kg) every 16 hours (2 x 8).

In patients with serious systemic infections and renal impairment, it may be desirable to administer the antibiotic more frequently but in reduced dosage. In such patients, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be measured so that adequate, but not excessive levels result. A peak and trough concentration measured intermittently during therapy will provide optimal guidance for adjusting dosage. After the usual initial dose, a rough guide for determining reduced dosage at eight-hour intervals is to divide the normally recommended dose by the serum creatinine level (Table 2). For example, after an initial dose of 60 mg (1 mg/kg), a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2 mg/100 mL could be given 30 mg every eight hours (60 ÷ 2). It should be noted that the status of renal function may be changing over the course of the infectious process.

It is important to recognize that deteriorating renal function may require a greater reduction in dosage than that specified in the above guidelines for patients with stable renal impairment.
Table 2 Dosage Adjustment Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment (Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals After the Usual Initial Dose)
Serum

Creatinine

(mg %)

Approximate

Creatinine

Clearance

(mL/min/1.73M2)

Percent of

Usual Doses

Shown in

Table 1

≤1.0

>100

100

1.1 - 1.3

70 - 100

80

1.4 - 1.6

55 - 70

65

1.7 - 1.9

45 - 55

55

2.0 - 2.2

40 - 45

50

2.3 - 2.5

35 - 40

40

2.6 - 3.0

30 - 35

35

3.1 - 3.5

25 - 30

30

3.6 - 4.0

20 - 25

25

4.1 - 5.1

15 - 20

20

5.2 - 6.6

10 - 15

15

6.7 - 8.0

<10

10

In adults with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis, the amount of gentamicin removed from the blood may vary depending upon several factors including the dialysis method used. An eight-hour hemodialysis may reduce serum concentrations of gentamicin by approximately 50%. The recommended dose at the end of each dialysis period is 1 to 1.7 mg/kg depending upon the severity of infection.

The above dosage schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of gentamicin serum levels is not feasible.

A variety of methods are available to measure gentamicin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiologic, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques.

Gentamicin Sulfate Injection is a ready-to-use isotonic solution. NO DILUTION OR BUFFERING IS REQUIRED.

If the prescribed dose is exactly 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 mg, use the appropriate container. If the prescribed dose is higher or lower than that of the supplied container, adjustments can be made in either container. If the dose is higher than the contents of the 100 mg container, the additional amount should be removed from a container of gentamicin sulfate (40 mg/mL) and added to the 100 mg container. If the prescribed dose is less, decrements can be made by removing and discarding the appropriate amount from either unit.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: DO NOT USE FLEXIBLE CONTAINER IN SERIES CONNECTIONS.
Corlopam

Corlopam

Adult Patients: The optimal magnitude and rate of blood pressure reduction in acutely hypertensive patients have not been rigorously determined, but, in general, both delay and too rapid decreases appear undesirable in sick adult patients. An initial fenoldopam dose may be chosen from Tables 2 and 3 in the Clinical Pharmacology Section that produces the desired magnitude and rate of blood pressure reduction in a given clinical situation. Doses below 0.1 mcg/kg/min have very modest effects and appear only marginally useful in this population. In general, as the initial dose increases, there is a greater and more rapid blood pressure reduction. However, lower initial doses (0.03 to 0.1 mcg/kg/min) titrated slowly have been associated with less reflex tachycardia than have higher initial doses (≥ 0.3 mcg/kg/min). In clinical trials, doses from 0.01 to 1.6 mcg/kg/min have been studied. Most of the effect of a given infusion rate is attained in 15 minutes.

Fenoldopam should be administered by continuous intravenous infusion. A bolus dose should not be used. Hypotension and rapid decreases of blood pressure should be avoided. The initial dose should be titrated upward or downward, no more frequently than every 15 minutes (and less frequently as goal pressure is approached) to achieve the desired therapeutic effect. The recommended increments for titration are 0.05 to 0.1 mcg/kg/min.

Use of a calibrated, mechanical infusion pump is recommended for proper control of infusion rate during fenoldopam infusion. In clinical trials, fenoldopam treatment was safely performed without the need for intra-arterial blood pressure monitoring; blood pressure and heart rate were monitored at frequent intervals, typically every 15 minutes. Frequent blood pressure monitoring is recommended.

Fenoldopam infusion can be abruptly discontinued or gradually tapered prior to discontinuation. Oral antihypertensive agents can be added during fenoldopam infusion or following its discontinuation. Patients in controlled clinical trials have received intravenous fenoldopam for as long as 48 hours.

PREPARATION OF INFUSION SOLUTION

WARNING: CONTENTS OF AMPULES MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE INFUSION. EACH AMPULE IS FOR SINGLE USE ONLY.

Dilution:

Adult Patients: The fenoldopam injection ampule concentrate must be diluted in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, using the following dilution schedule:

mL of Concentrate (mg of drug)

Added to

Final Concentration

4 mL (40 mg)

1000 mL

40 mcg/mL

2 mL (20 mg)

500 mL

40 mcg/mL

1 mL (10 mg)

250 mL

40 mcg/mL

The drug dose rate must be individualized according to body weight and according to the desired rapidity and extent of pharmacodynamic effect. Table 5 provides the calculated infusion volume in mL/hour for a range of drug doses and body weights. The infusion should be administered using a calibrated mechanical infusion pump that can accurately and reliably deliver the desired infusion rate.

Infusion Rates:
Table 5
FENOLDOPAM ADULT INFUSION RATES (mL/hour)

DRUG DOSAGE FOR ADULTS > 40 KG, USING 40 MCG/ML CONCENTRATION

NOTE: CONCENTRATION IS DIFFERENT FROM PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, TABLE 6.

Infusion Rate

Body Weight

(kg)

0.025

mcg/kg/min

0.05

mcg/kg/min

0.1

mcg/kg/min

0.2

mcg/kg/min

0.3

mcg/kg/min

Infusion Rates (mL/hour) of 40 mcg/mL solution

40

1.5

3

6

12

18

50

1.9

3.8

7.5

15

22.5

60

2.3

4.5

9

18

27

70

2.6

5.3

10.5

21

31.5

80

3

6

12

24

36

90

3.4

6.8

13.5

27

40.5

100

3.8

7.5

15

30

45

110

4.1

8.3

16.5

33

49.5

120

4.5

9

18

36

54

130

4.9

9.8

19.5

39

58.5

140

5.3

10.5

21

42

63

150

5.6

11.3

22.5

45

67.5

Table 5 (continued)

FENOLDOPAM ADULT INFUSION RATES (mL/hour)

DRUG DOSAGE FOR ADULTS > 40 KG, USING 40 MCG/ML CONCENTRATION

NOTE: CONCENTRATION IS DIFFERENT FROM PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, TABLE 6.

Infusion Rate

Body Weight

(kg)

0.5
mcg/kg/min
0.8
mcg/kg/min
1

mcg/kg/min

1.2

mcg/kg/min

1.4
mcg/kg/min
1.6

mcg/kg/min

Infusion Rates (mL/hour) of 40 mcg/mL solution

40

30

48

60

72

84

96

50

37.5

60

75

90

105

120

60

45

72

90

108

126

144

70

52.5

84

105

126

147

168

80

60

96

120

144

168

192

90

67.5

108

135

162

189

216

100

75

120

150

180

210

240

110

82.5

132

165

198

231

264

120

90

144

180

216

252

288

130

97.5

156

195

234

273

312

140

105

168

210

252

294

336

150

112.5

180

225

270

315

360

The diluted solution is stable under normal ambient light and temperature conditions for at least 24 hours. Diluted solution that is not used within 24 hours of preparation should be discarded. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. If particulate matter or cloudiness is observed, the drug should be discarded.

Pediatric Patients: Fenoldopam should be administered intravenously to pediatric patients by a continuous infusion pump appropriate for the delivery of low infusion rates. Monitoring of blood pressure should be continuous, usually by way of an intra-arterial line. Heart rate should also be continuously monitored. In the clinical trial, the usual starting dose was 0.2 mcg/kg/min with an effect on MAP evident within 5 minutes. At a constant infusion rate the effect was maximal after 20 to 25 minutes. Increased dosages of up to 0.3 to 0.5 mcg/kg/min every 20 to 30 minutes were generally well tolerated. Tachycardia without further decrease in MAP occurred at dosages greater than 0.8 mcg/kg/min. Upon discontinuation of the fenoldopam infusion after an average of 4 hours of therapy, blood pressure and heart rate returned to near baseline within 30 minutes.

PREPARATION OF INFUSION SOLUTION

WARNING: CONTENTS OF AMPULES MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE INFUSION. EACH AMPULE IS FOR SINGLE USE ONLY.

Dilution:

Pediatric Patients:

mL of Concentrate (mg of drug)

Added to

Final Concentration

3 mL (30 mg)

500 mL

60 mcg/mL

1.5 mL (15 mg)

250 mL

60 mcg/mL

0.6 mL (6 mg)

100 mL

60 mcg/mL

Table 6 provides the calculated infusion volume in mL/hour for a range of drug doses and body weights. The infusion should be administered using a calibrated mechanical infusion pump that can accurately and reliably deliver the desired infusion rate. As low flow rates (e.g., <0.5 mL/hr) may not be practical, and due to volume overload, it may be necessary to increase the concentration of fenoldopam in the infused solutions.

Infusion Rates:
Table 6 FENOLDOPAM PEDIATRIC INFUSION RATES (mL/hour) DRUG DOSAGE FOR CHILDREN BETWEEN 5 AND 70 KG, USING 60 MCG/ML CONCENTRATION
NOTE: CONCENTRATION IS DIFFERENT FROM ADULT PATIENTS, TABLE 5.

Body Weight

(kg)

Infusion Rate

0.2

mcg/kg/min

0.5

mcg/kg/min

0.8

mcg/kg/min

1

mcg/kg/min

1.2

mcg/kg/min

Infusion Rates (mL/hour) of 60 mcg/mL solution

5

1

2.5

4

5

6

10

2

5

8

10

12

20

4

10

16

20

24

30

6

15

24

30

36

40

8

20

32

40

48

50

10

25

40

50

60

60

12

30

48

60

72

70

14

35

56

70

84

The diluted solution is stable under normal ambient light and temperature conditions for at least 24 hours. Diluted solution that is not used within 24 hours of preparation should be discarded. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. If particulate matter or cloudiness is observed, the drug should be discarded.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

Use in accord with any warnings or precautions appropriate to the medication being administered.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection, is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer.

This parenteral should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Sufentanil Citrate

Sufentanil Citrate

The dosage of sufentanil should be individualized in each case according to body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, and type of surgical procedure and anesthesia. In obese patients (more than 20% above ideal total body weight), the dosage of sufentanil citrate should be determined on the basis of lean body weight. Dosage should be reduced in elderly and debilitated patients (see PRECAUTIONS).

Vital signs should be monitored routinely.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Because the clearance of sufentanil is reduced in neonates, especially those with cardiovascular disease, the dose of sufentanil should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intravenous Use

Sufentanil Citrate may be administered intravenously by slow injection or infusion 1) in doses of up to 8 mcg/kg as an analgesic adjunct to general anesthesia, and 2) in doses ≥ 8 mcg/kg as a primary anesthetic agent for induction and maintenance of anesthesia (see Dosage Range Chart).

If benzodiazepines, barbiturates, inhalation agents, other opioids or other central nervous system depressants are used concomitantly, the dose of sufentanil and/or these agents should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). In all cases dosage should be titrated to individual patient response.

Usage In Children: For induction and maintenance of anesthesia in children less than 12 years of age undergoing cardiovascular surgery, an anesthetic dose of 10 to 25 mcg/kg administered with 100% oxygen is generally recommended. Supplemental dosages of up to 25 to 50 mcg are recommended for maintenance, based on response to initial dose and as determined by changes in vital signs indicating surgical stress or lightening of anesthesia.

Premedication: The selection of preanesthetic medications should be based upon the needs of the individual patient.

Neuromuscular Blocking Agents: The neuromuscular blocking agent selected should be compatible with the patient’s condition, taking into account the hemodynamic effects of a particular muscle relaxant and the degree of skeletal muscle relaxation required (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

ADULT DOSAGE RANGE CHART FOR INTRAVENOUS USE (expressed as Sufentanil)

ANALGESIC COMPONENT TO GENERAL ANESTHESIA

* Total Dosage Requirements of 1 mcg/kg/hr or Less are Recommended

Total Dosage

Maintenance Dosage

ANALGESIC DOSAGES

Incremental or Infusion:

Incremental:

1 to 2 mcg/kg (expected duration of anesthesia 1 to 2 hours). Approximately 75% or more of total sufentanil dosage may be administered prior to intubation by either slow injection or infusion titrated to individual patient response. Dosages in this range are generally administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen in patients undergoing general surgery in which endotracheal intubation and mechanical ventilation are required.

10 to 25 mcg (0.2 to 0.5 mL) may be administered in increments as needed when movement and/or changes in vital signs indicate surgical stress or lightening of analgesia. Supplemental dosages should be individualized and adjusted to remaining operative time anticipated.

Infusion:

Sufentanil may be administered as an intermittent or continuous infusion as needed in response to signs of lightening of analgesia. In absence of signs of lightening of analgesia, infusion rates should always be adjusted downward until there is some response to surgical stimulation. Maintenance infusion rates should be adjusted based upon the induction dose of sufentanil so that the total dose does not exceed 1 mcg/kg/hr of expected surgical time. Dosage should be individualized and adjusted to remaining operative time anticipated.

Incremental or Infusion:

Incremental:

2 to 8 mcg/kg (expected duration of anesthesia 2 to 8 hours). Approximately 75% or less of the total calculated sufentanil dosage may be administered by slow injection or infusion prior to intubation, titrated to individual patient response. Dosages in this range are generally administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen in patients undergoing more complicated major surgical procedures in which endotracheal intubation and mechanical ventilation are required. At dosages in this range, sufentanil has been shown to provide some attenuation of sympathetic reflex activity in response to surgical stimuli, provide hemodynamic stability, and provide relatively rapid recovery.

10 to 50 mcg (0.2 to 1 mL) may be administered in increments as needed when movement and/or changes in vital signs indicate surgical stress or lightening of analgesia. Supplemental dosages should be individualized and adjusted to the remaining operative time anticipated.

Infusion:

Sufentanil may be administered as an intermittent or continuous infusion as needed in response to signs of lightening of analgesia. In the absence of signs of lightening of analgesia, infusion rates should always be adjusted downward until there is some response to surgical stimulation. Maintenance infusion rates should be adjusted based upon the induction dose of sufentanil so that the total dose does not exceed 1 mcg/kg/hr of expected surgical time. Dosage should be individualized and adjusted to remaining operative time anticipated.

ADULT DOSAGE RANGE CHART FOR INTRAVENOUS USE (expressed as Sufentanil)

ANALGESIC COMPONENT TO GENERAL ANESTHESIA

* Total Dosage Requirements of 1 mcg/kg/hr or Less are Recommended

Total Dosage

Maintenance Dosage

ANESTHETIC DOSAGES

Incremental or Infusion:

Incremental:

8 to 30 mcg/kg (anesthetic doses). At this anesthetic dosage range sufentanil is generally administered as a slow injection, as an infusion, or as an injection followed by an infusion. Sufentanil with 100% oxygen and a muscle relaxant has been found to produce sleep at dosages ≥ 8 mcg/kg and to maintain a deep level of anesthesia without the use of additional anesthetic agents. The addition of N2O to these dosages will reduce systolic blood pressure. At dosages in this range of up to 25 mcg/kg, catecholamine release is attenuated. Dosages of 25 to 30 mcg/kg have been shown to block sympathetic response including catecholamine release. High doses are indicated in patients undergoing major surgical procedures, in which endotracheal intubation and mechanical ventilation are required, such as cardiovascular surgery and neurosurgery in the sitting position with maintenance of favorable myocardial and cerebral oxygen balance. Postoperative observation is essential and postoperative mechanical ventilation may be required at the higher dosage range due to extended postoperative respiratory depression. Dosage should be titrated to individual patient response.

Depending on the initial dose, maintenance doses of 0.5 to 10 mcg/kg may be administered by slow injection in anticipation of surgical stress such as incision, sternotomy or cardiopulmonary bypass.

Infusion:

Sufentanil may be administered by continuous or intermittent infusion as needed in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia. In the absence of lightening of anesthesia, infusion rates should always be adjusted downward until there is some response to surgical stimulation. The maintenance infusion rate for sufentanil should be based upon the induction dose so that the total dose for the procedure does not exceed 30 mcg/kg.

In patients administered high doses of sufentanil citrate, it is essential that qualified personnel and adequate facilities are available for the management of postoperative respiratory depression.

Also see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS sections.

For purposes of administering small volumes of sufentanil citrate injection accurately, the use of a tuberculin syringe or equivalent is recommended.

Epidural Use in Labor and Delivery

Proper placement of the needle or catheter in the epidural space should be verified before sufentanil is injected to assure that unintentional intravascular or intrathecal administration does not occur. Unintentional intravascular injection of sufentanil could result in a potentially serious overdose, including acute truncal muscular rigidity and apnea. Unintentional intrathecal injection of the full sufentanil, bupivacaine epidural doses and volume could produce effects of high spinal anesthesia including prolonged paralysis and delayed recovery. If analgesia is inadequate, the placement and integrity of the catheter should be verified prior to the administration of any additional epidural medications. Sufentanil should be administered by slow injection. Respiration should be closely monitored following each administration of an epidural injection of sufentanil.

Dosage for Labor and Delivery: The recommended dosage is sufentanil 10 to 15 mcg administered with 10 mL bupivacaine 0.125% with or without epinephrine. Sufentanil and bupivacaine should be mixed together before administration. Doses can be repeated twice (for a total of three doses) at not less than one-hour intervals until delivery.
Ionosol And Dextrose

Ionosol And Dextrose

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

In infants, Ionosol MB and 5% Dextrose Injection is given only after administration of an initial priming solution: 15 mL of half isotonic saline in 5% dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection/kg of body weight, administered to small infants at a maximum rate of 0.8 mL/minute. Infants typically tolerate not more than 150 to 200 mL of Ionosol MB and 5% Dextrose Injection per kg body weight/day.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

In adults, intravenous infusions of Ionosol MB and 5% Dextrose Injection are given postoperatively, at a rate not greater than 4 mL/minute.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. See PRECAUTIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open:

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

To Administer

Attach administration set per manufacturer’s instructions.

Regulate rate of administration per institutional policy.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

NOTE: This drug product is not for direct bolus injection. Text referring to direct bolus injection is provided for information purposes only.

Direct Intravenous Single Injections (Bolus)

The initial dose of Diltiazem Hydrochloride Injection should be 0.25 mg/kg actual body weight as a bolus administered over 2 minutes (20 mg is a reasonable dose for the average patient). If response is inadequate, a second dose may be administered after 15 minutes. The second bolus dose of diltiazem hydrochloride injection should be 0.35 mg/kg actual body weight administered over 2 minutes (25 mg is a reasonable dose for the average patient). Subsequent intravenous bolus doses should be individualized for each patient. Patients with low body weights should be dosed on a mg/kg basis. Some patients may respond to an initial dose of 0.15 mg/kg, although duration of action may be shorter. Experience with this dose is limited.

Continuous Intravenous Infusion

For continued reduction of the heart rate (up to 24 hours) in patients with atrial fibrillation or atrial flutter, an intravenous infusion of diltiazem hydrochloride may be administered. Immediately following bolus administration of 20 mg (0.25 mg/kg) or 25 mg (0.35 mg/kg) diltiazem hydrochloride injection and reduction of heart rate, begin an intravenous infusion of diltiazem hydrochloride injection. The recommended initial infusion rate of diltiazem hydrochloride injection is 10 mg/h. Some patients may maintain response to an initial rate of 5 mg/h. The infusion rate may be increased in 5 mg/h increments up to 15 mg/h as needed, if further reduction in heart rate is required. The infusion may be maintained for up to 24 hours.

Diltiazem shows dose-dependent, non-linear pharmacokinetics. Duration of infusion longer than 24 hours and infusion rates greater than 15 mg/h have not been studied. Therefore, infusion duration exceeding 24 hours and infusion rates exceeding 15 mg/h are not recommended.

Dilution: To prepare Diltiazem Hydrochloride for Injection for continuous intravenous infusion, assemble the ADD-Vantage vial as directed for use with either 0.9% Sodium Chloride or Dextrose (5%) injection. Mix thoroughly. Keep diluted Diltiazem Hydrochloride for Injection at controlled room temperature (15° to 30°C) (59° to 86°F) [See USP.] or refrigerated (2° to 8°C) (36° to 46°F) until use. Use within 24 hours.

Diluent Volume

Quantity of Diltiazem Hydrochloride to Add

Final Concentration

Administration

Dose*

Infusion Rate

100 mL

100 mg

(1 ADD-Vantage® Vial)

1 mg/mL

10 mg/h

10 mL/h

15 mg/h
15 mL/h
*5 mg/h may be appropriate for some patients.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Use Vial in ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container

To Open:

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows:

a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the tie membrane, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.)

Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go.NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.)

Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly.

Label appropriately.

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

To Reconstitute the Drug:

Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial.

With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.)

Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix.

Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents.

Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired.

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible containers in series connections.

Compatibility:

Diltiazem Hydrochloride Injection was tested for compatibility with three commonly used intravenous fluids at a maximal concentration of 1 mg diltiazem hydrochloride per milliliter. Diltiazem Hydrochloride Injection was found to be physically compatible and chemically stable in the following parenteral solutions for at least 24 hours when stored in polyvinylchloride (PVC) bags at controlled room temperature 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [see USP] or under refrigeration 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F).

* dextrose (5%) injection, USP

* sodium chloride (0.9%) injection, USP

* dextrose (5%) and sodium chloride (0.45%) injection, USP

Physical incompatibilities:

Because of potential physical incompatibilities, it is recommended that diltiazem hydrochloride not be mixed with any other drugs in the same container. If possible, it is recommended that diltiazem hydrochloride not be coinfused in the same intravenous line. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Diltiazem hydrochloride. Physical incompatibilities (precipitate formation or cloudiness) were observed when diltiazem hydrochloride was infused in the same intravenous line with the following drugs: acetazolamide, acyclovir, aminophylline, ampicillin, ampicillin sodium/sulbactam sodium, cefamandole, cefoperazone, diazepam, furosemide, hydrocortisone sodium succinate, insulin, (regular: 100 units/mL), methylprednisolone sodium succinate, mezlocillin, nafcillin, phenytoin, rifampin, and sodium bicarbonate.

NOTE: Diltiazem Hydrochloride for Injection at a concentration of 1 mg/mL diluted in normal saline was infused in the same intravenous line and was found to be compatible with the following drugs: aminophylline, ampicillin sodium, ampicillin sodium/sulbactam sodium, cefamandole, hydrocortisone sodium succinate, regular insulin (100 units/mL), methylprednisolone sodium succinate, mezlocillin sodium, nafcillin sodium and sodium bicarbonate.

Transition to Further Antiarrhythmic Therapy:

Transition to other antiarrhythmic agents following administration of diltiazem hydrochloride injection is generally safe. However, reference should be made to the respective agent manufacturer’s package insert for information relative to dosage and administration.

In controlled clinical trials, therapy with antiarrhythmic agents to maintain reduced heart rate in atrial fibrillation or atrial flutter or for prophylaxis of PSVT was generally started within 3 hours after bolus administration of diltiazem. These antiarrhythmic agents were intravenous or oral digoxin, Class 1 antiarrhythmics (e.g., quinidine, procainamide), calcium channel blockers, and oral beta-blockers.

Experience in the use of antiarrhythmic agents following maintenance infusion of diltiazem hydrochloride injection is limited. Patients should be dosed on an individual basis and reference should be made to the respective manufacturer’s package insert for information relative to dosage and administration.
Aminosyn Sulfite Free

Aminosyn Sulfite Free

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

1. Peripheral Vein Nutritional Maintenance

Aminosyn 10% (pH 6), Sulfite-Free, (an amino acid injection) may be diluted with 5% to 10% Dextrose Injection to achieve a final amino acid concentration of 3.5, 4.25 or 5% for peripheral administration.

For peripheral intravenous infusion, 1.0 to 1.5 g/kg/day of total amino acids will achieve optimal fat mobilization and reduce protein catabolism. Infusion or ingestion of carbohydrate or lipid will not reduce the nitrogen sparing effect of intravenous amino acid infusions at this dose.

As with all intravenous fluid therapy, the primary aim is to provide sufficient water to compensate for insensible, urinary and other (nasogastric suction, fistula drainage, diarrhea) fluid losses. Total fluid requirements, as well as electrolyte and acid-base needs, should be estimated and appropriately administered.

For an amino acid solution of specified total concentration, the volume required to meet amino acid requirements per 24 hours can be calculated. After making an estimate of the total daily fluid (water) requirement, the balance of fluid needed beyond the volume of amino acid solution required can be provided either as a noncarbohydrate or a carbohydrate-containing electrolyte solution. I.V. lipid emulsion may be substituted for part of the carbohydrate containing solution. Vitamins and additional electrolytes as needed for maintenance or to correct imbalances may be added to the amino acid solution.

If desired, only one-half of an estimated daily amino acid requirement of 1.5 g/kg can be given on the first day. Amino acids together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10%, infused into a peripheral vein can be continued while oral nutrition is impaired. However, if a patient is unable to take oral nourishment for a prolonged period of time, institution of total parenteral nutrition with exogenous calories should be considered.

2. Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

Adults

Diluted solutions containing 3.5 to 5% amino acids with 5 to 10% glucose may be coinfused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day.

Aminosyn 10% (pH 6) solution should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered separately to provide part of the calories, if desired.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn solutions without electrolytes are intended for patients requiring individualized electrolyte therapy. Sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, calcium and magnesium are major electrolytes which should be added to Aminosyn as required.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated. The usual dose of phosphate added to a liter of TPN solution (containing 25% dextrose) is 12mM. This requirement is related to the carbohydrate calories delivered. Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphate additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture. However, if one additive is added to the amino acid container, and the other to the container of concentrated dextrose, and if the contents of both containers are swirled before they are combined, then the likelihood of physical incompatibility is reduced.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, the 10% solution is used in equal volume with 50% dextrose to provide an admixture containing 5% amino acids and 25% dextrose.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn 10% (pH 6) solution, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure.

Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

Pediatric

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from containers containing 500 mL or less. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate Injection is intended for intravenous administration.

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Morphine Sulfate Injection is available in five concentrations for direct injection. Take care when prescribing and administering Morphine Sulfate Injection to avoid dosing errors due to confusion between different concentrations and between mg and mL, which could result in accidental overdose and death. Take care to ensure the proper dose is communicated and dispensed. When writing prescriptions, include both the total dose in mg and total dose in volume.

Administration Morphine Sulfate Injection should be limited to use by those familiar with the management of respiratory depression. Morphine must be injected slowly; rapid intravenous administration may result in chest wall rigidity.

Selection of patients for treatment with Morphine Sulfate Injection USP should be governed by the same principles that apply to the use of similar opioid analgesics. Individualize treatment in every case, using non-opioid analgesics, opioids on an as needed basis and/or combination products, and chronic opioid therapy in a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, and the American Pain Society.

2.2 Individualization of Dosage

Adjust the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient’s prior analgesic treatment experience. In the selection of the initial dose of Morphine Sulfate Injection USP, give attention to the following:
the total daily dose, potency and specific characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously; the reliability of the relative potency estimate used to calculate the equivalent Morphine Sulfate Injection USP dose needed; the patient’s degree of opioid tolerance; the general condition and medical status of the patient; concurrent medications; the type and severity of the patient’s pain; risk factors for abuse, addiction or diversion, including a prior history of abuse, addiction or diversion
The following dosing recommendations, therefore, can only be considered suggested approaches to what is actually a series of clinical decisions over time in the management of the pain of each individual patient.

Continual re-evaluation of the patient receiving Morphine Sulfate Injection USP is important, with special attention to the management of pain and the relative incidence of side effects associated with therapy.

During periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration, frequent contact is recommended between the physician, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family.

2.3 Direct Intravenous Injection

The usual starting dose in adults is 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg per kg every 4 hours as needed to manage pain. Administer the injection slowly.

2.4 Dosing with Hepatic and Renal Impairment

Morphine Sulfate pharmacokinetics have been reported to be significantly altered in patients with cirrhosis and renal failure. Start these patients cautiously with lower doses of Morphine Sulfate Injection USP and titrate slowly while carefully monitoring for side effects. [See Use in Specific Populations (8.7 and 8.8).]

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Morphine Sulfate Injection is available in five concentrations for direct injection. Take care when prescribing and administering Morphine Sulfate Injection to avoid dosing errors due to confusion between different concentrations and between mg and mL, which could result in accidental overdose and death. Take care to ensure the proper dose is communicated and dispensed. When writing prescriptions, include both the total dose in mg and total dose in volume.

Administration Morphine Sulfate Injection should be limited to use by those familiar with the management of respiratory depression. Morphine must be injected slowly; rapid intravenous administration may result in chest wall rigidity.

Selection of patients for treatment with Morphine Sulfate Injection USP should be governed by the same principles that apply to the use of similar opioid analgesics. Individualize treatment in every case, using non-opioid analgesics, opioids on an as needed basis and/or combination products, and chronic opioid therapy in a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, and the American Pain Society.

2.2 Individualization of Dosage

Adjust the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient’s prior analgesic treatment experience. In the selection of the initial dose of Morphine Sulfate Injection USP, give attention to the following:
the total daily dose, potency and specific characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously; the reliability of the relative potency estimate used to calculate the equivalent Morphine Sulfate Injection USP dose needed; the patient’s degree of opioid tolerance; the general condition and medical status of the patient; concurrent medications; the type and severity of the patient’s pain; risk factors for abuse, addiction or diversion, including a prior history of abuse, addiction or diversion
The following dosing recommendations, therefore, can only be considered suggested approaches to what is actually a series of clinical decisions over time in the management of the pain of each individual patient.

Continual re-evaluation of the patient receiving Morphine Sulfate Injection USP is important, with special attention to the management of pain and the relative incidence of side effects associated with therapy.

During periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration, frequent contact is recommended between the physician, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family.

2.3 Direct Intravenous Injection

The usual starting dose in adults is 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg per kg every 4 hours as needed to manage pain. Administer the injection slowly.

2.4 Dosing with Hepatic and Renal Impairment

Morphine Sulfate pharmacokinetics have been reported to be significantly altered in patients with cirrhosis and renal failure. Start these patients cautiously with lower doses of Morphine Sulfate Injection USP and titrate slowly while carefully monitoring for side effects. [See Use in Specific Populations (8.7 and 8.8).]
Demerol

Demerol

For Relief of Pain

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. While subcutaneous administration is suitable for occasional use, intramuscular administration is preferred when repeated doses are required. If intravenous administration is required, dosage should be decreased and the injection made very slowly, preferably utilizing a diluted solution. The dose of DEMEROL should be proportionately reduced (usually by 25 to 50 percent) when administered concomitantly with phenothiazines and many other tranquilizers since they potentiate the action of DEMEROL.

Adults. The usual dosage is 50 mg to 150 mg intramuscularly or subcutaneously every 3 or 4 hours as necessary. Elderly patients should usually be given meperidine at the lower end of the dose range and observed closely.

Children. The usual dosage is 0.5 mg/lb to 0.8 mg/lb intramuscularly or subcutaneously up to the adult dose, every 3 or 4 hours as necessary.

For Preoperative Medication

Adults. The usual dosage is 50 mg to 100 mg intramuscularly or subcutaneously, 30 to 90 minutes before the beginning of anesthesia. Elderly patients should usually be given meperidine at the lower end of the dose range and observed closely.

Children. The usual dosage is 0.5 mg/lb to 1 mg/lb intramuscularly or subcutaneously up to the adult dose, 30 to 90 minutes before the beginning of anesthesia.

For Support of Anesthesia

Repeated slow intravenous injections of fractional doses (e.g., 10 mg/mL) or continuous intravenous infusion of a more dilute solution (e.g., 1 mg/mL) should be used. The dose should be titrated to the needs of the patient and will depend on the premedication and type of anesthesia being employed, the characteristics of the particular patient, and the nature and duration of the operative procedure. Elderly patients should usually be given meperidine at the lower end of the dose range and observed closely.

For Obstetrical Analgesia

The usual dosage is 50 mg to 100 mg intramuscularly or subcutaneously when pain becomes regular, and may be repeated at 1- to 3-hour intervals.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, after dilution in 50 or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or by intravenous infusion.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy.

Converting to Oral Anticoagulant: When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. If continuous I.V. heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect with Full-Dose Heparin. Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:

Method of Administration

Frequency

Recommended dose*

Intermittent

Intravenous Injection

Initial Dose

10,000 Units, in 50—100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

Every 4 to 6 hours

5000—10,000 Units, in 50—100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

Continuous

Intravenous Infusion

Initial Dose

5000 Units by I.V. Injection

Continuous

20,000—40,000 Units/24 hours in 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

* Based on 150 lb. (68 kg) patient.

Pediatric Use: There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:

Initial Dose: 75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes)

Maintenance Dose Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour;

Infants < 2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour)

Children > 1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour;

Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage

Monitoring: Adjust heparin to maintain a PTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70.

Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels: Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units per kilogram is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.

Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism: A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having brain or spinal cord surgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery, or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. Prior to initiating heparinization the physician should rule out bleeding disorders by appropriate history and laboratory tests, and appropriate coagulation tests should be repeated just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated at these times.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency. See PRECAUTIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows:

a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (see Figure 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (see Figure 2.) NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (see Figure 3.)

Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately ½ turn (180°) after the first audible click. (see Figure 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (see Figure 4.)

Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly.

Label appropriately.

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

To Prepare Admixture:

Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial.

With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (see Figure 5.)

Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (see Figure 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix.

Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)

Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents.

Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired.

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Novamine

Novamine

The appropriate daily dose of amino acids to be used with dextrose or with dextrose and intravenous fat emulsion will depend upon the metabolic status and clinical response of the patient as therapy proceeds. Doses which achieve nitrogen equilibrium or positive balance are the most desirable. The dosage on the first day should be approximately half the anticipated optimal dosage and should be increased gradually to minimize glycosuria; similarly, withdrawal should be accomplished gradually to avoid rebound hypoglycemia.

Fat emulsion coadministration should be considered when prolonged (more than 5 days) parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (EFAD). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of EFAD in patients maintained on fat free TPN.

The amount administered is dosed on the basis of amino acids/kg of body weight/day. In general, two to three g/kg of body weight for neonates and infants with adequate calories are sufficient to satisfy protein needs and promote positive nitrogen balance. In pediatric patients, the final solution should not exceed twice normal serum osmolarity (718 mOsmol/L).

DIRECTIONS FOR PROPER USE OF PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE

Novamine® 15% in a Pharmacy Bulk Package is not intended for direct infusion. The container closure may be penetrated only once using a suitable sterile transfer device or dispensing set which allows measured dispensing of the contents. The Pharmacy Bulk Package is to be used only in a suitable work area such as a laminar flow hood (or an equivalent clean air compounding area). Once the closure is penetrated, the contents should be dispensed as soon as possible; the transfer of contents must be completed within 4 hours of closure entry. The bottle may be stored at room temperature (25°C) after the closure has been entered. Date and time of container entry should be noted in the area designated on the container label.

When using Novamine® 15% in patients with a need for fluid volume restriction, it can be diluted as follows:

Volume

Amount

Final Concentration

Novamine® 15%

500 mL

75 g

7.5%

Dextrose 70%

250 mL

175 g

17.5%

Intralipid® 20%

250 mL

50 g

5.0%

This will provide 1395 kilocalories (kcal) per 1000 mL of admixture with a ratio of 118 non-protein calories per gram of nitrogen and an osmolarity of 1561 mOsmol/L.

In patients where the need for fluid restriction is not so marked, either of the following regimens may be used dependent upon the energy needs of the patient.

Volume

Amount

Final Concentration

Novamine® 15%

500 mL

75 g

3.75%

Dextrose 50%

1000 mL

500 g

25%

Intralipid® 20%

500 mL

100 g

5%

This will provide 1500 kcal per 1000 mL of admixture with a ratio of 228 non-protein calories per gram of nitrogen and an osmolarity of 1633 mOsmol/L.

Volume

Amount

Final Concentration

Novamine® 15%

500 mL

75 g

3.75%

Dextrose 30%

1000 mL

300 g

15%

Intralipid® 10%

500 mL

50 g

2.5%

This will provide 935 kcal per 1000 mL of admixture with a ratio of 158 non-protein calories per gram of nitrogen and an osmolarity of 1128.5 mOsmol/L.

A. Total Parenteral Nutrition (Central Infusion)

In unstressed adult patients with no unusual nitrogen losses, a minimum dosage of 0.1 gram nitrogen (4.2 mL of Novamine® 15%) plus 4.4 grams (15 calories) of dextrose per kilogram of body weight per day are required to achieve nitrogen balance and weight stability. Intravenous fat emulsion may be used as a partial substitute for dextrose. This regimen provides a ratio of 150 non-protein calories per gram of nitrogen.

For patients stressed by surgery, trauma or sepsis, and those with unusual nitrogen losses, the dosage required for maintenance may be as high as 0.3 to 0.4 grams of nitrogen (13 to 17 mL Novamine® 15%) per kilogram of body weight per day, with proportionate increases in non-protein calories. Periodic assessment of nitrogen balance of the individual patient is the best indicator of proper dosage. Volume overload and glycosuria may be encountered at high dosage, and nitrogen balance may not be achieved in extremely hypermetabolic patients under these constraints. Concomitant insulin administration may be required to minimize glycosuria. Daily laboratory monitoring is essential.

Use of an infusion pump is advisable to maintain a steady infusion rate during central venous infusion.

B. Peripheral Nutrition

In patients for whom central venous catheterization is not advisable, protein catabolism can be reduced by peripheral use of diluted Novamine® 15% plus non-protein calorie sources. Dilution of 250 mL Novamine® 15% in 750 mL of 10% dextrose will reduce the osmolarity to a level (724 mOsmol/L) which is more favorable to the maintenance of the integrity of the walls of the veins. Intravenous fat emulsion can be infused separately or simultaneously; if infused simultaneously the fat emulsion will provide a dilution effect upon the osmolarity while increasing the energy supply.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To reduce the risk of bacterial contamination, all intravenous administration sets should be replaced at least every 24 hours. Usage of admixtures must be initiated within 24 hours after mixing. If storage is necessary during this 24 hour period, admixtures must be refrigerated and completely used within 24 hours of beginning administration.
Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate Injection, USP is administered by intravenous infusion only after dilution in a 50 or 100 mL ADD-Vantage Flexible Diluent Container of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (See INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE).

The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. It is desirable to limit the duration of treatment with aminoglycosides to short term.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults: The recommended dosage of gentamicin sulfate for patients with serious infections and normal renal function is 3 mg/kg/day, administered in three equal doses every eight hours (Table 1).

For patients with life-threatening infections, dosages up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in three or four equal doses. The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated (Table 1).

It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations of gentamicin to determine the adequacy and safety of the dosage. When such measurements are feasible, they should be carried out periodically during therapy to assure adequate but not excessive drug levels. When monitoring peak concentrations after intravenous administration, dosage should be adjusted so that prolonged levels above 12 mcg/mL are avoided. When monitoring trough concentrations (just prior to the next dose), dosage should be adjusted so that levels above 2 mcg/mL are avoided. Determination of the adequacy of a serum level for a particular patient must take into consideration the susceptibility of the causative organism, the severity of the infection, and the status of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms. In patients with extensive burns, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. In such patients treated with gentamicin, measurement of serum concentrations is recommended as a basis for dosage adjustment.
Table 1
Dosage Schedule Guide For Adults With Normal Renal Function

(Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals)

Patient’s Weight*

Usual Dose for Serious Infections

1 mg/kg q8h

Dose for Life-Threatening Infections (Reduce as Soon as Clinically Indicated)

1.7 mg/kg q8h**

kg

(lb)

(3 mg/kg/day)

(5 mg/kg/day)

*The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass.

**For q6h schedules, dosage should be recalculated.

mg/dose

q8h

mg/dose

q8h

40

(88)

40

66

45

(99)

45

75

50

(110)

50

83

55

(121)

55

91

60

(132)

60

100

65

(143)

65

108

70

(154)

70

116

75

(165)

75

125

80

(176)

80

133

85

(187)

85

141

90

(198)

90

150

95

(209)

95

158

100

(220)

100

166

NOTE: For further information concerning the use of gentamicin in infants and children, see pediatric gentamicin sulfate injection product information.

The usual duration of treatment for all patients is seven to ten days. In difficult and complicated infections, a longer course of therapy may be necessary. In such cases monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is recommended, since toxicity is more apt to occur with treatment extended for more than ten days. Dosage should be reduced if clinically indicated.

For Intravenous Administration

The intravenous administration of gentamicin may be particularly useful for treating patients with bacterial septicemia or those in shock. It may also be the preferred route of administration for some patients with congestive heart failure, hematologic disorders, severe burns, or those with reduced muscle mass. For intermittent intravenous administration in adults, a single dose of gentamicin sulfate may be diluted in 50 or 100 mL of sterile 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or in a sterile solution of 5% Dextrose Injection,USP. The solution may be infused over a period of one-half to two hours.

Gentamicin sulfate should not be physically premixed with other drugs, but should be administered separately in accordance with the recommended route of administration and dosage schedule.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Dosage must be adjusted in patients with impaired renal function to assure therapeutically adequate, but not excessive blood levels. Whenever possible, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be monitored. One method of dosage adjustment is to increase the interval between administration of the usual doses. Since the serum creatinine concentration has a high correlation with the serum half-life of gentamicin, this laboratory test may provide guidance for adjustment of the interval between doses. The interval between doses (in hours) may be approximated by multiplying the serum creatinine level (mg/100 mL) by 8. For example, a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 60 mg (1 mg/kg) every 16 hours (2x8).

In patients with serious systemic infections and renal impairment, it may be desirable to administer the antibiotic more frequently but in reduced dosage. In such patients, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be measured so that adequate, but not excessive levels result. A peak and trough concentration measured intermittently during therapy will provide optimal guidance for adjusting dosage. After the usual initial dose, a rough guide for determining reduced dosage at eight-hour intervals is to divide the normally recommended dose by the serum creatinine level (Table 2). For example, after an initial dose of 60 mg (1 mg/kg), a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 30 mg every eight hours (60 ÷ 2). It should be noted that the status of renal function may be changing over the course of the infectious process.

It is important to recognize that deteriorating renal function may require a greater reduction in dosage than that specified in the above guidelines for patients with stable renal impairment.
Table 2
Dosage Adjustment Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment

(Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals After the Usual Initial Dose)

Serum Creatinine

(mg%)

Approximate Creatinine Clearance Rate

(mL/min/1.73M2)

Percent of Usual Doses Shown in

Table 1

≤1.0

                 >100

100

1.1 — 1.3

  70 —100

80

1.4 — 1.6

55 —  70

65

1.7 — 1.9

45 —  55

55

2.0 — 2.2

40 —  45

50

2.3 — 2.5

35 —  40

40

2.6 — 3.0

30 —  35

35

3.1 — 3.5

25 —  30

30

3.6 — 4.0

20 —  25

25

4.1 — 5.1

15 —  20

20

5.2 — 6.6

10 —  15

15

6.7 — 8.0

                 < 10

10

In adults with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis, the amount of gentamicin removed from the blood may vary depending upon several factors including the dialysis method used. An eight-hour hemodialysis may reduce serum concentrations of gentamicin by approximately 50%. The recommended dose at the end of each dialysis period is 1 to 1.7 mg/kg depending upon the severity of infection.

The above dosage schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of gentamicin serum levels is not feasible.

A variety of methods are available to measure gentamicin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiologic, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows:

a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.)

Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.)

Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly.

Label appropriately.

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

To Prepare Admixture:

Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial.

With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.)

Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix.

Mix container contents thoroughly and use within 24 hours of admixing.

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)

Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents.

Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired.

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Marcaine

Marcaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of MARCAINE should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible.

For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. MARCAINE is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

In recommended doses, MARCAINE produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations.

0.25%—when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions.

0.5%— provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential.

0.75%—produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.

The duration of anesthesia with MARCAINE is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient.

Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of MARCAINE up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case.

These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine.

The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. MARCAINE is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).

Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of MARCAINE, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.

Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of MARCAINE (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.)

Use in Dentistry: The 0.5% concentration with epinephrine is recommended for infiltration and block injection in the maxillary and mandibular area when a longer duration of local anesthetic action is desired, such as for oral surgical procedures generally associated with significant postoperative pain. The average dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) per injection site will usually suffice; an occasional second dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) may be used if necessary to produce adequate anesthesia after making allowance for 2 to 10 minutes onset time. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) The lowest effective dose should be employed and time should be allowed between injections; it is recommended that the total dose for all injection sites, spread out over a single dental sitting, should not ordinarily exceed 90 mg for a healthy adult patient (ten 1.8 mL injections of 0.5% MARCAINE with epinephrine). Injections should be made slowly and with frequent aspirations. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE in dentistry is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years.

Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use.

This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 1. Recommended Concentrations and Doses of MARCAINE 1 With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery.2 For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.3 See PRECAUTIONS.4 Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Type of Block

Conc.

Each Dose

Motor Block1

(mL)

(mg)

Local

infiltration

0.25%4

up to max.

up to max.

—

Epidural

0.75%2,4

10-20

75-150

complete

0.5%4

10-20

50-100

moderate to complete

0.25%4

10-20

25-50

partial to moderate

Caudal

0.5%4

15-30

75-150

moderate to complete

0.25%4

15-30

37.5-75

moderate

Peripheral nerves

0.5%4

5 to max.

25 to max.

moderate to complete

0.25%4

5 to max.

12.5 to max.

moderate to complete

Retrobulbar3

0.75%4

2-4

15-30

complete

Sympathetic

0.25%

20-50

50-125

—

Dental3

0.5% w/epi

1.8-3.6 per site

9-18 per site

—

Epidural3 Test Dose

0.5% w/epi

2-3

10-15 (10-15 micrograms epinephrine)

—
Aminosyn

Aminosyn

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

1. Peripheral Vein Nutritional Maintenance

Aminosyn 3.5%, Sulfite-Free, (a crystalline amino acid solution) together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% is suitable for administration by peripheral vein. This solution is not intended for central vein infusion since it does not contain adequate amounts of amino acids or electrolytes for administration with high concentrations of dextrose. Aminosyn 7%, 8.5% or 10% may be diluted with sterile water for injection or 5 to 10% Dextrose Injection to achieve a final amino acid concentration of 3.5, 4.25 or 5% for peripheral administration.

For peripheral intravenous infusion, 1.0 to 1.5 g/kg/day of total amino acids will reduce protein catabolism. Infusion or ingestion of carbohydrate or lipid will not reduce the nitrogen sparing effect of intravenous amino acid infusions at this dose.

As with all intravenous fluid therapy, the primary aim is to provide sufficient water to compensate for insensible, urinary and other (nasogastric suction, fistula drainage, diarrhea) fluid losses. Total fluid requirements, as well as electrolyte and acid-base needs, should be estimated and appropriately administered.

For an amino acid solution of specified total concentration, the volume required to meet amino acid requirements per 24 hours can be calculated. After making an estimate of the total daily fluid (water) requirement, the balance of fluid needed beyond the volume of amino acid solution required can be provided either as a noncarbohydrate or a carbohydrate-containing electrolyte solution. I.V. lipid emulsion may be substituted for part of the carbohydrate containing solution. Vitamins and additional electrolytes as needed for maintenance or to correct imbalances may be added to the amino acid solution.

If desired, only one-half of an estimated daily amino acid requirement of 1.5 g/kg can be given on the first day. Amino acids together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% infused into a peripheral vein can be continued while oral nutrition is impaired. However, if a patient is unable to take oral nourishment for a prolonged period of time, institution of total parenteral nutrition with exogenous calories should be considered.

2. Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

Adults

Solutions containing 3.5 to 5% amino acids with 5 to 10% glucose may be coinfused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day. Fat emulsion coadministration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (E.F.A.D.). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of EFAD in patients maintained on fat-free total parenteral nutrition.

Aminosyn 5%, 7%, 8.5% and 10% solutions should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered separately to provide part of the calories, if desired.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn solutions without electrolytes are intended for patients requiring individualized electrolyte therapy. Sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, calcium and magnesium are major electrolytes which should be added to Aminosyn as required.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated. The usual dose of phosphate added to a liter of TPN solution (containing 25% dextrose) is 12 mM. This requirement is related to the carbohydrate calories delivered. Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphate additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture. However, if one additive is added to the amino acid bottle, and the other to the bottle of concentrated dextrose, and if the contents of both bottles are swirled before they are combined, then the likelihood of physical incompatibility is reduced.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, the 7%, 8.5% or 10% solution is used in equal volume with 50% dextrose to provide an admixture containing 3.5%, 4.25% or 5% amino acids and 25% dextrose.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn 10% solution, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure.

Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

Pediatric

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To insure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from bottles containing 250 or 500 mL. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Plegisol

Plegisol

The following information is suggested as a guide and is subject to variation according to the preference and experience of the surgeon.

It is required that 10 mL (840 mg) of 8.4% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP (10 mEq each of sodium and bicarbonate) be added aseptically and thoroughly mixed with each 1000 mL of cardioplegic solution to adjust pH. Use 10 mL of Hospira List 4900, 8.4% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP, to achieve the approximate pH of 7.8 when measured at room temperature. Use of any other Sodium Bicarbonate Injection may not achieve this pH due to the varying pH’s of Sodium Bicarbonate Injections. Due to its inherent instability with other components, sodium bicarbonate must be added just prior to administration. After this addition, the solution must be used within 24 hours. The solution should be cooled to 4°C prior to use.

Following institution of cardiopulmonary bypass at perfusate temperatures of 28° to 30°C, and after cross-clamping of the ascending aorta, the buffered solution is administered by rapid infusion into the aortic root. The initial rate of infusion may be 300 mL/m2/minute (about 540 mL/min in a 5’8”, 70 kg adult with 1.8 square meters of surface area) given for a period of two to four minutes. Concurrent external cooling (regional hypothermia of the pericardium) may be accomplished by instilling a refrigerated (4°C) physiologic solution such as Normosol®-R (balanced electrolyte replacement solution) or Ringer’s Injection, USP into the chest cavity.

Should myocardial electromechanical activity persist or recur, the solution may be reinfused at a rate of 300 mL/m2/min for a period of two minutes. Reinfusion of the solution may be repeated every 20 to 30 minutes or sooner if myocardial temperature rises above 15° to 20°C or returning cardiac activity is observed. The regional hypothermia solution around the heart also may be replenished continuously or periodically in order to maintain adequate hypothermia. Suction may be used to remove warmed infusates. An implanted thermistor probe may be used to monitor myocardial temperature.

The volumes of solution instilled into the aortic root may vary depending on the duration or type of open heart surgical procedure.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To add 10 mL of 8.4% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP, Hospira List 4900, and other supplemental medication, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Attach aortic infusion device to set.

Open flow control clamp to expel air from set and aortic infusion device. Close clamp.

Position aortic infusion device to introduce solution into aortic root.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

Following suitable admixture of prescribed additive, the dose is usually dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Direct Intravenous Single Injections (Bolus)

The initial dose of Diltiazem Hydrochloride Injection should be 0.25 mg/kg actual body weight as a bolus administered over 2 minutes (20 mg is a reasonable dose for the average patient). If response is inadequate, a second dose may be administered after 15 minutes. The second bolus dose of diltiazem hydrochloride injection should be 0.35 mg/kg actual body weight administered over 2 minutes (25 mg is a reasonable dose for the average patient). Subsequent intravenous bolus doses should be individualized for each patient. Patients with low body weights should be dosed on a mg/kg basis. Some patients may respond to an initial dose of 0.15 mg/kg, although duration of action may be shorter. Experience with this dose is limited.

Continuous Intravenous Infusion

For continued reduction of the heart rate (up to 24 hours) in patients with atrial fibrillation or atrial flutter, an intravenous infusion of diltiazem hydrochloride may be administered. Immediately following bolus administration of 20 mg (0.25 mg/kg) or 25 mg (0.35 mg/kg) diltiazem hydrochloride injection and reduction of heart rate, begin an intravenous infusion of diltiazem hydrochloride. The recommended initial infusion rate of diltiazem hydrochloride is 10 mg/h. Some patients may maintain response to an initial rate of 5 mg/h. The infusion rate may be increased in 5 mg/h increments up to 15 mg/h as needed, if further reduction in heart rate is required. The infusion may be maintained for up to 24 hours.

Diltiazem shows dose-dependent, non-linear pharmacokinetics. Duration of infusion longer than 24 hours and infusion rates greater than 15 mg/h have not been studied. Therefore, infusion duration exceeding 24 hours and infusion rates exceeding 15 mg/h are not recommended.

Dilution: To prepare diltiazem hydrochloride injection for continuous intravenous infusion aseptically transfer the appropriate quantity (see chart) of diltiazem hydrochloride injection to the desired volume of either Normal Saline, D5W, or D5W/0.45% NaCl. Mix thoroughly. Use within 24 hours. Keep refrigerated until use.

Diluent Volume

Quantity of Diltiazem HCl Injection to Add

Final Concentration

Administration Dose*

Infusion Rate

100 mL

125 mg (25 mL) Final Volume 125 mL

1 mg/mL

10 mg/h 15 mg/h

10 mL/h 15 mL/h

250 mL

250 mg (50 mL) Final Volume 300 mL

0.83 mg/mL

10 mg/h 15 mg/h

12 mL/h 18 mL/h

500 mL

250 mg (50 mL) Final Volume 550 mL

0.45 mg/mL

10 mg/h 15 mg/h

22 mL/h 33 mL/h

*5 mg/h may be appropriate for some patients.

Compatibility:

Diltiazem hydrochloride injection was tested for compatibility with three commonly used intravenous fluids at a maximal concentration of 1 mg diltiazem hydrochloride per milliliter. Diltiazem hydrochloride injection was found to be physically compatible and chemically stable in the following parenteral solutions for at least 24 hours when stored in glass or polyvinylchloride (PVC) bags at controlled room temperature 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [see USP] or under refrigeration 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F).

• dextrose (5%) injection USP

• sodium chloride (0.9%) injection USP

• dextrose (5%) and sodium chloride (0.45%) injection USP

Physical Incompatibilities:

Because of potential physical incompatibilities, it is recommended that diltiazem hydrochloride not be mixed with any other drugs in the same container. If possible, it is recommended that diltiazem hydrochloride not be coinfused in the same intravenous line. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Diltiazem Hydrochloride. Physical incompatibilities (precipitate formation or cloudiness) were observed when diltiazem hydrochloride was infused in the same intravenous line with the following drugs: acetazolamide, acyclovir, aminophylline, ampicillin, ampicillin sodium/sulbactam sodium, cefamandole, cefoperazone, diazepam, furosemide, hydrocortisone sodium succinate, insulin, (regular: 100 units/mL), methylprednisolone sodium succinate, mezlocillin, nafcillin, phenytoin, rifampin, and sodium bicarbonate.

Transition to Further Antiarrhythmic Therapy

Transition to other antiarrhythmic agents following administration of diltiazem hydrochloride injection is generally safe. However, reference should be made to the respective agent manufacturer’s package insert for information relative to dosage and administration.

In controlled clinical trials, therapy with antiarrhythmic agents to maintain reduced heart rate in atrial fibrillation or atrial flutter or for prophylaxis of PSVT was generally started within 3 hours after bolus administration of diltiazem. These antiarrhythmic agents were intravenous or oral digoxin, Class 1 antiarrhythmics (e.g., quinidine, procainamide), calcium channel blockers, and oral beta-blockers.

Experience in the use of antiarrhythmic agents following maintenance infusion of diltiazem hydrochloride injection is limited. Patients should be dosed on an individual basis and reference should be made to the respective manufacturer's package insert for information relative to dosage and administration.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is administered intravenously.

For IV administration, the dose can be given by slow intravenous injection over at least 10-15 minutes or can also be delivered, in greater dilutions with 50-100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15-30 minutes.

The recommended adult dosage of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older

The recommended daily dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection. (See CLINICAL STUDIES section).

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:
TABLE 5. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours) Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage
≥ 30

1

1.5-3 g q 6h-q 8h

15-29

5

1.5-3 g q 12h

5-14

9

1.5-3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males

weight (kg) x (140 - age)

72 x serum creatinine

Females

0.85 x above value

COMPATIBILITY, RECONSTITUTION AND STABILITY

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder is to be stored at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.] prior to reconstitution.

When concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated, Ampicillin and Sulbactam and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted and administered separately, due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by any of the aminopenicillins.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

1.5 g ADD-Vantage® Vials: Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® system is intended as a single dose for intravenous administration after dilution with the ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container containing 50 mL, 100 mL or 250 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP.

3 g ADD-Vantage® Vials: Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® system is intended as a single dose for intravenous administration after dilution with the ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container containing 100 mL or 250 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP.

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® system is to be reconstituted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP only. See INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF THE ADD-Vantage® VIAL section. Reconstitution of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, at the specified concentration, with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP provides stable solutions for the time period indicated below:
TABLE 6. Diluent Maximum Concentration (mg/mL) ampicillin and sulbactam Use Periods
0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

30 (20/10)

8 hrs at 25°C

In 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

The final diluted solution of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection should be completely administered within 8 hours in order to assure proper potency.

Animal Pharmacology

While reversible glycogenosis was observed in laboratory animals, this phenomenon was dose- and time-dependent and is not expected to develop at the therapeutic doses and corresponding plasma levels attained during the relatively short periods of combined ampicillin/sulbactam therapy in man.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

Usual Adult Dosage Type of Infection Dose Frequency * ln rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin for injection per day have been used Moderate to severe infections 500 mg to 1 gram every 6 to 8 hrs. Mild infections caused by susceptible gram–positive cocci 250 mg to 500 mg every 8 hours Acute, uncomplicated urinary tract infections 1 gram every 12 hours Pneumococcal pneumonia 500 mg every 12 hours Severe, life-threatening infections (e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)* 1 gram to 1.5 grams every 6 hours
Perioperative Prophylactic Use

To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:

a. 1 gram IV or IM administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery.

b. For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure).

c. 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.

It is important that (1) the preoperative dose be given just (1/2 to 1 hour) prior to the start of surgery so that adequate antibiotic levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (2) Cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient levels of the antibiotic at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin for injection may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Reduced Renal Function

Cefazolin may be used in patients with reduced renal function with the following dosage adjustments: Patients with a creatinine clearance of 55 mL/min. or greater or a serum creatinine of 1.5 mg % or less can be given full doses. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 35 to 54 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 1.6 to 3 mg % can also be given full doses but dosage should be restricted to at least 8 hour intervals. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 11 to 34 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 3.1 to 4.5 mg % should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 12 hours. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 10 mL/min. or less or serum creatinine of 4.6 mg % or greater should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 18 to 24 hours. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection. Patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis: See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.

Pediatric Dosage

In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for injection in these patients is not recommended.
Pediatric Dosage Guide Weight 25 mg/kg/Day Divided into 3 Doses 25 mg/kg/Day Divided into 4 Doses Lbs Kg ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of125 mg/mL ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q6h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of125 mg/mL 10 4.5 40 mg 0.35 mL 30 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 75 mg 0.6 mL 55 mg 0.45 mL 30 13.6 115 mg 0.9 mL 85 mg 0.7 mL 40 18.1 150 mg 1.2 mL 115 mg 0.9 mL 50 22.7 190 mg 1.5 mL 140 mg 1.1 mL Weight 50 mg/kg/Day Divided into 3 Doses 50 mg/kg/Day Divided into 4 Doses Lbs Kg ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of225 mg/mL ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q6h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of225 mg/mL 10 4.5 75 mg 0.35 mL 55 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 150 mg 0.7 mL 110 mg 0.5 mL 30 13.6 225 mg 1 mL 170 mg 0.75 mL 40 18.1 300 mg 1.35 mL 225 mg 1 mL 50 22.7 375 mg 1.7 mL 285 mg 1.25 mL
In pediatric patients with mild to moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 70 to 40 mL/min.), 60 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be sufficient. In patients with moderate impairment (creatinine clearance of 40 to 20 mL/min.), 25 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be adequate. Pediatric patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 20 to 5 mL/min.) may be given 10 percent of the normal daily dose every 24 hours. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

RECONSTITUTION

Preparation of Parenteral Solution

Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin for injection is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41 °F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.

Single-Dose Vials

For IM injection, IV direct (bolus) injection or IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL.
Vial size Amount of Diluent Approximate Concentration Approximate Available Volume 1 gram 2.5 mL 330 mg/mL 3 mL
ADMINISTRATION

Intramuscular Administration

Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with cefazolin.

Intravenous Administration

Direct (bolus) injection: Following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below).

Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted cefazolin in 50 to 100 mL of 1 of the following solutions:

Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection

Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP
Deferoxamine Mesylate

Deferoxamine Mesylate

Acute Iron Intoxication

Intramuscular Administration

This route is preferred and should be used for ALL PATIENTS NOT IN SHOCK.

A dose of 1,000 mg should be administered initially. This may be followed by 500 mg every 4 hours for two doses. Depending upon the clinical response, subsequent doses of 500 mg may be administered every 4 to 12 hours. The total amount administered should not exceed 6,000 mg in 24 hours. For reconstitution instructions for intramuscular administration see Table 1.

Intravenous Administration

THIS ROUTE SHOULD BE USED ONLY FOR PATIENTS IN A STATE OF CARDIOVASCULAR COLLAPSE AND THEN ONLY BY SLOW INFUSION. THE RATE OF INFUSION SHOULD NOT EXCEED 15 MG/KG/HR FOR THE FIRST 1,000 MG ADMINISTERED. SUBSEQUENT IV DOSING, IF NEEDED, MUST BE AT A SLOWER RATE, NOT TO EXCEED 125 MG/HR.

For reconstitution instructions for intravenous administration see Table 2. The reconstituted solution is added to physiologic saline, (e.g., 0.9% sodium chloride, 0.45% sodium chloride), glucose in water, or Ringer’s lactate solution.

An initial dose of 1,000 mg should be administered at a rate NOT TO EXCEED 15 mg/kg/hr. This may be followed by 500 mg over 4 hours for two doses. Depending upon the clinical response, subsequent doses of 500 mg may be administered over 4 to 12 hours. The total amount administered should not exceed 6,000 mg in 24 hours.

As soon as the clinical condition of the patient permits, intravenous administration should be discontinued and the drug should be administered intramuscularly.

CHRONIC IRON OVERLOAD

SUBCUTANEOUS ADMINISTRATION

A daily dose of 1,000 to 2,000 mg (20 to 40 mg/kg/day) should be administered over 8 to 24 hours, utilizing a small portable pump capable of providing continuous mini-infusion. The duration of infusion must be individualized. In some patients, as much iron will be excreted after a short infusion of 8 to 12 hours as with the same dose given over 24 hours. For reconstitution instructions for subcutaneous administration see Table 3.

Intravenous Administration

The standard recommended method of Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP administration is via slow subcutaneous infusion over 8 to 12 hours. In patients with intravenous access, the daily dose of Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP can be administered intravenously. The standard dose is 20 to 40 mg/kg/day for children and 40 to 50 mg/kg/day over 8 to 12 hours in adults for 5 to 7 days per week. In children, average doses should not exceed 40 mg/kg/day until growth has ceased. In adults, average doses should not exceed 60 mg/kg/day. The intravenous infusion rate should not exceed 15 mg/kg/hr. For reconstitution instructions for intravenous administration see Table 2.

In patients who are poorly compliant, Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP may be administered prior to or following same day blood transfusion (for example 1 gram over 4 hours on the day of transfusion); however, the contribution of this mode of administration to iron balance is limited. Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP should not be administered concurrently with the blood transfusion as this can lead to errors in interpreting side effects such as rash, anaphylaxis and hypotension.

Intramuscular Administration

A daily dose of 500 to 1,000 mg may be administered intramuscularly. The total daily dose should not exceed 1,000 mg. For reconstitution instructions for intramuscular administration see Table 1.
Table 1: Preparation for Intramuscular Administration
RECONSTITUTE DEFEROXAMINE MESYLATE FOR INJECTION, USP WITH STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION

Vial Size

Amount of Sterile Water for Injection Required for Reconstitution

Total Drug Content after Reconstitution

Final Concentration per mL after Reconstitution

500 mg

2 mL

500 mg/2.35 mL

213 mg/mL

2 grams

8 mL

2 grams/9.4 mL

213 mg/mL
Table 2: Preparation for Intravenous Administration
RECONSTITUTE DEFEROXAMINE MESYLATE FOR INJECTION, USP WITH STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION

Vial Size

Amount of Sterile Water for Injection Required for Reconstitution

Total Drug Content after Reconstitution

Final Concentration per mL after Reconstitution

500 mg

5 mL

500 mg/5.3 mL

95 mg/mL

2 grams

20 mL

2 grams/21.1 mL

95 mg/mL
Table 3: Preparation for Subcutaneous Administration
RECONSTITUTE DEFEROXAMINE MESYLATE FOR INJECTION, USP WITH STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION

Vial Size

Amount of Sterile Water for Injection Required for Reconstitution

Total Drug Content after Reconstitution

Final Concentration per mL after Reconstitution

500 mg

5 mL

500 mg/5.3 mL

95 mg/mL

2 grams

20 mL

2 grams/21.1 mL

95 mg/mL

The reconstituted deferoxamine mesylate solution is an isotonic, clear and colorless to slightly yellow-colored solution. The drug should be completely dissolved before the solution is withdrawn. Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection IS FOR SINGLE USE ONLY. Discard unused portion.

Stability after Reconstitution

The product should be used immediately after reconstitution (commencement of treatment within 3 hours) for microbiological safety. When reconstitution is carried out under validated aseptic conditions (in a sterile laminar flow hood using aseptic technique), the product may be stored at room temperature for a maximum period of 24 hours before use. Do not refrigerate reconstituted solution. Reconstituting Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP in solvents or under conditions other than indicated may result in precipitation. Turbid solutions should not be used.
Deferoxamine Mesylate

Deferoxamine Mesylate

Acute Iron Intoxication

Intramuscular Administration

This route is preferred and should be used for ALL PATIENTS NOT IN SHOCK.

A dose of 1,000 mg should be administered initially. This may be followed by 500 mg every 4 hours for two doses. Depending upon the clinical response, subsequent doses of 500 mg may be administered every 4 to 12 hours. The total amount administered should not exceed 6,000 mg in 24 hours. For reconstitution instructions for intramuscular administration see Table 1.

Intravenous Administration

THIS ROUTE SHOULD BE USED ONLY FOR PATIENTS IN A STATE OF CARDIOVASCULAR COLLAPSE AND THEN ONLY BY SLOW INFUSION. THE RATE OF INFUSION SHOULD NOT EXCEED 15 MG/KG/HR FOR THE FIRST 1,000 MG ADMINISTERED. SUBSEQUENT IV DOSING, IF NEEDED, MUST BE AT A SLOWER RATE, NOT TO EXCEED 125 MG/HR.

For reconstitution instructions for intravenous administration see Table 2. The reconstituted solution is added to physiologic saline, (e.g., 0.9% sodium chloride, 0.45% sodium chloride), glucose in water, or Ringer’s lactate solution.

An initial dose of 1,000 mg should be administered at a rate NOT TO EXCEED 15 mg/kg/hr. This may be followed by 500 mg over 4 hours for two doses. Depending upon the clinical response, subsequent doses of 500 mg may be administered over 4 to 12 hours. The total amount administered should not exceed 6,000 mg in 24 hours.

As soon as the clinical condition of the patient permits, intravenous administration should be discontinued and the drug should be administered intramuscularly.

CHRONIC IRON OVERLOAD

SUBCUTANEOUS ADMINISTRATION

A daily dose of 1,000 to 2,000 mg (20 to 40 mg/kg/day) should be administered over 8 to 24 hours, utilizing a small portable pump capable of providing continuous mini-infusion. The duration of infusion must be individualized. In some patients, as much iron will be excreted after a short infusion of 8 to 12 hours as with the same dose given over 24 hours. For reconstitution instructions for subcutaneous administration see Table 3.

Intravenous Administration

The standard recommended method of Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP administration is via slow subcutaneous infusion over 8 to 12 hours. In patients with intravenous access, the daily dose of Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP can be administered intravenously. The standard dose is 20 to 40 mg/kg/day for children and 40 to 50 mg/kg/day over 8 to 12 hours in adults for 5 to 7 days per week. In children, average doses should not exceed 40 mg/kg/day until growth has ceased. In adults, average doses should not exceed 60 mg/kg/day. The intravenous infusion rate should not exceed 15 mg/kg/hr. For reconstitution instructions for intravenous administration see Table 2.

In patients who are poorly compliant, Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP may be administered prior to or following same day blood transfusion (for example 1 gram over 4 hours on the day of transfusion); however, the contribution of this mode of administration to iron balance is limited. Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP should not be administered concurrently with the blood transfusion as this can lead to errors in interpreting side effects such as rash, anaphylaxis and hypotension.

Intramuscular Administration

A daily dose of 500 to 1,000 mg may be administered intramuscularly. The total daily dose should not exceed 1,000 mg. For reconstitution instructions for intramuscular administration see Table 1.
Table 1: Preparation for Intramuscular Administration
RECONSTITUTE DEFEROXAMINE MESYLATE FOR INJECTION, USP WITHSTERILE WATER FOR INJECTION

Vial Size

Amount of Sterile Water for Injection Required for Reconstitution

Total Drug Content after Reconstitution

Final Concentration per mL after Reconstitution

500 mg

2 mL

500 mg/2.35 mL

213 mg/mL

2 grams

8 mL

2 grams/9.4 mL

213 mg/mL
Table 2: Preparation for Intravenous Administration
RECONSTITUTE DEFEROXAMINE MESYLATE FOR INJECTION, USP WITH STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION

Vial Size

Amount of Sterile Water for Injection Required for Reconstitution

Total Drug Content after Reconstitution

Final Concentration per mL after Reconstitution

500 mg

5 mL

500 mg/5.3 mL

95 mg/mL

2 grams

20 mL

2 grams/21.1 mL

95 mg/mL
Table 3: Preparation for Subcutaneous Administration
RECONSTITUTE DEFEROXAMINE MESYLATE FOR INJECTION, USP WITHSTERILE WATER FOR INJECTION

Vial Size

Amount of Sterile Water for Injection Required for Reconstitution

Total Drug Content after Reconstitution

Final Concentration per mL after Reconstitution

500 mg

5 mL

500 mg/5.3 mL

95 mg/mL

2 grams

20 mL

2 grams/21.1 mL

95 mg/mL

The reconstituted deferoxamine mesylate solution is an isotonic, clear and colorless to slightly yellow-colored solution. The drug should be completely dissolved before the solution is withdrawn. Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection IS FOR SINGLE USE ONLY. Discard unused portion.

Stability after Reconstitution

The product should be used immediately after reconstitution (commencement of treatment within 3 hours) for microbiological safety. When reconstitution is carried out under validated aseptic conditions (in a sterile laminar flow hood using aseptic technique), the product may be stored at room temperature for a maximum period of 24 hours before use. Do not refrigerate reconstituted solution. Reconstituting Deferoxamine Mesylate for Injection, USP in solvents or under conditions other than indicated may result in precipitation. Turbid solutions should not be used.
Acetic Acid Irrigant

Acetic Acid Irrigant

0.25% Acetic Acid Irrigation, USP may be administered by gravity drip via an administration set connected to an indwelling urethral catheter designed for continuous or intermittent two-way flow. A disposable dispensing set should be used. A bulb or piston syringe may be used for periodic irrigation of an indwelling catheter.

For continuous or intermittent irrigation, the rate of administration will correspond roughly to the rate of urine flow and should be adjusted to maintain a urinary effluent pH of 4.5 to 5.0. Nitrazine or other pH paper may be used to monitor pH, preferably at least four times daily. Drip rate should be adjusted as necessary to maintain desired pH; increasing flow rate reduces pH value and vice versa. With continuous or intermittent irrigation, each patient will require a volume of approximately 500 to 1500 mL per 24 hours.

For periodic irrigation of an indwelling catheter to maintain patency, about 50 mL is required for each irrigation and may be administered using a bulb or piston syringe for injection and aspiration as often as desired.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

Usual Adult Dosage
Type of Infection Dose Frequency * In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of Cefazolin for injection per day have been used. Moderate to severe infections 500 mg to 1 gram every 6 to 8 hrs Mild infections caused by susceptible gram-positive cocci 250 mg to 500 mg every 8 hours Acute, uncomplicated urinary tract infections 1 gram every 12 hours Pneumococcal pneumonia 500 mg every 12 hours Severe, life-threatening infections (e.g., endocarditis, septicemia*) 1 gram to 1.5 grams every 6 hours
Perioperative Prophylactic Use

To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:

a. 1 gram IV administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery.

b. For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure).

c. 500 mg to 1 gram IV every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.

It is important that (1) the preoperative dose be given just (1/2 to 1 hour) prior to the start of surgery so that adequate antibiotic levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (2) Cefazolin for injection be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient levels of the antibiotic at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of Cefazolin for injection may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Reduced Renal Function

Cefazolin for injection may be used in patients with reduced renal function with the following dosage adjustments: Patients with a creatinine clearance of 55 mL/min. or greater or a serum creatinine of 1.5 mg % or less can be given full doses. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 35 to 54 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 1.6 to 3 mg % can also be given full doses but dosage should be restricted to at least 8 hour intervals. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 11 to 34 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 3.1 to 4.5 mg % should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 12 hours. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 10 mL/min. or less or serum creatinine of 4.6 mg % or greater should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 18 to 24 hours. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection. Patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis: See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.

Pediatric Dosage

In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for injection in these patients is not recommended.

In pediatric patients with mild to moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 70 to 40 mL/min.), 60 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be sufficient. In patients with moderate impairment (creatinine clearance of 40 to 20 mL/min.), 25 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be adequate. Pediatric patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 20 to 5 mL/min.) may be given 10 percent of the normal daily dose every 24 hours. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

RECONSTITUTION

Preparation of Parenteral Solution

Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.

Directions for Proper Use of a Pharmacy Bulk Package

Not for direct infusion. This Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a hospital pharmacy admixture service, only in a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Using aseptic technique, the container closure may be penetrated only one time after reconstitution using a suitable sterile dispensing set or transfer device that allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. The withdrawal of container contents should be accomplished without delay. However, should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4HOURS from initial closure entry is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations. This time limit should begin with the introduction of the solvent or diluent into the Pharmacy Bulk Package. DISCARD ANY UNUSED PORTION AFTER 4 HOURS.

THIS PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE IS NOT INTENDED TO BE DISPENSED AS A UNIT.

Pharmacy Bulk Package

Add Sterile Water for Injection, Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, or Sodium Chloride Injection according to the table below. SHAKE WELL. Use promptly. (Discard vial within 4 hours after initial entry.)
Vial Size Amount ofDiluent Approximate Concentration Approximate Available Volume 10 grams 45 mL96 mL 1 gram/5 mL1 gram/10 mL 51 mL102 mL
ADMINISTRATION

Intravenous Administration

Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted Cefazolin for injection in 50 to 100 mL of 1 of the following solutions:

Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection

Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP

When diluted according to the instructions above, Cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F).

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Theophylline In Dextros...

Theophylline In Dextrose

These solutions are for intravenous use only.

General Considerations:

The steady-state serum theophylline concentration is a function of the infusion rate and the rate of theophylline clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a serum theophylline concentration in the 10-20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance. For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either subtherapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects.

When theophylline is used as an acute bronchodilator, the goal of obtaining a therapeutic serum concentration is best accomplished with an intravenous loading dose. Because of rapid distribution into body fluids, the serum concentration (C) obtained from an initial loading dose (LD) is related primarily to the volume of distribution (V), the apparent space into which the drug diffuses:

C = LD/V

If a mean volume of distribution of about 0.5 L/kg is assumed (actual range is 0.3 to 0.7 L/kg), each mg/kg (ideal body weight) of theophylline administered as a loading dose over 30 minutes results in an average 2 mcg/mL increase in serum theophylline concentration. Therefore, in a patient who has received no theophylline in the previous 24 hours, a loading dose of intravenous theophylline of 4.6 mg/kg, calculated on the basis of ideal body weight and administered over 30 minutes, on average, will produce a maximum post-distribution serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 6-16 mcg/mL. When a loading dose becomes necessary in the patient who has already received theophylline, estimation of the serum concentration based upon the history is unreliable, and an immediate serum level determination is indicated. The loading dose can then be determined as follows:

D = (Desired C − Measured C) (V)

where D is the loading dose, C is the serum theophylline concentration, and V is the volume of distribution. The mean volume of distribution can be assumed to be 0.5 L/kg and the desired serum concentration should be conservative (e.g., 10 mcg/mL) to allow for the variability in the volume of distribution. A loading dose should not be given before obtaining a serum theophylline concentration if the patient has received any theophylline in the previous 24 hours.

A serum concentration obtained 30 minutes after an intravenous loading dose, when distribution is complete, can be used to assess the need for and size of subsequent loading doses, if clinically indicated, and for guidance of continuing therapy. Once a serum concentration of 10 to 15 mcg/mL has been achieved with the use of a loading dose(s), a constant intravenous infusion is started. The rate of administration is based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters for the population and calculated to achieve a target serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL (see Table V). For example, in nonsmoking adults, initiation of a constant intravenous theophylline infusion of 0.4 mg/kg/hr at the completion of the loading dose, on average, will result in a steady-state concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 7-26 mcg/mL. The mean and range of steady-state serum concentrations are similar when the average pediatric patient (age 1 to 9 years) is given a loading dose of 4.6 mg/kg theophylline followed by a constant intravenous infusion of 0.8 mg/kg/hr. Since there is large interpatient variability in theophylline clearance, serum concentrations will rise or fall when the patient’s clearance is significantly different from the mean population value used to calculate the initial infusion rate. Therefore, a second serum concentration should be obtained one expected half life after starting the constant infusion (e.g., approximately 4 hours for children age 1 to 9 and 8 hours for nonsmoking adults: See Table I for the expected half life in additional patient populations) to determine if the concentration is accumulating or declining from the post loading dose level. If the level is declining as a result of a higher than average clearance, an additional loading dose can be administered and/or the infusion rate increased. In contrast, if the second sample demonstrates a higher level, accumulation of the drug can be assumed, and the infusion rate should be decreased before the concentration exceeds 20 mcg/mL. An additional sample is obtained 12 to 24 hours later to determine if further adjustments are required and then at 24-hour intervals to adjust for changes, if they occur. This empiric method, based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters, will prevent large fluctuations in serum concentration during the most critical period of the patient’s course.

In patients with cor pulmonale, cardiac decompensation, or liver dysfunction, or in those taking drugs that markedly reduce theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine), the initial theophylline infusion rate should not exceed 17 mg/hr unless serum concentrations can be monitored at 24-hour intervals. In these patients, 5 days may be required before steady-state is reached.

Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.

Table V contains initial theophylline infusion rates following an appropriate loading dose recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for final theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.
Table V. Initial theophylline infusion rates following an appropriate loading dose. Patient population Age Theophylline infusion rate (mg/kg/hr)* †
Neonates

Postnatal age up to 24 days

1 mg/kg q12h/‡

Postnatal age beyond 24 days

1.5 mg/kg q12h/‡

Infants

6-52 weeks old

mg/kg/hr = (0.008)(age in weeks) + 0.21

Young pediatric patients

1-9 years

0.8

Older pediatric patients

9-12 years

0.7

Adolescents (cigarette or marijuana smokers)

12-16 years

0.7

Adolescents (nonsmokers)

12-16 years

0.5 §

Adults (otherwise healthy nonsmokers)

16-60 years

0.4 §

Elderly

>60 years

0.3 ¶

Cardiac decompensation, cor pulmonale,

liver dysfunction, sepsis with multi-organ

failure, or shock

0.2 ¶

* To achieve a target concentration of 10 mcg/mL. Aminophylline = theophylline/0.8. Use ideal body weight for obese patients.

† Lower initial dosage may be required for patients receiving other drugs that decrease theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine).

‡ To achieve a target concentration of 7.5 mcg/mL for neonatal apnea.

§ Not to exceed 900 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.

¶ Not to exceed 400 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.
Table VI. Final dosage adjustment guided by serum theophylline concentration. Peak Serum Concentration Dosage Adjustment
<9.9 mcg/mL

If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase infusion rate about 25%. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in pediatric patients and 24 hours in adults for further dosage adjustment.

10 to 14.9 mcg/mL

If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain infusion rate and recheck serum concentration at 24 hour intervals.¶ If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated, consider adding additional medication(s) to treatment regimen.

15-19.9 mcg/mL

Consider 10% decrease in infusion rate to provide greater margin of safety even if current dosage is tolerated.¶

20-24.9 mcg/mL

Decrease infusion rate by 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in pediatric patients and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

25-30 mcg/mL

Stop infusion for 12 hours in pediatric patients and 24 hours in adults and decrease subsequent infusion rate at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in pediatric patients and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, stop infusion and consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage).

>30 mcg/mL

Stop the infusion and treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease infusion rate by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in pediatric patients and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

¶ Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present, physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g., sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see WARNINGS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: DO NOT USE FLEXIBLE CONTAINER IN SERIES CONNECTIONS.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride for Injection Concentrate, USP must be diluted before administration. Care must be taken to ensure there is complete mixing of the potassium chloride with the large volume fluid, particularly if soft or bag type containers are used.

The dose and rate of injection are dependent upon the individual needs of each patient.

If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium can be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration of up to 40 mEq/liter. The total 24-hour dose should not exceed 200 mEq.

If urgent treatment is indicated (serum potassium level less than 2.0 mEq/liter with electrocardiographic changes or paralysis) potassium chloride may be infused very cautiously at a rate of up to 40 mEq/hour. In such cases, continuous cardiac monitoring is essential. As much as 400 mEq may be administered in a 24 hour period. In critical conditions, potassium chloride may be administered in saline (unless contraindicated) rather than in dextrose-containing fluids, as dextrose may lower serum potassium levels.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not administer unless solution is clear and seal intact. Discard unused portion.

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package

The pharmacy bulk package is for use in a Pharmacy Admixture service only. Suspend as a unit in the laminar flow hood. A single entry through the vial closure should be made with a sterile dispensing set which allows measured dispensing of the contents. Transfer individual dose(s) to appropriate intravenous infusion solutions without delay. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended. Multiple entries will also increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination. The above process should be carried out under a laminar flow hood using aseptic technique. ANY UNUSED PORTION MUST BE DISCARDED WITHIN 4 HOURS.
Diphenhydramine Hydroch...

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride

THIS PRODUCT IS FOR INTRAVENOUS OR INTRAMUSCULAR ADMINISTRATION ONLY.

Diphenhydramine hydrochloride in the injectable form is indicated when the oral form is impractical.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Pediatric Patients, other than premature infants and neonates: 5 mg/kg/24 hr or 150 mg/m2/24 hr. Maximum daily dosage is 300 mg. Divide into four doses, administered intravenously at a rate generally not exceeding 25 mg/min, or deep intramuscularly.

Adults: 10 mg to 50 mg intravenously at a rate generally not exceeding 25 mg/min, or deep intramuscularly, 100 mg if required; maximum daily dosage is 400 mg.
Corlopam

Corlopam

Adult Patients: The optimal magnitude and rate of blood pressure reduction in acutely hypertensive patients have not been rigorously determined, but, in general, both delay and too rapid decreases appear undesirable in sick adult patients. An initial fenoldopam dose may be chosen from Tables 2 and 3 in the Clinical Pharmacology Section that produces the desired magnitude and rate of blood pressure reduction in a given clinical situation. Doses below 0.1 mcg/kg/min have very modest effects and appear only marginally useful in this population. In general, as the initial dose increases, there is a greater and more rapid blood pressure reduction. However, lower initial doses (0.03 to 0.1 mcg/kg/min) titrated slowly have been associated with less reflex tachycardia than have higher initial doses (≥ 0.3 mcg/kg/min). In clinical trials, doses from 0.01 to 1.6 mcg/kg/min have been studied. Most of the effect of a given infusion rate is attained in 15 minutes.

Fenoldopam should be administered by continuous intravenous infusion. A bolus dose should not be used. Hypotension and rapid decreases of blood pressure should be avoided. The initial dose should be titrated upward or downward, no more frequently than every 15 minutes (and less frequently as goal pressure is approached) to achieve the desired therapeutic effect. The recommended increments for titration are 0.05 to 0.1 mcg/kg/min.

Use of a calibrated, mechanical infusion pump is recommended for proper control of infusion rate during fenoldopam infusion. In clinical trials, fenoldopam treatment was safely performed without the need for intra-arterial blood pressure monitoring; blood pressure and heart rate were monitored at frequent intervals, typically every 15 minutes. Frequent blood pressure monitoring is recommended.

Fenoldopam infusion can be abruptly discontinued or gradually tapered prior to discontinuation. Oral antihypertensive agents can be added during fenoldopam infusion or following its discontinuation. Patients in controlled clinical trials have received intravenous fenoldopam for as long as 48 hours.

PREPARATION OF INFUSION SOLUTION

WARNING: CONTENTS OF AMPULES MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE INFUSION. EACH AMPULE IS FOR SINGLE USE ONLY.

Dilution:

Adult Patients: The fenoldopam injection ampule concentrate must be diluted in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, using the following dilution schedule:

mL of Concentrate (mg of drug)

Added to

Final Concentration

4 mL (40 mg)

1000 mL

40 mcg/mL

2 mL (20 mg)

500 mL

40 mcg/mL

1 mL (10 mg)

250 mL

40 mcg/mL

The drug dose rate must be individualized according to body weight and according to the desired rapidity and extent of pharmacodynamic effect. Table 5 provides the calculated infusion volume in mL/hour for a range of drug doses and body weights. The infusion should be administered using a calibrated mechanical infusion pump that can accurately and reliably deliver the desired infusion rate.

Infusion Rates:
Table 5 FENOLDOPAM ADULT INFUSION RATES (mL/hour)
DRUG DOSAGE FOR ADULTS > 40 KG, USING 40 MCG/ML CONCENTRATION
NOTE: CONCENTRATION IS DIFFERENT FROM PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, TABLE 6.
Body Weight

(kg)

Infusion Rate

0.025

mcg/kg/min

0.05

mcg/kg/min

0.1

mcg/kg/min

0.2

mcg/kg/min

0.3

mcg/kg/min

40

50

60

Infusion Rates (mL/hour) of 40 mcg/mL solution

1.5

1.9

2.3

3

3.8

4.5

6

7.5

9

12

15

18

18

22.5

27

70

2.6
5.3
10.5
21
31.5

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

3

3.4

3.8

4.1

4.5

4.9

5.3

5.6

6

6.8

7.5

8.3

9

9.8

10.5

11.3

12

13.5

15

16.5

18

19.5

21

22.5

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

45

36

40.5

45

49.5

54

58.5

63

67.5
Table 5 (continued) FENOLDOPAM ADULT INFUSION RATES (mL/hour)
DRUG DOSAGE FOR ADULTS > 40 KG, USING 40 MCG/ML CONCENTRATION

NOTE: CONCENTRATION IS DIFFERENT FROM PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, TABLE 6.

Body Weight

(kg)

Infusion Rate

0.5

mcg/kg/min

0.8

mcg/kg/min

1

mcg/kg/min

1.2

mcg/kg/min

1.4

mcg/kg/min

1.6

mcg/kg/min

40

50

60

Infusion Rates (mL/hour) of 40 mcg/mL solution

30

37.5

45
48 60 72 60 75 90 72 90 108 84 105 126 96 120 144
70

52.5

84

105

126

147

168

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

60

67.5

75

82.5

90

97.5

105

112.5

96

108

120

132

144

156

168

180

120

135

150

165

180

195

210

225

144

162

180

198

216

234

252

270

168

189

210

231

252

273

294

315

192

216

240

264

288

312

336

360

The diluted solution is stable under normal ambient light and temperature conditions for at least 24 hours. Diluted solution that is not used within 24 hours of preparation should be discarded. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. If particulate matter or cloudiness is observed, the drug should be discarded.

Pediatric Patients: Fenoldopam should be administered intravenously to pediatric patients by a continuous infusion pump appropriate for the delivery of low infusion rates. Monitoring of blood pressure should be continuous, usually by way of an intra-arterial line. Heart rate should also be continuously monitored. In the clinical trial, the usual starting dose was 0.2 mcg/kg/min with an effect on MAP evident within 5 minutes. At a constant infusion rate the effect was maximal after 20 to 25 minutes. Increased dosages of up to 0.3 to 0.5 mcg/kg/min every 20 to 30 minutes were generally well tolerated. Tachycardia without further decrease in MAP occurred at dosages greater than 0.8 mcg/kg/min. Upon discontinuation of the fenoldopam infusion after an average of 4 hours of therapy, blood pressure and heart rate returned to near baseline within 30 minutes.

PREPARATION OF INFUSION SOLUTION

WARNING: CONTENTS OF AMPULES MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE INFUSION. EACH AMPULE IS FOR SINGLE USE ONLY.

Dilution:

Pediatric Patients:

mL of Concentrate (mg of drug)

Added to

Final Concentration

3 mL (30 mg)

500 mL

60 mcg/mL

1.5 mL (15 mg)

250 mL

60 mcg/mL

0.6 mL (6 mg)

100 mL

60 mcg/mL

Table 6 provides the calculated infusion volume in mL/hour for a range of drug doses and body weights. The infusion should be administered using a calibrated mechanical infusion pump that can accurately and reliably deliver the desired infusion rate. As low flow rates (e.g., <0.5 mL/hr) may not be practical, and due to volume overload, it may be necessary to increase the concentration of fenoldopam in the infused solutions.

Infusion Rates:
Table 6 FENOLDOPAM PEDIATRIC INFUSION RATES (mL/hour)
DRUG DOSAGE FOR CHILDREN BETWEEN 5 AND 70 KG, USING 60 MCG/ML CONCENTRATION

NOTE: CONCENTRATION IS DIFFERENT FROM ADULT PATIENTS, TABLE 5.

Body Weight

(kg)

Infusion Rate

0.2

mcg/kg/min

0.5

mcg/kg/min

0.8

mcg/kg/min

1

mcg/kg/min

1.2

mcg/kg/min

5

Infusion Rates (mL/hour) of 60 mcg/mL solution

1

2.5

4

5

6

10

2

5

8

10

12

20

4

10

16

20

24

30

6

15

24

30

36

40

8

20

32

40

48

50

10

25

40

50

60

60

12

30

48

60

72

70

14

35

56

70

84

The diluted solution is stable under normal ambient light and temperature conditions for at least 24 hours. Diluted solution that is not used within 24 hours of preparation should be discarded. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. If particulate matter or cloudiness is observed, the drug should be discarded.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of one to two 50 mL syringes (44.6 to 100 mEq) may be given initially and continued at a rate of 50 mL (44.6 to 50 mEq) every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary (as indicated by arterial pH and blood gas monitoring) to reverse the acidosis. Caution should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-to-eight-hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight – depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. In metabolic acidosis associated with shock, therapy should be monitored by measuring blood gases, plasma osmolarity, arterial blood lactate, hemodynamics and cardiac rhythm. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Metronidazole

Metronidazole

In elderly patients the pharmacokinetics of metronidazole may be altered and, therefore, monitoring of serum levels may be necessary to adjust the metronidazole dosage accordingly.

Treatment of Anaerobic Bacterial Infections:

The recommended dosage schedule for Adults is:

Loading Dose 15 mg/kg infused over one hour (approximately 1 g for a 70-kg adult).

Maintenance Dose 7.5 mg/kg infused over one hour every six hours (approximately 500 mg for a 70-kg adult). The first maintenance dose should be instituted six hours following the initiation of the loading dose.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to oral metronidazole when conditions warrant, based upon the severity of the disease and the response of the patient to treatment with Metronidazole Injection, USP treatment. The usual adult oral dosage is 7.5 mg/kg every six hours (approximately 500 mg for a 70-kg adult).

A maximum of 4 g should not be exceeded during a 24-hour period.

The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 10 days; however, infections of the bone and joint, lower respiratory tract, and endocardium may require longer treatment.

Dosage Adjustments

Patients with Severe Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh C), the metronidazole dose should be reduced by 50% (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Patients Undergoing Hemodialysis

Hemodialysis removes significant amounts of metronidazole and its metabolites from systemic circulation. The clearance of metronidazole will depend on the type of dialysis membrane used, the duration of the dialysis session, and other factors. If the administration of metronidazole cannot be separated from a hemodialysis session, supplementation of metronidazole dosage following a hemodialysis session should be considered, depending on the patient’s clinical situation (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Prophylaxis

For surgical prophylactic use, to prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated colorectal surgery, the recommended dosage schedule for adults is:
a. 15 mg/kg infused over 30 to 60 minutes and completed approximately one hour before surgery; followed by b. 7.5 mg/kg infused over 30 to 60 minutes at 6 and 12 hours after the initial dose.
It is important that (1) administration of the initial preoperative dose be completed approximately one hour before surgery so that adequate drug levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial incision, and (2) Metronidazole Injection, USP be administered, if necessary, at 6-hour intervals to maintain effective drug levels. Prophylactic use of Metronidazole Injection, USP should be limited to the day of surgery only, following the above guidelines.

CAUTION: Metronidazole Injection, USP is to be administered by slow intravenous drip infusion only, either as a continuous or intermittent infusion. I.V. admixtures containing metronidazole and other drugs should be avoided. Additives should not be introduced into this solution. If used with a primary intravenous fluid system, the primary solution should be discontinued during metronidazole infusion. DO NOT USE EQUIPMENT CONTAINING ALUMINUM (e.g., NEEDLES, CANNULAE) THAT WOULD COME IN CONTACT WITH THE DRUG SOLUTION.

Metronidazole Injection, USP is a ready-to-use isotonic solution. NO DILUTION OR BUFFERING IS REQUIRED. Do not refrigerate. Each container of Metronidazole Injection contains 14 mEq of sodium.

Do not use if cloudy or precipitated or if the seal is not intact.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Use sterile equipment. It is recommended that the intravenous administration apparatus be replaced at least once every 24 hours.
Vecuronium Bromide

Vecuronium Bromide

Vecuronium bromide for injection is for intravenous use only.

This drug should be administered by or under the supervision of experienced clinicians familiar with the use of neuromuscular blocking agents. Dosage must be individualized in each case. The dosage information which follows is derived from studies based upon units of drug per unit of body weight and is intended to serve as a guide only, especially regarding enhancement of neuromuscular blockade of vecuronium by volatile anesthetics and by prior use of succinylcholine (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

To obtain maximum clinical benefits of vecuronium and to minimize the possibility of overdosage, the monitoring of muscle twitch response to peripheral nerve stimulation is advised.

The recommended initial dose of vecuronium bromide is 0.08 to 0.1 mg/kg (1.4 to 1.75 times the ED90) given as an intravenous bolus injection. This dose can be expected to produce good or excellent non-emergency intubation conditions in 2.5 to 3 minutes after injection. Under balanced anesthesia, clinically required neuromuscular blockade lasts approximately 25-30 minutes, with recovery to 25% of control achieved approximately 25 to 40 minutes after injection and recovery to 95% of control achieved approximately 45-65 minutes after injection. In the presence of potent inhalation anesthetics, the neuromuscular blocking effect of vecuronium is enhanced. If vecuronium is first administered more than 5 minutes after the start of inhalation agent or when steady-state has been achieved, the initial vecuronium bromide dose may be reduced by approximately 15%, i.e., 0.06 to 0.085 mg/kg.

Prior administration of succinylcholine may enhance the neuromuscular blocking effect and duration of action of vecuronium. If intubation is performed using succinylcholine, a reduction of initial dose of vecuronium bromide to 0.04-0.06 mg/kg with inhalation anesthesia and 0.05-0.06 mg/kg with balanced anesthesia may be required.

During prolonged surgical procedures, maintenance doses of 0.01 to 0.015 mg/kg of vecuronium bromide are recommended; after the initial vecuronium bromide injection, the first maintenance dose will generally be required within 25 to 40 minutes. However, clinical criteria should be used to determine the need for maintenance doses.

Since vecuronium lacks clinically important cumulative effects, subsequent maintenance doses, if required, may be administered at relatively regular intervals for each patient, ranging approximately from 12 to 15 minutes under balanced anesthesia, slightly longer under inhalation agents. (If less frequent administration is desired, higher maintenance doses may be administered.)

Should there be reason for the selection of larger doses in individual patients, initial doses ranging from 0.15 mg/kg up to 0.28 mg/kg have been administered during surgery under halothane anesthesia without ill effects to the cardiovascular system being noted as long as ventilation is properly maintained (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Use by Continuous Infusion

After an intubating dose of 80-100 mcg/kg, a continuous infusion of 1 mcg/kg/min can be initiated approximately 20-40 min later. Infusion of vecuronium should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from the bolus dose. Long-term intravenous infusion to support mechanical ventilation in the intensive care unit has not been studied sufficiently to support dosage recommendations (see PRECAUTIONS).

The infusion of vecuronium should be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as determined by peripheral nerve stimulation. An initial rate of 1 mcg/kg/min is recommended, with the rate of the infusion adjusted thereafter to maintain a 90% suppression of twitch response. Average infusion rates may range from 0.8 to 1.2 mcg/kg/min.

Inhalation anesthetics, particularly enflurane and isoflurane may enhance the neuromuscular blocking action of nondepolarizing muscle relaxants. In the presence of steady-state concentrations of enflurane or isoflurane, it may be necessary to reduce the rate of infusion 25-60 percent, 45‑60 min after the intubating dose. Under halothane anesthesia it may not be necessary to reduce the rate of infusion.

Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of vecuronium infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following a single bolus dose (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Infusion solutions of vecuronium can be prepared by mixing vecuronium with an appropriate infusion solution such as Dextrose Injection 5%, Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9%, Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection.

Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Infusion rates of vecuronium bromide can be individualized for each patient using the following table:

Drug Delivery Rate(mcg/kg/min)

Infusion Delivery Rate(mL/kg/min)

0.1 mg/mL*

0.2 mg/mL†

0.7

0.007

0.0035

0.8

0.008

0.004

0.9

0.009

0.0045

1

0.01

0.005

1.1

0.011

0.0055

1.2

0.012

0.006

1.3

0.013

0.0065

* 10 mg of vecuronium bromide in 100 mL solution† 20 mg of vecuronium bromide in 100 mL solution

The following table is guideline for mL/min delivery for a solution of 0.1 mg/mL (10 mg in 100 mL) with an infusion pump.
Vecuronium Bromide Infusion Rate – mL/min
Amount of Drugmcg/kg/min

Patient Weight – kg

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

0.7

0.28

0.35

0.42

0.49

0.56

0.63

0.7

0.8

0.32

0.4

0.48

0.56

0.64

0.72

0.8

0.9

0.36

0.45

0.54

0.63

0.72

0.81

0.9

1

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

1.1

0.44

0.55

0.66

0.77

0.88

0.99

1.1

1.2

0.48

0.6

0.72

0.84

0.96

1.08

1.2

1.3

0.52

0.65

0.78

0.91

1.04

1.17

1.3

NOTE: If a concentration of 0.2 mg/mL is used (20 mg in 100 mL), the rate should be decreased by one-half.

Dosage in Pediatric Patients

Older pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age) have approximately the same dosage requirements (mg/kg) as adults and may be managed the same way. Younger pediatric patients (1 to 10 years of age) may require a slightly higher initial dose and may also require supplementation slightly more often than adults.

Infants under one year of age but older than 7 weeks are moderately more sensitive to vecuronium on a mg/kg basis than adults and take about 1½ times as long to recover. See also subsection of PRECAUTIONS titled Pediatric Use. Information presently available does not permit recommendation on usage in pediatric patients less than 7 weeks of age (see PRECAUTIONS). There are insufficient data concerning continuous infusion of vecuronium in pediatric patients, therefore, no dosing recommendations can be made.

Compatibility

Vecuronium bromide is compatible in solution with:

Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9%

Dextrose Injection 5%

Sterile Water for Injection

Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride 0.9% Injection

Lactated Ringer’s Injection

Use within 24 hours of mixing with the above solutions.

Vecuronium bromide is also compatible in solution with:

Bacteriostatic Water for Injection (NOT FOR USE IN NEWBORNS)

Reconstituted vecuronium bromide, which has an acid pH, should not be mixed with alkaline solutions (e.g., barbiturate solutions such as thiopental) in the same syringe or administered simultaneously during intravenous infusion through the same needle or through the same intravenous line.

After Reconstitution

See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION – Compatibility: for diluents compatible with Vecuronium Bromide for Injection.
When reconstituted with bacteriostatic water for injection: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL, WHICH IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN NEWBORNS. Use within 5 days. May be stored at room temperature or refrigerated. When reconstituted with sterile water for injection or other compatible I.V. solutions not containing an antimicrobial preservative (e.g., sterile water for injection): Refrigerate vial. Use within 24 hours. Single use only. Discard unused portion.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Meperidine Hydrochlorid...

Meperidine Hydrochloride

For use as a single-dose unit to provide analgesia via the intravenous route using a compatible Hospira infusion device. Each vial is intended for SINGLE DOSE ONLY. When the dosing requirement is complete, the unused portion should be discarded in an appropriate manner. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.

PHYSICIANS SHOULD COMPLETELY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH A COMPATIBLE HOSPIRA INFUSION DEVICE BEFORE DECIDING TO ADMINISTER MEPERIDINE HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION VIA THE INFUSER.

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. There can be considerable variability in both the dosage requirement and patient response.

When administered intravenously, meperidine hydrochloride should be given very slowly. Rapid intravenous injection increases the incidence of adverse reactions; severe respiratory depression, apnea, hypotension, peripheral circulatory collapse and cardiac arrest have occurred. This drug should be administered intravenously only if a narcotic antagonist (i.e., naloxone) and the facilities for assisted or controlled respiration are immediately available. When meperidine hydrochloride is given parenterally, especially intravenously, the patient should be lying down.

Adults: The usual initial dose for adult administration via a compatible Hospira infusion device is 10 mg, with a range of 1 to 5 mg per incremental dose. The recommended Lockout Interval is 6 to 10 minutes. The minimum recommended Lockout Interval is 5 minutes.

The physician may adjust the dosage either upward or downward; or, increase or decrease the Lockout Interval, depending on patient response. For continuous infusion the usual adult dose is 15 to 35 mg per hour administered intravenously as required.

Incompatibility: Meperidine hydrochloride is incompatible with soluble barbiturates, aminophylline, heparin, morphine sulfate, methicillin, phenytoin, sodium bicarbonate, iodide, sulfadiazine and sulfisoxazole.

Dosage of meperidine hydrochloride should be carefully adjusted according to the severity of pain and the response of the patient. Reduced dosage is indicated in poor-risk patients, in the very young or very old, in patients with impaired renal or hepatic function and in patients receiving other central nervous system depressants. For surgical patients, dosage should be based on response of the patient, other premedication and concomitant medications, the anesthetic being used and the nature and duration of the operation.

Occasionally, it may be necessary to exceed the usual dosage recommended in cases of exceptionally severe pain or in those patients who become tolerant.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit prior to administration.
Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate

PHYSICIANS SHOULD COMPLETELY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE HOSPIRA INFUSION DEVICE BEFORE PRESCRIBING PRESERVATIVE-FREE MORPHINE SULFATE INJECTION, USP.

Preservative-free Morphine Sulfate Injection was developed for intravenous administration with a compatible Hospira infusion device.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if color is darker than pale yellow, if it is discolored in any other way, or if it contains a precipitate.

Intravenous Administration

For use in a compatible Hospira infusion device, dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. Patients must be closely monitored because of the considerable variability in both the dosage requirements and patient response. Following are recommendations that have to be individualized for each patient.

Intravenous Adult Dosage: The usual dose for administration to adults, via a compatible Hospira infusion device, is a 1 mg bolus, with a range of 0.2 to 3 mg per incremental dose for the 0.5 mg/mL and 1 mg/mL concentrations and a range of 0.5 to 3 mg per incremental dose for the 5 mg/mL concentration. The recommended Lockout Interval is 6 minutes. The physician may adjust the dosage either upward or downward (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE); depending on patient response. Occasionally, it may be necessary to exceed the usual dosage in cases of exceptionally severe pain or in those patients who become tolerant.

SAFETY AND HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

Preservative-free Morphine Sulfate Injection is supplied in sealed PCA vials. Accidental dermal exposure should be treated by the removal of any contaminated clothing and rinsing the affected area with water. Each vial of Preservative-free Morphine Sulfate Injection contains a potent narcotic which has been associated with abuse and dependence among health care providers. Due to the limited indications for this product, the risk of overdosage and the risk of its diversion and abuse, it is recommended that special measures be taken to control this product within the hospital or clinic. Preservative-free Morphine Sulfate Injection should be subject to rigid accounting, rigorous control of wastage and restricted access.
Aminosyn Ii With Electr...

Aminosyn Ii With Electrolytes

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

Adults

Admixtures of 3.5 to 4.25% amino acids with 5 to 10% dextrose may be infused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day. Fat emulsion administration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (E.F.A.D.). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of E.F.A.D. in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Aminosyn II 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES, Sulfite-Free, (an amino acid injection) should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered to provide part of the calories, if desired. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or in severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn II 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES is designed to supply necessary electrolytes to patients in a stable metabolic state (about three-fourths of all patients on total parenteral nutrition). Other patients may require more or less of the electrolytes present, e.g., cardiac patients who should not receive sodium. Aminosyn II 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES does not contain calcium, and this should be added as indicated.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated. The usual dose of phosphorus added to a liter of TPN solution (containing 25% dextrose) is 12 mM. This requirement is related to the carbohydrate calories delivered. Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphorus additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture. However, if one additive is added to the amino acid container, and the other to the container of concentrated dextrose, and if the contents of both containers are swirled before they are combined, then the likelihood of physical incompatibility is reduced.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, the 8.5% solution is used in equal volume with 50% or 70% dextrose to provide an admixture containing 4.25% amino acids and 25% or 35% dextrose respectively.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn II 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES solution, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure.

Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

Pediatric

Aminosyn II 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES may not be suitable for use in infants whose electrolyte requirements must be “custom tailored” based on serial blood chemistry determinations.

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from containers containing 250 or 500 mL. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Milrinone Lactate

Milrinone Lactate

Milrinone should be administered with a loading dose followed by a continuous infusion (maintenance dose) according to the following guidelines:

LOADING DOSE

50 mcg/kg: Administer slowly over 10 minutes

The table below shows the loading dose in milliliters (mL) of milrinone (1mg/mL) by patient body weight (kg).
Loading Dose (mL) Using 1 mg/mL Concentration
Patient Body Weight (kg)

kg

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

mL

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

The loading dose may be given undiluted, but diluting to a rounded total volume of 10 or 20 mL (see Maintenance Dose for diluents) may simplify the visualization of the injection rate.
MAINTENANCE DOSE Infusion Rate Total Daily Dose (24 Hours)
Minimum

Standard

Maximum

0.375 mcg/kg/min

0.50 mcg/kg/min

0.75 mcg/kg/min

0.59 mg/kg

0.77 mg/kg

1.13 mg/kg

Administer as a

continuous

intravenous infusion.

Milrinone drawn from vials should be diluted prior to maintenance dose administration. The diluents that may be used are 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection USP, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection USP. The table below shows the volume of diluent in milliliters (mL) that must be used to achieve 200 mcg/mL concentration for infusion, and the resultant total volumes.
Desired Infusion Concentration mcg/mL Milrinone 1 mg/mL (mL) Diluent (mL) Total Volume (mL)
200

10

40

50

200

20

80

100

The infusion rate should be adjusted according to hemodynamic and clinical response. Patients should be closely monitored. In controlled clinical studies, most patients showed an improvement in hemodynamic status as evidenced by increases in cardiac output and reductions in pulmonary capillary wedge pressure.

Note: See “Dosage Adjustment in Renally Impaired Patients.” Dosage may be titrated to the maximum hemodynamic effect and should not exceed 1.13 mg/kg/day. Duration of therapy should depend upon patient responsiveness.

The maintenance dose in mL/hr by patient body weight (kg) may be determined by reference to the following table.

Note: Milrinone supplied in 100 mL and 200 mL Flexible Containers (200 mcg/mL in 5% Dextrose Injection) need not be diluted prior to use.
Milrinone Infusion Rate (mL/hr) Using 200 mcg/mL Concentration
Maintenance Dose (mcg/kg/min)

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

0.375

3.4

4.5

5.6

6.8

7.9

9

10.1

11.3

12.4

13.5

0.400

3.6

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

13.2

14.4

0.500

4.5

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

16.5

18

0.600

5.4

7.2

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

16.2

18

19.8

21.6

0.700

6.3

8.4

10.5

12.6

14.7

16.8

18.9

21

23.1

25.2

0.750

6.8

9

11.3

13.5

15.8

18

20.3

22.5

24.8

27

When administering milrinone lactate by continuous infusion, it is advisable to use a calibrated electronic infusion device.

The Flexible Container has a concentration of milrinone equivalent to 200 mcg/mL in 5% Dextrose Injection and is more convenient to use than dilutions prepared from the vials.
Isuprel

Isuprel

ISUPREL injection 1:5000 should generally be started at the lowest recommended dose and the rate of administration gradually increased if necessary while carefully monitoring the patient. The usual route of administration is by intravenous infusion or bolus intravenous injection. In dire emergencies, the drug may be administered by intracardiac injection. If time is not of the utmost importance, initial therapy by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection is preferred.
Recommended dosage for adults with heart block, Adams-Stokes attacks, and cardiac arrest:
Route of Administration

Preparation of Dilution

Initial Dose

Subsequent Dose Range*

Bolus     intravenous     injection

Dilute 1 mL (0.2 mg) to 10 mL with Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.02 mg to 0.06 mg (1 mL to 3 mL of diluted solution)

0.01 mg to 0.2 mg (0.5 mL to 10 mL of diluted solution)

Intravenous     infusion

Dilute 10 mL (2 mg) in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

5 mcg/min. (1.25 mL of diluted solution per minute)

Intramuscular

Use Solution 1:5000 undiluted

0.2 mg (1 mL)

0.02 mg to 1 mg (0.1 mL to 5 mL)

Subcutaneous

Use Solution 1:5000 undiluted

0.2 mg (1 mL)

0.15 mg to 0.2 mg (0.75 mL to 1 mL)

Intracardiac

Use Solution 1:5000 undiluted

0.02 mg (0.1 mL)

*Subsequent dosage and method of administration depend on the ventricular rate and the rapidity with which the cardiac pacemaker can take over when the drug is gradually withdrawn.

There are no well-controlled studies in children to establish appropriate dosing; however, the American Heart Association recommends an initial infusion rate of 0.1 mcg/kg/min, with the usual range being 0.1 mcg/kg/min to 1 mcg/kg/min.
Recommended dosage for adults with shock and hypoperfusion states:
Route of Administration

Preparation of Dilution†

Infusion Rate††

Intravenous infusion

Dilute 5 mL (1 mg) in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.5 mcg to 5 mcg per minute (0.25 mL to 2.5 mL of diluted solution)

†Concentrations up to 10 times greater have been used when limitation of volume is essential. ††Rates over 30 mcg per minute have been used in advanced stages of shock. The rate of infusion should be adjusted on the basis of heart rate, central venous pressure, systemic blood pressure, and urine flow. If the heart rate exceeds 110 beats per minute, it may be advisable to decrease or temporarily discontinue the infusion.
Recommended dosage for adults with bronchospasm occurring during anesthesia:
Route of Administration

Preparation of Dilution

Initial Dose

Subsequent Dose

Bolus     intravenous     injection

Dilute 1 mL (0.2 mg) to 10 mL with Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.01 mg to 0.02 mg (0.5 mL to 1 mL of diluted solution)

The initial dose may be repeated when necessary

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Such solution should not be used.
Levophed

Levophed

Norepinephrine Bitartrate Injection is a concentrated, potent drug which must be diluted in dextrose containing solutions prior to infusion. An infusion of LEVOPHED should be given into a large vein (see PRECAUTIONS).

Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States

Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intraaortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, LEVOPHED can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement.

Diluent: LEVOPHED should be diluted in 5 percent dextrose injection or 5 percent dextrose and sodium chloride injections. These dextrose containing fluids are protection against significant loss of potency due to oxidation. Administration in saline solution alone is not recommended. Whole blood or plasma, if indicated to increase blood volume, should be administered separately (for example, by use of a Y-tube and individual containers if given simultaneously).

Average Dosage: Add the content of the vial (4 mg/4 mL) of LEVOPHED to 1,000 mL of a 5 percent dextrose containing solution. Each mL of this dilution contains 4 mcg of the base of LEVOPHED. Give this solution by intravenous infusion. Insert a plastic intravenous catheter through a suitable bore needle well advanced centrally into the vein and securely fixed with adhesive tape, avoiding, if possible, a catheter tie-in technique as this promotes stasis. An IV drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential to permit an accurate estimation of the rate of flow in drops per minute. After observing the response to an initial dose of 2 mL to 3 mL (from 8 mcg to 12 mcg of base) per minute, adjust the rate of flow to establish and maintain a low normal blood pressure (usually 80 mm Hg to 100 mm Hg systolic) sufficient to maintain the circulation to vital organs. In previously hypertensive patients, it is recommended that the blood pressure should be raised no higher than 40 mm Hg below the preexisting systolic pressure. The average maintenance dose ranges from 0.5 mL to 1 mL per minute (from 2 mcg to 4 mcg of base).

High Dosage: Great individual variation occurs in the dose required to attain and maintain an adequate blood pressure. In all cases, dosage of LEVOPHED should be titrated according to the response of the patient. Occasionally much larger or even enormous daily doses (as high as 68 mg base or 17 vials) may be necessary if the patient remains hypotensive, but occult blood volume depletion should always be suspected and corrected when present. Central venous pressure monitoring is usually helpful in detecting and treating this situation.

Fluid Intake: The degree of dilution depends on clinical fluid volume requirements. If large volumes of fluid (dextrose) are needed at a flow rate that would involve an excessive dose of the pressor agent per unit of time, a solution more dilute than 4 mcg per mL should be used. On the other hand, when large volumes of fluid are clinically undesirable, a concentration greater than 4 mcg per mL may be necessary.

Duration of Therapy: The infusion should be continued until adequate blood pressure and tissue perfusion are maintained without therapy. Infusions of LEVOPHED should be reduced gradually, avoiding abrupt withdrawal. In some of the reported cases of vascular collapse due to acute myocardial infarction, treatment was required for up to six days.

Adjunctive Treatment in Cardiac Arrest

Infusions of LEVOPHED are usually administered intravenously during cardiac resuscitation to restore and maintain an adequate blood pressure after an effective heartbeat and ventilation have been established by other means. [LEVOPHED’s powerful beta-adrenergic stimulating action is also thought to increase the strength and effectiveness of systolic contractions once they occur.]

Average Dosage: To maintain systemic blood pressure during the management of cardiac arrest, LEVOPHED is used in the same manner as described under Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use the solution if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.

Avoid contact with iron salts, alkalis, or oxidizing agents.
Aminosyn-pf

Aminosyn-pf

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response.

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram than in the adult.

The recommended intravenous dose of Aminosyn-PF 7%, Sulfite-Free, (an amino acid injection — pediatric formula) is up to 2.5 g amino acid/kg/day for infants up to 10 kg. For infants and children larger than 10 kg, the total daily dose of amino acids should be up to 25 g amino acids/day for the first 10 kg of body weight plus 1 to 1.25 g amino acid for each kg of body weight over 10 kg. Initial amino acid dosage levels of 1 g/kg/day may be increased gradually in increments of 0.5 g/kg/day to approximate desired intake levels.

Aminosyn-PF 7% should be diluted with dextrose prior to use. Nonprotein calories should constitute approximately 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day. Part of the nonprotein caloric requirement may be provided as lipid emulsion administered concurrently to provide up to 60% of daily calories at a dose not to exceed 4 g fat/kg/day. Fluid intake for the infant receiving central venous TPN should be approximately 125 mL/kg/day (range: 100 to 175 mL/kg/day), depending on the clinical condition of the patient. Premature infants with respiratory distress syndrome suspected of having a patent ductus arteriosus should be given fluids more cautiously.

Cysteine is considered to be an essential amino acid for infants, especially preterm infants with potentially immature enzyme pathways. Therefore, addition of a cysteine supplement to the TPN admixture is recommended. The intake of cysteine by the preterm infant ingesting maternal milk is approximately 78 mg/kg/day. The suggested intravenous dosage level for Cysteine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is 500 mg (10 mL) for every 12.5 g (179 mL) of Aminosyn-PF 7% administered (see package insert for Cysteine Hydrochloride Injection, USP). In order to avoid potential insolubility of cysteine hydrochloride in admixtures, the foregoing concentration should not be exceeded.

In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose solutions are abruptly discontinued.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED FREQUENTLY. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Daily administration of intravenous vitamin supplements including a complete complement of fat and water-soluble vitamins is required. Trace metal additives including zinc, copper, manganese, and chromium should also be provided, especially when long-term parenteral therapy is anticipated.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated.

Potentially incompatible ions such as calcium and phosphate may be added to alternate infusate bottles to avoid precipitation. In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

Central Venous Nutrition

Hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the superior vena cava. Initial infusion rates should be slow, and gradually increased to the recommended 60-125 mL per kilogram body weight per day. If administration rate should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration, particularly during the first few days of therapy, is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance. Daily intake of amino acids and dextrose should be increased gradually to the maximum required dose as indicated by frequent determinations of glucose levels in blood and urine.

Peripheral Parenteral Nutrition

For patients in whom the central venous route is not indicated and who can consume adequate calories enterally, Aminosyn-PF 7% may be administered by peripheral vein with parenteral nonprotein calories. The concentration of dextrose in the final admixture is 5 to 10%, and simultaneous administration of lipid emulsion is recommended both as a calorie source and to attenuate the potentially irritating effects of the hypertonic nutritional admixture. Fat emulsion may comprise up to 60% of the daily caloric intake at a dosage level not to exceed 4 g fat/kg/day. It is essential that peripheral infusion be accompanied by adequate caloric intake.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Aminosyn-pf

Aminosyn-pf

Aminosyn-PF 10%, Sulfite-Free, is an amino acid injection-pediatric formula not intended for direct infusion. Admixtures should be made by or under the direction of a pharmacist using strict aseptic technique under a laminar flow hood. Admixtures must be stored under refrigeration and used within 24 hours of admixing.

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response.

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram than in the adult.

The recommended intravenous dose of Aminosyn-PF 10% is up to 2.5 g amino acid/kg/day for infants up to 10 kg. For infants and children larger than 10 kg, the total daily dose of amino acids should be up to 25 g amino acids/day for the first 10 kg of body weight plus 1.0 to 1.25 g amino acid for each kg of body weight over 10 kg. Initial amino acid dosage levels of 1.0 g/kg/day may be increased gradually in increments of 0.5 g/kg/day to approximate desired intake levels.

Aminosyn-PF 10% should be diluted with dextrose prior to use. Nonprotein calories should constitute approximately 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day. Part of the nonprotein caloric requirement may be provided as lipid emulsion administered concurrently to provide up to 60% of daily calories at a dose not to exceed 4 g fat/kg/day. Fluid intake for the infant receiving central venous TPN should be approximately 125 mL/kg/day (range: 100 to 175 mL/kg/day), depending on the clinical condition of the patient. Fat emulsion coadministration should be considered when prolonged (more than 5 days) parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (EFAD). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of EFAD in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Premature infants with respiratory distress syndrome suspected of having a patent ductus arteriosus should be given fluids more cautiously.

Cysteine is considered to be an essential amino acid for infants, especially preterm infants with potentially immature enzyme pathways. Therefore, addition of a cysteine supplement to the TPN admixture is recommended. The intake of cysteine by the preterm infant ingesting maternal milk is approximately 78 mg/kg/day. The suggested intravenous dosage level for Cysteine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is 500 mg (10 mL) for every 12.5 g (125 mL) of Aminosyn-PF 10% administered (see package insert for Cysteine Hydrochloride Injection, USP). In order to avoid potential insolubility of cysteine hydrochloride in admixtures, the foregoing concentration should not be exceeded.

In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose solutions are abruptly discontinued.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED FREQUENTLY. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Daily administration of intravenous vitamin supplements including a complete complement of fat and water-soluble vitamins is required. Trace metal additives including zinc, copper, manganese, and chromium should also be provided, especially when long-term parenteral therapy is anticipated.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated.

Potentially incompatible ions such as calcium and phosphate may be added to alternate infusate bottles to avoid precipitation. In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

Central Venous Nutrition

Hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the superior vena cava. Initial infusion rates should be slow, and gradually increased to the recommended 60-125 mL per kilogram body weight per day. If administration rate should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration, particularly during the first few days of therapy, is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance. Daily intake of amino acids and dextrose should be increased gradually to the maximum required dose as indicated by frequent determinations of glucose levels in blood and urine.

Peripheral Parenteral Nutrition

For patients in whom the central venous route is not indicated and who can consume adequate calories enterally, Aminosyn-PF 10% may be administered by peripheral vein with parenteral nonprotein calories. The concentration of dextrose in the final admixture is 5 to 10%, and simultaneous administration of lipid emulsion is recommended both as a calorie source and to attenuate the potentially irritating effects of the hypertonic nutritional admixture. Fat emulsion may comprise up to 60% of the daily caloric intake at a dosage level not to exceed 4 g fat/kg/day. It is essential that peripheral infusion be accompanied by adequate caloric intake.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

Recommended Directions for Use of the Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique

During use, container must be stored, and all manipulations performed, in an appropriate laminar flow hood.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of sterile transfer set and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. Insertion of a piercing pin into the outlet port should be performed only once in a Pharmacy Bulk Package solution. Once the outlet site has been entered, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from transfer set pin or implement insertion is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture.

Sequentially dispense aliquots of Aminosyn-PF 10% into I.V. containers using appropriate transfer set. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.

Additives may be incompatible with fluid withdrawn from this container. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When compounding admixtures, use aseptic technique. Mix thoroughly. Do not store solutions containing additives. Because of the potential for life-threatening events, caution should be taken to ensure that precipitates have not formed in any parenteral nutrient mixture.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Levophed

Levophed

Norepinephrine Bitartrate Injection is a concentrated, potent drug which must be diluted in dextrose containing solutions prior to infusion. An infusion of LEVOPHED should be given into a large vein (see PRECAUTIONS).

Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States

Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intraaortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, LEVOPHED can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement.

Diluent: LEVOPHED should be diluted in 5 percent dextrose injection or 5 percent dextrose and sodium chloride injections. These dextrose containing fluids are protection against significant loss of potency due to oxidation. Administration in saline solution alone is not recommended. Whole blood or plasma, if indicated to increase blood volume, should be administered separately (for example, by use of a Y-tube and individual containers if given simultaneously).

Average Dosage: Add a 4 mL ampul (4 mg) of LEVOPHED to 1,000 mL of a 5 percent dextrose containing solution. Each mL of this dilution contains 4 mcg of the base of LEVOPHED. Give this solution by intravenous infusion. Insert a plastic intravenous catheter through a suitable bore needle well advanced centrally into the vein and securely fixed with adhesive tape, avoiding, if possible, a catheter tie-in technique as this promotes stasis. An IV drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential to permit an accurate estimation of the rate of flow in drops per minute. After observing the response to an initial dose of 2 mL to 3 mL (from 8 mcg to 12 mcg of base) per minute, adjust the rate of flow to establish and maintain a low normal blood pressure (usually 80 mm Hg to 100 mm Hg systolic) sufficient to maintain the circulation to vital organs. In previously hypertensive patients, it is recommended that the blood pressure should be raised no higher than 40 mm Hg below the preexisting systolic pressure. The average maintenance dose ranges from 0.5 mL to 1 mL per minute (from 2 mcg to 4 mcg of base).

High Dosage: Great individual variation occurs in the dose required to attain and maintain an adequate blood pressure. In all cases, dosage of LEVOPHED should be titrated according to the response of the patient. Occasionally much larger or even enormous daily doses (as high as 68 mg base or 17 ampuls) may be necessary if the patient remains hypotensive, but occult blood volume depletion should always be suspected and corrected when present. Central venous pressure monitoring is usually helpful in detecting and treating this situation.

Fluid Intake: The degree of dilution depends on clinical fluid volume requirements. If large volumes of fluid (dextrose) are needed at a flow rate that would involve an excessive dose of the pressor agent per unit of time, a solution more dilute than 4 mcg per mL should be used. On the other hand, when large volumes of fluid are clinically undesirable, a concentration greater than 4 mcg per mL may be necessary.

Duration of Therapy: The infusion should be continued until adequate blood pressure and tissue perfusion are maintained without therapy. Infusions of LEVOPHED should be reduced gradually, avoiding abrupt withdrawal. In some of the reported cases of vascular collapse due to acute myocardial infarction, treatment was required for up to six days.

Adjunctive Treatment in Cardiac Arrest

Infusions of LEVOPHED are usually administered intravenously during cardiac resuscitation to restore and maintain an adequate blood pressure after an effective heartbeat and ventilation have been established by other means. [LEVOPHED’s powerful beta-adrenergic stimulating action is also thought to increase the strength and effectiveness of systolic contractions once they occur.]

Average Dosage: To maintain systemic blood pressure during the management of cardiac arrest, LEVOPHED is used in the same manner as described under Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use the solution if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.

Avoid contact with iron salts, alkalis, or oxidizing agents.
Aminosyn Ii

Aminosyn Ii

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

Peripheral Vein Nutritional Maintenance

Aminosyn II 3.5%, Sulfite-Free, (an amino acid injection) together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% is suitable for administration by peripheral vein. This solution is not intended for central vein infusion since it does not contain adequate amounts of amino acids or electrolytes for administration with high concentrations of dextrose. Aminosyn II 7%, 8.5% or 10% may be diluted with sterile water for injection or 5 to 10% Dextrose Injection to achieve a final amino acid concentration of 3.5, 4.25 or 5% for peripheral administration.

For peripheral intravenous infusion, 1 to 1.5 g/kg/day of total amino acids will reduce protein catabolism. Infusion or ingestion of carbohydrate or lipid will not reduce the nitrogen sparing effect of intravenous amino acid infusions at this dose.

As with all intravenous fluid therapy, the primary aim is to provide sufficient water to compensate for insensible, urinary and other (nasogastric suction, fistula drainage, diarrhea) fluid losses. Total fluid requirements, as well as electrolyte and acid-base needs, should be estimated and appropriately administered.

For an amino acid solution of specified total concentration, the volume required to meet amino acid requirements per 24 hours can be calculated. After making an estimate of the total daily fluid (water) requirement, the balance of fluid needed beyond the volume of amino acid solution required can be provided either as a noncarbohydrate or a carbohydrate-containing electrolyte solution. I.V. lipid emulsion may be substituted for part of the carbohydrate-containing solution. Vitamins and additional electrolytes as needed for maintenance or to correct imbalances may be added to the amino acid solution.

If desired, only one-half of an estimated daily amino acid requirement of 1.5 g/kg can be given on the first day. Amino acids together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% infused into a peripheral vein can be continued while oral nutrition is impaired. However, if a patient is unable to take oral nourishment for a prolonged period of time, institution of total parenteral nutrition with exogenous calories should be considered.

Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

Adults

Solutions containing 3.5 to 5% amino acids with 5 to 10% glucose may be infused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day. Fat emulsion administration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (E.F.A.D.). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of E.F.A.D. in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Aminosyn II 7%, 8.5% and 10% solutions should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered to provide part of the calories, if desired. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn II solutions without electrolytes are intended for patients requiring individualized electrolyte therapy. Sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, calcium and magnesium are major electrolytes which should be added to Aminosyn II as required.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated. The usual dose of phosphorus added to a liter of TPN solution (containing 25% dextrose) is 12 mM. This requirement is related to the carbohydrate calories delivered. Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphorus additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture. However, if one additive is added to the amino acid container and the other to the container of concentrated dextrose, and if the contents of both containers are swirled before they are combined, then the likelihood of physical incompatibility is reduced.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, the 7%, 8.5% or 10% solution is used in equal volume with 50% dextrose to provide an admixture containing 3.5%, 4.25% or 5% amino acids and 25% dextrose respectively.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn II 10% solution, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure.

Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

Pediatric

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from containers containing 250 or 500 mL. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam must never be used without individualization of dosage particularly when used with other medications capable of producing central-nervous-system depression.

EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN A PATENT AIRWAY SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE PRIOR TO INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION OF LORAZEPAM (see WARNINGS).

Status Epilepticus

General Advice

Status epilepticus is a potentially life-threatening condition associated with a high risk of permanent neurological impairment, if inadequately treated. The treatment of status, however, requires far more than the administration of an anticonvulsant agent. It involves observation and management of all parameters critical to maintaining vital function and the capacity to provide support of those functions as required. Ventilatory support must be readily available. The use of benzodiazepines, like Lorazepam Injection, is ordinarily only an initial step of a complex and sustained intervention which may require additional interventions, (e.g., concomitant intravenous administration of phenytoin). Because status epilepticus may result from a correctable acute cause such as hypoglycemia, hyponatremia, or other metabolic or toxic derangement, such an abnormality must be immediately sought and corrected. Furthermore, patients who are susceptible to further seizure episodes should receive adequate maintenance antiepileptic therapy.

Any health care professional who intends to treat a patient with status epilepticus should be familiar with this package insert and the pertinent medical literature concerning current concepts for the treatment of status epilepticus. A comprehensive review of the considerations critical to the informed and prudent management of status epilepticus cannot be provided in drug product labeling. The archival medical literature contains many informative references on the management of status epilepticus, among them the report of the working group on status epilepticus of the Epilepsy Foundation of America “Treatment of Convulsive Status Epilepticus” (JAMA 1993; 270:854-859). As noted in the report just cited, it may be useful to consult with a neurologist if a patient fails to respond (e.g., fails to regain consciousness).

Intravenous Injection

For the treatment of status epilepticus, the usual recommended dose of lorazepam injection is 4 mg given slowly (2 mg/min) for patients 18 years and older. If seizures cease, no additional lorazepam injection is required. If seizures continue or recur after a 10- to 15-minute observation period, an additional 4 mg intravenous dose may be slowly administered. Experience with further doses of lorazepam is very limited. The usual precautions in treating status epilepticus should be employed. An intravenous infusion should be started, vital signs should be monitored, an unobstructed airway should be maintained, and artificial ventilation equipment should be available.

Intramuscular Injection

IM lorazepam is not preferred in the treatment of status epilepticus because therapeutic lorazepam levels may not be reached as quickly as with IV administration. However, when an intravenous port is not available, the IM route may prove useful (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism).

Pediatric

The safety of lorazepam in pediatric patients has not been established.

Preanesthetic

Intramuscular Injection

For the designated indications as a premedicant, the usual recommended dose of lorazepam for intramuscular injection is 0.05 mg/kg up to a maximum of 4 mg. As with all premedicant drugs, the dose should be individualized (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS). Doses of other central-nervous-system-depressant drugs ordinarily should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). For optimum effect, measured as lack of recall, intramuscular lorazepam should be administered at least 2 hours before the anticipated operative procedure. Narcotic analgesics should be administered at their usual preoperative time. There are insufficient data to support efficacy or make dosage recommendations for intramuscular lorazepam in patients less than 18 years of age; therefore, such use is not recommended.

Intravenous Injection

For the primary purpose of sedation and relief of anxiety, the usual recommended initial dose of lorazepam for intravenous injection is 2 mg total, or 0.02 mg/lb (0.044 mg/kg), whichever is smaller. This dose will suffice for sedating most adult patients and ordinarily should not be exceeded in patients over 50 years of age. In those patients in whom a greater likelihood of lack of recall for perioperative events would be beneficial, larger doses as high as 0.05 mg/kg up to a total of 4 mg may be administered (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS). Doses of other injectable central-nervous-system-depressant drugs ordinarily should be reduced (see PRECAUTIONS). For optimum effect, measured as lack of recall, intravenous lorazepam should be administered 15 to 20 minutes before the anticipated operative procedure.

There are insufficient data to support efficacy or make dosage recommendations for intravenous lorazepam in patients less than 18 years of age; therefore, such use is not recommended.

Dose Administration in Special Populations

Elderly Patients and Patients with Hepatic Disease

No dosage adjustments are needed in elderly patients and in patients with hepatic disease.

Patients with Renal Disease

For acute dose administration, adjustment is not needed for patients with renal disease. However, in patients with renal disease, caution should be exercised if frequent doses are given over relatively short periods of time (see also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Dose Adjustment Due to Drug Interactions

The dose of lorazepam should be reduced by 50% when coadministered with probenecid or valproate (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

It may be necessary to increase the dose of lorazepam in female patients who are concomitantly taking oral contraceptives.

Administration

When given intramuscularly, Lorazepam Injection, undiluted, should be injected deep in the muscle mass.

Injectable lorazepam can be used with atropine sulfate, narcotic analgesics, other parenterally used analgesics, commonly used anesthetics, and muscle relaxants.

Immediately prior to intravenous use, Lorazepam Injection must be diluted with an equal volume of compatible solution. When properly diluted, the drug may be injected directly into a vein or into the tubing of an existing intravenous infusion. The rate of injection should not exceed 2 mg per minute.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is discolored or contains a precipitate.

Lorazepam injection is compatible for dilution purposes with the following solutions: Sterile Water for Injection, USP; Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Liposyn Ii

Liposyn Ii

Liposyn II (Intravenous Fat Emulsion) should be administered as part of an intravenous total nutrition program via peripheral vein or central venous catheter.

Adult Patients

Liposyn II can provide up to 60% of daily calories at a dose not to exceed 3 g/kg of body weight per day. The other 40% should be provided by carbohydrate and amino acids.

For the prevention of essential fatty acid deficiency, the recommended daily requirement is approximately 4% of the caloric intake as linoleate. In most adult patients, this can be supplied as 500 mL of Liposyn II 10% or 250 mL of Liposyn II 20% administered twice weekly.

The initial infusion rate for the first 15 minutes should be 1 mL/minute for Liposyn II 10% and 0.5 mL/minute for Liposyn II 20%. If no adverse effects are observed during this initial infusion, the rate can be increased to allow no more than 500 mL of Liposyn II 10% or 250 mL of Liposyn II 20% to be given over a period of four to six hours.

Pediatric Patients

Liposyn II can provide up to 60% of daily calories at a dose not to exceed 4 g/kg of body weight per day. The other 40% should be provided by carbohydrate and amino acids.

For the prevention of essential fatty acid deficiency, the recommended daily requirement is approximately 4% of the caloric intake as linoleate. The daily dosage of Liposyn II ranges from 5 mL to 10 mL per kilogram for the 10% emulsion and 2.5 mL to 5 mL per kilogram for the 20% emulsion, depending upon the size and maturity of the patient.

The infusion should be started at a rate of 0.1 mL/minute for the first 15 minutes. If no adverse effects are observed during this initial infusion, the rate can be increased to allow no more than 100 mL of Liposyn II 10% or 50 mL of Liposyn II 20% per hour.

Administration

With the exception of heparin at 1 to 2 units/mL of fat emulsion, additives to the Liposyn II bottle are contraindicated.

Partly used containers must not be stored for later use. Filters of less than 1.2 micron porosity must not be used with Liposyn II. Do not use any bottle in which there appears to be an oiling out of the emulsion.

See CONTRAINDICATIONS regarding mixing this emulsion with other I.V. fluids or additives.

Liposyn II can be infused into the same central or peripheral vein as the carbohydrate/amino acid solutions by means of a short Y-connector near the infusion site. This allows for mixing of the solutions immediately before entering the vein or for alternation of each solution. Flow rates of each solution should be controlled separately by infusion pumps, if these are used. Fat emulsion may also be infused through a separate peripheral site. If desired, heparin may be added to Liposyn II at a concentration of 1 to 2 units per mL prior to administration. Alternatively, studies have documented the stability of Liposyn® II 10% and 20%, necessary Hospira electrolytes, Hospira trace metals, and Hospira 10% through 70% Dextrose Injection, USP in a TPN admixture container with the following Hospira amino acid solutions:

Concentrations

Aminosyn(pH 6)
Aminosyn II
Aminosyn II w/Electrolytes

7%

X

X

X

8.5%

X

X

X

10%

X

X

X

Admixtures were compounded in either a nonphthalate polyvinylchloride (PVC) or an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) container. (See NOTE). SEE MIXING INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMBINED ADMINISTRATION. Compounded admixtures may be stored under refrigeration for up to 24 hours. Administration of admixtures should be completed within 24 hours after removal from refrigeration.

Conventional administration sets contain polyvinyl chloride (PVC) components that have DEHP (diethylhexyl phthalate) as a plasticizer. Fat-containing fluids such as Liposyn II extract DEHP from this PVC component, and it may be advisable to consider infusion of Liposyn II or the 3-in-1 admixture through a non-DEHP administration set.

A 1.2 micron air-eliminating filter can be used to deliver either a stable 3-in-1 admixture containing Liposyn II or the emulsion alone. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

MIXING INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMBINED ADMINISTRATION

Caution should be exercised when admixing Liposyn II (Intravenous Fat Emulsion).

It is absolutely essential that the admixture be prepared using strict aseptic techniques as this nutrient mixture is a good growth media for microorganisms.

Studies have documented the stability of Liposyn®II 10% and 20% with necessary Hospira electrolytes, Hospira trace metals, and Hospira 10% through 70% Dextrose Injection, USP in a TPN admixture container with the following Hospira amino acid solutions:

Concentrations

Aminosyn (pH 6)

Aminosyn II

Aminosyn II w/Electrolytes

7%

X

X

X

8.5%

X

X

X

10%

X

X

X

NOTE: The TPN admixture containers used in the stability studies were formulated to minimize lipid/container interactions. The principal bag materials were a nonphthalate polyvinylchloride (PVC) or ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA). The only significant leachable from EVA is acetate. Acetate is found in total parenteral nutrition (TPN) admixtures as acetic acid, used for adjusting the pH of amino acid solutions, and as lysine acetate. The level of leachable acetate from EVA is not sufficient to alter the final acetate concentration significantly. Compounded admixtures may be stored under refrigeration for up to 24 hours. Administration of admixtures should be completed within 24 hours after removal from refrigeration. Reference should be made to the individual package inserts for detailed information on each component.

The prime destabilizers of emulsions are excessive acidity (low pH) and inappropriate electrolyte content. Careful consideration should be given to the dosage levels of the divalent cations (Ca++ and Mg++) administered, as these have been shown to cause emulsion instability. Amino acid solutions exert a buffering effect, protecting the emulsion.

The following proper mixing sequence must be followed to minimize pH-related problems by ensuring that typically acidic dextrose injections are not mixed with lipid emulsion alone:
Transfer Liposyn®II (Intravenous Fat Emulsion) to the TPN admixture container. Transfer Aminosyn®II (An Amino Acid Injection), Aminosyn II w/Electrolytes, or Aminosyn (pH 6). Transfer Hospira Dextrose Injection, USP. Perform addition of necessary Hospira electrolyte and Hospira trace metal additives.
Admixing should be accompanied by gentle agitation to avoid localized concentration effects. Simultaneous or sequential mixing of Liposyn II with other nutritional substrates using an automated, gravimetric pumping system is considered an acceptable method for admixture compounding, especially for institutions with a high volume of 3-in-1 admixtures.
Nitroglycerin In Dextro...

Nitroglycerin In Dextrose

Nitroglycerin in 5% Dextrose Injection is intended for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. It should be administered only via an infusion pump that can maintain a constant infusion rate. A container which has lost its vacuum, or one in which particulate matter is visible, should not be used.

Dosage is affected by the type of infusion set used (see WARNINGS). Although the usual adult starting dose in published studies has been 25 mcg/min or more, these studies used PVC tubing, so the delivered doses were less than those reported. When nonabsorptive tubing is used, doses must be reduced.

Even using nonabsorptive tubing, the dose necessary to achieve a given response will vary greatly from patient to patient. Patients with normal or low left-ventricular filling pressure (e.g., patients with uncomplicated angina pectoris) may respond fully to as little as 5 mcg/min, while other patients may require a dose that is one or even two orders of magnitude higher. Continuous monitoring of blood pressure and heart rate is necessary in all patients receiving this medication; in many cases, invasive monitoring of pulmonary capillary wedge pressure will also be indicated.

Lower concentrations of Nitroglycerin in 5% Dextrose Injection increase the potential precision of dosing, but these concentrations increase the total fluid volume that must be delivered to the patient. Total fluid load may be a dominant consideration in patients with compromised function of the heart, liver, and/or kidneys. The necessary flow rates to achieve various dose rates with the available concentrations are shown in the following table.

Using nonabsorptive tubing, the initial adult dosage of Nitroglycerin in 5% Dextrose Injection should be 5 mcg/min. Subsequent titration must be guided by the clinical results, with dose increments becoming more cautious as partial response is seen. Initial titration should be in 5 mcg/min increments at intervals of 3 to 5 minutes. If no response is seen at 20 mcg/min, increments of 10 and even 20 mcg/min can be used. Once some hemodynamic response is observed, dosage increments should be smaller and less frequent.

When the concentration is changed, the tubing must be disconnected from the patient and flushed with the new solution before therapy is continued. If this precaution is not taken, then depending upon the tubing, pump, and flow rate used, it might be several hours before nitroglycerin is delivered at the desired rate.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not add supplementary medication to Nitroglycerin in 5% Dextrose Injection.

Do not use unless vacuum is present and solution is clear.
Table 2 Necessary Flow Rates (mL/hr*) * With a set that produces 60 drops/mL, 1 mL/hr = 1 drop/min.
Solution Concentration (mcg/mL)

Desired Dose (mcg/min)

100

200

400

5

3

1.5

0.8

10

6

3.0

1.5

15

9

4.5

2.3

20

12

6

3

30

18

9

4.5

40

24

12

6

50

30

15

7.5

60

36

18

9

80

48

24

12

100

60

30

15

120

72

36

18

140

84

42

21

160

96

48

24

180

108

54

27

200

120

60

30

240

144

72

36

280

168

84

42

320

192

96

48

500

300

150

75
Midazolam Hydrochloride...

Midazolam Hydrochloride

Midazolam injection is a potent sedative agent that requires slow administration and individualization of dosage. Clinical experience has shown midazolam to be 3 to 4 times as potent per mg as diazepam. BECAUSE SERIOUS AND LIFE-THREATENING CARDIORESPIRATORY ADVERSE EVENTS HAVE BEEN REPORTED, PROVISION FOR MONITORING, DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF THESE REACTIONS MUST BE MADE FOR EVERY PATIENT TO WHOM MIDAZOLAM INJECTION IS ADMINISTERED, REGARDLESS OF AGE OR HEALTH STATUS. Excessive single doses or rapid intravenous administration may result in respiratory depression, airway obstruction and/or arrest. The potential for these latter effects is increased in debilitated patients, those receiving concomitant medications capable of depressing the CNS, and patients without an endotracheal tube but undergoing a procedure involving the upper airway such as endoscopy or dental (see Boxed WARNING and WARNINGS).

Reactions such as agitation, involuntary movements, hyperactivity and combativeness have been reported in adult and pediatric patients. Should such reactions occur, caution should be exercised before continuing administration of midazolam (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam injection should only be administered IM or IV (see WARNINGS).

Care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial injection or extravasation (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam Injection may be mixed in the same syringe with the following frequently used premedications: morphine sulfate, meperidine, atropine sulfate or scopolamine. Midazolam, at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL, is compatible with 5% dextrose in water and 0.9% sodium chloride for up to 24 hours and with lactated Ringer's solution for up to 4 hours. Both the 1 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL formulations of midazolam may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Monitoring: Patient response to sedative agents, and resultant respiratory status, is variable. Regardless of the intended level of sedation or route of administration, sedation is a continuum; a patient may move easily from light to deep sedation, with potential loss of protective reflexes. This is especially true in pediatric patients. Sedative doses should be individually titrated, taking into account patient age, clinical status and concomitant use of other CNS depressants. Continuous monitoring of respiratory and cardiac function is required (i.e., pulse oximetry).

Adults and Pediatrics: Sedation guidelines recommend a careful presedation history to determine how a patient’s underlying medical conditions or concomitant medications might affect their response to sedation/analgesia as well as a physical examination including a focused examination of the airway for abnormalities. Further recommendations include appropriate presedation fasting.

Titration to effect with multiple small doses is essential for safe administration. It should be noted that adequate time to achieve peak central nervous system effect (3 to 5 minutes) for midazolam should be allowed between doses to minimize the potential for oversedation. Sufficient time must elapse between doses of concomitant sedative medications to allow the effect of each dose to be assessed before subsequent drug administration. This is an important consideration for all patients who receive intravenous midazolam.

Immediate availability of resuscitative drugs and age- and size-appropriate equipment and personnel trained in their use and skilled in airway management should be assured (see WARNINGS).

Pediatrics: For deeply sedated pediatric patients a dedicated individual, other than the practitioner performing the procedure, should monitor the patient throughout the procedure.

Intravenous access is not thought to be necessary for all pediatric patients sedated for a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure because in some cases the difficulty of gaining IV access would defeat the purpose of sedating the child; rather, emphasis should be placed upon having the intravenous equipment available and a practitioner skilled in establishing vascular access in pediatric patients immediately available.

USUAL ADULT DOSE

INTRAMUSCULARLY

For preoperative sedation/ anxiolysis/amnesia (induction of sleepiness or drowsiness and relief of apprehension and to impair memory of perioperative events).

For intramuscular use, midazolam should be injected deep in a large muscle mass.

The recommended premedication dose of midazolam for good risk (ASA Physical Status I & II) adult patients below the age of 60 years is 0.07 to 0.08 mg/kg IM (approximately 5 mg IM) administered up to 1 hour before surgery.

The dose must be individualized and reduced when IM midazolam is administered to patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, other higher risk surgical patients, patients 60 or more years of age, and patients who have received concomitant narcotics or other CNS depressants (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). In a study of patients 60 years or older, who did not receive concomitant administration of narcotics, 2 to 3 mg (0.02 to 0.05 mg/kg) of midazolam produced adequate sedation during the preoperative period. The dose of 1 mg IM midazolam may suffice for some older patients if the anticipated intensity and duration of sedation is less critical. As with any potential respiratory depressant, these patients require observation for signs of cardiorespiratory depression after receiving IM midazolam.

Onset is within 15 minutes, peaking at 30 to 60 minutes. It can be administered concomitantly with atropine sulfate or scopolamine and reduced doses of narcotics.

INTRAVENOUSLY

Sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE): Narcotic premedication results in less variability in patient response and a reduction in dosage of midazolam. For peroral procedures, the use of an appropriate topical anesthetic is recommended. For bronchoscopic procedures, the use of narcotic premedication is recommended.

When used for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for a procedure, dosage must be individualized and titrated. Midazolam should always be titrated slowly; administer over at least 2 minutes and allow an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Individual response will vary with age, physical status and concomitant medications, but may also vary independent of these factors. (See WARNINGS concerning cardiac/respiratory arrest/airway obstruction/hypoventilation.)

Midazolam 1 mg/mL formulation is recommended for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures to facilitate slower injection. Both the 1 mg/mL and the 5 mg/mL formulations may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

1. Healthy Adults Below the Age of 60: Titrate slowly to the desired effect, e.g., the initiation of slurred speech. Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 2.5 mg should be given over a period of at least 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If further titration is necessary, continue to titrate, using small increments, to the appropriate level of sedation. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes after each increment to fully evaluate the sedative effect. A total dose greater than 5 mg is not usually necessary to reach the desired endpoint.

If narcotic premedication or other CNS depressants are used, patients will require approximately 30% less midazolam than unpremedicated patients.

2. Patients Age 60 or Older, and Debilitated or Chronically Ill Patients: Because the danger of hypoventilation, airway obstruction, or apnea is greater in elderly patients and those with chronic disease states or decreased pulmonary reserve, and because the peak effect may take longer in these patients, increments should be smaller and the rate of injection slower.

Titrate slowly to the desired effect, e.g., the initiation of slurred speech. Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 1.5 mg should be given over a period of no less than 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If additional titration is necessary, it should be given at a rate of no more than 1 mg over a period of 2 minutes, waiting an additional 2 or more minutes each time to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Total doses greater than 3.5 mg are not usually necessary.

If concomitant CNS depressant premedications are used in these patients, they will require at least 50% less midazolam than healthy young unpremedicated patients.

3. Maintenance Dose: Additional doses to maintain the desired level of sedation may be given in increments of 25% of the dose used to first reach the sedative endpoint, but again only by slow titration, especially in the elderly and chronically ill or debilitated patient. These additional doses should be given only after a thorough clinical evaluation clearly indicates the need for additional sedation.

Induction of Anesthesia:

For induction of general anesthesia, before administration of other anesthetic agents.

Individual response to the drug is variable, particularly when a narcotic premedication is not used. The dosage should be titrated to the desired effect according to the patient’s age and clinical status.

When midazolam is used before other intravenous agents for induction of anesthesia, the initial dose of each agent may be significantly reduced, at times to as low as 25% of the usual initial dose of the individual agents.

Unpremedicated Patients: In the absence of premedication, an average adult under the age of 55 years will usually require an initial dose of 0.3 to 0.35 mg/kg for induction, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect. If needed to complete induction, increments of approximately 25% of the patient’s initial dose may be used; induction may instead be completed with inhalational anesthetics. In resistant cases, up to 0.6 mg/kg total dose may be used for induction, but such larger doses may prolong recovery.

Unpremedicated patients over the age of 55 years usually require less midazolam for induction; an initial dose of 0.3 mg/kg is recommended. Unpremedicated patients with severe systemic disease or other debilitation usually require less midazolam for induction. An initial dose of 0.2 to 0.25 mg/kg will usually suffice; in some cases, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Premedicated Patients: When the patient has received sedative or narcotic premedication, particularly narcotic premedication, the range of recommended doses is 0.15 to 0.35 mg/kg.

In average adults below the age of 55 years, a dose of 0.25 mg/kg, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect, will usually suffice.

The initial dose of 0.2 mg/kg is recommended for good risk (ASA I & II) surgical patients over the age of 55 years.

In some patients with severe systemic disease or debilitation, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Narcotic premedication frequently used during clinical trials included fentanyl (1.5 to 2 mcg/kg IV, administered 5 minutes before induction), morphine (dosage individualized, up to 0.15 mg/kg IM), and meperidine (dosage individualized, up to 1 mg/kg IM). Sedative premedications were hydroxyzine pamoate (100 mg orally) and sodium secobarbital (200 mg orally). Except for intravenous fentanyl, administered 5 minutes before induction, all other premedications should be administered approximately 1 hour prior to the time anticipated for midazolam induction.

Injectable midazolam can also be used during maintenance of anesthesia, for surgical procedures, as a component of balanced anesthesia. Effective narcotic premedication is especially recommended in such cases.

Incremental injections of approximately 25% of the induction dose should be given in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia and repeated as necessary.

CONTINUOUS INFUSION

For continuous infusion, midazolam 5 mg/mL formulation is recommended diluted to a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Usual Adult Dose: If a loading dose is necessary to rapidly initiate sedation, 0.01 to 0.05 mg/kg (approximately 0.5 to 4 mg for a typical adult) may be given slowly or infused over several minutes. This dose may be repeated at 10 to 15 minute intervals until adequate sedation is achieved. For maintenance of sedation, the usual initial infusion rate is 0.02 to 0.1 mg/kg/hr (1 to 7 mg/hr). Higher loading or maintenance infusion rates may occasionally be required in some patients. The lowest recommended doses should be used in patients with residual effects from anesthetic drugs, or in those concurrently receiving other sedatives or opioids.

Individual response to midazolam is variable. The infusion rate should be titrated to the desired level of sedation, taking into account the patient’s age, clinical status and current medications. In general, midazolam should be infused at the lowest rate that produces the desired level of sedation. Assessment of sedation should be performed at regular intervals and the midazolam infusion rate adjusted up or down by 25% to 50% of the initial infusion rate so as to assure adequate titration of sedation level. Larger adjustments or even a small incremental dose may be necessary if rapid changes in the level of sedation are indicated. In addition, the infusion rate should be decreased by 10% to 25% every few hours to find the minimum effective infusion rate. Finding the minimum effective infusion rate decreases the potential accumulation of midazolam and provides for the most rapid recovery once the infusion is terminated. Patients who exhibit agitation, hypertension, or tachycardia in response to noxious stimulation, but who are otherwise adequately sedated, may benefit from concurrent administration of an opioid analgesic. Addition of an opioid will generally reduce the minimum effective midazolam infusion rate.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS

UNLIKE ADULT PATIENTS, PEDIATRIC PATIENTS GENERALLY RECEIVE INCREMENTS OF MIDAZOLAM ON A MG/KG BASIS. As a group, pediatric patients generally require higher dosages of midazolam (mg/kg) than do adults. Younger (less than six years) pediatric patients may require higher dosages (mg/kg) than older pediatric patients, and may require close monitoring (see tables below). In obese PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, the dose should be calculated based on ideal body weight. When midazolam is given in conjunction with opioids or other sedatives, the potential for respiratory depression, airway obstruction, or hypoventilation is increased. For appropriate patient monitoring, see Boxed WARNING, WARNINGS, and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, MONITORING. The health care practitioner who uses this medication in pediatric patients should be aware of and follow accepted professional guidelines for pediatric sedation appropriate to their situation.
OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION (OAA/S)
Assessment Categories

Responsiveness

Speech

Facial Expression

Eyes

Composite Score

Responds readily to name spoken in normal tone

normal

normal

clear, no ptosis

5 (alert)

Lethargic response to name spoken in normal tone

mild slowing or thickening

mild relaxation

glazed or mild ptosis (less than half the eye)

4

Responds only after name is called loudly and/or repeatedly

slurring or prominent slowing

marked relaxation

(slack jaw)

glazed and marked ptosis (half the eye or more)

3

Responds only after mild prodding or shaking

few recognizable words

—

—

2

Does not respond to mild prodding or shaking

—

—

—

1 (deep sleep)
FREQUENCY OF OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION COMPOSITE SCORES IN ONESTUDY OF CHILDREN UNDERGOING PROCEDURES WITH INTRAVENOUS MIDAZOLAM FOR SEDATION Age Range(years) n OAA/S Score
1 (deep sleep)

2

3

4

5 (alert)

1-2

16

6

(38%)

4

(25%)

3

(19%)

3

(19%)

0

>2-5

22

9

(41%)

5

(23%)

8

(36%)

0

0

>5-12

34

1

(3%)

6

(18%)

22

(65%)

5

(15%)

0

>12-17

18

0

4

(22%)

14

(78%)

0

0

Total (1-17)

90

16

(18%)

19

(21%)

47

(52%)

8

(9%)

0

INTRAMUSCULARLY

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to anesthesia or for procedures, intramuscular midazolam can be used to sedate pediatric patients to facilitate less traumatic insertion of an intravenous catheter for titration of additional medication.

Sedation after intramuscular midazolam is age and dose dependent: higher doses may result in deeper and more prolonged sedation. Doses of 0.1 to 0.15 mg/kg are usually effective and do not prolong emergence from general anesthesia. For more anxious patients, doses up to 0.5 mg/kg have been used. Although not systematically studied, the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg. If midazolam is given with an opioid, the initial dose of each must be reduced.

INTRAVENOUSLY BY

INTERMITTENT INJECTION

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to and during procedures or prior to anesthesia.

It should be recognized that the depth of sedation/anxiolysis needed for pediatric patients depends on the type of procedure to be performed. For example, simple light sedation/anxiolysis in the preoperative period is quite different from the deep sedation and analgesia required for an endoscopic procedure in a child. For this reason, there is a broad range of dosage. For all pediatric patients, regardless of the indications for sedation/anxiolysis, it is vital to titrate midazolam and other concomitant medications slowly to the desired clinical effect. The initial dose of midazolam should be administered over 2 to 3 minutes. Since midazolam is water soluble, it takes approximately three times longer than diazepam to achieve peak EEG effects, therefore one must wait an additional 2 to 3 minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect before initiating a procedure or repeating a dose. If further sedation is necessary, continue to titrate with small increments until the appropriate level of sedation is achieved. If other medications capable of depressing the CNS are coadministered, the peak effect of those concomitant medications must be considered and the dose of midazolam adjusted. The importance of drug titration to effect is vital to the safe sedation/anxiolysis of the pediatric patient. The total dose of midazolam will depend on patient response, the type and duration of the procedure, as well as the type and dose of concomitant medications.

1. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age: Limited information is available in non-intubated pediatric patients less than 6 months of age. It is uncertain when the patient transfers from neonatal physiology to pediatric physiology, therefore the dosing recommendations are unclear. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age are particularly vulnerable to airway obstruction and hypoventilation, therefore titration with small increments to clinical effect and careful monitoring are essential.

2. Pediatric patients 6 months to 5 years of age: Initial dose 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. A total dose up to 0.6 mg/kg may be necessary to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 6 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

3. Pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age: Initial dose 0.025 to 0.05 mg/kg; total dose up to 0.4 mg/kg may be needed to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 10 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

4. Pediatric patients 12 to 16 years of age: Should be dosed as adults. Prolonged sedation may be associated with higher doses; some patients in this age range will require higher than recommended adult doses but the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg.

The dose of midazolam must be reduced in patients premedicated with opioid or other sedative agents including midazolam. Higher risk or debilitated patients may require lower dosages whether or not concomitant sedating medications have been administered (see WARNINGS).

CONTINUOUS

INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia in critical care settings.

To initiate sedation, an intravenous loading dose of 0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg administered over at least 2 to 3 minutes can be used to establish the desired clinical effect IN PATIENTS WHOSE TRACHEA IS INTUBATED. (Midazolam should not be administered as a rapid intravenous dose.) This loading dose may be followed by a continuous intravenous infusion to maintain the effect. An infusion of midazolam injection has been used in patients whose trachea was intubated but who were allowed to breathe spontaneously. Assisted ventilation is recommended for pediatric patients who are receiving other central nervous system depressant medications such as opioids. Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.06 to 0.12 mg/kg/hr (1 to 2 mcg/kg/min). The rate of infusion can be increased or decreased (generally by 25% of the initial or subsequent infusion rate) as required, or supplemental intravenous doses of midazolam can be administered to increase or maintain the desired effect. Frequent assessment at regular intervals using standard pain/sedation scales is recommended. Drug elimination may be delayed in patients receiving erythromycin and/or other P450-3A4 enzyme inhibitors (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions section) and in patients with liver dysfunction, low cardiac output (especially those requiring inotropic support), and in neonates. Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill, particularly those receiving opioids and/or when midazolam is rapidly administered.

When initiating an infusion with midazolam in hemodynamically compromised patients, the usual loading dose of midazolam should be titrated in small increments and the patient monitored for hemodynamic instability, e.g., hypotension. These patients are also vulnerable to the respiratory depressant effects of midazolam and require careful monitoring of respiratory rate and oxygen saturation.

CONTINUOUS

INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

USUAL NEONATAL DOSE

For sedation in critical care settings.

Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience in preterm and term neonates WHOSE TRACHEA WAS INTUBATED, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam injection should be initiated at a rate of 0.03 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mcg/kg/min) in neonates <32 weeks and 0.06 mg/kg/hr (1 mcg/kg/min) in neonates >32 weeks. Intravenous loading doses should not be used in neonates, rather the infusion may be run more rapidly for the first several hours to establish therapeutic plasma levels. The rate of infusion should be carefully and frequently reassessed, particularly after the first 24 hours so as to administer the lowest possible effective dose and reduce the potential for drug accumulation. This is particularly important because of the potential for adverse effects related to metabolism of the benzyl alcohol (see WARNINGS, Usage In Preterm Infants And Neonates). Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill and in preterm and term infants, particularly those receiving fentanyl and/or when midazolam is administered rapidly. Due to an increased risk of apnea, extreme caution is advised when sedating preterm and former preterm patients whose trachea is not intubated.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Midazolam Hydrochloride...

Midazolam Hydrochloride

Midazolam injection is a potent sedative agent that requires slow administration and individualization of dosage. Clinical experience has shown midazolam to be 3 to 4 times as potent per mg as diazepam. BECAUSE SERIOUS AND LIFE-THREATENING CARDIORESPIRATORY ADVERSE EVENTS HAVE BEEN REPORTED, PROVISION FOR MONITORING, DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF THESE REACTIONS MUST BE MADE FOR EVERY PATIENT TO WHOM MIDAZOLAM INJECTION IS ADMINISTERED, REGARDLESS OF AGE OR HEALTH STATUS. Excessive single doses or rapid intravenous administration may result in respiratory depression, airway obstruction and/or arrest. The potential for these latter effects is increased in debilitated patients, those receiving concomitant medications capable of depressing the CNS, and patients without an endotracheal tube but undergoing a procedure involving the upper airway such as endoscopy or dental (see Boxed WARNING and WARNINGS).

Reactions such as agitation, involuntary movements, hyperactivity and combativeness have been reported in adult and pediatric patients. Should such reactions occur, caution should be exercised before continuing administration of midazolam (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam injection should only be administered IM or IV (see WARNINGS).

Care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial injection or extravasation (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam Injection may be mixed in the same syringe with the following frequently used premedications: morphine sulfate, meperidine, atropine sulfate or scopolamine. Midazolam, at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL, is compatible with 5% dextrose in water and 0.9% sodium chloride for up to 24 hours and with lactated Ringer’s solution for up to 4 hours. Both the 1 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL formulations of midazolam may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Monitoring: Patient response to sedative agents, and resultant respiratory status, is variable. Regardless of the intended level of sedation or route of administration, sedation is a continuum; a patient may move easily from light to deep sedation, with potential loss of protective reflexes. This is especially true in pediatric patients. Sedative doses should be individually titrated, taking into account patient age, clinical status and concomitant use of other CNS depressants. Continuous monitoring of respiratory and cardiac function is required (i.e., pulse oximetry).

Adults and Pediatrics: Sedation guidelines recommend a careful presedation history to determine how a patient’s underlying medical conditions or concomitant medications might affect their response to sedation/analgesia as well as a physical examination including a focused examination of the airway for abnormalities. Further recommendations include appropriate presedation fasting.

Titration to effect with multiple small doses is essential for safe administration. It should be noted that adequate time to achieve peak central nervous system effect (3 to 5 minutes) for midazolam should be allowed between doses to minimize the potential for oversedation. Sufficient time must elapse between doses of concomitant sedative medications to allow the effect of each dose to be assessed before subsequent drug administration. This is an important consideration for all patients who receive intravenous midazolam.

Immediate availability of resuscitative drugs and age- and size-appropriate equipment and personnel trained in their use and skilled in airway management should be assured (see WARNINGS).

Pediatrics: For deeply sedated pediatric patients a dedicated individual, other than the practitioner performing the procedure, should monitor the patient throughout the procedure.

Intravenous access is not thought to be necessary for all pediatric patients sedated for a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure because in some cases the difficulty of gaining IV access would defeat the purpose of sedating the child; rather, emphasis should be placed upon having the intravenous equipment available and a practitioner skilled in establishing vascular access in pediatric patients immediately available.

USUAL ADULT DOSAGE
INTRAMUSCULARLY
For preoperative sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia (induction of sleepiness or drowsiness and relief of apprehension and to impair memory of perioperative events).

For intramuscular use, midazolam should be injected deep in a large muscle mass.

The recommended premedication dose of midazolam for good risk (ASA Physical Status I & II) adult patients below the age of 60 years is 0.07 to 0.08 mg/kg IM (approximately 5 mg IM) administered up to 1 hour before surgery.

The dose must be individualized and reduced when IM midazolam is administered to patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, other higher risk surgical patients, patients 60 or more years of age, and patients who have received concomitant narcotics or other CNS depressants (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). In a study of patients 60 years or older, who did not receive concomitant administration of narcotics, 2 to 3 mg (0.02 to 0.05 mg/kg) of midazolam produced adequate sedation during the preoperative period. The dose of 1 mg IM midazolam may suffice for some older patients if the anticipated intensity and duration of sedation is less critical. As with any potential respiratory depressant, these patients require observation for signs of cardiorespiratory depression after receiving IM midazolam.

Onset is within 15 minutes, peaking at 30 to 60 minutes. It can be administered concomitantly with atropine sulfate or scopolamine and reduced doses of narcotics.
INTRAVENOUSLY
Sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE): Narcotic premedication results in less variability in patient response and a reduction in dosage of midazolam. For peroral procedures, the use of an appropriate topical anesthetic is recommended. For bronchoscopic procedures, the use of narcotic premedication is recommended.

When used for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for a procedure, dosage must be individualized and titrated. Midazolam should always be titrated slowly; administer over at least 2 minutes and allow an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Individual response will vary with age, physical status and concomitant medications, but may also vary independent of these factors. (See WARNINGS concerning cardiac/respiratory arrest/airway obstruction/ hypoventilation.)

Midazolam 1 mg/mL formulation is recommended for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures to facilitate slower injection. Both the 1 mg/mL and the 5 mg/mL formulations may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Healthy Adults Below the Age of 60: Titrate slowly to the desired effect, (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 2.5 mg should be given over a period of at least 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If further titration is necessary, continue to titrate, using small increments, to the appropriate level of sedation. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes after each increment to fully evaluate the sedative effect. A total dose greater than 5 mg is not usually necessary to reach the desired endpoint.

If narcotic premedication or other CNS depressants are used, patients will require approximately 30% less midazolam than unpremedicated patients.

Patients Age 60 or Older, and Debilitated or Chronically Ill Patients: Because the danger of hypoventilation, airway obstruction, or apnea is greater in elderly patients and those with chronic disease states or decreased pulmonary reserve, and because the peak effect may take longer in these patients, increments should be smaller and the rate of injection slower.

Titrate slowly to the desired effect, (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 1.5 mg should be given over a period of no less than 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If additional titration is necessary, it should be given at a rate of no more than 1 mg over a period of 2 minutes, waiting an additional 2 or more minutes each time to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Total doses greater than 3.5 mg are not usually necessary.

If concomitant CNS depressant premedications are used in these patients, they will require at least 50% less midazolam than healthy young unpremedicated patients.

Maintenance Dose: Additional doses to maintain the desired level of sedation may be given in increments of 25% of the dose used to first reach the sedative endpoint, but again only by slow titration, especially in the elderly and chronically ill or debilitated patient. These additional doses should be given only after a thorough clinical evaluation clearly indicates the need for additional sedation.

Induction of Anesthesia:

For induction of general anesthesia, before administration of other anesthetic agents.

Individual response to the drug is variable, particularly when a narcotic premedication is not used. The dosage should be titrated to the desired effect according to the patient’s age and clinical status.

When midazolam is used before other intravenous agents for induction of anesthesia, the initial dose of each agent may be significantly reduced, at times to as low as 25% of the usual initial dose of the individual agents.

Unpremedicated Patients: In the absence of premedication, an average adult under the age of 55 years will usually require an initial dose of 0.3 to 0.35 mg/kg for induction, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect. If needed to complete induction, increments of approximately 25% of the patient’s initial dose may be used; induction may instead be completed with inhalational anesthetics. In resistant cases, up to 0.6 mg/kg total dose may be used for induction, but such larger doses may prolong recovery.

Unpremedicated patients over the age of 55 years usually require less midazolam for induction; an initial dose of 0.3 mg/kg is recommended. Unpremedicated patients with severe systemic disease or other debilitation usually require less midazolam for induction. An initial dose of 0.2 to 0.25 mg/kg will usually suffice; in some cases, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Premedicated Patients: When the patient has received sedative or narcotic premedication, particularly narcotic premedication, the range of recommended doses is 0.15 to 0.35 mg/kg.

In average adults below the age of 55 years, a dose of 0.25 mg/kg, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect, will usually suffice.

The initial dose of 0.2 mg/kg is recommended for good risk (ASA I & II) surgical patients over the age of 55 years.

In some patients with severe systemic disease or debilitation, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Narcotic premedication frequently used during clinical trials included fentanyl (1.5 to 2 mcg/kg IV, administered 5 minutes before induction), morphine (dosage individualized, up to 0.15 mg/kg IM), and meperidine (dosage individualized, up to 1 mg/kg IM). Sedative premedications were hydroxyzine pamoate (100 mg orally) and sodium secobarbital (200 mg orally). Except for intravenous fentanyl, administered 5 minutes before induction, all other premedications should be administered approximately 1 hour prior to the time anticipated for midazolam induction.

Injectable midazolam can also be used during maintenance of anesthesia, for surgical procedures, as a component of balanced anesthesia. Effective narcotic premedication is especially recommended in such cases.

Incremental injections of approximately 25% of the induction dose should be given in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia and repeated as necessary.
CONTINUOUS INFUSION
For continuous infusion, midazolam 5 mg/mL formulation is recommended diluted to a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Usual Adult Dose: If a loading dose is necessary to rapidly initiate sedation, 0.01 to 0.05 mg/kg (approximately 0.5 to 4 mg for a typical adult) may be given slowly or infused over several minutes. This dose may be repeated at 10 to 15 minute intervals until adequate sedation is achieved. For maintenance of sedation, the usual initial infusion rate is 0.02 to 0.1 mg/kg/hr (1 to 7 mg/hr). Higher loading or maintenance infusion rates may occasionally be required in some patients. The lowest recommended doses should be used in patients with residual effects from anesthetic drugs, or in those concurrently receiving other sedatives or opioids.

Individual response to midazolam is variable. The infusion rate should be titrated to the desired level of sedation, taking into account the patient’s age, clinical status and current medications. In general, midazolam should be infused at the lowest rate that produces the desired level of sedation.

Assessment of sedation should be performed at regular intervals and the midazolam infusion rate adjusted up or down by 25% to 50% of the initial infusion rate so as to assure adequate titration of sedation level. Larger adjustments or even a small incremental dose may be necessary if rapid changes in the level of sedation are indicated. In addition, the infusion rate should be decreased by 10% to 25% every few hours to find the minimum effective infusion rate. Finding the minimum effective infusion rate decreases the potential accumulation of midazolam and provides for the most rapid recovery once the infusion is terminated. Patients who exhibit agitation, hypertension, or tachycardia in response to noxious stimulation, but who are otherwise adequately sedated, may benefit from concurrent administration of an opioid analgesic. Addition of an opioid will generally reduce the minimum effective midazolam infusion rate.
PEDIATRIC PATIENTS
UNLIKE ADULT PATIENTS, PEDIATRIC PATIENTS GENERALLY RECEIVE INCREMENTS OF MIDAZOLAM ON A MG/KG BASIS. As a group, pediatric patients generally require higher dosages of midazolam (mg/kg) than do adults. Younger (less than six years) pediatric patients may require higher dosages (mg/kg) than older pediatric patients, and may require close monitoring (see tables below). In obese PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, the dose should be calculated based on ideal body weight. When midazolam is given in conjunction with opioids or other sedatives, the potential for respiratory depression, airway obstruction, or hypoventilation is increased. For appropriate patient monitoring, see Boxed WARNING, WARNINGS, and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Monitoring. The health care practitioner who uses this medication in pediatric patients should be aware of and follow accepted professional guidelines for pediatric sedation appropriate to their situation.

OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION (OAA/S)

Assessment Categories

Responsiveness

Speech

Facial Expression

Eyes

Composite Score

Responds readily to name

spoken in normal tone

normal

normal

clear, no ptosis

5 (alert)

Lethargic response to name

spoken in normal tone

mild slowing

or thickening

mild relaxation

glazed or mild ptosis

(less than half the eye)

4

Responds only after name is

called loudly and/or repeatedly

slurring or

prominent slowing

marked relaxation

(slack jaw)

glazed and marked ptosis

(half the eye or more)

3

Responds only after mild

prodding or shaking

few recognizable

words

−

−

2

Does not respond to mild

prodding or shaking

−

−

−

1 (deep sleep)

FREQUENCY OF OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION COMPOSITE SCORES IN ONE STUDY OF PEDIATRIC

PATIENTS UNDERGOING PROCEDURES WITH INTRAVENOUS MIDAZOLAM FOR SEDATION

Age Range

(years)

n

OAA/S Score

1 (deep sleep)

2

3

4

5 (alert)

1-2

16

6

(38%)

4

(25%)

3

(19%)

3

(19%)

0

>2-5

22

9

(41%)

5

(23%)

8

(36%)

0

0

>5-12

34

1

(3%)

6

(18%)

22

(65%)

5

(15%)

0

>12-17

18

0

4

(22%)

14

(78%)

0

0

Total (1-17)

90

16

(18%)

19

(21%)

47

(52%)

8

(9%)

0

INTRAMUSCULARLY
USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)
For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to anesthesia or for procedures, intramuscular midazolam can be used to sedate pediatric patients to facilitate less traumatic insertion of an intravenous catheter for titration of additional medication.

Sedation after intramuscular midazolam is age and dose dependent: higher doses may result in deeper and more prolonged sedation. Doses of 0.1 to 0.15 mg/kg are usually effective and do not prolong emergence from general anesthesia. For more anxious patients, doses up to 0.5 mg/kg have been used. Although not systematically studied, the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg. If midazolam is given with an opioid, the initial dose of each must be reduced.

INTRAVENOUSLY BY

INTERMITTENT INJECTION
USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)
For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to and during procedures or prior to anesthesia.

It should be recognized that the depth of sedation/anxiolysis needed for pediatric patients depends on the type of procedure to be performed. For example, simple light sedation/anxiolysis in the preoperative period is quite different from the deep sedation and analgesia required for an endoscopic procedure in a child. For this reason, there is a broad range of dosage. For all pediatric patients, regardless of the indications for sedation/anxiolysis, it is vital to titrate midazolam and other concomitant medications slowly to the desired clinical effect. The initial dose of midazolam should be administered over 2 to 3 minutes. Since midazolam is water soluble, it takes approximately three times longer than diazepam to achieve peak EEG effects, therefore one must wait an additional 2 to 3 minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect before initiating a procedure or repeating a dose. If further sedation is necessary, continue to titrate with small increments until the appropriate level of sedation is achieved. If other medications capable of depressing the CNS are coadministered, the peak effect of those concomitant medications must be considered and the dose of midazolam adjusted. The importance of drug titration to effect is vital to the safe sedation/anxiolysis of the pediatric patient. The total dose of midazolam will depend on patient response, the type and duration of the procedure, as well as the type and dose of concomitant medications.

Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age: Limited information is available in non-intubated pediatric patients less than 6 months of age. It is uncertain when the patient transfers from neonatal physiology to pediatric physiology, therefore the dosing recommendations are unclear. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age are particularly vulnerable to airway obstruction and hypoventilation, therefore titration with small increments to clinical effect and careful monitoring are essential.

Pediatric patients 6 months to 5 years of age: Initial dose 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. A total dose up to 0.6 mg/kg may be necessary to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 6 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

Pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age: Initial dose 0.025 to 0.05 mg/kg; total dose up to 0.4 mg/kg may be needed to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 10 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

Pediatric patients 12 to 16 years of age: Should be dosed as adults. Prolonged sedation may be associated with higher doses; some patients in this age range will require higher than recommended adult doses but the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg.

The dose of midazolam must be reduced in patients premedicated with opioid or other sedative agents including midazolam. Higher risk or debilitated patients may require lower dosages whether or not concomitant sedating medications have been administered (see WARNINGS).

CONTINUOUS

INTRAVENOUS INFUSION
USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)
For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia in critical care settings.

To initiate sedation, an intravenous loading dose of 0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg administered over at least 2 to 3 minutes can be used to establish the desired clinical effect IN PATIENTS WHOSE TRACHEA IS INTUBATED. (Midazolam should not be administered as a rapid intravenous dose.) This loading dose may be followed by a continuous intravenous infusion to maintain the effect. An infusion of midazolam injection has been used in patients whose trachea was intubated but who were allowed to breathe spontaneously. Assisted ventilation is recommended for pediatric patients who are receiving other central nervous system depressant medications such as opioids. Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.06 to 0.12 mg/kg/hr (1 to 2 mcg/kg/min). The rate of infusion can be increased or decreased (generally by 25% of the initial or subsequent infusion rate) as required, or supplemental intravenous doses of midazolam can be administered to increase or maintain the desired effect. Frequent assessment at regular intervals using standard pain/sedation scales is recommended. Drug elimination may be delayed in patients receiving erythromycin and/or other P450-3A4 enzyme inhibitors (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions section) and in patients with liver dysfunction, low cardiac output (especially those requiring inotropic support), and in neonates. Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill, particularly those receiving opioids and/or when midazolam is rapidly administered.

When initiating an infusion with midazolam in hemodynamically compromised patients, the usual loading dose of midazolam should be titrated in small increments and the patient monitored for hemodynamic instability, e.g., hypotension. These patients are also vulnerable to the respiratory depressant effects of midazolam and require careful monitoring of respiratory rate and oxygen saturation.

CONTINUOUS

INTRAVENOUS INFUSION
USUAL NEONATAL DOSE
For sedation in critical care settings.

Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience in preterm and term neonates WHOSE TRACHEA WAS INTUBATED, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam injection should be initiated at a rate of 0.03 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mcg/kg/min) in neonates <32 weeks and 0.06 mg/kg/hr (1 mcg/kg/min) in neonates >32 weeks. Intravenous loading doses should not be used in neonates, rather the infusion may be run more rapidly for the first several hours to establish therapeutic plasma levels. The rate of infusion should be carefully and frequently reassessed, particularly after the first 24 hours so as to administer the lowest possible effective dose and reduce the potential for drug accumulation. Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill and in preterm and term infants, particularly those receiving fentanyl and/or when midazolam is administered rapidly. Due to an increased risk of apnea, extreme caution is advised when sedating preterm and former preterm patients whose trachea is not intubated.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Midazolam Hydrochloride...

Midazolam Hydrochloride

Midazolam injection is a potent sedative agent that requires slow administration and individualization of dosage. Clinical experience has shown midazolam to be 3 to 4 times as potent per mg as diazepam. BECAUSE SERIOUS AND LIFE-THREATENING CARDIORESPIRATORY ADVERSE EVENTS HAVE BEEN REPORTED, PROVISION FOR MONITORING, DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF THESE REACTIONS MUST BE MADE FOR EVERY PATIENT TO WHOM MIDAZOLAM INJECTION IS ADMINISTERED, REGARDLESS OF AGE OR HEALTH STATUS. Excessive single doses or rapid intravenous administration may result in respiratory depression, airway obstruction and/or arrest. The potential for these latter effects is increased in debilitated patients, those receiving concomitant medications capable of depressing the CNS, and patients without an endotracheal tube but undergoing a procedure involving the upper airway such as endoscopy or dental (see Boxed WARNING and WARNINGS).

Reactions such as agitation, involuntary movements, hyperactivity and combativeness have been reported in adult and pediatric patients. Should such reactions occur, caution should be exercised before continuing administration of midazolam (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam should only be administered IM or IV (see WARNINGS).

Care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial injection or extravasation (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam Injection may be mixed in the same syringe with the following frequently used premedications: morphine sulfate, meperidine, atropine sulfate or scopolamine. Midazolam, at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL, is compatible with 5% dextrose in water and 0.9% sodium chloride for up to 24 hours and with Lactated Ringer’s solution for up to 4 hours. Both the 1 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL formulations of midazolam may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Monitoring: Patient response to sedative agents, and resultant respiratory status, is variable. Regardless of the intended level of sedation or route of administration, sedation is a continuum; a patient may move easily from light to deep sedation, with potential loss of protective reflexes. This is especially true in pediatric patients. Sedative doses should be individually titrated, taking into account patient age, clinical status and concomitant use of other CNS depressants. Continuous monitoring of respiratory and cardiac function is required (i.e., pulse oximetry).

Adults and Pediatrics: Sedation guidelines recommend a careful presedation history to determine how a patient's underlying medical conditions or concomitant medications might affect their response to sedation/analgesia as well as a physical examination including a focused examination of the airway for abnormalities. Further recommendations include appropriate presedation fasting.

Titration to effect with multiple small doses is essential for safe administration. It should be noted that adequate time to achieve peak central nervous system effect (3 to 5 minutes) for midazolam should be allowed between doses to minimize the potential for oversedation. Sufficient time must elapse between doses of concomitant sedative medications to allow the effect of each dose to be assessed before subsequent drug administration. This is an important consideration for all patients who receive intravenous midazolam.

Immediate availability of resuscitative drugs and age- and size-appropriate equipment and personnel trained in their use and skilled in airway management should be assured (see WARNINGS).

Pediatrics: For deeply sedated pediatric patients a dedicated individual, other than the practitioner performing the procedure, should monitor the patient throughout the procedure.

Intravenous access is not thought to be necessary for all pediatric patients sedated for a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure because in some cases the difficulty of gaining IV access would defeat the purpose of sedating the child; rather, emphasis should be placed upon having the intravenous equipment available and a practitioner skilled in establishing vascular access in pediatric patients immediately available.

USUAL ADULT DOSE

INTRAMUSCULARLY

For preoperative sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia (induction of sleepiness or drowsiness and relief of apprehension and to impair memory of perioperative events).

For intramuscular use, midazolam should be injected deep in a large muscle mass.

The recommended premedication dose of midazolam for good risk (ASA Physical Status I & II) adult patients below the age of 60 years is 0.07 to 0.08 mg/kg IM (approximately 5 mg IM) administered up to 1 hour before surgery.

The dose must be individualized and reduced when IM midazolam is administered to patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, other higher risk surgical patients, patients 60 or more years of age, and patients who have received concomitant narcotics or other CNS depressants (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). In a study of patients 60 years or older, who did not receive concomitant administration of narcotics, 2 to 3 mg (0.02 to 0.05 mg/kg) of midazolam produced adequate sedation during the preoperative period. The dose of 1 mg IM midazolam may suffice for some older patients if the anticipated intensity and duration of sedation is less critical. As with any potential respiratory depressant, these patients require observation for signs of cardiorespiratory depression after receiving IM midazolam.

Onset is within 15 minutes, peaking at 30 to 60 minutes. It can be administered concomitantly with atropine sulfate or scopolamine hydrochloride and reduced doses of narcotics.

INTRAVENOUSLY

Sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE): Narcotic premedication results in less variability in patient response and a reduction in dosage of midazolam. For peroral procedures, the use of an appropriate topical anesthetic is recommended. For bronchoscopic procedures, the use of narcotic premedication is recommended.

When used for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for a procedure, dosage must be individualized and titrated. Midazolam should always be titrated slowly; administer over at least 2 minutes and allow an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Individual response will vary with age, physical status and concomitant medications, but may also vary independent of these factors. (See WARNINGS concerning cardiac/respiratory arrest/airway obstruction/hypoventilation.)

Midazolam 1 mg/mL formulation is recommended for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures to facilitate slower injection. Both the 1 mg/mL and the 5 mg/mL formulations may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Healthy Adults Below the Age of 60: Titrate slowly to the desired effect (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 2.5 mg should be given over a period of at least 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If further titration is necessary, continue to titrate, using small increments, to the appropriate level of sedation. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes after each increment to fully evaluate the sedative effect. A total dose greater than 5 mg is not usually necessary to reach the desired endpoint.

If narcotic premedication or other CNS depressants are used, patients will require approximately 30% less midazolam than unpremedicated patients.

Patients Age 60 or Older, and Debilitated or Chronically Ill Patients: Because the danger of hypoventilation, airway obstruction, or apnea is greater in elderly patients and those with chronic disease states or decreased pulmonary reserve, and because the peak effect may take longer in these patients, increments should be smaller and the rate of injection slower.

Titrate slowly to the desired effect (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 1.5 mg should be given over a period of no less than 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If additional titration is necessary, it should be given at a rate of no more than 1 mg over a period of 2 minutes, waiting an additional 2 or more minutes each time to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Total doses greater than 3.5 mg are not usually necessary.

If concomitant CNS depressant premedications are used in these patients, they will require at least 50% less midazolam than healthy young unpremedicated patients.

Maintenance Dose: Additional doses to maintain the desired level of sedation may be given in increments of 25% of the dose used to first reach the sedative endpoint, but again only by slow titration, especially in the elderly and chronically ill or debilitated patient. These additional doses should be given only after a thorough clinical evaluation clearly indicates the need for additional sedation.

Induction of Anesthesia:

For induction of general anesthesia, before administration of other anesthetic agents.

Individual response to the drug is variable, particularly when a narcotic premedication is not used. The dosage should be titrated to the desired effect according to the patient’s age and clinical status.

When midazolam is used before other intravenous agents for induction of anesthesia, the initial dose of each agent may be significantly reduced, at times to as low as 25% of the usual initial dose of the individual agents.

Unpremedicated Patients: In the absence of premedication, an average adult under the age of 55 years will usually require an initial dose of 0.3 to 0.35 mg/kg for induction, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect. If needed to complete induction, increments of approximately 25% of the patient’s initial dose may be used; induction may instead be completed with inhalational anesthetics. In resistant cases, up to 0.6 mg/kg total dose may be used for induction, but such larger doses may prolong recovery.

Unpremedicated patients over the age of 55 years usually require less midazolam for induction; an initial dose of 0.3 mg/kg is recommended. Unpremedicated patients with severe systemic disease or other debilitation usually require less midazolam for induction. An initial dose of 0.2 to 0.25 mg/kg will usually suffice; in some cases, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Premedicated Patients: When the patient has received sedative or narcotic premedication, particularly narcotic premedication, the range of recommended doses is 0.15 to 0.35 mg/kg.

In average adults below the age of 55 years, a dose of 0.25 mg/kg, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect, will usually suffice.

The initial dose of 0.2 mg/kg is recommended for good risk (ASA I & II) surgical patients over the age of 55 years.

In some patients with severe systemic disease or debilitation, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Narcotic premedication frequently used during clinical trials included fentanyl (1.5 to 2 mcg/kg IV, administered 5 minutes before induction), morphine (dosage individualized, up to 0.15 mg/kg IM), and meperidine (dosage individualized, up to 1 mg/kg IM). Sedative premedications were hydroxyzine pamoate (100 mg orally) and sodium secobarbital (200 mg orally). Except for intravenous fentanyl, administered 5 minutes before induction, all other premedications should be administered approximately 1 hour prior to the time anticipated for midazolam induction.

Injectable midazolam can also be used during maintenance of anesthesia, for surgical procedures, as a component of balanced anesthesia. Effective narcotic premedication is especially recommended in such cases.

Incremental injections of approximately 25% of the induction dose should be given in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia and repeated as necessary.

CONTINUOUS INFUSION

For continuous infusion, midazolam 5 mg/mL formulation is recommended diluted to a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Usual Adult Dose: If a loading dose is necessary to rapidly initiate sedation, 0.01 to 0.05 mg/kg (approximately 0.5 to 4 mg for a typical adult) may be given slowly or infused over several minutes. This dose may be repeated at 10 to 15 minute intervals until adequate sedation is achieved. For maintenance of sedation, the usual initial infusion rate is 0.02 to 0.1 mg/kg/hr (1 to 7 mg/hr). Higher loading or maintenance infusion rates may occasionally be required in some patients. The lowest recommended doses should be used in patients with residual effects from anesthetic drugs, or in those concurrently receiving other sedatives or opioids.

Individual response to midazolam is variable. The infusion rate should be titrated to the desired level of sedation, taking into account the patient's age, clinical status and current medications. In general, midazolam should be infused at the lowest rate that produces the desired level of sedation. Assessment of sedation should be performed at regular intervals and the midazolam infusion rate adjusted up or down by 25% to 50% of the initial infusion rate so as to assure adequate titration of sedation level. Larger adjustments or even a small incremental dose may be necessary if rapid changes in the level of sedation are indicated. In addition, the infusion rate should be decreased by 10% to 25% every few hours to find the minimum effective infusion rate. Finding the minimum effective infusion rate decreases the potential accumulation of midazolam and provides for the most rapid recovery once the infusion is terminated. Patients who exhibit agitation, hypertension, or tachycardia in response to noxious stimulation, but who are otherwise adequately sedated, may benefit from concurrent administration of an opioid analgesic. Addition of an opioid will generally reduce the minimum effective midazolam infusion rate.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS

UNLIKE ADULT PATIENTS, PEDIATRIC PATIENTS GENERALLY RECEIVE INCREMENTS OF MIDAZOLAM ON A MG/KG BASIS. As a group, pediatric patients generally require higher dosages of midazolam (mg/kg) than do adults. Younger (less than six years) pediatric patients may require higher dosages (mg/kg) than older pediatric patients, and may require close monitoring (see tables below). In obese PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, the dose should be calculated based on ideal body weight. When midazolam is given in conjunction with opioids or other sedatives, the potential for respiratory depression, airway obstruction, or hypoventilation is increased. For appropriate patient monitoring, see Boxed WARNING, WARNINGS, and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Monitoring. The health care practitioner who uses this medication in pediatric patients should be aware of and follow accepted professional guidelines for pediatric sedation appropriate to their situation.
OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION (OAA/S) Assessment Categories Responsiveness Speech Facial Expression Eyes Composite Score
Responds readily to name

spoken in normal tone

normal

normal

clear, no ptosis

5 (alert)

Lethargic response to name

spoken in normal tone

mild slowing

or thickening

mild relaxation

glazed or mild ptosis

(less than half the eye)

4

Responds only after name is

called loudly and/or repeatedly

slurring or

prominent slowing

marked relaxation

(slack jaw)

glazed and marked ptosis

(half the eye or more)

3

Responds only after mild

prodding or shaking

few recognizable

words

−

−

2

Does not respond to mild

prodding or shaking

−

−

−

1 (deep sleep)
FREQUENCY OF OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION COMPOSITE SCORES IN ONE STUDY OF PEDIATRIC PATIENTS UNDERGOING PROCEDURES WITH INTRAVENOUS MIDAZOLAM FOR SEDATION Age Range (years) n OAA/S Score 1 (deep sleep) 2 3 4 5 (alert)
1-2

16

6 (38%)

4 (25%)

3 (19%)

3 (19%)

0

>2-5

22

9 (41%)

5 (23%)

8 (36%)

0

0

>5-12

34

1 (3%)

6 (18%)

22 (65%)

5 (15%)

0

>12-17

18

0

4 (22%)

14 (78%)

0

0

Total (1-17)

90

16 (18%)

19 (21%)

47 (52%)

8 (9%)

0

INTRAMUSCULARLY

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to anesthesia or for procedures, intramuscular midazolam can be used to sedate pediatric patients to facilitate less traumatic insertion of an intravenous catheter for titration of additional medication.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

Sedation after intramuscular midazolam is age and dose dependent: higher doses may result in deeper and more prolonged sedation. Doses of 0.1 to 0.15 mg/kg are usually effective and do not prolong emergence from general anesthesia. For more anxious patients, doses up to 0.5 mg/kg have been used. Although not systematically studied, the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg. If midazolam is given with an opioid, the initial dose of each must be reduced.

INTRAVENOUSLY BY INTERMITTENT INJECTION

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to and during procedures or prior to anesthesia.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

It should be recognized that the depth of sedation/anxiolysis needed for pediatric patients depends on the type of procedure to be performed. For example, simple light sedation/anxiolysis in the preoperative period is quite different from the deep sedation and analgesia required for an endoscopic procedure in a child. For this reason, there is a broad range of dosage. For all pediatric patients, regardless of the indications for sedation/anxiolysis, it is vital to titrate midazolam and other concomitant medications slowly to the desired clinical effect. The initial dose of midazolam should be administered over 2 to 3 minutes. Since midazolam is water soluble, it takes approximately three times longer than diazepam to achieve peak EEG effects, therefore one must wait an additional 2 to 3 minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect before initiating a procedure or repeating a dose. If further sedation is necessary, continue to titrate with small increments until the appropriate level of sedation is achieved. If other medications capable of depressing the CNS are coadministered, the peak effect of those concomitant medications must be considered and the dose of midazolam adjusted. The importance of drug titration to effect is vital to the safe sedation/anxiolysis of the pediatric patient. The total dose of midazolam will depend on patient response, the type and duration of the procedure, as well as the type and dose of concomitant medications.

Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age: limited information is available in non-intubated pediatric patients less than 6 months of age. It is uncertain when the patient transfers from neonatal physiology to pediatric physiology, therefore the dosing recommendations are unclear. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age are particularly vulnerable to airway obstruction and hypoventilation, therefore titration with small increments to clinical effect and careful monitoring are essential.

Pediatric patients 6 months to 5 years of age: initial dose 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. A total dose up to 0.6 mg/kg may be necessary to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 6 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

Pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age: Initial dose 0.025 to 0.05 mg/kg; total dose up to 0.4 mg/kg may be needed to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 10 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

Pediatric patients 12 to 16 years of age: should be dosed as adults. Prolonged sedation may be associated with higher doses; some patients in this age range will require higher than recommended adult doses but the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg.

The dose of midazolam must be reduced in patients premedicated with opioid or other sedative agents including midazolam. Higher risk or debilitated patients may require lower dosages whether or not concomitant sedating medications have been administered (see WARNINGS).

CONTINUOUS INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia in critical care settings.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

To initiate sedation, an intravenous loading dose of 0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg administered over at least 2 to 3 minutes can be used to establish the desired clinical effect IN PATIENTS WHOSE TRACHEA IS INTUBATED. (Midazolam should not be administered as a rapid intravenous dose.) This loading dose may be followed by a continuous intravenous infusion to maintain the effect. An infusion of midazolam has been used in patients whose trachea was intubated but who were allowed to breathe spontaneously. Assisted ventilation is recommended for pediatric patients who are receiving other central nervous system depressant medications such as opioids. Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.06 to 0.12 mg/kg/hr (1 to 2 mcg/kg/min). The rate of infusion can be increased or decreased (generally by 25% of the initial or subsequent infusion rate) as required, or supplemental intravenous doses of midazolam can be administered to increase or maintain the desired effect. Frequent assessment at regular intervals using standard pain/sedation scales is recommended. Drug elimination may be delayed in patients receiving erythromycin and/or other P450-3A4 enzyme inhibitors (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions) and in patients with liver dysfunction, low cardiac output (especially those requiring inotropic support), and in neonates. Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill, particularly those receiving opioids and/or when midazolam is rapidly administered.

When initiating an infusion with midazolam in hemodynamically compromised patients, the usual loading dose of midazolam should be titrated in small increments and the patient monitored for hemodynamic instability, e.g., hypotension. These patients are also vulnerable to the respiratory depressant effects of midazolam and require careful monitoring of respiratory rate and oxygen saturation.

CONTINUOUS INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

For sedation in critical care settings.

USUAL NEONATAL DOSE

Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience in preterm and term neonates WHOSE TRACHEA WAS INTUBATED, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.03 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mcg/kg/min) in neonates <32 weeks and 0.06 mg/kg/hr (1 mcg/kg/min) in neonates >32 weeks. Intravenous loading doses should not be used in neonates, rather the infusion may be run more rapidly for the first several hours to establish therapeutic plasma levels. The rate of infusion should be carefully and frequently reassessed, particularly after the first 24 hours so as to administer the lowest possible effective dose and reduce the potential for drug accumulation. This is particularly important because of the potential for adverse effects related to metabolism of the benzyl alcohol (see WARNINGS, Usage In Preterm Infants And Neonates). Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill and in preterm and term infants, particularly those receiving fentanyl and/or when midazolam is administered rapidly. Due to an increased risk of apnea, extreme caution is advised when sedating preterm and former preterm patients whose trachea is not intubated.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Midazolam Hydrochloride...

Midazolam Hydrochloride

Midazolam injection is a potent sedative agent that requires slow administration and individualization of dosage. Clinical experience has shown midazolam to be 3 to 4 times as potent per mg as diazepam. BECAUSE SERIOUS AND LIFE-THREATENING CARDIORESPIRATORY ADVERSE EVENTS HAVE BEEN REPORTED, PROVISION FOR MONITORING, DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF THESE REACTIONS MUST BE MADE FOR EVERY PATIENT TO WHOM MIDAZOLAM INJECTION IS ADMINISTERED, REGARDLESS OF AGE OR HEALTH STATUS. Excessive single doses or rapid intravenous administration may result in respiratory depression, airway obstruction and/or arrest. The potential for these latter effects is increased in debilitated patients, those receiving concomitant medications capable of depressing the CNS, and patients without an endotracheal tube but undergoing a procedure involving the upper airway such as endoscopy or dental (see Boxed WARNING and WARNINGS).

Reactions such as agitation, involuntary movements, hyperactivity and combativeness have been reported in adult and pediatric patients. Should such reactions occur, caution should be exercised before continuing administration of midazolam (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam should only be administered IM or IV (see WARNINGS).

Care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial injection or extravasation (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam Injection may be mixed in the same syringe with the following frequently used premedications: morphine sulfate, meperidine, atropine sulfate or scopolamine. Midazolam, at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL, is compatible with 5% dextrose in water and 0.9% sodium chloride for up to 24 hours and with Lactated Ringer’s solution for up to 4 hours. Both the 1 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL formulations of midazolam may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Monitoring: Patient response to sedative agents, and resultant respiratory status, is variable. Regardless of the intended level of sedation or route of administration, sedation is a continuum; a patient may move easily from light to deep sedation, with potential loss of protective reflexes. This is especially true in pediatric patients. Sedative doses should be individually titrated, taking into account patient age, clinical status and concomitant use of other CNS depressants. Continuous monitoring of respiratory and cardiac function is required (i.e., pulse oximetry).

Adults and Pediatrics: Sedation guidelines recommend a careful presedation history to determine how a patient's underlying medical conditions or concomitant medications might affect their response to sedation/analgesia as well as a physical examination including a focused examination of the airway for abnormalities. Further recommendations include appropriate presedation fasting.

Titration to effect with multiple small doses is essential for safe administration. It should be noted that adequate time to achieve peak central nervous system effect (3 to 5 minutes) for midazolam should be allowed between doses to minimize the potential for oversedation. Sufficient time must elapse between doses of concomitant sedative medications to allow the effect of each dose to be assessed before subsequent drug administration. This is an important consideration for all patients who receive intravenous midazolam.

Immediate availability of resuscitative drugs and age- and size-appropriate equipment and personnel trained in their use and skilled in airway management should be assured (see WARNINGS).

Pediatrics: For deeply sedated pediatric patients a dedicated individual, other than the practitioner performing the procedure, should monitor the patient throughout the procedure.

Intravenous access is not thought to be necessary for all pediatric patients sedated for a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure because in some cases the difficulty of gaining IV access would defeat the purpose of sedating the child; rather, emphasis should be placed upon having the intravenous equipment available and a practitioner skilled in establishing vascular access in pediatric patients immediately available.

USUAL ADULT DOSE

INTRAMUSCULARLY

For preoperative sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia (induction of sleepiness or drowsiness and relief of apprehension and to impair memory of perioperative events). For intramuscular use, midazolam should be injected deep in a large muscle mass.

The recommended premedication dose of midazolam for good risk (ASA Physical Status I & II) adult patients below the age of 60 years is 0.07 to 0.08 mg/kg IM (approximately 5 mg IM) administered up to 1 hour before surgery.

The dose must be individualized and reduced when IM midazolam is administered to patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, other higher risk surgical patients, patients 60 or more years of age, and patients who have received concomitant narcotics or other CNS depressants (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). In a study of patients 60 years or older, who did not receive concomitant administration of narcotics, 2 to 3 mg (0.02 to 0.05 mg/kg) of midazolam produced adequate sedation during the preoperative period. The dose of 1 mg IM midazolam may suffice for some older patients if the anticipated intensity and duration of sedation is less critical. As with any potential respiratory depressant, these patients require observation for signs of cardiorespiratory depression after receiving IM midazolam.

Onset is within 15 minutes, peaking at 30 to 60 minutes. It can be administered concomitantly with atropine sulfate or scopolamine hydrochloride and reduced doses of narcotics.

INTRAVENOUSLY

Sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE): Narcotic premedication results in less variability in patient response and a reduction in dosage of midazolam. For peroral procedures, the use of an appropriate topical anesthetic is recommended. For bronchoscopic procedures, the use of narcotic premedication is recommended.

When used for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for a procedure, dosage must be individualized and titrated. Midazolam should always be titrated slowly; administer over at least 2 minutes and allow an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Individual response will vary with age, physical status and concomitant medications, but may also vary independent of these factors. (See WARNINGS concerning cardiac/respiratory arrest/airway obstruction/hypoventilation.)

Midazolam 1 mg/mL formulation is recommended for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures to facilitate slower injection. Both the 1 mg/mL and the 5 mg/mL formulations may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

1.    Healthy Adults Below the Age of 60: Titrate slowly to the desired effect (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 2.5 mg should be given over a period of at least 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If further titration is necessary, continue to titrate, using small increments, to the appropriate level of sedation. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes after each increment to fully evaluate the sedative effect. A total dose greater than 5 mg is not usually necessary to reach the desired endpoint.

If narcotic premedication or other CNS depressants are used, patients will require approximately 30% less midazolam than unpremedicated patients.

2.    Patients Age 60 or Older, and Debilitated or Chronically Ill Patients: Because the danger of hypoventilation, airway obstruction, or apnea is greater in elderly patients and those with chronic disease states or decreased pulmonary reserve, and because the peak effect may take longer in these patients, increments should be smaller and the rate of injection slower.

Titrate slowly to the desired effect (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 1.5 mg should be given over a period of no less than 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If additional titration is necessary, it should be given at a rate of no more than 1 mg over a period of   2 minutes, waiting an additional 2 or more minutes each time to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Total doses greater than 3.5 mg are not usually necessary.

If concomitant CNS depressant premedications are used in these patients, they will require at least 50% less midazolam than healthy young unpremedicated patients.

3.    Maintenance Dose: Additional doses to maintain the desired level of sedation may be given in increments of 25% of the dose used to first reach the sedative endpoint, but again only by slow titration, especially in the elderly and chronically ill or debilitated patient. These additional doses should be given only after a thorough clinical evaluation clearly indicates the need for additional sedation.

Induction of Anesthesia:

For induction of general anesthesia, before administration of other anesthetic agents.

Individual response to the drug is variable, particularly when a narcotic premedication is not used. The dosage should be titrated to the desired effect according to the patient’s age and clinical status.

When midazolam is used before other intravenous agents for induction of anesthesia, the initial dose of each agent may be significantly reduced, at times to as low as 25% of the usual initial dose of the individual agents.

Unpremedicated Patients: In the absence of premedication, an average adult under the age of 55 years will usually require an initial dose of 0.3 to 0.35 mg/kg for induction, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect. If needed to complete induction, increments of approximately 25% of the patient’s initial dose may be used; induction may instead be completed with inhalational anesthetics. In resistant cases, up to 0.6 mg/kg total dose may be used for induction, but such larger doses may prolong recovery.

Unpremedicated patients over the age of 55 years usually require less midazolam for induction; an initial dose of 0.3 mg/kg is recommended. Unpremedicated patients with severe systemic disease or other debilitation usually require less midazolam for induction. An initial dose of 0.2 to 0.25 mg/kg will usually suffice; in some cases, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Premedicated Patients: When the patient has received sedative or narcotic premedication, particularly narcotic premedication, the range of recommended doses is 0.15 to 0.35 mg/kg.

In average adults below the age of 55 years, a dose of 0.25 mg/kg, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect, will usually suffice.

The initial dose of 0.2 mg/kg is recommended for good risk (ASA I & II) surgical patients over the age of 55 years.

In some patients with severe systemic disease or debilitation, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.

Narcotic premedication frequently used during clinical trials included fentanyl (1.5 to 2 mcg/kg IV, administered 5 minutes before induction), morphine (dosage individualized, up to 0.15 mg/kg IM), and meperidine (dosage individualized, up to 1 mg/kg IM). Sedative premedications were hydroxyzine pamoate (100 mg orally) and sodium secobarbital (200 mg orally). Except for intravenous fentanyl, administered 5 minutes before induction, all other premedications should be administered approximately 1 hour prior to the time anticipated for midazolam induction.

Injectable midazolam can also be used during maintenance of anesthesia, for surgical procedures, as a component of balanced anesthesia. Effective narcotic premedication is especially recommended in such cases.

Incremental injections of approximately 25% of the induction dose should be given in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia and repeated as necessary.

CONTINUOUS INFUSION

For continuous infusion, midazolam 5 mg/mL formulation is recommended diluted to a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Usual Adult Dose: If a loading dose is necessary to rapidly initiate sedation, 0.01 to 0.05 mg/kg (approximately 0.5 to 4 mg for a typical adult) may be given slowly or infused over several minutes. This dose may be repeated at 10 to 15 minute intervals until adequate sedation is achieved. For maintenance of sedation, the usual initial infusion rate is 0.02 to 0.1 mg/kg/hr (1 to 7 mg/hr). Higher loading or maintenance infusion rates may occasionally be required in some patients. The lowest recommended doses should be used in patients with residual effects from anesthetic drugs, or in those concurrently receiving other sedatives or opioids.

Individual response to midazolam is variable. The infusion rate should be titrated to the desired level of sedation, taking into account the patient's age, clinical status and current medications. In general, midazolam should be infused at the lowest rate that produces the desired level of sedation. Assessment of sedation should be performed at regular intervals and the midazolam infusion rate adjusted up or down by 25% to 50% of the initial infusion rate so as to assure adequate titration of sedation level. Larger adjustments or even a small incremental dose may be necessary if rapid changes in the level of sedation are indicated. In addition, the infusion rate should be decreased by 10% to 25% every few hours to find the minimum effective infusion rate. Finding the minimum effective infusion rate decreases the potential accumulation of midazolam and provides for the most rapid recovery once the infusion is terminated. Patients who exhibit agitation, hypertension, or tachycardia in response to noxious stimulation, but who are otherwise adequately sedated, may benefit from concurrent administration of an opioid analgesic. Addition of an opioid will generally reduce the minimum effective midazolam infusion rate.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS

UNLIKE ADULT PATIENTS, PEDIATRIC PATIENTS GENERALLY RECEIVE INCREMENTS OF MIDAZOLAM ON A MG/KG BASIS. As a group, pediatric patients generally require higher dosages of midazolam (mg/kg) than do adults. Younger (less than six years) pediatric patients may require higher dosages (mg/kg) than older pediatric patients, and may require close monitoring (see tables below). In obese PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, the dose should be calculated based on ideal body weight. When midazolam is given in conjunction with opioids or other sedatives, the potential for respiratory depression, airway obstruction, or hypoventilation is increased. For appropriate patient monitoring, see Boxed WARNING, WARNINGS, and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Monitoring. The health care practitioner who uses this medication in pediatric patients should be aware of and follow accepted professional guidelines for pediatric sedation appropriate to their situation.
OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION (OAA/S)
Assessment Categories

Responsiveness

Speech

Facial Expression

Eyes

Composite Score

Responds readily to name

spoken in normal tone

normal

normal

clear, no ptosis

5 (alert)

Lethargic response to name

spoken in normal tone

mild slowing

or thickening

mild relaxation

glazed or mild ptosis

(less than half the eye)

4

Responds only after name is called loudly and/or repeatedly

slurring or

prominent slowing

marked relaxation

(slack jaw)

glazed and marked ptosis

(half the eye or more)

3

Responds only after mild

prodding or shaking

few recognizable

words

–

–

2

Does not respond to mild

prodding or shaking

–

–

–

1 (deep sleep)
FREQUENCY OF OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION COMPOSITE SCORES IN ONE STUDY OF PEDIATRIC PATIENTS UNDERGOING PROCEDURES WITH INTRAVENOUS MIDAZOLAM FOR SEDATION
Age Range (years)

n

OAA/S Score

1 (deep sleep)

2

3

4

5 (alert)

1-2

16

6 (38%)

4 (25%)

3 (19%)

3 (19%)

0

>2-5

22

9 (41%)

5 (23%)

8 (36%)

0

0

>5-12

34

1 (3%)

6 (18%)

22 (65%)

5 (15%)

0

>12-17

18

0

4 (22%)

14 (78%)

0

0

Total (1-17)

90

16 (18%)

19 (21%)

47 (52%)

8 (9%)

0

INTRAMUSCULARLY

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to anesthesia or for procedures, intramuscular midazolam can be used to sedate pediatric patients to facilitate less traumatic insertion of an intravenous catheter for titration of additional medication.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

Sedation after intramuscular midazolam is age and dose dependent: higher doses may result in deeper and more prolonged sedation. Doses of 0.1 to 0.15 mg/kg are usually effective and do not prolong emergence from general anesthesia. For more anxious patients, doses up to 0.5 mg/kg have been used. Although not systematically studied, the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg. If midazolam is given with an opioid, the initial dose of each must be reduced.

INTRAVENOUSLY BY

INTERMITTENT INJECTION

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia

prior to and during procedures

or prior to anesthesia.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

It should be recognized that the depth of sedation/anxiolysis needed for pediatric patients depends on the type of procedure to be performed. For example, simple light sedation/anxiolysis in the preoperative period is quite different from the deep sedation and analgesia required for an endoscopic procedure in a child. For this reason, there is a broad range of dosage. For all pediatric patients, regardless of the indications for sedation/anxiolysis, it is vital to titrate midazolam and other concomitant medications slowly to the desired clinical effect. The initial dose of midazolam should be administered over 2 to 3 minutes. Since midazolam is water soluble, it takes approximately three times longer than diazepam to achieve peak EEG effects, therefore one must wait an additional 2 to 3 minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect before initiating a procedure or repeating a dose. If further sedation is necessary, continue to titrate with small increments until the appropriate level of sedation is achieved. If other medications capable of depressing the CNS are coadministered, the peak effect of those concomitant medications must be considered and the dose of midazolam adjusted. The importance of drug titration to effect is vital to the safe sedation/anxiolysis of the pediatric patient. The total dose of midazolam will depend on patient response, the type and duration of the procedure, as well as the type and dose of concomitant medications.

1.     Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age: limited information is available in non-intubated pediatric patients less than 6 months of age. It is uncertain when the patient transfers from neonatal physiology to pediatric physiology, therefore the dosing recommendations are unclear. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age are particularly vulnerable to airway obstruction and hypoventilation, therefore titration with small increments to clinical effect and careful monitoring are essential.

2.     Pediatric patients 6 months to 5 years of age: initial dose 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. A total dose up to 0.6 mg/kg may be necessary to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 6 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

3.     Pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age: Initial dose 0.025 to 0.05 mg/kg; total dose up to 0.4 mg/kg may be needed to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 10 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses.

4.     Pediatric patients 12 to 16 years of age: should be dosed as adults. Prolonged sedation may be associated with higher doses; some patients in this age range will require higher than recommended adult doses but the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg.

The dose of midazolam must be reduced in patients premedicated with opioid or other sedative agents including midazolam. Higher risk or debilitated patients may require lower dosages whether or not concomitant sedating medications have been administered (see WARNINGS).

CONTINUOUS INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia in critical care settings.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

To initiate sedation, an intravenous loading dose of 0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg administered over at least 2 to 3 minutes can be used to establish the desired clinical effect IN PATIENTS WHOSE TRACHEA IS INTUBATED. (Midazolam should not be administered as a rapid intravenous dose.) This loading dose may be followed by a continuous intravenous infusion to maintain the effect. An infusion of midazolam has been used in patients whose trachea was intubated but who were allowed to breathe spontaneously. Assisted ventilation is recommended for pediatric patients who are receiving other central nervous system depressant medications such as opioids. Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.06 to 0.12 mg/kg/hr (1 to 2 mcg/kg/min). The rate of infusion can be increased or decreased (generally by 25% of the initial or subsequent infusion rate) as required, or supplemental intravenous doses of midazolam can be administered to increase or maintain the desired effect. Frequent assessment at regular intervals using standard pain/sedation scales is recommended. Drug elimination may be delayed in patients receiving erythromycin and/or other P450-3A4 enzyme inhibitors (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions) and in patients with liver dysfunction, low cardiac output (especially those requiring inotropic support), and in neonates. Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill, particularly those receiving opioids and/or when midazolam is rapidly administered.

When initiating an infusion with midazolam in hemodynamically compromised patients, the usual loading dose of midazolam should be titrated in small increments and the patient monitored for hemodynamic instability, e.g., hypotension. These patients are also vulnerable to the respiratory depressant effects of midazolam and require careful monitoring of respiratory rate and oxygen saturation.

CONTINUOUS INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

For sedation in critical care settings.

USUAL NEONATAL DOSE

Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience in preterm and term neonates WHOSE TRACHEA WAS INTUBATED, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.03 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mcg/kg/min) in neonates <32 weeks and 0.06 mg/kg/hr (1 mcg/kg/min) in neonates >32 weeks. Intravenous loading doses should not be used in neonates, rather the infusion may be run more rapidly for the first several hours to establish therapeutic plasma levels. The rate of infusion should be carefully and frequently reassessed, particularly after the first 24 hours so as to administer the lowest possible effective dose and reduce the potential for drug accumulation. This is particularly important because of the potential for adverse effects related to metabolism of the benzyl alcohol (see WARNINGS, Usage In Preterm Infants And Neonates). Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill and in preterm and term infants, particularly those receiving fentanyl and/or when midazolam is administered rapidly. Due to an increased risk of apnea, extreme caution is advised when sedating preterm and former preterm patients whose trachea is not intubated.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of one to two 50 mL vials (44.6 to 100 mEq) may be given initially and continued at a rate of 50 mL (44.6 to 50 mEq) every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary (as indicated by arterial pH and blood gas monitoring) to reverse the acidosis. Caution should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), the 4.2% solution is recommended for intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day. Slow administration rates and the 4.2% solution are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-to-eight-hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight — depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. In metabolic acidosis associated with shock, therapy should be monitored by measuring blood gases, plasma osmolarity, arterial blood lactate, hemodynamics and cardiac rhythm. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Dexamethasone Sodium Ph...

Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate

The pharmacy bulk package is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection should be administered by slow intravenous injection over at least 10 to 15 minutes or can also be delivered in greater dilutions with 50 to 100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15 to 30 minutes.

The recommended adult dosage of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older: The recommended daily dose of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. The safety and efficacy of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection administered via intramuscular injection in pediatric patients have not been established. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous ampicillin and sulbactam for injection. (see CLINICAL STUDIES section).

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of ampicillin and sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:
TABLE 5
Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2)

Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours)

Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage

≥30

1

1.5 g to 3 g q 6h to q 8h

15 to 29

5

1.5 g to 3 g q 12h

5 to 14

9

1.5 g to 3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males weight (kg) x (140 – age) 72 x serum creatinine

Females 0.85 x above value
Potassium Chloride In S...

Potassium Chloride In Sodium Chloride

These solutions should be administered only by intravenous infusion and as directed by the physician. The dose and rate of injection are dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium should be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration less than 30 mEq/liter. Somewhat faster rates and greater concentrations (usually up to 40 mEq/liter) of potassium may be indicated in patients with more severe potassium deficiency. The total 24-hour dose should not generally exceed 200 mEq of potassium.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Cefepime

Cefepime

The recommended adult and pediatric dosages and routes of administration are outlined in the following table. Cefepime for injection should be administered intravenously over approximately 30 minutes.
Table 11: Recommended Dosage Schedule for Cefepime for Injection in Patients with CrCL Greater Than 60 mL/min
Site and Type of Infection

Dose

Frequency

Duration

(Days)

Adults

Moderate to Severe Pneumonia due to S. pneumoniae*, P. aeruginosa, K. pneumoniae, or Enterobacter species

1 to 2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Empiric therapy for febrile neutropenic patients (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES.)

2 g IV

Every 8 hours

7**

Mild to Moderate Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli, K. pneumoniae, or P. mirabilis*

0.5 to 1 g IV

Every 12 hours

7 to 10

Severe Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli or K. pneumoniae*

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Moderate to Severe Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections due to S. aureus or S. pyogenes

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Complicated Intra-abdominal Infections (used in combination with metronidazole) caused by E. coli, viridans group streptococci, P. aeruginosa, K. pneumoniae, Enterobacter species, or B. fragilis. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.)

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

7 to 10

Pediatric Patients (2 months up to 16 years)

The maximum dose for pediatric patients should not exceed the recommended adult dose. The usual recommended dosage in pediatric patients up to 40 kg in weight for uncomplicated and complicated urinary tract infections (including pyelonephritis), uncomplicated skin and skin structure infections, and pneumonia is 50 mg per kg per dose, administered every 12 hours (50 mg per kg per dose, every 8 hours for febrile neutropenic patients), for durations as given above.

* including cases associated with concurrent bacteremia

** or until resolution of neutropenia. In patients whose fever resolves but who remain neutropenic for more than 7 days, the need for continued antimicrobial therapy should be re-evaluated frequently.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment.

Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with creatinine clearance less than or equal to 60 mL/min, the dose of cefepime for injection should be adjusted to compensate for the slower rate of renal elimination. The recommended initial dose of cefepime for injection should be the same as in patients with normal renal function except in patients undergoing hemodialysis. The recommended doses of cefepime for injection in patients with renal impairment are presented in Table 12.

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault Equation)3 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:
Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) =    Weight (kg) x (140 – age) 72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL) Females: 0.85 x above value Table 12: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Cefepime for Injection in Adult Patients (Normal Renal Function, Renal Impairment, and Hemodialysis)
CreatinineClearance(mL/min)

Recommended Maintenance Schedule

Greater than 60 Normal recommended dosing schedule

500 mg every 12 hours

1 g every 12 hours

2 g every 12 hours

2 g every 8 hours

30 to 60

500 mg every 24 hours

1 g every 24 hours

2 g every 24 hours

2 g every 12 hours

11 to 29

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

1 g every 24 hours

2 g every 24 hours

Less than 11

250 mg every 24 hours

250 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

1 g every 24 hours

CAPD

500 mg every 48 hours

1 g every 48 hours

2 g every 48 hours

2 g every 48 hours

Hemodialysis*

1 g on day 1, then 500 mg every 24 hours thereafter

1 g every 24 hours

*On hemodialysis days, cefepime should be administered following hemodialysis. Whenever possible, cefepime should be administered at the same time each day.

In patients undergoing continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis, cefepime for injection may be administered at normally recommended doses at a dosage interval of every 48 hours (see Table 12).

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, approximately 68% of the total amount of cefepime present in the body at the start of dialysis will be removed during a 3-hour dialysis period. The dosage of cefepime for injection for hemodialysis patients is 1 g on Day 1 followed by 500 mg every 24 hours for the treatment of all infections except febrile neutropenia, which is 1 g every 24 hours.

Cefepime for injection should be administered at the same time each day and following the completion of hemodialysis on hemodialysis days (see Table 12).

Data in pediatric patients with impaired renal function are not available; however, since cefepime pharmacokinetics are similar in adults and pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), changes in the dosing regimen proportional to those in adults (see Tables 11 and 12) are recommended for pediatric patients.

Administration

ADD-VantageTM vials are to be constituted only with 50 mL or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection in Hospira ADD-VantageTM flexible diluent containers. (See INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE) THE RESULTING SOLUTION SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED OVER APPROXIMATELY 30 MINUTES.

Intermittent intravenous infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing cefepime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Preparation of cefepime for injection solutions is summarized in Table 13.
Table 13: Preparation of Solutions of Cefepime for Injection
Single-Dose Vialsfor IntravenousAdministration

Amount of Diluentto be added (mL)

ApproximateAvailable Volume(mL)

ApproximateCefepimeConcentration(mg/mL)

ADD-VantageTM

1 g vial

50

50

20

1 g vial

100

100

10

2 g vial

50

50

40

2 g vial

100

100

20

Compatibility and Stability

Cefepime for injection in ADD-VantageTM vials is stable at concentrations of 10 to 40 mg per mL in 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C or 7 days in a refrigerator 2° to 8°C.

Solutions of cefepime for injection, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of ampicillin at a concentration greater than 40 mg per mL, and should not be added to metronidazole, vancomycin, gentamicin, tobramycin, netilmicin sulfate, or aminophylline because of potential interaction. However, if concurrent therapy with cefepime for injection is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately.

NOTE: PARENTERAL DRUGS SHOULD BE INSPECTED VISUALLY FOR PARTICULATE MATTER BEFORE ADMINISTRATION. IF PARTICULATE MATTER IS EVIDENT IN RECONSTITUTED FLUIDS, THE DRUG SOLUTION SHOULD BE DISCARDED.

As with other cephalosporins, the color of cefepime for injection, as well as its solutions, tend to darken depending on storage conditions; however, when stored as recommended, the product potency is not adversely affected.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

These instructions for use should be made available to the individuals who perform the reconstitution steps.

To Open:

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

1.    Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows:

a.    To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.)

NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe.



b.    To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.)

2.    Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go.

NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.)

3.    Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly.

4.    Label appropriately.



To Reconstitute the Drug:

1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial.

2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.)

3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix.

4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.

5. Look through the bottom of the vial to verify that the stopper has been removed and complete mixing has occurred. (SEE FIGURE 7.)

If the rubber stopper is not removed from the vial and medication is not released on the first attempt, the inner cap may be manipulated back into the rubber stopper without removing the drug vial from the diluent container. Repeat steps 3 through 5.



Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. Close flow control clamp of administration set. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate Injection, USP is administered by intravenous infusion only after dilution in an ADD-Vantage Flexible Diluent Container (See INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE). CAUTION: The 250 mg ADD-Vantage morphine vial must be diluted in a 250 mL ADD-Vantage Flexible Diluent Container only.

Morphine sulfate should be given in the smallest effective dose and as infrequently as possible in order to minimize the development of tolerance and physical dependence. Reduced dosage is indicated in poor-risk patients, in very young or very old patients, and in patients receiving other CNS depressants.

In patients with severe, chronic pain, dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response and tolerance of the patient. In patients with exceptionally severe, chronic pain or in those who have become tolerant to the analgesic effect of opiate agonists, it may be necessary to exceed the usual dosage.

Morphine sulfate should be administered by slow IV infusion after dilution. The usual dose for adults is 1 mg with a range of 0.1 mg to 5 mg per incremental dose. The physician should adjust the dosage depending on the patient’s response. A controlled infusion device should be used to monitor the infusion rate.

Severe, Chronic Pain: When morphine sulfate is administered by continuous IV infusion for relief of severe, chronic pain associated with cancer, the dosage of the drug must be individualized according to the response and tolerance of the patient. If specific dose related information is required, the clinician should consult an appropriate text.

For IV administration, morphine sulfate should be injected slowly. Rapid IV injection of the drug may result in an increased frequency of opiate-induced adverse effects; severe respiratory depression, apnea, hypotension, peripheral circulatory collapse, chest wall rigidity, cardiac arrest and anaphylactoid reactions have occurred following rapid IV injection. The rate of continuous IV infusion of the drug must be individualized according to the response and tolerance of the patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Use Vial in ADD-Vantage

Flexible Diluent Container

To Open:

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and

Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

1.   Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows:

a.   To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (see FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (See FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
b.   To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (See FIGURE 3.)

2.   Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (See FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go.

NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (See FIGURE 4.)

3.   Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly.

4.   Label appropriately.
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
To Prepare Admixture:

1.   Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial.

2.   With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (See FIGURE 5.)

3.   Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (See FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix.

4.   Mix container contents thoroughly and use within 24 hours.
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)
Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. Close flow control clamp of administration set. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible containers in series connections.
Gentamicin

Gentamicin

Labetalol hydrochloride injection is intended for intravenous use in hospitalized patients. DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED depending upon the severity of hypertension and the response of the patient during dosing.

Patients should always be kept in a supine position during the period of intravenous drug administration. A substantial fall in blood pressure on standing should be expected in these patients. The patient’s ability to tolerate an upright position should be established before permitting any ambulation, such as using toilet facilities.

Either of two methods of administration of labetalol hydrochloride injection may be used: a) repeated intravenous injections, b) slow continuous infusion.

Repeated Intravenous Injection

Initially, labetalol hydrochloride injection should be given in a dose of 20 mg labetalol HCl (which corresponds to 0.25 mg/kg for an 80 kg patient) by slow intravenous injection over a 2-minute period.

Immediately before the injection and at 5 and 10 minutes after injection, supine blood pressure should be measured to evaluate response. Additional injections of 40 mg or 80 mg can be given at 10 minute intervals until a desired supine blood pressure is achieved or a total of 300 mg labetalol HCl has been injected. The maximum effect usually occurs within 5 minutes of each injection.

Slow Continuous Infusion

Labetalol hydrochloride injection is prepared for continuous intravenous infusion by diluting the contents with commonly used intravenous fluids (see below). Examples of methods of preparing the infusion solution are:

The contents of either two 20 mL vials (40 mL), or one 40 mL vial, are added to 160 mL of a commonly used intravenous fluid such that the resultant 200 mL of solution contains 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride, 1 mg/mL. The diluted solution should be administered at a rate of 2 mL/min to deliver 2 mg/min.

Alternatively, the contents of either two 20 mL vials (40 mL), or one 40 mL vial, of labetalol hydrochloride injection are added to 250 mL of a commonly used intravenous fluid. The resultant solution will contain 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride, approximately 2 mg/3 mL. The diluted solution should be administered at a rate of 3 mL/min to deliver approximately 2 mg/min.

The rate of infusion of the diluted solution may be adjusted according to the blood pressure response, at the discretion of the physician. To facilitate a desired rate of infusion, the diluted solution can be infused using a controlled administration mechanism, e.g., graduated burette or mechanically driven infusion pump.

Since the half-life of labetalol is 5 to 8 hours, steady-state blood levels (in the face of a constant rate of infusion) would not be reached during the usual infusion time period. The infusion should be continued until a satisfactory response is obtained and should then be stopped and oral labetalol hydrochloride started. The effective intravenous dose is usually in the range of 50 to 200 mg. A total dose of up to 300 mg may be required in some patients.

Blood Pressure Monitoring

The blood pressure should be monitored during and after completion of the infusion or intravenous injections. Rapid or excessive falls in either systolic or diastolic blood pressure during intravenous treatment should be avoided. In patients with excessive systolic hypertension, the decrease in systolic pressure should be used as indicator of effectiveness in addition to the response of the diastolic pressure.

Initiation of Dosing with Labetalol Hydrochloride Tablets

Subsequent oral dosing with labetalol hydrochloride tablets should begin when it has been established that the supine diastolic blood pressure has begun to rise. The recommended initial dose is 200 mg, followed in 6 to 12 hours by an additional dose of 200 or 400 mg, depending on the blood pressure response. Thereafter, inpatient titration with labetalol hydrochloride tablets may proceed as follows:
Inpatient Titration Instructions * If needed, the total daily dose may be given in three divided doses.
Regimen

Daily Dose*

200 mg b.i.d.

400 mg

400 mg b.i.d.

800 mg

800 mg b.i.d.

1600 mg

1200 mg b.i.d.

2400 mg

While in the hospital, the dosage of labetalol hydrochloride tablets may be increased at 1 day intervals to achieve the desired blood pressure reduction.

For subsequent outpatient titration or maintenance dosing see Labetalol Hydrochloride Tablets Product Information DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION for additional recommendations.

Compatibility with commonly used intravenous fluids

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Labetalol hydrochloride injection was tested for compatibility with commonly used intravenous fluids at final concentrations of 1.25 mg to 3.75 mg labetalol hydrochloride per mL of the mixture. Labetalol hydrochloride injection was found to be compatible with and stable (for 24 hours refrigerated or at room temperature) in mixtures with the following solutions:

Ringers Injection, USP

Lactated Ringers Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and Ringers Injection

5% Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection

5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

2.5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.33% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Labetalol hydrochloride injection was NOT compatible with 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP. Care should be taken when administering alkaline drugs, including furosemide, in combination with labetalol. Compatibility should be assured prior to administering these drugs together.
Epinephrine

Epinephrine

Epinephrine Injection, USP is administered by intravenous injection and/or in cardiac arrest, by intracardiac injection into the left ventricular chamber or via endotracheal tube directly into the bronchial tree. The adult intravenous dose for hypersensitivity reactions or to relieve bronchospasm usually ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 mg (1 to 2.5 mL of 1:10,000 solution), injected slowly. Neonates may be given a dose of 0.01 mg per kg of body weight; for the infant 0.05 mg is an adequate initial dose and this may be repeated at 20 to 30 minute intervals in the management of asthma attacks.

In cardiac arrest, 0.5 to 1.0 mg (5 to 10 mL of 1:10,000 solution) may be given. During a resuscitation effort, 0.5 mg (5 mL) should be administered intravenously every five minutes.

Intracardiac injection should only be administered by personnel well trained in the technique, if there has not been sufficient time to establish an intravenous route. The intracardiac dose usually ranges from 0.3 to 0.5 mg (3 to 5 mL of 1:10,000 solution).

Alternatively, if the patient has been intubated, epinephrine can be injected via the endotracheal tube directly into the bronchial tree at the same dosage as for intravenous injection. It is rapidly absorbed through the lung capillary bed.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone in the ADD-Vantage® Vial is intended for intravenous infusion only, after dilution with appropriate volume of ADD-Vantage diluent solution.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration because a precipitate can form. Precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium can also occur when ceftriaxone is mixed with calcium-containing solutions in the same IV administration line. Ceftriaxone must not be administered simultaneously with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition via a Y-site. However, in patients other than neonates, ceftriaxone and calcium-containing solutions may be administered sequentially of one another if the infusion lines are thoroughly flushed between infusions with a compatible fluid (see WARNINGS).

There have been no reports of an interaction between ceftriaxone and oral calcium-containing products or interaction between intramuscular ceftriaxone and calcium-containing products (IV or oral).

NEONATES:Hyperbilirubinemic neonates, especially prematures, should not be treated with ceftriaxone for injection (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in neonates if they require (or are expected to require) treatment with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition because of the risk of precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS:For the treatment of skin and skin structure infections, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day). The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

For the treatment of acute bacterial otitis media, a single intramuscular dose of 50 mg/kg (not to exceed 1 gram) is recommended (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE). (The above is for informational purposes only. Ceftriaxone in ADD-Vantage vials is not intended for intramuscular use.)

For the treatment of serious miscellaneous infections other than meningitis, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg, given in divided doses every 12 hours. The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

In the treatment of meningitis, it is recommended that the initial therapeutic dose be 100 mg/kg (not to exceed 4 grams). Thereafter, a total daily dose of 100 mg/kg/day (not to exceed 4 grams daily) is recommended. The daily dose may be administered once a day (or in equally divided doses every 12 hours). The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

ADULTS:The usual adult daily dose is 1 to 2 grams given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day) depending on the type and severity of infection. For infections caused by Staphylococcus aureus (MSSA), the recommended daily dose is 2 to 4 grams, in order to achieve >90% target attainment. The total daily dose should not exceed 4 grams.

If Chlamydia trachomatis is a suspected pathogen, appropriate antichlamydial coverage should be added, because ceftriaxone sodium has no activity against this organism.

For the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal infections, a single intramuscular dose of 250 mg is recommended. (The above is for informational purposes only. Ceftriaxone in ADD-Vantage vials is not intended for intramuscular use.)

For preoperative use (surgical prophylaxis), a single dose of 1 gram administered intravenously 1/2 to 2 hours before surgery is recommended.

Generally, ceftriaxone therapy should be continued for at least 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared. The usual duration of therapy is 4 to 14 days; in complicated infections, longer therapy may be required.

When treating infections caused by Streptococcus pyogenes, therapy should be continued for at least 10 days.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impairment of renal or hepatic function.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE:Intravenous Administration:Ceftriaxone should be administered intravenously by infusion over a period of 30 minutes.

ADD-Vantage Vials for IV Use Only contain ceftriaxone sodium equivalent to 1 gm or 2 gm ceftriaxone to be used with 50 mL or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, in the ADD-Vantage Flexible Diluent Container. (See Instructions For Use of the ADD-Vantage® System at the end of this package insert.)

COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY:Ceftriaxone has been shown to be compatible with Flagyl®*IV (metronidazole hydrochloride). The concentration should not exceed 5 to 7.5 mg/mL metronidazole hydrochloride with ceftriaxone 10 mg/mL as an admixture. The admixture is stable for 24 hours at room temperature only in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose in water (D5W). No compatibility studies have been conducted with the Flagyl® IV RTU® (metronidazole) formulation or using other diluents. Metronidazole at concentrations greater than 8 mg/mL will precipitate. Do not refrigerate the admixture as precipitation will occur.

Vancomycin, amsacrine, aminoglycosides, and fluconazole are physically incompatible with ceftriaxone in admixtures. When any of these drugs are to be administered concomitantly with ceftriaxone by intermittent intravenous infusion, it is recommended that they be given sequentially, with thorough flushing of the intravenous lines (with one of the compatible fluids) between the administrations.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone for injection. Particulate formation can result.

Solutions of ceftriaxone for injection should not be physically mixed with or piggybacked into solutions containing other antimicrobial drugs or into diluent solutions other than those listed above, due to the possible incompatibility (see WARNINGS).

Ceftriaxone sodium sterile powder should be stored at 20°C to 25°C (68°F to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature] and protected from light. After reconstitution, protection from normal light is not necessary. The color of solutions ranges from light yellow to amber, depending on the length of storage, concentration and diluent used.

After the indicated stability time periods, unused portions of solutions should be discarded.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter before administration. ADD-Vantage Vials – ceftriaxone for injection Units: See Instructions For Use of the ADD-Vantage® System at the end of this package insert.

*Registered trademark of G.D. Searle & Co.
Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate

THESE PRODUCTS ARE FOR SLOW IV USE, NOT FOR INTRATHECAL OR EPIDURAL USE.

For Relief of Pain and as Pre-anesthetic: The usual adult dose of 10 mg every 4 hours, depending on the severity of the condition and the patient’s response. The usual individual dose range is 5 to 15 mg. The usual daily dose range is 12 to 120 mg.

Usual Pediatric Dose: Analgesic - Intravenous, 50 to 100 µg (0.05 to 0.1 mg) per kg of body weight, administered very slowly. Not to exceed 10 mg per dose.

For Open Heart Surgery: Large doses (0.5 to 3 mg/kg) of morphine are administered intravenously as the sole anesthetic or with a suitable anesthetic agent. The patients are given oxygen and cardiovascular function is not depressed by morphine, as long as adequate ventilation is maintained.

For Severe Chronic Pain Associated with Terminal Cancer: Continuous Intravenous infusion– Prior to the initiation of the morphine infusion (in concentrations between 0.2 to 1 mg/mL), a loading dose of 15 mg or higher of morphine sulfate may be administered by IV push to alleviate pain.

The infusion dosage range is 0.8 mg/hr to 80 mg/hr, though doses of up to 144 mg/hr have been used. Thus, for the 1 mg/mL solution, the infusion may be run from 0.8 mL /hr to 80 mL /hr, and for the 0.5 mg/mL solution, the infusion may be run from 1.6 mL /hr to 160 mL /hr.

A constant infusion rate must be maintained with an infusion pump in order to assure proper dosage control. Care must be taken to avoid overdosage (respiratory depression) or abrupt cessation of therapy, which may give rise to withdrawal symptoms.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

EXAMPLES OF INFUSION PREPARATION:

Concentrate

Diluent

Final

Concentration

Morphine Sulfate Injection, USP

Dextrose 5% in Water

Morphine Sulfate

25 mg/mL

10 mL

490 mL

0.5 mg/mL

20 mL

480 mL

1.0 mg/mL

40 mL

960 mL

1.0 mg/mL

Morphine Sulfate Injection, USP

50 mg/mL

10 mL

990 mL

0.5 mg/mL

20 mL

980 mL

1.0 mg/mL
Atracurium Besylate

Atracurium Besylate

To avoid distress to the patient, atracurium should not be administered before unconsciousness has been induced. Atracurium should not be mixed in the same syringe, or administered simultaneously through the same needle, with alkaline solutions (e.g., barbiturate solutions).

Atracurium besylate should be administered intravenously. DO NOT GIVE ATRACURIUM BESYLATE BY INTRAMUSCULAR ADMINISTRATION. Intramuscular administration of atracurium besylate may result in tissue irritation and there are no clinical data to support this route of administration.

As with other neuromuscular blocking agents, the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator will permit the most advantageous use of atracurium besylate, minimizing the possibility of overdosage or underdosage, and assist in the evaluation of recovery.

Bolus Doses for Intubation and Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block:

Adults: An atracurium besylate dose of 0.4 to 0.5 mg/kg (1.7 to 2.2 times the ED95), given as an intravenous bolus injection, is the recommended initial dose for most patients. With this dose, good or excellent conditions for nonemergency intubation can be expected in 2 to 2.5 minutes in most patients, with maximum neuromuscular block achieved approximately 3 to 5 minutes after injection. Clinically required neuromuscular block generally lasts 20 to 35 minutes under balanced anesthesia. Under balanced anesthesia, recovery to 25% of control is achieved approximately 35 to 45 minutes after injection, and recovery is usually 95% complete approximately 60 minutes after injection.

Atracurium is potentiated by isoflurane or enflurane anesthesia. The same initial atracurium besylate dose of 0.4 to 0.5 mg/kg may be used for intubation prior to administration of these inhalation agents; however, if atracurium is first administered under steady-state of isoflurane or enflurane, the initial atracurium besylate dose should be reduced by approximately one-third, i.e., to 0.25 to 0.35 mg/kg, to adjust for the potentiating effects of these anesthetic agents. With halothane, which has only a marginal (approximately 20%) potentiating effect on atracurium, smaller dosage reductions may be considered.

Atracurium besylate doses of 0.08 to 0.10 mg/kg are recommended for maintenance of neuromuscular block during prolonged surgical procedures. The first maintenance dose will generally be required 20 to 45 minutes after the initial atracurium besylate injection, but the need for maintenance doses should be determined by clinical criteria. Because atracurium lacks cumulative effects, maintenance doses may be administered at relatively regular intervals for each patient, ranging approximately from 15 to 25 minutes under balanced anesthesia, slightly longer under isoflurane or enflurane. Higher atracurium doses (up to 0.2 mg/kg) permit maintenance dosing at longer intervals.

Pediatric Patients: No atracurium dosage adjustments are required for pediatric patients two years of age or older. An atracurium besylate dose of 0.3 to 0.4 mg/kg is recommended as the initial dose for infants (1 month to 2 years of age) under halothane anesthesia. Maintenance doses may be required with slightly greater frequency in infants and children than in adults.

Special Considerations: An initial atracurium besylate dose of 0.3 to 0.4 mg/kg, given slowly or in divided doses over one minute, is recommended for adults, children, or infants with significant cardiovascular disease and for adults, children, or infants with any history (e.g., severe anaphylactoid reactions or asthma) suggesting a greater risk of histamine release.

Dosage reductions must be considered also in patients with neuromuscular disease, severe electrolyte disorders, or carcinomatosis in which potentiation of neuromuscular block or difficulties with reversal have been demonstrated. There has been no clinical experience with atracurium in these patients, and no specific dosage adjustments can be recommended. No atracurium dosage adjustments are required for patients with renal disease.

An initial atracurium besylate dose of 0.3 to 0.4 mg/kg is recommended for adults following the use of succinylcholine for intubation under balanced anesthesia. Further reductions may be desirable with the use of potent inhalation anesthetics. The patient should be permitted to recover from the effects of succinylcholine prior to atracurium administration. Insufficient data are available for recommendation of a specific initial atracurium dose for administration following the use of succinylcholine in children and infants.

Use by Continuous Infusion:

Infusion in the Operating Room (OR): After administration of a recommended initial bolus dose of atracurium besylate injection (0.3 to 0.5 mg/kg), a diluted solution of atracurium besylate can be administered by continuous infusion to adults and pediatric patients aged 2 or more years for maintenance of neuromuscular block during extended surgical procedures.

Infusion of atracurium should be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s response as determined by peripheral nerve stimulation. Accurate dosing is best achieved using a precision infusion device.

Infusion of atracurium should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from the bolus dose. An initial infusion rate of 9 to 10 mcg/kg/min may be required to rapidly counteract the spontaneous recovery of neuromuscular function. Thereafter, a rate of 5 to 9 mcg/kg/min should be adequate to maintain continuous neuromuscular block in the range of 89% to 99% in most pediatric and adult patients under balanced anesthesia. Occasional patients may require infusion rates as low as 2 mcg/kg/min or as high as 15 mcg/kg/min.

The neuromuscular blocking effect of atracurium administered by infusion is potentiated by enflurane or isoflurane and, to a lesser extent, by halothane. Reduction in the infusion rate of atracurium should, therefore, be considered for patients receiving inhalation anesthesia. The rate of atracurium infusion should be reduced by approximately one-third in the presence of steady-state enflurane or isoflurane anesthesia; smaller reductions should be considered in the presence of halothane.

In patients undergoing cardiopulmonary bypass with induced hypothermia, the rate of infusion of atracurium required to maintain adequate surgical relaxation during hypothermia (25° to 28°C) has been shown to be approximately half the rate required during normothermia.

Spontaneous recovery from neuromuscular block following discontinuation of atracurium infusion may be expected to proceed at a rate comparable to that following administration of a single bolus dose.

Infusion in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU): The principles for infusion of atracurium in the OR are also applicable to use in the ICU.

An infusion rate of 11 to 13 mcg/kg/min (range: 4.5 to 29.5) should provide adequate neuromuscular block in adult patients in an ICU. Limited information suggests that infusion rates required for pediatric patients in the ICU may be higher than in adult patients. There may be wide interpatient variability in dosage requirements and these requirements may increase or decrease with time (see PRECAUTIONS: Long-Term Use in Intensive Care Unit [ICU]). Following recovery from neuromuscular block, readministration of a bolus dose may be necessary to quickly reestablish neuromuscular block prior to reinstitution of the infusion.

Infusion Rate Tables: The amount of infusion solution required per minute will depend upon the concentration of atracurium in the infusion solution, the desired dose of atracurium, and the patient’s weight. The following tables provide guidelines for delivery, in mL/hr (equivalent to microdrops/min when 60 microdrops = 1 mL), of atracurium solutions in concentrations of 0.2 mg/mL (20 mg in 100 mL) or 0.5 mg/mL (50 mg in 100 mL) with an infusion pump or a gravity flow device.
Table 3: Atracurium Besylate Infusion Rates for a Concentration of 0.2 mg/mL
Patient Weight (kg)

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

30

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

108

117

35

53

63

74

84

95

105

116

126

137

40

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

144

156

45

68

81

95

108

122

135

149

162

176

50

75

90

105

120

135

150

165

180

195

55

83

99

116

132

149

165

182

198

215

60

90

108

126

144

162

180

198

216

234

65

98

117

137

156

176

195

215

234

254

70

105

126

147

168

189

210

231

252

273

75

113

135

158

180

203

225

248

270

293

80

120

144

168

192

216

240

264

288

312

90

135

162

189

216

243

270

297

324

351

100

150

180

210

240

270

300

330

360

390

Table 4: Atracurium Besylate Infusion Rates for a Concentration of 0.5 mg/mL
Patient Weight (kg)

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

30

18

22

25

29

32

36

40

43

47

35

21

25

29

34

38

42

46

50

55

40

24

29

34

38

43

48

53

58

62

45

27

32

38

43

49

54

59

65

70

50

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

72

78

55

33

40

46

53

59

66

73

79

86

60

36

43

50

58

65

72

79

86

94

65

39

47

55

62

70

78

86

94

101

70

42

50

59

67

76

84

92

101

109

75

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

108

117

80

48

58

67

77

86

96

106

115

125

90

54

65

76

86

97

108

119

130

140

100

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

144

156

Compatibility and Admixtures: Atracurium besylate infusion solutions may be prepared by admixing atracurium besylate injection with an appropriate diluent such as 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection. Infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of preparation. Unused solutions should be discarded. Solutions containing 0.2 mg/mL or 0.5 mg/mL atracurium besylate in the above diluents may be stored either under refrigeration or at room temperature for 24 hours without significant loss of potency. Care should be taken during admixture to prevent inadvertent contamination. Visually inspect prior to administration.

Spontaneous degradation of atracurium besylate has been demonstrated to occur more rapidly in Lactated Ringer’s solution than in 0.9% sodium chloride solution. Therefore, it is recommended that Lactated Ringer’s Injection not be used as a diluent in preparing solutions of atracurium besylate injection for infusion.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Neut Sodium Bicarbonate...

Neut Sodium Bicarbonate

One vial (5 mL) of Neut added to a liter (1000 mL) of any of the following Hospira parenteral solutions will increase the pH to a more physiologic range. Specific pH may vary slightly from lot to lot.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Product

List

5% Alcohol in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

1500

2.5% Dextrose Inj., USP

1508

5% Dextrose Inj., USP

1522

10% Dextrose Inj., USP

1530

20% Dextrose Inj., USP

1535

Ringer’s Injection, USP

1582

0.9% Sodium Chloride Inj., USP

1583

Sodium Lactate Inj., USP (1/6 Molar)

1587

Addition of one vial of Neut to one-half liter (500 mL) is recommended to achieve a more physiologic pH of the following Hospira parenteral solutions:

Product

List

6% Dextran 70 and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

1505

6% Dextran 70 and 5% Dextrose Injection

1507

Note: Some products, e.g., Aminosyn® solutions and those Ionosol® and Normosol® formulas containing dextrose will NOT be brought to near physiologic pH by the addition of Neut. This is due to the relatively high buffer capacity of these fluids.
Dobutamine

Dobutamine

Note — Do not add dobutamine injection to 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection or to any other strongly alkaline solution. Because of potential physical incompatibilities, it is recommended that dobutamine hydrochloride not be mixed with other drugs in the same solution. Dobutamine hydrochloride should not be used in conjunction with other agents or diluents containing both sodium bisulfite and ethanol.

Preparation and Stability — At the time of administration, dobutamine injection must be further diluted in an IV container. Dilute 20 mL of dobutamine in at least 50 mL of diluent and dilute 40 mL of dobutamine in at least 100 mL of diluent. Use one of the following intravenous solutions as a diluent: Dextrose Injection 5%, Dextrose 5% and Sodium Chloride 0.45% Injection, Dextrose 5% and Sodium Chloride 0.9% Injection, Dextrose Injection 10%, Isolyte® M with 5% Dextrose Injection, Lactated Ringer’s Injection, 5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Injection, Normosol®-M in D5-W, 20% Osmitrol® in Water for Injection, Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9%, or Sodium Lactate Injection. Intravenous solutions should be used within 24 hours.

Recommended Dosage — The rate of infusion needed to increase cardiac output usually ranged from 2.5 to 15 mcg/kg/min (see table). On rare occasions, infusion rates up to 40 mcg/kg/min have been required to obtain the desired effect.
Dobutamine Injection Rates of Infusion for Concentrations of 250, 500, and 1,000 mcg/mL
Drug Delivery Rate

Infusion Delivery Rate

250 mcg/mL*

500 mcg/mL†

1,000 mcg/mL‡

(mcg/kg/min)
(mL/kg/min) (mL/kg/min) (mL/kg/min) 2.5
0.01

0.005

0.0025
5 0.02 0.01 0.005 7.5 0.03 0.015 0.0075 10 0.04 0.02 0.01 12.5 0.05 0.025 0.0125 15 0.06 0.03 0.015
* 250 mcg/mL of diluent † 500 mcg/mL or 250 mg/500 mL of diluent ‡ 1,000 mcg/mL or 250 mg/250 mL of diluent

Rates of infusion in mL/h for Dobutamine Injection concentrations of 500 mcg/mL, 1000 mcg/mL, and 2000 mcg/mL are given in Table 2.
Table 2
Dobutamine Injection Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 500 mcg/mL concentration

Drug Delivery Rate

(mcg/kg/min)

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

2.5

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

5

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

7.5

27

36

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

10

36

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

12.5

45

60

75

90

105

120

135

150

165

15

54

72

90

108

126

144

162

180

198

Dobutamine Injection Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 1,000 mcg/mL concentration

Drug Delivery Rate

(mcg/kg/min)

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

2.5

4.5

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

16.5

5

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33
7.5
13.5

18

22.5

27

31.5

36

40.5

45

49.5

10

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

12.5

22.5

30

37.5

45

52.5

60

67.5

75

82.5

15

27

36

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

Dobutamine Injection Infusion Rate(mL/h) for 2,000 mcg/mL concentration

Drug Delivery Rate

(mcg/kg/min)

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

2.5

2

3

4

4.5

5

6

7

7.5

8

5

4.5

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

16.5

7.5

7

9

11

13.5

16

18

20

22.5

25

10

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

12.5

11

15

19

22.5

26

30

34

37.5

41

15

13.5

18

22.5

27

31.5

36

40.5

45

49.5

The rate of administration and the duration of therapy should be adjusted according to the patient’s response as determined by heart rate, presence of ectopic activity, blood pressure, urine flow, and, whenever possible, measurement of central venous or pulmonary wedge pressure and cardiac output.

Concentrations of up to 5,000 mcg/mL have been administered to humans (250 mg/50 mL). The final volume administered should be determined by the fluid requirements of the patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

Infusion-related events are related to both the concentration and the rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

The use of ADD-Vantage vials of vancomycin hydrochloride is indicated only when doses of 500 mg, 750 mg or 1 g are appropriate. Patient factors, such as renal function and age, are critical in calculating correct dosage regimens (see below). If doses of 500 mg, 750 mg or 1 g are determined to be inappropriate, conventional vials of vancomycin hydrochloride should be used. ADD-VANTAGE VIALS OF VANCOMYCIN HYDROCHLORIDE SHOULD NOT BE USED IN NEONATES, INFANTS, OR PEDIATRIC PATIENTS WHO REQUIRE DOSES OF LESS THAN 500 MG.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual daily intravenous dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every 6 hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual intravenous daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride is 10 mg/kg per dose given every 6 hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin may be warranted in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the first week of life and every 8 hours thereafter up to the age of 1 month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride for injection per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min (see following table).
DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION (Adapted from Moellering et al)4
Creatinine Clearance mL/min

Vancomycin Dose mg/24 h

100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10

1,545 1,390 1,235 1,080 925 770 620 465 310 155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 hr. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1,000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1,000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

Men:

Weight (kg) x (140 - age in years)

72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

Women:

0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise, the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as in obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.
Amicar

Amicar

Dosage of magnesium sulfate must be carefully adjusted according to individual requirements and response, and administration of the drug should be discontinued as soon as the desired effect is obtained.

Both IV and IM administration are appropriate. IM administration of the undiluted 50% solution results in therapeutic plasma levels in 60 minutes, whereas IV doses will provide a therapeutic level almost immediately. The rate of IV injection should generally not exceed 150 mg/minute (1.5 mL of a 10% concentration or its equivalent), except in severe eclampsia with seizures (see below). Continuous maternal administration of magnesium sulfate in pregnancy beyond 5 to 7 days can cause fetal abnormalities.

Solutions for IV infusion must be diluted to a concentration of 20% or less prior to administration. The diluents commonly used are 5% Dextrose Injection, USP and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Deep IM injection of the undiluted (50%) solution is appropriate for adults, but the solution should be diluted to a 20% or less concentration prior to such injection in children.

In Magnesium Deficiency

In the treatment of mild magnesium deficiency, the usual adult dose is 1 g, equivalent to 8.12 mEq of magnesium (2 mL of the 50% solution) injected IM every six hours for four doses (equivalent to a total of 32.5 mEq of magnesium per 24 hours). For severe hypomagnesemia, as much as 250 mg (approximately 2 mEq) per kg of body weight (0.5 mL of the 50% solution) may be given IM within a period of four hours if necessary. Alternatively, 5 g, (approximately 40 mEq) can be added to one liter of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP for slow IV infusion over a three-hour period. In the treatment of deficiency states, caution must be observed to prevent exceeding the renal excretory capacity.

In Hyperalimentation

In TPN, maintenance requirements for magnesium are not precisely known. The maintenance dose used in adults ranges from 8 to 24 mEq (1 to 3 g) daily; for infants, the range is 2 to 10 mEq (0.25 to 1.25 g) daily.

In Pre-eclampsia or Eclampsia

In severe pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, the total initial dose is 10 to 14 g of magnesium sulfate. Intravenously, a dose of 4 to 5 g in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP may be infused. Simultaneously, IM doses of up to 10 g (5 g or 10 mL of the undiluted 50% solution in each buttock) are given. Alternatively, the initial IV dose of 4 g may be given by diluting the 50% solution to a 10 or 20% concentration; the diluted fluid (40 mL of a 10% solution or 20 mL of a 20% solution) may then be injected IV over a period of three to four minutes. Subsequently, 4 to 5 g (8 to 10 mL of the 50% solution) are injected IM into alternate buttocks every four hours as needed, depending on the continuing presence of the patellar reflex and adequate respiratory function. Alternatively, after the initial IV dose, some clinicians administer 1 to 2 g/hour by constant IV infusion. Therapy should continue until paroxysms cease. A serum magnesium level of 6 mg/100 mL is considered optimal for control of seizures. A total daily (24 hr) dose of 30 to 40 g should not be exceeded. In the presence of severe renal insufficiency, the maximum dosage of magnesium sulfate is 20 grams/48 hours and frequent serum magnesium concentrations must be obtained. Continuous use of magnesium sulfate in pregnancy beyond 5 to 7 days can cause fetal abnormalities.

Other Uses

In counteracting the muscle-stimulating effects of barium poisoning, the usual dose of magnesium sulfate is 1 to 2 g given IV.

For controlling seizures associated with epilepsy, glomerulonephritis or hypothyroidism, the usual adult dose is 1 g administered IM or IV.

In paroxysmal atrial tachycardia, magnesium should be used only if simpler measures have failed and there is no evidence of myocardial damage. The usual dose is 3 to 4 g (30 to 40 mL of a 10% solution) administered IV over 30 seconds with extreme caution.

For reduction of cerebral edema, 2.5 g (25 mL of a 10% solution) is given IV.

Incompatibilities

Magnesium sulfate in solution may result in a precipitate formation when mixed with solutions containing:

Alcohol (in high concentrations) Hydrocortisone sodium Alkali carbonates and succinate bicarbonates Phosphates Alkali hydroxides Polymixin B sulfate Arsenates Procaine hydrochloride Barium Salicylates Calcium Strontium Clindamycin phosphate Tartrates Heavy Metals

The potential incompatibility will often be influenced by the changes in the concentration of reactants and the pH of the solutions.

It has been reported that magnesium may reduce the antibiotic activity of streptomycin, tetracycline and tobramycin when given together.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Hydromorphone Hydrochlo...

Hydromorphone Hydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Selection of patients and administration of hydromorphone hydrochloride injection should be governed by the same principles that apply to the use of similar opioid analgesics to treat patients with acute or chronic pain, and depends upon a comprehensive assessment of the patient. Individualize treatment in every case, using non-opioid analgesics, opioids on an as needed basis and/or combination products, and chronic opioid therapy in a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, and the American Pain Society.

The nature of the pain, (severity, frequency, etiology, and pathophysiology) as well as the medical status of the patient, will affect selection of the starting dosage. Opioid analgesics, including hydromorphone hydrochloride injection, have a narrow therapeutic index in certain patient populations, especially when combined with CNS depressant drugs, and should be reserved for cases where the benefits of opioid analgesia outweigh the known risks.

2.2 Individualization of Dosage

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient’s prior analgesic treatment. Give attention to the following:
• the age, general condition and medical status of the patient; • the patient's degree of opioid tolerance; • the daily dose, potency, and specific characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously; • concurrent medications; • the type and severity of the patient’s pain; • risk factors for abuse or addiction; including whether the patient has a previous or current substance abuse problem, a family history of substance abuse, or a history of mental illness or depression; • the balance between pain control and adverse reactions
Periodic reassessment after the initial dosing of hydromorphone hydrochloride injection is required. If pain management is not satisfactory, and opioid-induced adverse events are tolerable, the hydromorphone dose may be increased gradually. If excessive opioid side effects are observed early in the dosing interval, reduce the hydromorphone hydrochloride dose. If this results in breakthrough pain at the end of the dosing interval, the dosing interval may need to be shortened. Dose titration should be guided more by the need for analgesia and the occurrence of adverse events than the absolute dose of opioid employed.

2.3 Subcutaneous or Intramuscular Administration

The usual starting dose is 1 mg to 2 mg subcutaneously or intramuscularly every 2 to 3 hours as necessary for pain. Depending on the clinical situation, the initial starting dose may be lowered in patients who are opioid naïve. Adjust the dose according to the severity of pain and occurrence of adverse events, as well as the patient's underlying disease and age.

2.4 Intravenous Administration

The initial intravenous starting dose is 0.2 mg to 1 mg every 2 to 3 hours as necessary for pain control.

Administer intravenous hydromorphone slowly, over at least 2 to 3 minutes, depending on the dose. Titrate the dose to achieve acceptable pain management and tolerable adverse events. Reduce the initial dose in the elderly or debilitated.

2.5 Hepatic Impairment

Start patients with hepatic impairment on one-fourth to one-half the usual dose of hydromorphone hydrochloride injection depending on the extent of impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism (12.3)].

2.6 Renal Impairment

Start patients with renal impairment on one-fourth to one-half the usual starting dose of hydromorphone hydrochloride injection depending on the degree of impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.7 Conversion from Prior Opioid

Use the equianalgesic dose table below (Table 1) as a guide to determine the appropriate dose of hydromorphone injection. Convert the current total daily amount(s) of opioid(s) received to an equivalent total daily dose of hydromorphone injection and reduce by one-half due to the possibility of incomplete cross tolerance. Divide the new total amount by number of doses permitted based on dosing interval (e.g. 8 doses for every-three-hour dosing). Titrate the dose according to the patient's response. For opioids not in Table 1, first estimate the daily amount of morphine that is equivalent to the current total daily amount of other opioid(s) received, then use Table 1 to find the approximate equivalent total daily dose of hydromorphone injection.
Table 1 OPIOID ANALGESIC EQUIVALENTS WITH APPROXIMATELY EQUIANALGESIC POTENCY FOR CONVERSION TO HYDROMORPHONE INJECTION* * Dosages, and ranges of dosages represented, are a compilation of estimated equipotent dosages from published references comparing opioid analgesics in cancer and severe pain.
DRUG SUBSTANCE

PARENTERAL DOSE

ORAL DOSE

Morphine Sulfate

10 mg

40 – 60 mg

Hydromorphone HCl

1.3 – 2 mg

6.5 – 7.5 mg

Oxymorphone HCl

1 – 1.1 mg

6.6 mg

Levorphanol tartrate

2 – 2.3 mg

4 mg

Meperidine HCl (pethidine HCl)

75 – 100 mg

300 – 400 mg

Methadone HCl

10 mg

10 – 20 mg

Nalbuphine HCl

10 – 12 mg

–

Butorphanol tartrate

1.5 – 2.5 mg

–

2.8 Administration

Inspect parenteral drug products visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. A slight yellowish discoloration may develop in hydromorphone hydrochloride ampules. No loss of potency has been demonstrated. Hydromorphone hydrochloride is physically compatible and chemically stable for at least 24 hours at 25°C protected from light in most common large volume parenteral solutions.

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Selection of patients and administration of hydromorphone hydrochloride injection should be governed by the same principles that apply to the use of similar opioid analgesics to treat patients with acute or chronic pain, and depends upon a comprehensive assessment of the patient. Individualize treatment in every case, using non-opioid analgesics, opioids on an as needed basis and/or combination products, and chronic opioid therapy in a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, and the American Pain Society.

The nature of the pain, (severity, frequency, etiology, and pathophysiology) as well as the medical status of the patient, will affect selection of the starting dosage. Opioid analgesics, including hydromorphone hydrochloride injection, have a narrow therapeutic index in certain patient populations, especially when combined with CNS depressant drugs, and should be reserved for cases where the benefits of opioid analgesia outweigh the known risks.

2.2 Individualization of Dosage

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient’s prior analgesic treatment. Give attention to the following:
• the age, general condition and medical status of the patient; • the patient's degree of opioid tolerance; • the daily dose, potency, and specific characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously; • concurrent medications; • the type and severity of the patient’s pain; • risk factors for abuse or addiction; including whether the patient has a previous or current substance abuse problem, a family history of substance abuse, or a history of mental illness or depression; • the balance between pain control and adverse reactions
Periodic reassessment after the initial dosing of hydromorphone hydrochloride injection is required. If pain management is not satisfactory, and opioid-induced adverse events are tolerable, the hydromorphone dose may be increased gradually. If excessive opioid side effects are observed early in the dosing interval, reduce the hydromorphone hydrochloride dose. If this results in breakthrough pain at the end of the dosing interval, the dosing interval may need to be shortened. Dose titration should be guided more by the need for analgesia and the occurrence of adverse events than the absolute dose of opioid employed.

2.3 Subcutaneous or Intramuscular Administration

The usual starting dose is 1 mg to 2 mg subcutaneously or intramuscularly every 2 to 3 hours as necessary for pain. Depending on the clinical situation, the initial starting dose may be lowered in patients who are opioid naïve. Adjust the dose according to the severity of pain and occurrence of adverse events, as well as the patient's underlying disease and age.

2.7 Conversion from Prior Opioid

Use the equianalgesic dose table below (Table 1) as a guide to determine the appropriate dose of hydromorphone injection. Convert the current total daily amount(s) of opioid(s) received to an equivalent total daily dose of hydromorphone injection and reduce by one-half due to the possibility of incomplete cross tolerance. Divide the new total amount by number of doses permitted based on dosing interval (e.g. 8 doses for every-three-hour dosing). Titrate the dose according to the patient's response. For opioids not in Table 1, first estimate the daily amount of morphine that is equivalent to the current total daily amount of other opioid(s) received, then use Table 1 to find the approximate equivalent total daily dose of hydromorphone injection.
Table 1 OPIOID ANALGESIC EQUIVALENTS WITH APPROXIMATELY EQUIANALGESIC POTENCY FOR CONVERSION TO HYDROMORPHONE INJECTION* * Dosages, and ranges of dosages represented, are a compilation of estimated equipotent dosages from published references comparing opioid analgesics in cancer and severe pain.
DRUG SUBSTANCE

PARENTERAL DOSE

ORAL DOSE

Morphine Sulfate

10 mg

40 – 60 mg

Hydromorphone HCl

1.3 – 2 mg

6.5 – 7.5 mg

Oxymorphone HCl

1 – 1.1 mg

6.6 mg

Levorphanol tartrate

2 – 2.3 mg

4 mg

Meperidine HCl (pethidine HCl)

75 – 100 mg

300 – 400 mg

Methadone HCl

10 mg

10 – 20 mg

Nalbuphine HCl

10 – 12 mg

–

Butorphanol tartrate

1.5 – 2.5 mg

–
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

23.4% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP is administered intravenously, but only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. Maintenance electrolyte solutions usually contain sodium at a concentration of 33 to 40 mEq/L, on the assumption the patient will receive two to three liters of fluid/day. A typical oral salt intake of 10 g/day is equivalent to 171 mEq/day. But intake can range from 5 to15 g of sodium chloride/day, and patients on a sodium-restricted diet may receive 1 to 2 g of sodium/day. The actual dose of sodium chloride administered depends upon specific patient requirements, which are usually determined by review of serial blood samples and clinical evaluation. In solutions for total parenteral nutrition (TPN), adults typically receive 120 mEq of sodium/day (range: 75-180 mEq/day), whereas preterm infants receive 3-4 mEq/kg/day.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and seal is intact. Discard unused portion.

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique
For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose 3/4 in. long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. During use, container must be stored and all manipulations performed in an appropriate laminar flow hood. Remove cover from container and cleanse closure with antiseptic. Insert suitable sterile dispensing set or transfer device and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. The closure should be entered only once and after initial entry, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from initial closure puncture is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture. Sequentially dispense aliquots of 23.4% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP into I.V. containers using appropriate transfer device. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate Injection, USP may be administered subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously. The average adult dose is 0.5 mg (5 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution), range 0.4 to 0.6 mg (4 to 6 mL). As an antisialogogue it is usually injected intramuscularly prior to induction of anesthesia. This produces only minimal blocking of vagal activity. In children, the dosage ranges from 0.1 mg in the newborn to 0.6 mg (6 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) in a child age 12 years, injected subcutaneously 30 minutes before surgery. During surgery, the drug is given intravenously when reduction in pulse rate and cessation of cardiac action are due to increased vagal activity; however, if the anesthetic is cyclopropane, doses less than 0.4 mg should be used and should be given slowly to avoid the possible production of ventricular arrhythmia. Usual doses are used to reduce severe bradycardia and syncope associated with hyperactive carotid sinus reflex. For bradyarrhythmias the usual intravenous adult dosage ranges from 0.4 to 1 mg (4 to 10 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) every one to two hours as needed; larger doses up to a maximum of 2 mg may be required. In children, intravenous dosage ranges from 0.01 to 0.03 mg per kg of body weight. Atropine is also a specific antidote for cardiovascular collapse resulting from injudicious administration of choline ester. When cardiac arrest has occurred, external cardiac massage or other method of resuscitation is required to distribute the drug after intravenous injection.

In anticholinesterase poisoning from exposure to insecticides, large doses of at least 2 to 3 mg (20 to 30 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) should be administered parenterally and repeated until signs of atropine intoxication appear. In the “rapid” type of mushroom poisoning, atropine should be given in doses sufficient to control parasympathomimetic signs before coma and cardiovascular collapse supervene.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Ephedrine

Ephedrine

Depending on the clinical circumstances, Ephedrine Sulfate Injection may be given subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously.

Usual adult dose: 25 to 50 mg (range 10 to 50 mg) injected subcutaneously or intramuscularly (equivalent to 0.2 to 1.0 mL of 5% solution) is usually adequate to prevent or minimize hypotension secondary to spinal anesthesia. Repeat doses should be governed by blood pressure response or, if used as a bronchodilator, according to the degree of improvement. Absorption (onset of action) by the intramuscular route is more rapid (within 10 to 20 minutes) than by subcutaneous injection. The intravenous route may be used if an immediate effect is desired.

When used during labor, administer only sufficient dosage to maintain blood pressure at or below 130/80.

In acute attacks of asthma, the smallest effective dose should be used (usually 0.25 to 0.5 mL) or as otherwise determined by the patient’s response.

Usual pediatric dose: 750 micrograms per kg of body weight or 25 mg/M2 of body surface injected intravenously or subcutaneously, four times daily or as otherwise determined by the patient’s response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by IV route.

For IV administration, the dose can be given by slow intravenous injection over at least 10 to 15 minutes or can also be delivered in greater dilutions with 50 to 100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15 to 30 minutes.

The recommended adult dosage of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older: The recommended daily dose of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. The safety and efficacy of ampicillin and sulbactam for injection administered via intramuscular injection in pediatric patients have not been established. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous ampicillin and sulbactam for injection. (see CLINICAL STUDIES section).

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of ampicillin and sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:
TABLE 5
Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2)

Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours)

Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage

≥30

1

1.5 g to 3 g q 6h to q 8h

15 to 29

5

1.5 g to 3 g q 12h

5 to 14

9

1.5 g to 3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males       weight (kg) × (140 – age)                    72 × serum creatinine

Females      0.85 × above value
Atenolol

Atenolol

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible.

For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

In recommended doses, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations.

0.25% ─ when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions.0.5% ─ provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential.0.75% ─ produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.

The duration of anesthesia with Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient.

Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case.

These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine.

The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).

Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.

Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.)

Use in Dentistry: the 0.5% concentration with epinephrine is recommended for infiltration and block injection in the maxillary and mandibular area when a longer duration of local anesthetic action is desired, such as for oral surgical procedures generally associated with significant postoperative pain. The average dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) per injection site will usually suffice; an occasional second dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) may be used if necessary to produce adequate anesthesia after making allowance for 2 to 10 minutes onset time. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) The lowest effective dose should be employed and time should be allowed between injections; it is recommended that the total dose for all injection sites, spread out over a single dental sitting, should not ordinarily exceed 90 mg for a healthy adult patient (ten 1.8 mL injections of 0.5% Bupivacaine Hydrochloride with epinephrine). Injections should be made slowly and with frequent aspirations. Until further experience is gained, Bupivacaine in dentistry is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years.

Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use.

This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 1. Recommended Concentrations and Doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride 1 With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery.2 For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.3 See PRECAUTIONS.4 Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Each Dose

Motor Block1

Type of Block

Conc.

(mL)

(mg)

Local infiltration

0.25%4

up to max.

up to max.

─

Epidural

0.75%2,4

10-20

75-150

complete

0.5%4

10-20

50-100

moderate

to complete

0.25%4

10-20

25-50

partial

to moderate

Caudal

0.5%4

15-30

75-150

moderate

to complete

0.25%4

15-30

37.5-75

moderate

Peripheralnerves

0.5%4

5 to

max.

25 tomax.

moderate

to complete

0.25%4

5 to max.

12.5 to max.

moderate

to complete

Retrobulbar3

0.75%4

2-4

15-30

complete

Sympathetic

0.25%

20-50

50-125

─

Dental3

0.5%w/epi

1.8-3.6per site

9-18per site

─

Epidural3 Test Dose

0.5%w/epi

2-3

10-15

(10-15 micrograms

epinephrine)

─
Sodium Chloride Solutio...

Sodium Chloride Solution

23.4% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP is administered intravenously, but only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. Maintenance electrolyte solutions usually contain sodium at a concentration of 33 to 40 mEq/L, on the assumption the patient will receive two to three liters of fluid/day. A typical oral salt intake of 10 g/day is equivalent to 171 mEq/day. But intake can range from 5 to 15 g sodium chloride/day, and patients on a sodium-restricted diet may receive 1 to 2 g of sodium/day. The actual dose of sodium chloride administered depends upon specific patient requirements, which are usually determined by review of serial blood samples and clinical evaluation. In solutions for total parenteral nutrition (TPN), adults typically receive 120 mEq of sodium/day (range: 75-180 mEq/day), whereas preterm infants receive 3-4 mEq/kg/day.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible with the fluid dispensed from this container. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When compounding admixtures, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Recommended Directions for Use of the Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique
Perform all manipulations in an appropriate laminar flow hood. Aseptically remove aluminum overseal. Insert piercing pin of sterile transfer set and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. Insertion of a piercing pin into the outlet port should be performed only once in a Pharmacy Bulk Package solution. ONCE THE OUTLET SITE HAS BEEN ENTERED, THE WITHDRAWAL OF CONTAINER CONTENTS SHOULD BE COMPLETED PROMPTLY IN ONE CONTINUOUS OPERATION. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from transfer set pin or implement insertion is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations, i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture. Sequentially dispense aliquots of 23.4% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP into I.V. containers using appropriate transfer set.
During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.
Calcium Chloride

Calcium Chloride

10% Calcium Chloride Injection, USP is administered only by slow intravenous injection (not to exceed 1 mL/min) and/or in cardiac resuscitation, by injection into the ventricular cavity. It must not be injected into the myocardium.

The usual precautions for intravenous therapy should be observed. If time permits, the solution should be warmed to body temperature. The injection should be halted if the patient complains of any discomfort; it may be resumed when symptoms disappear. Following injection, the patient should remain recumbent for a short time.

The usual adult dosage in hypocalcemic disorders ranges from 500 mg to 1 g (5 to 10 mL) at intervals of 1 to 3 days, depending on the response of the patient and/or results of serum calcium determinations. Repeated injections may be required because of rapid excretion of calcium.

In magnesium intoxication, an initial adult dose of 500 mg (5 mL) should be administered promptly and the patient observed for signs of recovery before further doses are given.

In hyperkalemic ECG disturbances of cardiac function, the dosage of calcium chloride injection should be titrated by constant monitoring of ECG changes during administration.

In cardiac resuscitation, the usual adult dosage ranges from 500 mg to 1 g (5 to 10 mL) intravenously, or from 200 to 800 mg (2 to 8 mL) when injected into the ventricular cavity.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Teniposide

Teniposide

General Considerations:

The steady-state serum theophylline concentration is a function of the infusion rate and the rate of theophylline clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a serum theophylline concentration in the 10-20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance. For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either sub-therapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects.

When theophylline is used as an acute bronchodilator, the goal of obtaining a therapeutic serum concentration is best accomplished with an intravenous loading dose. Because of rapid distribution into body fluids, the serum concentration (C) obtained from an initial loading dose (LD) is related primarily to the volume of distribution (V), the apparent space into which the drug diffuses:

                              C = LD/V

If a mean volume of distribution of about 0.5 L/kg is assumed (actual range is 0.3 to 0.7 L/kg), each mg/kg (ideal body weight) of theophylline administered as a loading dose over 30 minutes results in an average 2 mcg/mL increase in serum theophylline concentration. Therefore, in a patient who has received no theophylline in the previous 24 hours, a loading dose of intravenous theophylline of 4.6 mg/kg (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline), calculated on the basis of ideal body weight and administered over 30 minutes, on average, will produce a maximum post-distribution serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 6-16 mcg/mL. When a loading dose becomes necessary in the patient who has already received theophylline, estimation of the serum concentration based upon the history is unreliable, and an immediate serum level determination is indicated. The loading dose can then be determined as follows:

                             D = (Desired C - Measured C) (V)

where D is the loading dose, C is the serum theophylline concentration, and V is the volume of distribution. The mean volume of distribution can be assumed to be 0.5 L/kg and the desired serum concentration should be conservative (e.g., 10 mcg/mL) to allow for the variability in the volume of distribution. A loading dose should not be given before obtaining a serum theophylline concentration if the patient has received any theophylline in the previous 24 hours.

A serum concentration obtained 30 minutes after an intravenous loading dose, when distribution is complete, can be used to assess the need for and size of subsequent loading doses, if clinically indicated, and for guidance of continuing therapy. Once a serum concentration of 10 to 15 mcg/mL has been achieved with the use of a loading dose(s), a constant intravenous infusion is started. The rate of administration is based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters for the population and calculated to achieve a target serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL (see Table V). For example, in non-smoking adults, initiation of a constant intravenous theophylline infusion of 0.4 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline) at the completion of the loading dose, on average, will result in a steady-state concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 7-26 mcg/mL. The mean and range of steady-state serum concentrations are similar when the average child (age 1 to 9 years) is given a loading dose of 4.6 mg/kg theophylline (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline) followed by a constant intravenous infusion of 0.8 mg/kg/hr (1.0 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline). Since there is large interpatient variability in theophylline clearance, serum concentrations will rise or fall when the patient’s clearance is significantly different from the mean population value used to calculate the initial infusion rate. Therefore, a second serum concentration should be obtained one expected half-life after starting the constant infusion (e.g., approximately 4 hours for children age 1 to 9 and 8 hours for nonsmoking adults; See Table I for the expected half-life in additional patient populations) to determine if the concentration is accumulating or declining from the post loading dose level. If the level is declining as a result of a higher than average clearance, an additional loading dose can be administered and/or the infusion rate increased. In contrast, if the second sample demonstrates a higher level, accumulation of the drug can be assumed, and the infusion rate should be decreased before the concentration exceeds 20 mcg/mL. An additional sample is obtained 12 to 24 hours later to determine if further adjustments are required and then at 24-hour intervals to adjust for changes, if they occur. This empiric method, based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters, will prevent large fluctuations in serum concentration during the most critical period of the patient’s course.

In patients with cor pulmonale, cardiac decompensation, or liver dysfunction, or in those taking drugs that markedly reduce theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine), the initial theophylline infusion rate should not exceed 17 mg/hr (21 mg/hr as aminophylline) unless serum concentrations can be monitored at 24-hour intervals. In these patients, 5 days may be required before steady-state is reached.

Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.

Table V contains initial theophylline infusion rates following an appropriate loading dose recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for final theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.
Table V. Initial Theophylline Infusion Rates Following an Appropriate Loading Dose. * To achieve a target concentration of 10 mcg/mL Aminophylline=theophylline/0.8. Use ideal body weight for obese patients.† Lower initial dosage may be required for patients receiving other drugs that decrease theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine).‡ To achieve a target concentration of 7.5 mcg/mL for neonatal apnea.§ Not to exceed 900 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.ı Not to exceed 400 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.
Patient population

Age

Theophylline infusion rate (mg/kg/hr)*†

Neonates

Postnatal age up to 24 days

Postnatal age beyond 24 days

1 mg/kg q12h/‡

1.5 mg/kg q12h/‡

Infants

6-52 weeks old

mg/kg/hr= (0.008)(age in weeks) + 0.21

Young children

1-9 years

0.8

Older children

9-12 years

0.7

Adolescents

    (cigarette or marijuana

    smokers)

12-16 years

0.7

Adolescents (nonsmokers)

12-16 years

0.5 §

Adults

    (otherwise healthy

    nonsmokers)

16-60 years

0.4 §

Elderly

>60 years

0.3 ı

Cardiac decompensation,

    cor pulmonale, liver

    dysfunction, sepsis with

    multiorgan failure, or

    shock

0.2 ı
Table VI. Final Dosage Adjustment Guided by Serum Theophylline Concentration ¶     Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present, physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g., sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see WARNINGS).
Peak Serum Concentration

Dosage Adjustment

<9.9 mcg/mL

If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase infusion rate about 25%. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults for further dosage adjustment.

10 to 14.9 mcg/mL

If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain infusion rate and recheck serum concentration at 24 hour intervals.¶ If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated consider adding additional medication(s) to treatment regimen.

15-19.9 mcg/mL

Consider 10% decrease in infusion rate to provide greater margin of safety even if current dosage is tolerated.¶

20-24.9 mcg/mL

Decrease infusion rate by 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

25-30 mcg/mL

Stop infusion for 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults and decrease subsequent infusion rate at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, stop infusion and consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage).

>30 mcg/mL

Stop the infusion and treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease infusion rate by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

Intravenous Admixture Incompatibility:

Although there have been reports of aminophylline precipitating in acidic media, these reports do not apply to the dilute solutions found in intravenous infusions. Aminophylline injection should not be mixed in a syringe with other drugs but should be added separately to the intravenous solution.

When an intravenous solution containing aminophylline is given “piggyback”, the intravenous system already in place should be turned off while the aminophylline is infused if there is a potential problem with admixture incompatibility.

Because of the alkalinity of aminophylline containing solutions, drugs known to be alkali labile should be avoided in admixtures. These include epinephrine HCl, norepinephrine bitartrate, isoproterenol HCl and penicillin G potassium. It is suggested that specialized literature be consulted before preparing admixtures with aminophylline and other drugs.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion. Do not use if crystals have separated from solution.
Codeine Sulfate

Codeine Sulfate

Ciprofloxacin should be administered intravenously at dosages described in the appropriate Dosage Guidelines tables.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The determination of dosage and duration for any particular patient must take into consideration the severity and nature of the infection, the susceptibility of the causative microorganism, the integrity of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms, and the status of renal function.
Table 1: Adult Dosage Guidelines 1   Due to the designated pathogens (see Indications and Usage).2   Used in conjunction with metronidazole.3   Begin administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure.
Infection1

Dose

Frequency

Usual Duration

Urinary Tract

200 mg to 400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

7 to 14 days

Lower Respiratory Tract

400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

7 to 14 days

Nosocomial Pneumonia

400 mg

every 8 hours

10 to 14 days

Skin and Skin Structure

400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

7 to 14 days

Bone and Joint

400 mg

every 12 to every 8 hours

4 to 8 weeks

Complicated Intra-Abdominal2

400 mg

every 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Acute Sinusitis

400 mg

every 12 hours

10 days

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

400 mg

every 12 hours

28 days

Empirical Therapy In Febrile Neutropenic Patients

Ciprofloxacin

400 mg

and

Piperacillin

50 mg/kg

every 8 hours

___________

every 4 hours

7 to 14 days

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure)3

400 mg

every 12 hours

60 days

Plague3

400 mg

every 12 to 8 hours

14 days

Conversion of Intravenous to Oral Dosing in Adults

Patients whose therapy is started with ciprofloxacin injection may be switched to CIPRO Tablets or Oral Suspension when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician (Table 2) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 2: Equivalent AUC Dosing Regimens
Ciprofloxacin Oral Dosage

Equivalent Ciprofloxacin Injection Dosage

250 mg Tablet every 12 hours

200 mg intravenous every 12 hours

500 mg Tablet every 12 hours

400 mg intravenous every 12 hours

750 mg Tablet every 12 hours

400 mg intravenous every 8 hours

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

Dosing and initial route of therapy (that is, IV or oral) for cUTI or pyelonephritis should be determined by the severity of the infection.
Table 3: Pediatric Dosage Guidelines 1   The total duration of therapy for cUTI and pyelonephritis in the clinical trial was determined by the physician. The mean duration of treatment was 11 days (range 10 to 21 days).2   Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure.3   Begin drug administration as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Y. pestis.
Infection

Route of Administration

Dose (mg/kg)

Frequency

Total Duration

Complicated Urinary Tract or Pyelonephritis (patients from 1 to 17 years of age)1

Intravenous

6 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg (maximum 400 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing >51 kg)

Every 8 hours

10 to 21 days1

Inhalational Anthrax

(Post-Exposure)2

Intravenous

10 mg/kg

(maximum 400 mg per dose)

Every 12 hours

60 days

Plague2,3

Intravenous

10 mg/kg

(maximum 400 mg per dose)

Every 12 to 8 hours

10 to 21 days

2.3 Dosage Modifications in Patients with Renal Impairment

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternative pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. Nonetheless, some modification of dosage is recommended, particularly for patients with severe renal dysfunction. Dosage guidelines for use in patients with renal impairment are shown in Table 4.
Table 4: Recommended Starting and Maintenance Doses for Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dose

> 30

See Usual Dosage

5 to 29

200 to 400 mg every 18 to 24 hours

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formulas may be used to estimate creatinine clearance:

Men - Creatinine clearance (mL/min) = Weight (kg) x (140 – age)                                                             72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Women - 0.85 x the value calculated for men.

The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

In patients with severe infections and severe renal impairment and hepatic insufficiency, careful monitoring is suggested.

Pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency were excluded from the clinical trial of cUTI and pyelonephritis. No information is available on dosing adjustments necessary for pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency (that is, creatinine clearance of < 50 mL/min/1.73m2).

2.4 Preparation of Ciprofloxacin for Administration

Vials (Injection Concentrate)

THIS PREPARATION MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE USE. The intravenous dose should be prepared by aseptically withdrawing the concentrate from the vial of Ciprofloxacin Injection. This should be diluted with a suitable intravenous solution to a final concentration of 1 to 2 mg/mL (see COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY). The resulting solution should be infused over a period of 60 minutes by direct infusion or through a Y-type intravenous infusion set which may already be in place.

If the Y-type or “piggyback” method of administration is used, it is advisable to discontinue temporarily the administration of any other solutions during the infusion of Ciprofloxacin Injection. If the concomitant use of Ciprofloxacin Injection and another drug is necessary each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each drug.

COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY

Ciprofloxacin Injection 1% (10 mg/mL), when diluted with the following intravenous solutions to concentrations of 0.5 to 2.0 mg/mL, is stable for up to 14 days at refrigerated or room temperature storage.

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5% Dextrose Injection, USPSterile Water for Injection10% Dextrose for Injection5% Dextrose and 0.225% Sodium Chloride for Injection5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride for InjectionLactated Ringer’s for Injection

2.5 Important Administration Instructions

Intravenous Infusion

Ciprofloxacin should be administered to by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes. Slow infusion of a dilute solution into a larger vein will minimize patient discomfort and reduce the risk of venous irritation.

Hydration of Patients Receiving Ciprofloxacin

Adequate hydration of patients receiving ciprofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria has been reported with quinolones [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Adverse Reactions (6.1), Nonclinical Toxicology (13.2) and Patient Counseling Information (17)].
Rocuronium Bromide

Rocuronium Bromide

Rocuronium bromide injection is for intravenous use only. This drug should only be administered by experienced clinicians or trained individuals supervised by an experienced clinician familiar with the use, actions, characteristics, and complications of neuromuscular blocking agents. Doses of rocuronium bromide injection should be individualized and a peripheral nerve stimulator should be used to monitor drug effect, need for additional doses, adequacy of spontaneous recovery or antagonism, and to decrease the complications of overdosage if additional doses are administered.

The dosage information which follows is derived from studies based upon units of drug per unit of body weight. It is intended to serve as an initial guide to clinicians familiar with other neuromuscular blocking agents to acquire experience with rocuronium bromide injection.

In patients in whom potentiation of, or resistance to, neuromuscular block is anticipated, a dose adjustment should be considered [see Dosage and Administration (2.5), Warnings and Precautions (5.9, 5.12), Drug Interactions (7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.8, 7.10), and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

2.1 Dose for Tracheal Intubation

The recommended initial dose of rocuronium bromide injection, regardless of anesthetic technique, is 0.6 mg/kg. Neuromuscular block sufficient for intubation (80% block or greater) is attained in a median (range) time of 1 (0.4 to 6) minute(s) and most patients have intubation completed within 2 minutes. Maximum blockade is achieved in most patients in less than 3 minutes. This dose may be expected to provide 31 (15 to 85) minutes of clinical relaxation under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia. Under halothane, isoflurane, and enflurane anesthesia, some extension of the period of clinical relaxation should be expected [see Drug Interactions (7.3)].

A lower dose of rocuronium bromide injection (0.45 mg/kg) may be used. Neuromuscular block sufficient for intubation (80% block or greater) is attained in a median (range) time of 1.3 (0.8 to 6.2) minute(s) and most patients have intubation completed within 2 minutes. Maximum blockade is achieved in most patients in less than 4 minutes. This dose may be expected to provide 22 (12 to 31) minutes of clinical relaxation under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia. Patients receiving this low dose of 0.45 mg/kg who achieve less than 90% block (about 16% of these patients) may have a more rapid time to 25% recovery, 12 to 15 minutes.

A large bolus dose of 0.9 or 1.2 mg/kg can be administered under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia without adverse effects to the cardiovascular system [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.2 Rapid Sequence Intubation

In appropriately premedicated and adequately anesthetized patients, rocuronium bromide injection 0.6 to 1.2 mg/kg will provide excellent or good intubating conditions in most patients in less than 2 minutes [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.3 Maintenance Dosing

Maintenance doses of 0.1, 0.15, and 0.2 mg/kg rocuronium bromide injection, administered at 25% recovery of control T1 (defined as 3 twitches of train-of-four), provide a median (range) of 12 (2 to 31), 17 (6 to 50) and 24 (7 to 69) minutes of clinical duration under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. In all cases, dosing should be guided based on the clinical duration following initial dose or prior maintenance dose and not administered until recovery of neuromuscular function is evident. A clinically insignificant cumulation of effect with repetitive maintenance dosing has been observed [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.4 Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion at an initial rate of 10 to 12 mcg/kg/min of rocuronium bromide injection should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from an intubating dose. Due to rapid redistribution [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] and the associated rapid spontaneous recovery, initiation of the infusion after substantial return of neuromuscular function (more than 10% of control T1), may necessitate additional bolus doses to maintain adequate block for surgery.

Upon reaching the desired level of neuromuscular block, the infusion of rocuronium bromide injection must be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as monitored with the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator. In clinical trials, infusion rates have ranged from 4 to 16 mcg/kg/min.

Inhalation anesthetics, particularly enflurane and isoflurane, may enhance the neuromuscular blocking action of nondepolarizing muscle relaxants. In the presence of steady-state concentrations of enflurane or isoflurane, it may be necessary to reduce the rate of infusion by 30% to 50%, at 45 to 60 minutes after the intubating dose.

Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of rocuronium bromide infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following comparable total doses administered by repetitive bolus injections [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Infusion solutions of rocuronium bromide injection can be prepared by mixing rocuronium bromide injection with an appropriate infusion solution such as 5% glucose in water or lactated Ringers [see Dosage and Administration (2.6)]. These infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of mixing. Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Infusion rates of rocuronium bromide injection can be individualized for each patient using the following tables for three different concentrations of rocuronium bromide injection solution as guidelines:
TABLE 1: Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (0.5 mg/mL)* *              50 mg rocuronium bromide injection in 100 mL solution
Patient Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

(kg)

(lbs)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

15

33

7.2

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

16.2

18

21.6

25.2

28.8

20

44

9.6

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

21.6

24

28.8

33.6

38.4

25

55

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

36

42

48

35

77

16.8

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

37.8

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

50

110

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

72

84

96

60

132

28.8

36

43.2

50.4

57.6

64.8

72

86.4

100.8

115.2

70

154

33.6

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

75.6

84

100.8

117.6

134.4

80

176

38.4

48

57.6

67.2

76.8

86.4

96

115.2

134.4

153.6

90

198

43.2

54

64.8

75.6

86.4

97.2

108

129.6

151.2

172.8

100

220

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

144

168

192
TABLE 2: Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (1 mg/mL)** **            100 mg rocuronium bromide injection in 100 mL solution
Patient Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

(kg)

(lbs)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

15

33

3.6

4.5

5.4

6.3

7.2

8.1

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

20

44

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

25

55

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

18

21

24

35

77

8.4

10.5

12.6

14.7

16.8

18.9

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

50

110

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

36

42

48

60

132

14.4

18

21.6

25.2

28.8

32.4

36

43.2

50.4

57.6

70

154

16.8

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

37.8

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

80

176

19.2

24

28.8

33.6

38.4

43.2

48

57.6

67.2

76.8

90

198

21.6

27

32.4

37.8

43.2

48.6

54

64.8

75.6

86.4

100

220

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

72

84

96
TABLE 3: Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (5 mg/mL)*** ***          500 mg rocuronium bromide injection in 100 mL solution
Patient Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

(kg)

(lbs)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

1

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.7

1.9

15

33

0.7

0.9

1.1

1.3

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.2

2.5

2.9

20

44

1

1.2

1.4

1.7

1.9

2.2

2.4

2.9

3.4

3.8

25

55

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.4

2.7

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

35

77

1.7

2.1

2.5

2.9

3.4

3.8

4.2

5

5.9

6.7

50

110

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

60

132

2.9

3.6

4.3

5

5.8

6.5

7.2

8.6

10.1

11.5

70

154

3.4

4.2

5

5.9

6.7

7.6

8.4

10.1

11.8

13.4

80

176

3.8

4.8

5.8

6.7

7.7

8.6

9.6

11.5

13.4

15.4

90

198

4.3

5.4

6.5

7.6

8.6

9.7

10.8

13

15.1

17.3

100

220

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

2.5 Dosage in Specific Populations

Pediatric Patients

The recommended initial intubation dose of rocuronium bromide injection is 0.6 mg/kg; however, a lower dose of 0.45 mg/kg may be used depending on anesthetic technique and the age of the patient.

For sevoflurane (induction) Rocuronium bromide doses of 0.45 mg/kg and 0.6 mg/kg in general produce excellent to good intubating conditions within 75 seconds. When halothane is used, a 0.6 mg/kg dose of rocuronium bromide injection resulted in excellent to good intubating conditions within 60 seconds.

The time to maximum block for an intubating dose was shortest in infants (28 days up to 3 months) and longest in neonates (birth to less than 28 days). The duration of clinical relaxation following an intubating dose is shortest in children (greater than 2 years up to 11 years) and longest in infants.

When sevoflurane is used for induction and isoflurane/nitrous oxide for maintenance of general anesthesia, maintenance dosing of rocuronium bromide injection can be administered as bolus doses of 0.15 mg/kg at reappearance of T3 in all pediatric age groups. Maintenance dosing can also be administered at the reappearance of T2 at a rate of 7 to 10 mcg/kg/min, with the lowest dose requirement for neonates (birth to less than 28 days) and the highest dose requirement for children (greater than 2 years up to 11 years).

When halothane is used for general anesthesia, patients ranging from 3 months old through adolescence can be administered rocuronium bromide injection maintenance doses of 0.075 to 0.125 mg/kg upon return of T1 to 0.25% to provide clinical relaxation for 7 to 10 minutes. Alternatively, a continuous infusion of rocuronium bromide injection initiated at a rate of 12 mcg/kg/min upon return of T1 to 10% (one twitch present in train-of-four) may also be used to maintain neuromuscular blockade in pediatric patients.

Additional information for administration to pediatric patients of all age groups is presented elsewhere in the label [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

The infusion of rocuronium bromide injection must be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as monitored with the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator. Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of rocuronium bromide infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following similar total exposure to single bolus doses [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Rocuronium bromide injection is not recommended for rapid sequence intubation in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Patients

Geriatric patients (65 years or older) exhibited a slightly prolonged median (range) clinical duration of 46 (22 to 73), 62 (49 to 75), and 94 (64 to 138) minutes under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia following doses of 0.6, 0.9, and 1.2 mg/kg, respectively. No differences in duration of neuromuscular blockade following maintenance doses of rocuronium bromide injection were observed between these subjects and younger subjects, and other reported clinical experience has not identified differences in response between elderly and younger patients, but greater sensitivity of some older individuals cannot be ruled out [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2, 12.3)].

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

No differences from patients with normal hepatic and kidney function were observed for onset time at a dose of 0.6 mg/kg rocuronium bromide injection. When compared to patients with normal renal and hepatic function, the mean clinical duration is similar in patients with end-stage renal disease undergoing renal transplant, and is about 1.5 times longer in patients with hepatic disease. Patients with renal failure may have a greater variation in duration of effect [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Obese Patients

In obese patients, the initial dose of rocuronium bromide injection 0.6 mg/kg should be based upon the patient’s actual body weight [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

An analysis across all US controlled clinical studies indicates that the pharmacodynamics of rocuronium bromide injection are not different between obese and non-obese patients when dosed based upon their actual body weight.

Patients with Reduced Plasma Cholinesterase Activity

Rocuronium metabolism does not depend on plasma cholinesterase so dosing adjustments are not needed in patients with reduced plasma cholinesterase activity.

Patients with Prolonged Circulation Time

Because higher doses of rocuronium bromide injection produce a longer duration of action, the initial dosage should usually not be increased in these patients to reduce onset time; instead, in these situations, when feasible, more time should be allowed for the drug to achieve onset of effect [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

Patients with Drugs or Conditions Causing Potentiation of Neuromuscular Block

The neuromuscular blocking action of rocuronium bromide injection is potentiated by isoflurane and enflurane anesthesia. Potentiation is minimal when administration of the recommended dose of rocuronium bromide injection occurs prior to the administration of these potent inhalation agents. The median clinical duration of a dose of 0.57 to 0.85 mg/kg was 34, 38, and 42 minutes under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen, enflurane and isoflurane maintenance anesthesia, respectively. During 1 to 2 hours of infusion, the infusion rate of rocuronium bromide injection required to maintain about 95% block was decreased by as much as 40% under enflurane and isoflurane anesthesia [see Drug Interactions (7.3)].

2.6 Preparation for Administration of Rocuronium Bromide Injection

Diluent Compatibility

Rocuronium bromide injection is compatible in solution with:

     0.9% NaCl solution                      sterile water for injection      5% glucose in water                     lactated Ringers      5% glucose in saline

Rocuronium bromide injection is compatible in the above solutions at concentrations up to 5 mg/mL for 24 hours at room temperature in plastic bags, glass bottles, and plastic syringe pumps.

Drug Admixture Incompatibility

Rocuronium bromide injection is physically incompatible when mixed with the following drugs:

     amphotericin                                 hydrocortisone sodium succinate      amoxicillin                                    insulin      azathioprine                                  intralipid      cefazolin                                       ketorolac      cloxacillin                                     lorazepam      dexamethasone                             methohexital      diazepam                                      methylprednisolone      erythromycin                                thiopental      famotidine                                    trimethoprim      furosemide                                   vancomycin

If rocuronium bromide injection is administered via the same infusion line that is also used for other drugs, it is important that this infusion line is adequately flushed between administration of rocuronium bromide injection and drugs for which incompatibility with rocuronium bromide injection has been demonstrated or for which compatibility with rocuronium bromide injection has not been established.

Infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of mixing. Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Rocuronium bromide injection should not be mixed with alkaline solutions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Visual Inspection

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and clarity prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use solution if particulate matter is present.
Ketamine Hydrochloride

Ketamine Hydrochloride

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Note: Barbiturates and ketamine, being chemically incompatible because of precipitate formation, should not be injected from the same syringe.

If the ketamine dose is augmented with diazepam, the two drugs must be given separately. Do not mix ketamine hydrochloride and diazepam in syringe or infusion flask. For additional information on the use of diazepam, refer to the WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION sections of the diazepam insert.

Preoperative Preparations
While vomiting has been reported following ketamine administration, some airway protection may be afforded because of active laryngeal-pharyngeal reflexes. However, since aspiration may occur with ketamine and since protective reflexes may also be diminished by supplementary anesthetics and muscle relaxants, the possibility of aspiration must be considered. Ketamine is recommended for use in the patient whose stomach is not empty when, in the judgment of the practitioner, the benefits of the drug outweigh the possible risks. Atropine, scopolamine, or another drying agent should be given at an appropriate interval prior to induction.
Onset and Duration

Because of rapid induction following the initial intravenous injection, the patient should be in a supported position during administration.

The onset of action of ketamine is rapid; an intravenous dose of 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb) of body weight usually produces surgical anesthesia within 30 seconds after injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting five to ten minutes. If a longer effect is desired, additional increments can be administered intravenously or intramuscularly to maintain anesthesia without producing significant cumulative effects.

Intramuscular doses, in a range of 9 to 13 mg/kg (4 to 6 mg/lb) usually produce surgical anesthesia within 3 to 4 minutes following injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting 12 to 25 minutes.

Dosage

As with other general anesthetic agents, the individual response to ketamine is somewhat varied depending on the dose, route of administration, and age of patient, so that dosage recommendation cannot be absolutely fixed. The drug should be titrated against the patient’s requirements.

Induction

Intravenous Route: The initial dose of ketamine administered intravenously may range from 1 mg/kg to 4.5 mg/kg (0.5 to 2 mg/lb). The average amount required to produce five to ten minutes of surgical anesthesia has been 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb).

Alternatively, in adult patients an induction dose of 1 mg to 2 mg/kg intravenous ketamine at a rate of 0.5 mg/kg/min may be used for induction of anesthesia. In addition, diazepam in 2 mg to 5 mg doses, administered in a separate syringe over 60 seconds, may be used. In most cases, 15 mg of intravenous diazepam or less will suffice. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this induction dosage program.

Note: The 100 mg/mL concentration of ketamine should not be injected intravenously without proper dilution. It is recommended the drug be diluted with an equal volume of either Sterile Water for Injection, Sodium Chloride Injection, 0.9% or Dextrose Injection, 5%.

Rate of Administration: It is recommended that ketamine be administered slowly (over a period of 60 seconds). More rapid administration may result in respiratory depression and enhanced pressor response.

Intramuscular Route: The initial dose of ketamine administered intramuscularly may range from 6.5 to 13 mg/kg (3 to 6 mg/lb). A dose of 10 mg/kg (5 mg/lb) will usually produce 12 to 25 minutes of surgical anesthesia.

Maintenance of Anesthesia

The maintenance dose should be adjusted according to the patient’s anesthetic needs and whether an additional anesthetic agent is employed.

Increments of one-half to the full induction dose may be repeated as needed for maintenance of anesthesia. However, it should be noted that purposeless and tonic-clonic movements of extremities may occur during the course of anesthesia. These movements do not imply a light plane and are not indicative of the need for additional doses of the anesthetic.

It should be recognized that the larger the total dose of ketamine administered, the longer will be the time to complete recovery.

Adult patients induced with ketamine augmented with intravenous diazepam may be maintained on ketamine given by slow microdrip infusion technique at a dose of 0.1 to 0.5 mg/minute, augmented with diazepam 2 to 5 mg administered intravenously as needed. In many cases 20 mg or less of intravenous diazepam total for combined induction and maintenance will suffice. However, slightly more diazepam may be required depending on the nature and duration of the operation, physical status of the patient, and other factors. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this maintenance dosage program.

Dilution: To prepare a dilute solution containing 1 mg of ketamine per mL, aseptically transfer 10 mL from a 50 mg per mL vial or 5 mL from a 100 mg per mL vial to 500 mL of Dextrose Injection, 5% or Sodium Chloride Injection, 0.9% (Normal Saline) and mix well. The resultant solution will contain 1 mg of ketamine per mL.

The fluid requirements of the patient and duration of anesthesia must be considered when selecting the appropriate dilution of ketamine hydrochloride injection. If fluid restriction is required, ketamine hydrochloride injection can be added to a 250 mL infusion as described above to provide a ketamine concentration of 2 mg/mL.

Supplementary Agents

Ketamine is clinically compatible with the commonly used general and local anesthetic agents when an adequate respiratory exchange is maintained.

The regimen of a reduced dose of ketamine supplemented with diazepam can be used to produce balanced anesthesia by combination with other agents such as nitrous oxide and oxygen.
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

[see Indications and Usage (1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1 Community-Acquired Pneumonia

The recommended dose of Azithromycin for Injection, USP for the treatment of adult patients with community-acquired pneumonia due to the indicated organisms is 500 mg as a single daily dose by the intravenous route for at least two days. Intravenous therapy should be followed by azithromycin by the oral route at a single, daily dose of 500 mg, administered as two 250-mg tablets to complete a 7- to 10-day course of therapy. The timing of the switch to oral therapy should be done at the discretion of the physician and in accordance with clinical response.

2.2 Pelvic Inflammatory Disease

The recommended dose of Azithromycin for Injection, USP for the treatment of adult patients with pelvic inflammatory disease due to the indicated organisms is 500 mg as a single daily dose by the intravenous route for one or two days. Intravenous therapy should be followed by azithromycin by the oral route at a single, daily dose of 250 mg to complete a 7-day course of therapy. The timing of the switch to oral therapy should be done at the discretion of the physician and in accordance with clinical response.

2.3 Preparation of the Solution for Intravenous Administration

The infusate concentration and rate of infusion for Azithromycin for Injection, USP should be 2 mg/mL over 1 hour. Azithromycin for Injection, USP should not be given as a bolus or as an intramuscular injection.

Reconstitution

Instructions for Use

These instructions for use should be made available to the individuals who perform the reconstitution steps.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solution should be discarded.

To Open

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (See Figure 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (See Figure 2.) NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe.

b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (See Figure 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (See Figure 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (See Figure 4.) 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.


To Reconstitute the Drug
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (See Figure 5.) 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (See Figure 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time. 5. Look through the bottom of the vial to verify that the stopper has been removed and complete mixing has occurred. (See Figure 7.)
If the rubber stopper is not removed from the vial and medication is not released on the first attempt, the inner cap may be manipulated back into the rubber stopper without removing the drug vial from the diluent container. Repeat steps 3 through 5.



Dilute this solution further prior to administration as instructed below.

Dilution

Azithromycin for Injection, USP ADD-VantageTM vials must be diluted prior to IV administration with the ADD-VantageTM diluent container [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)]. The ADD-VantageTM vial should be joined with a 250 mL ADD-VantageTM flexible diluent container (5% dextrose injection, 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 0.45% sodium chloride injection).

It is recommended that a 500-mg dose of Azithromycin for Injection, diluted as above, be infused over a period of not less than 60 minutes.

Other intravenous substances, additives, or medications should not be added to Azithromycin for Injection, or infused simultaneously through the same intravenous line.

Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

Storage

When diluted according to the instructions (2 mg/mL), Azithromycin for Injection is stable for 24 hours at or below room temperature (30°C or 86°F), or for 7 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F).
Magnesium Sulfate

Magnesium Sulfate

Magnesium Sulfate in Water for Injection is intended for intravenous use only. For the management of pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, intravenous infusions of dilute solutions of magnesium (1% to 8%) are often given in combination with intramuscular injections of 50% Magnesium Sulfate Injection, USP. Therefore, in the clinical conditions cited below, both forms of therapy are noted, as appropriate.

Continuous maternal administration of magnesium sulfate in pregnancy beyond 5-7 days can cause fetal abnormalities.

In Eclampsia

In severe pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, the total initial dose is 10 to 14 g of magnesium sulfate. To initiate therapy, 4 g of Magnesium Sulfate in Water for Injection may be administered intravenously. The rate of I.V. infusion should generally not exceed 150 mg/minute, or 3.75 mL of a 4% concentration (or its equivalent) per minute, except in severe eclampsia with seizures. Simultaneously, 4 to 5 g (32.5 to 40.6 mEq) of magnesium sulfate may be administered intramuscularly into each buttock using undiluted 50% Magnesium Sulfate Injection, USP. After the initial I.V. dose, some clinicians administer 1 to 2 g/hour by constant I.V. infusion.

Subsequent intramuscular doses of 4 to 5 g of magnesium sulfate may be injected into alternate buttocks every four hours, depending on the continuing presence of the patellar reflex, adequate respiratory function, and absence of signs of magnesium toxicity. Therapy should continue until paroxysms cease.

A serum magnesium level of 6 mg/100 mL is considered optimal for control of seizures. A total daily (24 hr) dose of 30 to 40 g magnesium sulfate should not be exceeded. In the presence of severe renal insufficiency, frequent serum magnesium concentrations must be obtained and the maximum dosage of magnesium sulfate is 20 g per 48 hours.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless solution is clear. Discard unused portion.
Magnesium Sulfate In De...

Magnesium Sulfate In Dextrose

Magnesium Sulfate in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP is intended for intravenous use only. For the management of pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, intravenous infusions of dilute solutions of magnesium (1% to 8%) are often given in combination with intramuscular injections of 50% Magnesium Sulfate Injection, USP. Therefore, in the clinical conditions cited below, both forms of therapy are noted, as appropriate.

Continuous maternal administration of magnesium sulfate in pregnancy beyond 5-7 days can cause fetal abnormalities.

In Eclampsia

In severe pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, the total initial dose is 10 to 14 g of magnesium sulfate. To initiate therapy, 4 g of Magnesium Sulfate in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP may be administered intravenously. The rate of I.V. infusion should generally not exceed 150 mg/minute, or 7.5 mL of a 2% concentration (or its equivalent) per minute, except in severe eclampsia with seizures. Simultaneously, 4 to 5 g (32.5 to 40.6 mEq) of magnesium sulfate may be administered intramuscularly into each buttock using undiluted 50% Magnesium Sulfate Injection, USP. After the initial I.V. dose, some clinicians administer 1-2 g/hour by constant I.V. infusion.

Subsequent intramuscular doses of 4 to 5 g of magnesium sulfate may be injected into alternate buttocks every four hours, depending on the continuing presence of the patellar reflex, adequate respiratory function, and absence of signs of magnesium toxicity. Therapy should continue until paroxysms cease.

A serum magnesium level of 6 mg/100 mL is considered optimal for control of seizures. A total daily (24 hr) dose of 30 to 40 g magnesium sulfate should not be exceeded. In the presence of severe renal insufficiency, frequent serum magnesium concentrations must be obtained, and the maximum recommended dosage of magnesium sulfate is 20 g per 48 hours.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless solution is clear. Discard unused portion.
Fluconazole

Fluconazole

Dosage and Administration in Adults

Multiple Dose

SINCE ORAL ABSORPTION IS RAPID AND ALMOST COMPLETE, THE DAILY DOSE OF FLUCONAZOLE IS THE SAME FOR ORAL (TABLETS AND SUSPENSION) AND INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION. In general, a loading dose of twice the daily dose is recommended on the first day of therapy to result in plasma concentrations close to steady-state by the second day of therapy.

The daily dose of fluconazole for the treatment of infections other than vaginal candidiasis should be based on the infecting organism and the patient’s response to therapy. Treatment should be continued until clinical parameters or laboratory tests indicate that active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection. Patients with AIDS and cryptococcal meningitis or recurrent oropharyngeal candidiasis usually require maintenance therapy to prevent relapse.

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Clinical evidence of oropharyngeal candidiasis generally resolves within several days, but treatment should be continued for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for esophageal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Doses up to 400 mg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least two weeks following resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections: For systemic Candida infections including candidemia, disseminated candidiasis, and pneumonia, optimal therapeutic dosage and duration of therapy have not been established. In open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients, doses of up to 400 mg daily have been used.

Urinary Tract Infections and Peritonitis: For the treatment of Candida urinary tract infections and peritonitis, daily doses of 50 to 200 mg have been used in open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients.

Cryptococcal Meningitis: The recommended dosage for treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis is 400 mg on the first day, followed by 200 mg once daily. A dosage of 400 mg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. The recommended dosage of fluconazole for suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in patients with AIDS is 200 mg once daily.

Prophylaxis in Patients Undergoing Bone Marrow Transplantation: The recommended fluconazole daily dosage for the prevention of candidiasis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation is 400 mg, once daily. Patients who are anticipated to have severe granulocytopenia (less than 500 neutrophils per cu mm) should start fluconazole prophylaxis several days before the anticipated onset of neutropenia, and continue for 7 days after the neutrophil count rises above 1000 cells per cu mm.

Dosage and Administration in Children

The following dose equivalency scheme should generally provide equivalent exposure in pediatric and adult patients:
* Some older children may have clearances similar to that of adults. Absolute doses exceeding 600 mg/day are not recommended. Experience with fluconazole in neonates is limited to pharmacokinetic studies in premature newborns. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) Based on the prolonged half-life seen in premature newborns (gestational age 26 to 29 weeks), these children, in the first two weeks of life, should receive the same dosage (mg/kg) as in older children, but administered every 72 hours. After the first two weeks, these children should be dosed once daily. No information regarding fluconazole pharmacokinetics in full-term newborns is available.
Pediatric Patients

Adults

3 mg/kg

100 mg

6 mg/kg

200 mg

12* mg/kg

400 mg

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Treatment should be administered for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis: For the treatment of esophageal candidiasis, the recommended dosage of fluconazole in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Doses up to 12 mg/kg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least 2 weeks following the resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections: For the treatment of candidemia and disseminated Candida infections, daily doses of 6 to 12 mg/kg/day have been used in an open, noncomparative study of a small number of children.

Cryptococcal Meningitis: For the treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis, the recommended dosage is 12 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 6 mg/kg once daily. A dosage of 12 mg/kg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. For suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in children with AIDS, the recommended dose of fluconazole is 6 mg/kg once daily.

Dosage in Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Fluconazole is cleared primarily by renal excretion as unchanged drug. In patients with impaired renal function who will receive multiple doses of fluconazole, an initial loading dose of 50 to 400 mg should be given. After the loading dose, the daily dose (according to indication) should be based on the following table:

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Percent of Recommended Dose

>50

100%

≤50 (no dialysis)

50%

Regular dialysis

100% after each dialysis

These are suggested dose adjustments based on pharmacokinetics following administration of multiple doses. Further adjustment may be needed depending upon clinical condition.

When serum creatinine is the only measure of renal function available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) should be used to estimate the creatinine clearance in adults:

Males:                                               Weight (kg) x (140-age)                                                                             72 x serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females:                                                0.85 x above value

Although the pharmacokinetics of fluconazole has not been studied in children with renal insufficiency, dosage reduction in children with renal insufficiency should parallel that recommended for adults. The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in children:

                        K x                                        linear length or height (cm)                                                                                     serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

(Where K = 0.55 for children older than 1 year and 0.45 for infants.)

Administration

Fluconazole Injection, USP may be administered by intravenous infusion. Fluconazole Injection, USP has been used safely for up to fourteen days of intravenous therapy. The intravenous infusion of fluconazole should be administered at a maximum rate of approximately 200 mg/hour, given as a continuous infusion.

Fluconazole injections in flexible plastic containers are intended only for intravenous administration using sterile equipment.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use if the solution is cloudy or precipitated or if the seal is not intact.

Directions for IV Use of Fluconazole in Flexible Plastic Containers

Do not remove unit from overwrap until ready for use. The overwrap is a moisture barrier. The inner bag maintains the sterility of the product.

CAUTION: Do not use flexible plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is completed.

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch slit and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually. After removing overwrap, check for minute leaks by squeezing inner bag firmly. If leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired.

DO NOT ADD SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICATION.

Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 2. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: When using a vented administration set, replace bacterial retentive air filter with piercing pin cover. Insert piercing pin with twisting motion until shoulder of air filter housing rests against the outlet port flange. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 4. Suspend container from hanger. 5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 6. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close flow control clamp. 7. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 8. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by either the IV or the IM routes.

For IV administration, the dose can be given by slow intravenous injection over at least 10-15 minutes or can also be delivered, in greater dilutions with 50-100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15-30 minutes.

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by deep intramuscular injection. (See DIRECTIONS FOR USE-Preparation for Intramuscular Injection section.)

The recommended adult dosage of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older

The recommended daily dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. The safety and efficacy of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection administered via intramuscular injection in pediatric patients have not been established. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection. (See CLINICAL STUDIES section.)

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:
TABLE 5. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours) Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage
≥ 30

1

1.5-3 g q 6h-q 8h

15-29

5

1.5-3 g q 12h

5-14

9

1.5-3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males

weight (kg) x (140 - age)

72 x serum creatinine

Females

0.85 x above value

COMPATIBILITY, RECONSTITUTION AND STABILITY

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder is to be stored at 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.] prior to reconstitution.

When concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated, Ampicillin and Sulbactam and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted and administered separately, due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by any of the aminopenicillins.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

General Dissolution Procedures

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder for intravenous and intramuscular use may be reconstituted with any of the compatible diluents described in this insert. Solutions should be allowed to stand after dissolution to allow any foaming to dissipate in order to permit visual inspection for complete solubilization.

Preparation for Intravenous Use

Reconstitution of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, at the specified concentrations, with these diluents provide stable solutions for the time periods indicated in the following table: (After the indicated time periods, any unused portions of solutions should be discarded).
TABLE 6. Diluent Maximum Concentration (mg/mL) ampicillin and sulbactam Use Periods
Sterile Water for Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose Injection

30 (20/10)

2 hrs at 25°C

30 (20/10)

4 hrs at 4°C

3 (2/1)

2 hrs at 25°C

Lactated Ringer's Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose in 0.45% Saline

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 25°C

15 (10/5)

4 hrs at 4°C

10% Invert Sugar

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 25°C

30 (20/10)

3 hrs at 4°C

Initially, the vials may be reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection to yield solutions containing 375 mg Ampicillin and Sulbactam per mL (250 mg ampicillin/125 mg sulbactam per mL ). An appropriate volume should then be immediately diluted with a suitable parenteral diluent to yield solutions containing 3 to 45 mg Ampicillin and Sulbactam per mL (2 to 30 mg ampicillin/1 to 15 mg sulbactam/per mL).

Preparation for Intramuscular Injection

1.5 g and 3 g Standard vials

Vials for intramuscular use may be reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection USP, 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection USP or 2% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection USP. Consult the following table for recommended volumes to be added to obtain solutions containing 375 mg ampicillin and sulbactam per mL (250 mg ampicillin/ 125 mg sulbactam per mL).

Note: Use only freshly prepared solutions and administer within one hour after preparation.
Ampicillin and Sulbactam Vial Size Volume of Diluent to be Added Withdrawal Volume* * There is sufficient excess present to allow withdrawal and administration of the stated volumes.
1.5 g

3.2 mL

4 mL

3 g

6.4 mL

8 mL

Animal Pharmacology

While reversible glycogenosis was observed in laboratory animals, this phenomenon was dose- and time-dependent and is not expected to develop at the therapeutic doses and corresponding plasma levels attained during the relatively short periods of combined ampicillin/sulbactam therapy in man.
Amiodarone Hydrochlorid...

Amiodarone Hydrochloride

Amiodarone shows considerable interindividual variation in response. Although a starting dose adequate to suppress life-threatening arrhythmias is needed, close monitoring with adjustment of dose is essential. The recommended starting dose of amiodarone is about 1000 mg over the first 24 hours of therapy, delivered by the following infusion regimen:
Table 1: Amiodarone Dose Recommendations: First 24 Hours
Loading infusions

First Rapid:

150 mg over the FIRST 10 minutes (15 mg/min).Add 3 mL of amiodarone (150 mg) to 100 mL D5W or normal saline (concentration = 1.5 mg/mL). Infuse 100 mL over 10 minutes.

Followed by Slow:

360 mg over the NEXT 6 hours (1 mg/min).Add 18 mL of amiodarone (900 mg) to 500 mL D5W or normal saline (concentration = 1.8 mg/mL)

Maintenance infusion

540 mg over the REMAINING 18 hours (0.5 mg/min). Decrease the rate of the slow loading infusion to 0.5 mg/min.

After the first 24 hours, continue the maintenance infusion rate of 0.5 mg/min (720 mg per 24 hours) utilizing a concentration of 1 to 6 mg/mL (Use a central venous catheter for amiodarone concentrations greater than 2 mg/mL). The rate of the maintenance infusion may be increased to achieve effective arrhythmia suppression.

In the event of breakthrough episodes of VF or hemodynamically unstable VT, use 150 mg supplemental infusions of amiodarone (mixed in 100 mL of D5W or normal saline and infused over 10 minutes to minimize the potential for hypotension).

The first 24-hour dose may be individualized for each patient; however, in controlled clinical trials, mean daily doses above 2100 mg were associated with an increased risk of hypotension. Do not exceed an initial infusion rate of 30 mg/min.

Based on the experience from clinical studies of intravenous amiodarone, a maintenance infusion of up to 0.5 mg/min can be continued for 2 to 3 weeks regardless of the patient's age, renal function, or left ventricular function. There has been limited experience in patients receiving intravenous amiodarone for longer than 3 weeks.

The surface properties of solutions containing injectable amiodarone are altered such that the drop size may be reduced. This reduction may lead to underdosage of the patient by up to 30% if drop counter infusion sets are used. Amiodarone must be delivered by a volumetric infusion pump.

Administer amiodarone, whenever possible, through a central venous catheter dedicated to that purpose. Use an in-line filter during administration.

Intravenous amiodarone loading infusions at much higher concentrations and rates of infusion much faster than recommended have resulted in hepatocellular necrosis and acute renal failure, leading to death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Intravenous amiodarone concentrations greater than 3 mg/mL have been associated with a high incidence of peripheral vein phlebitis; however, concentrations of 2.5 mg/mL or less appear to be less irritating. Therefore, for infusions longer than 1 hour, do not exceed amiodarone concentrations of 2 mg/mL, unless a central venous catheter is used [see Adverse Reactions (6.2)].

Amiodarone may be diluted in D5W or saline and administered in polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polyolefin, or glass containers. Do not use evacuated glass containers for admixing, as incompatibility with a buffer in the container may cause precipitation. Amiodarone adsorbs to polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubing, but all of the clinical experience has been with PVC tubing and the concentrations and rates of infusion provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2) reflect dosing in these studies.

Amiodarone has been found to leach out plasticizers, including DEHP [di-(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate] from intravenous tubing (including PVC tubing). The degree of leaching increases when infusing amiodarone at higher concentrations and lower flow rates than provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2). Polysorbate 80, a component of amiodarone injection, is also known to leach DEHP from PVC [see Description (11)].

Amiodarone does not need to be protected from light during administration.

NOTE: Inspect parenteral drug products for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Table 2: Amiodarone HCl Solution Stability
Solution

Concentration (mg/mL)

Container

Comments

5% Dextrose in Water (D5W)

1 – 6

PVC

Physically compatible, with amiodarone loss <10% at 2 hours at room temperature.

5% Dextrose in Water (D5W)

1 – 6

Polyolefin, Glass

Physically compatible, with no amiodarone loss at 24 hours at room temperature.

Admixture Incompatibility

Amiodarone in D5W is incompatible with the drugs shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Y-Site Injection Incompatibility
Drug

Vehicle

Amiodarone Concentration

Comments

Aminophylline

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Cefamandole Nafate

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Cefazolin Sodium

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Mezlocillin Sodium

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Heparin Sodium

D5W

--

Precipitate

Sodium Bicarbonate

D5W

3 mg/mL

Precipitate

Intravenous to Oral Transition

Patients whose arrhythmias have been suppressed by amiodarone may be switched to oral amiodarone. The optimal dose for changing from intravenous to oral administration of amiodarone will depend on the dose of amiodarone already administered, as well as the bioavailability of oral amiodarone. When changing to oral amiodarone therapy, clinical monitoring is recommended, particularly for elderly patients. See package insert for oral amiodarone.

Since grapefruit juice is known to inhibit CYP3A-mediated metabolism of oral amiodarone in the intestinal mucosa, resulting in increased plasma levels of amiodarone, do not drink grapefruit juice during treatment with oral amiodarone [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Table 4 provides suggested doses of oral amiodarone to be initiated after varying durations of amiodarone administration. These recommendations are made on the basis of a similar total body amount of amiodarone delivered by the intravenous and oral routes, based on 50% bioavailability of oral amiodarone.
Table 4: Recommendations For Oral Dosage After Intravenous Infusion

Duration of Amiodarone Infusion#

Initial Daily Dose of Oral Amiodarone

<1 week

800 - 1600 mg

1-3 weeks

600 - 800 mg

>3 weeks*

400 mg

# Assuming a 720 mg/day infusion (0.5 mg/min).

* Intravenous amiodarone is not intended for maintenance treatment.
Erythrocin Lactobionate...

Erythrocin Lactobionate

For the treatment of severe infections in adults and pediatric patients, the recommended intravenous dose of erythromycin lactobionate is 15 to 20 mg/kg/day. Higher doses, up to 4 g/day, may be given for severe infections.

Administration of doses of ≥4 g/day may increase the risk for the development of erythromycin-induced hearing loss in elderly patients, particularly those with reduced renal or hepatic function. Erythrocin Lactobionate-IV (erythromycin lactobionate for injection, USP) must be administered by continuous or intermittent intravenous infusion only. Due to the irritative properties of erythromycin, IV push is an unacceptable route of administration.

Continuous infusion of erythromycin lactobionate is preferable due to the slower infusion rate and lower concentration of erythromycin; however, intermittent infusion at six hour intervals is also effective. Intravenous erythromycin should be replaced by oral erythromycin as soon as possible.

For slow continuous infusion: The final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate is prepared to give a concentration of 1 g per liter (1 mg/mL).

For intermittent infusion: Administer one-fourth the total daily dose of erythromycin lactobionate by intravenous infusion in 20 to 60 minutes at intervals not greater than every six hours. The final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate is prepared to give a concentration of 1 to 5 mg/mL. No less than 100 mL of IV diluent should be used. Infusion should be sufficiently slow to minimize pain along the vein.

For treatment of acute pelvic inflammatory disease caused by N. Gonorrhoeae, in female patients hypersensitive to penicillins, administer 500 mg erythromycin lactobionate every six hours for three days, followed by oral administration of 250 mg erythromycin stearate or base every six hours for seven days.

For treatment of Legionnaires’ Disease: Although optimal doses have not been established, doses utilized in reported clinical data were 1 to 4 grams daily in divided doses.

Administration of doses of ≥ 4 g/day may increase the risk for the development of erythromycin-induced hearing loss in elderly patients, particularly those with reduced renal or hepatic function.

In the treatment of Group A beta-hemolytic streptococcal infections of the upper respiratory tract (e.g., tonsillitis or pharyngitis), the therapeutic dosage of erythromycin should be administered for ten days. The American Heart Association suggests a dosage of 250 mg of erythromycin orally, twice a day in long-term prophylaxis of streptococcal upper respiratory tract infections for the prevention of recurring attacks of rheumatic fever in patients allergic to penicillin and sulfonamides.4

In prophylaxis against bacterial endocarditis (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE) the oral regimen for penicillin allergic patients is erythromycin 1 gram, 1 hour before the procedure followed by 500 mg six hours later.5

Preparation of Solution:
PREPARE THE INITIAL SOLUTION OF ERYTHROCINTM LACTOBIONATE-IV BY ADDING 10 ML OF STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION, USP, TO THE 500 MG VIAL. Use only Sterile Water for Injection, USP, as other diluents may cause precipitation during reconstitution. Do not use diluents containing preservatives or inorganic salts. After reconstitution, each mL contains 50 mg of erythromycin activity. The initial solution is stable at refrigerator temperature for two weeks, or for 24 hours at room temperature. ADD THE INITIAL DILUTION TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING DILUENTS BEFORE ADMINISTRATION to give a concentration of 1 g of erythromycin activity per liter (1 mg/mL) for continuous infusion or 1 to 5 mg/mL for intermittent infusion: 0.9% SODIUM CHLORIDE INJECTION, USP; LACTATED RINGER’S INJECTION, USP; NORMOSOLTM-R. THE FOLLOWING SOLUTIONS MAY ALSO BE USED PROVIDING THEY ARE FIRST BUFFERED WITH NEUTTM (4% SODIUM BICARBONATE, HOSPIRA) by adding 1 mL of NeutTM per 100 mL of solution: 5% DEXTROSE INJECTION, USP 5% DEXTROSE AND LACTATED RINGER’S INJECTION 5% DEXTROSE AND 0.9% SODIUM CHLORIDE INJECTION, USP
NeutTM (4% sodium bicarbonate, Hospira) must be added to these solutions so that their pH is in the optimum range for erythromycin lactobionate stability. Acidic solutions of erythromycin lactobionate are unstable and lose their potency rapidly. A pH of at least 5.5 is desirable for the final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate.

No drug or chemical agent should be added to an erythromycin lactobionate-IV fluid admixture unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been determined.

Stability

The final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate should be completely administered within 8 hours, since it is not suitable for storage.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Tartar Control Plus

Tartar Control Plus

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Droperidol

Droperidol

Dosage should be individualized. Some of the factors to be considered in determining dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, the type of anesthesia to be used, and the surgical procedure involved.

Vital signs and ECG should be monitored routinely.

Adult Dosage: The maximum recommended initial dose of droperidol is 2.5 mg I.M. or slow I.V. Additional 1.25 mg doses of droperidol may be administered to achieve the desired effect. However, additional doses should be administered with caution, and only if the potential benefit outweighs the potential risk.

Pediatric Dosage: For children two to 12 years of age, the maximum recommended initial dose is 0.1 mg/kg, taking into account the patient’s age and other clinical factors. However, additional doses should be administered with caution, and only if the potential benefit outweighs the potential risk.

See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS for use of droperidol with other CNS depressants and in patients with altered response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. If such abnormalities are observed, the drug should not be administered.
Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone in the ADD-Vantage® Vial is intended for intravenous infusion only, after dilution with appropriate volume of ADD-Vantage® diluent solution.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration because a precipitate can form. Precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium can also occur when ceftriaxone is mixed with calcium-containing solutions in the same IV administration line.

Ceftriaxone must not be administered simultaneously with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition via a Y-site. However, in patients other than neonates, ceftriaxone and calcium-containing solutions may be administered sequentially of one another if the infusion lines are thoroughly flushed between infusions with a compatible fluid (seeWARNINGS).

There have been no reports of an interaction between ceftriaxone and oral calcium-containing products or interaction between intramuscular ceftriaxone and calcium-containing products (IV or oral).

Neonates

Hyperbilirubinemic neonates, especially prematures, should not be treated with ceftriaxone for injection. Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in premature neonates (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in neonates (≤ 28 days) if they require (or are expected to require) treatment with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition because of the risk of precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Intravenous doses should be given over 60 minutes in neonates to reduce the risk of bilirubin encephalopathy.

Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of skin and skin structure infections, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day). The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

For the treatment of acute bacterial otitis media, a single intramuscular dose of 50 mg/kg (not to exceed 1 gram) is recommended (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE). (The above is for informational purposes only. Ceftriaxone in ADD-Vantage® vials is not intended for intramuscular use.)

For the treatment of serious miscellaneous infections other than meningitis, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg, given in divided doses every 12 hours. The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

In the treatment of meningitis, it is recommended that the initial therapeutic dose be 100 mg/kg (not to exceed 4 grams). Thereafter, a total daily dose of 100 mg/kg/day (not to exceed 4 grams daily) is recommended. The daily dose may be administered once a day (or in equally divided doses every 12 hours). The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

Adults

The usual adult daily dose is 1 to 2 grams given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day) depending on the type and severity of infection. The total daily dose should not exceed 4 grams.

If Chlamydia trachomatis is a suspected pathogen, appropriate antichlamydial coverage should be added, because ceftriaxone sodium has no activity against this organism.

For the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal infections, a single intramuscular dose of 250 mg is recommended. (The above is for informational purposes only. Ceftriaxone in ADD-Vantage® vials is not intended for intramuscular use.)

For preoperative use (surgical prophylaxis), a single dose of 1 gram administered intravenously ½ to 2 hours before surgery is recommended.

Generally, ceftriaxone therapy should be continued for at least 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared. The usual duration of therapy is 4 to 14 days; in complicated infections, longer therapy may be required.

When treating infections caused by Streptococcus pyogenes, therapy should be continued for at least 10 days.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impairment of renal or hepatic function (see PRECAUTIONS).

The dosages recommended for adults require no modification in elderly patients, up to 2 g per day, provided there is no severe renal and hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS).

Directions for Use

Intravenous Administration

Ceftriaxone should be administered intravenously by infusion over a period of 30 minutes, except in neonates where administration over 60 minutes is recommended to reduce the risk of bilirubin encephalopathy.

ADD-Vantage® Vials for IV Use Only contain ceftriaxone sodium equivalent to 1 g or 2 g ceftriaxone to be used with 50 mL or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, in the ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container. (See Instructions For Use of the ADD-Vantage® System at the end of this package insert.)

Compatibility and Stability

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone for injection vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration. Particulate formation can result.

Ceftriaxone has been shown to be compatible with Flagyl® IV (metronidazole hydrochloride). The concentration should not exceed 5 to 7.5 mg/mL metronidazole hydrochloride with ceftriaxone 10 mg/mL as an admixture. The admixture is stable for 24 hours at room temperature only in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose in water (D5W). No compatibility studies have been conducted with the Flagyl® IV RTU® (metronidazole) formulation or using other diluents. Metronidazole at concentrations greater than 8 mg/mL will precipitate. Do not refrigerate the admixture as precipitation will occur.

Vancomycin, amsacrine, aminoglycosides, and fluconazole are incompatible with ceftriaxone in admixtures. When any of these drugs are to be administered concomitantly with ceftriaxone by intermittent intravenous infusion, it is recommended that they be given sequentially, with thorough flushing of the intravenous lines (with one of the compatible fluids) between the administrations.

Ceftriaxone for injection solutions should not be physically mixed with or piggybacked into solutions containing other antimicrobial drugs or into diluent solutions other than those listed above, due to possible incompatibility (see WARNINGS).

Ceftriaxone sodium sterile powder should be stored at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature] and protected from light. After reconstitution, protection from normal light is not necessary. The color of solutions ranges from light yellow to amber, depending on the length of storage, concentration and diluent used.

After the indicated stability time periods, unused portions of solutions should be discarded.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter before administration. ADD-Vantage® Vials – Ceftriaxone for Injection Units: See Instructions For Use of the ADD-Vantage® System at the end of this package insert.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Adults:

Single Direct Intravenous Injection (bolus): ONLY THE 5 mL, 50 MG or 100 MG DOSAGE SIZES should be used for direct intravenous injection. The usual dose is 50 to 100 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.70 to 1.4 mg/kg; 0.32 to 0.63 mg/lb) administered intravenously under ECG monitoring. This dose may be administered at the rate of approximately 25 to 50 mg/min (0.35 to 0.70 mg/kg/min; 0.16 to 0.32 mg/lb/min). Sufficient time should be allowed to enable a slow circulation to carry the drug to the site of action. If the initial injection of 50 to 100 mg does not produce a desired response, a second dose may be injected after five minutes. NO MORE THAN 200 TO 300 MG OF LIDOCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED DURING A ONE HOUR PERIOD.

Continuous Intravenous Infusion: Following bolus administration, intravenous infusions of lidocaine hydrochloride may be initiated at the rate of 1 to 4 mg/min of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.014 to 0.057 mg/kg/min; 0.006 to 0.026 mg/lb/min). The rate of intravenous infusions should be reassessed as soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stable or at the earliest signs of toxicity. It should rarely be necessary to continue intravenous infusions of lidocaine for prolonged periods.

When administering lidocaine hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use a precision volume control I.V. set.

Pediatric: Controlled clinical studies in the pediatric population to establish dosing schedules have not been conducted. The American Heart Association’s Standards and Guidelines recommends a bolus dose of 1 mg/kg, and an infusion rate of between 20-50 mcg/kg/min for prolonged therapy. When drug clearance is reduced, as in patients with shock, congestive heart failure or cardiac arrest, the infusion rate should not exceed 20 mcg/kg/min.

NOTE: Regarding Prolonged Infusions: There are data that indicate the half-life may be 3 hours or longer following infusions of greater than 24 hours in duration. Do not use if solution is discolored or cloudy.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Metoclopramide

Metoclopramide

For the Relief of Symptoms Associated with Diabetic Gastroparesis (Diabetic Gastric Stasis)

If only the earliest manifestations of diabetic gastric stasis are present, oral administration of metoclopramide may be initiated. However, if severe symptoms are present, therapy should begin with metoclopramide injection (IM or IV). Doses of 10 mg may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1 to 2 minute period.

Administration of Metoclopramide Injection, USP up to 10 days may be required before symptoms subside, at which time oral administration of metoclopramide may be instituted. The physician should make a thorough assessment of the risks and benefits prior to prescribing further metoclopramide treatment.

For the Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

Intravenous infusions should be made slowly over a period of not less than 15 minutes, 30 minutes before beginning cancer chemotherapy and repeated every 2 hours for two doses, then every 3 hours for three doses.

The initial two doses should be 2 mg/kg if highly emetogenic drugs such as cisplatin or dacarbazine are used alone or in combination. For less emetogenic regimens, 1 mg/kg per dose may be adequate.

For doses in excess of 10 mg, Metoclopramide Injection, USP should be diluted in 50 mL of a parenteral solution.

The preferred parenteral solution is Sodium Chloride Injection (normal saline), which when combined with Metoclopramide Injection, USP, can be stored frozen for up to 4 weeks. Metoclopramide Injection, USP is degraded when admixed and frozen with Dextrose-5% in Water. Metoclopramide Injection, USP diluted in Sodium Chloride Injection, Dextrose-5% in Water, Dextrose-5% in 0.45% Sodium Chloride, Ringer’s Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection may be stored up to 48 hours (without freezing) after preparation if protected from light. All dilutions may be stored unprotected from light under normal light conditions up to 24 hours after preparation.

If acute dystonic reactions should occur, inject 50 mg Benadryl® (diphenhydramine hydrochloride) intramuscularly, and the symptoms usually will subside.

For the Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

Metoclopramide Injection, USP should be given intramuscularly near the end of surgery. The usual adult dose is 10 mg; however, doses of 20 mg may be used.

To Facilitate Small Bowel Intubation

If the tube has not passed the pylorus with conventional maneuvers in 10 minutes, a single dose (undiluted) may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1 to 2 minute period.

The recommended single dose is: Pediatric patients above 14 years of age and adults – 10 mg metoclopramide base. Pediatric patients (6 to 14 years of age) – 2.5 to 5 mg metoclopramide base; (under 6 years of age) – 0.1 mg/kg metoclopramide base.

To Aid in Radiological Examinations

In patients where delayed gastric emptying interferes with radiological examination of the stomach and/or small intestine, a single dose may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1 to 2 minute period.

For dosage, see intubation, above.

Use in Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

Since metoclopramide is excreted principally through the kidneys, in those patients whose creatinine clearance is below 40 mL/min, therapy should be initiated at approximately one-half the recommended dosage. Depending upon clinical efficacy and safety considerations, the dosage may be increased or decreased as appropriate.

See OVERDOSAGE section for information regarding dialysis.

Metoclopramide undergoes minimal hepatic metabolism, except for simple conjugation. Its safe use has been described in patients with advanced liver disease whose renal function was normal.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

ADMIXTURE COMPATIBILITIES

Metoclopramide Injection, USP is compatible for mixing and injection with the following dosage forms to the extent indicated below:

Physically and Chemically Compatible Up to 48 Hours

Cimetidine Hydrochloride (SK&F), Mannitol, USP (Hospira), Potassium Acetate, USP (Invenex), Potassium Phosphate, USP (Invenex).

Physically Compatible Up to 48 Hours

Ascorbic Acid, USP (Hospira), Benztropine Mesylate, USP (MS&D), Cytarabine, USP (Upjohn), Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate, USP (ESI, MS&D), Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride, USP (Parke-Davis), Doxorubicin Hydrochloride, USP (Adria), Heparin Sodium, USP (ESI), Hydrocortisone Sodium Phosphate (MS&D), Lidocaine Hydrochloride, USP (ESI), Multi-Vitamin Infusion (must be refrigerated-USV), Vitamin B Complex with Ascorbic Acid (Roche).

Physically Compatible Up to 24 Hours (Do not use if precipitation occurs)

Clindamycin Phosphate, USP (Upjohn), Cyclophosphamide, USP (Mead-Johnson), Insulin, USP (Lilly).

Conditionally Compatible (Use within one hour after mixing or may be infused directly into the same running IV line)

Ampicillin Sodium, USP (Bristol), Cisplatin (Bristol), Erythromycin Lactobionate, USP (Hospira), Methotrexate Sodium, USP (Lederle), Penicillin G Potassium, USP (Squibb), Tetracycline Hydrochloride, USP (Lederle).

Incompatible (Do Not Mix)

Cephalothin Sodium, USP (Lilly), Chloramphenicol Sodium, USP (Parke-Davis), Sodium Bicarbonate, USP (Hospira).
Fosphenytoin Sodium

Fosphenytoin Sodium

The dose, concentration in dosing solutions, and infusion rate of IV Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is expressed as phenytoin sodium equivalents (PE) to avoid the need to perform molecular weight-based adjustments when converting between fosphenytoin and phenytoin sodium doses. Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP should always be prescribed and dispensed in phenytoin sodium equivalent units (PE). Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP has important differences in administration from those for parenteral phenytoin sodium (see below).

Products with particulate matter or discoloration should not be used. Prior to IV infusion, dilute Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP in 5% dextrose or 0.9% saline solution for injection to a concentration ranging from 1.5 to 25 mg PE/mL.

Status Epilepticus
The loading dose of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is 15 to 20 mg PE/kg administered at 100 to 150 mg PE/min. Because of the risk of hypotension, fosphenytoin should be administered no faster than 150 mg PE/min. Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram, blood pressure, and respiratory function is essential and the patient should be observed throughout the period where maximal serum phenytoin concentrations occur, approximately 10 to 20 minutes after the end of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP infusions. Because the full antiepileptic effect of phenytoin, whether given as Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP or parenteral phenytoin, is not immediate, other measures, including concomitant administration of an IV benzodiazepine, will usually be necessary for the control of status epilepticus. The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP, or phenytoin either orally or parenterally.
If administration of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants and other appropriate measures should be considered.

IM Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because therapeutic phenytoin concentrations may not be reached as quickly as with IV administration. If IV access is impossible, loading doses of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP have been given by the IM route for other indications.

Nonemergent Loading and Maintenance Dosing

The loading dose of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is 10 - 20 mg PE/kg given IV or IM. The rate of administration for IV Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP should be no greater than 150 mg PE/min. Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram, blood pressure, and respiratory function is essential and the patient should be observed throughout the period where maximal serum phenytoin concentrations occur, approximately 10 to 20 minutes after the end of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP infusions.

The initial daily maintenance dose of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is 4 - 6 mg PE/kg/day.

IM or IV Substitution For Oral Phenytoin Therapy

Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP can be substituted for oral phenytoin sodium therapy at the same total daily dose.

Dilantin capsules are approximately 90% bioavailable by the oral route. Phenytoin, supplied as Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP, is 100% bioavailable by both the IM and IV routes. For this reason, plasma phenytoin concentrations may increase modestly when IM or IV Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is substituted for oral phenytoin sodium therapy.

The rate of administration for IV Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP should be no greater than 150 mg PE/min.

In controlled trials, IM Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP was administered as a single daily dose utilizing either 1 or 2 injection sites. Some patients may require more frequent dosing.

Dosing in Special Populations

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease: Due to an increased fraction of unbound phenytoin in patients with renal or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, the interpretation of total phenytoin plasma concentrations should be made with caution (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Special Populations). Unbound phenytoin concentrations may be more useful in these patient populations. After IV Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP administration to patients with renal and/or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, fosphenytoin clearance to phenytoin may be increased without a similar increase in phenytoin clearance. This has the potential to increase the frequency and severity of adverse events (see PRECAUTIONS).

Elderly Patients: Age does not have a significant impact on the pharmacokinetics of fosphenytoin following Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP administration. Phenytoin clearance is decreased slightly in elderly patients and lower or less frequent dosing may be required.

Pediatric: The safety of Fosphenytoin Sodium Injection, USP in pediatric patients has not been established.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride And Dextrose

A 0.4% or 0.8% solution of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP is not suitable for bolus administration and is to be used only for infusion following appropriate bolus administration.

IN THE ADULT PATIENT, DOSAGE SHOULD BE LIMITED TO NO MORE THAN 200 TO 300 MG OF LIDOCAINE ADMINISTERED DURING A ONE-HOUR PERIOD.

Patients with reduced hepatic function or diminished hepatic blood flow (as in heart failure and after cardiac surgery), or those over 70 years of age, should receive half the usual loading dose and also should be given lower maintenance levels of intravenous lidocaine. Patients over 65 years may benefit from dosing based upon body weight.

For continuous intravenous infusion, in patients whose arrhythmia tends to recur following a temporary response to a single or once repeated direct injection and who are incapable of receiving oral antiarrhythmic therapy, lidocaine hydrochloride may be infused continuously in a concentration of 0.4% (4 mg/mL) or 0.8% (8 mg/mL) at a rate of 1 to 4 mg (0.25 to 1 mL of 0.4% or 0.125 to 0.5 mL of 0.8%) per minute (20 to 50 micrograms/kg/minute) in the average 70 kg adult. I.V. infusion of the drug must be administered under constant ECG monitoring to avoid potential overdosage and toxicity. I.V. infusion should be terminated as soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stable or at the earliest signs of toxicity. As soon as possible, and when indicated, patients should be changed to an oral antiarrhythmic agent for maintenance therapy.

Prolonged (24 hour) infusion of the drug also appears to result in a longer half-life and reduced rate of clearance (even in patients without cardiac or hepatic failure) that may result in toxic accumulation of lidocaine in the plasma. After the first 24 hours, the rate of infusion of lidocaine should be reduced by about one-half to compensate for the drop in the rate of elimination of the drug.

When administering lidocaine hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use a precision volume control I.V. set.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

2.1 Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Initial and Repeat Courses of Emetogenic Chemotherapy

Ondansetron Injection, USP in prefilled syringes should be diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection before administration.

Adults

The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15‑mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. The first dose is infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: DILUTE BEFORE USE FOR PREVENTION OF CHEMOTHERAPY-INDUCED NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

Pediatrics

For pediatric patients 6 months through 18 years of age, the intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2 and 12.3)]. The first dose is to be administered 30 minutes before the start of moderately to highly emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron. The drug should be infused intravenously over 15 minutes.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: THIS 4 MG/2 ML SINGLE DOSE PREFILLED SYRINGE IS NOT FOR USE IN PEDIATRIC PATIENTS LESS THAN 40 KG. DILUTE BEFORE USE FOR PREVENTION OF CHEMOTHERAPY-INDUCED NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

2.2 Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

Ondansetron Injection, USP should not be mixed with solutions for which physical and chemical compatibility have not been established. In particular, this applies to alkaline solutions as a precipitate may form.

Adults

The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is 4 mg undiluted administered intravenously in not less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes, immediately before induction of anesthesia, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring within 2 hours after surgery. Alternatively, 4 mg undiluted may be administered intramuscularly as a single injection for adults. While recommended as a fixed dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg, few patients above 80 kg have been studied. In patients who do not achieve adequate control of postoperative nausea and vomiting following a single, prophylactic, preinduction, intravenous dose of ondansetron 4 mg, administration of a second intravenous dose of 4 mg ondansetron postoperatively does not provide additional control of nausea and vomiting.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: REQUIRES NO DILUTION FOR ADMINISTRATION FOR POSTOPERATIVE NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

Pediatrics

For pediatric patients 1 month through 12 years of age, the dosage is a single 0.1-mg/kg dose for patients weighing 40 kg or less, or a single 4-mg dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg. The rate of administration should not be less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes immediately prior to or following anesthesia induction, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring shortly after surgery. Prevention of further nausea and vomiting was only studied in patients who had not received prophylactic Ondansetron.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: REQUIRES NO DILUTION FOR ADMINISTRATION FOR POSTOPERATIVE NAUSEA AND VOMITING. CAUTION: For pediatric patients less than 40 kg, a full 4 mg dose should not be given [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

2.3 Stability and Handling

After dilution, do not use beyond 24 hours. Although Ondansetron Injection, USP is chemically and physically stable when diluted as recommended, sterile precautions should be observed because diluents generally do not contain preservative.

Ondansetron Injection, USP is stable at room temperature under normal lighting conditions for 48 hours after dilution with the following intravenous fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, and 3% Sodium Chloride Injection.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration whenever solution and container permit.
CAUTION: THIS 4 MG/2 ML SINGLE DOSE PREFILLED SYRINGE IS NOT FOR USE IN PEDIATRIC PATIENTS LESS THAN 40 KG. DILUTION REQUIRED PRIOR TO ADMINISTRATION FOR CHEMOTHERAPY INDUCED NAUSEA AND VOMITING.
Directions for Prefilled Syringe

1.  To release plunger rod, grasp syringe and depress rod until it releases from the syringe.

2.  Attach plunger rod to the syringe barrel by inserting rod into the plunger end and turning clockwise.

3.  Remove luer tip cover.
Attach needle or blunt cannula if applicable.
4.   Expel air by pushing on the plunger rod.
Do not touch the syringe tip. Administer Drug.
NOTE: To prevent needlestick injuries, needles and blunt cannulas should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 or greater), a single maximal daily dose of 8 mg infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of the emetogenic chemotherapy is recommended. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron in these patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

2.1 Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Initial and Repeat Courses of Emetogenic Chemotherapy

Ondansetron Injection, USP in prefilled syringes should be diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection before administration.

Adults

The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. The first dose is infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: DILUTE BEFORE USE FOR PREVENTION OF CHEMOTHERAPY-INDUCED NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

Pediatrics

For pediatric patients 6 months through 18 years of age, the intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2 and 12.3)]. The first dose is to be administered 30 minutes before the start of moderately to highly emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron. The drug should be infused intravenously over 15 minutes.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: THIS 4 MG/2 ML SINGLE DOSE PREFILLED SYRINGE IS NOT FOR USE IN PEDIATRIC PATIENTS LESS THAN 40 KG. DILUTE BEFORE USE FOR PREVENTION OF CHEMOTHERAPY-INDUCED NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

2.2 Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

Ondansetron Injection, USP should not be mixed with solutions for which physical and chemical compatibility have not been established. In particular, this applies to alkaline solutions as a precipitate may form.

Adults

The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is 4 mg undiluted administered intravenously in not less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes, immediately before induction of anesthesia, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring within 2 hours after surgery. Alternatively, 4 mg undiluted may be administered intramuscularly as a single injection for adults. While recommended as a fixed dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg, few patients above 80 kg have been studied. In patients who do not achieve adequate control of postoperative nausea and vomiting following a single, prophylactic, preinduction, intravenous dose of ondansetron 4 mg, administration of a second intravenous dose of 4 mg ondansetron postoperatively does not provide additional control of nausea and vomiting.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: REQUIRES NO DILUTION FOR ADMINISTRATION FOR POSTOPERATIVE NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

Pediatrics

For pediatric patients 1 month through 12 years of age, the dosage is a single 0.1-mg/kg dose for patients weighing 40 kg or less, or a single 4-mg dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg. The rate of administration should not be less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes immediately prior to or following anesthesia induction, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring shortly after surgery. Prevention of further nausea and vomiting was only studied in patients who had not received prophylactic Ondansetron.

Ondansetron Prefilled Syringe: REQUIRES NO DILUTION FOR ADMINISTRATION FOR POSTOPERATIVE NAUSEA AND VOMITING. CAUTION: For pediatric patients less than 40 kg, a full 4 mg dose should not be given [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

2.3 Stability and Handling

After dilution, do not use beyond 24 hours. Although Ondansetron Injection, USP is chemically and physically stable when diluted as recommended, sterile precautions should be observed because diluents generally do not contain preservative.

Ondansetron Injection, USP is stable at room temperature under normal lighting conditions for 48 hours after dilution with the following intravenous fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, and 3% Sodium Chloride Injection.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration whenever solution and container permit.

CAUTION: THIS 4 MG/2 ML SINGLE DOSE PREFILLED SYRINGE IS NOT FOR USE IN PEDIATRIC PATIENTS LESS THAN 40 KG. DILUTION REQUIRED PRIOR TO ADMINISTRATION FOR CHEMOTHERAPY INDUCED NAUSEA AND VOMITING.

To Use iSecure™ Syringe

1.   Remove green tamper evident band in a clockwise motion.

2.   Depress (Push) the plunger rod. This will loosen the plunger rod that is located on the outside of the syringe barrel so that the plunger rod can be removed. This will also engage syringe.

Remove the plunger rod.

Insert the plunger rod into the back end of the syringe barrel and turn clockwise 2 to 3 times to attach.

BEFORE REMOVING LUER TIP CAP, hold the syringe with tip cap upright. Press syringe plunger until plunger moves slightly. This motion breaks the seal between plunger and syringe barrel.

3.   Twist the luer tip cap clockwise or counterclockwise to break the tamper evident label. Remove luer tip cap and discard it.

              Expel the air by pushing on the plunger rod.

              Attach needle or blunt cannula if required.

NOTE: To prevent needlestick injuries, needles and blunt cannulas should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 or greater), a single maximal daily dose of 8 mg infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of the emetogenic chemotherapy is recommended. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron in these patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Ondansetron Hydrochlori...

Ondansetron Hydrochloride

2.1 Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Initial and Repeat Courses of Emetogenic Chemotherapy

Ondansetron Injection, USP should be diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection before administration.

Adults The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. The first dose is infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron.

Pediatrics For pediatric patients 6 months through 18 years of age, the intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2 and 12.3)]. The first dose is to be administered 30 minutes before the start of moderately to highly emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron. The drug should be infused intravenously over 15 minutes.

2.2 Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

Ondansetron Injection, USP should not be mixed with solutions for which physical and chemical compatibility have not been established. In particular, this applies to alkaline solutions as a precipitate may form.

Adults The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is 4 mg undiluted administered intravenously in not less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes, immediately before induction of anesthesia, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring within 2 hours after surgery. Alternatively, 4 mg undiluted may be administered intramuscularly as a single injection for adults. While recommended as a fixed dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg, few patients above 80 kg have been studied. In patients who do not achieve adequate control of postoperative nausea and vomiting following a single, prophylactic, preinduction, intravenous dose of ondansetron 4 mg, administration of a second intravenous dose of 4 mg ondansetron postoperatively does not provide additional control of nausea and vomiting.

Pediatrics For pediatric patients 1 month through 12 years of age, the dosage is a single 0.1-mg/kg dose for patients weighing 40 kg or less, or a single 4-mg dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg. The rate of administration should not be less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes immediately prior to or following anesthesia induction, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring shortly after surgery. Prevention of further nausea and vomiting was only studied in patients who had not received prophylactic Ondansetron.

2.3 Stability and Handling

After dilution, do not use beyond 24 hours. Although Ondansetron Injection, USP is chemically and physically stable when diluted as recommended, sterile precautions should be observed because diluents generally do not contain preservative.

Ondansetron Injection, USP is stable at room temperature under normal lighting conditions for 48 hours after dilution with the following intravenous fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, and 3% Sodium Chloride Injection.

Note Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration whenever solution and container permit.

Precaution Occasionally, ondansetron precipitates at the stopper/vial interface in vials stored upright. Potency and safety are not affected. If a precipitate is observed, resolubilize by shaking the vial vigorously.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 or greater), a single maximal daily dose of 8 mg infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of the emetogenic chemotherapy is recommended. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron in these patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1 Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Initial and Repeat Courses of Emetogenic Chemotherapy

Ondansetron Injection, USP should be diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection before administration.

Adults The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. The first dose is infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron.

Pediatrics For pediatric patients 6 months through 18 years of age, the intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2 and 12.3)]. The first dose is to be administered 30 minutes before the start of moderately to highly emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron. The drug should be infused intravenously over 15 minutes.

2.2 Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

Ondansetron Injection, USP should not be mixed with solutions for which physical and chemical compatibility have not been established. In particular, this applies to alkaline solutions as a precipitate may form.

Adults The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron is 4 mg undiluted administered intravenously in not less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes, immediately before induction of anesthesia, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring within 2 hours after surgery. Alternatively, 4 mg undiluted may be administered intramuscularly as a single injection for adults. While recommended as a fixed dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg, few patients above 80 kg have been studied. In patients who do not achieve adequate control of postoperative nausea and vomiting following a single, prophylactic, preinduction, intravenous dose of ondansetron 4 mg, administration of a second intravenous dose of 4 mg ondansetron postoperatively does not provide additional control of nausea and vomiting.

Pediatrics For pediatric patients 1 month through 12 years of age, the dosage is a single 0.1-mg/kg dose for patients weighing 40 kg or less, or a single 4-mg dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg. The rate of administration should not be less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes immediately prior to or following anesthesia induction, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring shortly after surgery. Prevention of further nausea and vomiting was only studied in patients who had not received prophylactic Ondansetron.

2.3 Stability and Handling

After dilution, do not use beyond 24 hours. Although Ondansetron Injection, USP is chemically and physically stable when diluted as recommended, sterile precautions should be observed because diluents generally do not contain preservative.

Ondansetron Injection, USP is stable at room temperature under normal lighting conditions for 48 hours after dilution with the following intravenous fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, and 3% Sodium Chloride Injection.

Note Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration whenever solution and container permit.

Precaution Occasionally, ondansetron precipitates at the stopper/vial interface in vials stored upright. Potency and safety are not affected. If a precipitate is observed, resolubilize by shaking the vial vigorously.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 or greater), a single maximal daily dose of 8 mg infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of the emetogenic chemotherapy is recommended. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron in these patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Isuprel

Isuprel

Start ISUPREL injection at the lowest recommended dose and increase the rate of administration gradually if necessary while carefully monitoring the patient. The usual route of administration is by intravenous infusion or bolus intravenous injection. In dire emergencies, the drug may be administered by intracardiac injection. If time is not of the utmost importance, initial therapy by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection is preferred.
Recommended dosage for adults with heart block, Adams-Stokes attacks, and cardiac arrest:
Route ofAdministration

Preparation of Dilution

Initial Dose

SubsequentDose Range*

Bolus intravenous injection

Dilute 1 mL (0.2 mg) in 9 mL of Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.02 mg to 0.06 mg (1 mL to 3 mL of diluted solution)

0.01 mg to 0.2 mg (0.5 mL to 10 mL of diluted solution)

Intravenous infusion

Dilute 10 mL (2 mg) in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

5 mcg/min. (1.25 mL of diluted solution per minute)

Intramuscular

Use Solution undiluted

0.2 mg (1 mL)

0.02 mg to 1 mg (0.1 mL to 5 mL)

Subcutaneous

Use Solution undiluted

0.2 mg (1 mL)

0.15 mg to 0.2 mg (0.75 mL to 1 mL)

Intracardiac

Use Solution undiluted

0.02 mg (0.1 mL)

*      Subsequent dosage and method of administration depend on the ventricular rate and the rapidity with which the cardiac pacemaker can take over when the drug is gradually withdrawn.

There are no well-controlled studies in children to establish appropriate dosing; however, the American Heart Association recommends an initial infusion rate of 0.1 mcg/kg/min, with the usual range being 0.1 mcg/kg/min to 1 mcg/kg/min.
Recommended dosage for adults with shock and hypoperfusion states:
Route of Administration

Preparation of Dilution†

Infusion Rate††

Intravenous infusion

Dilute 5 mL (1 mg) in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.5 mcg to 5 mcg per minute (0.25 mL to 2.5 mL of diluted solution)

†          Concentrations up to 10 times greater have been used when limitation of volume is essential.

††        Rates over 30 mcg per minute have been used in advanced stages of shock. The rate of infusion should be adjusted on the basis of heart rate, central venous pressure, systemic blood pressure, and urine flow. If the heart rate exceeds 110 beats per minute, it may be advisable to decrease or temporarily discontinue the infusion.
Recommended dosage for adults with bronchospasm occurring during anesthesia:
Route ofAdministration

Preparation of Dilution

Initial Dose

SubsequentDose

Bolus intravenous injection

Dilute 1 mL (0.2 mg) in 9 mL of Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.01 mg to 0.02 mg (0.5 mL to 1 mL of diluted solution)

The initial dose may be repeated when necessary

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Such solution should not be used.
Sodium Chloride Irrigan...

Sodium Chloride Irrigant

The dose is dependent upon the capacity or surface area of the structure to be irrigated and the nature of the procedure. When used as a diluent or vehicle for other drugs, the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. See PRECAUTIONS.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is administered intravenously.

For IV administration, the dose can be given by slow intravenous injection over at least 10-15 minutes or can also be delivered, in greater dilutions with 50-100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15-30 minutes.

The recommended adult dosage of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older

The recommended daily dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection. (See CLINICAL STUDIES section).

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:
TABLE 5. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours) Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage
≥ 30

1

1.5-3 g q 6h-q 8h

15-29

5

1.5-3 g q 12h

5-14

9

1.5-3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males

weight (kg) x (140 - age)

72 x serum creatinine

Females

0.85 x above value

COMPATIBILITY, RECONSTITUTION AND STABILITY

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder is to be stored at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.] prior to reconstitution.

When concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated, Ampicillin and Sulbactam and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted and administered separately, due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by any of the aminopenicillins.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

1.5 g ADD-Vantage® Vials: Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® system is intended as a single dose for intravenous administration after dilution with the ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container containing 50 mL, 100 mL or 250 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP.

3 g ADD-Vantage® Vials: Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® system is intended as a single dose for intravenous administration after dilution with the ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container containing 100 mL or 250 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP.

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® system is to be reconstituted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP only. See INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF THE ADD-Vantage® VIAL section. Reconstitution of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, at the specified concentration, with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP provides stable solutions for the time period indicated below:
TABLE 6. Diluent Maximum Concentration (mg/mL) ampicillin and sulbactam Use Periods
0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

30 (20/10)

8 hrs at 25°C

In 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

The final diluted solution of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection should be completely administered within 8 hours in order to assure proper potency.

Animal Pharmacology

While reversible glycogenosis was observed in laboratory animals, this phenomenon was dose- and time-dependent and is not expected to develop at the therapeutic doses and corresponding plasma levels attained during the relatively short periods of combined ampicillin/sulbactam therapy in man.
Aminosyn

Aminosyn

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

Peripheral Vein Nutritional Maintenance

Aminosyn 3.5% M*, Sulfite-Free, (a crystalline amino acid solution* with maintenance electrolytes) together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% is suitable for administration by peripheral vein. This solution is not intended for central vein infusion since it does not contain adequate amounts of amino acids or electrolytes appropriate for administration with high concentrations of dextrose.

For peripheral intravenous infusion, 1 to 1.5 g/kg/day of total amino acids will reduce protein catabolism. Infusion or ingestion of carbohydrate or lipid will not reduce the nitrogen sparing effect of intravenous amino acid infusions at this dose.

As with all intravenous fluid therapy, the primary aim is to provide sufficient water to compensate for insensible, urinary and other (nasogastric suction, fistula drainage, diarrhea) fluid losses. Total fluid requirements, as well as electrolyte and acid-base needs, should be estimated and appropriately administered.

For an amino acid solution of specified total concentration, the volume required to meet amino acid requirements per 24 hours can be calculated. After making an estimate of the total daily fluid (water) requirement, the balance of fluid needed beyond the volume of amino acid solution required can be provided either as a noncarbohydrate or a carbohydrate-containing electrolyte solution. I.V. lipid emulsion may be substituted for part of the carbohydrate-containing solution. Vitamins and additional electrolytes as needed for maintenance or to correct imbalances may be added to the amino acid solution.

A patient given the recommended maintenance fluid requirement of 35 mL/kg/day in the form of Aminosyn 3.5% M* will receive the average daily requirements for sodium, potassium, magnesium, phosphorus and chloride, along with an optimal amount of amino acids for preservation of nitrogen balance.

If desired, only one-half of an estimated daily amino acid requirement of 1.5 g/kg can be given on the first day. Amino acids together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% infused into a peripheral vein can be continued while oral nutrition is impaired. However, if a patient is unable to take oral nourishment for a prolonged period of time, institution of total parenteral nutrition with exogenous calories should be considered.

Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

Adults

Admixtures of 3.5 to 4.25% amino acids with 5 to 10% glucose may be coinfused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day. Fat emulsion coadministration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (EFAD). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of EFAD in patients maintained on fat-free total parenteral nutrition.

Aminosyn 7% or 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered separately to provide part of the calories, if desired.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or in severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn 7% and 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES are designed to supply necessary electrolytes to patients in a stable metabolic state (about three-fourths of all patients on total parenteral nutrition). Other patients may require more or less of the electrolytes present, e.g., cardiac patients who should not receive sodium. Aminosyn 7% and 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES do not contain calcium, and this should be added as indicated.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphorus, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Calcium and phosphorus are added to the solution as indicated. The usual dose of phosphorus added to a liter of TPN solution (containing 25% dextrose) is 12 mM. This requirement is related to the carbohydrate calories delivered. Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphorus additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture. However, if one additive is added to the amino acid bottle, and the other to the bottle of concentrated dextrose, and if the contents of both bottles are swirled before they are combined, then the likelihood of physical incompatibility is reduced.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, the 7% or 8.5% solution is used in equal volume with 50% dextrose to provide an admixture containing 3.5% or 4.25% amino acids and 25% dextrose.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn WITH ELECTROLYTES, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure. Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

Pediatric

Aminosyn 7% or 8.5% WITH ELECTROLYTES may not be suitable for use in infants whose electrolyte requirements must be “custom tailored” based on serial blood chemistry determinations.

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used.

A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from bottles containing 250 or 500 mL. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Bupivacaine

Bupivacaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Bupivacaine Spinal (Bupivacaine in Dextrose Injection, USP) should be reduced for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.

For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Bupivacaine Spinal is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The extent and degree of spinal anesthesia depends upon several factors including dosage, specific gravity of the anesthetic solution, volume of solution used, force of injection, level of puncture, and position of the patient during and immediately after injection.

Seven and one-half mg (7.5 mg or 1.0 mL) Bupivacaine Spinal has generally proven satisfactory for spinal anesthesia for lower extremity and perineal procedures including TURP and vaginal hysterectomy. Twelve mg (12 mg or 1.6 mL) has been used for lower abdominal procedures such as abdominal hysterectomy, tubal ligation, and appendectomy. These doses are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult and may be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Because experience with Bupivacaine Spinal is limited in patients below the age of 18 years, dosage recommendations in this age group cannot be made.

Obstetrical Use: Doses as low as 6 mg bupivacaine hydrochloride have been used for vaginal delivery under spinal anesthesia. The dose range of 7.5 mg to 10.5 mg (1 mL to 1.4 mL) bupivacaine hydrochloride has been used for Cesarean section under spinal anesthesia.

In recommended doses, Bupivacaine Spinal produces complete motor and sensory block.

Unused portions of solutions should be discarded following initial use.

Bupivacaine Spinal should be inspected visually for discoloration and particulate matter prior to administration; solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.

Bupivacaine Spinal may be autoclaved once at 15 pounds pressure, 121°C (250°F) for 15 minutes. Do not administer any solution which is discolored or contains particulate matter.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Adults

Parenteral therapy with Furosemide Injection, USP should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

Edema

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 40 mg given as a single dose injected intramuscularly or intravenously. The intravenous dose should be given slowly (1 to 2 minutes). Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, another dose may be administered in the same manner 2 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 mg and given not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. This individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily.

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response. Close medical supervision is necessary.

When furosemide is given for prolonged periods, careful clinical observation and laboratory monitoring are particularly advisable. (See PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests.)

If the physician elects to use high dose parenteral therapy, add the Furosemide Injection to either Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP, or Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP after pH has been adjusted to above 5.5, and administer as a controlled intravenous infusion at a rate not greater than 4 mg/min. Furosemide Injection is a buffered alkaline solution with a pH of about 9 and drug may precipitate at pH values below 7. Care must be taken to ensure that the pH of the prepared infusion solution is in the weakly alkaline to neutral range. Acid solutions, including other parenteral medications (e.g., labetalol, ciprofloxacin, amrinone, milrinone) must not be administered concurrently in the same infusion because they may cause precipitation of the furosemide. In addition, furosemide injection should not be added to a running intravenous line containing any of these acidic products.

Acute Pulmonary Edema

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 40 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes). If a satisfactory response does not occur within 1 hour, the dose may be increased to 80 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes).

If necessary, additional therapy (e.g., digitalis, oxygen) may be administered concomitantly.

Geriatric patients

In general, dose selection for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

Parenteral therapy should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

The usual initial dose of Furosemide (intravenously or intramuscularly) in pediatric patients is 1 mg/kg body weight and should be given slowly under close medical supervision. If the diuretic response to the initial dose is not satisfactory, dosage may be increased by 1 mg/kg not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose, until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended.

Literature reports suggest that the maximum dose for premature infants should not exceed 1 mg/kg/day (see WARNINGS, Pediatric Use).

Furosemide Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is discolored.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial or cartridge prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). Heparin Sodium Injection, USP products must not be confused with “catheter lock flush” products. To lessen this risk for a cartridge, a red cautionary statement has been added to the cartridge and box/bin. Read the cautionary statement and confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation-test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn 4 to 6 hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits, and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral AnticoagulantWhen an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last intravenous bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose HeparinAlthough dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
METHOD OF ADMINISTRATION FREQUENCY RECOMMENDED DOSE [based on 150 lb (68 kg) patient]
Deep, Subcutaneous (Intrafat) Injection

A different site should be used for each injection to prevent the development of massive hematoma.

Initial dose

5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution, subcutaneously

Every 8 hours or Every 12 hours

8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution

15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution

Intermittent Intravenous Injection

Initial dose

10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 or 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Every 4 to 6 hours

5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Intravenous Infusion

Initial dose

5,000 units by IV injection

Continuous

20,000 to 40,000 units/24 hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or in any compatible solution) for infusion

Pediatric UseUse preservative-free Heparin Sodium Injection, USP in neonates and infants (see WARNINGS, Benzyl Alcohol Toxicity and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:
Initial Dose 75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes) Maintenance Dose
Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour; Infants <2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour) Children >1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour; Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage

Monitoring
Adjust heparin to maintain aPTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70
Geriatric UsePatients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.

Surgery of the Heart and Blood VesselsPatients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes, or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.

Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative ThromboembolismA number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate is advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.

Extracorporeal DialysisFollow equipment manufacturers’ operating directions carefully.

Blood TransfusionAddition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units per 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 mL to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.

Laboratory SamplesAddition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within two hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

NOTE: To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration and it is recommended in emergency situations.

Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be diluted for intravenous infusion in 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose injection. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient’s response.

Naloxone hydrochloride injection should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to naloxone hydrochloride injection unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

General

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration and it is recommended in emergency situations.

Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion: Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP may be diluted for intravenous infusion in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose injection. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient’s response.

Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

Usage in Adults:

Opioid Overdose—Known or Suspected: An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions is not obtained, it may be repeated at 2 to 3 minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of opioid induced or partial opioid induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: For the partial reversal of opioid depression following the use of opioids during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone should be titrated according to the patient’s response. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal, i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating or circulatory stress.

Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one to two hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short or long acting) and time interval since last administration of opioid. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

Septic Shock: The optimal dosage of Naloxone or duration of therapy for the treatment of hypotension in septic shock patients has not been established (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Usage in Pediatric Population:

Opioid Overdose—Known or Suspected: The usual initial dose in pediatric patients is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, Naloxone Hydrochloride may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP can be diluted with sterile water for injection.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: Follow the recommendations and cautions under Adult Postoperative Depression. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

Usage in Neonates

When using naloxone hydrochloride injection in neonates a product containing 0.02 mg/mL should be used.

Opioid-Induced Depression: The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative opioid depression.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.
Nalbuphine Hydrochlorid...

Nalbuphine Hydrochloride

The usual recommended adult dose is 10 mg for a 70 kg individual administered subcutaneously, intramuscularly, or intravenously; this dose may be repeated every 3 to 6 hours as necessary. Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain, physical status of the patient, and other medications which the patient may be receiving (see Interaction With Other Central Nervous System Depressants under WARNINGS). In nontolerant individuals, the recommended single maximum dose is 20 mg with a maximum total daily dose of 160 mg.

The use of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection as a supplement to balanced anesthesia requires larger doses than those recommended for analgesia. Induction doses of nalbuphine hydrochloride range from 0.3 mg/kg to 3 mg/kg intravenously to be administered over a 10 to 15 minute period with maintenance doses of 0.25 to 0.5 mg/kg in single intravenous administrations as required. The use of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection may be followed by respiratory depression which can be reversed with the opioid antagonist naloxone hydrochloride.

Patients Dependent on Opioids: Patients who have been taking opioids chronically may experience withdrawal symptoms upon the administration of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection. If unduly troublesome, opioid withdrawal symptoms can be controlled by the slow intravenous administration of small increments of morphine, until relief occurs. If the previous analgesic was morphine, meperidine, codeine, or other opioid with similar duration of activity, one-fourth of the anticipated dose of nalbuphine hydrochloride can be administered initially and the patient observed for signs of withdrawal, i.e., abdominal cramps, nausea and vomiting, lacrimation, rhinorrhea, anxiety, restlessness, elevation of temperature or piloerection. If untoward symptoms do not occur, progressively larger doses may be tried at appropriate intervals until the desired level of analgesia is obtained with nalbuphine hydrochloride.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, initiate treatment with metoprolol tartrate as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Begin treatment in this early phase with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; give the injections at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, monitor blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), initiate metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continue for 48 hours. Thereafter, the maintenance dosage is 100 mg orally twice daily.

Start patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, discontinue metoprolol (see WARNINGS).

Special populations

Pediatric patients: No pediatric studies have been performed. The safety and efficacy of metoprolol tartrate in pediatric patients have not been established.

Renal impairment: No dose adjustment of metoprolol tartrate is required in patients with renal impairment.

Hepatic impairment: Metoprolol tartrate blood levels are likely to increase substantially in patients with hepatic impairment. Therefore, metoprolol should be initiated at low doses with cautious gradual dose titration according to clinical response.

Geriatric patients (>65 years): In general, use a low initial starting dose in elderly patients given their greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Method of administration

Parenteral administration of metoprolol (ampoule) should be done in a setting with intensive monitoring.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, initiate treatment with metoprolol tartrate as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Begin treatment in this early phase with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; give the injections at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, monitor blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), initiate metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continue for 48 hours. Thereafter, the maintenance dosage is 100 mg orally twice daily.

Start patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, discontinue metoprolol (see WARNINGS).

Special populations

Pediatric patients: No pediatric studies have been performed. The safety and efficacy of metoprolol tartrate in pediatric patients have not been established.

Renal impairment: No dose adjustment of metoprolol tartrate is required in patients with renal impairment.

Hepatic impairment: Metoprolol tartrate blood levels are likely to increase substantially in patients with hepatic impairment. Therefore, metoprolol should be initiated at low doses with cautious gradual dose titration according to clinical response.

Geriatric patients (>65 years): In general, use a low initial starting dose in elderly patients given their greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Method of administration: Parenteral administration of metoprolol (ampoule) should be done in a setting with intensive monitoring.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Morphine Sulfate

Morphine Sulfate

Preservative-free morphine sulfate injection is intended for intravenous, epidural or intrathecal administration.

Intravenous Administration

Dosage: The initial dose of morphine sulfate should be 2 mg to 10 mg/70 kg of body weight. Patients under the age of 18; no information available.

Epidural Administration

PRESERVATIVE-FREE MORPHINE SULFATE INJECTION SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED EPIDURALLY ONLY BY PHYSICIANS EXPERIENCED IN THE TECHNIQUES OF EPIDURAL ADMINISTRATION AND WHO ARE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE LABELING. IT SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED ONLY IN SETTINGS WHERE ADEQUATE PATIENT MONITORING IS POSSIBLE. RESUSCITATIVE EQUIPMENT AND A SPECIFIC ANTAGONIST (NALOXONE HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION) SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF RESPIRATORY DEPRESSION AS WELL AS COMPLICATIONS WHICH MIGHT RESULT FROM INADVERTENT INTRATHECAL OR INTRAVASCULAR INJECTION. (NOTE: INTRATHECAL DOSAGE IS USUALLY 1/10 THAT OF EPIDURAL DOSAGE) PATIENT MONITORING SHOULD BE CONTINUED FOR AT LEAST 24 HOURS AFTER EACH DOSE, SINCE DELAYED RESPIRATORY DEPRESSION MAY OCCUR.

Proper placement of a needle or catheter in the epidural space should be verified before preservative-free morphine sulfate injection is injected. Acceptable techniques for verifying proper placement include: a) aspiration to check for absence of blood or cerebrospinal fluid, or b) administration of 5 mL (3 mL in obstetric patients) of UNPRESERVED 1.5% Lidocaine and Epinephrine (1:200,000) Injection and then observe the patient for lack of tachycardia (this indicates that vascular injection has not been made) and lack of sudden onset of segmental anesthesia (this indicates that intrathecal injection has not been made).

Epidural Adult Dosage: Initial injection of 5 mg in the lumbar region may provide satisfactory pain relief for up to 24 hours. If adequate pain relief is not achieved within one hour, careful administration of incremental doses of 1 to 2 mg at intervals sufficient to assess effectiveness may be given. No more than 10 mg/24 hr should be administered.

Thoracic administration has been shown to dramatically increase the incidence of early and late respiratory depression even at doses of 1 to 2 mg.

For continuous infusion an initial dose of 2 to 4 mg/24 hours is recommended. Further doses of 1 to 2 mg may be given if pain relief is not achieved initially.

Aged or debilitated patients—Administer with extreme caution (see PRECAUTIONS). Doses of less than 5 mg may provide satisfactory pain relief for up to 24 hours.

Epidural Pediatric Use: No information on use in pediatric patients is available.

Intrathecal Administration

NOTE: INTRATHECAL DOSAGE IS USUALLY 1/10 THAT OF EPIDURAL DOSAGE.

PRESERVATIVE-FREE MORPHINE SULFATE INJECTION SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED INTRATHECALLY ONLY BY PHYSICIANS EXPERIENCED IN THE TECHNIQUES OF INTRATHECAL ADMINISTRATION AND WHO ARE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE LABELING. IT SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED ONLY IN SETTINGS WHERE ADEQUATE PATIENT MONITORING IS POSSIBLE. RESUSCITATIVE EQUIPMENT AND A SPECIFIC ANTAGONIST (NALOXONE HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION) SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF RESPIRATORY DEPRESSION AS WELL AS COMPLICATIONS WHICH MIGHT RESULT FROM INADVERTENT INTRAVASCULAR INJECTION. PATIENT MONITORING SHOULD BE CONTINUED FOR AT LEAST 24 HOURS AFTER EACH DOSE, SINCE DELAYED RESPIRATORY DEPRESSION MAY OCCUR. RESPIRATORY DEPRESSION (BOTH EARLY AND LATE ONSET) HAS OCCURRED MORE FREQUENTLY FOLLOWING INTRATHECAL ADMINISTRATION.

Intrathecal Adult Dosage: A single injection of 0.2 to 1 mg may provide satisfactory pain relief for up to 24 hours. (CAUTION: THIS IS ONLY 0.4 TO 2 ML OF THE 5 MG/10 ML CONTAINER OR 0.2 TO 1 ML OF THE 10 MG/10 ML CONTAINER OF PRESERVATIVE-FREE MORPHINE SULFATE INJECTION.) DO NOT INJECT INTRATHECALLY MORE THAN 2 ML OF THE 5 MG/10 ML CONTAINER OR 1 ML OF THE 10 MG/10 ML CONTAINER. USE IN THE LUMBAR AREA ONLY IS RECOMMENDED. Repeated intrathecal injections of preservative-free morphine sulfate injection are not recommended. A constant intravenous infusion of naloxone hydrochloride, 0.6 mg/hr, for 24 hours after intrathecal injection may be used to reduce the incidence of potential side effects.

Aged or debilitated patients—Administer with extreme caution (see PRECAUTIONS). A lower dosage is usually satisfactory.

Repeat Dosage: If pain recurs, alternative routes of administration should be considered, since experience with repeated doses of morphine by the intrathecal route is limited.

Intrathecal Pediatric Use: No information on the use in pediatric patients is available.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial or cartridge prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). Heparin Sodium Injection, USP products must not be confused with “catheter lock flush” products. To lessen this risk for a cartridge, a red cautionary statement has been added to the cartridge and box/bin. Read the cautionary statement and confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation-test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn 4 to 6 hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral AnticoagulantWhen an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last intravenous bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose HeparinAlthough dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:

METHOD OFADMINISTRATION

FREQUENCY

RECOMMENDED DOSE[based on 150 lb (68 kg) patient]

Deep, Subcutaneous (Intrafat) Injection

A different site should be used for each injection to prevent the development of massive hematoma.

Initial dose

5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution, subcutaneously

Every 8 hours or Every 12 hours

8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution

15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution

Intermittent Intravenous Injection

Initial dose

10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 or 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Every 4 to 6 hours

5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Intravenous Infusion

Initial dose

5,000 units by IV injection

Continuous

20,000 to 40,000 units/24 hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or in any compatible solution) for infusion

Pediatric UseUse preservative-free Heparin Sodium Injection, USP in neonates and infants (see WARNINGS, Benzyl Alcohol Toxicity and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:
Initial Dose 75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes) Maintenance Dose
Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour;      Infants <2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour)



Children >1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour;      Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage
Monitoring Adjust heparin to maintain aPTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70
Geriatric UsePatients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.

Surgery of the Heart and Blood VesselsPatients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.

Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative ThromboembolismA number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate is advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.

Extracorporeal DialysisFollow equipment manufacturers’ operating directions carefully.

Blood TransfusionAddition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units per 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 mL to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.

Laboratory SamplesAddition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within two hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

NOTE: To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Vancomycin Hydrochlorid...

Vancomycin Hydrochloride

The intent of the pharmacy bulk package for this product is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

Infusion-related events are related to both the concentration and the rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations). In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual daily intravenous dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every 6 hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual intravenous daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin is 10 mg/kg per dose given every 6 hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin may be warranted in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the 1st week of life and every 8 hours thereafter up to the age of 1 month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride for injection per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min (see following table).

DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION (Adapted from Moellering et al.4)

Creatinine Clearance

mL/min

Vancomycin Dose

mg/24 h

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

1,545

1,390

1,235

1,080

925

770

620

465

310

155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 hr. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1,000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1,000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only serum creatinine is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

Men:

              Weight (kg) x (140 - age in years)

     72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

Women:

     0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise, the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions:
(1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as in obese patients or those with liver disease, edema or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition or inactivity.
The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.

Compatibility with Other Drugs and IV Fluids

The following diluents are physically and chemically compatible (with 4 g/L vancomycin hydrochloride):

     5% Dextrose Injection, USP     5% Dextrose Injection and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP     Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP     5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer’s Injection     Normosol®-M and 5% Dextrose     0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP     Isolyte® E

Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Vancomycin solution has a low pH and may cause physical instability of other compounds.

Mixtures of solutions of vancomycin and beta-lactam antibiotics have been shown to be physically incompatible. The likelihood of precipitation increases with higher concentrations of vancomycin. It is recommended to adequately flush the intravenous lines between the administration of these antibiotics. It is also recommended to dilute solutions of vancomycin to 5 mg/mL or less.

Although intravitreal injection is not an approved route of administration for vancomycin, precipitation has been reported after intravitreal injection of vancomycin and ceftazidime for endophthalmitis using different syringes and needles. The precipitates dissolved gradually, with complete clearing of the vitreous cavity over two months and with improvement of visual acuity.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). Heparin Sodium Injection, USP products must not be confused with “catheter lock flush” products. To lessen this risk, the 1 mL vial includes a red cautionary label that extends above the main label. Read the cautionary statement and confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength. Then locate the “Tear Here” point on the label, and remove this red cautionary label prior to removing the flip-top cap.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation-test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn 4 to 6 hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral AnticoagulantWhen an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last intravenous bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose HeparinAlthough dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:

METHOD OFADMINISTRATION

FREQUENCY

RECOMMENDED DOSE[based on 150 lb (68 kg) patient]

Deep, Subcutaneous (Intrafat) Injection

A different site should be used for each injection to prevent the development of massive hematoma.

Initial dose

5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution, subcutaneously

Every 8 hours or Every 12 hours

8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution

15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution

Intermittent Intravenous Injection

Initial dose

10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 or 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Every 4 to 6 hours

5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Intravenous Infusion

Initial dose

5,000 units by IV injection

Continuous

20,000 to 40,000 units/24 hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or in any compatible solution) for infusion

Pediatric UseUse preservative-free Heparin Sodium Injection, USP in neonates and infants (see WARNINGS, Benzyl Alcohol Toxicity and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:
Initial Dose 75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes) Maintenance Dose
Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour; Infants <2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour) Children >1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour; Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage
Monitoring Adjust heparin to maintain aPTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70
Geriatric UsePatients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.

Surgery of the Heart and Blood VesselsPatients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.

Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative ThromboembolismA number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery, or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate is advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.

Extracorporeal DialysisFollow equipment manufacturers’ operating directions carefully.

Blood TransfusionAddition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units per 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 mL to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.

Laboratory SamplesAddition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within two hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

NOTE: To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Tobramycin In Sodium Ch...

Tobramycin In Sodium Chloride

Tobramycin sulfate injection may be given intramuscularly or intravenously. Recommended dosages are the same for both routes.

Tobramycin in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is administered by intravenous infusion only. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations (see WARNINGS box and PRECAUTIONS).

Administration for Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults with Serious Infections: 3 mg/kg/day in 3 equal doses every 8 hours (see Table 3).

Adults with Life-Threatening Infections: Up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in 3 or 4 equal doses (see Table 3). The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated. To prevent increased toxicity due to excessive blood levels, dosage should not exceed 5 mg/kg/day unless serum levels are monitored (see WARNINGS box and PRECAUTIONS).
Table 3. Dosage Schedule Guide for Adults with Normal Renal Function (Dosage at 8-Hour Intervals)
For

Patient

Weighing

Usual Dose for Serious Infections

Maximum Dose for Life- Threatening Infections (Reduce as soon as possible)

1 mg/kg

q8h

1.66 mg/kg

q8h

(Total, 3 mg/kg/day)

(Total, 5 mg/kg/day)
kg lb
mg/dose

mg/dose

120

264

120 mg

200 mg

115

253

115 mg

191 mg

110

242

110 mg

183 mg

105

231

105 mg

175 mg

100

220

100 mg

166 mg

95

209

95 mg

158 mg

90

198

90 mg

150 mg

85

187

85 mg

141 mg

80

176

80 mg

133 mg

75

165

75 mg

125 mg

70

154

70 mg

116 mg

65

143

65 mg

108 mg

60

132

60 mg

100 mg

55

121

55 mg

91 mg

50

110

50 mg

83 mg

45

99

45 mg

75 mg

40

88

40 mg

66 mg

NOTE: For information concerning the use of tobramycin in infants and children, see Pediatric tobramycin product information.

Children: 6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equally divided doses (2 to 2.5 mg/kg every 8 hours or 1.5 to 1.89 mg/kg every 6 hours).

Premature or Full-Term Neonates 1 Week of Age or Less: Up to 4 mg/kg/day may be administered in 2 equal doses every 12 hours.

It is desirable to limit treatment to a short term. The usual duration of treatment is 7 to 10 days. A longer course of therapy may be necessary in difficult and complicated infections. In such cases, monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is advised, because neurotoxicity is more likely to occur when treatment is extended longer than 10 days.

Administration for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Whenever possible, serum tobramycin concentrations should be monitored during therapy.

Following a loading dose of 1 mg/kg, subsequent dosage in these patients must be adjusted, either with reduced doses administered at 8-hour intervals or with normal doses given at prolonged intervals. Both of these methods are suggested as guides to be used when serum levels of tobramycin cannot be measured directly. They are based on either the creatinine clearance or the serum creatinine of the patient, because these values correlate with the half-life of tobramycin. The dosage schedules derived from either method should be used in conjunction with careful clinical and laboratory observations of the patient and should be modified as necessary. Neither method should be used when dialysis is being performed.

Reduced dosage at 8-hour intervals

When the creatinine clearance rate is 70 mL or less per minute or when the serum creatinine value is known, the amount of the reduced dose can be determined by multiplying the normal dose from Table 3 by the percent of normal dose from the accompanying nomogram.

An alternate rough guide for determining reduced dosage at 8-hour intervals (for patients whose steady-state serum creatinine values are known) is to divide the normally recommended dose by the patient’s serum creatinine.

Normal dosage at prolonged intervals: If the creatinine clearance rate is not available and the patient’s condition is stable, a dosage frequency in hours for the dosage given in Table 3 can be determined by multiplying the patient’s serum creatinine by 6.

Dosage in Obese Patients

The appropriate dose may be calculated by using the patient’s estimated lean body weight plus 40% of the excess as the basic weight on which to figure mg/kg.

Intravenous Administration

For intravenous administration, the usual volume of diluent (0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection) is 50 to 100 mL for adult doses. For children, the volume of diluent should be proportionately less than for adults. The diluted solution usually should be infused over a period of 20 to 60 minutes. Infusion periods of less than 20 minutes are not recommended because peak serum levels may exceed 12 mcg/mL (see WARNINGS box).

Tobramycin in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection should not be physically premixed with other drugs but should be administered separately according to the recommended dose and route.

The above schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of tobramycin sulfate serum levels is not feasible.

A variety of methods are available to measure tobramycin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiology, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques.

Tobramycin in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is a ready-to-use isotonic solution. NO DILUTION OR BUFFERING IS REQUIRED.

If the prescribed dose is exactly 60 or 80 mg, use the appropriate container. If the prescribed dose is higher or lower than that of the supplied containers, adjustments can be made in either container. If the dose is higher than the contents of the 80 mg container, the additional amount should be removed from a container of tobramycin and added to the 80 mg container. If the prescribed dose is less, decrements can be made by removing and discarding the appropriate amount from either unit.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Tobramycin

Tobramycin

Tobramycin Injection, USP may be given intramuscularly or intravenously. Recommended dosages are the same for both routes. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations (see WARNINGS box and PRECAUTIONS).

Administration for Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults with Serious Infections: 3 mg/kg/day in 3 equal doses every 8 hours (see Table 3).

Adults with Life-Threatening Infections: Up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in 3 or 4 equal doses (see Table 3). The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated. To prevent increased toxicity due to excessive blood levels, dosage should not exceed 5 mg/kg/day unless serum levels are monitored (see WARNINGS box and PRECAUTIONS).
Table 3. Dosage Schedule Guide for Tobramycin Injection, USP in Adults with Normal Renal Function (Dosage at 8-Hour Intervals)
ForPatientWeighing

Usual Dose forSerious Infections

Maximum Dose for Life-Threatening Infections(Reduce as soon as possible)

1 mg/kg q8h(Total, 3 mg/kg/day)

1.66 mg/kg q8h(Total, 5 mg/kg/day)

mg/dose

mL/dose*

mg/dose

mL/dose*

kg

lb

q8h

q8h

120

264

120 mg

     3 mL

200 mg

     5 mL

115

253

115 mg

2.9 mL

191 mg

4.75 mL

110

242

110 mg

2.75 mL

183 mg

4.5 mL

105

231

105 mg

2.6 mL

175 mg

4.4 mL

100

220

100 mg

2.5 mL

166 mg

4.2 mL

95

209

95 mg

2.4 mL

158 mg

     4 mL

90

198

90 mg

2.25 mL

150 mg

3.75 mL

85

187

85 mg

2.1 mL

141 mg

3.5 mL

80

176

80 mg

     2 mL

133 mg

3.3 mL

75

165

75 mg

1.9 mL

125 mg

3.1 mL

70

154

70 mg

1.75 mL

116 mg

2.9 mL

65

143

65 mg

1.6 mL

108 mg

2.7 mL

60

132

60 mg

1.5 mL

100 mg

2.5 mL

55

121

55 mg

1.4 mL

91 mg

2.25 mL

50

110

50 mg

1.25 mL

83 mg

2.1 mL

45

99

45 mg

1.1 mL

75 mg

1.9 mL

40

88

40 mg

     1 mL

66 mg

1.6 mL
*   Applicable to all product forms except Tobramycin Injection, USP, 10 mg/mL (Pediatric). Pediatric Patients (Greater Than 1 Week of Age):
6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equally divided doses (2 to 2.5 mg/kg every 8 hours or 1.5 to 1.89 mg/kg every 6 hours).

Premature or Full-Term Neonates 1 Week of Age or Less: Up to 4 mg/kg/day may be administered in 2 equal doses every 12 hours.

It is desirable to limit treatment to a short term. The usual duration of treatment is 7 to 10 days. A longer course of therapy may be necessary in difficult and complicated infections. In such cases, monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is advised, because neurotoxicity is more likely to occur when treatment is extended longer than 10 days.

Dosage in Patients with Cystic Fibrosis

In patients with cystic fibrosis, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentration of aminoglycosides. Measurement of tobramycin serum concentration during treatment is especially important as a basis for determining appropriate dose. In patients with severe cystic fibrosis, an initial dosing regimen of 10 mg/kg/day in 4 equally divided doses is recommended. This dosing regimen is suggested only as a guide. The serum levels of tobramycin should be measured directly during treatment due to a wide interpatient variability.

Administration for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Whenever possible, serum tobramycin concentrations should be monitored during therapy.

Following a loading dose of 1 mg/kg, subsequent dosage in these patients must be adjusted, either with reduced doses administered at 8-hour intervals or with normal doses given at prolonged intervals. Both of these methods are suggested as guides to be used when serum levels of tobramycin cannot be measured directly. They are based on either the creatinine clearance or the serum creatinine of the patient, because these values correlate with the half-life of tobramycin. The dosage schedules derived from either method should be used in conjunction with careful clinical and laboratory observations of the patient and should be modified as necessary. Neither method should be used when dialysis is being performed.

Reduced Dosage at 8-hour Intervals

When the creatinine clearance rate is 70 mL or less per minute or when the serum creatinine value is known, the amount of the reduced dose can be determined by multiplying the normal dose from Table 3 by the percent of normal dose from the accompanying nomogram.

An alternate rough guide for determining reduced dosage at 8-hour intervals (for patients whose steady-state serum creatinine values are known) is to divide the normally recommended dose by the patient’s serum creatinine.

Normal Dosage at Prolonged Intervals

If the creatinine clearance rate is not available and the patient’s condition is stable, a dosage frequency in hours for the dosage given in Table 3 can be determined by multiplying the patient’s serum creatinine by 6.

Dosage in Obese Patients

The appropriate dose may be calculated by using the patient’s estimated lean body weight plus 40% of the excess as the basic weight on which to figure mg/kg.

Intramuscular Administration

Tobramycin Injection, USP may be administered by withdrawing the appropriate dose directly from a vial. Tobramycin Sulfate in 0.9% Sodium Chloride is not intended for intramuscular administration.

Intravenous Administration

For intravenous administration, the usual volume of diluent (0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection) is 50 to 100 mL for adult doses. For pediatric patients, the volume of diluent should be proportionately less than for adults. The diluted solution usually should be infused over a period of 20 to 60 minutes. Infusion periods of less than 20 minutes are not recommended because peak serum levels may exceed 12 mcg/mL (see WARNINGS box).

Tobramycin Injection, USP should not be physically premixed with other drugs but should be administered separately according to the recommended dose and route.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Tobramycin

Tobramycin

This insert is for a Pharmacy Bulk Package and is intended for preparing I.V. admixtures only. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations (see WARNINGS box and PRECAUTIONS).

Administration for Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults with Serious Infections: 3 mg/kg/day in 3 equal doses every 8 hours (see Table 3).

Adults with Life-Threatening Infections: Up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in 3 or 4 equal doses (see Table 3). The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated. To prevent increased toxicity due to excessive blood levels, dosage should not exceed 5 mg/kg/day unless serum levels are monitored (see WARNINGS box and PRECAUTIONS).
Table 3. Dosage Schedule Guide for Tobramycin Injection, USP in Adults with Normal Renal Function (Dosage at 8-Hour Intervals) For Patient Weighing Usual Dose for Serious Infections Maximum Dose for Life-Threatening Infections (Reduce as soon as possible) 1 mg/kg q8h (Total, 3 mg/kg/day) 1.66 mg/kg q8h (Total, 5 mg/kg/day) mg/dose mL/dose* mg/dose mL/dose* kg lb q8h q8h 120 264 120 mg 3 mL 200 mg 5 mL 115 253 115 mg 2.9 mL 191 mg 4.75 mL 110 242 110 mg 2.75 mL 183 mg 4.5 mL 105 231 105 mg 2.6 mL 175 mg 4.4 mL 100 220 100 mg 2.5 mL 166 mg 4.2 mL 95 209 95 mg 2.4 mL 158 mg 4 mL 90 198 90 mg 2.25 mL 150 mg 3.75 mL 85 187 85 mg 2.1 mL 141 mg 3.5 mL 80 176 80 mg 2 mL 133 mg 3.3 mL 75 165 75 mg 1.9 mL 125 mg 3.1 mL 70 154 70 mg 1.75 mL 116 mg 2.9 mL 65 143 65 mg 1.6 mL 108 mg 2.7 mL 60 132 60 mg 1.5 mL 100 mg 2.5 mL 55 121 55 mg 1.4 mL 91 mg 2.25 mL 50 110 50 mg 1.25 mL 83 mg 2.1 mL 45 99 45 mg 1.1 mL 75 mg 1.9 mL 40 88 40 mg 1 mL 66 mg 1.6 mL
*Applicable to all product forms except Tobramycin Injection, USP, 10 mg/mL (Pediatric).

Pediatric Patients (Greater Than 1 Week of Age): 6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equally divided doses (2 to 2.5 mg/kg every 8 hours or 1.5 to 1.89 mg/kg every 6 hours).

Premature or Full-Term Neonates 1 Week of Age or Less: Up to 4 mg/kg/day may be administered in 2 equal doses every 12 hours.

It is desirable to limit treatment to a short term. The usual duration of treatment is 7 to 10 days. A longer course of therapy may be necessary in difficult and complicated infections. In such cases, monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is advised, because neurotoxicity is more likely to occur when treatment is extended longer than 10 days.

Dosage in Patients with Cystic Fibrosis

In patients with cystic fibrosis, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. Measurement of tobramycin serum concentration during treatment is especially important as a basis for determining appropriate dose. In patients with severe cystic fibrosis, an initial dosing regimen of 10 mg/kg/day in 4 equally divided doses is recommended. This dosing regimen is suggested only as a guide. The serum levels of tobramycin should be measured directly during treatment due to wide interpatient variability.

Administration for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Whenever possible, serum tobramycin concentrations should be monitored during therapy.

Following a loading dose of 1 mg/kg, subsequent dosage in these patients must be adjusted, either with reduced doses administered at 8-hour intervals or with normal doses given at prolonged intervals. Both of these methods are suggested as guides to be used when serum levels of tobramycin cannot be measured directly. They are based on either the creatinine clearance or the serum creatinine of the patient, because these values correlate with the half-life of tobramycin. The dosage schedules derived from either method should be used in conjunction with careful clinical and laboratory observations of the patient and should be modified as necessary. Neither method should be used when dialysis is being performed.

Reduced Dosage at 8-hour Intervals

When the creatinine clearance rate is 70 mL or less per minute or when the serum creatinine value is known, the amount of the reduced dose can be determined by multiplying the normal dose from Table 3 by the percent of normal dose from the accompanying nomogram.

An alternate rough guide for determining reduced dosage at 8-hour intervals (for patients whose steady-state serum creatinine values are known) is to divide the normally recommended dose by the patient’s serum creatinine.

Normal Dosage at Prolonged Intervals

If the creatinine clearance rate is not available and the patient’s condition is stable, a dosage frequency in hours for the dosage given in Table 3 can be determined by multiplying the patient’s serum creatinine by 6.

Dosage in Obese Patients

The appropriate dose may be calculated by using the patient’s estimated lean body weight plus 40% of the excess as the basic weight on which to figure mg/kg.

Intravenous Administration

For intravenous administration, the usual volume of diluent (0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection) is 50 to 100 mL for adult doses. For pediatric patients, the volume of diluent should be proportionately less than for adults. The diluted solution usually should be infused over a period of 20 to 60 minutes. Infusion periods of less than 20 minutes are not recommended because peak serum levels may exceed 12 mcg/mL (see WARNINGS box).

Tobramycin Injection, USP should not be physically premixed with other drugs but should be administered separately according to the recommended dose and route.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique – Not for Direct Infusion

The pharmacy bulk package is for use in a Pharmacy Admixture Service only.
For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose 3/4 in. long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. During use, container must be stored and all manipulations performed in an appropriate laminar flow hood. Remove cover from container and cleanse closure with antiseptic. Using aseptic technique, a single entry through the pharmacy bulk package bottle closure should be made with a sterile dispensing set which allows measured dispensing of the contents. Transfer individual dose(s) to appropriate intravenous infusion solutions without delay. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. Multiple entries will also increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination. The above process should be carried out under a laminar flow hood using aseptic technique. ANY UNUSED PORTION MUST BE DISCARDED WITHIN 4 HOURS.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone may be administered intravenously or intramuscularly.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration because a precipitate can form. Precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium can also occur when ceftriaxone is mixed with calcium-containing solutions in the same IV administration line.

Ceftriaxone must not be administered simultaneously with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition via a Y-site. However, in patients other than neonates, ceftriaxone and calcium-containing solutions may be administered sequentially of one another if the infusion lines are thoroughly flushed between infusions with a compatible fluid (see WARNINGS).

There have been no reports of an interaction between ceftriaxone and oral calcium-containing products or interaction between intramuscular ceftriaxone and calcium-containing products (IV or oral).

Neonates

Hyperbilirubinemic neonates, especially prematures, should not be treated with ceftriaxone for injection. Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in premature neonates (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in neonates (≤ 28 days) if they require (or are expected to require) treatment with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition because of the risk of precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Intravenous doses should be given over 60 minutes in neonates to reduce the risk of bilirubin encephalopathy.

Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of skin and skin structure infections, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day). The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

For the treatment of acute bacterial otitis media, a single intramuscular dose of 50 mg/kg (not to exceed 1 gram) is recommended (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

For the treatment of serious miscellaneous infections other than meningitis, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg, given in divided doses every 12 hours. The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

In the treatment of meningitis, it is recommended that the initial therapeutic dose be 100 mg/kg (not to exceed 4 grams). Thereafter, a total daily dose of 100 mg/kg/day (not to exceed 4 grams daily) is recommended. The daily dose may be administered once a day (or in equally divided doses every 12 hours). The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

Adults

The usual adult daily dose is 1 to 2 grams given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day) depending on the type and severity of infection. The total daily dose should not exceed 4 grams.

If Chlamydia trachomatis is a suspected pathogen, appropriate antichlamydial coverage should be added, because ceftriaxone sodium has no activity against this organism.

For the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal infections, a single intramuscular dose of 250 mg is recommended.

For preoperative use (surgical prophylaxis), a single dose of 1 gram administered intravenously 1/2 to 2 hours before surgery is recommended.

Generally, ceftriaxone therapy should be continued for at least 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared. The usual duration of therapy is 4 to 14 days; in complicated infections, longer therapy may be required.

When treating infections caused by Streptococcus pyogenes, therapy should be continued for at least 10 days.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impairment of renal or hepatic function (see PRECAUTIONS).

The dosages recommended for adults require no modification in elderly patients, up to 2 g per day, provided there is no severe renal and hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS).

Directions for Use

Intramuscular Administration

Reconstitute ceftriaxone sodium powder with the appropriate diluent (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Compatibility and Stability).

Inject diluent into vial, shake vial thoroughly to form solution. Withdraw entire contents of vial into syringe to equal total labeled dose.

After reconstitution, each 1 mL of solution contains approximately 250 mg or 350 mg equivalent of ceftriaxone according to the amount of diluent indicated below. If required, more dilute solutions could be utilized. A 350 mg/mL concentration is not recommended for the 250 mg vial since it may not be possible to withdraw the entire contents.

As with all intramuscular preparations, ceftriaxone should be injected well within the body of a relatively large muscle; aspiration helps to avoid unintentional injection into a blood vessel.

Vial Dosage Size

Amount of Diluent to be Added

250 mg/mL

350 mg/mL

250 mg

0.9 mL

–

500 mg

1.8 mL

1 mL

1 g

3.6 mL

2.1 mL

2 g

7.2 mL

4.2 mL

Intravenous Administration

Ceftriaxone should be administered intravenously by infusion over a period of 30 minutes, except in neonates where administration over 60 minutes is recommended to reduce the risk of bilirubin encephalopathy. Concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL are recommended; however, lower concentrations may be used if desired. Reconstitute vials with an appropriate IV diluent (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Compatibility and Stability).

Vial Dosage Size

Amount of Diluent to be Added

250 mg

2.4 mL

500 mg

4.8 mL

1 g

9.6 mL

2 g

19.2 mL

After reconstitution, each 1 mL of solution contains approximately 100 mg equivalent of ceftriaxone. Withdraw entire contents and dilute to the desired concentration with the appropriate IV diluent.

Compatibility and Stability

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone for injection vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration. Particulate formation can result.

Ceftriaxone has been shown to be compatible with Flagyl® IV (metronidazole hydrochloride). The concentration should not exceed 5 to 7.5 mg/mL metronidazole hydrochloride with ceftriaxone 10 mg/mL as an admixture. The admixture is stable for 24 hours at room temperature only in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose in water (D5W). No compatibility studies have been conducted with the Flagyl® IV RTU® (metronidazole) formulation or using other diluents. Metronidazole at concentrations greater than 8 mg/mL will precipitate. Do not refrigerate the admixture as precipitation will occur.

Vancomycin, amsacrine, aminoglycosides, and fluconazole are incompatible with ceftriaxone in admixtures. When any of these drugs are to be administered concomitantly with ceftriaxone by intermittent intravenous infusion, it is recommended that they be given sequentially, with thorough flushing of the intravenous lines (with one of the compatible fluids) between the administrations.

Ceftriaxone for injection solutions should not be physically mixed with or piggybacked into solutions containing other antimicrobial drugs or into diluent solutions other than those listed above, due to possible incompatibility (see WARNINGS).

Ceftriaxone sodium sterile powder should be stored at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature] and protected from light. After reconstitution, protection from normal light is not necessary. The color of solutions ranges from light yellow to amber, depending on the length of storage, concentration and diluent used.

Ceftriaxone intramuscular solutions remain stable (loss of potency less than 10%) for the following time periods:

Diluent

Concentration

Storage

mg/mL

Room Temp.

(25°C)

Refrigerated

(4°C)

Sterile Water for Injection

100

250, 350

2 days

24 hours

10 days

3 days

0.9% Sodium Chloride Solution

100

250, 350

2 days

24 hours

10 days

3 days

5% Dextrose Solution

100

250, 350

2 days

24 hours

10 days

3 days

Bacteriostatic Water + 0.9% Benzyl Alcohol

100

250, 350

24 hours

24 hours

10 days

3 days

1% Lidocaine Solution (without epinephrine)

100

250, 350

24 hours

24 hours

10 days

3 days

Ceftriaxone intravenous solutions, at concentrations of 10, 20 and 40 mg/mL, remain stable (loss of potency less than 10%) for the following time periods stored in glass or PVC containers:
* Data available for 10 to 40 mg/mL concentrations in this diluent in PVC containers only.
Diluent

Storage

Room Temp.

(25°C)

Refrigerated

(4°C)

Sterile Water

2 days

10 days

0.9% Sodium

Chloride Solution

2 days

10 days

5% Dextrose Solution

2 days

10 days

10% Dextrose Solution

2 days

10 days

5% Dextrose + 0.9%

Sodium Chloride Solution*

2 days

Incompatible

5% Dextrose + 0.45%

Sodium Chloride Solution

2 days

Incompatible

The following intravenous ceftriaxone solutions are stable at room temperature (25°C) for 24 hours, at concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL: Sodium Lactate (PVC container), 10% Invert Sugar (glass container), 5% Sodium Bicarbonate (glass container), Freamine III (glass container), Normosol-M in 5% Dextrose (glass and PVC containers), Ionosol-B in 5% Dextrose (glass container), 5% Mannitol (glass container), 10% Mannitol (glass container).

After the indicated stability time periods, unused portions of solutions should be discarded.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter before administration.

Ceftriaxone reconstituted with 5% Dextrose or 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution at concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL, and then stored in frozen state (-20°C) in PVC or polyolefin containers, remains stable for 26 weeks.

Frozen solutions of ceftriaxone for injection should be thawed at room temperature before use. After thawing, unused portions should be discarded. DO NOT REFREEZE.
Dobutamine Hydrochlorid...

Dobutamine Hydrochloride In Dextrose

Recommended Dosage

Dobutamine in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered intravenously through a suitable intravenous catheter or needle. A calibrated electronic infusion device is recommended for controlling the rate of flow in mL/hour or drops/minute.

Infusion of dobutamine should be started at a low rate (0.5-1.0 µg/kg/min) and titrated at intervals of a few minutes, guided by the patient’s response, including systemic blood pressure, urine flow, frequency of ectopic activity, heart rate, and (whenever possible) measurements of cardiac output, central venous pressure, and/or pulmonary capillary wedge pressure. In reported trials, the optimal infusion rates have varied from patient to patient, usually 2-20 µg/kg/min but sometimes slightly outside of this range. On rare occasions, infusion rates up to 40 µg/kg/min have been required to obtain the desired effect.

Rates of infusion in mL/hour for dobutamine hydrochloride concentrations of 500, 1,000, 2,000 and 4,000 mg/L are in Table 2.

This container system may be inappropriate for the dosage requirements of pediatric patients under 30 kg. Other dosage forms may be more appropriate.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Dobutamine in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP solutions may exhibit a pink color that, if present, will increase with time. This color change is due to slight oxidation of the drug, but there is no significant loss of potency.

The rate of administration and the duration of therapy should be adjusted according to the patient’s response, as determined by heart rate, presence of ectopic activity, blood pressure, urine flow, and, whenever possible, measurement of central venous or pulmonary wedge pressure and cardiac output.

Do not add supplementary medications to Dobutamine in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP. Do not administer Dobutamine in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP simultaneously with solutions containing sodium bicarbonate or strong alkaline solutions.
Table 2. Infusion Rate (mL/hr) of Dobutamine Hydrochloride in 5% Dextrose Injection
500 mcg/mL Patient’s Weight (kg)

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

0.5

0.3

0.6

1.2

1.8

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

6.6

1

0.6

1.2

2.4

3.6

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

11

12

13

2.5

1.5

3

6

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

5

3

6

12

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

7.5

4.5

9

18

27

36

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

10

6

12

24

36

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

12.5

7.5

15

30

45

60

75

90

105

120

135

150

165

15

9

18

36

54

72

90

108

126

144

162

180

198

17.5

11

21

42

63

84

105

126

147

168

189

210

231

20

12

24

48

72

96

120

144

168

192

216

240

264

1000 mcg/mL Patient’s Weight (kg)

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

0.5

0.15

0.3

0.6

0.9

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.4

2.7

3

3.3

1

0.3

0.6

1.2

1.8

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

6.6

2.5

0.75

1.5

3

4.5

6

7.5

9

11

12

14

15

17

5

1.5

3

6

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

7.5

2.3

4.5

9

14

18

23

27

32

36

41

45

50

10

3

6

12

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

12.5

3.8

7.5

15

23

30

38

45

53

60

68

75

83

15

4.5

9

18

27

36

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

17.5

5.3

11

21

32

42

53

63

74

84

95

105

116

20

6

12

24

36

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

2000 mcg/mL Patient’s Weight (kg)

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

0.5

0.08

0.15

0.3

0.45

0.6

0.75

0.9

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.5

1.7

1

0.15

0.3

0.6

0.9

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.4

2.7

3

3.3

2.5

0.38

0.75

1.5

2.3

3

3.8

4.5

5.3

6

6.8

7.5

8.3

5

0.75

1.5

3

4.5

6

7.5

9

11

12

14

15

17

7.5

1.1

2.3

4.5

6.8

9

11

14

16

18

20

23

25

10

1.5

3

6

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

12.5

1.9

3.8

7.5

11

15

19

23

26

30

34

38

41

15

2.3

4.5

9

14

18

23

27

32

36

41

45

50

17.5

2.6

5.3

11

16

21

26

32

37

42

47

53

58

20

3

6

12

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

4000 mcg/mL Patient’s Weight (kg)

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

0.5

0.04

0.08

0.15

0.23

0.3

0.38

0.45

0.53

0.6

0.68

0.75

0.83

1

0.08

0.15

0.3

0.45

0.6

0.75

0.9

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.5

1.7

2.5

0.19

0.38

0.75

1.1

1.5

1.9

2.3

2.6

3

3.4

3.8

4.1

5

0.38

0.75

1.5

2.3

3

3.8

4.5

5.3

6

6.8

7.5

8.3

7.5

0.56

1.1

2.3

3.4

4.5

5.6

6.8

7.9

9

10

11

12

10

0.75

1.5

3

4.5

6

7.5

9

11

12

14

15

17

12.5

0.94

1.9

3.8

5.6

7.5

9.4

11

13

15

17

19

21

15

1.1

2.3

4.5

6.8

9

11

14

16

18

20

23

25

17.5

1.3

2.6

5.3

7.9

11

13

16

18

21

24

26

29

20

1.5

3

6

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)
Close flow control clamp of administration set. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. Suspend container from hanger. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride for Injection Concentrate, USP must be diluted before administration. Care must be taken to ensure there is complete mixing of the potassium chloride with the large volume fluid, particularly if soft or bag type containers are used.

The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the specific condition of each patient.

If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium can be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration of up to 40 mEq/liter. The 24-hour total dose should not exceed 200 mEq.

If urgent treatment is indicated (serum potassium level less than 2.0 mEq/liter with electrocardiographic changes and/or muscle paralysis) potassium chloride may be infused very cautiously at a rate of up to 40 mEq/hour. In such cases, continuous cardiac monitoring is essential. As much as 400 mEq may be administered in a 24 hour period. In critical conditions, potassium chloride may be administered in saline (unless contraindicated), rather than in dextrose containing fluids, as dextrose may lower serum potassium levels.

Prior to entering vial, remove the metal seal and cleanse the rubber closure with a suitable antiseptic agent.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.

TO PREVENT NEEDLE-STICK INJURIES, NEEDLES SHOULD NOT BE RECAPPED, PURPOSELY BENT, OR BROKEN BY HAND.
Potassium Chloride In S...

Potassium Chloride In Sodium Chloride

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Cefuroxime

Cefuroxime

Dosage

Adults

The usual adult dosage range for cefuroxime for injection is 750 mg to 1.5 grams every 8 hours, usually for 5 to 10 days. In uncomplicated urinary tract infections, skin and skin-structure infections, disseminated gonococcal infections, and uncomplicated pneumonia, a 750 mg dose every 8 hours is recommended. In severe or complicated infections, a 1.5 gram dose every 8 hours is recommended.

In bone and joint infections, a 1.5 gram dose every 8 hours is recommended. In clinical trials, surgical intervention was performed when indicated as an adjunct to therapy with cefuroxime for injection. A course of oral antibiotics was administered when appropriate following the completion of parenteral administration of cefuroxime for injection.

In life-threatening infections or infections due to less susceptible organisms, 1.5 grams every 6 hours may be required. In bacterial meningitis, the dosage should not exceed 3 grams every 8 hours. The recommended dosage for uncomplicated gonococcal infection is 1.5 grams given intramuscularly as a single dose at 2 different sites together with 1 gram of oral probenecid. For preventive use for clean-contaminated or potentially contaminated surgical procedures, a 1.5 gram dose administered intravenously just before surgery (approximately one-half to 1 hour before the initial incision) is recommended. Thereafter, give 750 mg intravenously or intramuscularly every 8 hours when the procedure is prolonged.

For preventive use during open heart surgery, a 1.5 gram dose administered intravenously at the induction of anesthesia and every 12 hours thereafter for a total of 6 grams is recommended.

Impaired Renal Function

A reduced dosage must be employed when renal function is impaired. Dosage should be determined by the degree of renal impairment and the susceptibility of the causative organism (see Table 4).
Table 4. Dosage of Cefuroxime for Injection in Adults With Reduced Renal Function * Since cefuroxime is dialyzable, patients on hemodialysis should be given a further dose at the end of the dialysis.
Creatinine Clearance(mL/min)

Dose

Frequency

>20

750 mg to 1.5 grams

q8h

10 to 20

750 mg

q12h

<10

750 mg

q24h*

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula4 (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =

Weight (kg) x (140 - age)

72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Females: 0.85 x male value

Note

As with antibiotic therapy in general, administration of cefuroxime for injection should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours after the patient becomes asymptomatic or after evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained; a minimum of 10 days of treatment is recommended in infections caused by Streptococcus pyogenes in order to guard against the risk of rheumatic fever or glomerulonephritis; frequent bacteriologic and clinical appraisal is necessary during therapy of chronic urinary tract infection and may be required for several months after therapy has been completed; persistent infections may require treatment for several weeks; and doses smaller than those indicated above should not be used. In staphylococcal and other infections involving a collection of pus, surgical drainage should be carried out where indicated.

Pediatric Patients Above 3 Months of Age

Administration of 50 to 100 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 6 to 8 hours has been successful for most infections susceptible to cefuroxime. The higher dosage of 100 mg/kg/day (not to exceed the maximum adult dosage) should be used for the more severe or serious infections.

In bone and joint infections, 150 mg/kg/day (not to exceed the maximum adult dosage) is recommended in equally divided doses every 8 hours. In clinical trials, a course of oral antibiotics was administered to pediatric patients following the completion of parenteral administration of cefuroxime for injection.

In cases of bacterial meningitis, a larger dosage of cefuroxime for injection is recommended, 200 to 240 mg/kg/day intravenously in divided doses every 6 to 8 hours.

In pediatric patients with renal insufficiency, the frequency of dosing should be modified consistent with the recommendations for adults.

Preparation of Solution

The directions for preparing cefuroxime for injection for IV use is summarized in Table 5.

Each 1.5 gram vial should be constituted with 16 mL of Sterile Water for Injection, and the solution should be completely withdrawn for injection.
Table 5. Preparation of Solution
Strength

Amount of Diluent to Be Added (mL)

Volume to Be Withdrawn

ApproximateCefuroxime Concentration (mg/mL)

1.5 gram Vial

16 (IV)

Total

90

Administration

After constitution, cefuroxime for injection may be given intravenously.

Intravenous Administration

The IV route may be preferable for patients with bacterial septicemia or other severe or life-threatening infections or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance, particularly if shock is present or impending.

For direct intermittent IV administration, slowly inject the solution into a vein over a period of 3 to 5 minutes or give it through the tubing system by which the patient is also receiving other IV solutions.

For continuous IV infusion, a solution of cefuroxime for injection may be added to an IV infusion pack containing one of the following fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection; 5% Dextrose Injection; 10% Dextrose Injection; 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection; 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection; or 1/6 M Sodium Lactate Injection.

Solutions of cefuroxime for injection, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of aminoglycoside antibiotics because of potential interaction.

However, if concurrent therapy with cefuroxime for injection and an aminoglycoside is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately to the same patient.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer of the drug to be administered.

These parenterals should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Amiodarone Hydrochlorid...

Amiodarone Hydrochloride

Amiodarone shows considerable interindividual variation in response. Although a starting dose adequate to suppress life-threatening arrhythmias is needed, close monitoring with adjustment of dose is essential. The recommended starting dose of amiodarone is about 1000 mg over the first 24 hours of therapy, delivered by the following infusion regimen:
Table 1: AMIODARONE DOSE RECOMMENDATIONS: FIRST 24 HOURS
Loading

infusions

First Rapid:

150 mg over the FIRST 10 minutes (15 mg/min).

Add 3 mL of amiodarone (150 mg) to 100 mL D5W (concentration = 1.5 mg/mL). Infuse 100 mL over 10 minutes.

Followed by Slow:

360 mg over the NEXT 6 hours (1 mg/min).

Add 18 mL of amiodarone (900 mg) to 500 mL D5W (concentration = 1.8 mg/mL).

Maintenance infusion

540 mg over the REMAINING 18 hours (0.5 mg/min).

Decrease the rate of the slow loading infusion to 0.5 mg/min.

After the first 24 hours, continue the maintenance infusion rate of 0.5 mg/min (720 mg per 24 hours) utilizing a concentration of 1 to 6 mg/mL (Use a central venous catheter for amiodarone concentrations greater than 2 mg/mL). The rate of the maintenance infusion may be increased to achieve effective arrhythmia suppression.

In the event of breakthrough episodes of VF or hemodynamically unstable VT, use 150 mg supplemental infusions of amiodarone (mixed in 100 mL of D5W and infused over 10 minutes to minimize the potential for hypotension).

The first 24-hour dose may be individualized for each patient; however, in controlled clinical trials, mean daily doses above 2100 mg were associated with an increased risk of hypotension. Do not exceed an initial infusion rate of 30 mg/min.

Based on the experience from clinical studies of intravenous amiodarone, a maintenance infusion of up to 0.5 mg/min can be continued for 2 to 3 weeks regardless of the patient's age, renal function, or left ventricular function. There has been limited experience in patients receiving intravenous amiodarone for longer than 3 weeks.

The surface properties of solutions containing injectable amiodarone are altered such that the drop size may be reduced. This reduction may lead to underdosage of the patient by up to 30% if drop counter infusion sets are used. Amiodarone must be delivered by a volumetric infusion pump.

Administer amiodarone, whenever possible, through a central venous catheter dedicated to that purpose. Use an in-line filter during administration.

Intravenous amiodarone loading infusions at much higher concentrations and rates of infusion much faster than recommended have resulted in hepatocellular necrosis and acute renal failure, leading to death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Intravenous amiodarone concentrations greater than 3 mg/mL in D5W have been associated with a high incidence of peripheral vein phlebitis; however, concentrations of 2.5 mg/mL or less appear to be less irritating. Therefore, for infusions longer than 1 hour, do not exceed amiodarone concentrations of 2 mg/mL, unless a central venous catheter is used [see Adverse Reactions (6.2)].

Amiodarone infusions exceeding 2 hours must be administered in glass or polyolefin bottles containing D5W. Do not use evacuated glass containers for admixing, as incompatibility with a buffer in the container may cause precipitation.

Amiodarone adsorbs to polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubing, but all of the clinical experience has been with PVC tubing and the concentrations and rates of infusion provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION reflect dosing in these studies.

Amiodarone has been found to leach out plasticizers, including DEHP [di-(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate] from intravenous tubing (including PVC tubing). The degree of leaching increases when infusing amiodarone at higher concentrations and lower flow rates than provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION. Polysorbate 80, a component of amiodarone injection, is also known to leach DEHP from PVC [see Description (11)].

Amiodarone does not need to be protected from light during administration.

NOTE: Inspect parenteral drug products for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Table 2: AMIODARONE HCl SOLUTION STABILITY
Solution

Concentration

(mg/mL)

Container

Comments

5% Dextrose in Water (D5W)

1 – 6

PVC

Physically compatible, with amiodarone loss <10% at 2 hours at room temperature.

5% Dextrose in Water (D5W)

1 – 6

Polyolefin, Glass

Physically compatible, with no amiodarone loss at 24 hours at room temperature.

Admixture Incompatibility

Amiodarone in D5W is incompatible with the drugs shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Y-SITE INJECTION INCOMPATIBILITY
Drug

Vehicle

Amiodarone Concentration

Comments

Aminophylline

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Cefamandole Nafate

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Cefazolin Sodium

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Mezlocillin Sodium

D5W

4 mg/mL

Precipitate

Heparin Sodium

D5W

--

Precipitate

Sodium Bicarbonate

D5W

3 mg/mL

Precipitate

Intravenous to Oral Transition

Patients whose arrhythmias have been suppressed by amiodarone may be switched to oral amiodarone. When changing to oral amiodarone therapy, clinical monitoring is recommended, particularly for elderly patients. See package insert for oral amiodarone.

Since grapefruit juice is known to inhibit CYP3A-mediated metabolism of oral amiodarone in the intestinal mucosa, resulting in increased plasma levels of amiodarone, do not drink grapefruit juice during treatment with oral amiodarone [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Table 4 provides suggested doses of oral amiodarone to be initiated after varying durations of amiodarone administration. These recommendations are made on the basis of a similar total body amount of amiodarone delivered by the intravenous and oral routes, based on 50% bioavailability of oral amiodarone.
Table 4: RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ORAL DOSAGE AFTER INTRAVENOUS INFUSION
Duration of Amiodarone Infusion#

Initial Daily Dose of Oral Amiodarone

<1 week

800-1600 mg

1-3 weeks

600-800 mg

>3 weeks*

400 mg

# Assuming a 720 mg/day infusion (0.5 mg/min).

*Intravenous amiodarone is not intended for maintenance treatment.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

Following suitable admixture of prescribed additive, the dose is usually dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Lisinopril

Lisinopril

Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is for intravenous use only. Gemcitabine for Injection, USP may be administered on an outpatient basis.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Carboplatin AUC 4 should be administered intravenously on Day 1 after gemcitabine administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications Gemcitabine dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity within a cycle of treatment is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, gemcitabine dosage should be modified according to guidelines in Table 1.
Table 1: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine in Combination with Carboplatin Absolute granulocyte count(x 106/L) Platelet count (x 106/L) % of full dose
≥1500

and

≥100,000

100

1000-1499

and/or

75,000-99,999

50

<1000

and/or

<75,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except nausea/vomiting, therapy with gemcitabine should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For carboplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

Dose adjustment for gemcitabine in combination with carboplatin for subsequent cycles is based upon observed toxicity. The dose of gemcitabine in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8 in case of any of the following hematologic toxicities:
• Absolute granulocyte count <500 x 10 6/L for more than 5 days • Absolute granulocyte count <100 x 10 6/L for more than 3 days • Febrile neutropenia • Platelets <25,000 x 10 6/L • Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity
If any of the above toxicities recur after the initial dose reduction, for the subsequent cycle, gemcitabine should be given on Day 1 only at 800 mg/m2.

2.2 Breast Cancer

Gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3-hour intravenous infusion before gemcitabine administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications Gemcitabine dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, gemcitabine dosage should be modified according to the guidelines in Table 2.
Table 2: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine in Combination with Paclitaxel
Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L)

Platelet count (x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1200

and

>75,000

100

1000-1199

or

50,000-75,000

75

700-999

and

≥50,000

50

<700

or

<50,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with gemcitabine should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For paclitaxel dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Two schedules have been investigated and the optimum schedule has not been determined [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. With the 4-week schedule, gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 of each 28-day cycle. Cisplatin should be administered intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine. With the 3-week schedule, gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Cisplatin at a dose of 100 mg/m2 should be administered intravenously after the infusion of gemcitabine on Day 1. See prescribing information for cisplatin administration and hydration guidelines.

Dose Modifications Dosage adjustments for hematologic toxicity may be required for gemcitabine and for cisplatin. Gemcitabine dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on the day of therapy. Patients receiving gemcitabine should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet counts. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3. For cisplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with gemcitabine plus cisplatin should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. During combination therapy with cisplatin, serum creatinine, serum potassium, serum calcium, and serum magnesium should be carefully monitored (Grade 3/4 serum creatinine toxicity for gemcitabine plus cisplatin was 5% versus 2% for cisplatin alone).

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Gemcitabine should be administered by intravenous infusion at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes once weekly for up to 7 weeks (or until toxicity necessitates reducing or holding a dose), followed by a week of rest from treatment. Subsequent cycles should consist of infusions once weekly for 3 consecutive weeks out of every 4 weeks.

Dose Modifications Dosage adjustment is based upon the degree of hematologic toxicity experienced by the patient [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Clearance in women and the elderly is reduced and women were somewhat less able to progress to subsequent cycles [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients receiving gemcitabine should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3.
Table 3: Dosage Reduction Guidelines
Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L)

Platelet count (x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

and

≥100,000

100

500-999

or

50,000-99,999

75

<500

or

<50,000

Hold

Laboratory evaluation of renal and hepatic function, including transaminases and serum creatinine, should be performed prior to initiation of therapy and periodically thereafter. Gemcitabine should be administered with caution in patients with evidence of significant renal or hepatic impairment as there is insufficient information from clinical studies to allow clear dose recommendation for these patient populations.

Patients treated with gemcitabine who complete an entire cycle of therapy may have the dose for subsequent cycles increased by 25%, provided that the absolute granulocyte count (AGC) and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and if non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1. If patients tolerate the subsequent course of gemcitabine at the increased dose, the dose for the next cycle can be further increased by 20%, provided again that the AGC and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and that non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1.

2.5 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Caution should be exercised in handling and preparing gemcitabine solutions. The use of gloves is recommended. If gemcitabine solution contacts the skin or mucosa, immediately wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water. Although acute dermal irritation has not been observed in animal studies, 2 of 3 rabbits exhibited drug-related systemic toxicities (death, hypoactivity, nasal discharge, shallow breathing) due to dermal absorption.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anti-cancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published [see References (15)].

2.6 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

The recommended diluent for reconstitution of Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection without preservatives. Due to solubility considerations, the maximum concentration for gemcitabine upon reconstitution is 40 mg/mL. Reconstitution at concentrations greater than 40 mg/mL may result in incomplete dissolution, and should be avoided.

To reconstitute, add 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to the 2 g vial. Shake to dissolve. This dilution yields a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL which includes accounting for the displacement volume of the lyophilized powder (2.6 mL for the 2 g vial). The total volume upon reconstitution will be 52.6 mL. Complete withdrawal of the vial contents will provide 2 g of gemcitabine, respectively. The appropriate amount of drug may be administered as prepared or further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to concentrations as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

Reconstituted Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is a clear and colorless to light straw-colored solution. After reconstitution with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, the pH of the resulting solution lies in the range of 2.7 to 3.3. The solution should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, prior to administration, whenever solution or container permit. If particulate matter or discoloration is found, do not administer.

When prepared as directed, gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion. Solutions of reconstituted gemcitabine should not be refrigerated, as crystallization may occur.

The compatibility of gemcitabine with other drugs has not been studied. No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Carboplatin AUC 4 should be administered intravenously on Day 1 after gemcitabine administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications Gemcitabine dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity within a cycle of treatment is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, gemcitabine dosage should be modified according to guidelines in Table 1.
Table 1: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine in Combination with Carboplatin Absolute granulocyte count(x 106/L) Platelet count (x 106/L) % of full dose
≥1500

and

≥100,000

100

1000-1499

and/or

75,000-99,999

50

<1000

and/or

<75,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except nausea/vomiting, therapy with gemcitabine should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For carboplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

Dose adjustment for gemcitabine in combination with carboplatin for subsequent cycles is based upon observed toxicity. The dose of gemcitabine in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8 in case of any of the following hematologic toxicities:
• Absolute granulocyte count <500 x 10 6/L for more than 5 days • Absolute granulocyte count <100 x 10 6/L for more than 3 days • Febrile neutropenia • Platelets <25,000 x 10 6/L • Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity
If any of the above toxicities recur after the initial dose reduction, for the subsequent cycle, gemcitabine should be given on Day 1 only at 800 mg/m2.

2.2 Breast Cancer

Gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3-hour intravenous infusion before gemcitabine administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications Gemcitabine dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, gemcitabine dosage should be modified according to the guidelines in Table 2.
Table 2: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine in Combination with Paclitaxel
Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L)

Platelet count (x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1200

and

>75,000

100

1000-1199

or

50,000-75,000

75

700-999

and

≥50,000

50

<700

or

<50,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with gemcitabine should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For paclitaxel dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Two schedules have been investigated and the optimum schedule has not been determined [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. With the 4-week schedule, gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 of each 28-day cycle. Cisplatin should be administered intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine. With the 3-week schedule, gemcitabine should be administered intravenously at 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Cisplatin at a dose of 100 mg/m2 should be administered intravenously after the infusion of gemcitabine on Day 1. See prescribing information for cisplatin administration and hydration guidelines.

Dose Modifications Dosage adjustments for hematologic toxicity may be required for gemcitabine and for cisplatin. Gemcitabine dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on the day of therapy. Patients receiving gemcitabine should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet counts. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3. For cisplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with gemcitabine plus cisplatin should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. During combination therapy with cisplatin, serum creatinine, serum potassium, serum calcium, and serum magnesium should be carefully monitored (Grade 3/4 serum creatinine toxicity for gemcitabine plus cisplatin was 5% versus 2% for cisplatin alone).

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Gemcitabine should be administered by intravenous infusion at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes once weekly for up to 7 weeks (or until toxicity necessitates reducing or holding a dose), followed by a week of rest from treatment. Subsequent cycles should consist of infusions once weekly for 3 consecutive weeks out of every 4 weeks.

Dose Modifications Dosage adjustment is based upon the degree of hematologic toxicity experienced by the patient [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Clearance in women and the elderly is reduced and women were somewhat less able to progress to subsequent cycles [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients receiving gemcitabine should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3.
Table 3: Dosage Reduction Guidelines
Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L)

Platelet count (x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

and

≥100,000

100

500-999

or

50,000-99,999

75

<500

or

<50,000

Hold

Laboratory evaluation of renal and hepatic function, including transaminases and serum creatinine, should be performed prior to initiation of therapy and periodically thereafter. Gemcitabine should be administered with caution in patients with evidence of significant renal or hepatic impairment as there is insufficient information from clinical studies to allow clear dose recommendation for these patient populations.

Patients treated with gemcitabine who complete an entire cycle of therapy may have the dose for subsequent cycles increased by 25%, provided that the absolute granulocyte count (AGC) and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and if non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1. If patients tolerate the subsequent course of gemcitabine at the increased dose, the dose for the next cycle can be further increased by 20%, provided again that the AGC and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and that non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1.

2.5 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Caution should be exercised in handling and preparing gemcitabine solutions. The use of gloves is recommended. If gemcitabine solution contacts the skin or mucosa, immediately wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water. Although acute dermal irritation has not been observed in animal studies, 2 of 3 rabbits exhibited drug-related systemic toxicities (death, hypoactivity, nasal discharge, shallow breathing) due to dermal absorption.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anti-cancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published [see References (15)].

2.6 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

The recommended diluent for reconstitution of Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection without preservatives. Due to solubility considerations, the maximum concentration for gemcitabine upon reconstitution is 40 mg/mL. Reconstitution at concentrations greater than 40 mg/mL may result in incomplete dissolution, and should be avoided.

To reconstitute, add 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to the 2 g vial. Shake to dissolve. This dilution yields a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL which includes accounting for the displacement volume of the lyophilized powder (2.6 mL for the 2 g vial). The total volume upon reconstitution will be 52.6 mL. Complete withdrawal of the vial contents will provide 2 g of gemcitabine, respectively. The appropriate amount of drug may be administered as prepared or further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to concentrations as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

Reconstituted Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is a clear and colorless to light straw-colored solution. After reconstitution with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, the pH of the resulting solution lies in the range of 2.7 to 3.3. The solution should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, prior to administration, whenever solution or container permit. If particulate matter or discoloration is found, do not administer.

When prepared as directed, gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion. Solutions of reconstituted gemcitabine should not be refrigerated, as crystallization may occur.

The compatibility of gemcitabine with other drugs has not been studied. No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.
Vitamin K1

Vitamin K1

Whenever possible, Vitamin K1 Injection (Phytonadione Injectable Emulsion, USP) should be given by the subcutaneous route. (See Box Warning.) When intravenous administration is considered unavoidable, the drug should be injected very slowly, not exceeding 1 mg per minute.

Protect from light at all times.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Directions for Dilution

Vitamin K1 Injection may be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or 5% Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection. Benzyl alcohol as a preservative has been associated with toxicity in newborns. Therefore, all of the above diluents should be preservative-free (see WARNINGS). Other diluents should not be used. When dilutions are indicated, administration should be started immediately after mixture with the diluent, and unused portions of the dilution should be discarded, as well as unused contents of the ampul.

Prophylaxis of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that vitamin K1 be given to the newborn. A single intramuscular dose of Vitamin K1 Injection 0.5 to 1 mg within one hour of birth is recommended.

Treatment of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

Empiric administration of vitamin K1 should not replace proper laboratory evaluation of the coagulation mechanism. A prompt response (shortening of the prothrombin time in 2 to 4 hours) following administration of vitamin K1 is usually diagnostic of hemorrhagic disease of the newborn, and failure to respond indicates another diagnosis or coagulation disorder.

Vitamin K1 Injection 1 mg should be given either subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oral anticoagulants.

Whole blood or component therapy may be indicated if bleeding is excessive. This therapy, however, does not correct the underlying disorder and Vitamin K1 Injection should be given concurrently.

Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency in Adults

To correct excessively prolonged prothrombin time caused by oral anticoagulant therapy—2.5 to 10 mg or up to 25 mg initially is recommended. In rare instances 50 mg may be required. Frequency and amount of subsequent doses should be determined by prothrombin time response or clinical condition (see WARNINGS). If in 6 to 8 hours after parenteral administration the prothrombin time has not been shortened satisfactorily, the dose should be repeated.
Vitamin K1 Injection (Phytonadione Injectable Emulsion, USP) Summary of Dosage Guidelines (See circular text for details)
Newborns

Dosage

Hemorrhagic Disease

    of the Newborn

    Prophylaxis

0.5 to 1 mg IM within 1 hour of birth

    Treatment

1 mg SC or IM

(Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oral anticoagulants)

Adults

Initial Dosage

Anticoagulant-Induced

Prothrombin Deficiency

(caused by coumarin or indanedione derivatives)

2.5 mg to 10 mg or

up to 25 mg

(rarely 50 mg)

Hypoprothrombinemia

Due to other causes

(Antibiotics; Salicylates or other drugs; Factors limiting absorption or synthesis)

2.5 mg to 25 mg or

more (rarely up to

50 mg)

In the event of shock or excessive blood loss, the use of whole blood or component therapy is indicated.

Hypoprothrombinemia Due to Other Causes in Adults

A dosage of 2.5 to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) is recommended, the amount and route of administration depending upon the severity of the condition and response obtained.

If possible, discontinuation or reduction of the dosage of drugs interfering with coagulation mechanisms (such as salicylates; antibiotics) is suggested as an alternative to administering concurrent Vitamin K1 Injection. The severity of the coagulation disorder should determine whether the immediate administration of Vitamin K1 Injection is required in addition to discontinuation or reduction of interfering drugs.
Tazicef

Tazicef

Dosage: The usual adult dosage is 1 gram administered intravenously or intramuscularly every 8 to 12 hours. The dosage and route should be determined by the susceptibility of the causative organisms, the severity of infection, and the condition and renal function of the patient.

The guidelines for dosage of Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) are listed in Table 5. The following dosage schedule is recommended.
Table 5. Recommended Dosage Schedule * Although clinical improvement has been shown, bacteriologic cures cannot be expected in patients with chronic respiratory disease and cystic fibrosis. † The higher dose should be reserved for immunocompromised pediatric patients or pediatric patients with cystic fibrosis or meningitis.
Dose

Frequency

Adults

Usual recommended dosage

1 gram IV or IM

q8 - 12hr

Uncomplicated urinary tract infections

250 mg IV or IM

q12hr

Bone and joint infections

2 grams IV

q12hr

Complicated urinary tract infections

500 mg IV or IM

q8 - 12hr

Uncomplicated pneumonia; mild skin andskin-structure infections

500 mg to 1 gram

IV or IM

q8hr

Serious gynecologic and intra-abdominalinfections

2 grams IV

q8hr

Meningitis

2 grams IV

q8hr

Very severe life-threatening infections,especially in immunocompromised patients

2 grams IV

q8hr

Lung infections caused by Pseudomonas spp.in patients with cystic fibrosis with normalrenal function*

30 to 50 mg/kg IV

to a maximum

of 6 grams/day

q8hr

Neonates (0 to 4 weeks)

30 mg/kg IV

q12hr

Infants and children(1 month to 12 years)

30 to 50 mg/kg IV

to a maximum

of 6 grams per day†

q8hr

Impaired Hepatic Function

No adjustment in dosage is required for patients with hepatic dysfunction.

Impaired Renal Function

Ceftazidime is excreted by the kidneys, almost exclusively by glomerular filtration. Therefore, in patients with impaired renal function (glomerular filtration rate [GFR] <50 mL/min), it is recommended that the dosage of ceftazidime be reduced to compensate for its slower excretion. In patients with suspected renal insufficiency, an initial loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime may be given. An estimate of GFR should be made to determine the appropriate maintenance dosage. The recommended dosage is presented in Table 6.
Table 6. Recommended Maintenance Dosages of Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) in Renal Insufficiency
NOTE: IF THE DOSE RECOMMENDED IN TABLE 5 ABOVE IS LOWER THAN THAT RECOMMENDED FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY AS OUTLINED IN TABLE 6, THE LOWER DOSE SHOULD BE USED.

Creatinine Clearance(mL/min)

Recommended Unit Doseof Tazicef

Frequency ofDosing

50 to 31

1 gram

q12h

30 to 16

1 gram

q24h

15 to 6

500 mg

q24h

<5

500 mg

q48h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft’s equation)5 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =                             [Weight (kg) x (140 - age)]                                                                                                    [72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)]

Females: 0.85 x male value

In patients with severe infections who would normally receive 6 grams of Tazicef daily were it not for renal insufficiency, the unit dose given in the table above may be increased by 50% or the dosing frequency may be increased appropriately. Further dosing should be determined by therapeutic monitoring, severity of the infection and susceptibility of the causative organism.

In pediatric patients as for adults, the creatinine clearance should be adjusted for body surface area or lean body mass, and the dosing frequency should be reduced in cases of renal insufficiency.

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, a loading dose of 1 gram is recommended, followed by 1 gram after each hemodialysis period.

Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) can also be used in patients undergoing intraperitoneal dialysis and continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis. In such patients, a loading dose of 1 gram of Tazicef may be given, followed by 500 mg every 24 hours. In addition to IV use, Tazicef can be incorporated in the dialysis fluid at a concentration of 250 mg for 2 liters of dialysis fluid.

Note: Generally Tazicef should be continued for 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared, but in complicated infections longer therapy may be required.

Administration

Tazicef may be given intravenously. Intra-arterial administration should be avoided (see PRECAUTIONS).

Note: Tazicef in ADD-Vantage® vials is not intended for direct IV or IM injection.

Intravenous Administration

The IV route is preferable for patients with bacterial septicemia, bacterial meningitis, peritonitis, or other severe or life-threatening infections, or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance resulting from such debilitating conditions as malnutrition, trauma, surgery, diabetes, heart failure, or malignancy, particularly if shock is present or pending.

ADD-Vantage® vials are to be constituted only with 50 or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 50 mL of 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection in ADD-Vantage® diluent (see Instructions for Constitution). ADD-Vantage® vials should be reconstituted only when it is certain that the patient is ready to receive the drug. Tazicef in ADD-Vantage® vials is stable for 24 hours at room temperature.

Intermittent intravenous infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing ceftazidime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Note: Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) in the ADD-Vantage® vial is intended to be administered as a single-dose intravenous infusion with the ADD-Vantage® flexible diluent container.

All vials of Tazicef as supplied are under reduced pressure. When Tazicef is dissolved, carbon dioxide is released and a positive pressure develops. For ease of use please follow the recommended techniques of constitution described on the instructions for use section of this insert.

Solutions of Tazicef, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of aminoglycoside antibiotics because of potential interaction.

However, if concurrent therapy with Tazicef and an aminoglycoside is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately to the same patient.
Tazicef

Tazicef

PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE – NOT FOR DIRECT INFUSION

NOTE: The Pharmacy Bulk Package is intended for preparing IV admixtures only. Dosage recommendations for intramuscular or intravenous injection and intraperitoneal use are for informational purposes only.

Dosage: The usual adult dosage is 1 gram administered intravenously every 8 to 12 hours. The dosage and route should be determined by the susceptibility of the causative organisms, the severity of infection, and the condition and renal function of the patient.

The guidelines for dosage of Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) are listed in Table 5. The following dosage schedule is recommended.
Table 5. Recommended Dosage Schedule * Although clinical improvement has been shown, bacteriologic cures cannot be expected in patients with chronic respiratory disease and cystic fibrosis. † The higher dose should be reserved for immunocompromised pediatric patients or pediatric patients with cystic fibrosis or meningitis.
Dose

Frequency

Adults

Usual recommended dosage

1 gram IV or IM

q8-12hr

Uncomplicated urinary tract infections

250 mg IV or IM

q12hr

Bone and joint infections

2 grams IV

q12hr

Complicated urinary tract infections

500 mg IV or IM

q8-12hr

Uncomplicated pneumonia; mild skin and

skin-structure infections

500 mg to 1 gram

IV or IM

q8hr

Serious gynecologic and

intra-abdominal infections

2 grams IV

q8hr

Meningitis

2 grams IV

q8hr

Very severe life-threatening infections,

especially in immunocompromised patients

2 grams IV

q8hr

Lung infections caused by Pseudomonas

spp. in patients with cystic fibrosis with

normal renal function*

30 to 50 mg/kg IV

to a maximum

of 6 grams per day

q8hr

Neonates (0 – 4 weeks)

30 mg/kg IV

q12hr

Infants and children

(1 month – 12 years)

30 to 50 mg/kg IV

to a maximum

of 6 grams per day†

q8hr

Impaired Hepatic Function

No adjustment in dosage is required for patients with hepatic dysfunction.

Impaired Renal Function

Ceftazidime is excreted by the kidneys, almost exclusively by glomerular filtration. Therefore, in patients with impaired renal function (glomerular filtration rate [GFR] <50 mL/min), it is recommended that the dosage of ceftazidime be reduced to compensate for its slower excretion. In patients with suspected renal insufficiency, an initial loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime may be given. An estimate of GFR should be made to determine the appropriate maintenance dosage. The recommended dosage is presented in Table 6.
Table 6. Recommended Maintenance Dosages of Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) in Renal Insufficiency
NOTE: IF THE DOSE RECOMMENDED IN TABLE 5 ABOVE IS LOWER THAN THAT RECOMMENDED FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY AS OUTLINED IN TABLE 6, THE LOWER DOSE SHOULD BE USED.

Creatinine

Clearance

(mL/min)

Recommended

Unit Dose of

Tazicef

Frequency

of Dosing

50 to 31

30 to 16

15 to 6

<5

1 gram

1 gram

500 mg

500 mg

q12hr

q24hr

q24hr

q48hr

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft’s equation)4 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =                 [Weight (kg) x (140 - age)]                                                                                        [72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)]

Females: 0.85 x male value

In patients with severe infections who would normally receive 6 grams of Tazicef daily were it not for renal insufficiency, the unit dose given in the table above may be increased by 50% or the dosing frequency may be increased appropriately. Further dosing should be determined by therapeutic monitoring, severity of the infection, and susceptibility of the causative organism.

In pediatric patients as for adults, the creatinine clearance should be adjusted for body surface area or lean body mass, and the dosing frequency should be reduced in cases of renal insufficiency.

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, a loading dose of 1 gram is recommended, followed by 1 gram after each hemodialysis period.

Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) can also be used in patients undergoing intra-peritoneal dialysis and continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis. In such patients, a loading dose of 1 gram of Tazicef may be given, followed by 500 mg every 24 hours.

Note: Generally Tazicef should be continued for 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared, but in complicated infections longer therapy may be required.

Administration

Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a pharmacy admixture service only. Refer to Table 7. See above NOTE concerning the proper use of Pharmacy Bulk Packages.

Intravenous Administration

The IV route is preferable for patients with bacterial septicemia, bacterial meningitis, peritonitis, or other severe or life-threatening infections, or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance resulting from such debilitating conditions as malnutrition, trauma, surgery, diabetes, heart failure, or malignancy, particularly if shock is present or pending.

Intermittent IV infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing ceftazidime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table.
Table 7. Preparation of Solutions of Tazicef
Diluent to Be Added

Approx. Avail. Volume

Approx. Avg. Concentration

26 mL

56 mL

30 mL

60 mL

1 gram/5 mL

1 gram/10 mL

All vials of Tazicef as supplied are under reduced pressure. When Tazicef is dissolved, carbon dioxide is released and a positive pressure develops.

Solutions of Tazicef, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of aminoglycoside antibiotics because of potential interaction.

However, if concurrent therapy with Tazicef and an aminoglycoside is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately to the same patient.

Directions for Use of Pharmacy Bulk Packages:

Note: The Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a pharmacy admixture service only. Using aseptic technique, the closure should be penetrated only 1 time after reconstitution using a sterile dispensing set which allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. The withdrawal of container contents should be accomplished without delay. THE ENTIRE CONTENTS OF THE VIAL SHOULD BE DISPENSED WITHIN 4 HOURS OF INITIAL ENTRY.

A plastic bail attached to the Pharmacy Bulk Package provides a suitable hanging device while dispensing in the pharmacy.

Reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to Table 7.

The vacuum may assist entry of the diluent. SHAKE WELL.

Insert a gas relief needle through the vial closure to relieve the internal pressure. Remove the gas relief needle before extracting any solution.
Nitropress

Nitropress

Dilution to proper strength for infusion: Depending on the desired concentration, the solution containing 50 mg of NITROPRESS must be further diluted in 250-1000 mL of sterile 5% dextrose injection. The diluted solution should be protected from light, using the supplied opaque sleeve, aluminum foil, or other opaque material. It is not necessary to cover the infusion drip chamber or the tubing.

Verification of the chemical integrity of the product: Sodium nitroprusside solution can be inactivated by reactions with trace contaminants. The products of these reactions are often blue, green, or red, much brighter than the faint brownish color of unreacted NITROPRESS. Discolored solutions, or solutions in which particulate matter is visible, should not be used. If properly protected from light, the freshly diluted solution is stable for 24 hours.

No other drugs should be administered in the same solution with sodium nitroprusside.

Avoidance of excessive hypotension: While the average effective rate in adult and pediatric patients is about 3 mcg/kg/min, some patients will become dangerously hypotensive when they receive NITROPRESS at this rate. Infusion of sodium nitroprusside should therefore be started at a very low rate (0.3 mcg/kg/min), with upward titration every few minutes until the desired effect is achieved or the maximum recommended infusion rate (10 mcg/kg/min) has been reached.

Because sodium nitroprusside’s hypotensive effect is very rapid in onset and in dissipation, small variations in infusion rate can lead to wide, undesirable variations in blood pressure. Since there is inherent variation in blood pressure measurement, confirm the drug effect at any infusion rate after an additional 5 minutes before titrating to a higher dose to achieve the desired blood pressure. Sodium nitroprusside should not be infused through ordinary I.V. apparatus, regulated only by gravity and mechanical clamps. Only an infusion pump, preferably a volumetric pump, should be used.

Because sodium nitroprusside can induce essentially unlimited blood-pressure reduction, the blood pressure of a patient receiving this drug must be continuously monitored, using either a continually reinflated sphygmomanometer or (preferably) an intra-arterial pressure sensor. Special caution should be used in elderly patients, since they may be more sensitive to the hypotensive effects of the drug.

When sodium nitroprusside is used in the treatment of acute congestive heart failure, titration of the infusion rate must be guided by the results of invasive hemodynamic monitoring with simultaneous monitoring of urine output. Sodium nitroprusside can be titrated by increasing the infusion rate until:
measured cardiac output is no longer increasing, systemic blood pressure cannot be further reduced without compromising the perfusion of vital organs, or the maximum recommended infusion rate has been reached, whichever comes earliest. Specific hemodynamic goals must be tailored to the clinical situation, but improvements in cardiac output and left ventricular filling pressure must not be purchased at the price of undue hypotension and consequent hypoperfusion.
Table 2 below shows the infusion rates corresponding to the recommended initial and maximal doses (0.3 mcg/kg/min and 10 mcg/kg/min, respectively) for both adult and pediatric patients of various weights. This infusion rate may be lower than indicated in the table for patients less than 10 kg. Note that when the concentration used in a given patient is changed, the tubing is still filled with a solution at the previous concentration.
Table 2: Infusion Rates (mL/hour) to Achieve Initial (0.3 mcg/kg/min) and Maximal (10 mcg/kg/min) Dosing of NITROPRESS
Volume

NITROPRESS

concentration

250 mL

50 mg

        200 mcg/mL

500 mL

50 mg

        100 mcg/mL

1000 mL

   50 mg

           50 mcg/mL

      pt

weight

     kg

      lbs

init

max

init

max

init

max

   10

22

1

30

2

60

4

120

   20

44

2

60

4

120

7

240

   30

66

3

90

5

180

11

360

   40

88

4

120

7

240

14

480

   50

    110

5

150

9

300

18

600

   60

    132

5

180

11

360

22

720

   70

    154

6

210

13

420

25

840

   80

    176

7

240

14

480

29

960

   90

    198

8

270

16

540

32

1080

   100

    220

9

300

18

600

36

1200

Avoidance of cyanide toxicity: As described in CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY above, when more than 500 mcg/kg of sodium nitroprusside is administered faster than 2 mcg/kg/min, cyanide is generated faster than the unaided patient can eliminate it. Administration of sodium thiosulfate has been shown to increase the rate of cyanide processing, reducing the hazard of cyanide toxicity. Although toxic reactions to sodium thiosulfate have not been reported, the co-infusion regimen has not been extensively studied, and it cannot be recommended without reservation. In one study, sodium thiosulfate appeared to potentiate the hypotensive effects of sodium nitroprusside.

Co-infusions of sodium thiosulfate have been administered at rates of 5-10 times that of sodium nitroprusside. Care must be taken to avoid the indiscriminate use of prolonged or high doses of sodium nitroprusside with sodium thiosulfate as this may result in thiocyanate toxicity and hypovolemia. Incautious administration of sodium nitroprusside must still be avoided, and all of the precautions concerning sodium nitroprusside administration must still be observed.

Consideration of methemoglobinemia and thiocyanate toxicity: Rare patients receiving more than 10 mg/kg of sodium nitroprusside will develop methemoglobinemia; other patients, especially those with impaired renal function, will predictably develop thiocyanate toxicity after prolonged, rapid infusions. In accordance with the descriptions in ADVERSE REACTIONS above, patients with suggestive findings should be tested for these toxicities.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Tazicef

Tazicef

Dosage: The usual adult dosage is 1 gram administered intravenously or intramuscularly every 8 to 12 hours. The dosage and route should be determined by the susceptibility of the causative organisms, the severity of infection, and the condition and renal function of the patient.

The guidelines for dosage of Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) are listed in Table 5. The following dosage schedule is recommended.
Table 5. Recommended Dosage Schedule * Although clinical improvement has been shown, bacteriologic cures cannot be expected in patients with chronic respiratory disease and cystic fibrosis. † The higher dose should be reserved for immunocompromised pediatric patients or pediatric patients with cystic fibrosis or meningitis.
Dose

Frequency

Adults

Usual recommended dosage

1 gram IV or IM

q8-12hr

Uncomplicated urinary tract infections

250 mg IV or IM

q12hr

Bone and joint infections

2 grams IV

q12hr

Complicated urinary tract infections

500 mg IV or IM

q8-12hr

Uncomplicated pneumonia; mild skin and

skin-structure infections

500 mg to 1 gram

IV or IM

q8hr

Serious gynecologic andintra-abdominal infections

2 grams IV

q8hr

Meningitis

2 grams IV

q8hr

Very severe life-threatening infections,especially in immunocompromised patients

2 grams IV

q8hr

Lung infections caused by

Pseudomonas spp. in patients with cystic

fibrosis with normal renal function*

30 to 50 mg/kg IV

to a maximum

of 6 grams per day

q8hr

Neonates (0 – 4 weeks)

30 mg/kg IV

q12hr

Infants and children

(1 month – 12 years)

30 to 50 mg/kg IV

to a maximum

of 6 grams per day†

q8hr

Impaired Hepatic Function

No adjustment in dosage is required for patients with hepatic dysfunction.

Impaired Renal Function

Ceftazidime is excreted by the kidneys, almost exclusively by glomerular filtration. Therefore, in patients with impaired renal function (glomerular filtration rate [GFR] <50 mL/min), it is recommended that the dosage of ceftazidime be reduced to compensate for its slower excretion. In patients with suspected renal insufficiency, an initial loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime may be given. An estimate of GFR should be made to determine the appropriate maintenance dosage. The recommended dosage is presented in Table 6.
Table 6. Recommended Maintenance Dosages of Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) in Renal Insufficiency
NOTE: IF THE DOSE RECOMMENDED IN TABLE 5 ABOVE IS LOWER THAN THAT RECOMMENDED FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY AS OUTLINED IN TABLE 6, THE LOWER DOSE SHOULD BE USED.

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min)

Recommended Unit Dose of

Tazicef

Frequency of Dosing

50 to 31

1 gram

q12hr

30 to 16

1 gram

q24hr

15 to 6

500 mg

q24hr

<5

500 mg

q48hr

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft’s equation)4 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =                               [Weight (kg) x (140 - age)]                                                                                                              [ 72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)]

Females: 0.85 x male value

In patients with severe infections who would normally receive 6 grams of Tazicef daily were it not for renal insufficiency, the unit dose given in the table above may be increased by 50% or the dosing frequency may be increased appropriately. Further dosing should be determined by therapeutic monitoring, severity of the infection, and susceptibility of the causative organism.

In pediatric patients as for adults, the creatinine clearance should be adjusted for body surface area or lean body mass, and the dosing frequency should be reduced in cases of renal insufficiency.

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, a loading dose of 1 gram is recommended, followed by 1 gram after each hemodialysis period.

Tazicef (ceftazidime for injection, USP) can also be used in patients undergoing intraperitoneal dialysis and continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis. In such patients, a loading dose of 1 gram of Tazicef may be given, followed by 500 mg every 24 hours. In addition to IV use, Tazicef can be incorporated in the dialysis fluid at a concentration of 250 mg for 2 L of dialysis fluid.

Note: Generally Tazicef should be continued for 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared, but in complicated infections longer therapy may be required.

Administration

Tazicef may be given intravenously or by deep IM injection into a large muscle mass such as the upper outer quadrant of the gluteus maximus or lateral part of the thigh. Intra-arterial administration should be avoided (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intramuscular Administration

For IM administration, Tazicef should be reconstituted with one of the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, or 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection. Refer to Table 7.

Intravenous Administration

The IV route is preferable for patients with bacterial septicemia, bacterial meningitis, peritonitis, or other severe or life-threatening infections, or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance resulting from such debilitating conditions as malnutrition, trauma, surgery, diabetes, heart failure, or malignancy, particularly if shock is present or pending.

For direct intermittent IV administration, reconstitute Tazicef as directed in Table 7 with Sterile Water for Injection. Slowly inject directly into the vein over a period of 3 to 5 minutes or give through the tubing of an administration set while the patient is also receiving one of the compatible IV fluids (see COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY).

For IV infusion, reconstitute the 1-gram or 2-gram vial and add an appropriate quantity of the resulting solution to an IV container with one of the compatible IV fluids listed under the COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY section.

Intermittent intravenous infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing ceftazidime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.
Table 7. Preparation of Solutions of Tazicef
Vial

Size

Amount of

Diluent to

Be Added

Approximate

Available Volume

Approximate

Ceftazidime

Concentration

Intramuscular

1 gram

3.0 mL

3.6 mL

280 mg/mL

Intravenous Infusion

1 gram

10 mL

10.6 mL

95 mg/mL

2 gram

10 mL

11.2 mL

180 mg/mL

All vials of Tazicef as supplied are under reduced pressure. When Tazicef is dissolved, carbon dioxide is released and a positive pressure develops.

Solutions of Tazicef, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of aminoglycoside antibiotics because of potential interaction.

However, if concurrent therapy with Tazicef and an aminoglycoside is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately to the same patient.
Clindamycin

Clindamycin

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued. (See WARNING box).

Adults

Parenteral (IM or IV Administration):

Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens):

600 to 1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspected Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens:

1200 to 2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life-threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Dilution and Infusion Rates section below.

Single IM injections of greater than 600 mg are not recommended.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:

To maintain serum clindamycin levels

Rapid infusion rate

Maintenance infusion rate

Above 4 mcg/mL

10 mg/min for 30 min

0.75 mg/min

Above 5 mcg/mL

15 mg/min for 30 min

1.00 mg/min

Above 6 mcg/mL

20 mg/min for 30 min

1.25 mg/min

Neonates (less than 1 month)

15 to 20 mg/kg/day in three to four equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients (1 month of age to 16 years)

Parenteral (IM or IV) administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride for oral solution or clindamycin hydrochloride capsules when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Dilution and Infusion Rates

Clindamycin phosphate must be diluted prior to I.V. administration. The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute.

The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Dose

Diluent

Time

300 mg

50 mL

10 min

600 mg

50 mL

20 min

900 mg

50-100 mL

30 min

1200 mg

100 mL

40 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility

Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of clindamycin phosphate in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions.

Physico-Chemical Stability of Diluted Solutions of Clindamycin

Room temperature: 6, 9, and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also, 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.

Dilution and Infusion Rates

Clindamycin phosphate must be diluted prior to I.V. administration. The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute.

The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Dose

Diluent

Time

300 mg

50 mL

10 min

600 mg

50 mL

20 min

900 mg

50-100 mL

30 min

1200 mg

100 mL

40 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility

Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of clindamycin phosphate in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions.

Physico-Chemical Stability of Diluted Solutions of Clindamycin

Room temperature: 6, 9, and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also, 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.
Labetalol Hydrochloride...

Labetalol Hydrochloride

Labetalol hydrochloride injection is intended for intravenous use in hospitalized patients. DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED depending upon the severity of hypertension and the response of the patient during dosing.

Patients should always be kept in a supine position during the period of intravenous drug administration. A substantial fall in blood pressure on standing should be expected in these patients. The patient’s ability to tolerate an upright position should be established before permitting any ambulation, such as using toilet facilities.

Either of two methods of administration of labetalol hydrochloride injection may be used: a) repeated intravenous injections, b) slow continuous infusion.

Repeated Intravenous Injection

Initially, labetalol hydrochloride injection should be given in a dose of 20 mg labetalol HCl (which corresponds to 0.25 mg/kg for an 80 kg patient) by slow intravenous injection over a 2-minute period.

Immediately before the injection and at 5 and 10 minutes after injection, supine blood pressure should be measured to evaluate response. Additional injections of 40 mg or 80 mg can be given at 10 minute intervals until a desired supine blood pressure is achieved or a total of 300 mg labetalol HCl has been injected. The maximum effect usually occurs within 5 minutes of each injection.

Slow Continuous Infusion

Labetalol hydrochloride injection is prepared for continuous intravenous infusion by diluting the drug with commonly used intravenous fluids (see below). Examples of methods of preparing the infusion solution are:

Labetalol hydrochloride injection 200 mg is added to 160 mL of a commonly used intravenous fluid such that the resultant 200 mL of solution contains 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride, 1 mg/mL. The diluted solution should be administered at a rate of 2 mL/min to deliver 2 mg/min.

Alternatively, 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride injection is added to 250 mL of a commonly used intravenous fluid. The resultant solution will contain 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride, approximately 2 mg/3 mL. The diluted solution should be administered at a rate of 3 mL/min to deliver approximately 2 mg/min.

The rate of infusion of the diluted solution may be adjusted according to the blood pressure response, at the discretion of the physician. To facilitate a desired rate of infusion, the diluted solution can be infused using a controlled administration mechanism, e.g., graduated burette or mechanically driven infusion pump.

Since the half-life of labetalol is 5 to 8 hours, steady-state blood levels (in the face of a constant rate of infusion) would not be reached during the usual infusion time period. The infusion should be continued until a satisfactory response is obtained and should then be stopped and oral labetalol hydrochloride started. The effective intravenous dose is usually in the range of 50 to 200 mg. A total dose of up to 300 mg may be required in some patients.

Blood Pressure Monitoring

The blood pressure should be monitored during and after completion of the infusion or intravenous injections. Rapid or excessive falls in either systolic or diastolic blood pressure during intravenous treatment should be avoided. In patients with excessive systolic hypertension, the decrease in systolic pressure should be used as indicator of effectiveness in addition to the response of the diastolic pressure.

Initiation of Dosing with Labetalol Hydrochloride Tablets

Subsequent oral dosing with labetalol hydrochloride tablets should begin when it has been established that the supine diastolic blood pressure has begun to rise. The recommended initial dose is 200 mg, followed in 6 to 12 hours by an additional dose of 200 or 400 mg, depending on the blood pressure response. Thereafter, inpatient titration with labetalol hydrochloride tablets may proceed as follows:
Inpatient Titration Instructions
Regimen

Daily Dose*

200 mg b.i.d.

400 mg

400 mg b.i.d.

800 mg

800 mg b.i.d.

1600 mg

1200 mg b.i.d.

2400 mg

* If needed, the total daily dose may be given in three divided doses.

While in the hospital, the dosage of labetalol hydrochloride tablets may be increased at 1 day intervals to achieve the desired blood pressure reduction.

For subsequent outpatient titration or maintenance dosing see Labetalol Hydrochloride Tablets Product Information DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION for additional recommendations.

Compatibility with commonly used intravenous fluids

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Labetalol hydrochloride injection was tested for compatibility with commonly used intravenous fluids at final concentrations of 1.25 mg to 3.75 mg labetalol hydrochloride per mL of the mixture. Labetalol hydrochloride injection was found to be compatible with and stable (for 24 hours refrigerated or at room temperature) in mixtures with the following solutions:

Ringers Injection, USP

Lactated Ringers Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and Ringers Injection

5% Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection

5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

2.5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.33% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Labetalol hydrochloride injection was NOT compatible with 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP. Care should be taken when administering alkaline drugs, including furosemide, in combination with labetalol. Compatibility should be assured prior to administering these drugs together.
Nipent

Nipent

It is recommended that patients receive hydration with 500 to 1,000 mL of 5% Dextrose in 0.5 Normal Saline or equivalent before NIPENT administration. An additional 500 mL of 5% Dextrose or equivalent should be administered after NIPENT is given.

The recommended dosage of NIPENT for the treatment of hairy cell leukemia is 4 mg/m2 every other week. NIPENT may be administered intravenously by bolus injection or diluted in a larger volume and given over 20 to 30 minutes. (See Preparation of Intravenous Solution.)

Higher doses are not recommended.

No extravasation injuries were reported in clinical studies.

The optimal duration of treatment has not been determined. In the absence of major toxicity and with observed continuing improvement, the patient should be treated until a complete response has been achieved. Although not established as required, the administration of two additional doses has been recommended following the achievement of a complete response.

All patients receiving NIPENT at 6 months should be assessed for response to treatment. If the patient has not achieved a complete or partial response, treatment with NIPENT should be discontinued.

If the patient has achieved a partial response, NIPENT treatment should be continued in an effort to achieve a complete response. At any time thereafter that a complete response is achieved, two additional doses of NIPENT are recommended. NIPENT treatment should then be stopped. If the best response to treatment at the end of 12 months is a partial response, it is recommended that treatment with NIPENT be stopped.

Withholding or discontinuation of individual doses may be needed when severe adverse reactions occur. Drug treatment should be withheld in patients with severe rash, and withheld or discontinued in patients showing evidence of nervous system toxicity.

NIPENT treatment should be withheld in patients with active infection occurring during the treatment but may be resumed when the infection is controlled.

Patients who have elevated serum creatinine should have their dose withheld and a creatinine clearance determined. There are insufficient data to recommend a starting or a subsequent dose for patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <60 mL/min).

Patients with impaired renal function should be treated only when the potential benefit justifies the potential risk. Two patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearances 50 to 60 mL/min) achieved complete response without unusual adverse events when treated with 2 mg/m2.

No dosage reduction is recommended at the start of therapy with NIPENT in patients with anemia, neutropenia, or thrombocytopenia. In addition, dosage reductions are not recommended during treatment in patients with anemia and thrombocytopenia if patients can be otherwise supported hematologically. NIPENT should be temporarily withheld if the absolute neutrophil count falls during treatment below 200 cells/mm3 in a patient who had an initial neutrophil count greater than 500 cells/mm3 and may be resumed when the count returns to predose levels.

Preparation of Intravenous Solution
1. Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be followed. Several guidelines on this subject have been published. 2-7 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate. Spills and wastes should be treated with a 5% sodium hypochlorite solution prior to disposal. 2. Protective clothing including polyethylene gloves must be worn. 3. Transfer 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection USP to the vial containing NIPENT and mix thoroughly to obtain complete dissolution of a solution yielding 2 mg/mL. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. 4. NIPENT may be given intravenously by bolus injection or diluted in a larger volume (25 to 50 mL) with 5% Dextrose Injection USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP. Dilution of the entire contents of a reconstituted vial with 25 mL or 50 mL provides a pentostatin concentration of 0.33 mg/mL or 0.18 mg/mL, respectively, for the diluted solutions. 5. NIPENT solution when diluted for infusion with 5% Dextrose Injection USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP does not interact with PVC infusion containers or administration sets at concentrations of 0.18 mg/mL to 0.33 mg/mL.
Stability

NIPENT vials are stable at refrigerated storage temperature 2° to 8° C (36° to 46°F) for the period stated on the package. Vials reconstituted or reconstituted and further diluted as directed may be stored at room temperature and ambient light but should be used within 8 hours because NIPENT contains no preservatives.
Clindamycin

Clindamycin

Clindamycin Injection, USP can be administered by IM or IV injection (following dilution); however, the intent of this Pharmacy Bulk Package is for the preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued. (See WARNING box.)

Adults

Parenteral (IM or IV) Administration:

Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens):

600 to 1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspected Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens:

1200 to 2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Dilution and Infusion Rates section below.

Single IM injections of greater than 600 mg are not recommended.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:

To maintain serum clindamycin levels

Rapid infusion rate

Maintenance infusion rate

Above 4 mcg/mL

10 mg/min for 30 min

0.75 mg/min

Above 5 mcg/mL

15 mg/min for 30 min

1.00 mg/min

Above 6 mcg/mL

20 mg/min for 30 min

1.25 mg/min

Neonates (less than 1 month)

15 to 20 mg/kg/day in three to four equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients (1 month of age to 16 years)

Parenteral (IM or IV) administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride for oral solution or clindamycin hydrochloride capsules when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Dilution and Infusion Rates

Clindamycin phosphate must be diluted prior to IV administration. The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute. The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Dose

Diluent

Time

300 mg

50 mL

10 min

600 mg

50 mL

20 min

900 mg

50-100 mL

30 min

1200 mg

100 mL

40 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility

Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of clindamycin phosphate in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions.

Physico-Chemical Stability of Diluted Solutions of Clindamycin

Room temperature: 6, 9, and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also, 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique
1. For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose 3/4 in. long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. 2. During use, container must be stored and all manipulations performed in an appropriate laminar flow hood. 3. Remove cover from container and cleanse closure with antiseptic. 4. Insert suitable sterile dispensing set or transfer device and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. The closure should be entered only once and after initial entry, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from initial closure puncture is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture. 5. Sequentially dispense aliquots of Clindamycin Injection, USP into IV containers using appropriate transfer device. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.
Butorphanol Tartrate

Butorphanol Tartrate

Factors to be considered in determining the dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, type of anesthesia to be used, and surgical procedure involved. Use in the elderly, patients with hepatic or renal disease, or in labor requires extra caution (see PRECAUTIONS section and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Individualization of Dosage section). The following doses are for patients who do not have impaired hepatic or renal function and who are not on CNS active agents.

Use for Pain

Intravenous — The usual recommended single dose for IV administration is 1 mg repeated every three to four hours as necessary. The effective dosage range, depending on the severity of pain, is 0.5 to 2 mg repeated every three to four hours.

Intramuscular — The usual recommended single dose for IM administration is 2 mg in patients who will be able to remain recumbent, in the event drowsiness or dizziness occurs. This may be repeated every three to four hours, as necessary. The effective dosage range depending on the severity of pain is 1 to 4 mg repeated every three to four hours. There are insufficient clinical data to recommend single doses above 4 mg.

Use as Preoperative/Preanesthetic Medication

The preoperative medication dosage of butorphanol tartrate injection should be individualized (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Individualization of Dosage section). The usual adult dose is 2 mg IM, administered 60 to 90 minutes before surgery. This is approximately equivalent in sedative effect to 10 mg morphine or 80 mg meperidine.

Use in Balanced Anesthesia

The usual dose of butorphanol tartrate injection is 2 mg IV shortly before induction and/or 0.5 to 1 mg IV in increments during anesthesia. The increment may be higher, up to 0.06 mg/kg (4 mg/70 kg), depending on previous sedative, analgesic, and hypnotic drugs administered. The total dose of butorphanol injection will vary; however, patients seldom require less than 4 mg or more than 12.5 mg (approximately 0.06 to 0.18 mg/kg).

Labor

In patients at full term in early labor a 1 to 2 mg dose of butorphanol tartrate IV or IM may be administered and repeated after 4 hours. Alternative analgesia should be used for pain associated with delivery or if delivery is expected to occur within 4 hours.

If concomitant use of butorphanol with drugs that may potentiate its effects is deemed necessary (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions section) the lowest effective dose should be employed.

Safety and Handling

Butorphanol tartrate injection is supplied in sealed delivery systems that have a low risk of accidental exposure to health care workers. Ordinary care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation while preparing a syringe for use. Following skin contact, rinsing with cool water is recommended.

The disposal of Schedule IV controlled substances must be consistent with State and Federal Regulations.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Diphenhydramine Hydroch...

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride

THIS PRODUCT IS FOR INTRAVENOUS OR INTRAMUSCULAR ADMINISTRATION ONLY.

Diphenhydramine hydrochloride in the injectable form is indicated when the oral form is impractical.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Pediatric Patients, other than premature infants and neonates: 5 mg/kg/24 hr or 150 mg/m2/24 hr. Maximum daily dosage is 300 mg. Divide into four doses, administered intravenously at a rate generally not exceeding 25 mg/min, or deep intramuscularly.

Adults: 10 mg to 50 mg intravenously at a rate generally not exceeding 25 mg/min, or deep intramuscularly, 100 mg if required; maximum daily dosage is 400 mg.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 General Information

Levetiracetam injection is for intravenous use only and must be diluted prior to administration. Levetiracetam injection (500 mg/5 mL) should be diluted in 100 mL of a compatible diluent [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)] and administered intravenously as a 15-minute IV infusion.

Product with particulate matter or discoloration should not be used.

Any unused portion of the levetiracetam injection vial contents should be discarded.

2.2 Initial Exposure to Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam can be initiated with either intravenous or oral administration.

Partial Onset Seizures

In clinical trials of oral levetiracetam, daily doses of 1000 mg, 2000 mg, and 3000 mg, given as twice-daily dosing, were shown to be effective. Although in some studies there was a tendency toward greater response with higher dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)], a consistent increase in response with increased dose has not been shown.

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. Doses greater than 3000 mg/day have been used in open-label studies with levetiracetam tablets for periods of 6 months and longer. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Myoclonic Seizures in Patients with Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/ day has not been studied.

Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg BID). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

2.3 Replacement Therapy

When switching from oral levetiracetam, the initial total daily intravenous dosage of levetiracetam should be equivalent to the total daily dosage and frequency of oral levetiracetam and should be administered as a 15-minute intravenous infusion following dilution in 100 mL of a compatible diluent.

2.4 Switching to Oral Dosing

At the end of the intravenous treatment period, the patient may be switched to levetiracetam oral administration at the equivalent daily dosage and frequency of the intravenous administration.

2.5 Dosing Instructions

Levetiracetam injection is for intravenous use only and must be diluted prior to administration. One vial of levetiracetam injection contains 500 mg levetiracetam (500 mg/5 mL). See Table 1 for the recommended preparation and administration of levetiracetam injection to achieve a dose of 500 mg, 1000 mg, or 1500 mg.
Table 1: Preparation and Administration of Levetiracetam Injection
Dose

Withdraw Volume

Volume of Diluent

Infusion Time

500 mg

5 mL (5 mL vial)

100 mL

15 minutes

1000 mg

10 mL (two 5 mL vials)

100 mL

15 minutes

1500 mg

15 mL (three 5 mL vials)

100 mL

15 minutes

For example, to prepare a 1000 mg dose, dilute 10 mL of levetiracetam injection in 100 mL of a compatible diluent [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)] and administer intravenously as a 15-minute infusion.

2.6 Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Levetiracetam dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. Recommended doses and adjustment for dose for adults are shown in Table 2. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient’s creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:
CLcr = [140-age (years)] x weight (kg)
(x 0.85 for female patients)
72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)
Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows:
CLcr (mL/min/1.73 m2)= CLcr (mL/min) x 1.73

BSA subject (m2) Table 2: Dosing Adjustment Regimen for Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function
Group
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage (mg)
Frequency
Normal >80 500 to 1,500 Every 12 hours Mild 50 to 80 500 to 1,000 Every 12 hours Moderate 30 to 50 250 to 750 Every 12 hours Severe <30 250 to 500 Every 12 hours ESRD patients using dialysis ----
500 to 1,0001

Every 24 hours1
1 Following dialysis, a 250 to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
2.7 Compatibility and Stability

Levetiracetam injection was found to be physically compatible and chemically stable when mixed with the following diluents and antiepileptic drugs for at least 24 hours and stored in polyvinyl chloride (PVC) bags at controlled room temperature 15 to 30°C (59 to 86°F).

Diluents

Sodium chloride (0.9%) injection, USP

Lactated Ringer’s injection

Dextrose 5% injection, USP

Other Antiepileptic Drugs

Lorazepam

Diazepam

Valproate sodium

There is no data to support the physical compatibility of levetiracetam injection with antiepileptic drugs that are not listed above.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Lovastatin

Lovastatin

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of CARBOCAINE should be reduced for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional doses should be used when feasible.

For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. CARBOCAINE is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The recommended single adult dose (or the total of a series of doses given in one procedure) of CARBOCAINE for unsedated, healthy, normal-sized individuals should not usually exceed 400 mg. The recommended dosage is based on requirements for the average adult and should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients.

While maximum doses of 7 mg/kg (550 mg) have been administered without adverse effect, these are not recommended, except in exceptional circumstances and under no circumstances should the administration be repeated at intervals of less than 1 1/2 hours. The total dose for any 24-hour period should not exceed 1,000 mg because of a slow accumulation of the anesthetic or its derivatives or slower than normal metabolic degradation or detoxification with repeat administration (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Pediatric patients tolerate the local anesthetic as well as adults. However, the pediatric dose should be carefully measured as a percentage of the total adult dose based on weight, and should not exceed 5 mg/kg to 6 mg/kg (2.5 mg/lb to 3 mg/lb) in pediatric patients, especially those weighing less than 30 lb. In pediatric patients under 3 years of age or weighing less than 30 lb concentrations less than 2% (e.g., 0.5% to 1.5%) should be employed.

Unused portions of solutions not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use.

This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.

Recommended Concentrations and Doses of Carbocaine

Total Dose

Procedure

Concentration

mL

mg

Comments

Cervical, brachial,

intercostal, pudendal

nerve block

1%

2%

5-40

5-20

50-400

100-400

Pudendal block: one half of total dose injected each side.

Transvaginal block

(paracervical plus pudendal)

1%

up to 30

(both sides)

up to 300

(both sides)

One half of total dose injected each side.

See PRECAUTIONS.

Paracervical block

1%

up to 20

(both sides)

up to 200

(both sides)

One half of total dose injected each side. This is maximum recommended dose per 90-minute period in obstetrical and non-obstetrical patients. Inject slowly, 5 minutes

between sides.

See PRECAUTIONS.

Caudal and epidural block

1%

1.5%

2%

15-30

10-25

10-20

150-300

150-375

200-400

Use only single-dose vials which do not contain a preservative.

Infiltration

1%

up to 40

up to 400

An equivalent amount of a 0.5% solution (prepared by diluting the 1% solution with Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) may be used for large areas.

Therapeutic block

(pain management)

1%

2%

1-5

1-5

10-50

20-100

Unused portions of solutions not containing preservatives should be discarded.
Marcaine Spinal

Marcaine Spinal

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of MARCAINE Spinal should be reduced for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.

For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. MARCAINE Spinal is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The extent and degree of spinal anesthesia depend upon several factors including dosage, specific gravity of the anesthetic solution, volume of solution used, force of injection, level of puncture, and position of the patient during and immediately after injection.

Seven and one-half mg (7.5 mg or 1 mL) MARCAINE Spinal has generally proven satisfactory for spinal anesthesia for lower extremity and perineal procedures including TURP and vaginal hysterectomy. Twelve mg (12 mg or 1.6 mL) has been used for lower abdominal procedures such as abdominal hysterectomy, tubal ligation, and appendectomy. These doses are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult and may be reduced for the elderly or debilitated patients. Because experience with MARCAINE Spinal is limited in patients below the age of 18 years, dosage recommendations in this age group cannot be made.

Obstetrical Use: Doses as low as 6 mg bupivacaine hydrochloride have been used for vaginal delivery under spinal anesthesia. The dose range of 7.5 mg to 10.5 mg (1 mL to 1.4 mL) bupivacaine hydrochloride has been used for Cesarean section under spinal anesthesia.

In recommended doses, MARCAINE Spinal produces complete motor and sensory block.

Unused portions of solutions should be discarded following initial use.

MARCAINE Spinal should be inspected visually for discoloration and particulate matter prior to administration; solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Bupivacaine Hydrochlori...

Bupivacaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

As with all local anesthetics, the dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, individual tolerance, and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

The 0.5% concentration with epinephrine is recommended for infiltration and block injection in the maxillary and mandibular area when a longer duration of local anesthetic action is desired, such as for oral surgical procedures generally associated with significant postoperative pain. The average dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) per injection site will usually suffice; an occasional second dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) may be used if necessary to produce adequate anesthesia after making allowance for 2 to 10 minutes onset time (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). The lowest effective dose should be employed and time should be allowed between injections; it is recommended that the total dose for all injection sites, spread out over a single dental sitting, should not ordinarily exceed 90 mg for a healthy adult patient (ten 1.8 mL injections of 0.5% BUPIVACAINE HCl with epinephrine). Injections should be made slowly and with frequent aspirations. Until further experience is gained, BUPIVACAINE HCl in dentistry is not recommended for children younger than 12 years.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Digoxin

Digoxin

2.1 Dosing Guidelines
• Precedex dosing should be individualized and titrated to desired clinical response. • Precedex is not indicated for infusions lasting longer than 24 hours. • Precedex should be administered using a controlled infusion device.
2.2 Dosage Information
Table 1: Dosage Information
INDICATION

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

Initiation of Intensive Care Unit Sedation

For adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes.

For adult patients being converted from alternate sedative therapy: a loading dose may not be required [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic-function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Maintenance of Intensive Care Unit Sedation

For adult patients: a maintenance infusion of 0.2 to 0.7 mcg/kg/hour. The rate of the maintenance infusion should be adjusted to achieve the desired level of sedation.

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Initiation of Procedural Sedation

For adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes. For less invasive procedures such as ophthalmic surgery, a loading infusion of 0.5 mcg/kg given over 10 minutes may be suitable.

For awake fiberoptic intubation in adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes.

For patients over 65 years of age: a loading infusion of 0.5 mcg/kg over 10 minutes [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Maintenance of Procedural Sedation

For adult patients: the maintenance infusion is generally initiated at 0.6 mcg/kg/hour and titrated to achieve desired clinical effect with doses ranging from 0.2 to 1 mcg/kg/hour. The rate of the maintenance infusion should be adjusted to achieve the targeted level of sedation.

For awake fiberoptic intubation in adult patients: a maintenance infusion of 0.7 mcg/kg/hour is recommended until the endotracheal tube is secured.

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment

Due to possible pharmacodynamic interactions, a reduction in dosage of Precedex or other concomitant anesthetics, sedatives, hypnotics or opioids may be required when co-administered [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

Dosage reductions may need to be considered for adult patients with hepatic impairment, and geriatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Preparation of Solution

Strict aseptic technique must always be maintained during handling of Precedex.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Precedex Injection, 200 mcg/2 mL (100 mcg/mL)

Precedex must be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride injection to achieve required concentration (4 mcg/mL) prior to administration. Preparation of solutions is the same, whether for the loading dose or maintenance infusion.

To prepare the infusion, withdraw 2 mL of Precedex Injection, and add to 48 mL of 0.9% sodium chloride injection to a total of 50 mL. Shake gently to mix well.

Precedex in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 80 mcg/20 mL (4 mcg/mL), 200 mcg/50 mL (4 mcg/mL) and 400 mcg/100 mL (4 mcg/mL)

Precedex in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is supplied in glass containers containing a premixed, ready to use dexmedetomidine hydrochloride solution in 0.9% sodium chloride in water. No further dilution of these preparations are necessary.

2.5 Administration with Other Fluids

Precedex infusion should not be co-administered through the same intravenous catheter with blood or plasma because physical compatibility has not been established.

Precedex has been shown to be incompatible when administered with the following drugs: amphotericin B, diazepam.

Precedex has been shown to be compatible when administered with the following intravenous fluids:
• 0.9% sodium chloride in water • 5% dextrose in water • 20% mannitol • Lactated Ringer’s solution • 100 mg/mL magnesium sulfate solution • 0.3% potassium chloride solution
2.6 Compatibility with Natural Rubber

Compatibility studies have demonstrated the potential for absorption of Precedex to some types of natural rubber. Although Precedex is dosed to effect, it is advisable to use administration components made with synthetic or coated natural rubber gaskets.

2.1 Dosing Guidelines
• Precedex dosing should be individualized and titrated to desired clinical response. • Precedex is not indicated for infusions lasting longer than 24 hours. • Precedex should be administered using a controlled infusion device.
2.2 Dosage Information
Table 1: Dosage Information
INDICATION

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

Initiation of Intensive Care Unit Sedation

For adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes.

For adult patients being converted from alternate sedative therapy: a loading dose may not be required [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic-function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Maintenance of Intensive Care Unit Sedation

For adult patients: a maintenance infusion of 0.2 to 0.7 mcg/kg/hour. The rate of the maintenance infusion should be adjusted to achieve the desired level of sedation.

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Initiation of Procedural Sedation

For adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes. For less invasive procedures such as ophthalmic surgery, a loading infusion of 0.5 mcg/kg given over 10 minutes may be suitable.

For awake fiberoptic intubation in adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes.

For patients over 65 years of age: a loading infusion of 0.5 mcg/kg over 10 minutes [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Maintenance of Procedural Sedation

For adult patients: the maintenance infusion is generally initiated at 0.6 mcg/kg/hour and titrated to achieve desired clinical effect with doses ranging from 0.2 to 1 mcg/kg/hour. The rate of the maintenance infusion should be adjusted to achieve the targeted level of sedation.

For awake fiberoptic intubation in adult patients: a maintenance infusion of 0.7 mcg/kg/hour is recommended until the endotracheal tube is secured.

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment

Due to possible pharmacodynamic interactions, a reduction in dosage of Precedex or other concomitant anesthetics, sedatives, hypnotics or opioids may be required when co-administered [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

Dosage reductions may need to be considered for adult patients with hepatic impairment, and geriatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Preparation of Solution

Strict aseptic technique must always be maintained during handling of Precedex.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Precedex Injection, 200 mcg/2 mL (100 mcg/mL)

Precedex must be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride injection to achieve required concentration (4 mcg/mL) prior to administration. Preparation of solutions is the same, whether for the loading dose or maintenance infusion.

To prepare the infusion, withdraw 2 mL of Precedex Injection, and add to 48 mL of 0.9% sodium chloride injection to a total of 50 mL. Shake gently to mix well.

Precedex in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 80 mcg/20 mL (4 mcg/mL), 200 mcg/50 mL (4 mcg/mL) and 400 mcg/100 mL (4 mcg/mL)

Precedex in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is supplied in glass containers containing a premixed, ready to use dexmedetomidine hydrochloride solution in 0.9% sodium chloride in water. No further dilution of these preparations are necessary.

2.5 Administration with Other Fluids

Precedex infusion should not be co-administered through the same intravenous catheter with blood or plasma because physical compatibility has not been established.

Precedex has been shown to be incompatible when administered with the following drugs: amphotericin B, diazepam.

Precedex has been shown to be compatible when administered with the following intravenous fluids:
• 0.9% sodium chloride in water • 5% dextrose in water • 20% mannitol • Lactated Ringer’s solution • 100 mg/mL magnesium sulfate solution • 0.3% potassium chloride solution
2.6 Compatibility with Natural Rubber

Compatibility studies have demonstrated the potential for absorption of Precedex to some types of natural rubber. Although Precedex is dosed to effect, it is advisable to use administration components made with synthetic or coated natural rubber gaskets.
Midazolam Hydrochloride...

Midazolam Hydrochloride

Midazolam injection is a potent sedative agent that requires slow administration and individualization of dosage. Clinical experience has shown midazolam to be 3 to 4 times as potent per mg as diazepam. BECAUSE SERIOUS AND LIFE-THREATENING CARDIORESPIRATORY ADVERSE EVENTS HAVE BEEN REPORTED, PROVISION FOR MONITORING, DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF THESE REACTIONS MUST BE MADE FOR EVERY PATIENT TO WHOM MIDAZOLAM INJECTION IS ADMINISTERED, REGARDLESS OF AGE OR HEALTH STATUS. Excessive single doses or rapid intravenous administration may result in respiratory depression, airway obstruction and/or arrest. The potential for these latter effects is increased in debilitated patients, those receiving concomitant medications capable of depressing the CNS, and patients without an endotracheal tube but undergoing a procedure involving the upper airway such as endoscopy or dental (see Boxed WARNING and WARNINGS).

Reactions such as agitation, involuntary movements, hyperactivity and combativeness have been reported in adult and pediatric patients. Should such reactions occur, caution should be exercised before continuing administration of midazolam (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam should only be administered IM or IV (see WARNINGS).

Care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial injection or extravasation (see WARNINGS).

Midazolam Injection may be mixed in the same syringe with the following frequently used premedications: morphine sulfate, meperidine, atropine sulfate or scopolamine. Midazolam, at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL, is compatible with 5% dextrose in water and 0.9% sodium chloride for up to 24 hours and with Lactated Ringer’s solution for up to 4 hours. Both the 1 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL formulations of midazolam may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Monitoring: Patient response to sedative agents, and resultant respiratory status, is variable. Regardless of the intended level of sedation or route of administration, sedation is a continuum; a patient may move easily from light to deep sedation, with potential loss of protective reflexes. This is especially true in pediatric patients. Sedative doses should be individually titrated, taking into account patient age, clinical status and concomitant use of other CNS depressants. Continuous monitoring of respiratory and cardiac function is required (i.e., pulse oximetry).

Adults and Pediatrics: Sedation guidelines recommend a careful presedation history to determine how a patient’s underlying medical conditions or concomitant medications might affect their response to sedation/analgesia as well as a physical examination including a focused examination of the airway for abnormalities. Further recommendations include appropriate presedation fasting.

Titration to effect with multiple small doses is essential for safe administration. It should be noted that adequate time to achieve peak central nervous system effect (3 to 5 minutes) for midazolam should be allowed between doses to minimize the potential for oversedation. Sufficient time must elapse between doses of concomitant sedative medications to allow the effect of each dose to be assessed before subsequent drug administration. This is an important consideration for all patients who receive intravenous midazolam.

Immediate availability of resuscitative drugs and age- and size-appropriate equipment and personnel trained in their use and skilled in airway management should be assured (see WARNINGS).

Pediatrics: For deeply sedated pediatric patients a dedicated individual, other than the practitioner performing the procedure, should monitor the patient throughout the procedure.

Intravenous access is not thought to be necessary for all pediatric patients sedated for a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure because in some cases the difficulty of gaining IV access would defeat the purpose of sedating the child; rather, emphasis should be placed upon having the intravenous equipment available and a practitioner skilled in establishing vascular access in pediatric patients immediately available.

USUAL ADULT DOSE

INTRAMUSCULARLY For preoperative sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia (induction of sleepiness or drowsiness and relief of apprehension and to impair memory of perioperative events). For intramuscular use, midazolam should be injected deep in a large muscle mass.

The recommended premedication dose of midazolam for good risk (ASA Physical Status I & II) adult patients below the age of 60 years is 0.07 to 0.08 mg/kg IM (approximately 5 mg IM) administered up to 1 hour before surgery. The dose must be individualized and reduced when IM midazolam is administered to patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, other higher risk surgical patients, patients 60 or more years of age, and patients who have received concomitant narcotics or other CNS depressants (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). In a study of patients 60 years or older, who did not receive concomitant administration of narcotics, 2 to 3 mg (0.02 to 0.05 mg/kg) of midazolam produced adequate sedation during the preoperative period. The dose of 1 mg IM midazolam may suffice for some older patients if the anticipated intensity and duration of sedation is less critical. As with any potential respiratory depressant, these patients require observation for signs of cardiorespiratory depression after receiving IM midazolam. Onset is within 15 minutes, peaking at 30 to 60 minutes. It can be administered concomitantly with atropine sulfate or scopolamine hydrochloride and reduced doses of narcotics.

INTRAVENOUSLY Sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE): Narcotic premedication results in less variability in patient response and a reduction in dosage of midazolam. For peroral procedures, the use of an appropriate topical anesthetic is recommended. For bronchoscopic procedures, the use of narcotic premedication is recommended.

When used for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for a procedure, dosage must be individualized and titrated. Midazolam should always be titrated slowly; administer over at least 2 minutes and allow an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Individual response will vary with age, physical status and concomitant medications, but may also vary independent of these factors. (See WARNINGS concerning cardiac/respiratory arrest/airway obstruction/hypoventilation.)

Midazolam 1 mg/mL formulation is recommended for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures to facilitate slower injection. Both the 1 mg/mL and the 5 mg/mL formulations may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.
Healthy Adults Below the Age of 60: Titrate slowly to the desired effect (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 2.5 mg should be given over a period of at least 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If further titration is necessary, continue to titrate, using small increments, to the appropriate level of sedation. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes after each increment to fully evaluate the sedative effect. A total dose greater than 5 mg is not usually necessary to reach the desired endpoint.
If narcotic premedication or other CNS depressants are used, patients will require approximately 30% less midazolam than unpremedicated patients.
Patients Age 60 or Older, and Debilitated or Chronically Ill Patients: Because the danger of hypoventilation, airway obstruction, or apnea is greater in elderly patients and those with chronic disease states or decreased pulmonary reserve, and because the peak effect may take longer in these patients, increments should be smaller and the rate of injection slower.
Titrate slowly to the desired effect (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 1.5 mg should be given over a period of no less than 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect. If additional titration is necessary, it should be given at a rate of no more than 1 mg over a period of 2 minutes, waiting an additional 2 or more minutes each time to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Total doses greater than 3.5 mg are not usually necessary.

If concomitant CNS depressant premedications are used in these patients, they will require at least 50% less midazolam than healthy young unpremedicated patients.
Maintenance Dose: Additional doses to maintain the desired level of sedation may be given in increments of 25% of the dose used to first reach the sedative endpoint, but again only by slow titration, especially in the elderly and chronically ill or debilitated patient. These additional doses should be given only after a thorough clinical evaluation clearly indicates the need for additional sedation.
Induction of Anesthesia: For induction of general anesthesia, before administration of other anesthetic agents.

Individual response to the drug is variable, particularly when a narcotic premedication is not used. The dosage should be titrated to the desired effect according to the patient’s age and clinical status. When midazolam is used before other intravenous agents for induction of anesthesia, the initial dose of each agent may be significantly reduced, at times to as low as 25% of the usual initial dose of the individual agents.Unpremedicated Patients: In the absence of premedication, an average adult under the age of 55 years will usually require an initial dose of 0.3 to 0.35 mg/kg for induction, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect. If needed to complete induction, increments of approximately 25% of the patient’s initial dose may be used; induction may instead be completed with inhalational anesthetics. In resistant cases, up to 0.6 mg/kg total dose may be used for induction, but such larger doses may prolong recovery. Unpremedicated patients over the age of 55 years usually require less midazolam for induction; an initial dose of 0.3 mg/kg is recommended. Unpremedicated patients with severe systemic disease or other debilitation usually require less midazolam for induction. An initial dose of 0.2 to 0.25 mg/kg will usually suffice; in some cases, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.Premedicated Patients: When the patient has received sedative or narcotic premedication, particularly narcotic premedication, the range of recommended doses is 0.15 to 0.35 mg/kg. In average adults below the age of 55 years, a dose of 0.25 mg/kg, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect, will usually suffice. The initial dose of 0.2 mg/kg is recommended for good risk (ASA I & II) surgical patients over the age of 55 years. In some patients with severe systemic disease or debilitation, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice. Narcotic premedication frequently used during clinical trials included fentanyl (1.5 to 2 mcg/kg IV, administered 5 minutes before induction), morphine (dosage individualized, up to 0.15 mg/kg IM), and meperidine (dosage individualized, up to 1 mg/kg IM). Sedative premedications were hydroxyzine pamoate (100 mg orally) and sodium secobarbital (200 mg orally). Except for intravenous fentanyl, administered 5 minutes before induction, all other premedications should be administered approximately 1 hour prior to the time anticipated for midazolam induction.

Injectable midazolam can also be used during maintenance of anesthesia, for surgical procedures, as a component of balanced anesthesia. Effective narcotic premedication is especially recommended in such cases.

Incremental injections of approximately 25% of the induction dose should be given in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia and repeated as necessary.

CONTINUOUS INFUSION For continuous infusion, midazolam 5 mg/mL formulation is recommended diluted to a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.

Usual Adult Dose: If a loading dose is necessary to rapidly initiate sedation, 0.01 to 0.05 mg/kg (approximately 0.5 to 4 mg for a typical adult) may be given slowly or infused over several minutes. This dose may be repeated at 10 to 15 minute intervals until adequate sedation is achieved. For maintenance of sedation, the usual initial infusion rate is 0.02 to 0.1 mg/kg/hr (1 to 7 mg/hr). Higher loading or maintenance infusion rates may occasionally be required in some patients. The lowest recommended doses should be used in patients with residual effects from anesthetic drugs, or in those concurrently receiving other sedatives or opioids. Individual response to midazolam is variable. The infusion rate should be titrated to the desired level of sedation, taking into account the patient’s age, clinical status and current medications. In general, midazolam should be infused at the lowest rate that produces the desired level of sedation. Assessment of sedation should be performed at regular intervals and the midazolam infusion rate adjusted up or down by 25% to 50% of the initial infusion rate so as to assure adequate titration of sedation level. Larger adjustments or even a small incremental dose may be necessary if rapid changes in the level of sedation are indicated. In addition, the infusion rate should be decreased by 10% to 25% every few hours to find the minimum effective infusion rate. Finding the minimum effective infusion rate decreases the potential accumulation of midazolam and provides for the most rapid recovery once the infusion is terminated. Patients who exhibit agitation, hypertension, or tachycardia in response to noxious stimulation, but who are otherwise adequately sedated, may benefit from concurrent administration of an opioid analgesic. Addition of an opioid will generally reduce the minimum effective midazolam infusion rate.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS

UNLIKE ADULT PATIENTS, PEDIATRIC PATIENTS GENERALLY RECEIVE INCREMENTS OF MIDAZOLAM ON A MG/KG BASIS. As a group, pediatric patients generally require higher dosages of midazolam (mg/kg) than do adults. Younger (less than six years) pediatric patients may require higher dosages (mg/kg) than older pediatric patients, and may require close monitoring (see tables below). In obese PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, the dose should be calculated based on ideal body weight. When midazolam is given in conjunction with opioids or other sedatives, the potential for respiratory depression, airway obstruction, or hypoventilation is increased. For appropriate patient monitoring, see Boxed WARNING, WARNINGS, and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Monitoring. The health care practitioner who uses this medication in pediatric patients should be aware of and follow accepted professional guidelines for pediatric sedation appropriate to their situation.
OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/ SEDATION (OAA/S)
Assessment Categories

Responsiveness

Speech

Facial Expression

Eyes

Composite Score

Responds readily to name spoken in normal tone

normal

normal

clear, no ptosis

5 (alert)

Lethargic response to name spoken in normal tone

mild slowing or thickening

mild relaxation

glazed or mild ptosis (less than half the eye)

4

Responds only after name is called loudly and/or repeatedly

slurring or prominent slowing

marked relaxation (slack jaw)

glazed and marked ptosis (half the eye or more)

3

Responds only after mild prodding or shaking

few recognizable words

–

–

2

Does not respond to mild prodding or shaking

–

–

–

1 (deep sleep)

_______________________________________________________________________________________
FREQUENCY OF OBSERVER’S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION COMPOSITE SCORES IN ONE STUDY OF PEDIATRIC PATIENTS UNDERGOING PROCEDURES WITH INTRAVENOUS MIDAZOLAM FOR SEDATION
Age Range (years)

n

OAA/S Score

1 (deep sleep)

2

3

4

5 (alert)

1-2

16

6 (38%)

4 (25%)

3 (19%)

3 (19%)

0

>2-5

22

9 (41%)

5 (23%)

8 (36%)

0

0

>5-12

34

1 (3%)

6 (18%)

22 (65%)

5 (15%)

0

>12-17

18

0

4 (22%)

14 (78%)

0

0

Total (1-17)

90

16 (18%)

19 (21%)

47 (52%)

8 (9%)

0

INTRAMUSCULARLY

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to anesthesia or for procedures, intramuscular midazolam can be used to sedate pediatric patients to facilitate less traumatic insertion of an intravenous catheter for titration of additional medication.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

Sedation after intramuscular midazolam is age and dose dependent: higher doses may result in deeper and more prolonged sedation. Doses of 0.1 to 0.15 mg/kg are usually effective and do not prolong emergence from general anesthesia. For more anxious patients, doses up to 0.5 mg/kg have been used. Although not systematically studied, the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg. If midazolam is given with an opioid, the initial dose of each must be reduced.

INTRAVENOUSLY BY INTERMITTENT INJECTION

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to and during procedures or prior to anesthesia.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

It should be recognized that the depth of sedation/anxiolysis needed for pediatric patients depends on the type of procedure to be performed. For example, simple light sedation/anxiolysis in the preoperative period is quite different from the deep sedation and analgesia required for an endoscopic procedure in a child. For this reason, there is a broad range of dosage. For all pediatric patients, regardless of the indications for sedation/anxiolysis, it is vital to titrate midazolam and other concomitant medications slowly to the desired clinical effect. The initial dose of midazolam should be administered over 2 to 3 minutes. Since midazolam is water soluble, it takes approximately three times longer than diazepam to achieve peak EEG effects, therefore one must wait an additional 2 to 3 minutes to fully evaluate the sedative effect before initiating a procedure or repeating a dose. If further sedation is necessary, continue to titrate with small increments until the appropriate level of sedation is achieved. If other medications capable of depressing the CNS are coadministered, the peak effect of those concomitant medications must be considered and the dose of midazolam adjusted. The importance of drug titration to effect is vital to the safe sedation/anxiolysis of the pediatric patient. The total dose of midazolam will depend on patient response, the type and duration of the procedure, as well as the type and dose of concomitant medications.
Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age: limited information is available in non-intubated pediatric patients less than 6 months of age. It is uncertain when the patient transfers from neonatal physiology to pediatric physiology, therefore the dosing recommendations are unclear. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age are particularly vulnerable to airway obstruction and hypoventilation, therefore titration with small increments to clinical effect and careful monitoring are essential. Pediatric patients 6 months to 5 years of age: initial dose 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. A total dose up to 0.6 mg/kg may be necessary to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 6 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses. Pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age: Initial dose 0.025 to 0.05 mg/kg; total dose up to 0.4 mg/kg may be needed to reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 10 mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may be associated with the higher doses. Pediatric patients 12 to 16 years of age: should be dosed as adults. Prolonged sedation may be associated with higher doses; some patients in this age range will require higher than recommended adult doses but the total dose usually does not exceed 10 mg.
The dose of midazolam must be reduced in patients premedicated with opioid or other sedative agents including midazolam. Higher risk or debilitated patients may require lower dosages whether or not concomitant sedating medications have been administered (see WARNINGS).

CONTINUOUS INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia in critical care settings.

USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)

To initiate sedation, an intravenous loading dose of 0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg administered over at least 2 to 3 minutes can be used to establish the desired clinical effect IN PATIENTS WHOSE TRACHEA IS INTUBATED. (Midazolam should not be administered as a rapid intravenous dose.) This loading dose may be followed by a continuous intravenous infusion to maintain the effect. An infusion of midazolam has been used in patients whose trachea was intubated but who were allowed to breathe spontaneously. Assisted ventilation is recommended for pediatric patients who are receiving other central nervous system depressant medications such as opioids. Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.06 to 0.12 mg/kg/hr (1 to 2 mcg/kg/min). The rate of infusion can be increased or decreased (generally by 25% of the initial or subsequent infusion rate) as required, or supplemental intravenous doses of midazolam can be administered to increase or maintain the desired effect. Frequent assessment at regular intervals using standard pain/sedation scales is recommended. Drug elimination may be delayed in patients receiving erythromycin and/or other P450-3A4 enzyme inhibitors (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions) and in patients with liver dysfunction, low cardiac output (especially those requiring inotropic support), and in neonates. Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill, particularly those receiving opioids and/or when midazolam is rapidly administered.

When initiating an infusion with midazolam in hemodynamically compromised patients, the usual loading dose of midazolam should be titrated in small increments and the patient monitored for hemodynamic instability, e.g., hypotension. These patients are also vulnerable to the respiratory depressant effects of midazolam and require careful monitoring of respiratory rate and oxygen saturation.

CONTINUOUS INTRAVENOUS INFUSION

For sedation in critical care settings.

USUAL NEONATAL DOSE

Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinical experience in preterm and term neonates WHOSE TRACHEA WAS INTUBATED, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam should be initiated at a rate of 0.03 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mcg/kg/min) in neonates <32 weeks and 0.06 mg/kg/hr (1 mcg/kg/min) in neonates >32 weeks. Intravenous loading doses should not be used in neonates, rather the infusion may be run more rapidly for the first several hours to establish therapeutic plasma levels. The rate of infusion should be carefully and frequently reassessed, particularly after the first 24 hours so as to administer the lowest possible effective dose and reduce the potential for drug accumulation. This is particularly important because of the potential for adverse effects related to metabolism of the benzyl alcohol (see WARNINGS, Usage In Preterm Infants And Neonates). Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill and in preterm and term infants, particularly those receiving fentanyl and/or when midazolam is administered rapidly. Due to an increased risk of apnea, extreme caution is advised when sedating preterm and former preterm patients whose trachea is not intubated.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Aminophylline

Aminophylline

General Considerations:

The steady-state serum theophylline concentration is a function of the infusion rate and the rate of theophylline clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a serum theophylline concentration in the 10-20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance. For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either sub-therapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects.

When theophylline is used as an acute bronchodilator, the goal of obtaining a therapeutic serum concentration is best accomplished with an intravenous loading dose. Because of rapid distribution into body fluids, the serum concentration (C) obtained from an initial loading dose (LD) is related primarily to the volume of distribution (V), the apparent space into which the drug diffuses:

                              C = LD/V

If a mean volume of distribution of about 0.5 L/kg is assumed (actual range is 0.3 to 0.7 L/kg), each mg/kg (ideal body weight) of theophylline administered as a loading dose over 30 minutes results in an average 2 mcg/mL increase in serum theophylline concentration. Therefore, in a patient who has received no theophylline in the previous 24 hours, a loading dose of intravenous theophylline of 4.6 mg/kg (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline), calculated on the basis of ideal body weight and administered over 30 minutes, on average, will produce a maximum post-distribution serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 6-16 mcg/mL. When a loading dose becomes necessary in the patient who has already received theophylline, estimation of the serum concentration based upon the history is unreliable, and an immediate serum level determination is indicated. The loading dose can then be determined as follows:

                               D = (Desired C - Measured C) (V)

where D is the loading dose, C is the serum theophylline concentration, and V is the volume of distribution. The mean volume of distribution can be assumed to be 0.5 L/kg and the desired serum concentration should be conservative (e.g., 10 mcg/mL) to allow for the variability in the volume of distribution. A loading dose should not be given before obtaining a serum theophylline concentration if the patient has received any theophylline in the previous 24 hours.

A serum concentration obtained 30 minutes after an intravenous loading dose, when distribution is complete, can be used to assess the need for and size of subsequent loading doses, if clinically indicated, and for guidance of continuing therapy. Once a serum concentration of 10 to 15 mcg/mL has been achieved with the use of a loading dose(s), a constant intravenous infusion is started. The rate of administration is based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters for the population and calculated to achieve a target serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL (see Table V). For example, in non-smoking adults, initiation of a constant intravenous theophylline infusion of 0.4 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline) at the completion of the loading dose, on average, will result in a steady-state concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 7-26 mcg/mL. The mean and range of steady-state serum concentrations are similar when the average child (age 1 to 9 years) is given a loading dose of 4.6 mg/kg theophylline (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline) followed by a constant intravenous infusion of 0.8 mg/kg/hr (1.0 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline). Since there is large interpatient variability in theophylline clearance, serum concentrations will rise or fall when the patient’s clearance is significantly different from the mean population value used to calculate the initial infusion rate. Therefore, a second serum concentration should be obtained one expected half-life after starting the constant infusion (e.g., approximately 4 hours for children age 1 to 9 and 8 hours for nonsmoking adults; See Table I for the expected half-life in additional patient populations) to determine if the concentration is accumulating or declining from the post loading dose level. If the level is declining as a result of a higher than average clearance, an additional loading dose can be administered and/or the infusion rate increased. In contrast, if the second sample demonstrates a higher level, accumulation of the drug can be assumed, and the infusion rate should be decreased before the concentration exceeds 20 mcg/mL. An additional sample is obtained 12 to 24 hours later to determine if further adjustments are required and then at 24-hour intervals to adjust for changes, if they occur. This empiric method, based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters, will prevent large fluctuations in serum concentration during the most critical period of the patient’s course.

In patients with cor pulmonale, cardiac decompensation, or liver dysfunction, or in those taking drugs that markedly reduce theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine), the initial theophylline infusion rate should not exceed 17 mg/hr (21 mg/hr as aminophylline) unless serum concentrations can be monitored at 24-hour intervals. In these patients, 5 days may be required before steady-state is reached.

Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.

Table V contains initial theophylline infusion rates following an appropriate loading dose recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for final theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.
Table V. Initial Theophylline Infusion Rates Following an Appropriate Loading Dose. * To achieve a target concentration of 10 mcg/mL Aminophylline=theophylline/0.8. Use ideal body weight for obese patients.† Lower initial dosage may be required for patients receiving other drugs that decrease theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine).‡ To achieve a target concentration of 7.5 mcg/mL for neonatal apnea.§ Not to exceed 900 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.ı Not to exceed 400 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.
Patient population

Age

Theophylline infusion rate (mg/kg/hr)*†

Neonates

Postnatal age up to 24 days

Postnatal age beyond 24 days

1 mg/kg q12h/‡

1.5 mg/kg q12h/‡

Infants

6-52 weeks old

mg/kg/hr= (0.008)(age in weeks) + 0.21

Young children

1-9 years

0.8

Older children

9-12 years

0.7

Adolescents

  (cigarette or marijuana

  smokers)

12-16 years

0.7

Adolescents (nonsmokers)

12-16 years

0.5 §

Adults

  (otherwise healthy

  nonsmokers)

16-60 years

0.4 §

Elderly

>60 years

0.3 ı

Cardiac decompensation,

  cor pulmonale, liver

  dysfunction, sepsis with

  multiorgan failure,

  or shock

0.2 ı
Table VI. Final Dosage Adjustment Guided by Serum Theophylline Concentration ¶     Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present, physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g., sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see WARNINGS).
Peak Serum Concentration

Dosage Adjustment

<9.9 mcg/mL

If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase infusion rate about 25%. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults for further dosage adjustment.

10 to 14.9 mcg/mL

If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain infusion rate and recheck serum concentration at 24 hour intervals.¶ If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated consider adding additional medication(s) to treatment regimen.

15-19.9 mcg/mL

Consider 10% decrease in infusion rate to provide greater margin of safety even if current dosage is tolerated.¶

20-24.9 mcg/mL

Decrease infusion rate by 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

25-30 mcg/mL

Stop infusion for 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults and decrease subsequent infusion rate at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, stop infusion and consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage).

>30 mcg/mL

Stop the infusion and treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease infusion rate by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

Intravenous Admixture Incompatibility:

Although there have been reports of aminophylline precipitating in acidic media, these reports do not apply to the dilute solutions found in intravenous infusions. Aminophylline injection should not be mixed in a syringe with other drugs but should be added separately to the intravenous solution.

When an intravenous solution containing aminophylline is given “piggyback”, the intravenous system already in place should be turned off while the aminophylline is infused if there is a potential problem with admixture incompatibility.

Because of the alkalinity of aminophylline containing solutions, drugs known to be alkali labile should be avoided in admixtures. These include epinephrine HCl, norepinephrine bitartrate, isoproterenol HCl and penicillin G potassium. It is suggested that specialized literature be consulted before preparing admixtures with aminophylline and other drugs.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion. Do not use if crystals have separated from solution.
Glycine Irrigant

Glycine Irrigant

1.5% Glycine Irrigation, USP should be administered only by transurethral instillation with appropriate urologic instrumentation. A disposable irrigation set should be used. The total volume of solution used for irrigation is solely at the discretion of the surgeon.

Height of container(s) above the operating table in excess of 60 cm (approx. 2 ft.) has been reported to increase intravascular absorption of the irrigating fluid.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. See PRECAUTIONS.
Potassium Chloride In L...

Potassium Chloride In Lactated Ringers And Dextrose

These solutions should be administered only by intravenous infusion and as directed by the physician. The dose and rate of injection are dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium should be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration less than 30 mEq/liter. Somewhat faster rates and greater concentrations (usually up to 40 mEq/liter) of potassium may be indicated in patients with more severe potassium deficiency. The total 24-hour dose should not generally exceed 200 mEq of potassium.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

The presence of calcium limits their compatibility with certain drugs that form precipitates of calcium salts, and also prohibits their simultaneous infusion through the same administration set as blood because of the likelihood of coagulation.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

Sterile Water for Injection, USP in the 2000 mL flexible Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with automated compounding devices for preparing intravenous admixtures. Dosages will be in accordance with the recommendation of the prescribing physician.

Sterile Water for Injection, USP is not intended for direct infusion. Admixtures should be made by or under the direction of a pharmacist using strict aseptic technique under a laminar flow hood. Compounded admixtures may be stored under refrigeration for up to 24 hours. Administration of admixtures should be completed within 24 hours after removal from refrigeration.

Drug Interactions

The Pharmacy Bulk Package is intended only for use in the preparation of sterile, intravenous admixtures using automated compounding devices.

Additives may be incompatible with the fluid withdrawn from this container. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When compounding admixtures, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. See PRECAUTIONS.

Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Recommended Directions for Use of the Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique

1.      During use, container must be stored, and all manipulations performed, in an appropriate laminar flow hood.

2.      Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

3.      Insert piercing pin of transfer set and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. Insertion of a piercing pin into the outlet port should be performed only once in a Pharmacy Bulk Package solution. Once the outlet site has been entered, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from transfer set pin or implement insertion is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture.

4.      Sequentially dispense aliquots of Sterile Water for Injection, USP into I.V. containers using appropriate transfer set. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the specific condition of each patient.

Administer intravenously only with a calibrated infusion device at a slow, controlled rate. Because pain associated with peripheral infusion of Potassium Chloride solution has been reported, whenever possible, administration via central route is recommended for thorough dilution by the blood stream and avoidance of extravasation. Highest concentrations (300 and 400 mEq/L) should be exclusively administered via central route.

Recommended administration rates should not usually exceed 10 mEq/hour or 200 mEq for a 24-hour period if the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter.

In urgent cases where the serum potassium level is less than 2 mEq/liter or where severe hypokalemia is a threat (serum potassium level less than 2 mEq/liter and electrocardiographic changes and/or muscle paralysis), rates up to 40 mEq/hour or 400 mEq over a 24-hour period can be administered very carefully when guided by continuous monitoring of the EKG and frequent serum K+ determinations to avoid hyperkalemia and cardiac arrest.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit. Use of a final filter is recommended during administration of all parenteral solutions where possible.

Do not add supplementary medication.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections. Do not add supplementary medication. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is completed.
Aminosyn Ii

Aminosyn Ii

Each 100 mL of Aminosyn II contains:

Amino Acids

Nitrogen

Aminosyn II 10%

10 g

1.53 g

Aminosyn II 15%

15 g

2.30 g

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Aminosyn II in the 2000 mL flexible Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with manual, gravity flow operations and automated gravimetric compounding devices for preparing intravenous nutritional admixtures. Admixtures must be stored under refrigeration and used within 24 hours of admixing.

1. Peripheral Vein Nutritional Maintenance

A mixture of Aminosyn II and dextrose diluted to a final concentration of 5% to 10% amino acids and 5% to 10% dextrose is suitable for administration by peripheral vein. This solution is not intended for central vein administration because it does not contain adequate amounts of amino acids or electrolytes.

For peripheral intravenous infusion, 1.0 to 1.5 g/kg/day of total amino acids will reduce protein catabolism. Infusion or ingestion of carbohydrate or lipid will not reduce the nitrogen sparing effect of intravenous amino acid infusions at this dose.

As with all intravenous fluid therapy, the primary aim is to provide sufficient water to compensate for insensible, urinary and other (nasogastric suction, fistula drainage, diarrhea) fluid losses. Total fluid requirements, as well as electrolyte and acid-base needs, should be estimated and appropriately administered.

For an amino acid solution of specified total concentration, the volume required to meet amino acid requirements per 24 hours can be calculated. After making an estimate of the total daily fluid (water) requirement, the balance of fluid needed beyond the volume of amino acid solution required can be provided either as a noncarbohydrate or a carbohydrate-containing electrolyte solution. I.V. lipid emulsion may be substituted for part of the carbohydrate-containing solution. Vitamins and additional electrolytes as needed for maintenance or to correct imbalances may be added to the amino acid solution.

If desired, only one-half of an estimated daily amino acid requirement of 1.5 g/kg can be given on the first day. Amino acids together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% infused into a peripheral vein can be continued while oral nutrition is impaired. However, if a patient is unable to take oral nourishment for a prolonged period of time, institution of total parenteral nutrition with exogenous calories should be considered.

2. Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

ADULTS

Solutions containing 3.5 to 5% amino acids with 5 to 10% glucose may be infused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day. Fat emulsion administration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (E.F.A.D.). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of E.F.A.D. in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Aminosyn II solution should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered to provide part of the calories, if desired. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn II solutions without electrolytes are intended for patients requiring individualized electrolyte therapy. Sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, calcium and magnesium are major electrolytes which should be added to Aminosyn II as required.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphorus additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, each liter of central vein TPN solution for adults contains 42.5 to 50 g of Aminosyn II with approximately 250 ± 100 g of dextrose; supplementary nonprotein calories from intravenous fat emulsion may be prescribed, at the discretion of the physician.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn II solution, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure.

Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

PEDIATRIC

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used. A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from containers containing 250 or 500 mL. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

Recommended Directions for Use of the Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique

During use, container must be stored, and all manipulations performed, in an appropriate laminar flow hood.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of sterile transfer set and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. Insertion of a piercing pin into the outlet port should be performed only once in a Pharmacy Bulk Package solution. Once the outlet site has been entered, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from transfer set pin or implement insertion is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture.

Sequentially dispense aliquots of Aminosyn II into I.V. containers using appropriate transfer set. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.

Additives may be incompatible with fluid withdrawn from this container. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When compounding admixtures, use aseptic technique. Mix thoroughly. Do not store solutions containing additives. Because of the potential for life-threatening events, caution should be taken to ensure that precipitates have not formed in any parenteral nutrient mixture.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Sorbitol-mannitol

Sorbitol-mannitol

Sorbitol-Mannitol Irrigation should be administered only by transurethral instillation with appropriate urologic instrumentation. A disposable administration set should be used. The total volume of solution used for irrigation is solely at the discretion of the surgeon.

Height of container(s) above the operating table in excess of 60 cm (approx. 2 ft) has been reported to increase intravascular absorption of the irrigating fluid.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever container and solution permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Potassium Chloride In D...

Potassium Chloride In Dextrose And Sodium Chloride

These solutions should be administered only by intravenous infusion and as directed by the physician. The dose and rate of injection are dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium should be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration less than 30 mEq/liter. Somewhat faster rates and greater concentrations (usually up to 40 mEq/liter) of potassium may be indicated in patients with more severe potassium deficiency. The total 24-hour dose should not generally exceed 200 mEq of potassium.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Lactated Ringers

Lactated Ringers

The dose is dependent upon the capacity or surface area of the structure to be irrigated and the nature of the procedure. When used as a vehicle for other drugs, the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed.

Tear at notch and along dotted line and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Potassium Chloride In D...

Potassium Chloride In Dextrose

These solutions should be administered only by intravenous infusion and as directed by the physician. The dose and rate of injection are dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium should be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration less than 30 mEq/liter. Somewhat faster rates and greater concentrations (usually up to 40 mEq/liter) of potassium may be indicated in patients with more severe potassium deficiency. The total 24-hour dose should not generally exceed 200 mEq of potassium.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.
Chromium

Chromium

Chromium 4 mcg/mL (Chromic Chloride Injection, USP) contains 4 mcg chromium/mL and is administered intravenously only after dilution. The additive should be administered in a volume of fluid not less than 100 mL. For the adult receiving TPN, the suggested additive dosage is 10 to 15 mcg chromium/day (2.5 to 3.75 mL/day). The metabolically stable adult with intestinal fluid loss may require 20 mcg chromium/day (5 mL/day), with frequent monitoring of blood levels as a guideline for subsequent administration. For pediatric patients, the suggested additive dosage is 0.14 to 0.20 mcg/kg/day (0.035 to 0.05 mL/kg/day).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Mannitol

Mannitol

Mannitol I.V. (Mannitol Injection, USP) should be administered only by intravenous infusion. The total dosage, concentration and rate of administration should be governed by the nature and severity of the condition being treated, fluid requirement and urinary output. The usual adult dosage ranges from 50 to 200 g in a 24-hour period, but in most instances an adequate response will be achieved at a dosage of approximately 100 g/24 hours. The rate of administration is usually adjusted to maintain a urine flow of at least 30 to 50 mL/hr. The total dose should be adjusted according to the clinical response and adverse events (see WARNINGS).

Test Dose: A test dose of mannitol should be given prior to instituting Mannitol I.V. therapy for patients with marked oliguria or those believed to have inadequate renal function. In adults the dose is 0.2 g/kg body weight. In pediatric patients the dose is 0.2 g/kg body weight or 6 g/m2 body surface area. The infusion is given as a 15% to 25% solution over a period of 3 to 5 minutes to produce a urine flow of at least 30 to 50 mL/hour. If urine flow does not increase, a second dose may be given; but if there is inadequate response, the patient should be re-evaluated.

Prevention of Acute Renal Failure (Oliguria): When used during cardiovascular or other types of surgery, 50 to 100 g of mannitol as a 5%, 10%, or 15% solution may be given. The concentration will depend on the fluid requirements of the patient.

Treatment of Oliguria: The usual dose to promote diuresis in oliguric patients: Adults, 300 to 400 mg/kg of body weight (21 to 28 g for a 70 kg patient) or up to 100 g of solution, given as a single dose (often in conjunction with furosemide); pediatric patients, 0.25 to 2 g/kg body weight or 60 g/m2 body surface area as a 15% to 20% solution over a period of 2 to 6 hours. Doses should not be repeated in patients with persistent oliguria.

Reduction of Intracranial Pressure and Brain Mass: In adults a dose of 0.25 to 2 g/kg body weight as a 15% to 25% solution administered over a period of 30 to 60 minutes; pediatric patients 1 to 2 g/kg body weight or 30 to 60 g/m2 body surface area over a period of 30 to 60 minutes. In small or debilitated patients, a dose of 500 mg/kg may be sufficient. Careful evaluation must be made of the circulatory and renal reserve prior to and during administration of mannitol at the higher doses and rapid infusion rates. Careful attention must be paid to fluid and electrolyte balance, body weight, and total input and output before and after infusion of mannitol. Evidence of reduced cerebral spinal fluid pressure must be observed within 15 minutes after starting infusion.

Reduction of Intraocular Pressure: In adults a dose of 0.25 to 2 g/kg body weight as a 15% to 25% solution administered over a period of 30 to 60 minutes; pediatric patients 1 to 2 g/kg body weight or 30 to 60 g/m2 body surface area over a period of 30 to 60 minutes. In small or debilitated patients, a dose of 500 mg/kg may be sufficient. When used preoperatively, the dose should be given one to one and one-half hours before surgery to achieve maximal reduction of intraocular pressure before operation.

Adjunctive Therapy for Intoxications: As an agent to promote urinary excretion of toxic substances: Adults may receive a 5% to 25% solution for as long as indicated if urinary output remains high; pediatric patients may receive 2 g/kg of body weight of a 5% or 10% solution. The concentration will depend upon the fluid requirement and urinary output of the patient. If benefits are not observed after 200 g of mannitol are administered, discontinue the mannitol therapy. Intravenous water and electrolytes must be given to match the loss of these substances in the urine, sweat and expired air.

Measurement of Glomerular Filtration Rate (GFR): 100 mL of a 20% solution (20 g) should be diluted with 180 mL of sodium chloride injection (normal saline) or 200 mL of a 10% solution (20 g) should be diluted with 80 mL of sodium chloride injection (normal saline). The resulting 280 mL of 7.2% solution is infused at a rate of 20 mL per minute. The urine is collected by catheter for a specific period of time and analyzed for mannitol excreted in mg per minute. A blood sample is drawn at the start and at the end of the time period and the concentration of mannitol determined in mg/mL of plasma. GFR is the number of mL of plasma that must have been filtered to account for the amount excreted per minute in the urine. Normal clearance rates are approximately 125 mL/minute for men; 116 mL/minute for women.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives to the flexible container, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Do not place 25% Mannitol Injection, USP in polyvinylchloride bags; a white flocculent precipitate may form from contact with PVC surfaces. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration; whenever container and solution permit. (See PRECAUTIONS).

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE - Flexible Container

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

INSTRUCTlONS FOR USE - Fliptop Vial

Remove cover and cleanse stopper with antiseptic before use.
Ringers

Ringers

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

The presence of calcium limits their compatibility with certain drugs that form precipitates of calcium salts, and also prohibits their simultaneous infusion through the same administration set as blood because of the likelihood of coagulation.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Lactated Ringers And De...

Lactated Ringers And Dextrose

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

  As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

  The presence of calcium limits their compatibility with certain drugs that form precipitates of calcium salts, and also prohibits their simultaneous infusion through the same administration set as blood because of the likelihood of coagulation.

   Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Ringers

Ringers

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

  As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

  The presence of calcium limits their compatibility with certain drugs that form precipitates of calcium salts, and also prohibits their simultaneous infusion through the same administration set as blood because of the likelihood of coagulation.

   Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Dextrose And Sodium Chl...

Dextrose And Sodium Chloride

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.
Normosol-m And Dextrose...

Normosol-m And Dextrose

Normosol-M and 5% Dextrose Injection is administered by intravenous infusion. The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. A daily total amount of 1500 mL/M2of body surface will meet the usual adult daily requirements for water and principal electrolytes in patients unable to take anything by mouth. The usual daily maintenance amount for an average adult (70 kg and 1.8 square meters of body surface) is approximately three liters.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

To avoid precipitation of calcium salts that may occur when certain drugs are added, Normosol-M and 5% Dextrose Injection does not contain calcium.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

To Administer

Attach administration set per manufacturer’s instructions.

Regulate rate of administration per institutional policy.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Normosol-m And Dextrose...

Normosol-m And Dextrose

Normosol-M and 5% Dextrose Injection is administered by intravenous infusion. The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient. A daily total amount of 1500 mL/M2 of body surface will meet the usual adult daily requirements for water and principal electrolytes in patients unable to take anything by mouth. The usual daily maintenance amount for an average adult (70 kg and 1.8 square meters of body surface) is approximately three liters.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

To avoid precipitation of calcium salts that may occur when certain drugs are added, Normosol‑M and 5% Dextrose Injection does not contain calcium.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Diazepam

Diazepam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. The usual recommended dose in older children and adults ranges from 2 mg to 20 mg I.M. or I.V., depending on the indication and its severity. In some conditions, e.g., tetanus, larger doses may be required. (See dosage for specific indications.) In acute conditions the injection may be repeated within one hour although an interval of 3 to 4 hours is usually satisfactory. Lower doses (usually 2 mg to 5 mg) and slow increase in dosage should be used for elderly or debilitated patients and when other sedative drugs are administered. (See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

For dosage in infants above the age of 30 days and children, see the specific indications below. When intravenous use is indicated, facilities for respiratory assistance should be readily available.

Intramuscular: Diazepam Injection, USP should be injected deeply into the muscle.

Intravenous use: (See WARNINGS, particularly for use in children.) The solution should be injected slowly, taking at least one minute for each 5 mg (1 mL) given. Do not use small veins, such as those on the dorsum of the hand or wrist. Extreme care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial administration or extravasation.

Do not mix or dilute diazepam with other solutions or drugs in syringe or infusion flask. If it is not feasible to administer diazepam directly I.V., it may be injected slowly through the infusion tubing as close as possible to the vein insertion.

Once the acute symptomatology has been properly controlled with diazepam injection, the patient may be placed on oral therapy with diazepam if further treatment is required.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit (see PRECAUTIONS). NOTE: Solution may appear colorless to light yellow.

USUAL ADULT DOSAGE

DOSAGE RANGE IN CHILDREN

(I.V. administration should be made slowly)

Moderate Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

2 mg to 5 mg, I.M. or I.V. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Severe Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

5 mg to 10 mg, I.M. or I.V. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Acute Alcohol Withdrawal: As an aid in symptomatic relief of acute agitation, tremor, impending or acute delirium tremens and hallucinosis.

10 mg, I.M. or I.V. initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Endoscopic Procedures: Adjunctively, if apprehension, anxiety or acute stress reactions are present prior to endoscopic procedures. Dosage of narcotics should be reduced by at least a third and in some cases may be omitted. See Precautions for peroral procedures.

Titrate I.V. dosage to desired sedative response, such as slurring of speech, with slow administration immediately prior to the procedure. Generally 10 mg or less is adequate, but up to 20 mg I.V. may be given, particularly when concomitant narcotics are omitted. If I.V. cannot be used, 5 mg to 10 mg I.M. approximately 30 minutes prior to the procedure.

Muscle Spasm: Associated with local pathology, cerebral palsy, athetosis, stiff-man syndrome or tetanus.

5 mg to 10 mg, I.M. or I.V. initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3  to 4 hours, if necessary. For tetanus, larger doses may be required.

For tetanus in infants over 30 days of age, 1 mg to 2 mg I.M. or I.V., slowly, repeated every 3   to 4 hours as necessary. In children 5 years or older, 5 mg to 10 mg repeated every 3 to 4 hours may be required to control tetanus spasms. Respiratory assistance should be available.

Status Epilepticus and Severe Recurrent Convulsive Seizures: In the convulsing patient, the I.V. route is by far preferred. This injection should be administered slowly. However, if I.V. administration is impossible, the I.M. route may be used.

5 mg to 10 mg initially (I.V. preferred). This injection may be repeated if necessary at 10 to 15  minute intervals up to a maximum dose of 30 mg.

If necessary, therapy with diazepam may be repeated in 2 to 4 hours; however, residual active metabolites may persist, and readministration should be made with this consideration.

Extreme caution must be exercised with individuals with chronic lung disease or unstable cardiovascular status.

Infants over 30 days of age and children under 5 years, 0.2 mg to 0.5 mg slowly every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 5 mg (I.V. preferred). Children 5 years or older, 1 mg every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 10 mg (slow I.V. administration preferred). Repeat in 2 to 4 hours if necessary. EEG monitoring of the seizure may be helpful.

Preoperative Medication: To relieve anxiety and tension. (If atropine, scopolamine or other premedications are desired, they must be administered in separate syringes.)

10 mg, I.M. (preferred route), before surgery.

Cardioversion: To relieve anxiety and tension and to reduce recall of procedure.

5 mg to 15 mg, I.V., within 5 to 10 minutes prior to the procedure.

MANAGEMENT OF OVERDOSAGE

Manifestations of diazepam overdosage include somnolence, confusion, coma, and diminished reflexes. Respiration, pulse and blood pressure should be monitored, as in all cases of drug overdosage, although, in general, these effects have been minimal. General supportive measures should be employed, along with intravenous fluids, and an adequate airway maintained. Hypotension may be combated by the use of norepinephrine or metaraminol. Dialysis is of limited value.

Flumazenil, a specific benzodiazepine receptor antagonist, is indicated for the complete or partial reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines and may be used in situations when an overdose with a benzodiazepine is known or suspected. Prior to the administration of flumazenil, necessary measures should be instituted to secure airway, ventilation, and intravenous access. Flumazenil is intended as an adjunct to, not as a substitute for, proper management of benzodiazepine overdose. Patients treated with flumazenil should be monitored for re-sedation, respiratory depression, and other residual benzodiazepine effects for an appropriate period after treatment. The prescriber should be aware of a risk of seizure in association with flumazenil treatment, particularly in long-term benzodiazepine users and in cyclic antidepressant overdose. The complete flumazenil package insert including CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS should be consulted prior to use.
Diazepam

Diazepam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. The usual recommended dose in older children and adults ranges from 2 mg to 20 mg I.M. or I.V., depending on the indication and its severity. In some conditions, e.g., tetanus, larger doses may be required. (See dosage for specific indications.) In acute conditions the injection may be repeated within one hour although an interval of 3 to 4 hours is usually satisfactory. Lower doses (usually 2 mg to 5 mg) and slow increase in dosage should be used for elderly or debilitated patients and when other sedative drugs are administered. (See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

For dosage in infants above the age of 30 days and children, see the specific indications below. When intravenous use is indicated, facilities for respiratory assistance should be readily available.

Intramuscular: Diazepam Injection, USP should be injected deeply into the muscle.

Intravenous use: (See WARNINGS, particularly for use in children.) The solution should be injected slowly, taking at least one minute for each 5 mg (1 mL) given. Do not use small veins, such as those on the dorsum of the hand or wrist. Extreme care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial administration or extravasation.

Do not mix or dilute diazepam with other solutions or drugs in syringe or infusion flask. If it is not feasible to administer diazepam directly I.V., it may be injected slowly through the infusion tubing as close as possible to the vein insertion.

Once the acute symptomatology has been properly controlled with diazepam injection, the patient may be placed on oral therapy with diazepam if further treatment is required.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit (see PRECAUTIONS). NOTE: Solution may appear colorless to light yellow.

USUAL ADULT DOSAGE

DOSAGE RANGE IN CHILDREN

                (I.V. administration should be made slowly)

Moderate Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

2 mg to 5 mg, I.M. or I.V. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Severe Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

5 mg to 10 mg, I.M. or I.V. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Acute Alcohol Withdrawal: As an aid in symptomatic relief of acute agitation, tremor, impending or acute delirium tremens and hallucinosis.

10 mg, I.M. or I.V. initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Endoscopic Procedures: Adjunctively, if apprehension, anxiety or acute stress reactions are present prior to endoscopic procedures. Dosage of narcotics should be reduced by at least a third and in some cases may be omitted. See Precautions for peroral procedures.

Titrate I.V. dosage to desired sedative response, such as slurring of speech, with slow administration immediately prior to the procedure. Generally 10 mg or less is adequate, but up to 20 mg I.V. may be given, particularly when concomitant narcotics are omitted. If I.V. cannot be used, 5 mg to 10 mg I.M. approximately 30 minutes prior to the procedure.

Muscle Spasm: Associated with local pathology, cerebral palsy, athetosis, stiff-man syndrome or tetanus.

5 mg to 10 mg, I.M. or I.V. initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3  to 4 hours, if necessary. For tetanus, larger doses may be required.

For tetanus in infants over 30 days of age, 1 mg to 2 mg I.M. or I.V., slowly, repeated every 3   to 4 hours as necessary. In children 5 years or older, 5 mg to 10 mg repeated every 3 to 4 hours may be required to control tetanus spasms. Respiratory assistance should be available.

Status Epilepticus and Severe Recurrent Convulsive Seizures: In the convulsing patient, the I.V. route is by far preferred. This injection should be administered slowly. However, if I.V. administration is impossible, the I.M. route may be used.

5 mg to 10 mg initially (I.V. preferred). This injection may be repeated if necessary at 10 to 15  minute intervals up to a maximum dose of 30 mg.

If necessary, therapy with diazepam may be repeated in 2 to 4 hours; however, residual active metabolites may persist, and readministration should be made with this consideration.

Extreme caution must be exercised with individuals with chronic lung disease or unstable cardiovascular status.

Infants over 30 days of age and children under 5 years, 0.2 mg to 0.5 mg slowly every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 5 mg (I.V. preferred). Children 5 years or older, 1 mg every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 10 mg (slow I.V. administration preferred). Repeat in 2 to 4 hours if necessary. EEG monitoring of the seizure may be helpful.

Preoperative Medication: To relieve anxiety and tension. (If atropine, scopolamine or other premedications are desired, they must be administered in separate syringes.)

10 mg, I.M. (preferred route), before surgery.

Cardioversion: To relieve anxiety and tension and to reduce recall of procedure.

5 mg to 15 mg, I.V., within 5 to 10 minutes prior to the procedure.

MANAGEMENT OF OVERDOSAGE

Manifestations of diazepam overdosage include somnolence, confusion, coma, and diminished reflexes. Respiration, pulse and blood pressure should be monitored, as in all cases of drug overdosage, although, in general, these effects have been minimal. General supportive measures should be employed, along with intravenous fluids, and an adequate airway maintained. Hypotension may be combated by the use of norepinephrine or metaraminol. Dialysis is of limited value.

Flumazenil, a specific benzodiazepine receptor antagonist, is indicated for the complete or partial reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines and may be used in situations when an overdose with a benzodiazepine is known or suspected. Prior to the administration of flumazenil, necessary measures should be instituted to secure airway, ventilation, and intravenous access. Flumazenil is intended as an adjunct to, not as a substitute for, proper management of benzodiazepine overdose. Patients treated with flumazenil should be monitored for re-sedation, respiratory depression, and other residual benzodiazepine effects for an appropriate period after treatment. The prescriber should be aware of a risk of seizure in association with flumazenil treatment, particularly in long-term benzodiazepine users and in cyclic antidepressant overdose. The complete flumazenil package insert including CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS should be consulted prior to use.
Diazepam

Diazepam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. The usual recommended dose in older children and adults ranges from 2 mg to 20 mg IM or IV, depending on the indication and its severity. In some conditions, e.g., tetanus, larger doses may be required. (See dosage for specific indications.) In acute conditions the injection may be repeated within one hour although an interval of 3 to 4 hours is usually satisfactory. Lower doses (usually 2 mg to 5 mg) and slow increase in dosage should be used for elderly or debilitated patients and when other sedative drugs are administered. (See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

For dosage in infants above the age of 30 days and children, see the specific indications below. When intravenous use is indicated, facilities for respiratory assistance should be readily available.

Intramuscular: Diazepam injection should be injected deeply into the muscle.

Intravenous Use: (See WARNINGS, particularly for use in children.) The solution should be injected slowly, taking at least one minute for each 5 mg (1 mL) given. Do not use small veins, such as those on the dorsum of the hand or wrist. Extreme care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial administration or extravasation.

Do not mix or dilute diazepam with other solutions or drugs in syringe or infusion flask. If it is not feasible to administer diazepam directly IV, it may be injected slowly through the infusion tubing as close as possible to the vein insertion.

Once the acute symptomatology has been properly controlled with diazepam injection, the patient may be placed on oral therapy with diazepam if further treatment is required.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGE FOR INJECTABLE DIAZEPAM
USUAL ADULT DOSAGE

DOSAGE RANGE IN CHILDREN
(IV administration should be made slowly)
Moderate Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

2 mg to 5 mg, IM or IV Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Severe Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

5 mg to 10 mg, IM or IV. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Acute Alcohol Withdrawal:

As an aid in symptomatic relief of acute agitation, tremor, impending or acute delirium tremens, and hallucinosis.

10 mg, IM or IV initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Endoscopic Procedures:

Adjunctively, if apprehension, anxiety or acute stress reaction are present prior to endoscopic procedures. Dosage of narcotics should be reduced by at least a third and in some cases may be omitted. See PRECAUTIONS for peroral procedures.

Titrate IV dosage to desired sedative response, such as slurring of speech, with slow administration immediately prior to the procedure. Generally 10 mg or less is adequate, but up to 20 mg IV may be given, particularly when concomitant narcotics are omitted. If IV cannot be used, 5 mg to10 mg IM approximately 30 minutes prior to the procedure.

Muscle Spasm

Associated with local pathology, cerebral palsy, athetosis, stiff-man syndrome, or tetanus.

5 mg to 10 mg, IM or IV initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary. For tetanus, larger doses may be required.

For tetanus in infants over 30 days of age, 1 mg to 2 mg IM or IV, slowly, repeated every 3 to 4 hours as necessary. In children 5 years or older, 5 mg to 10 mg repeated every 3 to 4 hours may be required to control tetanus spasms. Respiratory assistance should be available.

Status Epilepticus and Severe Recurrent Convulsive Seizures:

In the convulsing patient, the IV route is by far preferred. This injection should be administered slowly. However, if IV administration is impossible, the IM route may be used.

5 mg to 10 mg initially (IV preferred). This injection may be repeated if necessary at 10 to 15 minute intervals up to a maximum dose of 30 mg. If necessary, therapy with diazepam may be repeated in 2 to 4 hours; however, residual active metabolites may persist, and readministration should be made with this consideration. Extreme caution must be exercised with individuals with chronic lung disease or unstable cardiovascular status.

Infants over 30 days of age and children under 5 years, 0.2 mg to 0.5 mg slowly every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 5 mg (IV preferred). Children 5 years or older, 1 mg every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 10 mg (slow IV administration preferred). Repeat in 2 to 4 hours if necessary. EEG monitoring of the seizure may be helpful.

Preoperative Medication

To relieve anxiety and tension. (If atropine, scopolamine or other premedications are desired, they must be administered in separate syringes.)

10 mg, IM (preferred route), before surgery.

Cardioversion

To relieve anxiety and tension and to reduce recall of procedure.

5 mg to 15 mg, IV, within 5 to 10 minutes prior to the procedure.
Diazepam

Diazepam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. The usual recommended dose in older children and adults ranges from 2 mg to 20 mg IM or IV, depending on the indication and its severity. In some conditions, e.g., tetanus, larger doses may be required. (See dosage for specific indications.) In acute conditions the injection may be repeated within one hour although an interval of 3 to 4 hours is usually satisfactory. Lower doses (usually 2 mg to 5 mg) and slow increase in dosage should be used for elderly or debilitated patients and when other sedative drugs are administered. (See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

For dosage in infants above the age of 30 days and children, see the specific indications below. When intravenous use is indicated, facilities for respiratory assistance should be readily available.

Intramuscular: Diazepam injection should be injected deeply into the muscle.

Intravenous Use: (See WARNINGS, particularly for use in children.) The solution should be injected slowly, taking at least one minute for each 5 mg (1 mL) given. Do not use small veins, such as those on the dorsum of the hand or wrist. Extreme care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial administration or extravasation.

Do not mix or dilute diazepam with other solutions or drugs in syringe or infusion flask. If it is not feasible to administer diazepam directly IV, it may be injected slowly through the infusion tubing as close as possible to the vein insertion.

Once the acute symptomatology has been properly controlled with diazepam injection, the patient may be placed on oral therapy with diazepam if further treatment is required.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGE FOR INJECTABLE DIAZEPAM

USUAL ADULT DOSAGE

DOSAGE RANGE IN CHILDREN

(IV administration should be made slowly)

Moderate Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

2 mg to 5 mg, IM or IV Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Severe Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

5 mg to 10 mg, IM or IV. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Acute Alcohol Withdrawal:

As an aid in symptomatic relief of acute agitation, tremor, impending or acute delirium tremens, and hallucinosis.

10 mg, IM or IV initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Endoscopic Procedures:

Adjunctively, if apprehension, anxiety or acute stress reaction are present prior to endoscopic procedures. Dosage of narcotics should be reduced by at least a third and in some cases may be omitted. See PRECAUTIONS for peroral procedures.

Titrate IV dosage to desired sedative response, such as slurring of speech, with slow administration immediately prior to the procedure. Generally 10 mg or less is adequate, but up to 20 mg IV may be given, particularly when concomitant narcotics are omitted. If IV cannot be used, 5 mg to10 mg IM approximately 30 minutes prior to the procedure.

Muscle Spasm

Associated with local pathology, cerebral palsy, athetosis, stiff-man syndrome, or tetanus.

5 mg to 10 mg, IM or IV initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary. For tetanus, larger doses may be required.

For tetanus in infants over 30 days of age, 1 mg to 2 mg IM or IV, slowly, repeated every 3 to 4 hours as necessary. In children 5 years or older, 5 mg to 10 mg repeated every 3 to 4 hours may be required to control tetanus spasms. Respiratory assistance should be available.

Status Epilepticus and Severe Recurrent Convulsive Seizures:

In the convulsing patient, the IV route is by far preferred. This injection should be administered slowly. However, if IV administration is impossible, the IM route may be used.

5 mg to 10 mg initially (IV preferred). This injection may be repeated if necessary at 10 to 15 minute intervals up to a maximum dose of 30 mg. If necessary, therapy with diazepam may be repeated in 2 to 4 hours; however, residual active metabolites may persist, and readministration should be made with this consideration. Extreme caution must be exercised with individuals with chronic lung disease or unstable cardiovascular status.

Infants over 30 days of age and children under 5 years, 0.2 mg to 0.5 mg slowly every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 5 mg (IV preferred). Children 5 years or older, 1 mg every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 10 mg (slow IV administration preferred). Repeat in 2 to 4 hours if necessary. EEG monitoring of the seizure may be helpful.

Preoperative Medication

To relieve anxiety and tension. (If atropine, scopolamine or other premedications are desired, they must be administered in separate syringes.)

10 mg, IM (preferred route), before surgery.

Cardioversion

To relieve anxiety and tension and to reduce recall of procedure.

5 mg to 15 mg, IV, within 5 to 10 minutes prior to the procedure.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

The dose is dependent upon the capacity or surface area of the structure to be irrigated and the nature of the procedure. When used as a diluent or vehicle for drugs, the manufacturer's recommendations should be followed.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Dextrose

Dextrose

Concentrated Dextrose in Water is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) after admixture with amino acid solutions or (b) after dilution with other compatible IV fluids. Dosage should be adjusted to meet the requirements of each individual patient.

50% and 70% Dextrose Injection, USP in the 2000 mL flexible Pharmacy Bulk Package are designed for use with automated compounding devices for preparing intravenous nutritional admixtures. Dosages will be in accordance with the recommendation of the prescribing physician. 50% and 70% Dextrose Injection, USP are not intended for direct infusion. Admixtures should be made by, or under the direction of, a pharmacist using strict aseptic technique under a laminar flow hood. Compounded admixtures may be stored under refrigeration for up to 24 hours. Administration of admixtures should be completed within 24 hours after removal from refrigeration.

The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight/hr. About 95% of the dextrose is retained when infused at a rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr.

Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyte concentrations, and acid base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants such evaluation.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible with the fluid withdrawn from this container. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When compounding admixtures, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Recommended Directions for Use of the Pharmacy Bulk Package Use Aseptic Technique

During use, container must be stored, and all manipulations performed, in an appropriate laminar flow hood.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of transfer set and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. Insertion of a piercing pin into the outlet port should be performed only once in a Pharmacy Bulk Package solution. Once the outlet site has been entered, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from transfer set pin or implement insertion is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture.

Sequentially dispense aliquots of 50% or 70% Dextrose Injection, USP into IV containers using appropriate transfer set. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.
Sodium Chloride Irrigan...

Sodium Chloride Irrigant

The dose is dependent upon the capacity or surface area of the structure to be irrigated and the nature of the procedure. When used as a diluent or vehicle for other drugs, the manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed. For use in cell washing, the manufacturer’s recommendations for blood salvaging and red cell processing should be followed.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution container permits. See PRECAUTIONS.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS).
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Hextend

Hextend

Dosage for Acute Use in Plasma Volume Expansion

HEXTEND is administered by intravenous infusion only. Total dosage and rate of infusion depend upon the amount of blood or plasma lost and the resultant hemoconcentration as well as age, weight, and clinical condition of the patient.

Adults: The amount usually administered is 500 to 1000 mL. Doses of more than 1500 mL per day for the typical 70 kg patient (approximately 20 mL per kg of body weight) are usually not required although doses of isotonic solutions containing 6% hetastarch up to 1500 mL have been used during major surgery generally without a need for blood or blood products. Volumes in excess of 1500 mL per day have been used where severe blood loss has occurred although generally only in conjunction with the administration of blood and blood products (see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS).

Pediatric Patients: Adequate, well controlled clinical trials to establish the safety and effectiveness of HEXTEND in pediatric patients have not been conducted (see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

General Recommendations

Do not use plastic container in series connection.

If administration is controlled by a pumping device, care must be taken to discontinue pumping action before the container runs dry or air embolism may result.

This solution is intended for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. It is recommended that intravenous administration apparatus be replaced at least once every 24 hours.

Use only if solution is clear and container and seals are intact.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

If administration is by pressure infusion, all air should be withdrawn or expelled from the bag through the medication port prior to infusion.

The safety and compatibility of other additives have not been established. This product contains calcium and should not be administered simultaneously with blood through the same administration set because of the likelihood of coagulation (see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS).

The solution contains no bacteriostat or antimicrobial agent and is intended only for single-dose injection. When smaller doses are required, the unused portion should be discarded.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS).
Lmd In Dextrose

Lmd In Dextrose

LMD (dextran 40) is administered by I.V. infusion only.

Dextran 1 should be administered prior to administration of clinical dextran solutions.
1. In shock, it is suggested that total dosage not exceed 20 mL/kg for adults and adolescents, during the first 24 hours. The first 10 mL/kg may be infused as rapidly as necessary to effect improvement. It is strongly recommended that central venous pressure be monitored frequently during the initial infusion of the drug. Should therapy continue beyond 24 hours, subsequent dosage should not exceed 10 mL/kg per day and therapy should not continue beyond five days. 2. In extracorporeal perfusion, the dosage of LMD used will vary with the volume of the pump oxygenator. LMD can serve as a sole primer or as an additive to other priming fluids. For adults and adolescents, generally 10 to 20 mL of a 10% solution (1 to 2 g) of LMD per kilogram of body weight are added to the perfusion circuit. Usually total dosage should not exceed 2 g/kg of body weight. 3. In prophylaxis of venous thrombosis and thromboembolism, the dosage of LMD for adults and adolescents, should be chosen according to the risk of thromboembolic complications, e.g., type of surgery and duration of immobilization. In general, treatment should be initiated during surgery; 500 to 1,000 mL (approximately 10 mL/kg of body weight) should be administered on the day of operation. Treatment should be continued at a dose of 500 mL daily for an additional two to three days; then, according to the risk of complications, 500 mL may be given every second or third day during the period of risk, for up to two weeks. 4. Infants may be given 5 mL per kg body weight and children 10 mL per kg.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Note: When infusing concentrated LMD, the administration set should include a filter.

Instructions for use

To Open

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)
1. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 2. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. Note: See full directions on administration set carton. 4. Suspend container from hanger. 5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in drip chamber. 6. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 7. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 8. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Hetastarch In Sodium Ch...

Hetastarch In Sodium Chloride

Dosage for Acute Use in Plasma Volume Expansion

6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection is administered by intravenous infusion only. Total dosage and rate of infusion depend upon the amount of blood or plasma lost and the resultant hemoconcentration.

2.1 Adults

The amount usually administered is 500 to 1000 mL. Doses of more than 1500 mL per day for the typical 70 kg patient (approximately 20 mL per kg of body weight) are usually not required. Higher doses have been reported in postoperative and trauma patients where severe blood loss has occurred [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.2 Leukapheresis

250 to 700 mL of 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection with citrate anticoagulant is administered by aseptic addition to the input line of the centrifugation apparatus at a ratio of 1:8 to 1:13 to venous whole blood. The 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection and citrate should be thoroughly mixed to assure effective anticoagulation of blood as it flows through the leukapheresis machine.

2.3 Direction for use for 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection
• Do not use plastic container in series connection. If administration is controlled by a pumping device, care must be taken to discontinue pumping action before the container runs dry or air embolism may result. If administration is not controlled by a pumping device, refrain from applying excessive pressure (>300mmHg) causing distortion to the container such as wringing or twisting. Such handling could result in breakage of the container. • Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Use only if solution is clear and container and seals are intact. • Intended for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. It is recommended that intravenous administration apparatus be replaced at least once every 24 hours. • Withdraw or expel all air from the bag through the medication port prior to infusion if administration is by pressure infusion. • For single use only. The solution contains no bacteriostat, antimicrobial agent or added buffers (except for pH adjustment) and is intended only for single-dose injection. When smaller doses are required the unused portion should be discarded.
CAUTION: Before administering to the patient, review these directions:

Visual Inspection
• Do not remove the plastic infusion container from its overwrap until immediately before use. • Inspect each container. Read the label. Ensure solution is the one ordered and is within the expiration date. • Invert container and carefully inspect the solution in good light for cloudiness, haze, or particulate matter. • Any container which is suspect should not be used.
To Open
1. Tear overwrap down at notch and remove solution container. 2. Check for minute leaks by squeezing solution container firmly. 3. If any leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired.
Preparation for Administration
1. Remove plastic protector from sterile set port at bottom of container. 2. Attach administration set. Refer to complete directions accompanying set.
When stored at room temperature, 6% Hetastarch in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection admixtures of 500-560 mL with citrate concentrations up to 2.5% were compatible for 24 hours. The safety and compatibility of additives other than citrate have not been established.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

2.1 Adult Population

The recommended adult dosages are outlined in Table 1. Cefazolin for Injection USP should be administered intravenously (IV). Cefazolin for Injection in the ADD-Vantage® Vial is not intended for direct intravenous injection.
* In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin per day have been used.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule in Adult Patients with CrCl Greater Than or Equal To 55 mL/min.

Site and Type of Infection

Dose

Frequency

Moderate to severe infections

500 mg to 1 gram

every 6 to 8 hours

Mild infections caused bysusceptible gram-positive cocci

250 mg to 500 mg

every 8 hours

Acute, uncomplicated urinarytract infections

1 gram

every 12 hours

Pneumococcal pneumonia

500 mg

every 12 hours

Severe, life-threatening infections(e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)*

1 gram to 1.5 grams

every 6 hours

2.2 Perioperative Prophylactic Use

To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:
• 1 gram or 2 grams IV administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery. • For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). • 500 mg to 1 gram IV every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.
It is important that (i) the preoperative dose be given just prior (1/2 hour to 1 hour) to the start of surgery so that adequate antibacterial concentrations are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (ii) cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient concentrations of the antibacterial drug at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

The prophylactic administration of cefazolin should usually be discontinued within a 24-hour period after the surgical procedure. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.

2.3 Patients with Renal Impairment

Cefazolin may be used in patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 2. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection.

Table 2: Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

55 mL/min. or greater

full dose

normal frequency

35 to 54 mL/min.

full dose

every 8 hours or longer

11 to 34 mL/min.

1/2 usual dose

every 12 hours

10 mL/min. or less

1/2 usual dose

every 18 to 24 hours

2.4 Pediatric Population

In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for Injection in these patients is not recommended.

Cefazolin may be used in pediatric patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 3. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment for Pediatric Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

71 mL/min. or greater

full dose given inequally divided doses

normal frequency

70 to 41 mL/min.

60% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

40 to 21 mL/min.

25% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

20 to 5 mL/min. or less

10% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 24 hours

All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

2.5 Preparation of Parenteral Solution

Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature. Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.

ADD-Vantage® Vials

ADD-Vantage® Vials of Cefazolin for Injection are to be reconstituted only with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection in the 50 mL or 100 mL ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Containers or with 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection in the 50 mL ADD-Vantage® Flexible Diluent Container. Cefazolin for Injection supplied in single dose ADD-Vantage® Vials should prepared as directed below.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1), then pull straight up to remove the cap (SEE FIGURE 2). NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe. b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover (SEE FIGURE 3). 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click (SEE FIGURE 4). The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove (SEE FIGURE 4). 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Reconstitute the Drug:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container (SEE FIGURE 5). 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial (SEE FIGURE 6). Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

Compatibility and Stability

Ordinarily ADD-Vantage® Vials should be reconstituted only when it is certain that the patient is ready to receive the drug. However, Cefazolin for Injection in ADD-Vantage® vials is stable for 24 hours at room temperature when reconstituted as directed (See RECONSTITUTION, ADD-Vantage® Vials and INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE).

(DO NOT REFRIGERATE OR FREEZE CEFAZOLIN SODIUM IN ADD-VANTAGE® VIALS.)

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Dextrose

Dextrose

Concentrated Dextrose in Water is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) after admixture with amino acid solutions or (b) after dilution with other compatible IV fluids. Dosage should be adjusted to meet the requirements of each individual patient.

The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight /hr. About 95% of the dextrose is retained when infused at a rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr.

Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyte concentrations, and acid-base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants such evaluation.

A list of nutritional admixture values is appended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS).

Drug Interaction

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Dextrose

Dextrose

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open:

Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration.

To Add Medication

Prepare additive port.

Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.

The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.

Mix container contents thoroughly.

Preparation for Administration

(Use aseptic technique)

Close flow control clamp of administration set.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: When using a vented administration set, replace bacterial retentive air filter with piercing pin cover. Insert piercing pin with twisting motion until shoulder of air filter housing rests against the outlet port flange.

Suspend container from hanger.

Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

Attach venipuncture device to set.

Open clamp to expel air from set and venipuncture device. Close clamp.

Perform venipuncture.

Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of Gemcitabine is 1000 mg/m2 as an intravenous infusion over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle, in combination with carboplatin AUC 4 intravenously after gemcitabine administration on Day 1 of each 21-day cycle. Refer to carboplatin prescribing information for additional information.

Dose Modifications

Recommended Gemcitabine dose modifications for myelosuppression are described in Table 1 and Table 2 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.
Table 1: Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine for Myelosuppression on Day of Treatment in Ovarian Cancer
Treatment Day

Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L)

Platelet count (x 106/L)

% of full dose

Day 1

≥1500

less than 1500

and

or

≥100,000

less than 100,000

100%

Delay Treatment Cycle

Day 8

≥1500

1000-1499

less than 1000

and

or

or

≥100,000

75,000-99,999

less than 75,000

100

50

Hold
Table 2: Gemcitabine Dose Modification for Myelosuppression in Previous Cycle in Ovarian Cancer
Occurrence

Myelosuppression During Treatment Cycle

Dose Modification

Initial Occurrence

Absolute granulocyte count less than 500 x 106/L for more than 5 days

Absolute granulocyte count less than 100 x 106/L for more than 3 days

Febrile neutropenia

Platelets less than 25,000 x 106/L

Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity

Permanently reduce Gemcitabine to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8

Subsequent Occurrence

If any of the above toxicities occur after the initial dose reduction

Permanently reduce Gemcitabine dose to 800 mg/m2 on Day 1 only

2.2 Breast Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of Gemcitabine is 1250 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle that includes paclitaxel. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3 hour intravenous infusion before gemcitabine administration.

Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for Gemcitabine for myelosuppression are described in Table 3 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.
Table 3: Recommended Dose Reductions for Gemcitabine for Myelosuppression on Day of Treatment in Breast Cancer
Treatment Day

Absolute granulocyte count

Platelet count

% of full dose

Day 1

≥1500

less than 1500

and

or

≥100,000

less than 100,000

100%

Hold

Day 8

≥1200

1000-1199

700-999

less than 700

and

or

and

or

greater than 75,000

50,000-75,000

≥50,000

less than 50,000

100%

75%

50%

Hold

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

Every 4-week schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine is 1000 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 in combination with cisplatin therapy. Administer cisplatin intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine.

Every 3-week schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine is 1250 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 in combination with cisplatin therapy. Administer cisplatin intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine.

Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine myelosuppression are described in Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for gemcitabine recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine is 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes intravenously. The recommended treatment schedule:
• Weeks 1-8: weekly dosing for the first 7 weeks followed by one week rest. • After week 8: weekly dosing on Days 1, 8, and 15 of 28-day cycles.
Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine for myelosuppression are described in Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

Patients receiving gemcitabine should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 4.
Table 4: Recommended Dose Reductions for Gemcitabine for Myelosuppression in Pancreatic Cancer and Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

500-999

less than 500

and

or

or

≥100,000

50,000-99,999

less than 50,000

100

75

Hold

2.5 Dose Modifications for Non-Hematologic Adverse Reactions

Permanently discontinue Gemcitabine for any of the following
• Unexplained dyspnea or other evidence of severe pulmonary toxicity • Severe hepatic toxicity • Hemolytic-Uremic Syndrome • Capillary Leak Syndrome
Withhold gemcitabine or reduce dose by 50% for other severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity until resolved. No dose modifications are recommended for alopecia, nausea, or vomiting.

2.6 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Exercise caution and wear gloves when preparing gemcitabine solutions. Immediately wash the skin thoroughly or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water if gemcitabine contacts the skin or mucus membranes. Death has occurred in animal studies due to dermal absorption. For further guidance on handling gemcitabine go to “OSHA Hazardous Drugs” (refer to antineoplastic weblinks including OSHA Technical Manual) at OSHA.

http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/hazardousdrugs/index.html

2.7 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

Reconstitute the vials with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection without preservatives.

Add 5 mL to the 200-mg vial or 25 mL to the 1-g vial. These dilutions each yield a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL. Complete withdrawal of the vial contents will provide 200 mg or 1 g of gemcitabine. Prior to administration the appropriate amount of drug must be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection. Final concentrations may be as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

Reconstituted Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is a clear, colorless to light straw-colored solution. Inspect visually prior to administration and discard for particulate matter or discoloration.

Gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature of 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion. Do not refrigerate as crystallization can occur.

No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of Gemcitabine is 1000 mg/m2 as an intravenous infusion over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle, in combination with carboplatin AUC 4 intravenously after gemcitabine administration on Day 1 of each 21-day cycle. Refer to carboplatin prescribing information for additional information.

Dose Modifications

Recommended Gemcitabine dose modifications for myelosuppression are described in Table 1 and Table 2 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.
Table 1: Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine for Myelosuppression on Day of Treatment in Ovarian Cancer
Treatment Day

Absolute granulocyte count (x 106/L)

Platelet count (x 106/L)

% of full dose

Day 1

≥1500

less than 1500

and

or

≥100,000

less than 100,000

100%

Delay Treatment Cycle

Day 8

≥1500

1000-1499

less than 1000

and

or

or

≥100,000

75,000-99,999

less than 75,000

100

50

Hold
Table 2: Gemcitabine Dose Modification for Myelosuppression in Previous Cycle in Ovarian Cancer
Occurrence

Myelosuppression During Treatment Cycle

Dose Modification

Initial Occurrence

Absolute granulocyte count less than 500 x 106/L for more than 5 days

Absolute granulocyte count less than 100 x 106/L for more than 3 days

Febrile neutropenia

Platelets less than 25,000 x 106/L

Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity

Permanently reduce Gemcitabine to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8

Subsequent Occurrence

If any of the above toxicities occur after the initial dose reduction

Permanently reduce Gemcitabine dose to 800 mg/m2 on Day 1 only

2.2 Breast Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of Gemcitabine is 1250 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle that includes paclitaxel. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3 hour intravenous infusion before gemcitabine administration.

Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for Gemcitabine for myelosuppression are described in Table 3 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.
Table 3: Recommended Dose Reductions for Gemcitabine for Myelosuppression on Day of Treatment in Breast Cancer
Treatment Day

Absolute granulocyte count

Platelet count

% of full dose

Day 1

≥1500

less than 1500

and

or

≥100,000

less than 100,000

100%

Hold

Day 8

≥1200

1000-1199

700-999

less than 700

and

or

and

or

greater than 75,000

50,000-75,000

≥50,000

less than 50,000

100%

75%

50%

Hold

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

Every 4-week schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine is 1000 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 in combination with cisplatin therapy. Administer cisplatin intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine.

Every 3-week schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine is 1250 mg/m2 intravenously over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 in combination with cisplatin therapy. Administer cisplatin intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of gemcitabine.

Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine myelosuppression are described in Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for gemcitabine recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose of gemcitabine is 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes intravenously. The recommended treatment schedule:
• Weeks 1-8: weekly dosing for the first 7 weeks followed by one week rest. • After week 8: weekly dosing on Days 1, 8, and 15 of 28-day cycles.
Dose Modifications

Recommended dose modifications for gemcitabine for myelosuppression are described in Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Refer to Dosage and Administration (2.5) for recommendations for non-hematologic adverse reactions.

Patients receiving gemcitabine should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 4.
Table 4: Recommended Dose Reductions for Gemcitabine for Myelosuppression in Pancreatic Cancer and Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

500-999

less than 500

and

or

or

≥100,000

50,000-99,999

less than 50,000

100

75

Hold

2.5 Dose Modifications for Non-Hematologic Adverse Reactions

Permanently discontinue Gemcitabine for any of the following
• Unexplained dyspnea or other evidence of severe pulmonary toxicity • Severe hepatic toxicity • Hemolytic-Uremic Syndrome • Capillary Leak Syndrome
Withhold gemcitabine or reduce dose by 50% for other severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity until resolved. No dose modifications are recommended for alopecia, nausea, or vomiting.

2.6 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Exercise caution and wear gloves when preparing gemcitabine solutions. Immediately wash the skin thoroughly or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water if gemcitabine contacts the skin or mucus membranes. Death has occurred in animal studies due to dermal absorption. For further guidance on handling gemcitabine go to “OSHA Hazardous Drugs” (refer to antineoplastic weblinks including OSHA Technical Manual) at OSHA.

http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/hazardousdrugs/index.html

2.7 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

Reconstitute the vials with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection without preservatives.

Add 5 mL to the 200-mg vial or 25 mL to the 1-g vial. These dilutions each yield a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL. Complete withdrawal of the vial contents will provide 200 mg or 1 g of gemcitabine. Prior to administration the appropriate amount of drug must be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection. Final concentrations may be as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

Reconstituted Gemcitabine for Injection, USP is a clear, colorless to light straw-colored solution. Inspect visually prior to administration and discard for particulate matter or discoloration.

Gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature of 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion. Do not refrigerate as crystallization can occur.

No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.
Aminosyn Ii

Aminosyn Ii

Each 100 mL of Aminosyn II contains:

Amino Acids

Nitrogen
Aminosyn II 10% 10 g 1.53 g
Aminosyn II 15%

15 g

2.30 g

The total daily dose of the solution depends on the daily protein requirements and on the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. In many patients, provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require the administration of exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, a solution containing 5% dextrose should be administered when hypertonic dextrose infusions are abruptly discontinued.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. COLOR VARIATION FROM PALE YELLOW TO YELLOW IS NORMAL AND DOES NOT ALTER EFFICACY.

Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

Aminosyn II in the 2000 mL flexible Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with manual, gravity flow operations and automated gravimetric compounding devices for preparing intravenous nutritional admixtures. Admixtures must be stored under refrigeration and used within 24 hours of admixing.

Peripheral Vein Nutritional Maintenance

A mixture of Aminosyn II and dextrose diluted to a final concentration of 5% to 10% amino acids and 5% to 10% dextrose is suitable for administration by peripheral vein. This solution is not intended for central vein administration because it does not contain adequate amounts of amino acids or electrolytes.

For peripheral intravenous infusion, 1 to 1.5 g/kg/day of total amino acids will reduce protein catabolism. Infusion or ingestion of carbohydrate or lipid will not reduce the nitrogen sparing effect of intravenous amino acid infusions at this dose.

As with all intravenous fluid therapy, the primary aim is to provide sufficient water to compensate for insensible, urinary and other (nasogastric suction, fistula drainage, diarrhea) fluid losses. Total fluid requirements, as well as electrolyte and acid-base needs, should be estimated and appropriately administered.

For an amino acid solution of specified total concentration, the volume required to meet amino acid requirements per 24 hours can be calculated. After making an estimate of the total daily fluid (water) requirement, the balance of fluid needed beyond the volume of amino acid solution required can be provided either as a noncarbohydrate or a carbohydrate-containing electrolyte solution. I.V. lipid emulsion may be substituted for part of the carbohydrate-containing solution. Vitamins and additional electrolytes as needed for maintenance or to correct imbalances may be added to the amino acid solution.

If desired, only one-half of an estimated daily amino acid requirement of 1.5 g/kg can be given on the first day. Amino acids together with dextrose in concentrations of 5% to 10% infused into a peripheral vein can be continued while oral nutrition is impaired. However, if a patient is unable to take oral nourishment for a prolonged period of time, institution of total parenteral nutrition with exogenous calories should be considered.

Central Vein Total Parenteral Nutrition

For central vein infusion with concentrated dextrose solution, alone or with I.V. lipid, the total daily dose of the amino acid solution depends upon daily protein requirements and the patient’s metabolic and clinical response. The determination of nitrogen balance and accurate daily body weights, corrected for fluid balance, are probably the best means of assessing individual protein requirements.

ADULTS

Solutions containing 3.5 to 5% amino acids with 5 to 10% glucose may be infused with a fat emulsion by peripheral vein to provide approximately 1400 to 2000 kcal/day. Fat emulsion administration should be considered when prolonged parenteral nutrition is required in order to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency (E.F.A.D.). Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of E.F.A.D. in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Aminosyn II solution should only be infused via a central vein when admixed with sufficient dextrose to provide full caloric requirements in patients who require prolonged total parenteral nutrition. I.V. lipid may be administered to provide part of the calories, if desired. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN) may be started with 10% dextrose added to the calculated daily requirement of amino acids (1.5 g/kg for a metabolically stable patient). Dextrose content is gradually increased over the next few days to the estimated daily caloric need as the patient adapts to the increasing amounts of dextrose. Each gram of dextrose provides approximately 3.4 kcal. Each gram of fat provides 9 kcal.

The average depleted major surgical patient with complications requires between 2500 and 4000 kcal and between 12 and 24 grams of nitrogen per day. An adult patient in an acceptable weight range with restricted activity who is not hypermetabolic, requires about 30 kcal/kg of body weight/day. Average daily adult fluid requirements are between 2500 and 3000 mL and may be much higher with losses from fistula drainage or severe burns. Typically, a hospitalized patient may lose 12 to 18 grams of nitrogen a day, and in severe trauma the daily loss may be 20 to 25 grams or more.

Aminosyn II solutions without electrolytes are intended for patients requiring individualized electrolyte therapy. Sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, calcium and magnesium are major electrolytes which should be added to Aminosyn II as required.

SERUM ELECTROLYTES SHOULD BE MONITORED AS INDICATED. Electrolytes may be added to the nutrient solution as indicated by the patient’s clinical condition and laboratory determinations of plasma values. Major electrolytes are sodium, chloride, potassium, phosphate, magnesium and calcium. Vitamins, including folic acid and vitamin K, are required additives. The trace element supplements should be given when long-term parenteral nutrition is undertaken.

Iron is added to the solution or given intramuscularly in depot form as indicated. Vitamin B12, vitamin K and folic acid are given intramuscularly or added to the solution as desired.

Calcium and phosphorus additives are potentially incompatible when added to the TPN admixture.

In patients with hyperchloremic or other metabolic acidosis, sodium and potassium may be added as the acetate or lactate salts to provide bicarbonate alternates.

In adults, hypertonic mixtures of amino acids and dextrose may be safely administered by continuous infusion through a central venous catheter with the tip located in the vena cava. Typically, each liter of central vein TPN solution for adults contains 42.5 to 50 g of Aminosyn II with approximately 250 ± 100 g of dextrose; supplementary nonprotein calories from intravenous fat emulsion may be prescribed, at the discretion of the physician.

The rate of intravenous infusion initially should be 2 mL/min and may be increased gradually. If administration should fall behind schedule, no attempt to “catch up” to planned intake should be made. In addition to meeting protein needs, the rate of administration is governed by the patient’s glucose tolerance estimated by glucose levels in blood and urine.

Aminosyn II solution, when mixed with an appropriate volume of concentrated dextrose, offers a higher concentration of calories and nitrogen per unit volume. This solution is indicated for patients requiring larger amounts of nitrogen than could otherwise be provided or where total fluid load must be kept to a minimum, for example, patients with renal failure.

Provision of adequate calories in the form of hypertonic dextrose may require exogenous insulin to prevent hyperglycemia and glycosuria. To prevent rebound hypoglycemia, do not abruptly discontinue administration of nutritional solutions.

PEDIATRIC

Pediatric requirements for parenteral nutrition are constrained by the greater relative fluid requirements of the infant and greater caloric requirements per kilogram. Amino acids are probably best administered in a 2.5% concentration. For most pediatric patients on intravenous nutrition, 2.5 grams amino acids/kg/day with dextrose alone or with I.V. lipid calories of 100 to 130 kcal/kg/day is recommended. In cases of malnutrition or stress, these requirements may be increased. It is acceptable in pediatrics to start with a nutritional solution of half strength at a rate of about 60 to 70 mL/kg/day. Within 24 to 48 hours the volume and concentration of the solution can be increased until the full strength pediatric solution (amino acids and dextrose) is given at a rate of 125 to 150 mL/kg/day.

Supplemental electrolytes and vitamin additives should be administered as deemed necessary by careful monitoring of blood chemistries and nutritional status. Addition of iron is more critical in the infant than the adult because of the increasing red cell mass required for the growing infant. Serum lipids should be monitored for evidence of essential fatty acid deficiency in patients maintained on fat-free TPN. Bicarbonate should not be administered during infusion of the nutritional solution unless deemed absolutely necessary.

To ensure the precise delivery of the small volumes of fluid necessary for total parenteral nutrition in infants, accurately calibrated and reliable infusion systems should be used. A basic solution for pediatric use should contain 25 grams of amino acids and 200 to 250 grams of glucose per 1000 mL, administered from containers containing 250 or 500 mL. Such a solution given at the rate of 145 mL/kg/day provides 130 kcal/kg/day.

Recommended Directions for Use of the Pharmacy Bulk Package

Use Aseptic Technique

During use, container must be stored, and all manipulations performed, in an appropriate laminar flow hood.

Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

Insert piercing pin of sterile transfer set and suspend unit in a laminar flow hood. Insertion of a piercing pin into the outlet port should be performed only once in a Pharmacy Bulk Package solution. Once the outlet site has been entered, the withdrawal of container contents should be completed promptly in one continuous operation. Should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from transfer set pin or implement insertion is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations; i.e., discard container no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture.

Sequentially dispense aliquots of Aminosyn II into I.V. containers using appropriate transfer set. During fluid transfer operations, the Pharmacy Bulk Package should be maintained under the storage conditions recommended in the labeling.

Additives may be incompatible with fluid withdrawn from this container. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When compounding admixtures, use aseptic technique. Mix thoroughly. Do not store solutions containing additives. Because of the potential for life-threatening events, caution should be taken to ensure that precipitates have not formed in any parenteral nutrient mixture.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Dextrose

Dextrose

Concentrated Dextrose in Water is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) After admixture with amino acid solutions or (b) After dilution with other compatible I.V. fluids. Dosage should be adjusted to meet the requirements of each individual patient.

The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight /hr. About 95% of the dextrose is retained when infused at a rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyte concentrations, and acid-base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants such evaluation.

A list of nutritional admixture values is appended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Drug Interaction

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

The pharmacy bulk package is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection should be administered by slow intravenous injection over at least 10-15 minutes or can also be delivered in greater dilutions with 50-100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15-30 minutes.

The recommended adult dosage of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older

The recommended daily dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection. (See CLINICAL STUDIES section.)

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:

TABLE 5.
Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours) Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage
≥ 30

1

1.5-3 g q 6h-q 8h

15-29

5

1.5-3 g q 12h

5-14

9

1.5-3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males

weight (kg) x (140 ˗ age)

72 x serum creatinine

Females

0.85 x above value

COMPATIBILITY, RECONSTITUTION AND STABILITY

When concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated, Ampicillin and Sulbactam and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted and administered separately, due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by any of the aminopenicillins.

Intravenous AdministrationDIRECTIONS FOR USE

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder for intravenous use may be reconstituted with any of the compatible diluents described in this insert. Solutions should be allowed to stand after dissolution to allow any foaming to dissipate in order to permit visual inspection for complete solubilization. Ampicillin and Sulbactam concentrations between 3 and 45 mg (2 to 30 mg ampicillin/1 to 15 mg sulbactam/mL) are recommended for intravenous use.

The 15 gram bottle may be reconstituted with either 92 mL Sterile Water for Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection. The diluent should be added in two separate aliquots in a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Add 50 mL of solution, shake to dissolve. Then add an additional 42 mL and shake. The solution should be allowed to stand after dissolution to allow any foaming to dissipate in order to permit visual inspection for complete solubilization. The resultant solution will have a final concentration of approximately 100 mg/mL ampicillin and 50 mg/mL sulbactam. The closure may be penetrated only one time after reconstitution, if needed, using a suitable sterile transfer device or dispensing set that allows for measured dispensing of the contents.

After reconstitution, use within two hours if stored at room temperature, or within four hours if stored under refrigeration.

Reconstituted Bulk Solution Should Not be Used For Direct Infusion

If the reconstituted bulk solution is stored for less than one hour at 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature] prior to further dilution, the use periods indicated in Table 6 apply for the diluted solutions.

If the bulk solution is stored for one to two hours at 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature] and then diluted with Sterile Water for Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to the following concentrations, the use periods indicated in Table 7 apply.

Any unused portions of solution that remain after the indicated time periods should be discarded.
TABLE 6. Diluent Maximum Concentration (mg/mL) ampicillin and sulbactam Use Periods
Sterile Water for Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose Injection

30 (20/10)

2 hrs at 21°C

30 (20/10)

4 hrs at 4°C

3 (2/1)

2 hrs at 21°C

Lactated Ringer's Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

12 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose in 0.45% Saline

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 21°C

15 (10/5)

4 hrs at 4°C

10% Invert Sugar

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 21°C

30 (20/10)

3 hrs at 4°C
Table 7.
IV Solution

Maximum Concentration

(mg/mL) Ampicillin/Sulbactam

Use Period

Sterile Water for Injection, USP

45 (30/15)

4 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

45 (30/15)

4 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

Animal Pharmacology

While reversible glycogenosis was observed in laboratory animals, this phenomenon was dose- and time-dependent and is not expected to develop at the therapeutic doses and corresponding plasma levels attained during the relatively short periods of combined ampicillin/sulbactam therapy in man.
Brilinta

Brilinta

Adults The dosage recommendations for Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) represent the quantity of imipenem to be administered. An equivalent amount of cilastatin is also present in the solution. Each 125 mg, 250 mg, or 500 mg dose should be given by intravenous administration over 20 to 30 minutes. Each 750 mg or 1000 mg dose should be infused over 40 to 60 minutes. In patients who develop nausea during the infusion, the rate of infusion may be slowed.

The total daily dosage for Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) should be based on the type or severity of infection and given in equally divided doses based on consideration of degree of susceptibility of the pathogen(s), renal function, and body weight. Adult patients with impaired renal function, as judged by creatinine clearance ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2, require adjustment of dosage as described in the succeeding section of these guidelines.

Intravenous Dosage Schedule for Adults with Normal Renal Function and Body Weight ≥70 kg Doses cited in Table 3 are based on a patient with normal renal function and a body weight of 70 kg. These doses should be used for a patient with a creatinine clearance of ≥71 mL/min/1.73 m2 and a body weight of ≥70 kg. A reduction in dose must be made for a patient with a creatinine clearance of ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2 and/or a body weight less than 70 kg. (See Tables 4 and 5.)

Dosage regimens in column A of Table 3 are recommended for infections caused by fully susceptible organisms which represent the majority of pathogenic species. Dosage regimens in column B of Table 3 are recommended for infections caused by organisms with moderate susceptibility to imipenem, primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa.
TABLE 3: INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE SCHEDULE FOR ADULTS WITH NORMAL RENAL FUNCTION AND BODY WEIGHT ≥70 kg
Type orSeverityof Infection

AFully susceptible organisms including gram- positive and gram-negative aerobes and anaerobes

BModerately susceptible organisms, primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa

Mild

250 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

Moderate

500 mg q8h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1.5g) or500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)or1 g q8h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 3g)

Severe, life   threatening   only

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

1 g q8h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 3g)or1 g q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 4g)

Uncomplicated   urinary tract      infection

250 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

250 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

Complicated   urinary tract     infection

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

Due to the high antimicrobial activity of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.), it is recommended that the maximum total daily dosage not exceed 50 mg/kg/day or 4 g/day, whichever is lower. There is no evidence that higher doses provide greater efficacy. However, patients over twelve years of age with cystic fibrosis and normal renal function have been treated with Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) at doses up to 90 mg/kg/day in divided doses, not exceeding 4 g/day.

Reduced Intravenous Schedule for Adults with Impaired Renal Function and/or Body Weight <70 kg

Patients with creatinine clearance of ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2 and/or body weight less than 70 kg require dosage reduction of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) as indicated in the tables below. Creatinine clearance may be calculated from serum creatinine concentration by the following equation:

Tcc (Males) = (wt. in kg) (140 – age)                              (72) (creatinine in mg/dL)

Tcc (Females) = 0.85 × above value

To determine the dose for adults with impaired renal function and/or reduced body weight:
1. Choose a total daily dose from Table 3 based on infection characteristics. 2. a) If the total daily dose is 1 g, 1.5 g, or 2 g, use the appropriate subsection of Table 4 and continue with step 3. b) If the total daily dose is 3 g or 4 g, use the appropriate subsection of Table 5 and continue with step 3. 3. From Table 4 or 5: a) Select the body weight on the far left which is closest to the patient's body weight (kg). b) Select the patient's creatinine clearance category. c) Where the row and column intersect is the reduced dosage regimen. TABLE 4: REDUCED INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE OF IMIPENEM AND CILASTATIN FOR INJECTION (I.V.) IN ADULT PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION AND/OR BODY WEIGHT <70 kg
AndBodyWeight(kg)is:

If TOTAL DAILY DOSE from TABLE 3 is:

1 g/day

1.5 g/day

2 g/day

and creatinine clearance(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

≥71

41 to70

21 to40

6 to20

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

≥70

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

60

250

q8h

125

q6h

250

q12h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

50

125

q6h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

250

q6h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

40

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

125

q12h

250

q8h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

30

125

q8h

125

q8h

125

q12h

125

q12h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q8h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h
TABLE 5: REDUCED INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE OF IMIPENEM AND CILASTATIN FOR INJECTION (I.V.) IN ADULT PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION AND/OR BODY WEIGHT <70 kg
AndBodyWeight(kg)is:

If TOTAL DAILY DOSE from TABLE 3 is:

3 g/day

4 g/day

and creatinine clearance(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

≥70

1000

q8h

500

q6h

500

q8h

500

q12h

1000

q6h

750

q8h

500

q6h

500

q12h

60

750

q8h

500

q8h

500

q8h

500

q12h

1000

q8h

750

q8h

500

q8h

500

q12h

50

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

750

q8h

500

q6h

500

q8h

500

q12h

40

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

30

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

Patients with creatinine clearances of 6 to 20 mL/min/1.73 m2 should be treated with Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) 125 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours for most pathogens. There may be an increased risk of seizures when doses of 500 mg every 12 hours are administered to these patients.

Patients with creatinine clearance ≤5 mL/min/1.73 m2 should not receive Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) unless hemodialysis is instituted within 48 hours. There is inadequate information to recommend usage of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) for patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis.

Hemodialysis When treating patients with creatinine clearances of ≤5 mL/min/1.73 m2 who are undergoing hemodialysis, use the dosage recommendations for patients with creatinine clearances of 6 to 20 mL/min/1.73 m2. (See Reduced Intravenous Dosage Schedule for Adults with Impaired Renal Function and/or Body Weight <70 kg.) Both imipenem and cilastatin are cleared from the circulation during hemodialysis. The patient should receive Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) after hemodialysis and at 12 hour intervals timed from the end of that hemodialysis session. Dialysis patients, especially those with background CNS disease, should be carefully monitored; for patients on hemodialysis, Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) is recommended only when the benefit outweighs the potential risk of seizures. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Pediatric Patients See PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients.

For pediatric patients ≥3 months of age, the recommended dose for non-CNS infections is 15 to 25 mg/kg/dose administered every six hours. Based on studies in adults, the maximum daily dose for treatment of infections with fully susceptible organisms is 2 g per day, and of infections with moderately susceptible organisms (primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa) is 4 g/day. Higher doses (up to 90 mg/kg/day in older children) have been used in patients with cystic fibrosis.

For pediatric patients ≤3 months of age (weighing ≥1,500 g), the following dosage schedule is recommended for non-CNS infections:

    <1 wk of age: 25 mg/kg every 12 hrs    1 to 4 wks of age: 25 mg/kg every 8 hrs    4 wks to 3 mos. of age: 25 mg/kg every 6 hrs.

Doses less than or equal to 500 mg should be given by intravenous infusion over 15 to 30 minutes. Doses greater than 500 mg should be given by intravenous infusion over 40 to 60 minutes.

Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) is not recommended in pediatric patients with CNS infections because of the risk of seizures.

Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) is not recommended in pediatric patients <30 kg with impaired renal function, as no data are available.
Procainamide Hydrochlor...

Procainamide Hydrochloride

Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection is useful for arrhythmias which require immediate suppression and for maintenance of arrhythmia control. Intravenous therapy allows most rapid control of serious arrhythmias, including those following myocardial infarction; it should be carried out in circumstances where close observation and monitoring of the patient are possible, such as in hospital or emergency facilities. Intramuscular administration is less apt to produce temporary high plasma levels but therapeutic plasma levels are not obtained as rapidly as with intravenous administration. Oral procainamide dosage forms are preferable for less urgent arrhythmias as well as for long-term maintenance after initial parenteral PA therapy.

Intramuscular administration may be used as an alternative to the oral route for patients with less threatening arrhythmias but who are nauseated or vomiting, who are ordered to receive nothing by mouth preoperatively, or who may have malabsorptive problems. An initial daily dose of 50 mg per kg body weight may be estimated. This amount should be divided into fractional doses of one-eighth to one-quarter to be injected intramuscularly every three to six hours until oral therapy is possible. If more than three injections are given, the physician may wish to assess patient factors such as age and renal function (see below), clinical response and, if available, blood levels of PA and NAPA in adjusting further doses for that individual. For treatment of arrhythmias associated with anesthesia or surgical operation, the suggested dose is 100 to 500 mg by intramuscular injection.

Intravenous administration of Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection should be done cautiously to avoid a possible hypotensive response (see PRECAUTIONS and OVERDOSAGE). Initial arrhythmia control, under ECG monitoring, may usually be accomplished safely within a half-hour by either of the two methods which follows:

a) Direct injection into a vein or into tubing of an established infusion line should be done slowly at a rate not to exceed 50 mg per minute. It is advisable to dilute either the 100 mg/mL or the 500 mg/mL concentrations of procainamide hydrochloride prior to intravenous injection to facilitate control of dosage rate. Doses of 100 mg may be administered every 5 minutes at this rate until the arrhythmia is suppressed or until 500 mg has been administered, after which it is advisable to wait 10 minutes or longer to allow for more distribution into tissues before resuming.

b) Alternatively, a loading infusion containing 20 mg of Procainamide Hydrochloride per mL (1 g diluted to 50 mL with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP) may be administered at a constant rate of 1 mL per minute for 25 to 30 minutes to deliver 500 to 600 mg of PA. Some effects may be seen after infusion of the first 100 or 200 mg; it is unusual to require more than 600 mg to achieve satisfactory antiarrhythmic effects.

The maximum advisable dosage to be given either by repeated bolus injections or such loading infusion is 1 g.

To maintain therapeutic levels, a more dilute intravenous infusion at a concentration of 2 mg/mL is convenient (1000 mg procainamide HCl in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP), and may be administered at 1 to 3 mL/minute. If daily total fluid intake must be limited, a 4 mg/mL concentration (1 g of Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP) administered at 0.5 to 1.5 mL/minute will deliver an equivalent 2 to 6 mg per minute. The amount needed in a given patient to maintain the therapeutic level should be assessed principally from the clinical response, and will depend upon the patient’s weight and age, renal elimination, hepatic acetylation rate, and cardiac status, but should be adjusted for each patient based upon close observation. A maintenance infusion rate of 50 mcg/min/kg body weight to a person with a normal renal PA elimination half-time of three hours may be expected to produce a plasma level of approximately 6.5 mcg/mL.

Since the principal route for elimination of PA and NAPA is renal excretion, reduced excretion will prolong the half-life of elimination and lower the dose rate needed to maintain therapeutic levels. Advancing age reduces the renal excretion of PA and NAPA independently of reductions in creatinine clearance; compared to normal young adults, there is approximately 25 percent reduction at age 50 and 50 percent at age 75.

Intravenous therapy should be terminated if persistent conduction disturbances or hypotension develop. As soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stabilized, oral antiarrhythmic maintenance therapy is preferable, if indicated and possible. A period of about three to four hours (one half-time for renal elimination, ordinarily) should elapse after the last intravenous dose before administering the first dose of Procainamide Hydrochloride tablets or capsules.

DILUTIONS AND RATES FOR INTRAVENOUS INFUSIONS*Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection, USP

Final Concentration

InfusionVolume†

ProcainamideHydrochloride To Be Added

InfusionRate

Initial Loading Infusion

20 mg/mL

50 mL

1000 mg

1 mL/min (for up to 25–30 min*)

Maintenance Infusion

2 mg/mL

or

4 mg/mL

500 mL

250 mL

1000 mg

1000 mg

1 to 3 mL/min

0.5 to 1.5 mL/min

The maintenance infusion rates are calculated to deliver 2 to 6 mg per minute, depending on body weight, renal elimination rate, and steady-state plasma level needed to maintain control of the arrhythmia*. The 4 mg/mL maintenance concentration may be preferred if total infused volume must be limited.

†(All infusions should be made up to final volume with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.) *Please see text under DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION for further details. The flow rate of any intravenous procainamide infusion must be monitored closely to avoid transiently high plasma levels and possible hypotension (see PRECAUTIONS).

Parenteral drug products should be examined visually for particulate matter and discoloration (see HOW SUPPLIED) prior to administration.
Dopamine Hydrochloride ...

Dopamine Hydrochloride And Dextrose

Do NOT administer if solution is darker than slightly yellow or discolored in any other way. Do NOT administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.

Dextrose solutions without electrolytes should not be administered simultaneously with blood through the same infusion set because of the possibility that pseudoagglutination of red cells may occur.

Do NOT add sodium bicarbonate or other alkalinizing substance, since dopamine is inactivated in alkaline solution.

Dopamine Hydrochloride in 5% Dextrose Injection should be infused into a large vein whenever possible to prevent the infiltration of perivascular tissue adjacent to the infusion site. Extravasation may cause necrosis and sloughing of the surrounding tissue. Large veins of the antecubital fossa are preferred to veins of the dorsum of the hand or ankle. Less suitable infusion sites should be used only when larger veins are unavailable and the patient’s condition requires immediate attention. The physician should switch to a more suitable site as soon as possible and the infusion site in use should be continuously monitored for free flow.

The less concentrated 800 mcg/mL solution may be preferred when fluid expansion is not a problem. The more concentrated 1600 mcg/mL or 3200 mcg/mL solutions, may be preferred in patients with fluid retention or when a slower rate of infusion is desired.

Rate of Administration: Administration into an umbilical artery catheter is not recommended.

Dopamine in 5% Dextrose Injection should not be infused through ordinary I.V. apparatus, regulated only by gravity and mechanical clamps. Only an infusion pump, preferably a volumetric pump, should be used.

Each patient must be individually titrated to the desired hemodynamic or renal response to dopamine.

In titrating to the desired increase in systolic blood pressure, the optimum dosage rate for renal response may be exceeded, thus necessitating a reduction in rate after the hemodynamic condition is stabilized.

If a disproportionate rise in diastolic pressure (i.e., a marked decrease in pulse pressure) is observed in patients receiving dopamine, the infusion rate should be decreased and the patient observed carefully for further evidence of predominant vasoconstrictor activity, unless such an effect is desired.

Administration rates greater than 50 mcg/kg/min have safely been used in adults in advanced circulatory decompensation states. If unnecessary fluid expansion is of concern, adjustment of drug concentration may be preferred over increasing the flow rate of a less concentrated dilution.

When discontinuing the infusion, it may be necessary to gradually decrease the dose of dopamine HCl while expanding the blood volume with I.V. fluids to prevent the development of marked hypotension.

Suggested Regimen:
When appropriate, increase blood volume with whole blood or plasma until central venous pressure is 10 to 15 cm H2O or pulmonary wedge pressure is 14 to 18 mm Hg. Begin infusion of dopamine hydrochloride solution at doses of 2 to 5 mcg/kg/min in adult or pediatric patients who are likely to respond to modest increments of heart force and renal perfusion. In more seriously ill patients, begin infusion of dopamine hydrochloride at doses of 5 mcg/kg/min and increase gradually, using 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min increments, up to a rate of 20 to 50 mcg/kg/min as needed. If doses in excess of 50 mcg/kg/min are required, check urine output frequently. Should urinary flow begin to decrease in the absence of hypotension, reduction of dopamine dosage should be considered. More than 50% of adult patients have been satisfactorily maintained on doses less than 20 mcg/kg/min. In patients who do not respond to these doses with adequate arterial pressures or urine flow, additional increments of dopamine may be given in an effort to produce an appropriate arterial pressure and central perfusion. Treatment of all patients requires constant evaluation of therapy in terms of blood volume, augmentation of cardiac contractility, urine flow, cardiac output, blood pressure, and distribution of peripheral perfusion. Dosage of dopamine should be adjusted according to the patient’s response. Diminution of established urine flow rate, increasing tachycardia or development of new dysrhythmias are reasons to consider decreasing or temporarily suspending the dosage. As with all potent intravenously administered drugs, care should be taken to control the rate of infusion so as to avoid inadvertent administration of a bolus of the drug. 800 mcg/mL Dosing Chart for Dopamine (mL/hr) Infusion Rate
Infusion rate

(mcg/kg/min)

Patient Body Weight (kg)

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

2.5

1.9

3.8

5.6

7.5

9.4

11.3

13.1

15

16.9

18.8

5

3.8

7.5

11.3

15

18.8

22.5

26.3

30

33.8

37.5

10

7.5

15

22.5

30

37.5

45

52.5

60

67.5

75

15

11.3

22.5

33.8

45

56.3

67.5

78.8

90

101.3

112.5

20

15

30

45

60

75

90

105

120

135

150

25

18.8

37.5

56.3

75

93.8

112.5

131.3

150

168.8

187.5

30

22.5

45

67.5

90

112.5

135

157.5

180

202.5

225

35

26.3

52.5

78.8

105

131.3

157.5

183.8

210

236.3

262.5

40

30

60

90

120

150

180

210

240

270

300

45

33.8

67.5

101.3

135

168.8

202.5

236.3

270

303.8

337.5

50

37.5

75

112.5

150

187.5

225

262.5

300

337.5

375

1600 mcg/mL Dosing Chart for Dopamine (mL/hr) Infusion Rate
Infusion rate

Patient Body Weight (kg)

(mcg/kg/min)

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

2.5

0.9

1.9

2.8

3.8

4.7

5.6

6.6

7.5

8.4

9.4

5

1.9

3.8

5.6

7.5

9.4

11.3

13.1

15

16.9

18.8

10

3.8

7.5

11.3

15

18.8

22.5

26.3

30

33.8

37.5

15

5.6

11.3

16.9

22.5

28.1

33.8

39.4

45

50.6

56.3

20

7.5

15

22.5

30

37.5

45

52.5

60

67.5

75

25

9.4

18.8

28.1

37.5

46.9

56.3

65.6

75

84.4

93.8

30

11.3

22.5

33.8

45

56.3

67.5

78.8

90

101.3

112.5

35

13.1

26.3

39.4

52.5

65.6

78.8

91.9

105

118.1

131.3

40

15

30

45

60

75

90

105

120

135

150

45

16.9

33.8

50.6

67.5

84.4

101.3

118.1

135

151.9

168.8

50

18.8

37.5

56.3

75

93.8

112.5

131.3

150

168.8

187.5

3200 mcg/mL Dosing Chart for Dopamine (mL/hr) Infusion Rate
Infusion rate

Patient Body Weight (kg)

(mcg/kg/min)

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

2.5

0.5

0.9

1.4

1.9

2.3

2.8

3.3

3.8

4.2

4.7

5

0.9

1.9

2.8

3.8

4.7

5.6

6.6

7.5

8.4

9.4

10

1.9

3.8

5.6

7.5

9.4

11.3

13.1

15

16.9

18.8

15

2.8

5.6

8.4

11.3

14.1

16.9

19.7

22.5

25.3

28.1

20

3.8

7.5

11.3

15

18.8

22.5

26.3

30

33.8

37.5

25

4.7

9.4

14.1

18.8

23.4

28.1

32.8

37.5

42.2

46.9

30

5.6

11.3

16.9

22.5

28.1

33.8

39.4

45

50.6

56.3

35

6.6

13.1

19.7

26.3

32.8

39.4

45.9

52.5

59.1

65.6

40

7.5

15

22.5

30

37.5

45

52.5

60

67.5

75

45

8.4

16.9

25.3

33.8

42.2

50.6

59.1

67.5

75.9

84.4

50

9.4

18.8

28.1

37.5

46.9

56.3

65.6

75

84.4

93.8

Parenteral drug products should be visually inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Dopamine Hydrochloride

Dopamine Hydrochloride

WARNING: This is a potent drug; it must be diluted before administration to the patient.

Dopamine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is administered (only after dilution) by intravenous infusion.

Suggested Dilution – For the 40 mg/mL preparation, transfer by aseptic technique the contents containing either 5 mL, 200 mg or 10 mL, 400 mg of Dopamine Hydrochloride to either a 250 mL or 500 mL bottle of one of the sterile I.V. solutions listed below. For the 80 mg/mL preparation, transfer by aseptic technique the contents containing 10 mL, 800 mg of Dopamine Hydrochloride to a 250 mL, 500 mL or 1000 mL bottle of one of the following sterile I.V. solutions:

      0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

      5% Dextrose Injection, USP

      5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

      5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

      5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer’s Injection

      Sodium Lactate Injection, USP 1/6 Molar

      Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

The resultant dilutions are summarized in the following chart:

Concentration of

Dopamine Hydrochloride

40 mg/mL

80 mg/mL

Volume of Dopamine

Hydrochloride Injection, USP

5 mL

10 mL

10 mL

250 mL Bottle of I.V. Solution

800 mcg/mL

1600 mcg/mL

3200 mcg/mL

500 mL Bottle of I.V. Solution

400 mcg/mL

800 mcg/mL

1600 mcg/mL

1000 mL Bottle of I.V. Solution

200 mcg/mL

400 mcg/mL

800 mcg/mL

Dopamine Hydrochloride Injection, USP has been found to be stable for a minimum of 24 hours after dilution in the foregoing I.V. solutions. However, as with all I.V. admixtures, dilution should be made just prior to administration.

Do NOT add Dopamine Hydrochloride to Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP or other alkaline I.V. solutions, since the drug is inactivated in alkaline solution.

Rate of Administration – Dopamine Hydrochloride Injection, USP after dilution, is administered intravenously by infusion via a suitable I.V. catheter or needle. When administering Dopamine Hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use a precision volume control I.V. set. Each patient must be individually titrated to the desired hemodynamic or renal response to dopamine.

In titrating to the desired increase in systolic blood pressure, the optimum dosage rate for renal response may be exceeded, thus necessitating a reduction in rate after the hemodynamic condition is stabilized.

Administration at rates greater than 50 mcg/kg/min have safely been used in advanced circulatory decompensation states. If unnecessary fluid expansion is of concern, adjustment of drug concentration may be preferred over increasing the flow rate of a less concentrated dilution.

Suggested Regimen:

1.      When appropriate, increase blood volume with whole blood or plasma until central venous pressure is 10 to 15 cm H2O or pulmonary wedge pressure is 14 to 18 mm Hg.

2.      Begin infusion of diluted solution at doses of 2 – 5 mcg/kg/min of Dopamine Hydrochloride in patients who are likely to respond to modest increments of heart force and renal perfusion.

In more seriously ill patients, begin infusion of diluted solution at doses of 5 mcg/kg/min of Dopamine Hydrochloride and increase gradually using 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min increments up to a rate of 20 to 50 mcg/kg/min as needed. If doses in excess of 50 mcg/kg/min are required, it is advisable to check urine output frequently. Should urinary flow begin to decrease in the absence of hypotension, reduction of dopamine dosage should be considered. Multiclinic trials have shown that more than 50 percent of patients have been satisfactorily maintained on doses less than 20 mcg/kg/min.

In patients who do not respond to these doses with adequate arterial pressures or urine flow, additional increments of dopamine may be given in an effort to produce an appropriate arterial pressure and central perfusion.

3.      Treatment of all patients requires constant evaluation of therapy in terms of blood volume, augmentation of cardiac contractility, and distribution of peripheral perfusion.

Dosage of dopamine should be adjusted according to the patient’s response, with particular attention to diminution of established urine flow rate, increasing tachycardia or development of new dysrhythmias as indices for decreasing or temporarily suspending the dosage.

4.      As with all potent intravenously administered drugs, care should be taken to control the rate of administration to avoid inadvertent administration of a bolus of the drug.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Dopamine Hydrochloride ...

Dopamine Hydrochloride And Dextrose

Do NOT add sodium bicarbonate or other alkalinizing substance, since dopamine is inactivated in alkaline solution.

Dopamine Hydrochloride and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered only intravenously via a suitable I.V. catheter or needle infusion.

The less concentrated 800 mcg/mL solution may be preferred when fluid expansion is not a problem. The more concentrated 1600 mcg/mL or 3200 mcg/mL solutions, may be preferred in patients with fluid retention or when a slower rate of infusion is desired.

Rate of Administration — When administering dopamine (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use a precision volume control I.V. set. Each patient must be individually titrated to the desired hemodynamic or renal response to dopamine.

In titrating to the desired increase in systolic blood pressure, the optimum dosage rate for renal response may be exceeded, thus necessitating a reduction in rate after the hemodynamic condition is stabilized.

Administration at rates greater than 50 mcg/kg/min have safely been used in advanced circulatory decompensation states. If unnecessary fluid expansion is of concern, adjustment of drug concentration may be preferred over increasing the flow rate of a less concentrated dilution.

Suggested Regimen:
When appropriate, increase blood volume with whole blood or plasma until central venous pressure is 10 to 15 cm H2O or pulmonary wedge pressure is 14 to 18 mm Hg. Begin infusion of dopamine hydrochloride solution at doses of 2 to 5 mcg/kg/min in patients who are likely to respond to modest increments of heart force and renal perfusion. In more seriously ill patients, begin infusion of dopamine hydrochloride at doses of 5 mcg/kg/min and increase gradually using 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min increments up to a rate of 20 to 50 mcg/kg/min as needed. If doses in excess of 50 mcg/kg/min are required, it is advisable to check urine output frequently. Should urinary flow begin to decrease in the absence of hypotension, reduction of dopamine dosage should be considered. Multiclinic trials have shown that more than 50% of patients have been satisfactorily maintained on doses less than 20 mcg/kg/min. In patients who do not respond to these doses with adequate arterial pressures of urine flow, additional increments of dopamine may be given in an effort to produce an appropriate arterial pressure and central perfusion. Treatment of all patients requires constant evaluation of therapy in terms of blood volume, augmentation of cardiac contractility, and distribution of peripheral perfusion. Dosage of dopamine should be adjusted according to the patient’s response, with particular attention to diminution of established urine flow rate, increasing tachycardia or development of new dysrhythmias as indices for decreasing or temporarily suspending the dosage. As with all potent intravenously administered drugs, care should be taken to control the rate of administration to avoid inadvertent administration of a bolus of the drug.
Parenteral drug products should be visually inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use if the injection is darker than slightly yellow or discolored in any other way.
Nighttime

Nighttime

The recommended adult and pediatric dosages and routes of administration are outlined in the following table 10. MAXIPIME should be administered intravenously over approximately 30 minutes.
Table 10: Recommended Dosage Schedule for MAXIPIME in Patients with CrCL Greater Than 60 mL/min† †Adjust dose in patients with CrCL less than or equal to 60 mL/min*including cases associated with concurrent bacteremia**or until resolution of neutropenia. In patients whose fever resolves but who remain neutropenic for more than 7 days, the need for continued antimicrobial therapy should be re-evaluated frequently.***Intramuscular route of administration is indicated only for mild to moderate, uncomplicated or complicated UTIs due to E. coli when the intramuscular route is considered to be a more appropriate route of drug administration.§For Pseudomonas aeruginosa, use 2 g IV every 8 hours (50 mg per kg per dose in pediatric patients 2 months up to 16 years)
Site and Type of Infection

Dose

Frequency

Duration (days)

Adults

Moderate to Severe Pneumonia due to S. pneumoniae*, P. aeruginosa§, K. pneumoniae, or Enterobacter species

1 to 2 g IV

Every 8 to 12 hours

10

Empiric therapy for febrile neutropenic patients (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES.)

2 g IV

Every 8 hours

7**

Mild to Moderate Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli, K. pneumoniae, or P. mirabilis*

0.5 to 1 gIV/IM***

Every 12 hours

7 to 10

Severe Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli or K. pneumoniae*

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Moderate to Severe Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections due to S. aureus or S. pyogenes

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Complicated Intra-abdominal Infections (used in combination with metronidazole) caused by E. coli, viridans group streptococci, P. aeruginosa§, K. pneumoniae, Enterobacter species, or B. fragilis. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.)

2 g IV

Every 8 to 12 hours

7 to 10

Pediatric Patients (2 months up to 16 years) The maximum dose for pediatric patients should not exceed the recommended adult dose. The usual recommended dosage in pediatric patients up to 40 kg in weight for uncomplicated and complicated urinary tract infections (including pyelonephritis), uncomplicated skin and skin structure infections, and pneumonia is 50 mg per kg per dose, administered every 12 hours (50 mg per kg per dose, every 8 hours for febrile neutropenic patients), for durations as given above.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment.

Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with creatinine clearance less than or equal to 60 mL/min, the dose of MAXIPIME should be adjusted to compensate for the slower rate of renal elimination. The recommended initial dose of MAXIPIME should be the same as in patients with normal renal function except in patients undergoing hemodialysis. The recommended doses of MAXIPIME in patients with renal impairment are presented in Table 11.

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault equation)4 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) =           Weight (kg) x (140–age)                                                                                      72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Females: 0.85 × above value
Table 11: Recommended Dosing Schedule for MAXIPIME in Adult Patients (Normal Renal Function, Renal Impairment, and Hemodialysis) * On hemodialysis days, cefepime should be administered following hemodialysis. Whenever possible, cefepime should be administered at the same time each day.
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Recommended Maintenance Schedule

Greater than 60Normalrecommendeddosing schedule

500 mgevery 12 hours

1 gevery 12 hours

2 gevery 12 hours

2 g every 8 hours

30 to 60

500 mgevery 24 hours

1 gevery 24 hours

2 gevery 24 hours

2 gevery 12 hours

11 to 29

500 mgevery 24 hours

500 mgevery 24 hours

1 gevery 24 hours

2 gevery 24 hours

Less than 11

250 mgevery 24 hours

250 mgevery 24 hours

500 mgevery 24 hours

1 gevery 24 hours

CAPD

500 mgevery 48 hours

1 gevery 48 hours

2 gevery 48 hours

2 gevery 48 hours

Hemodialysis*

1 g on day 1, then 500 mg every 24 hours thereafter

1 gevery 24 hours

In patients undergoing continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis, MAXIPIME may be administered at normally recommended doses at a dosage interval of every 48 hours (see Table 11).

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, approximately 68% of the total amount of cefepime present in the body at the start of dialysis will be removed during a 3-hour dialysis period. The dosage of MAXIPIME for hemodialysis patients is 1 g on Day 1 followed by 500 mg every 24 hours for the treatment of all infections except febrile neutropenia, which is 1 g every 24 hours.

MAXIPIME should be administered at the same time each day and following the completion of hemodialysis on hemodialysis days (see Table 11).

Data in pediatric patients with impaired renal function are not available; however, since cefepime pharmacokinetics are similar in adults and pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), changes in the dosing regimen proportional to those in adults (see Tables 10 and 11) are recommended for pediatric patients.

Administration

For Intravenous Infusion, Dilute with a suitable parenteral vehicle prior to intravenous infusion. Constitute the 500 mg, 1 g, or 2 g vial, and add an appropriate quantity of the resulting solution to an intravenous container with one of the compatible intravenous fluids listed in the Compatibility and Stability subsection. THE RESULTING SOLUTION SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED OVER APPROXIMATELY 30 MINUTES.

Intermittent intravenous infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing cefepime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

ADD-Vantage™ vials are to be constituted only with 50 mL or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection in ADD-Vantage flexible diluent containers. (See ADD-Vantage Vial Instructions for Use.)

Intramuscular Administration: For intramuscular administration, MAXIPIME (cefepime hydrochloride) should be constituted with one of the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride, 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride, or Sterile Bacteriostatic Water for Injection with Parabens or Benzyl Alcohol (refer to Table 12).

Preparation of MAXIPIME solutions is summarized in Table 12.
Table 12: Preparation of Solutions of MAXIPIME
Single-Dose Vials for Intravenous/Intramuscular Administration

Amount of Diluent to be added (mL)

Approximate Available Volume (mL)

Approximate Cefepime Concentration (mg/mL)

cefepime vial content 500 mg (IV)500 mg (IM)1 g (IV)1 g (IM)2 g (IV)

51.3102.410

5.61.811.33.612.5

100280100280160

ADD-Vantage 1 g vial1 g vial2 g vial2 g vial

5010050100

5010050100

20104020

Compatibility and Stability

Intravenous: MAXIPIME is compatible at concentrations between 1 mg per mL and 40 mg per mL with the following intravenous infusion fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% and 10% Dextrose Injection, M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection, Normosol™-R, and Normosol™-M in 5% Dextrose Injection. These solutions may be stored up to 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20°C to 25°C (68°F to 77°F) or 7 days in a refrigerator 2°C to 8°C (36°F to 46°F). MAXIPIME in ADD-Vantage vials is stable at concentrations of 10 to 40 mg per mL in 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20°C to 25°C or 7 days in a refrigerator 2°C to 8°C.

MAXIPIME admixture compatibility information is summarized in Table 13.
Table 13: Cefepime Admixture Stability NS = 0.9% Sodium Chloride InjectionD5W = 5% Dextrose Injectionna = not applicableRT/L = Ambient room temperature and light
Stability Time for

MAXIPIME Concentration

Admixture and Concentration

IV Infusion Solutions

RT/L (20° to 25°C)

Refrigeration (2° to 8°C)

40 mg/mL

Amikacin6 mg/mL

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin 1 mg/mL

D5W

8 hours

8 hours

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin 10 mg/mL

D5W

2 hours

8 hours

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin1 mg/mL

NS

24 hours

48 hours

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin10 mg/mL

NS

8 hours

48 hours

4 mg/mL

Ampicillin40 mg/mL

NS

8 hours

8 hours

4 to 40 mg/mL

ClindamycinPhosphate0.25 to 6 mg/mL

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

4 mg/mL

Heparin10 to 50 units/mL

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

4 mg/mL

Potassium Chloride10 to 40 mEq/L

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

4 mg/mL

Theophylline0.8 mg/mL

D5W

24 hours

7 days

1 to 4 mg/mL

na

Aminosyn™ II4.25% withelectrolytes and calcium

8 hours

3 days

0.125 to 0.25 mg/mL

na

Inpersol™ with 4.25% dextrose

24 hours

7 days

Solutions of MAXIPIME, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of ampicillin at a concentration greater than 40 mg per mL, and should not be added to metronidazole, vancomycin, gentamicin, tobramycin, netilmicin sulfate, or aminophylline because of potential interaction. However, if concurrent therapy with MAXIPIME is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately.

Intramuscular: MAXIPIME (cefepime hydrochloride) constituted as directed is stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20°C to 25°C (68°F to 77°F) or for 7 days in a refrigerator 2°C to 8°C (36°F to 46°F) with the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, Sterile Bacteriostatic Water for Injection with Parabens or Benzyl Alcohol, or 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride.

NOTE: PARENTERAL DRUGS SHOULD BE INSPECTED VISUALLY FOR PARTICULATE MATTER BEFORE ADMINISTRATION. IF PARTICULATE MATTER IS EVIDENT IN RECONSTITUTED FLUIDS, THE DRUG SOLUTION SHOULD BE DISCARDED.

As with other cephalosporins, the color of MAXIPIME powder, as well as its solutions, tend to darken depending on storage conditions; however, when stored as recommended, the product potency is not adversely affected.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

These instructions for use should be made available to the individuals who perform the reconstitution steps.

To Open:

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows:

a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.)

NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe.



b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.)

2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go.

NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.)

3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly.

4. Label appropriately.

                              To Reconstitute the Drug:

1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial.

2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.)

3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix.

4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.

5. Look through the bottom of the vial to verify that the stopper has been removed and complete mixing has occurred. (SEE FIGURE 7.)

If the rubber stopper is not removed from the vial and medication is not released on the first attempt, the inner cap may be manipulated back into the rubber stopper without removing the drug vial from the diluent container. Repeat steps 3 through 5.

Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)

1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents.

2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired.

3. Close flow control clamp of administration set.

4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.

5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.

6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger.

7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.

8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.

9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.

10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
A-methapred

A-methapred

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see DESCRIPTION, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use)

Because of possible physical incompatibilities, A-METHAPRED™, should not be diluted or mixed with other solutions.

Use only Bacteriostatic Water For Injection with Benzyl Alcohol when reconstituting A-METHAPRED™. Use within 48 hours after mixing.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

This preparation may be administered by intravenous injection, by intravenous infusion, or by intramuscular injection, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. Following the initial emergency period, consideration should be given to employing a longer acting injectable preparation or an oral preparation.

There are reports of cardiac arrhythmias and/or cardiac arrest following the rapid administration of large IV doses of methylprednisolone (greater than 0.5 gram administered over a period of less than 10 minutes). Bradycardia has been reported during or after the administration of large doses of methylprednisolone sodium succinate, and may be unrelated to the speed or duration of infusion.

When high dose therapy is desired, the recommended dose of A-METHAPRED™ Sterile Powder is 30 mg/kg administered intravenously over at least 30 minutes. This dose may be repeated every 4 to 6 hours for 48 hours.

In general, high dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient’s condition has stabilized; usually not beyond 48 to 72 hours.

In other indications, initial dosage will vary from 10 to 40 mg of methylprednisolone depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administrations in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages.

It Should Be Emphasized that Dosage Requirements are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation, it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

A-METHAPRED™ may be administered by intravenous or intramuscular injection or by intravenous infusion, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. To administer by intravenous (or intramuscular) injection, prepare solution as directed. The desired dose may be administered intravenously over a period of several minutes.

To prepare solutions for intravenous infusion, first prepare the solution for injection as directed. This solution may then be added to indicated amounts of 5% dextrose in water, isotonic saline solution or 5% dextrose in isotonic saline solution.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of methylprednisolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

The National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) recommended dosing for systemic prednisone, prednisolone or methylprednisolone in pediatric patients whose asthma is uncontrolled by inhaled corticosteroids and long-acting bronchodilators is 1-2 mg/kg/day in single or divided doses. It is further recommended that short course, or “burst” therapy, be continued until the patient achieves a peak expiratory flow rate of 80% of his or her personal best or until symptoms resolve. This usually requires 3 to 10 days of treatment, although it can take longer. There is no evidence that tapering the dose after improvement will prevent a relapse.

Dosage may be reduced for infants and children but should be governed more by the severity of the condition and response of the patient than by age or size. It should not be less than 0.5 mg per kg every 24 hours.

Dosage must be decreased or discontinued gradually when the drug has been administered for more than a few days. If a period of spontaneous remission occurs in a chronic condition, treatment should be discontinued. Routine laboratory studies, such as urinalysis, two-hour postprandial blood sugar, determination of blood pressure and body weight, and a chest X-ray should be made at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Upper GI X-rays are desirable in patients with an ulcer history or significant dyspepsia.

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 160 mg of methylprednisolone for a week followed by 64 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (see PRECAUTIONS, Neurologic-psychiatric).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25                                            Triamcinolone, 4

Hydrocortisone, 20                                   Paramethasone, 2

Prednisolone, 5                                         Betamethasone, 0.75

Prednisone, 5                                            Dexamethasone, 0.75

Methylprednisolone, 4

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

Directions for Reconstitution
1. Remove protective cap. 2. Cleanse stopper with suitable germicide. 3. Aseptically add 1 mL Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP (with benzyl alcohol) for the 40 mg vial or 2 mL Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP (with benzyl alcohol) for the 125 mg vial. 4. Agitate to effect solution. 5. Invert vial. Insert needle through target area of stopper until tip is just visible. Withdraw dose.
Piperacillin And Tazoba...

Piperacillin And Tazobactam

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.1 Adult Patients

The usual total daily dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for adults is 3.375 g every six hours totaling 13.5 g (12 g piperacillin/1.5 g tazobactam). The usual duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment is from 7 to 10 days.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.2 Nosocomial Pneumonia

Initial presumptive treatment of patients with nosocomial pneumonia should start with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection at a dosage of 4.5 g every six hours plus an aminoglycoside, totaling 18 g (16 g piperacillin/2 g tazobactam). The recommended duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment for nosocomial pneumonia is 7 to 14 days. Treatment with the aminoglycoside should be continued in patients from whom P. aeruginosais isolated.

2.3 Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min) and dialysis patients (hemodialysis and CAPD), the intravenous dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reduced to the degree of actual renal function impairment. The recommended daily doses of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for patients with renal impairment are as follows:
Table 1: Recommended Dosing of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection in Patients with Normal Renal Function and Renal Impairment (As total grams piperacillin/tazobactam) Renal Function(creatinine clearance,mL/min) All Indications(except nosocomialpneumonia) NosocomialPneumonia * Creatinine clearance for patients not receiving hemodialysis † 0.75 g (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each hemodialysis session on hemodialysis days
>40 mL/min

3.375 q 6 h

4.5 q 6 h

20-40 mL/min*

2.25 q 6 h

3.375 q 6 h

<20 mL/min*

2.25 q 8 h

2.25 q 6 h

Hemodialysis†

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

CAPD

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

For patients on hemodialysis, the maximum dose is 2.25 g every twelve hours for all indications other than nosocomial pneumonia and 2.25 g every eight hours for nosocomial pneumonia. Since hemodialysis removes 30% to 40% of the administered dose, an additional dose of 0.75 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each dialysis period on hemodialysis days. No additional dosage of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is necessary for CAPD patients.

2.4 Pediatric Patients

For children with appendicitis and/or peritonitis 9 months of age or older, weighing up to 40 kg, and with normal renal function, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage is 100 mg piperacillin/12.5 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours. For pediatric patients between 2 months and 9 months of age, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage based on pharmacokinetic modeling, is 80 mg piperacillin/10 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Pediatric patients weighing over 40 kg and with normal renal function should receive the adult dose.

It has not been determined how to adjust piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5 Reconstitution and Dilution of Powder Formulations

Single dose vials

Reconstitute piperacillin and tazobactam for injection vials with a compatible reconstitution diluent from the list provided below.

2.25 g, 3.375 g, and 4.5 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reconstituted with 10 mL, 15 mL, and 20 mL, respectively. Swirl until dissolved.

Compatible Reconstitution Diluents for Single Dose Vials

0.9% sodium chloride for injection

Sterile water for injection

Dextrose 5%

Bacteriostatic saline/parabens

Bacteriostatic water/parabens

Bacteriostatic saline/benzyl alcohol

Bacteriostatic water/benzyl alcohol

Reconstituted piperacillin and tazobactam for injection solutions for single dose vials should be further diluted (recommended volume per dose of 50 mL to 150 mL) in a compatible intravenous solution listed below. Administer by infusion over a period of at least 30 minutes. During the infusion it is desirable to discontinue the primary infusion solution.

Compatible Intravenous Solutions for Single Dose Vials

0.9% sodium chloride for injection

sterile water for injection‡

Dextran 6% in saline

Dextrose 5%

LACTATED RINGER’S SOLUTION IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PIPERACILLIN AND TAZOBACTAM FOR INJECTION.

‡ Maximum recommended volume per dose of sterile water for injection is 50 mL.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be mixed with other drugs in a syringe or infusion bottle since compatibility has not been established.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not chemically stable in solutions that contain only sodium bicarbonate and solutions that significantly alter the pH.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be added to blood products or albumin hydrolysates. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Stability of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection Powder Formulations Following Reconstitution

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single dose vials is stable in glass and plastic containers (plastic syringes, I.V. bags and tubing) when used with compatible diluents.

Single dose vials should be used immediately after reconstitution. Discard any unused portion after 24 hours if stored at room temperature (20°C to 25°C [68°F to 77°F]), or after 48 hours if stored at refrigerated temperature (2°C to 8°C [36°F to 46°F]). Vials should not be frozen after reconstitution.

Stability studies in the I.V. bags have demonstrated chemical stability (potency, pH of reconstituted solution and clarity of solution) for up to 24 hours at room temperature and up to one week at refrigerated temperature. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection contains no preservatives. Appropriate consideration of aseptic technique should be used.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single dose vials can be used in ambulatory intravenous infusion pumps. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection in an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump has been demonstrated for a period of 12 hours at room temperature. Each dose was reconstituted and diluted to a volume of 37.5 mL or 25 mL. One-day supplies of dosing solution were aseptically transferred into the medication reservoir (I.V. bags or cartridge). The reservoir was fitted to a preprogrammed ambulatory intravenous infusion pump per the manufacturer's instructions. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not affected when administered using an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump.

2.7 Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by piperacillin, piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides are recommended for separate administration. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted, diluted, and administered separately when concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

In circumstances where co-administration via Y-site is necessary, Y-site infusion only with the following aminoglycosides under the following conditions:
Table 2: Compatibility with Aminoglycosides * Diluent volumes apply to single dose vials † The concentration ranges in Table 2 are based on administration of the aminoglycoside in divided doses (10 to 15 mg/kg/day in two daily doses for amikacin and 3 to 5 mg/kg/day in three daily doses for gentamicin). Administration of amikacin or gentamicin in a single daily dose or in doses exceeding those stated above via Y-site with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection has not been evaluated. See package insert for each aminoglycoside for complete Dosage and Administration instructions.
Aminoglycoside

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection Dose(grams)

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection DiluentVolume* (mL)

Aminoglycoside ConcentrationRange† (mg/mL)

AcceptableDiluents

Amikacin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

1.75 – 7.5

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Gentamicin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

0.7 – 3.32

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Only the concentration and diluents for amikacin or gentamicin with the dosages of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection listed above have been established as compatible for coadministration via Y-site infusion. Simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion in any manner other than listed above may result in inactivation of the aminoglycoside by piperacillin and tazobactam for injection.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not compatible with tobramycin for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion. Compatibility of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection with other aminoglycosides has not been established.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Piperacillin And Tazoba...

Piperacillin And Tazobactam

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.1 Adult Patients

The usual total daily dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for adults is 3.375 g every six hours totaling 13.5 g (12 g piperacillin/1.5 g tazobactam). The usual duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment is from 7 to 10 days.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.2 Nosocomial Pneumonia

Initial presumptive treatment of patients with nosocomial pneumonia should start with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection at a dosage of 4.5 g every six hours plus an aminoglycoside, totaling 18 g (16 g piperacillin/2 g tazobactam). The recommended duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment for nosocomial pneumonia is 7 to 14 days. Treatment with the aminoglycoside should be continued in patients from whom P. aeruginosa is isolated.

2.3 Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min) and dialysis patients (hemodialysis and CAPD), the intravenous dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reduced to the degree of actual renal function impairment. The recommended daily doses of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for patients with renal impairment are as follows:
Table 1: Recommended Dosing of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection in Patients with Normal Renal Function and Renal Impairment (As total grams piperacillin/tazobactam) Renal Function(creatinine clearance,mL/min) All Indications(except nosocomialpneumonia) NosocomialPneumonia * Creatinine clearance for patients not receiving hemodialysis † 0.75 g (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each hemodialysis session on hemodialysis days
>40 mL/min

3.375 q 6 h

4.5 q 6 h

20-40 mL/min*

2.25 q 6 h

3.375 q 6 h

<20 mL/min*

2.25 q 8 h

2.25 q 6 h

Hemodialysis†

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

CAPD

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

For patients on hemodialysis, the maximum dose is 2.25 g every twelve hours for all indications other than nosocomial pneumonia and 2.25 g every eight hours for nosocomial pneumonia. Since hemodialysis removes 30% to 40% of the administered dose, an additional dose of 0.75 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each dialysis period on hemodialysis days. No additional dosage of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is necessary for CAPD patients.

2.4 Pediatric Patients

For children with appendicitis and/or peritonitis 9 months of age or older, weighing up to 40 kg, and with normal renal function, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage is 100 mg piperacillin/12.5 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours. For pediatric patients between 2 months and 9 months of age, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage based on pharmacokinetic modeling, is 80 mg piperacillin/10 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Pediatric patients weighing over 40 kg and with normal renal function should receive the adult dose.

It has not been determined how to adjust piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5 Directions for Reconstitution and Dilution for Use

ADD-Vantage® System Admixtures

Dextrose 5% in Water (50 or 100 mL)

0.9% Sodium Chloride (50 or 100 mL)

For ADD-Vantage® vials reconstitution directions see Instructions for Use of the ADD-Vantage® System

LACTATED RINGER’S SOLUTION IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PIPERACILLIN AND TAZOBACTAM FOR INJECTION.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be mixed with other drugs in a syringe or infusion bottle since compatibility has not been established.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not chemically stable in solutions that contain only sodium bicarbonate and solutions that significantly alter the pH.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be added to blood products or albumin hydrolysates. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Stability of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection Powder Formulations Following Reconstitution

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is stable in glass and plastic containers (plastic syringes, I.V. bags and tubing) when used with compatible diluents.

Stability studies with the admixed ADD-Vantage® system have demonstrated chemical stability (potency, pH of reconstituted solution and clarity of solution) for up to 24 hours at room temperature. (Note: The admixed ADD-Vantage® should not be refrigerated or frozen after reconstitution.). Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection contains no preservatives. Appropriate consideration of aseptic technique should be used.

2.6 Instructions for Use of the ADD-Vantage® System

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container (Use Aseptic Technique):
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: A. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe. B. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.) 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Prepare Admixture:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 5. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 6. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 7. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration (Use Aseptic Technique):
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

2.7 Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by piperacillin, piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides are recommended for separate administration. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted, diluted, and administered separately when concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

In circumstances where co-administration via Y-site is necessary, Y-site infusion only with the following aminoglycosides under the following conditions:
Table 2: Compatibility with Aminoglycosides * The concentration ranges in Table 2 are based on administration of the aminoglycoside in divided doses (10 to 15 mg/kg/day in two daily doses for amikacin and 3 to 5 mg/kg/day in three daily doses for gentamicin). Administration of amikacin or gentamicin in a single daily dose or in doses exceeding those stated above via Y-site with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection has not been evaluated. See package insert for each aminoglycoside for complete Dosage and Administration instructions.
Aminoglycoside

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection Dose(grams)

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection DiluentVolume (mL)

AminoglycosideConcentrationRange* (mg/mL)

AcceptableDiluents

Amikacin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

1.75 – 7.5

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Gentamicin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

0.7 – 3.32

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Only the concentration and diluents for amikacin or gentamicin with the dosages of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection listed above have been established as compatible for coadministration via Y-site infusion. Simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion in any manner other than listed above may result in inactivation of the aminoglycoside by piperacillin and tazobactam for injection.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not compatible with tobramycin for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion. Compatibility of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection with other aminoglycosides has not been established.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Piperacillin And Tazoba...

Piperacillin And Tazobactam

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.1 Adult Patients

The usual total daily dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for adults is 3.375 g every six hours totaling 13.5 g (12 g piperacillin/1.5 g tazobactam). The usual duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment is from 7 to 10 days.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.2 Nosocomial Pneumonia

Initial presumptive treatment of patients with nosocomial pneumonia should start with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection at a dosage of 4.5 g every six hours plus an aminoglycoside, totaling 18 g (16 g piperacillin/2 g tazobactam). The recommended duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment for nosocomial pneumonia is 7 to 14 days. Treatment with the aminoglycoside should be continued in patients from whom P. aeruginosais isolated.

2.3 Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min) and dialysis patients (hemodialysis and CAPD), the intravenous dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reduced to the degree of actual renal function impairment. The recommended daily doses of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for patients with renal impairment are as follows:
Table 1: Recommended Dosing of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection in Patients with Normal Renal Function and Renal Impairment (As total grams piperacillin/tazobactam) Renal Function(creatinine clearance,mL/min) All Indications(except nosocomialpneumonia) NosocomialPneumonia * Creatinine clearance for patients not receiving hemodialysis † 0.75 g (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each hemodialysis session on hemodialysis days
>40 mL/min

3.375 q 6 h

4.5 q 6 h

20-40 mL/min*

2.25 q 6 h

3.375 q 6 h

<20 mL/min*

2.25 q 8 h

2.25 q 6 h

Hemodialysis†

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

CAPD

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

For patients on hemodialysis, the maximum dose is 2.25 g every twelve hours for all indications other than nosocomial pneumonia and 2.25 g every eight hours for nosocomial pneumonia. Since hemodialysis removes 30% to 40% of the administered dose, an additional dose of 0.75 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each dialysis period on hemodialysis days. No additional dosage of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is necessary for CAPD patients.

2.4 Pediatric Patients

For children with appendicitis and/or peritonitis 9 months of age or older, weighing up to 40 kg, and with normal renal function, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage is 100 mg piperacillin/12.5 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours. For pediatric patients between 2 months and 9 months of age, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage based on pharmacokinetic modeling, is 80 mg piperacillin/10 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Pediatric patients weighing over 40 kg and with normal renal function should receive the adult dose.

It has not been determined how to adjust piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5 Reconstitution and Dilution of Powder Formulations

Single dose vials

Reconstitute piperacillin and tazobactam for injection vials with a compatible reconstitution diluent from the list provided below.

2.25 g, 3.375 g, and 4.5 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reconstituted with 10 mL, 15 mL, and 20 mL, respectively. Swirl until dissolved.

Compatible Reconstitution Diluents for Single Dose Vials

0.9% sodium chloride for injection

Sterile water for injection

Dextrose 5%

Bacteriostatic saline/parabens

Bacteriostatic water/parabens

Bacteriostatic saline/benzyl alcohol

Bacteriostatic water/benzyl alcohol

Reconstituted piperacillin and tazobactam for injection solutions for single dose vials should be further diluted (recommended volume per dose of 50 mL to 150 mL) in a compatible intravenous solution listed below. Administer by infusion over a period of at least 30 minutes. During the infusion it is desirable to discontinue the primary infusion solution.

Compatible Intravenous Solutions for Single Dose Vials

0.9% sodium chloride for injection

sterile water for injection‡

Dextran 6% in saline

Dextrose 5%

LACTATED RINGER’S SOLUTION IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PIPERACILLIN AND TAZOBACTAM FOR INJECTION.

‡ Maximum recommended volume per dose of sterile water for injection is 50 mL.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be mixed with other drugs in a syringe or infusion bottle since compatibility has not been established.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not chemically stable in solutions that contain only sodium bicarbonate and solutions that significantly alter the pH.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be added to blood products or albumin hydrolysates. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Stability of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection Powder Formulations Following Reconstitution

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single dose vials is stable in glass and plastic containers (plastic syringes, I.V. bags and tubing) when used with compatible diluents.

Single dose vials should be used immediately after reconstitution. Discard any unused portion after 24 hours if stored at room temperature (20°C to 25°C [68°F to 77°F]), or after 48 hours if stored at refrigerated temperature (2°C to 8°C [36°F to 46°F]). Vials should not be frozen after reconstitution.

Stability studies in the I.V. bags have demonstrated chemical stability (potency, pH of reconstituted solution and clarity of solution) for up to 24 hours at room temperature and up to one week at refrigerated temperature. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection contains no preservatives. Appropriate consideration of aseptic technique should be used.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single dose vials can be used in ambulatory intravenous infusion pumps. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection in an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump has been demonstrated for a period of 12 hours at room temperature. Each dose was reconstituted and diluted to a volume of 37.5 mL or 25 mL. One-day supplies of dosing solution were aseptically transferred into the medication reservoir (I.V. bags or cartridge). The reservoir was fitted to a preprogrammed ambulatory intravenous infusion pump per the manufacturer's instructions. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not affected when administered using an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump.

2.7 Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by piperacillin, piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides are recommended for separate administration. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted, diluted, and administered separately when concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

In circumstances where co-administration via Y-site is necessary, Y-site infusion only with the following aminoglycosides under the following conditions:
Table 2: Compatibility with Aminoglycosides * Diluent volumes apply to single dose vials † The concentration ranges in Table 2 are based on administration of the aminoglycoside in divided doses (10 to 15 mg/kg/day in two daily doses for amikacin and 3 to 5 mg/kg/day in three daily doses for gentamicin). Administration of amikacin or gentamicin in a single daily dose or in doses exceeding those stated above via Y-site with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection has not been evaluated. See package insert for each aminoglycoside for complete Dosage and Administration instructions.
Aminoglycoside

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection Dose(grams)

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection DiluentVolume* (mL)

Aminoglycoside ConcentrationRange† (mg/mL)

AcceptableDiluents

Amikacin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

1.75 – 7.5

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Gentamicin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

0.7 – 3.32

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Only the concentration and diluents for amikacin or gentamicin with the dosages of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection listed above have been established as compatible for coadministration via Y-site infusion. Simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion in any manner other than listed above may result in inactivation of the aminoglycoside by piperacillin and tazobactam for injection.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not compatible with tobramycin for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion. Compatibility of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection with other aminoglycosides has not been established.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Piperacillin And Tazoba...

Piperacillin And Tazobactam

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.1 Adult Patients

The usual total daily dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for adults is 3.375 g every six hours totaling 13.5 g (12 g piperacillin/1.5 g tazobactam). The usual duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment is from 7 to 10 days.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.2 Nosocomial Pneumonia

Initial presumptive treatment of patients with nosocomial pneumonia should start with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection at a dosage of 4.5 g every six hours plus an aminoglycoside, totaling 18 g (16 g piperacillin/2 g tazobactam). The recommended duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment for nosocomial pneumonia is 7 to 14 days. Treatment with the aminoglycoside should be continued in patients from whom P. aeruginosa is isolated.

2.3 Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min) and dialysis patients (hemodialysis and CAPD), the intravenous dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reduced to the degree of actual renal function impairment. The recommended daily doses of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for patients with renal impairment are as follows:
Table 1: Recommended Dosing of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection in Patients with Normal Renal Function and Renal Impairment (As total grams piperacillin/tazobactam) Renal Function(creatinine clearance,mL/min) All Indications(except nosocomialpneumonia) NosocomialPneumonia * Creatinine clearance for patients not receiving hemodialysis † 0.75 g (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each hemodialysis session on hemodialysis days
>40 mL/min

3.375 q 6 h

4.5 q 6 h

20-40 mL/min*

2.25 q 6 h

3.375 q 6 h

<20 mL/min*

2.25 q 8 h

2.25 q 6 h

Hemodialysis†

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

CAPD

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

For patients on hemodialysis, the maximum dose is 2.25 g every twelve hours for all indications other than nosocomial pneumonia and 2.25 g every eight hours for nosocomial pneumonia. Since hemodialysis removes 30% to 40% of the administered dose, an additional dose of 0.75 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each dialysis period on hemodialysis days. No additional dosage of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is necessary for CAPD patients.

2.4 Pediatric Patients

For children with appendicitis and/or peritonitis 9 months of age or older, weighing up to 40 kg, and with normal renal function, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage is 100 mg piperacillin/12.5 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours. For pediatric patients between 2 months and 9 months of age, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage based on pharmacokinetic modeling, is 80 mg piperacillin/10 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Pediatric patients weighing over 40 kg and with normal renal function should receive the adult dose.

It has not been determined how to adjust piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5 Directions for Reconstitution and Dilution for Use

ADD-Vantage® System Admixtures

Dextrose 5% in Water (50 or 100 mL)

0.9% Sodium Chloride (50 or 100 mL)

For ADD-Vantage® vials reconstitution directions see Instructions for Use of the ADD-Vantage® System

LACTATED RINGER’S SOLUTION IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PIPERACILLIN AND TAZOBACTAM FOR INJECTION.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be mixed with other drugs in a syringe or infusion bottle since compatibility has not been established.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not chemically stable in solutions that contain only sodium bicarbonate and solutions that significantly alter the pH.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be added to blood products or albumin hydrolysates. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Stability of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection Powder Formulations Following Reconstitution

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is stable in glass and plastic containers (plastic syringes, I.V. bags and tubing) when used with compatible diluents.

Stability studies with the admixed ADD-Vantage® system have demonstrated chemical stability (potency, pH of reconstituted solution and clarity of solution) for up to 24 hours at room temperature. (Note: The admixed ADD-Vantage® should not be refrigerated or frozen after reconstitution.). Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection contains no preservatives. Appropriate consideration of aseptic technique should be used.

2.6 Instructions for Use of the ADD-Vantage® System

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container (Use Aseptic Technique):
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: A. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe. B. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.) 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Prepare Admixture:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 5. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 6. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 7. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration (Use Aseptic Technique):
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

2.7 Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by piperacillin, piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides are recommended for separate administration. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted, diluted, and administered separately when concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

In circumstances where co-administration via Y-site is necessary, Y-site infusion only with the following aminoglycosides under the following conditions:
Table 2: Compatibility with Aminoglycosides * The concentration ranges in Table 2 are based on administration of the aminoglycoside in divided doses (10 to 15 mg/kg/day in two daily doses for amikacin and 3 to 5 mg/kg/day in three daily doses for gentamicin). Administration of amikacin or gentamicin in a single daily dose or in doses exceeding those stated above via Y-site with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection has not been evaluated. See package insert for each aminoglycoside for complete Dosage and Administration instructions.
Aminoglycoside

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection Dose(grams)

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection DiluentVolume (mL)

AminoglycosideConcentrationRange* (mg/mL)

AcceptableDiluents

Amikacin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

1.75 – 7.5

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Gentamicin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

0.7 – 3.32

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Only the concentration and diluents for amikacin or gentamicin with the dosages of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection listed above have been established as compatible for coadministration via Y-site infusion. Simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion in any manner other than listed above may result in inactivation of the aminoglycoside by piperacillin and tazobactam for injection.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not compatible with tobramycin for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion. Compatibility of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection with other aminoglycosides has not been established.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Levophed

Levophed

Norepinephrine Bitartrate Injection is a concentrated, potent drug which must be diluted in dextrose containing solutions prior to infusion. An infusion of LEVOPHED should be given into a large vein (see PRECAUTIONS).

Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intraaortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, LEVOPHED can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement.

Diluent: LEVOPHED should be diluted in 5 percent dextrose injection or 5 percent dextrose and sodium chloride injections. These dextrose containing fluids are protection against significant loss of potency due to oxidation. Administration in saline solution alone is not recommended. Whole blood or plasma, if indicated to increase blood volume, should be administered separately (for example, by use of a Y-tube and individual containers if given simultaneously).

Average Dosage: Add the content of the vial (4 mg/4 mL) of LEVOPHED to 1,000 mL of a 5 percent dextrose containing solution. Each mL of this dilution contains 4 mcg of the base of LEVOPHED. Give this solution by intravenous infusion. Insert a plastic intravenous catheter through a suitable bore needle well advanced centrally into the vein and securely fixed with adhesive tape, avoiding, if possible, a catheter tie-in technique as this promotes stasis. An IV drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential to permit an accurate estimation of the rate of flow in drops per minute. After observing the response to an initial dose of 2 mL to 3 mL (from 8 mcg to 12 mcg of base) per minute, adjust the rate of flow to establish and maintain a low normal blood pressure (usually 80 mm Hg to 100 mm Hg systolic) sufficient to maintain the circulation to vital organs. In previously hypertensive patients, it is recommended that the blood pressure should be raised no higher than 40 mm Hg below the preexisting systolic pressure. The average maintenance dose ranges from 0.5 mL to 1 mL per minute (from 2 mcg to 4 mcg of base).

High Dosage: Great individual variation occurs in the dose required to attain and maintain an adequate blood pressure. In all cases, dosage of LEVOPHED should be titrated according to the response of the patient. Occasionally much larger or even enormous daily doses (as high as 68 mg base or 17 vials) may be necessary if the patient remains hypotensive, but occult blood volume depletion should always be suspected and corrected when present. Central venous pressure monitoring is usually helpful in detecting and treating this situation.

Fluid Intake: The degree of dilution depends on clinical fluid volume requirements. If large volumes of fluid (dextrose) are needed at a flow rate that would involve an excessive dose of the pressor agent per unit of time, a solution more dilute than 4 mcg per mL should be used. On the other hand, when large volumes of fluid are clinically undesirable, a concentration greater than 4 mcg per mL may be necessary.

Duration of Therapy: The infusion should be continued until adequate blood pressure and tissue perfusion are maintained without therapy. Infusions of LEVOPHED should be reduced gradually, avoiding abrupt withdrawal. In some of the reported cases of vascular collapse due to acute myocardial infarction, treatment was required for up to six days.

Adjunctive Treatment in Cardiac ArrestInfusions of LEVOPHED are usually administered intravenously during cardiac resuscitation to restore and maintain an adequate blood pressure after an effective heartbeat and ventilation have been established by other means. [LEVOPHED’s powerful beta-adrenergic stimulating action is also thought to increase the strength and effectiveness of systolic contractions once they occur.]

Average Dosage: To maintain systemic blood pressure during the management of cardiac arrest, LEVOPHED is used in the same manner as described under Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use the solution if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.

Avoid contact with iron salts, alkalis, or oxidizing agents.
Levophed

Levophed

Norepinephrine Bitartrate Injection is a concentrated, potent drug which must be diluted in dextrose containing solutions prior to infusion. An infusion of LEVOPHED should be given into a large vein (see PRECAUTIONS).

Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States

Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intraaortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, LEVOPHED can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement.

Diluent: LEVOPHED should be diluted in 5 percent dextrose injection or 5 percent dextrose and sodium chloride injections. These dextrose containing fluids are protection against significant loss of potency due to oxidation. Administration in saline solution alone is not recommended. Whole blood or plasma, if indicated to increase blood volume, should be administered separately (for example, by use of a Y-tube and individual containers if given simultaneously).

Average Dosage: Add a 4 mL ampul (4 mg) of LEVOPHED to 1,000 mL of a 5 percent dextrose containing solution. Each mL of this dilution contains 4 mcg of the base of LEVOPHED. Give this solution by intravenous infusion. Insert a plastic intravenous catheter through a suitable bore needle well advanced centrally into the vein and securely fixed with adhesive tape, avoiding, if possible, a catheter tie-in technique as this promotes stasis. An IV drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential to permit an accurate estimation of the rate of flow in drops per minute. After observing the response to an initial dose of 2 mL to 3 mL (from 8 mcg to 12 mcg of base) per minute, adjust the rate of flow to establish and maintain a low normal blood pressure (usually 80 mm Hg to 100 mm Hg systolic) sufficient to maintain the circulation to vital organs. In previously hypertensive patients, it is recommended that the blood pressure should be raised no higher than 40 mm Hg below the preexisting systolic pressure. The average maintenance dose ranges from 0.5 mL to 1 mL per minute (from 2 mcg to 4 mcg of base).

High Dosage: Great individual variation occurs in the dose required to attain and maintain an adequate blood pressure. In all cases, dosage of LEVOPHED should be titrated according to the response of the patient. Occasionally much larger or even enormous daily doses (as high as 68 mg base or 17 ampuls) may be necessary if the patient remains hypotensive, but occult blood volume depletion should always be suspected and corrected when present. Central venous pressure monitoring is usually helpful in detecting and treating this situation.

Fluid Intake: The degree of dilution depends on clinical fluid volume requirements. If large volumes of fluid (dextrose) are needed at a flow rate that would involve an excessive dose of the pressor agent per unit of time, a solution more dilute than 4 mcg per mL should be used. On the other hand, when large volumes of fluid are clinically undesirable, a concentration greater than 4 mcg per mL may be necessary.

Duration of Therapy: The infusion should be continued until adequate blood pressure and tissue perfusion are maintained without therapy. Infusions of LEVOPHED should be reduced gradually, avoiding abrupt withdrawal. In some of the reported cases of vascular collapse due to acute myocardial infarction, treatment was required for up to six days.

Adjunctive Treatment in Cardiac Arrest

Infusions of LEVOPHED are usually administered intravenously during cardiac resuscitation to restore and maintain an adequate blood pressure after an effective heartbeat and ventilation have been established by other means. [LEVOPHED’s powerful beta-adrenergic stimulating action is also thought to increase the strength and effectiveness of systolic contractions once they occur.]

Average Dosage: To maintain systemic blood pressure during the management of cardiac arrest, LEVOPHED is used in the same manner as described under Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use the solution if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.

Avoid contact with iron salts, alkalis, or oxidizing agents.
Vancomycin Hydrochlorid...

Vancomycin Hydrochloride

Infusion-related events are related to both the concentration and the rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual daily intravenous dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every 6 hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual intravenous daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin is 10 mg/kg per dose given every 6 hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin may be warranted in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the first week of life and every 8 hours thereafter up to the age of 1 month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride for injection per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min (see following table).
DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION (Adapted from Moellering et al)4
Creatinine Clearance

mL/min

Vancomycin Dose

mg/24 h

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

1,545

1,390

1,235

1,080

925

770

620

465

310

155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 hr. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1,000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1,000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

     Men:          Weight (kg) x (140 – age in years)                                                  72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

     Women:     0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.

Compatibility with Other Drugs and Intravenous Fluids

The following diluents are physically and chemically compatible (with 4 g/L vancomycin hydrochloride):

     5% Dextrose Injection, USP     5% Dextrose Injection and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP     Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP     5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer’s Injection     Normosol®-M and 5% Dextrose     0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP     ISOLYTE® E

Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Vancomycin solution has a low pH and may cause physical instability of other compounds.

Mixtures of solutions of vancomycin and beta-lactam antibiotics have been shown to be physically incompatible. The likelihood of precipitation increases with higher concentrations of vancomycin. It is recommended to adequately flush the intravenous lines between the administration of these antibiotics. It is also recommended to dilute solutions of vancomycin to 5 mg/mL or less.

Although intravitreal injection is not an approved route of administration for vancomycin, precipitation has been reported after intravitreal injection of vancomycin and ceftazidime for endophthalmitis using different syringes and needles. The precipitates dissolved gradually, with complete clearing of the vitreous cavity over two months and with improvement of visual acuity.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection, is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Epinephrine

Epinephrine

Subcutaneously or intramuscularly – 0.2 to 1 mL (mg). Start with a small dose and increase if required.

Note: The subcutaneous is the preferred route of administration. If given intramuscularly, injection into the buttocks should be avoided.

Hypersensitivity Reactions

For bronchial asthma and certain allergic manifestations, e.g., angioedema, urticaria, serum sickness, anaphylactic shock, use epinephrine subcutaneously. The adult intravenous dose for hypersensitivity reactions or to relieve bronchospasm usually ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 mg injected slowly. Neonates may be given a dose of 0.01 mg per kg of body weight; for the infant 0.05 mg is an adequate initial dose and this may be repeated at 20 to 30 minute intervals in the management of asthma attacks.

Cardiac Resuscitation

A dose of 0.5 mL (0.5 mg) diluted to 10 mL with sodium chloride injection can be administered intravenously or intracardially to restore myocardial contractility.

Intracardiac injection should only be administered by personnel well trained in the technique, if there has not been sufficient time to establish an intravenous route.

External cardiac massage should follow intracardial administration to permit the drug to enter coronary circulation. The drug should be used secondarily to unsuccessful attempts with physical or electromechanical methods.

Ophthalmologic Use

Ophthalmologic use (for producing conjunctival decongestion, to control hemorrhage, produce mydriasis and reduce intraocular pressure) – use a concentration of 1:10,000 (0.1 mg/mL) to 1:1000 (1 mg/mL).

Regional Anesthesia

A final concentration of 1:200,000 of epinephrine injection is recommended for infiltration injection, nerve block, caudal or other epidural blocks. From 0.3 to 0.4 mg of epinephrine (0.3 to 0.4 mL of 1:1000 solution) may be mixed with spinal anesthetic agents.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Vancomycin Hydrochlorid...

Vancomycin Hydrochloride

An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events are related to both concentration and rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual intravenous daily dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every six hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin is 10 mg/kg per dose given every six hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the first week of life and every eight hours thereafter up to the age of one month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and in the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min:
DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION (Adapted from Moellering et al)4
Creatinine Clearance

mL/min

Vancomycin Dose

mg/24 h

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

1,545

1,390

1,235

1,080

925

770

620

465

310

155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 h. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

Men:

Weight (kg) x (140 - age in years)

72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

Women:

0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise, the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as in obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.
Vancomycin Hydrochlorid...

Vancomycin Hydrochloride

An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events are related to both concentration and rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual intravenous daily dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every six hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual intravenous daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin is 10 mg/kg per dose given every six hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the first week of life and every eight hours thereafter up to the age of one month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and in the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min:
DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION (Adapted from Moellering et al)4
Creatinine Clearance

mL/min

Vancomycin Dose

mg/24 h

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

1,545

1,390

1,235

1,080

925

770

620

465

310

155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 h. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

Men:

Weight (kg) x (140 - age in years)

72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

Women:

0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.
Vancomycin Hydrochlorid...

Vancomycin Hydrochloride

An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events are related to both concentration and rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

The use of ADD-Vantage vials of vancomycin hydrochloride is indicated only when doses of 500 mg, 750 mg or 1 g are appropriate. Patient factors, such as renal function and age, are critical in calculating correct dosage regimens (see below). If doses of 500 mg, 750 mg or 1 g are determined to be inappropriate, conventional vials of vancomycin hydrochloride should be used. ADD-VANTAGE VIALS OF VANCOMYCIN HYDROCHLORIDE SHOULD NOT BE USED IN NEONATES, INFANTS, OR PEDIATRIC PATIENTS WHO REQUIRE DOSES OF LESS THAN 500 MG.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual intravenous daily dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every six hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride is 10 mg/kg per dose given every six hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the first week of life and every eight hours thereafter up to the age of one month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and in the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min:
DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION (Adapted from Moellering et al)4
Creatinine Clearance

mL/min

Vancomycin Dose

mg/24 h

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

1,545

1,390

1,235

1,080

925

770

620

465

310

155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 h. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

Men:

Weight (kg) x (140 - age in years) 72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

Women:

0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise, the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as in obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.
Epinephrine

Epinephrine

Subcutaneously or intramuscularly — 0.2 to 1 mL (mg). Start with a small dose and increase if required.

Note: The subcutaneous is the preferred route of administration. If given intramuscularly, injection into the buttocks should be avoided.

Hypersensitivity Reactions For bronchial asthma and certain allergic manifestations, e.g., angioedema, urticaria, serum sickness, anaphylactic shock, use epinephrine subcutaneously. The adult intravenous dose for hypersensitivity reactions or to relieve bronchospasm usually ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 mg injected slowly. Neonates may be given a dose of 0.01 mg per kg of body weight; for the infant 0.05 mg is an adequate initial dose and this may be repeated at 20 to 30 minute intervals in the management of asthma attacks.

Cardiac ResuscitationA dose of 0.5 mL (0.5 mg) diluted to 10 mL with sodium chloride injection can be administered intravenously or intracardially to restore myocardial contractility.

Intracardiac injection should only be administered by personnel well trained in the technique, if there has not been sufficient time to establish an intravenous route.

External cardiac massage should follow intracardial administration to permit the drug to enter coronary circulation. The drug should be used secondarily to unsuccessful attempts with physical or electromechanical methods.

Ophthalmologic Use Ophthalmologic use (for producing conjunctival decongestion, to control hemorrhage, produce mydriasis and reduce intraocular pressure) — use a concentration of 1:10,000 (0.1 mg/mL) to 1:1000 (1 mg/mL).

Regional Anesthesia A final concentration of 1:200,000 of epinephrine injection is recommended for infiltration injection, nerve block, caudal or other epidural blocks. From 0.3 to 0.4 mg of epinephrine (0.3 to 0.4 mL of 1:1000 solution) may be mixed with spinal anesthetic agents.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) in the Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with manual, gravity flow operations and automated compounding devices for preparing sterile nutrient admixtures.

Potassium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. ECG and serum potassium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of milliequivalents (mEq) of potassium (K+) with an equal number of milliequivalents of acetate (CH3COO¯).

Maximum infusion rate: The infusion rate should not exceed 1 mEq/kg/hr.

Normal daily requirements:

Newborn: 2-6 mEq/kg/24 hr. Children: 2-3 mEq/kg/24 hr. Adult: 40 – 80 mEq/24 hr.

Intraosseous infusion can be an alternate route for drug administration when intravenous access is not readily available.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Directions for Dispensing From Pharmacy Bulk Package

The Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in the Pharmacy Admixtures Service only. For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose 3/4 inch long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. The vials should be suspended as a unit in the laminar flow hood.

A single entry through the vial closure should be made with a sterile dispensing set or transfer device. Transfer individual doses to appropriate intravenous infusion solutions. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage and multiple entries will increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination.

The above process should be carried out under a laminar flow hood using aseptic technique. Discard any unused portion within 4 hours after initial closure entry.
Niphanoid

Niphanoid

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Potassium Phosphates

Potassium Phosphates

Potassium Phosphates Injection, USP 3 mM P/mL is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum potassium, inorganic phosphorus and calcium levels should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of millimoles (mM) of phosphorus.

In adult patients receiving TPN (total parenteral nutrition), a dose of 12 to 15 mM phosphorus is recommended for each 500 mL of 50% Dextrose Injection, USP administered. The amount of potassium which accompanies the addition of phosphorus as potassium phosphate also should be kept in mind and if necessary, serum potassium levels and/or electrocardiographic changes should be monitored.

The suggested dose of phosphorus for infants receiving TPN is 1.5 to 2 mM P/kg/day.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine Injection is for intravenous use only. Gemcitabine Injection may be administered on an outpatient basis.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Carboplatin AUC 4 should be administered intravenously on Day 1 after Gemcitabine Injection administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications

Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity within a cycle of treatment is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, Gemcitabine Injection dosage should be modified according to guidelines in Table 1.
Table 1: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine Injection in Combination with Carboplatin
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1500

And

≥100,000

100

1000-1499

And/or

75,000-99,999

50

<1000

And/or

<75,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For carboplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

Dose adjustment for Gemcitabine Injection in combination with carboplatin for subsequent cycles is based upon observed toxicity. The dose of Gemcitabine Injection in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8 in case of any of the following hematologic toxicities:
Absolute granulocyte count <500 x 106/L for more than 5 days Absolute granulocyte count <100 x 106/L for more than 3 days Febrile neutropenia Platelets <25,000 x 106/L Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity
If any of the above toxicities recur after the initial dose reduction, for the subsequent cycle, Gemcitabine Injection should be given on Day 1 only at 800 mg/m2.

2.2 Breast Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3-hour intravenous infusion before Gemcitabine Injection administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications

Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, Gemcitabine Injection dosage should be modified according to the guidelines in Table 2.
Table 2: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine Injection in Combination with Paclitaxel
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1200

And

>75,000

100

1000-1199

Or

50,000-75,000

75

700-999

And

≥50,000

50

<700

Or

<50,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For paclitaxel dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Two schedules have been investigated and the optimum schedule has not been determined [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. With the 4-week schedule, Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 of each 28-day cycle. Cisplatin should be administered intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of Gemcitabine Injection. With the 3-week schedule, Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Cisplatin at a dose of 100 mg/m2 should be administered intravenously after the infusion of Gemcitabine Injection on Day 1. See prescribing information for cisplatin administration and hydration guidelines.

Dose Modifications

Dosage adjustments for hematologic toxicity may be required for Gemcitabine Injection and for cisplatin. Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on the day of therapy. Patients receiving Gemcitabine Injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet counts. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3. For cisplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection plus cisplatin should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. During combination therapy with cisplatin, serum creatinine, serum potassium, serum calcium, and serum magnesium should be carefully monitored (Grade 3/4 serum creatinine toxicity for Gemcitabine Injection plus cisplatin was 5% versus 2% for cisplatin alone).

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered by intravenous infusion at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes once weekly for up to 7 weeks (or until toxicity necessitates reducing or holding a dose), followed by a week of rest from treatment. Subsequent cycles should consist of infusions once weekly for 3 consecutive weeks out of every 4 weeks.

Dose Modifications

Dosage adjustment is based upon the degree of hematologic toxicity experienced by the patient [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Clearance in women and the elderly is reduced and women were somewhat less able to progress to subsequent cycles [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients receiving Gemcitabine Injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3.
Table 3: Dosage Reduction Guidelines
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

And

≥100,000

100

500-999

Or

50,000-99,999

75

<500

Or

<50,000

Hold

Laboratory evaluation of renal and hepatic function, including transaminases and serum creatinine, should be performed prior to initiation of therapy and periodically thereafter. Gemcitabine Injection should be administered with caution in patients with evidence of significant renal or hepatic impairment as there is insufficient information from clinical studies to allow clear dose recommendation for these patient populations.

Patients treated with Gemcitabine Injection who complete an entire cycle of therapy may have the dose for subsequent cycles increased by 25%, provided that the absolute granulocyte count (AGC) and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and if non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1. If patients tolerate the subsequent course of Gemcitabine Injection at the increased dose, the dose for the next cycle can be further increased by 20%, provided again that the AGC and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and that non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1.

2.5 Dose Modifications for Non-Hematologic Adverse Reactions

Permanently discontinue Gemcitabine for any of the following
Unexplained dyspnea or other evidence of severe pulmonary toxicity   Severe hepatic toxicity   Hemolytic-Uremic Syndrome   Capillary Leak Syndrome   Posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome
Withhold Gemcitabine or reduce dose by 50% for other severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity until resolved. No dose modifications are recommended for alopecia, nausea, or vomiting.

2.6 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Caution should be exercised in handling and preparing Gemcitabine Injection and diluted solution. The use of gloves is recommended. If Gemcitabine Injection and diluted solution contacts the skin or mucosa, immediately wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water. Although acute dermal irritation has not been observed in animal studies, 2 of 3 rabbits exhibited drug-related systemic toxicities (death, hypoactivity, nasal discharge, shallow breathing) due to dermal absorption.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anti-cancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published [see References (15)].

2.7 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

Each vial contains a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL. Hence, withdrawing 5.26 mL, 26.3 mL, or 52.6 mL of the vial contents will provide 200 mg, 1 g, or 2 g of gemcitabine, respectively. The appropriate amount of drug should be further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to concentrations as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

After dilution with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection the solution should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, prior to administration, whenever solution or container permits. If particulate matter or discoloration is found, do not administer.

When prepared as directed, diluted gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion.

The compatibility of Gemcitabine Injection with other drugs has not been studied. No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Carboplatin AUC 4 should be administered intravenously on Day 1 after Gemcitabine Injection administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications

Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity within a cycle of treatment is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, Gemcitabine Injection dosage should be modified according to guidelines in Table 1.
Table 1: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine Injection in Combination with Carboplatin
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1500

And

≥100,000

100

1000-1499

And/or

75,000-99,999

50

<1000

And/or

<75,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For carboplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

Dose adjustment for Gemcitabine Injection in combination with carboplatin for subsequent cycles is based upon observed toxicity. The dose of Gemcitabine Injection in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8 in case of any of the following hematologic toxicities:
Absolute granulocyte count <500 x 106/L for more than 5 days Absolute granulocyte count <100 x 106/L for more than 3 days Febrile neutropenia Platelets <25,000 x 106/L Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity
If any of the above toxicities recur after the initial dose reduction, for the subsequent cycle, Gemcitabine Injection should be given on Day 1 only at 800 mg/m2.

2.2 Breast Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3-hour intravenous infusion before Gemcitabine Injection administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications

Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, Gemcitabine Injection dosage should be modified according to the guidelines in Table 2.
Table 2: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine Injection in Combination with Paclitaxel
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1200

And

>75,000

100

1000-1199

Or

50,000-75,000

75

700-999

And

≥50,000

50

<700

Or

<50,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For paclitaxel dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Two schedules have been investigated and the optimum schedule has not been determined [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. With the 4-week schedule, Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 of each 28-day cycle. Cisplatin should be administered intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of Gemcitabine Injection. With the 3-week schedule, Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Cisplatin at a dose of 100 mg/m2 should be administered intravenously after the infusion of Gemcitabine Injection on Day 1. See prescribing information for cisplatin administration and hydration guidelines.

Dose Modifications

Dosage adjustments for hematologic toxicity may be required for Gemcitabine Injection and for cisplatin. Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on the day of therapy. Patients receiving Gemcitabine Injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet counts. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3. For cisplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection plus cisplatin should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. During combination therapy with cisplatin, serum creatinine, serum potassium, serum calcium, and serum magnesium should be carefully monitored (Grade 3/4 serum creatinine toxicity for Gemcitabine Injection plus cisplatin was 5% versus 2% for cisplatin alone).

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered by intravenous infusion at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes once weekly for up to 7 weeks (or until toxicity necessitates reducing or holding a dose), followed by a week of rest from treatment. Subsequent cycles should consist of infusions once weekly for 3 consecutive weeks out of every 4 weeks.

Dose Modifications

Dosage adjustment is based upon the degree of hematologic toxicity experienced by the patient [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Clearance in women and the elderly is reduced and women were somewhat less able to progress to subsequent cycles [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients receiving Gemcitabine Injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3.
Table 3: Dosage Reduction Guidelines
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

And

≥100,000

100

500-999

Or

50,000-99,999

75

<500

Or

<50,000

Hold

Laboratory evaluation of renal and hepatic function, including transaminases and serum creatinine, should be performed prior to initiation of therapy and periodically thereafter. Gemcitabine Injection should be administered with caution in patients with evidence of significant renal or hepatic impairment as there is insufficient information from clinical studies to allow clear dose recommendation for these patient populations.

Patients treated with Gemcitabine Injection who complete an entire cycle of therapy may have the dose for subsequent cycles increased by 25%, provided that the absolute granulocyte count (AGC) and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and if non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1. If patients tolerate the subsequent course of Gemcitabine Injection at the increased dose, the dose for the next cycle can be further increased by 20%, provided again that the AGC and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and that non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1.

2.6 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Caution should be exercised in handling and preparing Gemcitabine Injection and diluted solution. The use of gloves is recommended. If Gemcitabine Injection and diluted solution contacts the skin or mucosa, immediately wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water. Although acute dermal irritation has not been observed in animal studies, 2 of 3 rabbits exhibited drug-related systemic toxicities (death, hypoactivity, nasal discharge, shallow breathing) due to dermal absorption.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anti-cancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published [see References (15)].

2.7 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

Each vial contains a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL. Hence, withdrawing 5.26 mL, 26.3 mL, or 52.6 mL of the vial contents will provide 200 mg, 1 g, or 2 g of gemcitabine, respectively. The appropriate amount of drug should be further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to concentrations as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

After dilution with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection the solution should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, prior to administration, whenever solution or container permits. If particulate matter or discoloration is found, do not administer.

When prepared as directed, diluted gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion.

The compatibility of Gemcitabine Injection with other drugs has not been studied. No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of oral ketorolac tromethamine is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine. See package insert for ketorolac tromethamine tablets for transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose oral ketorolac tromethamine.

NOTE: Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose.

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient.

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION

Adult Patients: Ketorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose on a regular or “prn” schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS – Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days.

When administering ketorolac tromethamine injection, the IV bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The IM administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing IV or IM. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.

Single-Dose Treatment: The Following Regimen Should Be Limited To Single Administration Use Only

IM Dosing:
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.
IV Dosing:
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.
Multiple-Dose Treatment (IV or IM)
• Patients <65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 120 mg. • For patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.
For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection

Ketorolac tromethamine injection should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of oral ketorolac tromethamine is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine. See package insert for ketorolac tromethamine tablets for transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose oral ketorolac tromethamine.

Note: Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose.

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient.

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION

Ketorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose on a regular or “prn” schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS – Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days.

When administering ketorolac tromethamine injection, the IV bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The IM administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing IV or IM. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.

Single-Dose Treatment: The following regimen should be limited to single administration use only.

IM Dosing
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.
IV Dosing
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.
Multiple-Dose Treatment (IV or IM)
• Patients <65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 120 mg. • For patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.
For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection

Ketorolac tromethamine injection should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of oral ketorolac tromethamine is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine. See package insert for ketorolac tromethamine tablets for transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose oral ketorolac tromethamine.

Note: Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose.

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient.

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION

Ketorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose on a regular or “prn” schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS – Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days.

When administering ketorolac tromethamine injection, the IV bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The IM administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing IV or IM. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.

Single-Dose Treatment: The following regimen should be limited to single administration use only.

IM Dosing
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.
IV Dosing
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.
Multiple-Dose Treatment (IV or IM)
• Patients <65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 120 mg. • For patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.
For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection

Ketorolac tromethamine injection should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine

Gemcitabine Injection is for intravenous use only. Gemcitabine Injection may be administered on an outpatient basis.

2.1 Ovarian Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Carboplatin AUC 4 should be administered intravenously on Day 1 after Gemcitabine Injection administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications

Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustments for hematological toxicity within a cycle of treatment is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, Gemcitabine Injection dosage should be modified according to guidelines in Table 1.
Table 1: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine Injection in Combination with Carboplatin
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1500

And

≥100,000

100

1000-1499

And/or

75,000-99,999

50

<1000

And/or

<75,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For carboplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

Dose adjustment for Gemcitabine Injection in combination with carboplatin for subsequent cycles is based upon observed toxicity. The dose of Gemcitabine Injection in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 800 mg/m2 on Days 1 and 8 in case of any of the following hematologic toxicities:
Absolute granulocyte count <500 x 106/L for more than 5 days Absolute granulocyte count <100 x 106/L for more than 3 days Febrile neutropenia Platelets <25,000 x 106/L Cycle delay of more than one week due to toxicity
If any of the above toxicities recur after the initial dose reduction, for the subsequent cycle, Gemcitabine Injection should be given on Day 1 only at 800 mg/m2.

2.2 Breast Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at a dose of 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Paclitaxel should be administered at 175 mg/m2 on Day 1 as a 3-hour intravenous infusion before Gemcitabine Injection administration. Patients should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count, including differential counts. Patients should have an absolute granulocyte count ≥1500 x 106/L and a platelet count ≥100,000 x 106/L prior to each cycle.

Dose Modifications

Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on Day 8 of therapy. If marrow suppression is detected, Gemcitabine Injection dosage should be modified according to the guidelines in Table 2.
Table 2: Day 8 Dosage Reduction Guidelines for Gemcitabine Injection in Combination with Paclitaxel
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1200

And

>75,000

100

1000-1199

Or

50,000-75,000

75

700-999

And

≥50,000

50

<700

Or

<50,000

Hold

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. For paclitaxel dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

2.3 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Two schedules have been investigated and the optimum schedule has not been determined [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. With the 4-week schedule, Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1, 8, and 15 of each 28-day cycle. Cisplatin should be administered intravenously at 100 mg/m2 on Day 1 after the infusion of Gemcitabine Injection. With the 3-week schedule, Gemcitabine Injection should be administered intravenously at 1250 mg/m2 over 30 minutes on Days 1 and 8 of each 21-day cycle. Cisplatin at a dose of 100 mg/m2 should be administered intravenously after the infusion of Gemcitabine Injection on Day 1. See prescribing information for cisplatin administration and hydration guidelines.

Dose Modifications

Dosage adjustments for hematologic toxicity may be required for Gemcitabine Injection and for cisplatin. Gemcitabine Injection dosage adjustment for hematological toxicity is based on the granulocyte and platelet counts taken on the day of therapy. Patients receiving Gemcitabine Injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet counts. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3. For cisplatin dosage adjustment, see manufacturer’s prescribing information.

In general, for severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity, except alopecia and nausea/vomiting, therapy with Gemcitabine Injection plus cisplatin should be held or decreased by 50% depending on the judgment of the treating physician. During combination therapy with cisplatin, serum creatinine, serum potassium, serum calcium, and serum magnesium should be carefully monitored (Grade 3/4 serum creatinine toxicity for Gemcitabine Injection plus cisplatin was 5% versus 2% for cisplatin alone).

2.4 Pancreatic Cancer

Gemcitabine Injection should be administered by intravenous infusion at a dose of 1000 mg/m2 over 30 minutes once weekly for up to 7 weeks (or until toxicity necessitates reducing or holding a dose), followed by a week of rest from treatment. Subsequent cycles should consist of infusions once weekly for 3 consecutive weeks out of every 4 weeks.

Dose Modifications

Dosage adjustment is based upon the degree of hematologic toxicity experienced by the patient [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Clearance in women and the elderly is reduced and women were somewhat less able to progress to subsequent cycles [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients receiving Gemcitabine Injection should be monitored prior to each dose with a complete blood count (CBC), including differential and platelet count. If marrow suppression is detected, therapy should be modified or suspended according to the guidelines in Table 3.
Table 3: Dosage Reduction Guidelines
Absolute granulocyte count

(x 106/L)

Platelet count

(x 106/L)

% of full dose

≥1000

And

≥100,000

100

500-999

Or

50,000-99,999

75

<500

Or

<50,000

Hold

Laboratory evaluation of renal and hepatic function, including transaminases and serum creatinine, should be performed prior to initiation of therapy and periodically thereafter. Gemcitabine Injection should be administered with caution in patients with evidence of significant renal or hepatic impairment as there is insufficient information from clinical studies to allow clear dose recommendation for these patient populations.

Patients treated with Gemcitabine Injection who complete an entire cycle of therapy may have the dose for subsequent cycles increased by 25%, provided that the absolute granulocyte count (AGC) and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and if non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1. If patients tolerate the subsequent course of Gemcitabine Injection at the increased dose, the dose for the next cycle can be further increased by 20%, provided again that the AGC and platelet nadirs exceed 1500 x 106/L and 100,000 x 106/L, respectively, and that non-hematologic toxicity has not been greater than WHO Grade 1.

2.5 Dose Modifications for Non-Hematologic Adverse Reactions

Permanently discontinue Gemcitabine for any of the following
Unexplained dyspnea or other evidence of severe pulmonary toxicity Severe hepatic toxicity Hemolytic-Uremic Syndrome Capillary Leak Syndrome Posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome
Withhold Gemcitabine or reduce dose by 50% for other severe (Grade 3 or 4) non-hematological toxicity until resolved. No dose modifications are recommended for alopecia, nausea, or vomiting.

2.6 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Caution should be exercised in handling and preparing Gemcitabine Injection and diluted solution. The use of gloves is recommended. If Gemcitabine Injection and diluted solution contacts the skin or mucosa, immediately wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water or rinse the mucosa with copious amounts of water. Although acute dermal irritation has not been observed in animal studies, 2 of 3 rabbits exhibited drug-related systemic toxicities (death, hypoactivity, nasal discharge, shallow breathing) due to dermal absorption.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anti-cancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published [see References (15)].

2.7 Preparation for Intravenous Infusion Administration

Each vial contains a gemcitabine concentration of 38 mg/mL. Hence, withdrawing 5.26 mL, 26.3 mL, or 52.6 mL of the vial contents will provide 200 mg, 1 g, or 2 g of gemcitabine, respectively. The appropriate amount of drug should be further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to concentrations as low as 0.1 mg/mL.

After dilution with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection the solution should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, prior to administration, whenever solution or container permits. If particulate matter or discoloration is found, do not administer.

When prepared as directed, diluted gemcitabine solutions are stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Discard unused portion.

The compatibility of Gemcitabine Injection with other drugs has not been studied. No incompatibilities have been observed with infusion bottles or polyvinyl chloride bags and administration sets.
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of oral ketorolac tromethamine is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine. See package insert for ketorolac tromethamine tablets for transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose oral ketorolac tromethamine.

Note: Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose.

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient.

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION

Ketorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose on a regular or “prn” schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS – Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days.

When administering ketorolac tromethamine injection, the IV bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The IM administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing IV or IM. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.

Single-Dose Treatment: The following regimen should be limited to single administration use only

IM Dosing
Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg. Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.
IV Dosing
Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg. Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.
Multiple-Dose Treatment (IV or IM)
Patients <65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 120 mg. For patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.
For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection

Ketorolac tromethamine injection should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Ciprofloxacin And Dextr...

Ciprofloxacin And Dextrose

ADULTS

Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% dextrose should be administered to adults by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes at dosages described in the Dosage Guidelines table. Slow infusion of a dilute solution into a larger vein will minimize patient discomfort and reduce the risk of venous irritation. (See Preparation of Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% Dextrose for Administration section.)

The determination of dosage for any particular patient must take into consideration the severity and nature of the infection, the susceptibility of the causative microorganism, the integrity of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms, and the status of renal and hepatic function.
ADULT DOSAGE GUIDELINES *    Used in conjunction with metronidazole. (See product labeling for prescribing information.)†     DUE TO THE DESIGNATED PATHOGENS. (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)**  Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint, ciprofloxacin serum concentrations achieved in humans, reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit.4 For a discussion of ciprofloxacin serum concentrations in various human populations, see INHALATIONAL ANTHRAX – ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Total duration of ciprofloxacin administration (IV or oral) for inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) is 60 days.
Infection†

Severity

Dose

Frequency

Usual Duration

Urinary Tract

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

200 mg400 mg

q12hq12h (or q8h)

7 to 14 Days7 to 14 Days

LowerRespiratory Tract

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

400 mg400 mg

q12hq8h

7 to 14 Days7 to 14 Days

Nosocomial Pneumonia

Mild/Moderate/Severe

400 mg

q8h

10 to 14 Days

Skin and Skin Structure

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

400 mg400 mg

q12hq8h

7 to 14 Days7 to 14 Days

Bone and Joint

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

400 mg400 mg

q12hq8h

≥ 4 to 6 Weeks≥ 4 to 6 Weeks

Intra-Abdominal*

Complicated

400 mg

q12h

7 to 14 Days

Acute Sinusitis

Mild/Moderate

400 mg

q12h

10 Days

Chronic BacterialProstatitis

Mild/Moderate

400 mg

q12h

28 Days

Empirical TherapyinFebrile NeutropenicPatients

SevereCiprofloxacin+Piperacillin

400 mg

50 mg/kgNot to exceed24 g/day

q8h

q4h

7 to 14 Days

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) **

400 mg

q12h

60 Days

Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% Dextrose should be administered by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes.

Conversion of IV to Oral Dosing in Adults

Parenteral therapy may be switched to oral ciprofloxacin when the condition warrants, at the discretion of the physician. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and table below for the equivalent dosing regimens.)
Equivalent AUC Dosing Regimens
Ciprofloxacin Oral Dosage

Equivalent Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP Dosage

250 mg Tablet q12h

200 mg IV q12h

500 mg Tablet q12h

400 mg IV q12h

750 mg Tablet q12h

400 mg IV q8h

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration.

Adults with Impaired Renal Function

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternative pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. Nonetheless, some modification of dosage is recommended for patients with severe renal dysfunction. The following table provides dosage guidelines for use in patients with renal impairment:
RECOMMENDED STARTING AND MAINTENANCE DOSES FOR PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dosage

> 30

See usual dosage.

5 to 29

200 to 400 mg q 18 to 24 hr

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance:

            Men: Creatinine clearance                   =                Weight (kg) x (140 - age)                                             (mL/min)                                           72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

            Women: 0.85 x the value calculated for men.

The serum creatinine should represent a steady-state of renal function.

For patients with changing renal function or for patients with renal impairment and hepatic insufficiency, careful monitoring is suggested.

Pediatrics

Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% dextrose should be administered as described in the Dosage Guidelines table. An increased incidence of adverse events compared to controls, including events related to joints and/or surrounding tissues, has been observed. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS and CLINICAL STUDIES.)

Dosing and initial route of therapy (i.e., IV or oral) for complicated urinary tract infection or pyelonephritis should be determined by the severity of the infection. In the clinical trial, pediatric patients with moderate to severe infection were initiated on 6 to 10 mg/kg IV every 8 hours and allowed to switch to oral therapy (10 to 20 mg/kg every 12 hours), at the discretion of the physician.
PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES *     The total duration of therapy for complicated urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis in the clinical trial was determined by the physician. The mean duration of treatment was 11 days (range 10 to 21 days).**   Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Bacillus anthracis spores. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint, ciprofloxacin serum concentrations achieved in humans, reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit.6 For a discussion of ciprofloxacin serum concentrations in various human populations, see INHALATIONAL ANTHRAX – ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
Infection

Route of Administration

Dose (mg/kg)

Frequency

Total Duration

Complicated Urinary TractorPyelonephritis(patients from 1 to 17 years of age)

Intravenous

6 to 10 mg/kg (maximum 400 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing >51 kg)

Every 8 hours

10-21 days*

Oral

10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg(maximum 750 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing >51 kg)

Every 12 hours

Inhalational Anthrax(Post-Exposure)**

Intravenous

10 mg/kg (maximum 400 mg per dose)

Every 12 hours

60 days

Oral

15 mg/kg(maximum 500 mg per dose)

Every 12 hours

Pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency were excluded from the clinical trial of complicated urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis. No information is available on dosing adjustments necessary for pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency (i.e., creatinine clearance of < 50 mL/min/1.73m2).

Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% Dextrose should be administered by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes.

Preparation of Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% Dextrose for Administration

The 2 mg/mL infusion solution in 5% dextrose is available in flexible containers of 100 mL or 200 mL. The solutions in flexible containers do not need to be diluted and may be infused as described below.

If the Y-type or “piggyback” method of administration is used, it is advisable to discontinue temporarily the administration of any other solutions during the infusion of Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% dextrose. If the concomitant use of Ciprofloxacin Injection, USP in 5% dextrose and another drug is necessary each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each drug.
Diazepam

Diazepam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. The usual recommended dose in older children and adults ranges from 2 mg to 20 mg I.M. or I.V., depending on the indication and its severity. In some conditions, e.g., tetanus, larger doses may be required. (See dosage for specific indications.) In acute conditions the injection may be repeated within one hour although an interval of 3 to 4 hours is usually satisfactory. Lower doses (usually 2 mg to 5 mg) and slow increase in dosage should be used for elderly or debilitated patients and when other sedative drugs are administered. (See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

For dosage in infants above the age of 30 days and children, see the specific indications below. When intravenous use is indicated, facilities for respiratory assistance should be readily available.

Intramuscular: Diazepam Injection, USP should be injected deeply into the muscle.

Intravenous use: (See WARNINGS, particularly for use in children.) The solution should be injected slowly, taking at least one minute for each 5 mg (1 mL) given. Do not use small veins, such as those on the dorsum of the hand or wrist. Extreme care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial administration or extravasation.

Do not mix or dilute diazepam with other solutions or drugs in syringe or infusion flask. If it is not feasible to administer diazepam directly I.V., it may be injected slowly through the infusion tubing as close as possible to the vein insertion.

Once the acute symptomatology has been properly controlled with diazepam injection, the patient may be placed on oral therapy with diazepam if further treatment is required.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit (see PRECAUTIONS). NOTE: Solution may appear colorless to light yellow.

USUAL ADULT

DOSAGE

DOSAGE RANGE

IN CHILDREN

(I.V. administration should be made slowly)

Moderate Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

2 mg to 5 mg, I.M. or I.V. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Severe Anxiety Disorders and Symptoms of Anxiety

5 mg to 10 mg, I.M. or I.V. Repeat in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Acute Alcohol Withdrawal: As an aid in symptomatic relief of acute agitation, tremor, impending or acute delirium tremens and hallucinosis.

10 mg, I.M. or I.V. initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary.

Endoscopic Procedures: Adjunctively, if apprehension, anxiety or acute stress reactions are present prior to endoscopic procedures. Dosage of narcotics should be reduced by at least a third and in some cases may be omitted. See Precautions for peroral procedures.

Titrate I.V. dosage to desired sedative response, such as slurring of speech, with slow administration immediately prior to the procedure. Generally 10 mg or less is adequate, but up to 20 mg I.V. may be given, particularly when concomitant narcotics are omitted. If I.V. cannot be used, 5 mg to 10 mg I.M. approximately 30 minutes prior to the procedure.

Muscle Spasm: Associated with local pathology, cerebral palsy, athetosis, stiff-man syndrome or tetanus.

5 mg to 10 mg, I.M. or I.V. initially, then 5 mg to 10 mg in 3 to 4 hours, if necessary. For tetanus, larger doses may be required.

For tetanus in infants over 30 days of age, 1 mg to 2 mg I.M. or I.V., slowly, repeated every 3 to 4 hours as necessary. In children 5 years or older, 5 mg to 10 mg repeated every 3 to 4 hours may be required to control tetanus spasms. Respiratory assistance should be available.

Status Epilepticus and Severe Recurrent Convulsive Seizures: In the convulsing patient, the I.V. route is by far preferred. This injection should be administered slowly. However, if I.V. administration is impossible, the I.M. route may be used.

5 mg to 10 mg initially (I.V. preferred). This injection may be repeated if necessary at 10 to 15 minute intervals up to a maximum dose of 30 mg.

If necessary, therapy with diazepam may be repeated in 2 to 4 hours; however, residual active metabolites may persist, and readministration should be made with this consideration.

Extreme caution must be exercised with individuals with chronic lung disease or unstable cardiovascular status.

Infants over 30 days of age and children under 5 years, 0.2 mg to 0.5 mg slowly every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 5 mg (I.V. preferred). Children 5 years or older, 1 mg every 2 to 5 minutes up to a maximum of 10 mg (slow I.V. administration preferred). Repeat in 2 to 4 hours if necessary. EEG monitoring of the seizure may be helpful.

Preoperative Medication: To relieve anxiety and tension. (If atropine, scopolamine or other premedications are desired, they must be administered in separate syringes.)

10 mg, I.M. (preferred route), before surgery.

Cardioversion: To relieve anxiety and tension and to reduce recall of procedure.

5 mg to 15 mg, I.V., within 5 to 10 minutes prior to the procedure.

MANAGEMENT OF OVERDOSAGE

Manifestations of diazepam overdosage include somnolence, confusion, coma, and diminished reflexes. Respiration, pulse and blood pressure should be monitored, as in all cases of drug overdosage, although, in general, these effects have been minimal. General supportive measures should be employed, along with intravenous fluids, and an adequate airway maintained. Hypotension may be combated by the use of norepinephrine or metaraminol. Dialysis is of limited value.

Flumazenil, a specific benzodiazepine receptor antagonist, is indicated for the complete or partial reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines and may be used in situations when an overdose with a benzodiazepine is known or suspected. Prior to the administration of flumazenil, necessary measures should be instituted to secure airway, ventilation, and intravenous access. Flumazenil is intended as an adjunct to, not as a substitute for, proper management of benzodiazepine overdose. Patients treated with flumazenil should be monitored for re-sedation, respiratory depression, and other residual benzodiazepine effects for an appropriate period after treatment. The prescriber should be aware of a risk of seizure in association with flumazenil treatment, particularly in long-term benzodiazepine users and in cyclic antidepressant overdose. The complete flumazenil package insert including CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS should be consulted prior to use.
Magnesium Sulfate

Magnesium Sulfate

Dosage of magnesium sulfate must be carefully adjusted according to individual requirements and response, and administration of the drug should be discontinued as soon as the desired effect is obtained.

Both intravenous and intramuscular administration are appropriate. Intramuscular administration of the undiluted 50% solution results in therapeutic plasma levels in 60 minutes, whereas I.V. doses will provide a therapeutic level almost immediately. The rate of I.V. injection should generally not exceed 150 mg/minute (1.5 mL of a 10% concentration or its equivalent), except in severe eclampsia with seizures (see below). Continuous maternal administration of magnesium sulfate in pregnancy beyond 5 to 7 days can cause fetal abnormalities.

Solutions for intravenous infusion must be diluted to a concentration of 20% or less prior to administration. The diluents commonly used are 5% Dextrose Injection, USP and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Deep intramuscular injection of the undiluted (50%) solution is appropriate for adults, but the solution should be diluted to a 20% or less concentration prior to such injection in children.

In Magnesium Deficiency

In the treatment of mild magnesium deficiency, the usual adult dose is 1 g, equivalent to 8.12 mEq of magnesium (2 mL of the 50% solution) injected intramuscularly every six hours for four doses (equivalent to a total of 32.5 mEq of magnesium per 24 hours). For severe hypomagnesemia, as much as 250 mg (approximately 2 mEq) per kg of body weight (0.5 mL of the 50% solution) may be given intramuscularly within a period of four hours if necessary. Alternatively, 5 g, (approximately 40 mEq) can be added to one liter of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP for slow intravenous infusion over a three-hour period. In the treatment of deficiency states, caution must be observed to prevent exceeding the renal excretory capacity.

In Hyperalimentation

In total parenteral nutrition, maintenance requirements for magnesium are not precisely known. The maintenance dose used in adults ranges from 8 to 24 mEq (1 to 3 g) daily; for infants, the range is 2 to 10 mEq (0.25 to 1.25 g) daily.

In Pre-eclampsia or Eclampsia

In severe pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, the total initial dose is 10 to 14 g of magnesium sulfate. Intravenously, a dose of 4 to 5 g in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP may be infused. Simultaneously, intramuscular doses of up to 10 g (5 g or 10 mL of the undiluted 50% solution in each buttock) are given. Alternatively, the initial intravenous dose of 4 g may be given by diluting the 50% solution to a 10 or 20% concentration; the diluted fluid (40 mL of a 10% solution or 20 mL of a 20% solution) may then be injected intravenously over a period of three to four minutes. Subsequently, 4 to 5 g (8 to 10 mL of the 50% solution) are injected intramuscularly into alternate buttocks every four hours as needed, depending on the continuing presence of the patellar reflex and adequate respiratory function. Alternatively, after the initial I.V. dose, some clinicians administer 1 to 2 g/hour by constant I.V. infusion. Therapy should continue until paroxysms cease. A serum magnesium level of 6 mg/100 mL is considered optimal for control of seizures. A total daily (24 hr) dose of 30 to 40 g should not be exceeded. In the presence of severe renal insufficiency, the maximum dosage of magnesium sulfate is 20 grams/48 hours and frequent serum magnesium concentrations must be obtained. Continuous use of magnesium sulfate in pregnancy beyond 5 to 7 days can cause fetal abnormalities.

Other Uses

In counteracting the muscle-stimulating effects of barium poisoning, the usual dose of magnesium sulfate is 1 to 2 g given I.V.

For controlling seizures associated with epilepsy, glomerulonephritis or hypothyroidism, the usual adult dose is 1 g administered I.M. or I.V.

In paroxysmal atrial tachycardia, magnesium should be used only if simpler measures have failed and there is no evidence of myocardial damage. The usual dose is 3 to 4 g (30 to 40 mL of a 10% solution) administered I.V. over 30 seconds with extreme caution.

For reduction of cerebral edema, 2.5 g (25 mL of a 10% solution) is given I.V.

Incompatibilities

Magnesium sulfate in solution may result in a precipitate formation when mixed with solutions containing:

Alcohol (in high Heavy Metals concentrations) Hydrocortisone sodium Alkali carbonates and succinate bicarbonates Phosphates Alkali hydroxides Polymixin B sulfate Arsenates Procaine hydrochloride Barium Salicylates Calcium Strontium Clindamycin phosphate Tartrates

The potential incompatibility will often be influenced by the changes in the concentration of reactants and the pH of the solutions.

It has been reported that magnesium may reduce the antibiotic activity of streptomycin, tetracycline and tobramycin when given together.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Risperidone Solution

Risperidone Solution

Voluven® is administered by intravenous infusion only. The daily dose and rate of infusion depend on the patient’s blood loss, on the maintenance or restoration of hemodynamics and on the hemodilution (dilution effect). Voluven® can be administered repetitively over several days. [see Warnings and Precautions (5)]

The initial 10 to 20 mL should be infused slowly, keeping the patient under close observation due to possible anaphylactoid reactions. [see General Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]

2.1 Adult Dose

Up to 50 mL of Voluven® per kg of body weight per day (equivalent to 3 g hydroxyethyl starch and 7.7 mEq sodium per kg of body weight). This dose is equivalent to 3500 mL of Voluven® for a 70 kg patient.

2.2 Pediatric Dose

The dosage in children should be adapted to the individual patient colloid needs, taking into account the disease state, as well as the hemodynamic and hydration status.

In 41 newborns to infants (< 2 years), a mean dose of 16 ± 9 mL/kg was administered. In 31 children from 2 to 12 years of age a mean dose of 36 ± 11 mL/kg was administered. The dose in adolescents > 12 is the same as the adult dose. [see Pediatric Use (8.4)]

2.3 Directions for Use of Voluven

Do not remove the freeflex ® IV container from its overwrap until immediately before use. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless the solution is clear, free from particles and the freeflex® IV container is undamaged. Voluven® should be used immediately after insertion of the administration set. Do not vent. If administered by pressure infusion, air should be withdrawn or expelled from the bag through the medication/administration port prior to infusion. Discontinue the infusion if an adverse reaction occurs. It is recommended that administration sets be changed at least once every 24 hours. For single use only. Discard unused portion.
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

The addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection to intravenous infusion is not recommended due to the lack of solubility and resultant precipitation.

Not to exceed 50 mg per minute, intravenously in adults, and not exceeding 1─3 mg/kg/min in neonates. There is a relatively small margin between full therapeutic effect and minimally toxic doses of this drug.

The solution is suitable for use as long as it remains free of haziness and precipitate. Upon refrigeration or freezing, a precipitate might form; this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. Only a clear solution should be used. A faint yellow coloration may develop; however, this has no effect on the potency of the solution.

In the treatment of status epilepticus, the intravenous route is preferred because of the delay in absorption of phenytoin when administered intramuscularly.

Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin.

Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

Status Epilepticus: In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70kg patient). The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6─8 hours.

Recent work in neonates and pediatric patients has shown that absorption of phenytoin is unreliable after oral administration, but a loading dose of 15─20 mg/kg of phenytoin intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10─20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1─3 mg/kg/min.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be injected slowly and directly into a large vein through a large-gauge needle or intravenous catheter. Each injection of intravenous phenytoin should be followed by an injection of sterile saline through the same needle or catheter to avoid local venous irritation due to alkalinity of the solution. Continuous infusion should be avoided; the addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection to intravenous infusion fluids is not recommended because of the likelihood of precipitation.

Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression. Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage.

Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous short-acting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of Phenytoin Sodium Injection.

If administration of phenytoin does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia and other appropriate measures should be considered.

Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours.

Neurosurgery: Prophylactic dosage─100 to 200 mg (2 to 4 mL) intramuscularly at approximately 4-hour intervals during surgery and continued during the postoperative period. When intramuscular administration is required for a patient previously stabilized orally, compensating dosage adjustments are necessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites.

If the patient requires more than a week of IM phenytoin, alternative routes should be explored, such as gastric intubation. For time periods less than one week, the patient shifted back from IM administration should receive one half the original oral dose for the same period of time the patient received IM phenytoin. Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

FOR INTRAVENOUS USE ONLY. VERAPAMIL HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION SHOULD BE GIVEN AS A SLOW INTRAVENOUS INJECTION OVER AT LEAST A TWO-MINUTE PERIOD OF TIME UNDER CONTINUOUS ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHIC (ECG) AND BLOOD PRESSURE MONITORING. The recommended intravenous doses of verapamil hydrochloride injection are as follows:

Adult:

Initial dose − 5 to 10 mg (0.075 to 0.15 mg/kg body weight) given as an intravenous bolus over at least 2 minutes.

Repeat dose − 10 mg (0.15 mg/kg body weight) 30 minutes after the first dose if the initial response is not adequate. An optimal interval for subsequent I.V. doses has not been determined, and should be individualized for each patient.

Older patients − The dose should be administered over at least 3 minutes to minimize the risk of untoward drug effects.

Pediatric:

Initial dose:

0 to 1 year: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 0.75 to 2 mg) should be administered as an intravenous bolus over at least 2 minutes under continuous ECG monitoring.

1 to 15 years: 0.1 to 0.3 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 2 to 5 mg) should be administered as an intravenous bolus over at least 2 minutes. Do not exceed 5 mg.

Repeat dose:

0 to 1 year: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 0.75 to 2 mg) 30 minutes after the first dose if the initial response is not adequate (under continuous ECG monitoring). An optimal interval for subsequent I.V. doses has not been determined, and should be individualized for each patient.

1 to 15 years: 0.1 to 0.3 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 2 to 5 mg) 30 minutes after the first dose if the initial response is not adequate. Do not exceed 10 mg as a single dose. An optimal interval for subsequent I.V. doses has not been determined, and should be individualized for each patient.

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Use only if solution is clear and vial seal is intact. Unused amount of solution should be discarded immediately following withdrawal of any portion of contents.

For stability reasons this product is not recommended for dilution with Sodium Lactate Injection, USP in polyvinyl chloride bags. Verapamil is physically compatible and chemically stable for at least 24 hours at 25°C protected from light in most common large volume parenteral solutions. Admixing verapamil hydrochloride injection with albumin, amphotericin B, hydralazine hydrochloride and trimethoprim with sulfamethoxazole should be avoided. Verapamil hydrochloride injection will precipitate in any solution with a pH above 6.0.
Dobutamine Hydrochlorid...

Dobutamine Hydrochloride

Note − Do not add Dobutamine Injection, USP to 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection or to any other strongly alkaline solution. Because of potential physical incompatibilities, it is recommended that dobutamine hydrochloride not be mixed with other drugs in the same solution. Dobutamine hydrochloride should not be used in conjunction with other agents or diluents containing both sodium bisulfite and ethanol.

Preparation and Stability − At the time of administration, Dobutamine Injection, USP must be further diluted in an I.V. container to at least a 50 mL solution using one of the following intravenous solutions as a diluent: 5% Dextrose Injection, USP; 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 10% Dextrose Injection, USP; Isolyte® M with 5% Dextrose Injection; Lactated Ringer's Injection; 5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection; Normosol®-M in D5-W; 20% Osmitrol® in Water for Injection; 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or Sodium Lactate Injection, USP. Intravenous solutions should be used within 24 hours.

Recommended Dosage − The rate of infusion needed to increase cardiac output usually ranged from 2.5 to 15 mcg/kg/min (see Table 1). On rare occasions, infusion rates up to 40 mcg/kg/min have been required to obtain the desired effect.
Table 1 Dobutamine Infusion Rate (mL/kg/min) for Concentrations of 250, 500, and 1,000 mcg/mL
Drug Delivery Rate

Infusion Delivery Rate

250 mcg/mL*

500 mcg/mL†

1,000 mcg/mL‡
(mL/kg/min) (mL/kg/min) (mL/kg/min) (mL/kg/min)
2.5

0.01

0.005

0.0025

5

0.02

0.01

0.005

7.5

0.03

0.015

0.0075

10

0.04

0.02

0.01

12.5

0.05

0.025

0.0125

15

0.06

0.03

0.015
* 250 mcg/mL of diluent † 500 mcg/mL or 250 mg/500 mL of diluent ‡ 1,000 mcg/mL or 250 mg/250 mL of diluent
Rates of infusion in mL/h for Dobutamine concentrations of 500 mcg/mL, 1,000 mcg/mL, and 2,000 mcg/mL are given in Table 2.
Table 2
Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

Dobutamine Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 500 mcg/mL concentration

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

2.5

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

5

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

7.5

27

36

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

10

36

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

12.5

45

60

75

90

105

120

135

150

165

15

54

72

90

108

126

144

162

180

198

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

Dobutamine Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 1,000 mcg/mL concentration

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

2.5

4.5

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

16.5

5

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

7.5

13.5

18

22.5

27

31.5

36

40.5

45

49.5

10

18

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

66

12.5

22.5

30

37.5

45

52.5

60

67.5

75

82.5

15

27

36

45

54

63

72

81

90

99

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

Dobutamine Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 2000 mcg/mL concentration

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

2.5

2

3

4

4.5

5

6

7

7.5

8

5

4.5

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

16.5

7.5

7

9

11

13.5

16

18

20

22.5

25

10

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

12.5

11

15

19

22.5

26

30

34

37.5

41

15

13.5

18

22.5

27

31.5

36

40.5

45

49.5

The rate of administration and the duration of therapy should be adjusted according to the patient's response as determined by heart rate, presence of ectopic activity, blood pressure, urine flow, and, whenever possible, measurement of central venous or pulmonary wedge pressure and cardiac output.

Concentrations of up to 5,000 mcg/mL have been administered to humans (250 mg/50 mL). The final volume administered should be determined by the fluid requirements of the patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Quelicin

Quelicin

The dosage of succinylcholine should be individualized and should always be determined by the clinician after careful assessment of the patient (see WARNINGS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear and colorless should not be used.

Adults:

For Short Surgical Procedures: The average dose required to produce neuromuscular blockade and to facilitate tracheal intubation is 0.6 mg/kg Quelicin (succinylcholine chloride) Injection given intravenously. The optimum dose will vary among individuals and may be from 0.3 to 1.1 mg/kg for adults. Following administration of doses in this range, neuromuscular blockade develops in about 1 minute; maximum blockade may persist for about 2 minutes, after which recovery takes place within 4 to 6 minutes. However, very large doses may result in more prolonged blockade. A 5 to 10 mg test dose may be used to determine the sensitivity of the patient and the individual recovery time (see PRECAUTIONS).

For Long Surgical Procedures: The dose of succinylcholine administered by infusion depends upon the duration of the surgical procedure and the need for muscle relaxation. The average rate for an adult ranges between 2.5 and 4.3 mg per minute.

Solutions containing from 1 to 2 mg per mL succinylcholine have commonly been used for continuous infusion. The more dilute solution (1 mg per mL) is probably preferable from the standpoint of ease of control of the rate of administration of the drug and, hence, of relaxation. This intravenous solution containing 1 mg per mL may be administered at a rate of 0.5 mg (0.5 mL) to 10 mg (10 mL) per minute to obtain the required amount of relaxation. The amount required per minute will depend upon the individual response as well as the degree of relaxation required. Avoid overburdening the circulation with a large volume of fluid. It is recommended that neuromuscular function be carefully monitored with a peripheral nerve stimulator when using succinylcholine by infusion in order to avoid overdose, detect development of Phase II block, follow its rate of recovery, and assess the effects of reversing agents (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intermittent intravenous injections of succinylcholine may also be used to provide muscle relaxation for long procedures. An intravenous injection of 0.3 to 1.1 mg/kg may be given initially, followed, at appropriate intervals, by further injections of 0.04 to 0.07 mg/kg to maintain the degree of relaxation required.

Pediatrics:

For emergency tracheal intubation or in instances where immediate securing of the airway is necessary, the intravenous dose of succinylcholine is 2 mg/kg for infants and small pediatric patients; for older pediatric patients and adolescents the dose is 1 mg/kg (see BOX WARNING and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). It is currently known that the effective dose of succinylcholine in pediatric patients may be higher than that predicted by body weight dosing alone. For example, the usual adult IV dose of 0.6 mg/kg is comparable to a dose of 2-3 mg/kg in neonates and infants to 6 months and 1-2 mg/kg in infants up to 2 years of age. This is thought to be due to the relatively large volume of distribution in the pediatric patient versus the adult patient.

Rarely, I.V. bolus administration of succinylcholine in infants and pediatric patients may result in malignant ventricular arrythmias and cardiac arrest secondary to acute rhabdomyolysis with hyperkalemia. In such situations, an underlying myopathy should be suspected.

Intravenous bolus administration of succinylcholine in infants or pediatric patients may result in profound bradycardia or, rarely, asystole. As in adults, the incidence of bradycardia in pediatric patients is higher following a second dose of succinylcholine. Whereas bradycardia is common in pediatric patients after an initial dose of 1.5 mg/kg, bradycardia is seen in adults only after repeated exposure. The occurrence of bradyarrhythmias may be reduced by pretreatment with atropine (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Intramuscular Use: If necessary, succinylcholine may be given intramuscularly to infants, older pediatric patients or adults when a suitable vein is inaccessible. A dose of up to 3 to 4 mg/kg may be given, but not more than 150 mg total dose should be administered by this route. The onset of effect of succinylcholine given intramuscularly is usually observed in about 2 to 3 minutes.

Compatibility and Admixtures: Succinylcholine is acidic (pH 3.5) and should not be mixed with alkaline solutions having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions). Admixtures containing 1 to 2 mg/mL may be prepared by adding 1 g Quelicin to 1000 or 500 mL sterile solution, such as 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Admixtures of Quelicin must be used within 24 hours after preparation. Aseptic techniques should be used to prepare the diluted product. Admixtures of Quelicin should be prepared for single patient use only. The unused portion of diluted Quelicin should be discarded.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Doxycycline

Doxycycline

As with all local anesthetics, the dose varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dose needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. For specific techniques and procedures refer to standard dental manuals and textbooks. For infiltration and block injections in the upper or lower jaw, the average dose of 1 cartridge will usually suffice. Each cartridge contains 1.8 mL (54 mg of 3% solution). Five cartridges (270 mg of the 3% solution) are usually adequate to effect anesthesia of the entire oral cavity. Whenever a larger dose seems to be necessary for an extensive procedure, the maximum dose should be calculated according to the patient’s weight. A dose of up to 3 mg per pound of body weight may be administered. At any single dental sitting the total dose for all injected sites should not exceed 400 mg in adults.

The maximum pediatric dose should be carefully calculated.

Maximum Dose for Pediatric Patient =

Pediatric Patient’s Weight (lbs) X Maximum Recommended Dose 150 for Adults (400 mg)

The following table, approximating these calculations, may also be used as a guide.

Maximum Allowable Dosage

3% Mepivacaine

(Plain)

3 mg/lb

(270 mg max.)

Weight

(lb.)

Mepivacaine

(mg)

Number of

Cartridges

20

60

1.1

30

90

1.7

40

120

2.2

50

150

2.8

60

180

3.3

80

240

4.4

100

270

5

120

270

5

Adapted from Malamed, Stanley F.: Handbook of medical emergencies in the dental office, ed. 2, St. Louis, 1982.

The C.V. Mosby Co.

When using mepivacaine hydrochloride injection, USP, 3% for infiltration or regional block anesthesia, injection should always be made slowly and with frequent aspiration.

Any unused portion of a cartridge should be discarded.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

DISINFECTION OF CARTRIDGES

As in the case of any cartridge, the diaphragm should be disinfected before needle puncture. The diaphragm should be thoroughly swabbed with either pure 91% isopropyl alcohol or 70% ethyl alcohol, USP, just prior to use. Many commercially available alcohol solutions contain ingredients which are injurious to container components, and therefore should not be used. Cartridges should not be immersed in any solution.
Sodium Lactate

Sodium Lactate

Sodium Lactate Injection, USP 50 mEq (5 mEq/mL) is administered intravenously only after addition to a larger volume of fluid. The amount of sodium ion and lactate ion to be added to larger volume intravenous fluids should be determined in accordance with the electrolyte requirements of each individual patient.

All or part of the content(s) of one (50 mEq in 10 mL) or more vial containers may be added to other intravenous solutions to provide any desired number of milliequivalents of lactate anion (with the same number of milliequivalents of Na+). The contents of one container (50 mEq in 10 mL) added to 290 mL of a nonelectrolyte solution or of sterile water for injection will provide 300 mL of an approximately isotonic (1/6 molar) concentration of sodium lactate (1.9%), containing 167 mEq/liter each of Na+ and lactate anion.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Acetylcysteine Solution...

Acetylcysteine Solution

General

Acetylcysteine Solution 10% and 20% is available in glass vials containing 30 mL. The 20% solution may be diluted to a lesser concentration with either Sodium Chloride Inhalation Solution; Sodium Chloride Injection; or Sterile Water for Injection, or Sterile Water for Inhalation. The 10% solution may be used undiluted.

Storage of Opened Vials

This product does not contain an antimicrobial agent, and care must be taken to minimize contamination of the sterile solution. If only a portion of the solution in a vial is used, store the remainder in a refrigerator and use for inhalation only within 96 hours.

Nebulization — Face Mask, Mouth Piece, Tracheostomy

When nebulized into a face mask, mouth piece or tracheostomy, 1 to 10 mL of the 20% solution or 2 to 20 mL of the 10% solution may be given every 2 to 6 hours; the recommended dose for most patients is 3 to 5 mL of the 20% solution or 6 to 10 mL of the 10% solution 3 to 4 times a day.

Nebulization — Tent, Croupette

In special circumstances it may be necessary to nebulize into a tent or Croupette, and this method of use must be individualized to take into account the available equipment and the patient’s particular needs. This form of administration requires very large volumes of the solution, occasionally as much as 300 mL during a single treatment period.

If a tent or Croupette must be used, the recommended dose is the volume of acetylcysteine (using 10% or 20%) that will maintain a very heavy mist in the tent or Croupette for the desired period. Administration for intermittent or continuous prolonged periods, including overnight, may be desirable.

Direct Instillation

When used by direct instillation, 1 to 2 mL of a 10% or 20% solution may be given as often as every hour.

When used for the routine nursing care of patients with tracheostomy, 1 to 2 mL of a 10% to 20% solution may be given every 1 to 4 hours by instillation into the tracheostomy.

Acetylcysteine may be introduced directly into a particular segment of the bronchopulmonary tree by inserting (under local anesthesia and direct vision) a small plastic catheter into the trachea. Two to 5 mL of the 20% solution may then be instilled by means of a syringe connected to the catheter.

Acetylcysteine may also be given through a percutaneous intratracheal catheter. One to 2 mL of the 20% or 2 to 4 mL of the 10% solution every 1 to 4 hours may then be given by a syringe attached to the catheter.

Diagnostic Bronchograms

For diagnostic bronchial studies, 2 or 3 administrations of 1 to 2 mL of the 20% solution or 2 to 4 mL of the 10% solution should be given by nebulization or by instillation intratracheally, prior to the procedure.

Administration of Aerosol

Materials

Acetylcysteine may be administered using conventional nebulizers made of plastic or glass. Certain materials used in nebulization equipment react with acetylcysteine. The most reactive of these are certain metals (notably iron and copper) and rubber. Where material may come into contact with acetylcysteine solution, parts made of the following acceptable materials should be used: glass, plastic, aluminum, anodized aluminum, chromed metal, tantalum, sterling silver, or stainless steel. Silver may become tarnished after exposure, but this is not harmful to the drug action or to the patient.

Nebulizing Gases

Compressed tank gas (air) or an air compressor should be used to provide pressure for nebulizing the solution. Oxygen may also be used but should be used with usual precautions in patients with severe respiratory disease and CO2 retention.

Apparatus

Acetylcysteine is usually administered as fine nebulae, and the nebulizer used should be capable of providing optimal quantities of a suitable range of particle sizes.

Commercially available nebulizers will produce nebulae of acetylcysteine satisfactory for retention in the respiratory tract. Most of the nebulizers tested will supply a high proportion of the drug solution as particles of less than 10 microns in diameter. Mitchell2 has shown that particles less than 10 microns should be retained in the respiratory tract satisfactorily.

Various intermittent positive pressure breathing devices nebulized acetylcysteine with a satisfactory efficiency including: No: 40 De Vilbiss (The De Vilbiss Co., Somerset, Pennsylvania) and the Bennett Twin-Jet Nebulizer (Puritan Bennett Corp., Oak at 13th, Kansas City, Missouri).

The nebulized solution may be inhaled directly from the nebulizer. Nebulizers may also be attached to plastic face masks or plastic mouthpieces. Suitable nebulizers may also be fitted for use with the various intermittent positive pressure breathing (IPPB) machines. The nebulizing equipment should be cleaned immediately after use because the residues may clog the smaller orifices or corrode metal parts.

Hand bulbs are not recommended for routine use for nebulizing acetylcysteine because their output is generally too small. Also, some hand-operated nebulizers deliver particles that are larger than optimum for inhalation therapy.

Acetylcysteine should not be placed directly into the chamber of a heated (hot pot) nebulizer. A heated nebulizer may be part of the nebulization assembly to provide a warm saturated atmosphere if the acetylcysteine aerosol is introduced by means of a separate unheated nebulizer. Usual precautions for administration of warm saturated nebulae should be observed.

The nebulized solution may be breathed directly from the nebulizer. Nebulizers may also be attached to plastic face masks, plastic face tents, plastic mouth pieces, conventional plastic oxygen tents, or head tents. Suitable nebulizers may also be fitted for use with the various intermittent positive pressure breathing (IPPB) machines.

The nebulizing equipment should be cleaned immediately after use, otherwise the residues may occlude the fine orifices or corrode metal parts.

Prolonged Nebulization

When three-fourths of the initial volume of acetylcysteine solution has been nebulized, a quantity of Sterile Water for Injection (approximately equal to the volume of solution remaining), should be added to the nebulizer. This obviates any concentration of the agent in the residual solvent remaining after prolonged nebulization.

Compatibility

The physical and chemical compatibility of acetylcysteine with certain other drugs that might be concomitantly administered by nebulization, direct instillation, or topical application, has been studied.

Acetylcysteine should not be mixed with certain antibiotics. For example, the antibiotics tetracycline hydrochloride, oxytetracycline hydrochloride, and erythromycin lactobionate were found to be incompatible when mixed in the same solution. These agents may be administered from separate solutions if administration of these agents is desirable.

The supplying of these data should not be interpreted as a recommendation for combining acetylcysteine with other drugs. The table is not presented as positive assurance that no incompatibility will be present, since these data are based only on short-term compatibility studies done in the Mead Johnson Research Center. Manufacturers may change their formulations, and this could alter compatibilities. These data are intended to serve only as a guide for predicting compounding problems.

If it is deemed advisable to prepare an admixture, it should be administered as soon as possible after preparation. Do not store unused mixtures.
1.  The rating, Incompatible, is based on the formation of a precipitate, a change in clarity, immiscibility or a rapid loss of potency of acetylcysteine or the active ingredient of the PRODUCT AND/OR AGENT in the admixture.The rating, Compatible, means that there was no significant physical change in the admixture when compared with a control solution of the PRODUCT AND/OR AGENT, and that there was no predicted chemical incompatibility. All of the admixtures have been tested for short-term chemical compatibility by assaying for the concentration of acetylcysteine after mixing.2.  The active ingredient in the PRODUCT AND/OR AGENT was also assayed after mixing. Some of the admixtures developed minor physical changes which were considered to be insufficient to rate the admixtures incompatible. These are listed in footnotes 3, 4, and 5.3.  A strong odor developed after storage for 24 hours at room temperature.4.  The admixture was a slightly darker shade of yellow than a control solution of the PRODUCT AND/OR AGENT.5.  A light tan color developed after storage for 24 hours at room temperature.6.  Entries are final concentrations. Values in parentheses relate volumes of acetylcysteine solutions to volume of test solutions.
IN VITRO COMPATIBILITY1 TESTS OF ACETYLCYSTEINE

RATIO TESTED6

PRODUCT AND/OR AGENT

COMPATIBILITY

RATING

ACETYL-

CYSTEINE

PRODUCT

OR AGENT

ANESTHETIC, GAS

Halothane

Compatible

20%

Infinite

Nitrous Oxide

Compatible

20%

Infinite

ANESTHETIC, LOCAL

Cocaine HCl

Compatible

10%

5%

Lidocaine HCl

Compatible

10%

2%

Tetracaine HCl

Compatible

10%

1%

ANTIBACTERIALS (A parenteral form of each antibiotic was used)

Bacitracin2.3 (mix and use at once)

Compatible

10%

5,000 U/mL

Chloramonenicol Sodium Succinate

Compatible

20%

20 mg/mL

Carbenicillin Disodium2

   (mix and use at once)

Compatible

10%

125 mg/mL

Gentamicin Sulfate2

Compatible

10%

20 mg/mL

Kanamycin Sulfate2

   (mix and use at once)

Compatible

10%

167 mg/mL

Compatible

17%

85 mg/mL

Lincomycin HCl2

Compatible

10%

150 mg/mL

Neomycin Sulfate2

Compatible

10%

100 mg/mL

Novobiocin Sodium2

Compatible

10%

25 mg/mL

Penicillin G Potassium2

   (mix and use at once)

Compatible

Compatible

10%

10%

25,000 U/mL

100,000 U/mL

Polymyxin B Sulfate2

Compatible

10%

50,000 U/mL

Cephalothin Sodium

Compatible

10%

110 mg/mL

Colistimethate Sodium2

   (mix and use at once)

Compatible

10%

37.5 mg/mL

Vancomycin HCl2

Compatible

10%

25 mg/mL

Amphotercin B

Incompatible

4%-15%

1-4 mg/mL

Chlortetracycline HCl2

Incompatible

10%

12.5 mg/mL

Erythromycin Lactobionate

Incompatible

10%

15 mg/mL

Oxytetracycline HCl

Incompatible

10%

12.5 mL

Ampicillin Sodium

Incompatible

10%

50 mg/mL

Tetracycline HCl

Incompatible

10%

12.5 mg/mL

BRONCHODILATORS

Isoproterenol HCl2

Compatible

3%

0.5%

Isoproterenol HCl2

Compatible

10%

0.05%

Isoproterenol HCl2

Compatible

20%

0.05%

Isoproterenol HCl

Compatible

13.3% (2 parts)

.33% (1 part)

Isoetharine HCl

Compatible

13.3% (2 parts)

(1 part)

Epinephrine HCl

Compatible

13.3% (2 parts)

.33% (1 part)

CONTRAST MEDIA

Iodized Oil

Incompatible

20%/20 mL

40%/10 mL

DECONGESTANTS

Phenylephrine HCl2

Compatible

3%

.25%

Phenylephrine HCl

Compatible

13.3% (2 parts)

.17% (1 part)

ENZYMES

Chymotrypsin

Incompatible

5%

400 γ /mL

Trypsin

Incompatible

5%

400 γ /mL

SOLVENTS

Alcohol

Compatible

12%

10%-20%

Propylene Glycol

Compatible

3%

10%

STEROIDS

Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate

Compatible

16%

0.8 mg/mL

Prednisolone Sodium Phosphate5

Compatible

16.7%

3.3 mg/mL

OTHER AGENTS

Hydrogen Peroxide

Incompatible

(All ratios)

Sodium Bicarbonate

Compatible

20% (1 part)

4.2% (1 part)

Acetylcysteine As An Antidote For Acetaminophen Overdose

General

Regardless of the quantity of acetaminophen reported to have been ingested, administer acetylcysteine immediately if 24 hours or less have elapsed from the reported time of ingestion of an overdose of acetaminophen. Do not await results of assays for acetaminophen level before initiating treatment with acetylcysteine. The following procedures are recommended:
1. The stomach should be emptied promptly by lavage or by inducing emesis with syrup of ipecac. Syrup of ipecac should be given in a dose of 15 mL for children up to age 12, and 30 mL for adolescents and adults followed immediately by drinking copious amounts of water. The dose should be repeated if emesis does not occur in 20 minutes. 2. In the case of a mixed drug overdose activated charcoal may be indicated. However, if activated charcoal has been administered, lavage before administering acetylcysteine treatment. Activated charcoal adsorbs acetylcysteine in vitro and may do so in patients and thereby may reduce its effectiveness. 3. Draw blood for predetoxification acetaminophen plasma assay and for baseline SGOT, SGPT, bilirubin, prothrombin time, creatinine, BUN, blood sugar and electrolytes. 4. Administer the loading dose of acetylcysteine, 140 mg per kg of body weight. (Prepare acetylcysteine for oral administration as described in the Specific Dosage Guide and Preparation table.) 5. Determine subsequent action based on predetoxification plasma acetaminophen information. Choose ONE of the following four courses of therapy. A. Predetoxification plasma acetaminophen level is clearly in the toxic range (See Acetaminophen Assays - Interpretation and Methodology below): Administer a first maintenance dose (70 mg/kg acetylcysteine) 4 hours after the loading dose. The maintenence dose is then repeated at 4-hour intervals for a total of 17 doses. Monitor hepatic and renal function and electrolytes throughout the detoxification process. B. Predetoxification acetaminophen level could not be obtained: Proceed as in A. C. Predetoxification acetaminophen level is clearly in the nontoxic range (beneath the dashed line on the nomogram) and you know that acetaminophen overdose occured at least 4 hours before the predetoxification acetaminophen plasma assays: Discontinue administration of acetylcysteine. D. Predetoxification acetaminophen level was in the non-toxic range, but time of ingestion was unknown or less than 4 hours. Because the level of acetaminophen at the time of the predetoxification assay may not be a peak value (peak may not be achieved before 4 hours post-ingestion), obtain a second plasma level in order to decide whether or not the full 17-dose detoxification treatment is necessary. 6. If the patient vomits any oral dose within 1 hour of administration, repeat that dose. 7. In the occasional instances where the patient is persistently unable to retain the orally administered acetylcysteine, the antidote may be administered by duodenal intubation. 8. Repeat SGOT, SGPT, bilirubin, prothrombin time, creatinine, BUN, blood sugar and electrolytes daily if the acetaminophen plasma level is in the potentially toxic range as discussed below.
Preparation of Acetylcysteine For Oral Administration — Oral administration requires dilution of the 20% solution with diet cola, or other diet soft drinks, to a final concentration of 5% (see Dosage Guide and Preparation table). If administered via gastric tube or Miller-Abbott tube, water may be used as the diluent. The dilutions should be freshly prepared and utilized within one hour. Remaining undiluted solutions in opened vials can be stored in the refrigerator up to 96 hours.

ACETYLCYSTEINE IS NOT APPROVED FOR PARENTERAL INJECTION.

Acetaminophen Assays — Interpretation and Methodology: The acute ingestion of acetaminophen in quantities of 150 mg/kg or greater may result in hepatic toxicity. However, the reported history of the quantity of a drug ingested as an overdose is often inaccurate and is not a reliable guide to therapy of the overdose. THEREFORE, PLASMA OR SERUM ACETAMINOPHEN CONCENTRATIONS, DETERMINED AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE, BUT NO SOONER THAN FOUR HOURS FOLLOWING AN ACUTE OVERDOSE, ARE ESSENTIAL IN ASSESSING THE POTENTIAL RISK OF HEPATOTOXICITY. IF AN ASSAY FOR ACETAMINOPHEN CANNOT BE OBTAINED, IT IS NECESSARY TO ASSUME THAT THE OVERDOSE IS POTENTIALLY TOXIC.

Interpretation of Acetaminophen Assays:
1. When results of the plasma acetaminophen assay are available refer to the nomogram below to determine if plasma concentration is in the potentially toxic range. Values above the solid line connecting 200 mcg/mL at 4 hours with 50 mcg/mL at 12 hours are associated with a possibility of hepatic toxicity if an antidote is not administered. (Do not wait for assay results to begin acetylcysteine treatment.) 2. If the predetoxification plasma level is above the broken line continue with maintenance doses of acetylcysteine. It is better to err on the safe side and thus the broken line is placed 25% below the solid line which defines possible toxicity. 3. If the predetoxification plasma level is below the broken line described above, there is minimal risk of hepatic toxicity and acetylcysteine treatment can be discontinued.
Acetaminophen Assay Methodology:

Assay procedures most suitable for determining acetaminophen concentrations utilize high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) or gas liquid chromatography (GLC). The assay should measure only parent acetaminophen and not conjugated. The assay procedures listed below fulfill this requirement:

Selected techniques (non-inclusive)

HPLC:

1. Blair, D and Rumack, BH, Clin Chem. 1977; 23(4):743−745.2. Howie, D, Andriaenssens, Pl, Prescott, LF. J Pharm Pharmacol 1977; 29(4):235−237.

GLC:

3. Prescott, LF. J Pharm Pharmacol 1971; 23(10);807−808.

Colorimetric:

4. Glynn, JP and Kendal, SE. Lancet 1975; 1(May 17):1147-1148.

SUPPORTIVE TREATMENT OF ACETAMINOPHEN OVERDOSE
1. Maintain fluid and electrolyte balance based on clinical evaluation of state of hydration and serum electrolytes. 2. Treat as necessary for hypoglycemia. 3. Administer vitamin K 1 if prothrombin time ratio exceeds 1.5 or fresh frozen plasma if the prothrombin time ratio exceeds 3.0. 4. Diuretics and forced diuresis should be avoided (See table on preceding page). DOSAGE GUIDE AND PREPARATION **If patient weighs less than 20 kg (usually patients younger than 6 years), calculate the doses of Acetylcysteine Solution. Each mL of 20% Acetylcysteine Solution, contains 200 mg of acetylcysteine. The loading dose is 140 mg per kilogram of body weight. The maintenance dose is 70 mg/kg. Three (3) mL of diluent are added to each mL of 20% Acetylcysteine Solution. Do not decrease the proportion of diluent.
Doses in relation to body weight are:

Loading Dose of Acetylcysteine**

Grams

mL of 20%

mL of

Total mL of

Body Weight

Acetylcysteine

Acetylcysteine

Diluent

5% Solution

      (kg)

   (lb)

100−109

220 −240

15

75

225

300

90 − 99

198 −218

14

70

210

280

80 − 89

176 −196

13

65

195

260

70 − 79

154 −174

11

55

165

220

60 − 69

132 −152

10

50

150

200

50 − 59

110 −130

8

40

120

160

40 − 49

88 −108

7

35

105

140

30 − 39

66 − 86

6

30

90

120

20 − 29

44 − 64

4

20

60

80

Maintenance Dose**

(kg)

(lb)

100−109

220 −240

7.5

37

113

150

90 − 99

198 −218

7

35

105

140

80 − 89

176 −196

6.5

33

97

130

70 − 79

154 −174

5.5

28

82

110

60 − 69

132 −152

5

25

75

100

50 − 59

110 −130

4

20

60

80

40 − 49

88 −108

3.5

18

52

70

30 − 39

66 − 86

3

15

45

60

20 − 29

44 − 64

2

10

30

40

Estimating Potential for Hepatotoxicity:

The following nomogram has been developed to estimate the probability that plasma levels in relation to intervals post ingestion will result in hepatotoxicity.

Adapted from Rumack and Matthews, Pediatrics 1975; 55:871−876.
Zinc

Zinc

Zinc 1 mg/mL (Zinc Chloride Injection, USP) contains 1 mg zinc/mL and is administered intravenously only after dilution. The additive should be diluted prior to administration in a volume of fluid not less than 100 mL. For the metabolically stable adult receiving TPN, the suggested intravenous dosage is 2.5 to 4 mg zinc/day (2.5 to 4 mL/day). An additional 2 mg zinc/day (2 mL/day) is suggested for acute catabolic states. For the stable adult with fluid loss from the small bowel, an additional 12.2 mg zinc/liter of small bowel fluid lost (12.2 mL/liter of small bowel fluid lost), or an additional 17.1 mg zinc/kg of stool or ileostomy output (17.1 mL/kg of stool or ileostomy output) is recommended. Frequent monitoring of zinc blood levels is suggested for patients receiving more than the usual maintenance dosage level of zinc.

For full term infants and children up to 5 years of age, 100 mcg zinc/kg/day (0.1 mL/kg/day) is recommended. For premature infants (birth weight less than 1500 g) up to 3 kg in body weight, 300 mcg zinc/kg/day (0.3 mL/kg/day) is suggested.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Heparin Sodium And Dext...

Heparin Sodium And Dextrose

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and these premixed formulations should be given by intermittent intravenous injection or intravenous infusion.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits, and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral AnticoagulantWhen an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be started in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last IV bolus. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
Method of Administration     Frequency Recommended Dose*
Intermittent Intravenous Injection

Initial Dose

10,000 Units, either undiluted or in 50 – 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection

Every 4 to 6 hours

5,000 – 10,000 Units, either undiluted or in 50 – 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection

Continuous Intravenous Infusion

Initial Dose
5,000 Units by IV injection
Continuous

20,000 – 40,000 Units/24 hours in 1000 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection

* Based on 150 lb. (68 kg) patient.

Pediatric UseThere are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:

Initial Dose

75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes)

Maintenance Dose

Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour;      Infants <2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour) Children >1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour;      Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage

Monitoring

Adjust heparin to maintain aPTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70.

Geriatric UsePatients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin (see PRECAUTIONS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless the solution is clear and container is undamaged.

Discard unused portion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To OpenTear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container.

Preparation for Administration(Use aseptic technique)
Close flow control clamp of administration set. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: When using a vented administration set, replace bacterial retentive air filter with piercing pin cover. Insert piercing pin with twisting motion until shoulder of air filter housing rests against the outlet port flange. Suspend container from hanger. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. Open clamp to expel air from set. Close clamp. Perform venipuncture and attach set to venipuncture device. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
           WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and these premixed formulations should be given by intermittent intravenous injection or intravenous infusion.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits, and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral Anticoagulant

When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last IV bolus. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:

Method of Administration

Frequency

Recommended Dose*

Intermittent Intravenous Injection

Initial Dose

10,000 Units, either undiluted or in 50 – 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection

Every 4 to 6 hours

5,000 – 10,000 Units, either undiluted or in 50 – 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection

Continuous Intravenous Infusion

Initial Dose

5,000 Units by IV injection

Continuous

20,000 – 40,000 Units/24 hours in 1000 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection

* Based on 150 lb. (68 kg) patient.

Pediatric Use

There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:

Initial Dose: 75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes)

Maintenance Dose Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour;

Infants < 2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour)

Children > 1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour;

Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage

Monitoring: Adjust heparin to maintain aPTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70.

Geriatric Use

Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin. (See PRECAUTIONS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless the solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and these premixed formulations should be given by intermittent intravenous injection or intravenous infusion.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times the normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral Anticoagulant: When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect with Full-Dose Heparin

Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:

Method of Administration

Frequency

Recommended Dose*

Intermittent Intravenous Injection

Initial Dose

10,000 Units, either undiluted or in 50 – 100 mL of 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Every 4 to 6 hours

5,000 – 10,000 Units, either undiluted or in 50 – 100 mL of 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Continuous Intravenous Infusion

Initial Dose

5,000 Units by IV injection

Continuous

20,000 – 40,000 Units/24 hours in 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

* Based on 150 lb. (68 kg) patient.

Pediatric Use: There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:

Initial Dose 75 to 100 units/kg (IV bolus over 10 minutes)

Maintenance Dose Infants: 25 to 30 units/kg/hour;

Infants < 2 months have the highest requirements (average 28 units/kg/hour)

Children > 1 year of age: 18 to 20 units/kg/hour;

Older children may require less heparin, similar to weight-adjusted adult dosage

Monitoring Adjust heparin to maintain aPTT of 60 to 85 seconds, assuming this reflects an anti-Factor Xa level of 0.35 to 0.70.

Geriatric Use: Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.

Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels: Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units per kilogram is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.

Extracorporeal Dialysis: Follow equipment manufacturer’s operating directions carefully.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Do not administer unless the solution is clear and seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Nadolol

Nadolol

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer.

This parenteral should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Tpn Electrolytes

Tpn Electrolytes

One 20 mL volume of TPN Electrolytes (multiple electrolyte additive) is added to each liter of amino acid/dextrose solution. Alternatively, the TPN Electrolytes can be added to the bottle of amino acids or concentrated dextrose, to permit addition of the necessary phosphate additive to the remaining bottle. This latter technique helps avoid physical incompatibilities between calcium and phosphorus. A potassium phosphate additive is recommended for addition to nutritional solutions containing TPN Electrolytes. Between 10 and 30 mEq of potassium (as phosphate) should be added per liter of TPN solution, to augment the 20 mEq of potassium provided by TPN Electrolytes.

Between two and three liters of TPN solution with added TPN Electrolytes are usually administered daily to adults. Solutions are given continuously over the entire 24-hour period at a constant rate, ranging from 83 to 125 mL/hour. TPN solutions containing TPN Electrolytes and concentrated dextrose are administered intravenously, through a central venous catheter.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium is not effective by oral administration and Heparin Sodium in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection should not be given orally.

This product should be administered by intravenous infusion. Do not use Heparin Sodium in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection as a “catheter lock flush” product.

Note: Small doses of heparin can alter tests for activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT). A baseline value for APTT should be obtained prior to administration of this solution.

Maintenance of Catheter Patency

Although the rate of infusion of the 2 USP units/mL formulation is dependent upon the age, weight, clinical condition of the patient, and the procedure being employed, an infusion rate of 3 mL/hour has been found to be satisfactory.

Geriatric Use

Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin. (see PRECAUTIONS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (see PRECAUTIONS.)
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

14.6% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Additive Solution is administered intravenously only after addition to a larger volume of fluid.

The dose, dilution and rate of injection are dependent upon the individual needs of each patient.

All or part of the contents of one or more additive containers may be added to an intravenous solution container. Concentrations of up to 5% sodium chloride have been administered.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Desmopressin Acetate

Desmopressin Acetate

Hemophilia A and von Willebrand's Disease (Type I): Desmopressin Acetate Injection 4 mcg/mL is administered as an intravenous infusion at a dose of 0.3 mcg desmopressin acetate/kg body weight diluted in sterile physiological saline and infused slowly over 15 to 30 minutes. In adults and children weighing more than 10 kg, 50 mL of diluent is recommended; in children weighing 10 kg or less, 10 mL of diluent is recommended. Blood pressure and pulse should be monitored during infusion. If Desmopressin Acetate Injection 4 mcg/mL is used preoperatively, it should be administered 30 minutes prior to the scheduled procedure.

The necessity for repeat administration of desmopressin acetate or use of any blood products for hemostasis should be determined by laboratory response as well as the clinical condition of the patient. The tendency toward tachyphylaxis (lessening of response) with repeated administration given more frequently than every 48 hours should be considered in treating each patient.

Fluid restriction should be observed. See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and Geriatric Use.

Diabetes Insipidus: This formulation is administered subcutaneously or by direct intravenous injection. Desmopressin Acetate Injection 4 mcg/mL dosage must be determined for each patient and adjusted according to the pattern of response. Response should be estimated by two parameters: adequate duration of sleep and adequate, not excessive, water turnover.

The usual dosage range in adults is 0.5 mL (2 mcg) to 1 mL (4 mcg) daily, administered intravenously or subcutaneously, usually in two divided doses. The morning and evening doses should be separately adjusted for an adequate diurnal rhythm of water turnover. For patients who have been controlled on intranasal desmopressin acetate and who must be switched to the injection form, either because of poor intranasal absorption or because of the need for surgery, the comparable antidiuretic dose of the injection is about one-tenth the intranasal dose.

Fluid restriction should be observed. See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and Geriatric Use.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Geriatric Use: This drug is known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function. See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Human Pharmacokinetics, CONTRAINDICATIONS, and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use.
Aminocaproic Acid

Aminocaproic Acid

Intravenous

Aminocaproic Acid Injection, USP is administered by infusion, utilizing the usual compatible intravenous vehicles (e.g., Sterile Water for Injection, Sodium Chloride for Injection, 5% Dextrose or Ringer’s Injection). Although Sterile Water for Injection is compatible for intravenous injection the resultant solution is hypo-osmolar. RAPID INJECTION OF AMINOCAPROIC ACID INJECTION UNDILUTED INTO A VEIN IS NOT RECOMMENDED.

For the treatment of acute bleeding syndromes due to elevated fibrinolytic activity, it is suggested that 16 to 20 mL (4 to 5 g) of aminocaproic acid in 250 mL of diluent be administered by infusion during the first hour of treatment, followed by a continuing infusion at the rate of 4 mL (1 g) per hour in 50 mL of diluent. This method of treatment would ordinarily be continued for about 8 hours or until the bleeding situation has been controlled.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless the solution is clear and seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate Injection, USP may be given intramuscularly or by intravenous infusion. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. It is desirable to limit the duration of treatment with aminoglycosides to short term.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults: The recommended dosage of gentamicin sulfate for patients with serious infections and normal renal function is 3 mg/kg/day, administered in three equal doses every eight hours (Table 1).

For patients with life-threatening infections, dosages up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in three or four equal doses. The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated (Table 1).

It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations of gentamicin to determine the adequacy and safety of the dosage. When such measurements are feasible, they should be carried out periodically during therapy to assure adequate but not excessive drug levels. For example, the peak concentration (at 30 to 60 minutes after intramuscular injection) is expected to be in the range of 4 to 6 mcg/mL. When monitoring peak concentrations after intramuscular or intravenous administration, dosage should be adjusted so that prolonged levels above 12 mcg/mL are avoided. When monitoring trough concentrations (just prior to the next dose), dosage should be adjusted so that levels above 2 mcg/mL are avoided. Determination of the adequacy of a serum level for a particular patient must take into consideration the susceptibility of the causative organism, the severity of the infection, and the status of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms. In patients with extensive burns, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. In such patients treated with gentamicin, measurement of serum concentrations is recommended as a basis for dosage adjustment.
Table 1 Dosage Schedule Guide For Adults With Normal Renal Function
(Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals)

40 mg/mL

Patient’s

Weight*

Usual Dose

for Serious

Infections

1 mg/kg q8h

(3 mg/kg/day)

Dose for Life-

Threatening

Infections

(Reduce as Soon

as Clinically

Indicated)

1.7 mg/kg q8h**

(5 mg/kg/day)
kg (lb)
mg/

mL/

mg/

mL/

dose

dose

dose

dose

q8h

q8h

40

(88)

40

1

66

1.6

45

(99)

45

1.1

75

1.9

50

(110)

50

1.25

83

2.1

55

(121)

55

1.4

91

2.25

60

(132)

60

1.5

100

2.5

65

(143)

65

1.6

108

2.7

70

(154)

70

1.75

116

2.9

75

(165)

75

1.9

125

3.1

80

(176)

80

2

133

3.3

85

(187)

85

2.1

141

3.5

90

(198)

90

2.25

150

3.75

95

(209)

95

2.4

158

4

100

(220)

100

2.5

166

4.2

* The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass.

** For q6h schedules, dosage should be recalculated.

Children: 6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (2 to 2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours).

Infants and Neonates: 7.5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours).

Premature or Full-Term Neonates One Week of Age or Less: 5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 12 hours).

NOTE: For further information concerning the use of gentamicin in infants and children, see pediatric gentamicin sulfate injection product information.

The usual duration of treatment for all patients is seven to ten days. In difficult and complicated infections, a longer course of therapy may be necessary. In such cases monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is recommended, since toxicity is more apt to occur with treatment extended for more than ten days. Dosage should be reduced if clinically indicated.

For Intravenous Administration

The intravenous administration of gentamicin may be particularly useful for treating patients with bacterial septicemia or those in shock. It may also be the preferred route of administration for some patients with congestive heart failure, hematologic disorders, severe burns, or those with reduced muscle mass. For intermittent intravenous administration in adults, a single-dose of gentamicin sulfate may be diluted in 50 to 200 mL of sterile isotonic saline solution or in a sterile solution of 5% dextrose in water, in infants and children, the volume of diluent should be less. The solution may be infused over a period of one-half to two hours.

The recommended dosage for intravenous and intramuscular administration is identical.

Gentamicin sulfate should not be physically premixed with other drugs, but should be administered separately in accordance with the recommended route of administration and dosage schedule.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Dosage must be adjusted in patients with impaired renal function to assure therapeutically adequate, but not excessive blood levels. Whenever possible, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be monitored. One method of dosage adjustment is to increase the interval between administration of the usual doses. Since the serum creatinine concentration has a high correlation with the serum half-life of gentamicin, this laboratory test may provide guidance for adjustment of the interval between doses. The interval between doses (in hours) may be approximated by multiplying the serum creatinine level (mg/100 mL) by 8. For example, a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 60 mg (1 mg/kg) every 16 hours (2 x 8).

In patients with serious systemic infections and renal impairment, it may be desirable to administer the antibiotic more frequently but in reduced dosage. In such patients, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be measured so that adequate, but not excessive levels result. A peak and trough concentration measured intermittently during therapy will provide optimal guidance for adjusting dosage. After the usual initial dose, a rough guide for determining reduced dosage at eight-hour intervals is to divide the normally recommended dose by the serum creatinine level (Table 2). For example, after an initial dose of 60 mg (1 mg/kg), a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 30 mg every eight hours (60 ÷ 2). It should be noted that the status of renal function may be changing over the course of the infectious process.

It is important to recognize that deteriorating renal function may require a greater reduction in dosage than that specified in the above guidelines for patients with stable renal impairment.
Table 2 Dosage Adjustment Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment
(Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals

After the Usual Initial Dose)

Serum

Creatinine

(mg %)

Approximate

Creatinine

Clearance Rate

(mL/min/1.73M2)

Percent of

Usual Doses

Shown in

Table 1

≤1.0

>100

100

1.1 — 1.3

70 — 100

80

1.4 — 1.6

55 — 70

65

1.7 — 1.9

45 — 55

55

2.0 — 2.2

40 — 45

50

2.3 — 2.5

35 — 40

40

2.6 — 3.0

30 — 35

35

3.1 — 3.5

25 — 30

30

3.6 — 4.0

20 — 25

25

4.1 — 5.1

15 — 20

20

5.2 — 6.6

10 — 15

15

6.7 — 8.0

<10

10

In adults with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis, the amount of gentamicin removed from the blood may vary depending upon several factors including the dialysis method used. An eight-hour hemodialysis may reduce serum concentrations of gentamicin by approximately 50%. The recommended dose at the end of each dialysis period is 1 to 1.7 mg/kg depending upon the severity of infection. In children, a dose of 2 mg/kg may be administered.

The above dosage schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of gentamicin serum levels is not feasible.

A variety of methods are available to measure gentamicin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiologic, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sodium Phosphates

Sodium Phosphates

Sodium Phosphates Injection, USP, 3 mM P/mL is administered intravenously only after dilution and thorough mixing in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum sodium, phosphorus and calcium levels should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of millimoles (mM) of phosphorus.

In patients on total parenteral nutrition, approximately 12 to 15 mM of phosphorus (equivalent to 372 to 465 mg elemental phosphorus) per liter bottle of TPN solution containing 250 g dextrose is usually adequate to maintain normal serum phosphorus, though larger amounts may be required in hypermetabolic states. The amount of sodium and phosphorus which accompanies the addition of sodium phosphate also should be kept in mind, and if necessary, serum sodium levels should be monitored.

The suggested dose of phosphorus for infants receiving TPN is 1.5 to 2 mM P/kg/day.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Manganese

Manganese

Manganese 0.1 mg/mL (Manganese Chloride Injection, USP) contains 0.1 mg manganese/mL and is administered intravenously only after dilution. The additive should be administered in a volume of fluid not less than 100 mL. For the adult receiving TPN, the suggested additive dosage for manganese is 0.15 to 0.8 mg/day (1.5 to 8 mL/day). For pediatric patients, a dosage of 2 to 10 mcg manganese/kg/day (0.02 to 0.1 mL/kg/day) is recommended.

Periodic monitoring of manganese plasma levels is suggested as a guideline for subsequent administration.

Parenteral products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Copper

Copper

Copper 0.4 mg/mL (Cupric Chloride Injection, USP) contains 0.4 mg copper/mL and is administered intravenously only after dilution. The additive should be diluted in a volume of fluid not less than 100 mL. For the adult receiving TPN, the suggested additive dosage is 0.5 to 1.5 mg copper/day (1.25 to 3.75 mL/day). For pediatric patients, the suggested additive dosage is 20 mcg copper/kg/day (0.05 mL/kg/day). Infants weighing less than 1500 gm may have increased requirements because of their low body reserves and increased requirements for growth.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Dye-free Allergy Relief...

Dye-free Allergy Relief

Adults

The dosage recommendations for Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. represent the quantity of imipenem to be administered. An equivalent amount of cilastatin is also present in the solution. Each 125 mg, 250 mg, or 500 mg dose should be given by intravenous administration over 20 to 30 minutes. Each 750 mg or 1000 mg dose should be infused over 40 to 60 minutes. In patients who develop nausea during the infusion, the rate of infusion may be slowed.

The total daily dosage for Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. should be based on the type or severity of infection and given in equally divided doses based on consideration of degree of susceptibility of the pathogen(s), renal function, and body weight. Adult patients with impaired renal function, as judged by creatinine clearance ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2, require adjustment of dosage as described in the succeeding section of these guidelines.

Intravenous Dosage Schedule for Adults with Normal Renal Function and Body Weight ≥70 kg

Doses cited in Table 3 are based on a patient with normal renal function and a body weight of 70 kg. These doses should be used for a patient with a creatinine clearance of ≥71 mL/min/1.73 m2 and a body weight of ≥70 kg. A reduction in dose must be made for a patient with a creatinine clearance of ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2 and/or a body weight less than 70 kg. (See Tables 4 and 5.)

Dosage regimens in column A of Table 3 are recommended for infections caused by fully susceptible organisms which represent the majority of pathogenic species. Dosage regimens in column B of Table 3 are recommended for infections caused by organisms with moderate susceptibility to imipenem, primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa.
TABLE 3: INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE SCHEDULE FOR ADULTS WITH NORMAL RENAL FUNCTION AND BODY WEIGHT ≥70 kg
Type orSeverityof Infection

AFully susceptible organisms includinggram- positive and gram-negativeaerobes and anaerobes

BModerately susceptibleorganisms, primarily somestrains of P. aeruginosa

Mild

250 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

Moderate

500 mg q8h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1.5g)or500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)or1 g q8h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 3g)

Severe, life   threatening   only

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

1 g q8h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 3g)or1 g q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 4g)

Uncomplicated  urinary tract    infection

250 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

250 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

Complicated  urinary tract   infection

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

500 mg q6h(TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

Due to the high antimicrobial activity of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V., it is recommended that the maximum total daily dosage not exceed 50 mg/kg/day or 4 g/day, whichever is lower. There is no evidence that higher doses provide greater efficacy. However, patients over twelve years of age with cystic fibrosis and normal renal function have been treated with Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. at doses up to 90 mg/kg/day in divided doses, not exceeding 4 g/day.

Reduced Intravenous Schedule for Adults with Impaired Renal Function and/or Body Weight <70 kg

Patients with creatinine clearance of ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2 and/or body weight less than 70 kg require dosage reduction of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. as indicated in the tables below. Creatinine clearance may be calculated from serum creatinine concentration by the following equation:

Tcc (Males) =    (wt. in kg) (140 – age)                           (72) (creatinine in mg/dL)

Tcc (Females) = 0.85 × above value

To determine the dose for adults with impaired renal function and/or reduced body weight:

1. Choose a total daily dose from Table 3 based on infection characteristics.

2. a) If the total daily dose is 1 g, 1.5 g, or 2 g, use the appropriate subsection of Table 4     and continue with step 3.    b) If the total daily dose is 3 g or 4 g, use the appropriate subsection of Table 5 and     continue with step 3.

3. From Table 4 or 5:

    a) Select the body weight on the far left which is closest to the patient's body weight (kg).    b) Select the patient's creatinine clearance category.    c) Where the row and column intersect is the reduced dosage regimen.
TABLE 4: REDUCED INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE OF IMIPENEM AND CILASTATIN FOR INJECTION I.V. IN ADULT PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION AND/OR BODY WEIGHT <70 kg
And

Body

Weight

(kg)

is:

If TOTAL DAILY DOSE from TABLE 3 is:

1 g/day

1.5 g/day

2 g/day

and creatinine clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

≥71

41-70

21-40

6-20

≥71

41-70

21-40

6-20

≥71

41-70

21-40

6-20

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

≥70

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

60

250

q8h

125

q6h

250

q12h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

50

125

q6h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

250

q6h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

40

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

125

q12h

250

q8h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

30

125

q8h

125

q8h

125

q12h

125

q12h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q8h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h
TABLE 5: REDUCED INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE OF IMIPENEM AND CILASTATIN FOR INJECTION I.V. IN ADULT PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION AND/OR BODY WEIGHT <70 kg
And

Body

Weight

(kg)

is:

If TOTAL DAILY DOSE from TABLE 3 is:

3 g/day

4 g/day

and creatinine clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

≥71

41-70

21-40

6-20

≥71

41-70

21-40

6-20

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

≥70

1000

q8h

500

q6h

500

q8h

500

q12h

1000

q6h

750

q8h

500

q6h

500

q12h

60

750

q8h

500

q8h

500

q8h

500

q12h

1000

q8h

750

q8h

500

q8h

500

q12h

50

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

750

q8h

500

q6h

500

q8h

500

q12h

40

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

30

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

Patients with creatinine clearances of 6 to 20 mL/min/1.73 m2 should be treated with Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. 125 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours for most pathogens. There may be an increased risk of seizures when doses of 500 mg every 12 hours are administered to these patients.

Patients with creatinine clearance ≤5 mL/min/1.73 m2 should not receive Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. unless hemodialysis is instituted within 48 hours. There is inadequate information to recommend usage of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. for patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis.

Hemodialysis

When treating patients with creatinine clearances of ≤5 mL/min/1.73 m2 who are undergoing hemodialysis, use the dosage recommendations for patients with creatinine clearances of 6-20 mL/min/1.73 m2. (See Reduced Intravenous Dosage Schedule for Adults with Impaired Renal Function and/or Body Weight <70 kg.) Both imipenem and cilastatin are cleared from the circulation during hemodialysis. The patient should receive Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. after hemodialysis and at 12 hour intervals timed from the end of that hemodialysis session. Dialysis patients, especially those with background CNS disease, should be carefully monitored; for patients on hemodialysis, Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. is recommended only when the benefit outweighs the potential risk of seizures. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Pediatric Patients

See PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients.

For pediatric patients ≥3 months of age, the recommended dose for non-CNS infections is 15-25 mg/kg/dose administered every six hours. Based on studies in adults, the maximum daily dose for treatment of infections with fully susceptible organisms is 2 g per day, and of infections with moderately susceptible organisms (primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa) is 4 g/day. Higher doses (up to 90 mg/kg/day in older children) have been used in patients with cystic fibrosis.

For pediatric patients ≤3 months of age (weighing ≥1,500 g), the following dosage schedule is recommended for non-CNS infections:

<1 wk of age: 25 mg/kg every 12 hrs1-4 wks of age: 25 mg/kg every 8 hrs4 wks-3 mos. of age: 25 mg/kg every 6 hrs.

Doses less than or equal to 500 mg should be given by intravenous infusion over 15 to 30 minutes. Doses greater than 500 mg should be given by intravenous infusion over 40 to 60 minutes.

Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. is not recommended in pediatric patients with CNS infections because of the risk of seizures.

Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection I.V. is not recommended in pediatric patients <30 kg with impaired renal function, as no data are available.
Potassium Phosphates

Potassium Phosphates

Potassium Phosphates Injection, USP 3 mM P/mL is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum potassium, inorganic phosphorus and calcium levels should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of millimoles (mM) of phosphorus.

In adult patients receiving TPN (total parenteral nutrition), a dose of 12 to 15 mM phosphorus is recommended for each 500 mL of 50% Dextrose Injection, USP administered. The amount of potassium which accompanies the addition of phosphorus as potassium phosphate also should be kept in mind and if necessary, serum potassium levels and/or electrocardiographic changes should be monitored.

The suggested dose of phosphorus for infants receiving TPN is 1.5 to 2 mM P/kg/day.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Pancuronium Bromide

Pancuronium Bromide

Pancuronium Bromide Injection is for intravenous use only. This drug should be administered by or under the supervision of experienced clinicians familiar with the use of neuromuscular blocking agents. DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED IN EACH CASE. The dosage information which follows is derived from studies based upon units of drug per unit of body weight and is intended to serve as a guide only. Since potent inhalational anesthetics or prior use of succinylcholine may enhance the intensity and duration of pancuronium bromide (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions), the lower end of the recommended initial dosage range may suffice when pancuronium bromide is first used after intubation with succinylcholine and/or after maintenance doses of volatile liquid inhalational anesthetics are started. To obtain maximum clinical benefits of Pancuronium Bromide Injection and to minimize the possibility of overdosage, the monitoring of muscle twitch response to a peripheral nerve stimulator is advised.

In adults under balanced anesthesia the initial intravenous dosage range is 0.04 to 0.1 mg/kg. Later incremental doses starting at 0.01 mg/kg may be used. These increments slightly increase the magnitude of the blockade and significantly increase the duration of blockade because a significant number of myoneural junctions are still blocked when there is clinical need for more drug.

If Pancuronium Bromide Injection is used to provide skeletal muscle relaxation for endotracheal intubation, a bolus dose of 0.06 to 0.1 mg/kg is recommended. Conditions satisfactory for intubation are usually present within 2 to 3 minutes (see PRECAUTIONS).

Dosage in Children

Dose response studies in children indicate that, with the exception of neonates, dosage requirements are the same as for adults. Neonates are especially sensitive to nondepolarizing neuromuscular blocking agents, such as Pancuronium Bromide Injection, during the first month of life. It is recommended that a test dose of 0.02 mg/kg be given first in this group to measure responsiveness.

Caesarean Section

The dosage to provide relaxation for intubation and operation is the same as for general surgical procedures. The dosage to provide relaxation, following usage of succinylcholine for intubation (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions), is the same as for general surgical procedures.

Compatibility

Pancuronium Bromide Injection is compatible in solution with:

0.9% sodium chloride injection

5% dextrose injection

5% dextrose and sodium chloride injection

Lactated Ringer’s injection

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

When mixed with the above solutions in glass or plastic containers, Pancuronium Bromide Injection will remain stable in solution for 48 hours with no alteration in potency or pH; no decomposition is observed and there is no absorption to either the glass or plastic container.
Chloroprocaine Hydrochl...

Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride

Chloroprocaine may be administered as a single injection or continuously through an indwelling catheter. As with all local anesthetics, the dose administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the vascularity of the tissues, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be used. Dosage should be reduced for children, elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The maximum single recommended doses of chloroprocaine in adults are: without epinephrine, 11 mg/kg, not to exceed a maximum total dose of 800 mg; with epinephrine (1:200,000), 14 mg/kg, not to exceed a maximum total dose of 1000 mg. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Chloroprocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block:

In order to guard against adverse experiences sometimes noted following unintended penetration of the subarachnoid space, the following procedure modifications are recommended:

1. Use an adequate test dose (3 mL of 3% or 5 mL of 2% Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride Injection) prior to induction of complete block. This test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in such a fashion as to have displaced the epidural catheter. Allow adequate time for onset of anesthesia following administration of each test dose. 2. Avoid the rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic injection through the catheter. Consider fractional doses, when feasible. 3. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic injection into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.

As a guide for some routine procedures, suggested doses are given below:

1. Infiltration and Peripheral Nerve Block: Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride Injection

Anesthetic

Procedure

Solution

Concentration

%

Volume

(mL)

Total

Dose

(mg)

Mandibular

2

2 – 3

40 – 60

Infraorbital

2

0.5 – 1

10 – 20

Brachial plexus

2

30 – 40

600 – 800

Digital (without epinephrine)

1

3 – 4

30 – 40

Pudendal

2

10 each side

400

Paracervical

1

3 per each

of 4 sites

up to 120

(see also PRECAUTIONS)

2. Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: For caudal anesthesia, the initial dose is 15 to 25 mL of a 2% or 3% solution. Repeated doses may be given at 40 to 60 minute intervals.

For lumbar epidural anesthesia, 2 to 2.5 mL per segment of a 2% or 3% solution can be used. The usual total volume of Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride Injection is from 15 to 25 mL. Repeated doses 2 to 6 mL less than the original dose may be given at 40 to 50 minute intervals.

The above dosages are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. Maximum dosages of all local anesthetics must be individualized after evaluating the size and physical condition of the patient and the rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site.

Pediatric Dosage:

It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight and should not exceed 11 mg/kg (5 mg/lb). For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs (23 kg), the dose of chloroprocaine HCl without epinephrine would be 250 mg. Concentrations of 0.5 – 1% are suggested for infiltration and 1 – 1.5% for nerve block. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. Some of the lower concentrations for use in infants and smaller children are not available in pre-packaged containers; it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with the amount of 0.9% sodium chloride injection necessary to obtain the required final concentration of chloroprocaine injection.

Preparation of Epinephrine Injections:

To prepare a 1:200,000 epinephrine-chloroprocaine HCl injection, add 0.15 mL of 1 to 1000 Epinephrine Injection to 30 mL of Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride Injection.

Chloroprocaine is incompatible with caustic alkalis and their carbonates, soaps, silver salts, iodine and iodides.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever injection and container permit. As with other anesthetics having a free aromatic amino group, Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride Injection is slightly photosensitive and may become discolored after prolonged exposure to light. It is recommended that this product be stored in the original outer containers, protected from direct sunlight. Discolored injection should not be administered. If exposed to low temperatures, Chloroprocaine Hydrochloride Injection may deposit crystals of chloroprocaine HCl which will redissolve with shaking when returned to room temperature. The product should not be used if it contains undissolved (e.g., particulate) material.
Ammonium Chloride

Ammonium Chloride

Ammonium Chloride Injection, USP is administered intravenously and must be diluted before use. Solutions for intravenous infusion should not exceed a concentration of 1% to 2% of ammonium chloride.

Dosage is dependent upon the condition and tolerance of the patient. It is recommended that the contents of one to two vials (100 to 200 mEq) be added to 500 or 1000 mL of isotonic (0.9%) sodium chloride injection. The rate of intravenous infusion should not exceed 5 mL per minute in adults (approximately 3 hours for infusion of 1000 mL). Dosage should be monitored by repeated serum bicarbonate determinations.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride And Dextrose

Spinal anesthesia with 5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride and 7.5% Dextrose Injection, USP may be induced in the right or left lateral recumbent or the sitting position. Since this is a hyperbaric solution, the anesthetic will tend to move in the direction in which the table is tilted. After the desired level of anesthesia is obtained and the anesthetic has become fixed, usually in 5 to 10 minutes with lidocaine, the patient may be positioned according to the requirement of the surgeon or obstetrician.

In clinical trials, the safety of hyperbaric lidocaine for single injection spinal anesthesia was demonstrated using 22 or 25 gauge spinal needles. In these studies, free flow of CSF was visible before injection of lidocaine.

Neurologic deficits have been reported with the use of small bore needles and microcatheters for spinal anesthesia. It has been postulated, based on in vitro models, that these deficits were caused by pooling and non-uniform distribution of concentrated local anesthetic within the subarachnoid space.1 Animal studies suggest mixing of 5% lidocaine hydrochloride with an equal volume of CSF or preservative-free 0.9% saline solution may reduce the risk of nerve injury due to pooling of concentrated local anesthetic.2 (See PRECAUTIONS).

Intrathecal distribution of anesthetic may be facilitated by using a spinal needle of sufficient gauge to insure adequate withdrawal of CSF through the needle prior to and after anesthetic administration. If the technique is properly placed in the subarachnoid space, a separate injection is seldom necessary.

An incomplete or patchy block not responsive to patient repositioning may indicate misplacement or inadequate distribution of drug. To avoid excessive drug pooling, additional doses of lidocaine should not be administered with the same needle placement.

INJECTIONS SHOULD BE MADE SLOWLY. Consult standard textbooks for specific techniques for spinal anesthetic procedures.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. 5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride and 7.5% Dextrose Injection, USP is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

Recommended dosages

Normal healthy adults: The following recommended dosages are for normal healthy adults and serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. In all cases, the smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given.

If the technique is properly performed, and the needle is properly placed in the subarachnoid space, it should not be necessary to administer more than one ampul (100 mg).

Obstetrical low spinal or “saddle block” anesthesia:

The dosage recommended for normal vaginal delivery is approximately 1 mL (50 mg). For Caesarean section and those deliveries requiring intrauterine manipulations, 1.5 mL (75 mg) is usually adequate.

Surgical anesthesia:

The dosage recommended for abdominal anesthesia is 1.5 to 2 mL (75 to 100 mg).

Pediatric Patients:

The dosage recommendations in healthy adolescents, 16 years of age and older, is the same as for normal healthy adults. There is insufficient data in pediatric patients below the age of 16 years to make dosage recommendations (see PRECAUTIONS).

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used.

Unused portions of solutions should be discarded following initial use.

5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride and 7.5% Dextrose Injection, USP may be autoclaved once at 15 pounds pressure, 121°C (250°F) for 15 minutes. Since this preparation contains dextrose, carmelization may occur under prolonged heating and, in some instances, prolonged storage. Therefore this preparation should not be autoclaved more than once, according to the above instructions, and should not be permitted to remain in the autoclave any longer than necessary. Do not administer any solution which is discolored or contains particulate matter.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.

The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.

For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single-dose vial containing 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP should be used.

Epidural Anesthesia

For epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection by Hospira are recommended:

1%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mL single-dose teartop vials

1.5%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mL single-dose ampuls

2%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mL single-dose ampuls

Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2−3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).

Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2−3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine hydrochloride should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10−15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient "epinephrine response" within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered.

In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solutions into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.

Maximum Recommended Dosages

NOTE: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine.

Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia.

The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One-half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).

For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults.

Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 — 100 mg (1.5 — 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (i.e., 0.25 — 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children.

In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used.

Table 1

Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic

Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine)

Procedure

Conc. (%)

Vol. (mL)

Total Dose (mg)

Infiltration

Percutaneous

0.5 or 1.0

1−60

5−300

Intravenous Regional

0.5

10−60

50−300

Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g.

Brachial

1.5

15−20

225−300

Dental

2.0

1−5

20−100

Intercostal

1.0

3

30

Paravertebral

1.0

3−5

30−50

Pudendal (each side)

1.0

10

100

Paracervical

Obstetrical Analgesia

(each side)

1.0

10

100

Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g.

Cervical (stellate ganglion)

1.0

5

50

Lumbar

1.0

5−10

50−100

Central Neural Blocks

Epidural*

Thoracic

1.0

20−30

200−300

Lumbar

Analgesia

1.0

25−30

250−300

Anesthesia

1.5

15−20

225−300

2.0

10−15

200−300

Caudal

Obstetrical Analgesia

1.0

20−30

200−300

Surgical Anesthesia

1.5

15−20

225−300

*Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome).

THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.

Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

When 4% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.

The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients.

Although the incidence of adverse effects with 4% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large volumes and concentrations of lidocaine since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered.

For specific techniques and procedures refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. 4% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The dosages below are for normal, healthy adults.

RETROBULBAR INJECTION: The suggested dose for a 70 kg person is 3−5 mL (120−200 mg of lidocaine HCl), i.e., 1.7−3 mg/kg or 0.9−1.5 mg/lb body weight. A portion of this is injected retrobulbarly and the rest may be used to block the facial nerve.

TRANSTRACHEAL INJECTION: For local anesthesia by the transtracheal route 2−3 mL should be injected through a large enough needle so that the injection can be made rapidly. By injecting during inspiration some of the drug will be carried into the bronchi and the resulting cough will distribute the rest of the drug over the vocal cords and the epiglottis.

Occasionally it may be necessary to spray the pharynx by oropharyngeal spray to achieve complete analgesia. For the combination of the injection and spray, it should rarely be necessary to utilize more than 5 mL (200 mg of lidocaine HCl), i.e., 3 mg/kg or 1.5 mg/lb body weight.

TOPICAL APPLICATION: For laryngoscopy, bronchoscopy and endotracheal intubation, the pharynx may be sprayed with 1−5 mL (40−200 mg of lidocaine HCl), i.e., 0.6−3 mg/kg or 0.3-1.5 mg/lb body weight.

Maximum Recommended Dosages

Normal Healthy Adults: The maximum recommended dose of 4% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP should be such that the dose of lidocaine HCl is kept below 300 mg and in any case should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) body weight.

Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children of less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark’s rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs, the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75−100 mg when calculated according to Clark’s rule. In any case, the maximum dose of lidocaine hydrochloride and epinephrine injection should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.2 mg/lb) of body weight. When used without epinephrine, the amount of lidocaine administered should be such that the dose is kept below 300 mg and in any case should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used. Do not use unless solution is clear and container undamaged.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of 44.6 to 100 mEq may be given initially and continued at a rate of 44.6 to 50 mEq every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary (as indicated by arterial pH and blood gas monitoring) to reverse the acidosis. Caution should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), the 4.2% solution is recommended for intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day. Slow administration rates and the 4.2% solution are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-to-eight-hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight – depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. In metabolic acidosis associated with shock, therapy should be monitored by measuring blood gases, plasma osmolarity, arterial blood lactate, hemodynamics and cardiac rhythm. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate Injection, USP may be given intramuscularly or by intravenous infusion.
The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. It is desirable to limit the duration of treatment with aminoglycosides to short term.

Patients with Normal Renal Function Adults: The recommended dosage of gentamicin sulfate for patients with serious infections and normal renal function is 3 mg/kg/day, administered in three equal doses every eight hours (Table 1).

For patients with life-threatening infections, dosages up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in three or four equal doses. The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated (Table 1).

It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations of gentamicin to determine the adequacy and safety of the dosage. When such measurements are feasible, they should be carried out periodically during therapy to assure adequate but not excessive drug levels. For example, the peak concentration (at 30 to 60 minutes after intramuscular injection) is expected to be in the range of 4 to 6 mcg/mL. When monitoring peak concentrations after intramuscular or intravenous administration, dosage should be adjusted so that prolonged levels above 12 mcg/mL are avoided. When monitoring trough concentrations (just prior to the next dose), dosage should be adjusted so that levels above 2 mcg/mL are avoided. Determination of the adequacy of a serum level for a particular patient must take into consideration the susceptibility of the causative organism, the severity of the infection, and the status of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms. In patients with extensive burns, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. In such patients treated with gentamicin, measurement of serum concentrations is recommended as a basis for dosage adjustment.
Table 1 Dosage Schedule Guide For Adults With Normal Renal Function (Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals) 40 mg/mL
Patient’s Weight*

Usual Dose for Serious Infections 1 mg/kg q8h (3 mg/kg/day)

Dose for Life-Threatening Infections (Reduce as Soon as Clinically Indicated) 1.7 mg/kg q8h** (5 mg/kg/day)
kg (lb) mg/dose mL/dose mg/dose mL/dose q8h q8h 40
(88)
40 1 66 1.6 45
(99)
45 1.1 75 1.9
50

(110)

50

1.25

83

2.1

55

(121)

55

1.4

91

2.25

60

(132)

60

1.5

100

2.5

65

(143)

65

1.6

108

2.7

70

(154)

70

1.75

116

2.9

75

(165)

75

1.9

125

3.1

80

(176)

80

2

133

3.3

85

(187)

85

2.1

141

3.5

90

(198)

90

2.25

150

3.75

95

(209)

95

2.4

158

4

100

(220)

100

2.5

166

4.2
* The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. ** For q6h schedules, dosage should be recalculated.
Children: 6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (2 to 2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours).Infants and Neonates: 7.5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours).Premature or Full-Term Neonates One Week of Age or Less: 5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 12 hours).

NOTE: For further information concerning the use of gentamicin in infants and children, see pediatric gentamicin sulfate injection product information.

The usual duration of treatment for all patients is seven to ten days. In difficult and complicated infections, a longer course of therapy may be necessary. In such cases monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is recommended, since toxicity is more apt to occur with treatment extended for more than ten days. Dosage should be reduced if clinically indicated.

For Intravenous Administration The intravenous administration of gentamicin may be particularly useful for treating patients with bacterial septicemia or those in shock. It may also be the preferred route of administration for some patients with congestive heart failure, hematologic disorders, severe burns, or those with reduced muscle mass. For intermittent intravenous administration in adults, a single-dose of gentamicin sulfate may be diluted in 50 to 200 mL of sterile isotonic saline solution or in a sterile solution of 5% dextrose in water, in infants and children, the volume of diluent should be less. The solution may be infused over a period of one-half to two hours.

The recommended dosage for intravenous and intramuscular administration is identical.

Gentamicin sulfate should not be physically premixed with other drugs, but should be administered separately in accordance with the recommended route of administration and dosage schedule.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function Dosage must be adjusted in patients with impaired renal function to assure therapeutically adequate, but not excessive blood levels. Whenever possible, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be monitored. One method of dosage adjustment is to increase the interval between administration of the usual doses. Since the serum creatinine concentration has a high correlation with the serum half-life of gentamicin, this laboratory test may provide guidance for adjustment of the interval between doses. The interval between doses (in hours) may be approximated by multiplying the serum creatinine level (mg/100 mL) by 8. For example, a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 60 mg (1 mg/kg) every 16 hours (2 x 8).

In patients with serious systemic infections and renal impairment, it may be desirable to administer the antibiotic more frequently but in reduced dosage. In such patients, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be measured so that adequate, but not excessive levels result. A peak and trough concentration measured intermittently during therapy will provide optimal guidance for adjusting dosage. After the usual initial dose, a rough guide for determining reduced dosage at eight-hour intervals is to divide the normally recommended dose by the serum creatinine level (Table 2). For example, after an initial dose of 60 mg (1 mg/kg), a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 30 mg every eight hours (60 ÷ 2). It should be noted that the status of renal function may be changing over the course of the infectious process.

It is important to recognize that deteriorating renal function may require a greater reduction in dosage than that specified in the above guidelines for patients with stable renal impairment.
Table 2 Dosage Adjustment Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment (Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals After the Usual Initial Dose)
Serum Creatinine (mg %)

Approximate Creatinine Clearance Rate (mL/min/1.73M2)

Percent of Usual Doses Shown in Table 1

≤1.0

>100

100

1.1 — 1.3

70 — 100

80

1.4 — 1.6

55 — 70

65

1.7 — 1.9

45 — 55

55

2.0 — 2.2

40 — 45

50

2.3 — 2.5

35 — 40

40

2.6 — 3.0

30 — 35

35

3.1 — 3.5

25 — 30

30

3.6 — 4.0

20 — 25

25

4.1 — 5.1

15 — 20

20

5.2 — 6.6

10 — 15

15

6.7 — 8.0

<10

10

In adults with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis, the amount of gentamicin removed from the blood may vary depending upon several factors including the dialysis method used. An eight-hour hemodialysis may reduce serum concentrations of gentamicin by approximately 50%. The recommended dose at the end of each dialysis period is 1 to 1.7 mg/kg depending upon the severity of infection. In children, a dose of 2 mg/kg may be administered.

The above dosage schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of gentamicin serum levels is not feasible.

A variety of methods are available to measure gentamicin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiologic, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration and it is recommended in emergency situations.

Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion: Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP may be diluted for intravenous infusion in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose injection. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient’s response.

Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

Usage in Adults:

Opioid Overdose—Known or Suspected: An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions is not obtained, it may be repeated at 2 to 3 minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of opioid induced or partial opioid induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: For the partial reversal of opioid depression following the use of opioids during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone should be titrated according to the patient’s response. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal, i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating or circulatory stress.

Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one to two hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short or long acting) and time interval since last administration of opioid. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

Septic Shock: The optimal dosage of Naloxone or duration of therapy for the treatment of hypotension in septic shock patients has not been established (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Usage in Pediatric Population:

Opioid Overdose—Known or Suspected: The usual initial dose in pediatric patients is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, Naloxone Hydrochloride may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP can be diluted with sterile water for injection.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: Follow the recommendations and cautions under Adult Postoperative Depression. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

Usage in Neonates

When using naloxone hydrochloride injection in neonates a product containing 0.02 mg/mL should be used.Opioid-Induced Depression: The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative opioid depression.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection, is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer. This parenteral should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

Table I (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.

The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.

Epidural Anesthesia

For an epidural test dose, only the following available specific product of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP by Hospira is recommended:

1.5% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................... 5 mL single-dose ampuls

For epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP by Hospira are recommended:

1% with epinephrine 1:200,000............................ 30 mL single-dose ampuls

                                                                                 30 mL single-dose vials

1.5% with epinephrine 1:200,000.......................... 30 mL single-dose ampuls

                                                                                30 mL single-dose vials

2% with epinephrine 1:200,000................................ 20 mL single-dose vials

Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single-dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.

In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2-3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).

Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2-3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine injection should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10-15 µg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered.

In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.

Maximum Recommended Dosages

Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum dose of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg per lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia.

The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).

Pediatric Population: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for pediatric patients, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For pediatric patients over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75-100 mg (1.5-2 mg/lb).

In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.

FOR EPIDURAL USE ONLY.

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Do not use the injection if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.
Table I Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults
Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine)

Procedure

Conc. (%)

Vol. (mL)

Total Dose (mg)
InfiltrationPercutaneous Intravenous Regional
0.5 or 1.0

0.5

1-60

10-60

5-300

50-300

Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g.

Brachial

Dental

Intercostal

Paravertebral

Pudendal (each side)

Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side)

1.5

2.0

1.0

1.0

1.0
1.0
15-20

1-5

3

3-5

10
10
225-300

20-100

30

30-50

100
100
Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g.

Cervical (stellate ganglion)

Lumbar

1.0

1.0

5

5-10

50

50-100

Central Neural Blocks

Epidural*

Thoracic

Lumbar

    Analgesia

    Anesthesia

Caudal

    Obstetrical Analgesia

    Surgical Anesthesia

1.0

1.0

1.5

2.0

1.0
1.5
20-30

25-30

15-20

10-15

20-30
15-20
200-300

250-300

225-300

200-300

200-300
225-300
*Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/ dermatome).

THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.

Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper or ampul thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use.

Do not autoclave.
Imipenem And Cilastatin...

Imipenem And Cilastatin

AdultsThe dosage recommendations for Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) represent the quantity of imipenem to be administered. An equivalent amount of cilastatin is also present in the solution. Each 125 mg, 250 mg, or 500 mg dose should be given by intravenous administration over 20 to 30 minutes. Each 750 mg or 1000 mg dose should be infused over 40 to 60 minutes. In patients who develop nausea during the infusion, the rate of infusion may be slowed.

The total daily dosage for Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) should be based on the type or severity of infection and given in equally divided doses based on consideration of degree of susceptibility of the pathogen(s), renal function, and body weight. Adult patients with impaired renal function, as judged by creatinine clearance ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2, require adjustment of dosage as described in the succeeding section of these guidelines.

Intravenous Dosage Schedule for Adults with Normal Renal Function and Body Weight ≥70 kgDoses cited in Table 3 are based on a patient with normal renal function and a body weight of 70 kg. These doses should be used for a patient with a creatinine clearance of ≥71 mL/min/1.73 m2 and a body weight of ≥70 kg. A reduction in dose must be made for a patient with a creatinine clearance of ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2 and/or a body weight less than 70 kg. (See Tables 4 and 5.)

Dosage regimens in column A of Table 3 are recommended for infections caused by fully susceptible organisms which represent the majority of pathogenic species. Dosage regimens in column B of Table 3 are recommended for infections caused by organisms with moderate susceptibility to imipenem, primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa.
TABLE 3: INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE SCHEDULE FOR ADULTS WITH NORMAL RENAL FUNCTION AND BODY WEIGHT ≥70 kg
Type or Severity of Infection

A Fully susceptible organisms including gram-positive and gram-negative aerobes and anaerobes

B Moderately susceptible organisms, primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa

Mild

250 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

500 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

Moderate

500 mg q8h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1.5g) or 500 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

500 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g) or 1 g q8h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 3g)

Severe, life    threatening    only

500 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

1 g q8h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 3g) or 1 g q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 4g)

Uncomplicated    urinary tract       infection

250 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

250 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 1g)

Complicated    urinary tract       infection

500 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

500 mg q6h (TOTAL DAILY DOSE = 2g)

Due to the high antimicrobial activity of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.), it is recommended that the maximum total daily dosage not exceed 50 mg/kg/day or 4 g/day, whichever is lower. There is no evidence that higher doses provide greater efficacy. However, patients over twelve years of age with cystic fibrosis and normal renal function have been treated with Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) at doses up to 90 mg/kg/day in divided doses, not exceeding 4 g/day.

Reduced Intravenous Schedule for Adults with Impaired Renal Function and/or Body Weight <70 kg

Patients with creatinine clearance of ≤70 mL/min/1.73 m2 and/or body weight less than 70 kg require dosage reduction of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) as indicated in the tables below. Creatinine clearance may be calculated from serum creatinine concentration by the following equation:
Tcc (Males) = (wt. in kg) (140 – age)       (72) (creatinine in mg/dL) Tcc (Females) = 0.85 × above value
To determine the dose for adults with impaired renal function and/or reduced body weight: 1. Choose a total daily dose from Table 3 based on infection characteristics. 2. a) If the total daily dose is 1 g, 1.5 g, or 2 g, use the appropriate subsection of Table 4 and continue with step 3.     b) If the total daily dose is 3 g or 4 g, use the appropriate subsection of Table 5 and continue with step 3. 3. From Table 4 or 5:     a) Select the body weight on the far left which is closest to the patient's body weight (kg).     b) Select the patient's creatinine clearance category.     c) Where the row and column intersect is the reduced dosage regimen.
TABLE 4: REDUCED INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE OF IMIPENEM AND CILASTATIN FOR INJECTION (I.V.) IN ADULT PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION AND/OR BODY WEIGHT <70 kg
And Body Weight (kg) is:

If TOTAL DAILY DOSE from TABLE 3 is:

1 g/day

1.5 g/day

2 g/day

and creatinine clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

≥70

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

60

250

q8h

125

q6h

250

q12h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

50

125

q6h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

250

q6h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

40

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

125

q12h

250

q8h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

250

q12h

30

125

q8h

125

q8h

125

q12h

125

q12h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q8h

125

q12h

250

q8h

125

q6h

125

q8h

125

q12h
TABLE 5: REDUCED INTRAVENOUS DOSAGE OF IMIPENEM AND CILASTATIN FOR INJECTION (I.V.) IN ADULT PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION AND/OR BODY WEIGHT <70 kg
And Body Weight (kg) is:

If TOTAL DAILY DOSE from TABLE 3 is:

3 g/day

4 g/day

and creatinine clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

and creatinine clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2) is:

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

≥71

41 to 70

21 to 40

6 to 20

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

then the reduced dosage regimen (mg) is:

≥70

1000

q8h

500

q6h

500

q8h

500

q12h

1000

q6h

750

q8h

500

q6h

500

q12h

60

750

q8h

500

q8h

500

q8h

500

q12h

1000

q8h

750

q8h

500

q8h

500

q12h

50

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

750

q8h

500

q6h

500

q8h

500

q12h

40

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q6h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q12h

30

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q8h

250

q12h

500

q8h

250

q6h

250

q8h

250

q12h

Patients with creatinine clearances of 6 to 20 mL/min/1.73 m2 should be treated with Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) 125 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours for most pathogens. There may be an increased risk of seizures when doses of 500 mg every 12 hours are administered to these patients.

Patients with creatinine clearance ≤5 mL/min/1.73 m2 should not receive Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) unless hemodialysis is instituted within 48 hours. There is inadequate information to recommend usage of Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) for patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis.

HemodialysisWhen treating patients with creatinine clearances of ≤5 mL/min/1.73 m2 who are undergoing hemodialysis, use the dosage recommendations for patients with creatinine clearances of 6 to 20 mL/min/1.73 m2. (See Reduced Intravenous Dosage Schedule for Adults with Impaired Renal Function and/or Body Weight <70 kg.) Both imipenem and cilastatin are cleared from the circulation during hemodialysis. The patient should receive Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) after hemodialysis and at 12 hour intervals timed from the end of that hemodialysis session. Dialysis patients, especially those with background CNS disease, should be carefully monitored; for patients on hemodialysis, Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) is recommended only when the benefit outweighs the potential risk of seizures. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Pediatric PatientsSee PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients.

For pediatric patients ≥3 months of age, the recommended dose for non-CNS infections is 15 to 25 mg/kg/dose administered every six hours. Based on studies in adults, the maximum daily dose for treatment of infections with fully susceptible organisms is 2 g per day, and of infections with moderately susceptible organisms (primarily some strains of P. aeruginosa) is 4 g/day. Higher doses (up to 90 mg/kg/day in older children) have been used in patients with cystic fibrosis.

For pediatric patients ≤3 months of age (weighing ≥1,500 g), the following dosage schedule is recommended for non-CNS infections:      <1 wk of age: 25 mg/kg every 12 hrs     1 to 4 wks of age: 25 mg/kg every 8 hrs     4 wks to 3 mos. of age: 25 mg/kg every 6 hrs.

Doses less than or equal to 500 mg should be given by intravenous infusion over 15 to 30 minutes. Doses greater than 500 mg should be given by intravenous infusion over 40 to 60 minutes.

Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) is not recommended in pediatric patients with CNS infections because of the risk of seizures.

Imipenem and Cilastatin for Injection (I.V.) is not recommended in pediatric patients <30 kg with impaired renal function, as no data are available.
Meropenem

Meropenem

2.1 Adult Patients

The recommended dose of Meropenem for Injection I.V. is 500 mg given every 8 hours for skin and skin structure infections and 1 gram given every 8 hours for intra-abdominal infections. When treating complicated skin and skin structure infections caused by P.aeruginosa, a dose of 1 gram every 8 hours is recommended.

Meropenem for Injection I.V. should be administered by intravenous infusion over approximately 15 minutes to 30 minutes. Doses of 1 gram may also be administered as an intravenous bolus injection (5 to 20 mL) over approximately 3 minutes to 5 minutes.

2.2 Use in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage should be reduced in patients with creatinine clearance of 50 mL/min or less. (See dosing table below.)

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault equation)5 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance.

Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) = Weight (kg) x (140 - age) 72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)Females: 0.85 x above value

Recommended Meropenem for Injection I.V. Dosage Schedule for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dose (dependent on type of infection)

Dosing Interval

Greater than 50

Recommended dose (500 mg cSSSI and 1 gram Intra-abdominal)

Every 8 hours

Greater than 25 to 50

Recommended dose

Every 12 hours

10 to 25

One-half recommended dose

Every 12 hours

Less than 10

One-half recommended dose

Every 24 hours

There is inadequate information regarding the use of Meropenem for Injection I.V. in patients on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis.

2.3 Use in Pediatric Patients

Pediatric Patients 3 Months of Age and Older

For pediatric patients from 3 months of age and older, the Meropenem for Injection I.V. dose is 10 mg/kg, 20 mg/kg or 40 mg/kg every 8 hours (maximum dose is 2 grams every 8 hours), depending on the type of infection (complicated skin and skin structure, intra-abdominal or meningitis). (See dosing table below.) Pediatric patients weighing over 50 kg should be administered Meropenem for Injection I.V. at a dose of 500 mg every 8 hours for complicated skin and skin structure infections, 1 gram every 8 hours for intra-abdominal infections and 2 grams every 8 hours for meningitis. Meropenem for Injection I.V. should be given as intravenous infusion over approximately 15 minutes to 30 minutes or as an intravenous bolus injection (5 mL to 20 mL) over approximately 3 minutes-5 minutes.

There is limited safety data available to support the administration of a 40 mg/kg (up to a maximum of 2 grams) bolus dose.

Recommended Meropenem for Injection I.V. Dosage Schedule for Pediatric Patients 3 Monthsof Age and Older with Normal Renal Function

Type ofInfection

Dose(mg/kg)

Up to a Maximum Dose

DosingInterval

Complicated skin and skin structure

10

500 mg

Every 8 hours

Intra-abdominal

20

1 gram

Every 8 hours

Meningitis

40

2 grams

Every 8 hours

There is no experience in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

When treating complicated skin and skin structure infections caused by P. aeruginosa, a dose of 20 mg/kg (or 1 gram for pediatric patients weighing over 50 kg) every 8 hours is recommended.

Pediatric Patients Less Than 3 Months of Age

For pediatric patients (with normal renal function) less than 3 months of age, with intra-abdominal infections, the Meropenem for Injection I.V. dose is based on gestational age (GA) and postnatal age (PNA). (See dosing table below). Meropenem for Injection I.V. should be given as intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

Recommended Meropenem for Injection I.V. Dosage Schedule for Pediatric Patients Less than 3 Months of Age with Complicated Intra-Abdominal Infections and Normal Renal Function

Age Group

Dose (mg/kg)

Dose Interval

Infants less than 32 weeks GA and PNA less than 2 weeks

20

Every 12 hours

Infants less than 32 weeks GA and PNA 2weeks and older

20

Every 8 hours

Infants 32 weeks and older GA andPNA less than 2 weeks

20

Every 8 hours

Infants 32 weeks and older GA andPNA 2 weeks and older

30

Every 8 hours

There is no experience in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.4 Preparation of Solution

For Intravenous Bolus Administration

Constitute injection vials (500 mg and 1 gram) with sterile Water for Injection. (See table below.) Shake to dissolve and let stand until clear.

Vial Size

Amount of Diluent Added (mL)

ApproximateWithdrawable Volume (mL)

Approximate Average Concentration (mg/mL)

500 mg

10

10

50

1 gram

20

20

50

For Infusion

Infusion vials (500 mg and 1 gram) may be directly constituted with a compatible infusion fluid. Alternatively, an injection vial may be constituted, then the resulting solution added to an intravenous container and further diluted with an appropriate infusion fluid [see Dosage and Administration. (2.5) and (2.6)]

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

2.5 Compatibility

Compatibility of Meropenem with other drugs has not been established. Meropenem should not be mixed with or physically added to solutions containing other drugs.

2.6 Stability and Storage

Freshly prepared solutions of Meropenem should be used. However, constituted solutions of Meropenem maintain satisfactory potency under the conditions described below. Solutions of intravenous Meropenem should not be frozen.

Intravenous Bolus Administration

Meropenem for Injection I.V. vials constituted with sterile Water for Injection for bolus administration (up to 50 mg/mL of Meropenem) may be stored for up to 3 hours at up to 25°C (77°F) or for 13 hours at up to 5°C (41°F).

Intravenous Infusion Administration

Solutions prepared for infusion (Meropenem for Injection I.V. concentrations ranging from 1 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL) constituted with Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% may be stored for 1 hour at up to 25oC (77oF) or 15 hours at up to 5oC (41oF).

Solutions prepared for infusion (Meropenem for Injection I.V. concentrations ranging from 1 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL) constituted with Dextrose Injection 5% should be used immediately.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate Injection, USP, 40 mEq is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. ECG and serum potassium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of milliequivalents (mEq) of potassium (K+) with an equal number of milliequivalents of acetate (CH3COO−).

Maximum infusion rate: The infusion rate should not exceed 1 mEq/kg/hr.

Normal daily requirements:

Newborn:    2-6 mEq/kg/24 hr.

Children:        2-3 mEq/kg/24 hr.

Adult:            40-80 mEq/24 hr.

Intraosseous infusion can be an alternate route for drug administration when intravenous access is not readily available.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate Injection, USP 40 mEq is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum sodium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of milliequivalents (mEq) of sodium (Na+) with an equal number of acetate (CH3COO −).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. See PRECAUTIONS.
Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate

Potassium Acetate Injection, USP, 40 mEq is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. ECG and serum potassium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of milliequivalents (mEq) of potassium (K+) with an equal number of milliequivalents of acetate (CH3COO-).

Maximum infusion rate: The infusion rate should not exceed 1 mEq/kg/hr.

Normal daily requirements:

Newborn : 2-6 mEq/kg/24 hr. Children : 2-3 mEq/kg/24 hr. Adult : 40-80 mEq/24 hr.

Intraosseous infusion can be an alternate route for drug administration when intravenous access is not readily available.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Amidate

Amidate

Etomidate Injection, USP is intended for administration only by the intravenous route (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). The dose for induction of anesthesia in adult patients and in pediatric patients above the age of ten (10) years will vary between 0.2 and 0.6 mg/kg of body weight, and it must be individualized in each case. The usual dose for induction in these patients is 0.3 mg/kg, injected over a period of 30 to 60 seconds. There are inadequate data to make dosage recommendations for induction of anesthesia in patients below the age of ten (10) years; therefore, such use is not recommended. Geriatric patients may require reduced doses of etomidate.

Smaller increments of intravenous etomidate may be administered to adult patients during short operative procedures to supplement subpotent anesthetic agents, such as nitrous oxide. The dosage employed under these circumstances, although usually smaller than the original induction dose, must be individualized. There are insufficient data to support this use of etomidate for longer adult procedures or for any procedures in pediatric patients; therefore, such use is not recommended. The use of intravenous fentanyl and other neuroactive drugs employed during the conduct of anesthesia may alter the etomidate dosage requirements. Consult the prescribing information for all other such drugs before using.

Premedication: Etomidate Injection, USP is compatible with commonly administered pre-anesthetic medications, which may be employed as indicated. See also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, ADVERSE REACTIONS, and dosage recommendations for maintenance of anesthesia.

Etomidate hypnosis does not significantly alter the usual dosage requirements of neuromuscular blocking agents employed for endotracheal intubation or other purposes shortly after induction of anesthesia.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Topotecan

Topotecan

Verify dose using body surface area prior to dispensing. Recommended dosage should generally not exceed 4 mg intravenously [see Overdosage (10)].

Prior to administration of the first course of Topotecan Injection, patients must have a baseline neutrophil count of >1,500 cells/mm3 and a platelet count of >100,000 cells/mm3.

2.1 Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dosage
The recommended dose of Topotecan Injection is 1.5 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes daily for 5 consecutive days, starting on day 1 of a 21-day course. In the absence of tumor progression, a minimum of 4 courses is recommended because tumor response may be delayed. The median time to response in 4 small cell lung cancer trials was 5 to 7 weeks.
Dosage Modification Guidelines
In the event of severe neutropenia (defined as <500 cells/mm3) during any course, reduce the dose by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses. Alternatively, in the event of severe neutropenia, administer G-CSF (granulocyte-colony stimulating factor) following the subsequent course (before resorting to dose reduction) starting from day 6 of the course (24 hours after completion of topotecan administration). In the event the platelet count falls below 25,000 cells/mm3, reduce doses by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses.
2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection appears to be required for patients with mild renal impairment (Clcr 40 to 60 mL/min.). Dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection to 0.75 mg/m2 is recommended for patients with moderate renal impairment (20 to 39 mL/min.). Insufficient data are available in patients with severe renal impairment to provide a dosage recommendation for Topotecan Injection [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Instructions for Handling, Preparation and Intravenous Administration

Handling

Topotecan Injection is a cytotoxic anticancer drug. Prepare topotecan hydrochloride injection under a vertical laminar flow hood while wearing gloves and protective clothing. If Topotecan Injection solution contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. If Topotecan Injection contacts mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

Use procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4

Preparation and Administration

The appropriate volume of Topotecan Injection is diluted in a minimum of 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP prior to administration. Infuse over 30 minutes. Topotecan Injection diluted for infusion is stable between 20°C and 25°C (68°F and 77°F) in ambient lighting conditions for 24 hours.

Each vial of Topotecan Injection is intended for single use only. Any unused drug remaining after injection must be discarded.

2.1 Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dosage
The recommended dose of Topotecan Injection is 1.5 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes daily for 5 consecutive days, starting on day 1 of a 21-day course. In the absence of tumor progression, a minimum of 4 courses is recommended because tumor response may be delayed. The median time to response in 4 small cell lung cancer trials was 5 to 7 weeks.
Dosage Modification Guidelines
In the event of severe neutropenia (defined as <500 cells/mm3) during any course, reduce the dose by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses. Alternatively, in the event of severe neutropenia, administer G-CSF (granulocyte-colony stimulating factor) following the subsequent course (before resorting to dose reduction) starting from day 6 of the course (24 hours after completion of topotecan administration). In the event the platelet count falls below 25,000 cells/mm3, reduce doses by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses.
2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection appears to be required for patients with mild renal impairment (Clcr 40 to 60 mL/min.). Dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection to 0.75 mg/m2 is recommended for patients with moderate renal impairment (20 to 39 mL/min.). Insufficient data are available in patients with severe renal impairment to provide a dosage recommendation for Topotecan Injection [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Instructions for Handling, Preparation and Intravenous Administration

Handling

Topotecan Injection is a cytotoxic anticancer drug. Prepare topotecan hydrochloride injection under a vertical laminar flow hood while wearing gloves and protective clothing. If Topotecan Injection solution contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. If Topotecan Injection contacts mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

Use procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4

Preparation and Administration

The appropriate volume of Topotecan Injection is diluted in a minimum of 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP prior to administration. Infuse over 30 minutes. Topotecan Injection diluted for infusion is stable between 20°C and 25°C (68°F and 77°F) in ambient lighting conditions for 24 hours.

Each vial of Topotecan Injection is intended for single use only. Any unused drug remaining after injection must be discarded.
Topotecan

Topotecan

Verify dose using body surface area prior to dispensing. Recommended dosage should generally not exceed 4 mg intravenously [see Overdosage (10)].

Prior to administration of the first course of Topotecan Injection, patients must have a baseline neutrophil count of >1,500 cells/mm3 and a platelet count of >100,000 cells/mm3.

2.1 Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dosage
The recommended dose of Topotecan Injection is 1.5 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes daily for 5 consecutive days, starting on day 1 of a 21-day course. In the absence of tumor progression, a minimum of 4 courses is recommended because tumor response may be delayed. The median time to response in 4 small cell lung cancer trials was 5 to 7 weeks.
Dosage Modification Guidelines
In the event of severe neutropenia (defined as <500 cells/mm3) during any course, reduce the dose by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses. Alternatively, in the event of severe neutropenia, administer G-CSF (granulocyte-colony stimulating factor) following the subsequent course (before resorting to dose reduction) starting from day 6 of the course (24 hours after completion of topotecan administration). In the event the platelet count falls below 25,000 cells/mm3, reduce doses by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses.
2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection appears to be required for patients with mild renal impairment (Clcr 40 to 60 mL/min.). Dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection to 0.75 mg/m2 is recommended for patients with moderate renal impairment (20 to 39 mL/min.). Insufficient data are available in patients with severe renal impairment to provide a dosage recommendation for Topotecan Injection [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Instructions for Handling, Preparation and Intravenous Administration

Handling

Topotecan Injection is a cytotoxic anticancer drug. Prepare topotecan hydrochloride injection under a vertical laminar flow hood while wearing gloves and protective clothing. If Topotecan Injection solution contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. If Topotecan Injection contacts mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

Use procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4

Preparation and Administration

The appropriate volume of Topotecan Injection is diluted in a minimum of 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP prior to administration. Infuse over 30 minutes. Topotecan Injection diluted for infusion is stable between 20°C and 25°C (68°F and 77°F) in ambient lighting conditions for 24 hours.

Each vial of Topotecan Injection is intended for single use only. Any unused drug remaining after injection must be discarded.

2.1 Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dosage
The recommended dose of Topotecan Injection is 1.5 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes daily for 5 consecutive days, starting on day 1 of a 21-day course. In the absence of tumor progression, a minimum of 4 courses is recommended because tumor response may be delayed. The median time to response in 4 small cell lung cancer trials was 5 to 7 weeks.
Dosage Modification Guidelines
In the event of severe neutropenia (defined as <500 cells/mm3) during any course, reduce the dose by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses. Alternatively, in the event of severe neutropenia, administer G-CSF (granulocyte-colony stimulating factor) following the subsequent course (before resorting to dose reduction) starting from day 6 of the course (24 hours after completion of topotecan administration). In the event the platelet count falls below 25,000 cells/mm3, reduce doses by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses.
2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection appears to be required for patients with mild renal impairment (Clcr 40 to 60 mL/min.). Dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection to 0.75 mg/m2 is recommended for patients with moderate renal impairment (20 to 39 mL/min.). Insufficient data are available in patients with severe renal impairment to provide a dosage recommendation for Topotecan Injection [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Instructions for Handling, Preparation and Intravenous Administration

Handling

Topotecan Injection is a cytotoxic anticancer drug. Prepare topotecan hydrochloride injection under a vertical laminar flow hood while wearing gloves and protective clothing. If Topotecan Injection solution contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. If Topotecan Injection contacts mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

Use procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4

Preparation and Administration

The appropriate volume of Topotecan Injection is diluted in a minimum of 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP prior to administration. Infuse over 30 minutes. Topotecan Injection diluted for infusion is stable between 20°C and 25°C (68°F and 77°F) in ambient lighting conditions for 24 hours.

Each vial of Topotecan Injection is intended for single use only. Any unused drug remaining after injection must be discarded.
Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate Injection, USP 40 mEq is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum sodium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, all or part of the contents of one or more vials may be added to other intravenous fluids to provide any desired number of milliequivalents (mEq) of sodium (Na+) with an equal number of acetate (CH3COO-).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. See PRECAUTIONS.
Docetaxel

Docetaxel

For all indications, toxicities may warrant dosage adjustments [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

Administer in a facility equipped to manage possible complications (e.g. anaphylaxis).

2.1 Breast Cancer

For locally advanced or metastatic breast cancer after failure of prior chemotherapy, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection, USP is 60 mg/m2 to 100 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks.

For the adjuvant treatment of operable node-positive breast cancer, the recommended Docetaxel Injection, USP dose is 75 mg/m2 administered 1 hour after doxorubicin 50 mg/m2 and cyclophosphamide 500 mg/m2 every 3 weeks for 6 courses. Prophylactic G-CSF may be used to mitigate the risk of hematological toxicities [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.2 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

For treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy, docetaxel was evaluated as monotherapy, and the recommended dose is 75 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks. A dose of 100 mg/m2 in patients previously treated with chemotherapy was associated with increased hematologic toxicity, infection, and treatment-related mortality in randomized, controlled trials [see Boxed Warning, Dosage and Administration (2.7), Warnings and Precautions (5), Clinical Studies (14)].

For chemotherapy-naïve patients, docetaxel was evaluated in combination with cisplatin. The recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection, USP is 75 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 1 hour immediately followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2 over 30–60 minutes every 3 weeks [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.3 Prostate Cancer

For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection, USP is 75 mg/m2 every 3 weeks as a 1 hour intravenous infusion. Prednisone 5 mg orally twice daily is administered continuously [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.4 Gastric Adenocarcinoma

For gastric adenocarcinoma, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion, followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2, as a 1 to 3 hour intravenous infusion (both on day 1 only), followed by fluorouracil 750 mg/m2 per day given as a 24-hour continuous intravenous infusion for 5 days, starting at the end of the cisplatin infusion. Treatment is repeated every three weeks. Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics and appropriate hydration for cisplatin administration [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.5 Head and Neck Cancer

Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics, and appropriate hydration (prior to and after cisplatin administration). Prophylaxis for neutropenic infections should be administered. All patients treated on the Docetaxel Injection containing arms of the TAX323 and TAX324 studies received prophylactic antibiotics.

Induction chemotherapy followed by radiotherapy (TAX323)

For the induction treatment of locally advanced inoperable SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2 intravenously over 1 hour, on day one, followed by fluorouracil as a continuous intravenous infusion at 750 mg/m2 per day for five days. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 4 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive radiotherapy [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

Induction chemotherapy followed by chemoradiotherapy (TAX324)

For the induction treatment of patients with locally advanced (unresectable, low surgical cure, or organ preservation) SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion on day 1, followed by cisplatin 100 mg/m2 administered as a 30-minute to 3 hour infusion, followed by fluorouracil 1000 mg/m2/day as a continuous infusion from day 1 to day 4. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 3 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive chemoradiotherapy [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.6 Premedication Regimen

All patients should be premedicated with oral corticosteroids (see below for prostate cancer) such as dexamethasone 16 mg per day (e.g., 8 mg twice daily) for 3 days starting 1 day prior to Docetaxel Injection, USP administration in order to reduce the incidence and severity of fluid retention as well as the severity of hypersensitivity reactions [see Boxed Warning, Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, given the concurrent use of prednisone, the recommended premedication regimen is oral dexamethasone 8 mg, at 12 hours, 3 hours and 1 hour before the Docetaxel Injection, USP infusion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

2.7 Dosage Adjustments During Treatment

Breast Cancer

Patients who are dosed initially at 100 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, or severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy should have the dosage adjusted from 100 mg/m2 to 75 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions, the dosage should either be decreased from 75 mg/m2 to 55 mg/m2 or the treatment should be discontinued. Conversely, patients who are dosed initially at 60 mg/m2 and who do not experience febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or severe peripheral neuropathy during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy may tolerate higher doses. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection, USP treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination Therapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP in the Adjuvant Treatment of Breast Cancer

Docetaxel Injection, USP in combination with doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience febrile neutropenia should receive G-CSF in all subsequent cycles. Patients who continue to experience this reaction should remain on G-CSF and have their Docetaxel Injection, USP dose reduced to 60 mg/m2. Patients who experience grade 3 or 4 stomatitis should have their Docetaxel Injection, USP dose decreased to 60 mg/m2. Patients who experience severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy should have their dosage of Docetaxel Injection, USP reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/m2, treatment should be discontinued.

Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Monotherapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP for NSCLC treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy

Patients who are dosed initially at 75 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or other grade 3/4 non-hematological toxicities during Docetaxel Injection, USP treatment should have treatment withheld until resolution of the toxicity and then resumed at 55 mg/m2. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection, USP treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP for chemotherapy-naïve NSCLC

For patients who are dosed initially at Docetaxel Injection, USP 75 mg/m2 in combination with cisplatin, and whose nadir of platelet count during the previous course of therapy is <25,000 cells/mm3, in patients who experience febrile neutropenia, and in patients with serious non-hematologic toxicities, the Docetaxel Injection, USP dosage in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 65 mg/m2. In patients who require a further dose reduction, a dose of 50 mg/m2 is recommended. For cisplatin dosage adjustments, see manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Prostate Cancer

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP for hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer

Docetaxel Injection, USP should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy should have the dosage of Docetaxel Injection, USP reduced from 75 mg to 60 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/m2, the treatment should be discontinued.

Gastric or Head and Neck Cancer

Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil in gastric cancer or head and neck cancer

Patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil must receive antiemetics and appropriate hydration according to current institutional guidelines. In both studies, G-CSF was recommended during the second and/or subsequent cycles in case of febrile neutropenia, or documented infection with neutropenia, or neutropenia lasting more than 7 days. If an episode of febrile neutropenia, prolonged neutropenia or neutropenic infection occurs despite G-CSF use, the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If subsequent episodes of complicated neutropenia occur the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 60 mg/m2 to 45 mg/m2. In case of grade 4 thrombocytopenia the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. Patients should not be retreated with subsequent cycles of Docetaxel Injection until neutrophils recover to a level >1,500 cells/mm3 and platelets recover to a level >100,000 cells/mm3. Discontinue treatment if these toxicities persist [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Recommended dose modifications for toxicities in patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 - Recommended Dose Modifications for Toxicities in Patients Treated with Docetaxel Injection in Combination with Cisplatin and Fluorouracil
Toxicity

Dosage Adjustment

Diarrhea grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%. Second episode: then reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Diarrhea grade 4

First episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection and fluorouracil doses by 20%. Second episode: discontinue treatment.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%. Second episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles. Third episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 4

First episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles. Second episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Liver dysfunction: In case of AST/ALT >2.5 to ≤5 x ULN and AP ≤2.5 x ULN, or AST/ALT >1.5 to ≤5 x ULN and AP >2.5 to ≤5 x ULN, Docetaxel Injection should be reduced by 20%.

In case of AST/ALT >5 x ULN and/or AP >5 x ULN Docetaxel Injection should be stopped. The dose modifications for cisplatin and fluorouracil in the gastric cancer study are provided below:

Cisplatin dose modifications and delays

Peripheral neuropathy

A neurological examination should be performed before entry into the study, and then at least every 2 cycles and at the end of treatment. In the case of neurological signs or symptoms, more frequent examinations should be performed and the following dose modifications can be made according to NCIC-CTC grade:
Grade 2: Reduce cisplatin dose by 20%. Grade 3: Discontinue treatment. Ototoxicity: In the case of grade 3 toxicity, discontinue treatment.
Nephrotoxicity

In the event of a rise in serum creatinine ≥grade 2 (>1.5 x normal value) despite adequate rehydration, CrCl should be determined before each subsequent cycle and the following dose reductions should be considered (see Table 2).

For other cisplatin dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.
Table 2 – Dose Reductions for Evaluation of Creatinine Clearance
Creatinine Clearance Result Before Next Cycle

Cisplatin Dose Next Cycle

CrCl ≥60 mL/min

Full dose of cisplatin was given. CrCl was to be repeated before each treatment cycle.

CrCl between 40 and 59 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was reduced by 50% at subsequent cycle. If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was reinstituted at the next cycle. If no recovery was observed, then cisplatin was omitted from the next treatment cycle.

CrCl <40 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was omitted in that treatment cycle only. If CrCl was still <40 mL/min at the end of cycle, cisplatin was discontinued. If CrCl was >40 and <60 mL/min at end of cycle, a 50% cisplatin dose was given at the next cycle. If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was given at next cycle.
CrCl = Creatinine clearance
Fluorouracil dose modifications and treatment delays

For diarrhea and stomatitis, see Table 1.

In the event of grade 2 or greater plantar-palmar toxicity, fluorouracil should be stopped until recovery. The fluorouracil dosage should be reduced by 20%.

For other greater than grade 3 toxicities, except alopecia and anemia, chemotherapy should be delayed (for a maximum of 2 weeks from the planned date of infusion) until resolution to grade ≤1 and then recommenced, if medically appropriate.

For other fluorouracil dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Combination Therapy with Strong CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Avoid using concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, clarithromycin, atazanavir, indinavir, nefazodone, nelfinavir, ritonavir, saquinavir, telithromycin and voriconazole). There are no clinical data with a dose adjustment in patients receiving strong CYP3A4 inhibitors. Based on extrapolation from a pharmacokinetic study with ketoconazole in 7 patients, consider a 50% docetaxel dose reduction if patients require co-administration of a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Administration Precautions

Docetaxel Injection, USP is a cytotoxic anticancer drug and, as with other potentially toxic compounds, caution should be exercised when handling and preparing Docetaxel Injection, USP solutions. The use of gloves is recommended. Please refer to [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16.3)].

If Docetaxel Injection, USP or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with the skin, immediately and thoroughly wash with soap and water. If Docetaxel Injection, USP or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with mucosa, immediately and thoroughly wash with water.

Contact of the Docetaxel Injection, USP with plasticized PVC equipment or devices used to prepare solutions for infusion is not recommended. In order to minimize patient exposure to the plasticizer DEHP (di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate), which may be leached from PVC infusion bags or sets, the Docetaxel Injection, USP diluted solution for infusion should be stored in bottles (glass, polypropylene) or plastic bags (polypropylene, polyolefin) and administered through polyethylene-lined administration sets.

Docetaxel Injection, USP requires dilution prior to administration.

Please follow the preparation instructions provided below.

2.9 Preparation and Administration

Docetaxel Injection, USP (10 mg/mL) requires NO prior dilution with a diluent and is ready to add to the infusion solution.

Dilution for Infusion
Aseptically withdraw the required amount of Docetaxel Injection, USP (10 mg docetaxel/mL) with a calibrated syringe and inject into a 250 mL infusion bag or bottle of either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution to produce a final concentration of 0.3 mg/mL to 0.74 mg/mL. If a dose greater than 200 mg of docetaxel is required, use a larger volume of the infusion vehicle so that a concentration of 0.74 mg/mL docetaxel is not exceeded. Thoroughly mix the infusion by gentle manual rotation. As with all parenteral products, Docetaxel Injection, USP should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. If the Docetaxel Injection, USP or diluted solution is not clear or appears to have precipitation, it should be discarded.
The Docetaxel Injection, USP diluted solution for infusion should be administered intravenously as a 1-hour infusion under ambient room temperature (below 25°C) and lighting conditions.

2.10 Stability

Docetaxel Injection, USP infusion solution, if stored between 2°C and 25°C (36°F and 77°F) is stable for 4 hours in either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution. Use within 4 hours including the 1 hour intravenous administration.

2.1 Breast Cancer

For locally advanced or metastatic breast cancer after failure of prior chemotherapy, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection, USP is 60 mg/m2 to 100 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks.

For the adjuvant treatment of operable node-positive breast cancer, the recommended Docetaxel Injection, USP dose is 75 mg/m2 administered 1 hour after doxorubicin 50 mg/m2 and cyclophosphamide 500 mg/m2 every 3 weeks for 6 courses. Prophylactic G-CSF may be used to mitigate the risk of hematological toxicities [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.2 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

For treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy, docetaxel was evaluated as monotherapy, and the recommended dose is 75 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks. A dose of 100 mg/m2 in patients previously treated with chemotherapy was associated with increased hematologic toxicity, infection, and treatment-related mortality in randomized, controlled trials [see Boxed Warning, Dosage and Administration (2.7), Warnings and Precautions (5), Clinical Studies (14)].

For chemotherapy-naïve patients, docetaxel was evaluated in combination with cisplatin. The recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection, USP is 75 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 1 hour immediately followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2 over 30–60 minutes every 3 weeks [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.3 Prostate Cancer

For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection, USP is 75 mg/m2 every 3 weeks as a 1 hour intravenous infusion. Prednisone 5 mg orally twice daily is administered continuously [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.4 Gastric Adenocarcinoma

For gastric adenocarcinoma, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion, followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2, as a 1 to 3 hour intravenous infusion (both on day 1 only), followed by fluorouracil 750 mg/m2 per day given as a 24-hour continuous intravenous infusion for 5 days, starting at the end of the cisplatin infusion. Treatment is repeated every three weeks. Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics and appropriate hydration for cisplatin administration [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.5 Head and Neck Cancer

Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics, and appropriate hydration (prior to and after cisplatin administration). Prophylaxis for neutropenic infections should be administered. All patients treated on the Docetaxel Injection containing arms of the TAX323 and TAX324 studies received prophylactic antibiotics.

Induction chemotherapy followed by radiotherapy (TAX323)

For the induction treatment of locally advanced inoperable SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2 intravenously over 1 hour, on day one, followed by fluorouracil as a continuous intravenous infusion at 750 mg/m2 per day for five days. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 4 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive radiotherapy [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

Induction chemotherapy followed by chemoradiotherapy (TAX324)

For the induction treatment of patients with locally advanced (unresectable, low surgical cure, or organ preservation) SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion on day 1, followed by cisplatin 100 mg/m2 administered as a 30-minute to 3 hour infusion, followed by fluorouracil 1000 mg/m2/day as a continuous infusion from day 1 to day 4. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 3 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive chemoradiotherapy [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.6 Premedication Regimen

All patients should be premedicated with oral corticosteroids (see below for prostate cancer) such as dexamethasone 16 mg per day (e.g., 8 mg twice daily) for 3 days starting 1 day prior to Docetaxel Injection, USP administration in order to reduce the incidence and severity of fluid retention as well as the severity of hypersensitivity reactions [see Boxed Warning, Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, given the concurrent use of prednisone, the recommended premedication regimen is oral dexamethasone 8 mg, at 12 hours, 3 hours and 1 hour before the Docetaxel Injection, USP infusion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

2.7 Dosage Adjustments During Treatment

Breast Cancer

Patients who are dosed initially at 100 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, or severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy should have the dosage adjusted from 100 mg/m2 to 75 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions, the dosage should either be decreased from 75 mg/m2 to 55 mg/m2 or the treatment should be discontinued. Conversely, patients who are dosed initially at 60 mg/m2 and who do not experience febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or severe peripheral neuropathy during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy may tolerate higher doses. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection, USP treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination Therapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP in the Adjuvant Treatment of Breast Cancer

Docetaxel Injection, USP in combination with doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience febrile neutropenia should receive G-CSF in all subsequent cycles. Patients who continue to experience this reaction should remain on G-CSF and have their Docetaxel Injection, USP dose reduced to 60 mg/m2. Patients who experience grade 3 or 4 stomatitis should have their Docetaxel Injection, USP dose decreased to 60 mg/m2. Patients who experience severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy should have their dosage of Docetaxel Injection, USP reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/m2, treatment should be discontinued.

Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Monotherapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP for NSCLC treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy

Patients who are dosed initially at 75 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or other grade 3/4 non-hematological toxicities during Docetaxel Injection, USP treatment should have treatment withheld until resolution of the toxicity and then resumed at 55 mg/m2. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection, USP treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP for chemotherapy-naïve NSCLC

For patients who are dosed initially at Docetaxel Injection, USP 75 mg/m2 in combination with cisplatin, and whose nadir of platelet count during the previous course of therapy is <25,000 cells/mm3, in patients who experience febrile neutropenia, and in patients with serious non-hematologic toxicities, the Docetaxel Injection, USP dosage in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 65 mg/m2. In patients who require a further dose reduction, a dose of 50 mg/m2 is recommended. For cisplatin dosage adjustments, see manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Prostate Cancer

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection, USP for hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer

Docetaxel Injection, USP should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection, USP therapy should have the dosage of Docetaxel Injection, USP reduced from 75 mg to 60 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/m2, the treatment should be discontinued.

Gastric or Head and Neck Cancer

Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil in gastric cancer or head and neck cancer

Patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil must receive antiemetics and appropriate hydration according to current institutional guidelines. In both studies, G-CSF was recommended during the second and/or subsequent cycles in case of febrile neutropenia, or documented infection with neutropenia, or neutropenia lasting more than 7 days. If an episode of febrile neutropenia, prolonged neutropenia or neutropenic infection occurs despite G-CSF use, the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If subsequent episodes of complicated neutropenia occur the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 60 mg/m2 to 45 mg/m2. In case of grade 4 thrombocytopenia the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. Patients should not be retreated with subsequent cycles of Docetaxel Injection until neutrophils recover to a level >1,500 cells/mm3 and platelets recover to a level >100,000 cells/mm3. Discontinue treatment if these toxicities persist [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Recommended dose modifications for toxicities in patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 - Recommended Dose Modifications for Toxicities in Patients Treated with Docetaxel Injection in Combination with Cisplatin and Fluorouracil
Toxicity

Dosage Adjustment

Diarrhea grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%. Second episode: then reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Diarrhea grade 4

First episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection and fluorouracil doses by 20%. Second episode: discontinue treatment.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%. Second episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles. Third episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 4

First episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles. Second episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Liver dysfunction: In case of AST/ALT >2.5 to ≤5 x ULN and AP ≤2.5 x ULN, or AST/ALT >1.5 to ≤5 x ULN and AP >2.5 to ≤5 x ULN, Docetaxel Injection should be reduced by 20%.

In case of AST/ALT >5 x ULN and/or AP >5 x ULN Docetaxel Injection should be stopped. The dose modifications for cisplatin and fluorouracil in the gastric cancer study are provided below:

Cisplatin dose modifications and delays

Peripheral neuropathy

A neurological examination should be performed before entry into the study, and then at least every 2 cycles and at the end of treatment. In the case of neurological signs or symptoms, more frequent examinations should be performed and the following dose modifications can be made according to NCIC-CTC grade:
Grade 2: Reduce cisplatin dose by 20%. Grade 3: Discontinue treatment. Ototoxicity: In the case of grade 3 toxicity, discontinue treatment.
Nephrotoxicity

In the event of a rise in serum creatinine ≥grade 2 (>1.5 x normal value) despite adequate rehydration, CrCl should be determined before each subsequent cycle and the following dose reductions should be considered (see Table 2).

For other cisplatin dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.
Table 2 – Dose Reductions for Evaluation of Creatinine Clearance
Creatinine Clearance Result Before Next Cycle

Cisplatin Dose Next Cycle

CrCl ≥60 mL/min

Full dose of cisplatin was given. CrCl was to be repeated before each treatment cycle.

CrCl between 40 and 59 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was reduced by 50% at subsequent cycle. If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was reinstituted at the next cycle. If no recovery was observed, then cisplatin was omitted from the next treatment cycle.

CrCl <40 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was omitted in that treatment cycle only. If CrCl was still <40 mL/min at the end of cycle, cisplatin was discontinued. If CrCl was >40 and <60 mL/min at end of cycle, a 50% cisplatin dose was given at the next cycle. If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was given at next cycle.
CrCl = Creatinine clearance
Fluorouracil dose modifications and treatment delays

For diarrhea and stomatitis, see Table 1.

In the event of grade 2 or greater plantar-palmar toxicity, fluorouracil should be stopped until recovery. The fluorouracil dosage should be reduced by 20%.

For other greater than grade 3 toxicities, except alopecia and anemia, chemotherapy should be delayed (for a maximum of 2 weeks from the planned date of infusion) until resolution to grade ≤1 and then recommenced, if medically appropriate.

For other fluorouracil dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Combination Therapy with Strong CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Avoid using concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, clarithromycin, atazanavir, indinavir, nefazodone, nelfinavir, ritonavir, saquinavir, telithromycin and voriconazole). There are no clinical data with a dose adjustment in patients receiving strong CYP3A4 inhibitors. Based on extrapolation from a pharmacokinetic study with ketoconazole in 7 patients, consider a 50% docetaxel dose reduction if patients require co-administration of a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Administration Precautions

Docetaxel Injection, USP is a cytotoxic anticancer drug and, as with other potentially toxic compounds, caution should be exercised when handling and preparing Docetaxel Injection, USP solutions. The use of gloves is recommended. Please refer to [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16.3)].

If Docetaxel Injection, USP or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with the skin, immediately and thoroughly wash with soap and water. If Docetaxel Injection, USP or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with mucosa, immediately and thoroughly wash with water.

Contact of the Docetaxel Injection, USP with plasticized PVC equipment or devices used to prepare solutions for infusion is not recommended. In order to minimize patient exposure to the plasticizer DEHP (di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate), which may be leached from PVC infusion bags or sets, the Docetaxel Injection, USP diluted solution for infusion should be stored in bottles (glass, polypropylene) or plastic bags (polypropylene, polyolefin) and administered through polyethylene-lined administration sets.

Docetaxel Injection, USP requires dilution prior to administration.

Please follow the preparation instructions provided below.

2.9 Preparation and Administration

Docetaxel Injection, USP (10 mg/mL) requires NO prior dilution with a diluent and is ready to add to the infusion solution.

Dilution for Infusion
Aseptically withdraw the required amount of Docetaxel Injection, USP (10 mg docetaxel/mL) with a calibrated syringe and inject into a 250 mL infusion bag or bottle of either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution to produce a final concentration of 0.3 mg/mL to 0.74 mg/mL. If a dose greater than 200 mg of docetaxel is required, use a larger volume of the infusion vehicle so that a concentration of 0.74 mg/mL docetaxel is not exceeded. Thoroughly mix the infusion by gentle manual rotation. As with all parenteral products, Docetaxel Injection, USP should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. If the Docetaxel Injection, USP or diluted solution is not clear or appears to have precipitation, it should be discarded.
The Docetaxel Injection, USP diluted solution for infusion should be administered intravenously as a 1-hour infusion under ambient room temperature (below 25°C) and lighting conditions.

2.10 Stability

Docetaxel Injection, USP infusion solution, if stored between 2°C and 25°C (36°F and 77°F) is stable for 4 hours in either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution. Use within 4 hours including the 1 hour intravenous administration.
Bumetanide

Bumetanide

Dosage should be individualized with careful monitoring of patient response.

Parenteral Administration:

Bumetanide injection may be administered parenterally (IV or IM) to patients in whom gastrointestinal absorption may be impaired or in whom oral administration is not practical.

Parenteral treatment should be terminated and oral treatment instituted as soon as possible.

The usual initial dose is 0.5 mg to 1 mg intravenously or intramuscularly. Intravenous administration should be given over a period of 1 to 2 minutes. If the response to an initial dose is deemed insufficient, a second or third dose may be given at intervals of 2 to 3 hours, but should not exceed a daily dosage of 10 mg.

Miscibility and Parenteral Solutions:

The compatibility tests of bumetanide injection with 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer’s Injection in both glass and plasticized PVC (Viaflex) containers have shown no significant absorption effect with either containers, nor a measurable loss of potency due to degradation of the drug. However, solutions should be freshly prepared and used within 24 hours.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Remodulin

Remodulin

[see Indications and Usage (1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1 Community-Acquired Pneumonia

The recommended dose of Azithromycin for Injection, USP for the treatment of adult patients with community-acquired pneumonia due to the indicated organisms is 500 mg as a single daily dose by the intravenous route for at least two days. Intravenous therapy should be followed by azithromycin by the oral route at a single, daily dose of 500 mg, administered as two 250-mg tablets to complete a 7- to 10-day course of therapy. The timing of the switch to oral therapy should be done at the discretion of the physician and in accordance with clinical response.

2.2 Pelvic Inflammatory Disease

The recommended dose of Azithromycin for Injection, USP for the treatment of adult patients with pelvic inflammatory disease due to the indicated organisms is 500 mg as a single daily dose by the intravenous route for one or two days. Intravenous therapy should be followed by azithromycin by the oral route at a single, daily dose of 250 mg to complete a 7-day course of therapy. The timing of the switch to oral therapy should be done at the discretion of the physician and in accordance with clinical response.

2.3 Preparation of the Solution for Intravenous Administration

The infusate concentration and rate of infusion for Azithromycin for Injection, USP should be either 1 mg/mL over 3 hours or 2 mg/mL over 1 hour. Azithromycin for Injection, USP should not be given as a bolus or as an intramuscular injection.

Reconstitution

Prepare the initial solution of Azithromycin for Injection by adding 4.8 mL of Sterile Water For Injection to the 500 mg vial and shaking the vial until all of the drug is dissolved. Since Azithromycin for Injection is supplied under vacuum, it is recommended that a standard 5 mL (non-automated) syringe be used to ensure that the exact amount of 4.8 mL of Sterile Water is dispensed. Each mL of reconstituted solution contains 100 mg azithromycin and 76.9 mg of citric acid. Reconstituted solution is stable for 24 hours when stored below 30°C or 86°F.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solution should be discarded.

Dilute this solution further prior to administration as instructed below.

Dilution

To provide azithromycin over a concentration range of 1-2 mg/mL, transfer 5 mL of the 100 mg/mL azithromycin solution into the appropriate amount of any of the diluents listed below:

Normal Saline (0.9% sodium chloride)1/2 Normal Saline (0.45% sodium chloride)5% Dextrose in WaterLactated Ringer’s Solution5% Dextrose in 1/2 Normal Saline (0.45% sodium chloride) with 20 mEq KCl5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Solution5% Dextrose in 1/3 Normal Saline (0.3% sodium chloride)5% Dextrose in 1/2 Normal Saline (0.45% sodium chloride)Normosol®-M in 5% DextroseNormosol®-R in 5% Dextrose

When used with the drug reconstitution device, please reference the instructions for assembly and reconstitution.

Final Infusion Solution Concentration (mg/mL)

Amount of Diluent (mL)

1 mg/mL

500 mL

2 mg/mL

250 mL

Other intravenous substances, additives, or medications should not be added to Azithromycin for Injection, or infused simultaneously through the same intravenous line.

Storage

When diluted according to the instructions (1 mg/mL to 2 mg/mL), Azithromycin for Injection is stable for 24 hours at or below room temperature (30°C or 86°F), or for 7 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F).
Bumetanide

Bumetanide

Dosage should be individualized with careful monitoring of patient response.

Parenteral Administration: Bumetanide injection may be administered parenterally (IV or IM) to patients in whom gastrointestinal absorption may be impaired or in whom oral administration is not practical.

Parenteral treatment should be terminated and oral treatment instituted as soon as possible.

The usual initial dose is 0.5 mg to 1 mg intravenously or intramuscularly. Intravenous administration should be given over a period of 1 to 2 minutes. If the response to an initial dose is deemed insufficient, a second or third dose may be given at intervals of 2 to 3 hours, but should not exceed a daily dosage of 10 mg.

Miscibility and Parenteral Solutions: The compatibility tests of bumetanide injection with 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer’s Injection in both glass and plasticized PVC (Viaflex) containers have shown no significant absorption effect with either containers, nor a measurable loss of potency due to degradation of the drug. However, solutions should be freshly prepared and used within 24 hours.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Alfentanil Hydrochlorid...

Alfentanil Hydrochloride

The dosage of alfentanil injection should be individualized and titrated to the desired effect in each patient according to body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, and type and duration of surgical procedure and anesthesia. In obese patients (more than 20% above ideal total body weight), the dosage of alfentanil injection should be determined on the basis of lean body weight. The dose of alfentanil injection should be reduced in elderly or debilitated patients (see PRECAUTIONS).

Vital signs should be monitored routinely.

See Dosage Guidelines for the use of alfentanil injection: 1) by incremental injection as an analgesic adjunct to anesthesia with barbiturate/nitrous oxide/oxygen for short surgical procedures (expected duration of less than one hour); 2) by continuous infusion as a maintenance analgesic with nitrous oxide/oxygen for general surgical procedures; and 3) by intravenous injection in anesthetic doses for the induction of anesthesia for general surgical procedures with a minimum expected duration of 45 minutes; and 4) by intravenous injection as the analgesic component for monitored anesthesia care (MAC).

DOSAGE GUIDELINES

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND TITRATED

FOR USE DURING GENERAL ANESTHESIA

SPONTANEOUSLY BREATHING/ASSISTED VENTILATION

Induction of Analgesia: 8-20 mcg/kg

Maintenance of Analgesia: 3-5 mcg/kg q 5-20 min or 0.5 to 1 mcg/kg/min

Total dose: 8-40 mcg/kg

ASSISTED OR CONTROLLED VENTILATION

Incremental Injection

(To attenuate response

to laryngoscopy and intubation)

Induction of Analgesia: 20-50 mcg/kg

Maintenance of Analgesia: 5-15 mcg/kg q 5-20 min

Total dose: Up to 75 mcg/kg

Continuous Infusion

(To provide attenuation of response

to intubation and incision)

Infusion rates are variable and should be titrated to the desired clinical effect.

SEE INFUSION DOSAGE GUIDELINES BELOW.

Induction of Analgesia: 50-75 mcg/kg

Maintenance of Analgesia: 0.5 to 3 mcg/kg/min (Average rate 1 to 1.5 mcg/kg/min)

Total dose: Dependent on duration of procedure

Anesthetic Induction

Induction of Anesthesia: 130-245 mcg/kg

Maintenance of Anesthesia: 0.5 to 1.5 mcg/kg/min or general anesthetic

Total dose: Dependent on duration of procedure

At these doses, truncal rigidity should be expected and a muscle relaxant should be utilized.

Administer slowly (over 3 minutes).

Concentration of inhalation agents reduced by 30-50% for initial hour.

MONITORED ANESTHESIA CARE (MAC)

For sedated and responsive,

spontaneously breathing patients)

Induction of MAC: 3-8 mcg/kg

Maintenance of MAC: 3-5 mcg/kg q 5-20 min or 0.25 to 1 mcg/kg/min

Total dose: 3-40 mcg/kg

INFUSION DOSAGE

Continuous Infusion: 0.5-3 mcg/kg/min administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen in patients undergoing general surgery. Following an anesthetic induction dose of alfentanil injection, infusion rate requirements are reduced by 30-50% for the first hour of maintenance.

Changes in vital signs that indicate a response to surgical stress or lightening of anesthesia may be controlled by increasing the alfentanil to a maximum of 4 mcg/kg/min and/or administration of bolus doses of 7 mcg/kg. If changes are not controlled after three bolus doses given over a five minute period, a barbiturate, vasodilator, and/or inhalation agent should be used. Infusion rates should always be adjusted downward in the absence of these signs until there is some response to surgical stimulation.

Rather than an increase in infusion rate, 7 mcg/kg bolus doses of alfentanil injection or a potent inhalation agent should be administered in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia within the last 15 minutes of surgery. Alfentanil injection infusion should be discontinued at least 10-15 minutes prior to the end of surgery.

Usage in Children: Clinical data to support the use of alfentanil injection in patients under 12 years of age are not presently available. Therefore, such use is not recommended.

Premedication: The selection of preanesthetic medications should be based upon the needs of the individual patient.

Neuromuscular Blocking Agents: The neuromuscular blocking agent selected should be compatible with the patient’s condition, taking into account the hemodynamic effects of a particular muscle relaxant and the degree of skeletal muscle relaxation required (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS sections).

In patients administered anesthetic (induction) dosages of alfentanil injection, it is essential that qualified personnel and adequate facilities are available for the management of intraoperative and postoperative respiratory depression.

Also see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS sections.

For purposes of administering small volumes of alfentanil injection accurately, the use of a tuberculin syringe or equivalent is recommended.

The physical and chemical compatibility of alfentanil injection have been demonstrated in solution with normal saline, 5% dextrose in normal saline, 5% dextrose in water and Lactated Ringers. Clinical studies of alfentanil injection infusion have been conducted with alfentanil injection diluted to a concentration range of 25 mcg/mL to 80 mcg/mL.

As an example of the preparation of alfentanil injection for infusion, 20 mL of alfentanil injection added to 230 mL of diluent provides 40 mcg/mL solution of alfentanil injection.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

SAFETY AND HANDLING

Alfentanil Injection, USP is supplied in individually sealed dosage forms which pose no known risk to health care providers having incidental contact. Accidental dermal exposure to alfentanil should be treated by rinsing the affected area with water.

Protect from light. Retain in carton until time of use. Store at 20° to 25°C (68 to 77°F). [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.]
Alfentanil Hydrochlorid...

Alfentanil Hydrochloride

The dosage of alfentanil injection should be individualized and titrated to the desired effect in each patient according to body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, and type and duration of surgical procedure and anesthesia. In obese patients (more than 20% above ideal total body weight), the dosage of alfentanil injection should be determined on the basis of lean body weight. The dose of alfentanil injection should be reduced in elderly or debilitated patients (see PRECAUTIONS).

Vital signs should be monitored routinely.

See Dosage Guidelines for the use of alfentanil injection: 1) by incremental injection as an analgesic adjunct to anesthesia with barbiturate/nitrous oxide/oxygen for short surgical procedures (expected duration of less than one hour); 2) by continuous infusion as a maintenance analgesic with nitrous oxide/oxygen for general surgical procedures; and 3) by intravenous injection in anesthetic doses for the induction of anesthesia for general surgical procedures with a minimum expected duration of 45 minutes; and 4) by intravenous injection as the analgesic component for monitored anesthesia care (MAC).

DOSAGE GUIDELINES DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND TITRATED FOR USE DURING GENERAL ANESTHESIA

SPONTANEOUSLY BREATHING/ ASSISTED VENTILATION

Induction of Analgesia: 8-20 mcg/kgMaintenance of Analgesia: 3-5 mcg/kg q 5-20 min or 0.5 to 1 mcg/kg/minTotal dose: 8-40 mcg/kg

ASSISTED OR CONTROLLED VENTILATION

Incremental Injection(To attenuate response to laryngoscopy and intubation)

Induction of Analgesia: 20-50 mcg/kgMaintenance of Analgesia: 5-15 mcg/kg q 5-20 minTotal dose: Up to 75 mcg/kg

Continuous Infusion(To provide attenuation of response to intubation and incision)

Infusion rates are variable and should be titrated to the desired clinical effect. SEE INFUSION DOSAGE GUIDELINES BELOW.Induction of Analgesia: 50-75 mcg/kg.Maintenance of Analgesia: 0.5 to 3 mcg/kg/min (Average rate 1 to 1.5 mcg/kg/min)Total dose: Dependent on duration of procedure

Anesthetic Induction

Induction of Anesthesia:130-245 mcg/kgMaintenance of Anesthesia:0.5 to 1.5 mcg/kg/min or general anestheticTotal dose:Dependent on duration of procedureAt these doses, truncal rigidity should be expected and a muscle relaxant should be utilized. Administer slowly (over 3 minutes).

Concentration of inhalation agents reduced by 30-50% for initial hour.

MONITORED ANESTHESIA CARE (MAC)

For sedated and responsive, spontaneously breathing patients)

Induction of MAC: 3-8 mcg/kgMaintenance of MAC: 3-5 mcg/kg q 5-20 min or 0.25 to 1 mcg/kg/minTotal dose: 3-40 mcg/kg

INFUSION DOSAGE

Continuous Infusion: 0.5-3 mcg/kg/min administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen in patients undergoing general surgery. Following an anesthetic induction dose of alfentanil injection, infusion rate requirements are reduced by 30-50% for the first hour of maintenance. Changes in vital signs that indicate a response to surgical stress or lightening of anesthesia may be controlled by increasing the alfentanil to a maximum of 4 mcg/kg/min and/or administration of bolus doses of 7 mcg/kg. If changes are not controlled after three bolus doses given over a five minute period, a barbiturate, vasodilator, and/or inhalation agent should be used. Infusion rates should always be adjusted downward in the absence of these signs until there is some response to surgical stimulation. Rather than an increase in infusion rate, 7 mcg/kg bolus doses of alfentanil injection or a potent inhalation agent should be administered in response to signs of lightening of anesthesia within the last 15 minutes of surgery. Alfentanil injection infusion should be discontinued at least 10‑15 minutes prior to the end of surgery.

Usage in Children: Clinical data to support the use of alfentanil injection in patients under 12 years of age are not presently available. Therefore, such use is not recommended.

Premedication: The selection of preanesthetic medications should be based upon the needs of the individual patient.

Neuromuscular Blocking Agents: The neuromuscular blocking agent selected should be compatible with the patient’s condition, taking into account the hemodynamic effects of a particular muscle relaxant and the degree of skeletal muscle relaxation required (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS sections).

In patients administered anesthetic (induction) dosages of alfentanil injection, it is essential that qualified personnel and adequate facilities are available for the management of intraoperative and postoperative respiratory depression.

Also see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS sections.

For purposes of administering small volumes of alfentanil injection accurately, the use of a tuberculin syringe or equivalent is recommended.

The physical and chemical compatibility of alfentanil injection have been demonstrated in solution with normal saline, 5% dextrose in normal saline, 5% dextrose in water and Lactated Ringers. Clinical studies of alfentanil injection infusion have been conducted with alfentanil injection diluted to a concentration range of 25 mcg/mL to 80 mcg/mL.

As an example of the preparation of alfentanil injection for infusion, 20 mL of alfentanil injection added to 230 mL of diluent provides 40 mcg/mL solution of alfentanil injection.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

SAFETY AND HANDLING

Alfentanil Injection, USP is supplied in individually sealed dosage forms which pose no known risk to health care providers having incidental contact. Accidental dermal exposure to alfentanil should be treated by rinsing the affected area with water.

Protect from light. Retain in carton until time of use. Store at 20° to 25°C (68 to 77°F). [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.]
Procainamide Hydrochlor...

Procainamide Hydrochloride

Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection is useful for arrhythmias which require immediate suppression and for maintenance of arrhythmia control. Intravenous therapy allows most rapid control of serious arrhythmias, including those following myocardial infarction; it should be carried out in circumstances where close observation and monitoring of the patient are possible, such as in hospital or emergency facilities. Intramuscular administration is less apt to produce temporary high plasma levels but therapeutic plasma levels are not obtained as rapidly as with intravenous administration. Oral procainamide dosage forms are preferable for less urgent arrhythmias as well as for long-term maintenance after initial parenteral PA therapy.

Intramuscular administration may be used as an alternative to the oral route for patients with less threatening arrhythmias but who are nauseated or vomiting, who are ordered to receive nothing by mouth preoperatively, or who may have malabsorptive problems. An initial daily dose of 50 mg per kg body weight may be estimated. This amount should be divided into fractional doses of one-eighth to one-quarter to be injected intramuscularly every three to six hours until oral therapy is possible. If more than three injections are given, the physician may wish to assess patient factors such as age and renal function (see below), clinical response and, if available, blood levels of PA and NAPA in adjusting further doses for that individual. For treatment of arrhythmias associated with anesthesia or surgical operation, the suggested dose is 100 to 500 mg by intramuscular injection.

Intravenous administration of Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection should be done cautiously to avoid a possible hypotensive response (see PRECAUTIONS and OVERDOSAGE). Initial arrhythmia control, under ECG monitoring, may usually be accomplished safely within a half-hour by either of the two methods which follows:

a) Direct injection into a vein or into tubing of an established infusion line should be done slowly at a rate not to exceed 50 mg per minute. It is advisable to dilute either the 100 mg/mL or the 500 mg/mL concentrations of procainamide hydrochloride prior to intravenous injection to facilitate control of dosage rate. Doses of 100 mg may be administered every 5 minutes at this rate until the arrhythmia is suppressed or until 500 mg has been administered, after which it is advisable to wait 10 minutes or longer to allow for more distribution into tissues before resuming.

b) Alternatively, a loading infusion containing 20 mg of Procainamide Hydrochloride per mL (1 g diluted to 50 mL with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP) may be administered at a constant rate of 1 mL per minute for 25 to 30 minutes to deliver 500 to 600 mg of PA. Some effects may be seen after infusion of the first 100 or 200 mg; it is unusual to require more than 600 mg to achieve satisfactory antiarrhythmic effects.

The maximum advisable dosage to be given either by repeated bolus injections or such loading infusion is 1 g.

To maintain therapeutic levels, a more dilute intravenous infusion at a concentration of 2 mg/mL is convenient (1000 mg procainamide HCl in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP), and may be administered at 1 to 3 mL/minute. If daily total fluid intake must be limited, a 4 mg/mL concentration (1 g of Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP) administered at 0.5 to 1.5 mL/minute will deliver an equivalent 2 to 6 mg per minute. The amount needed in a given patient to maintain the therapeutic level should be assessed principally from the clinical response, and will depend upon the patient’s weight and age, renal elimination, hepatic acetylation rate, and cardiac status, but should be adjusted for each patient based upon close observation. A maintenance infusion rate of 50 mcg/min/kg body weight to a person with a normal renal PA elimination half-time of three hours may be expected to produce a plasma level of approximately 6.5 mcg/mL.

Since the principal route for elimination of PA and NAPA is renal excretion, reduced excretion will prolong the half-life of elimination and lower the dose rate needed to maintain therapeutic levels. Advancing age reduces the renal excretion of PA and NAPA independently of reductions in creatinine clearance; compared to normal young adults, there is approximately 25 percent reduction at age 50 and 50 percent at age 75.

Intravenous therapy should be terminated if persistent conduction disturbances or hypotension develop. As soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stabilized, oral antiarrhythmic maintenance therapy is preferable, if indicated and possible. A period of about three to four hours (one half-time for renal elimination, ordinarily) should elapse after the last intravenous dose before administering the first dose of Procainamide Hydrochloride tablets or capsules.

DILUTIONS AND RATES FOR INTRAVENOUS INFUSIONS* Procainamide Hydrochloride Injection, USP

Final Concentration

Infusion Volume†

Procainamide Hydrochloride To Be Added

Infusion Rate

Initial Loading Infusion

20 mg/mL

50 mL

1000 mg

1 mL/min (for up to 25–30 min*)

Maintenance Infusion

2 mg/mL or 4 mg/mL

500 mL 250 mL

1000 mg 1000 mg

1 to 3 mL/min 0.5 to 1.5 mL/min

The maintenance infusion rates are calculated to deliver 2 to 6 mg per minute, depending on body weight, renal elimination rate, and steady-state plasma level needed to maintain control of the arrhythmia*. The 4 mg/mL maintenance concentration may be preferred if total infused volume must be limited.

†(All infusions should be made up to final volume with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.)

*Please see text under DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION for further details. The flow rate of any intravenous procainamide infusion must be monitored closely to avoid transiently high plasma levels and possible hypotension (see PRECAUTIONS).

Parenteral drug products should be examined visually for particulate matter and discoloration (see HOW SUPPLIED) prior to administration.
Enalaprilat

Enalaprilat

FOR INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION ONLY

The dose in hypertension is 1.25 mg every six hours administered intravenously over a five minute period. A clinical response is usually seen within 15 minutes. Peak effects after the first dose may not occur for up to four hours after dosing. The peak effects of the second and subsequent doses may exceed those of the first.

No dosage regimen for enalaprilat injection has been clearly demonstrated to be more effective in treating hypertension than 1.25 mg every six hours. However, in controlled clinical studies in hypertension, doses as high as 5 mg every six hours were well tolerated for up to 36 hours. There has been inadequate experience with doses greater than 20 mg per day.

In studies of patients with hypertension, enalaprilat injection has not been administered for periods longer than 48 hours. In other studies, patients have received enalaprilat injection for as long as seven days.

The dose for patients being converted to enalaprilat injection from oral therapy for hypertension with enalapril maleate is 1.25 mg every six hours. For conversion from intravenous to oral therapy, the recommended initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets is 5 mg once a day with subsequent dosage adjustments as necessary.

Patients on Diuretic Therapy

For patients on diuretic therapy the recommended starting dose for hypertension is 0.625 mg administered intravenously over a five minute period; also see below, Patients at Risk of Excessive Hypotension. A clinical response is usually seen within 15 minutes. Peak effects after the first dose may not occur for up to four hours after dosing, although most of the effect is usually apparent within the first hour. If after one hour there is an inadequate clinical response, the 0.625 mg dose may be repeated. Additional doses of 1.25 mg may be administered at six hour intervals.

For conversion from intravenous to oral therapy, the recommended initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets for patients who have responded to 0.625 mg of enalaprilat every six hours is 2.5 mg once a day with subsequent dosage adjustment as necessary.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

The usual dose of 1.25 mg of enalaprilat every six hours is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance >30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥3 mg/dL), the initial dose is 0.625 mg. (See WARNINGS.)

If after one hour there is an inadequate clinical response, the 0.625 mg dose may be repeated. Additional doses of 1.25 mg may be administered at six hour intervals.

For dialysis patients, see below, Patients at Risk of Excessive Hypotension.

For conversion from intravenous to oral therapy, the recommended initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets is 5 mg once a day for patients with creatinine clearance >30 mL/min and 2.5 mg once daily for patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min. Dosage should then be adjusted according to blood pressure response.

Patients at Risk of Excessive Hypotension

Hypertensive patients at risk of excessive hypotension include those with the following concurrent conditions or characteristics: heart failure, hyponatremia, high dose diuretic therapy, recent intensive diuresis or increase in diuretic dose, renal dialysis, or severe volume and/or salt depletion of any etiology (see WARNINGS). Single doses of enalaprilat as low as 0.2 mg have produced excessive hypotension in normotensive patients with these diagnoses. Because of the potential for an extreme hypotensive response in these patients, therapy should be started under very close medical supervision. The starting dose should be no greater than 0.625 mg administered intravenously over a period of no less than five minutes and preferably longer (up to one hour).

Patients should be followed closely whenever the dose of enalaprilat is adjusted and/or diuretic is increased.

Administration

Enalaprilat Injection should be administered as a slow intravenous infusion, as indicated above. It may be administered as provided or diluted with up to 50 mL of a compatible diluent. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use whenever solution and container permit.

Compatibility and Stability

Enalaprilat Injection as supplied and mixed with the following intravenous diluents has been found to maintain full activity for 24 hours at room temperature:

5 percent Dextrose Injection

0.9 percent Sodium Chloride Injection

0.9 percent Sodium Chloride Injection in 5 percent Dextrose

5 percent Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection

B. Braun ISOLYTE***E.
Kogenate Fs

Kogenate Fs

Clindamycin Injection, USP can be administered by IM (should be used undiluted) or IV injection (should be diluted, see Dilution for IV Use and IV Infusion Rates below). However, the intent of the ADD-VANTAGE vial is for the preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued. (See WARNING box.)

Adults

Parenteral (IM or IV) Administration:

Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens):

600 to 1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspected Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens:

1200 to 2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Dilution and Infusion Rates section below.

Single intramuscular injections of greater than 600 mg are not recommended.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:

To maintain serum clindamycin levels

Rapid infusion rate

Maintenance infusion rate

Above 4 mcg/mL

10 mg/min for 30 min

0.75 mg/min

Above 5 mcg/mL

15 mg/min for 30 min

1.00 mg/min

Above 6 mcg/mL

20 mg/min for 30 min

1.25 mg/min

Neonates (less than 1 month)

15 to 20 mg/kg/day in three to four equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients (1 month of age to 16 years)

Parenteral (IM or IV) Administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride for oral solution or clindamycin hydrochloride capsules when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Dilution for IV Use and Infusion Rates

The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute. The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Dose

Diluent

Time

300 mg

50 mL

10 min

600 mg

50 mL

20 min

900 mg

50 to 100 mL

30 min

1200 mg

100 mL

40 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility

Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of clindamycin phosphate in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions.

Physico-Chemical Stability of Diluted Solutions of Clindamycin

Room temperature: 6, 9, and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe.

b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no farther. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go.
          NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove it. (SEE FIGURE 4.)
3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.


To Prepare Admixture
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.


Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated.
          NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.
6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

Dilution for IV Use and Infusion Rates

The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute. The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Dose

Diluent

Time

300 mg

50 mL

10 min

600 mg

50 mL

20 min

900 mg

50 to 100 mL

30 min

1200 mg

100 mL

40 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility

Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of clindamycin phosphate in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions.

Physico-Chemical Stability of Diluted Solutions of Clindamycin

Room temperature: 6, 9, and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe.

b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no farther. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go.
          NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove it. (SEE FIGURE 4.)
3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.


To Prepare Admixture
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.


Preparation for Administration

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated.
          NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.
6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Neut Sodium Bicarbonate...

Neut Sodium Bicarbonate

One vial (5 mL) of Neut added to a liter (1000 mL) of any of the following Hospira parenteral solutions will increase the pH to a more physiologic range. Specific pH may vary slightly from lot to lot.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Product

List

5% Alcohol in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

1500

2.5% Dextrose Inj., USP

1508

5% Dextrose Inj., USP

1522

10% Dextrose Inj., USP

1530

20% Dextrose Inj., USP

1535

Ringer’s Injection, USP

1582

0.9% Sodium Chloride Inj., USP

1583

Sodium Lactate Inj., USP (1/6 Molar)

1587

Addition of one vial of Neut to one-half liter (500 mL) is recommended to achieve a more physiologic pH of the following Hospira parenteral solutions:

Product

List

6% Dextran 70 and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

1505

6% Dextran 70 and 5% Dextrose Injection

1507

Note: Some products, e.g., AminosynTM solutions and those IonosolTM and NormosolTM formulas containing dextrose will NOT be brought to near physiologic pH by the addition of Neut. This is due to the relatively high buffer capacity of these fluids.

COMPATIBILITY & EFFECTIVENESS OF NEUT WITH ADDITIVES TO 5% DEXTROSE INJECTION (D5-W) When medications are added to intravenous solutions, the resultant admixtures may or may not be compatible in solutions containing Neut (4% sodium bicarbonate additive solution).

Following is a list of medications each added to one liter of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP (D5‑W) classified according to their effect with Neut (4% sodium bicarbonate additive solution).

1. Neut Compatible with Admixtures for 24 Hours

Conc./liter

    ACTHAR® (ACTH)

40 units

    Aqua-Mephyton® (Vitamin K1)

10 mg

    Aramine® (metaraminol) Bitartrate

100 mg†

    Atropine Sulfate

0.4 mg

    Calcium Chloride

1 g

    Calcium Gluceptate

1.1 g

    Compazine® (prochlorperazine) Edisylate

10 mg

    Crystodigin® (digitoxin)

0.2 mg

    Demerol® (meperidine) HCl

100 mg

    Ergonovine Maleate

0.2 mg

    Erythrocin® (erythromycin) Lactobionate

1 g

    Fungizone® (amphotericin B)

50 mg

    Ilotycin® (erythromycin) Gluceptate

1 g

    Innovar® (droperidol and fentanyl)

1.0 mL

    Keflin® (cephalothin) Sodium

4 g

    Lidocaine HCl

1 g

    M.V.I.TM (multivitamin infusion)

10 mL†

    Neosynephrine® (phenylephrine) HCl

10 mg

    Panheparin® (heparin sodium)

20,000 units

    Penicillin G Potassium

100,000,000 units

    Pitocin® (oxytocin)

5 units

    Potassium Chloride

120 mEq

    Sodium Iodide

1 g

    (promazine) HCl

100 mg

    Vancocin® (vancomycin) HCl

500 mg

    Wydase® (hyaluronidase)

150 units

†Requires 2 vials of Neut to bring admixture to approximate neutrality.

2. Neut Incompatible –Additive Inactivated at Neutral pH

Conc./liter

    Epinephrine

4 mg

    IsuprelTM (isoproterenol) HCl

1 mg

    LevophedTM (levarterenol) Bitartrate

8 mg

    QuelicinTM (succinylcholine chloride)

1 g

3. Neut Ineffective -Additive High in Titratable Acidity

Conc./liter

    Achromycin® (tetracycline) HCl

500 mg

    Aureomycin® (chlortetracycline) HCl

500 mg

    Bejectal w/C (B complex and C)

10 mL

    Kantrex® (kanamycin) Sulfate

1 g

4. Neut Not Indicated –Admixture Already At or Near Neutrality

Conc./liter

    Gantrisin® (sulfisoxazole) Diethanolamine

4 g

    Hydrocortone® (hydrocortisone) Phosphate

100 mg

    Prostaphlin® (oxacillin) Sodium

500 mg

    Sodium Bicarbonate

3.75 g

    Solu-Cortef ® (hydrocortisone sodium succinate)

250 mg

It should be noted that the admixtures were evaluated for physical compatibility, not for pharmacological compatibility. It, therefore, would be erroneous to circumvent medical judgment which must be involved in administering any solution that appears to be compatible on the basis of having no visible haze or precipitate. The inclusion of drugs in this study of their compatibility in solution does not imply their therapeutic usefulness or safety. This matter remains the judgment of the prescribing physician.

NOTE: The compatibility information contained herein is based on the studies involving Hospira dextrose only. Variations in compatibility could occur due to lot-to-lot variations or formula changes in the additives or dextrose solutions of other manufacturers.
Enalaprilat

Enalaprilat

FOR INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION ONLY

The dose in hypertension is 1.25 mg every six hours administered intravenously over a five minute period. A clinical response is usually seen within 15 minutes. Peak effects after the first dose may not occur for up to four hours after dosing. The peak effects of the second and subsequent doses may exceed those of the first.

No dosage regimen for enalaprilat injection has been clearly demonstrated to be more effective in treating hypertension than 1.25 mg every six hours. However, in controlled clinical studies in hypertension, doses as high as 5 mg every six hours were well tolerated for up to 36 hours. There has been inadequate experience with doses greater than 20 mg per day.

In studies of patients with hypertension, enalaprilat injection has not been administered for periods longer than 48 hours. In other studies, patients have received enalaprilat injection for as long as seven days.

The dose for patients being converted to enalaprilat injection from oral therapy for hypertension with enalapril maleate is 1.25 mg every six hours. For conversion from intravenous to oral therapy, the recommended initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets is 5 mg once a day with subsequent dosage adjustments as necessary.

Patients on Diuretic Therapy

For patients on diuretic therapy the recommended starting dose for hypertension is 0.625 mg administered intravenously over a five minute period; also see below, Patients at Risk of Excessive Hypotension. A clinical response is usually seen within 15 minutes. Peak effects after the first dose may not occur for up to four hours after dosing, although most of the effect is usually apparent within the first hour. If after one hour there is an inadequate clinical response, the 0.625 mg dose may be repeated. Additional doses of 1.25 mg may be administered at six hour intervals.

For conversion from intravenous to oral therapy, the recommended initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets for patients who have responded to 0.625 mg of enalaprilat every six hours is 2.5 mg once a day with subsequent dosage adjustment as necessary.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

The usual dose of 1.25 mg of enalaprilat every six hours is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance >30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥3 mg/dL), the initial dose is 0.625 mg. (See WARNINGS.)

If after one hour there is an inadequate clinical response, the 0.625 mg dose may be repeated. Additional doses of 1.25 mg may be administered at six hour intervals.

For dialysis patients, see below, Patients at Risk of Excessive Hypotension.

For conversion from intravenous to oral therapy, the recommended initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets is 5 mg once a day for patients with creatinine clearance >30 mL/min and 2.5 mg once daily for patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min. Dosage should then be adjusted according to blood pressure response.

Patients at Risk of Excessive Hypotension

Hypertensive patients at risk of excessive hypotension include those with the following concurrent conditions or characteristics: heart failure, hyponatremia, high dose diuretic therapy, recent intensive diuresis or increase in diuretic dose, renal dialysis, or severe volume and/or salt depletion of any etiology (see WARNINGS). Single doses of enalaprilat as low as 0.2 mg have produced excessive hypotension in normotensive patients with these diagnoses. Because of the potential for an extreme hypotensive response in these patients, therapy should be started under very close medical supervision. The starting dose should be no greater than 0.625 mg administered intravenously over a period of no less than five minutes and preferably longer (up to one hour).

Patients should be followed closely whenever the dose of enalaprilat is adjusted and/or diuretic is increased.

Administration

Enalaprilat Injection should be administered as a slow intravenous infusion, as indicated above. It may be administered as provided or diluted with up to 50 mL of a compatible diluent. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use whenever solution and container permit.

Compatibility and Stability

Enalaprilat Injection as supplied and mixed with the following intravenous diluents has been found to maintain full activity for 24 hours at room temperature:

5 percent Dextrose Injection 0.9 percent Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9 percent Sodium Chloride Injection in 5 percent Dextrose 5 percent Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection B. Braun ISOLYTE***E.
Quelicin

Quelicin

The dosage of succinylcholine should be individualized and should always be determined by the clinician after careful assessment of the patient (see WARNINGS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear and colorless should not be used.

Adults:

For Short Surgical Procedures: The average dose required to produce neuromuscular blockade and to facilitate tracheal intubation is 0.6 mg/kg Quelicin (succinylcholine chloride) Injection given intravenously. The optimum dose will vary among individuals and may be from 0.3 to 1.1 mg/kg for adults. Following administration of doses in this range, neuromuscular blockade develops in about 1 minute; maximum blockade may persist for about 2 minutes, after which recovery takes place within 4 to 6 minutes. However, very large doses may result in more prolonged blockade. A 5 to 10 mg test dose may be used to determine the sensitivity of the patient and the individual recovery time (see PRECAUTIONS).

For Long Surgical Procedures: The dose of succinylcholine administered by infusion depends upon the duration of the surgical procedure and the need for muscle relaxation. The average rate for an adult ranges between 2.5 and 4.3 mg per minute.

Solutions containing from 1 to 2 mg per mL succinylcholine have commonly been used for continuous infusion. The more dilute solution (1 mg per mL) is probably preferable from the standpoint of ease of control of the rate of administration of the drug and, hence, of relaxation. This intravenous solution containing 1 mg per mL may be administered at a rate of 0.5 mg (0.5 mL) to 10 mg (10 mL) per minute to obtain the required amount of relaxation. The amount required per minute will depend upon the individual response as well as the degree of relaxation required. Avoid overburdening the circulation with a large volume of fluid. It is recommended that neuromuscular function be carefully monitored with a peripheral nerve stimulator when using succinylcholine by infusion in order to avoid overdose, detect development of Phase II block, follow its rate of recovery, and assess the effects of reversing agents (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intermittent intravenous injections of succinylcholine may also be used to provide muscle relaxation for long procedures. An intravenous injection of 0.3 to 1.1 mg/kg may be given initially, followed, at appropriate intervals, by further injections of 0.04 to 0.07 mg/kg to maintain the degree of relaxation required.

Pediatrics: For emergency tracheal intubation or in instances where immediate securing of the airway is necessary, the intravenous dose of succinylcholine is 2 mg/kg for infants and small pediatric patients; for older pediatric patients and adolescents the dose is 1 mg/kg (see BOX WARNING and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). It is currently known that the effective dose of succinylcholine in pediatric patients may be higher than that predicted by body weight dosing alone. For example, the usual adult IV dose of 0.6 mg/kg is comparable to a dose of 2-3 mg/kg in neonates and infants to 6 months and 1-2 mg/kg in infants up to 2 years of age. This is thought to be due to the relatively large volume of distribution in the pediatric patient versus the adult patient.

Rarely, I.V. bolus administration of succinylcholine in infants and pediatric patients may result in malignant ventricular arrythmias and cardiac arrest secondary to acute rhabdomyolysis with hyperkalemia. In such situations, an underlying myopathy should be suspected.

Intravenous bolus administration of succinylcholine in infants or pediatric patients may result in profound bradycardia or, rarely, asystole. As in adults, the incidence of bradycardia in pediatric patients is higher following a second dose of succinylcholine. Whereas bradycardia is common in pediatric patients after an initial dose of 1.5 mg/kg, bradycardia is seen in adults only after repeated exposure. The occurrence of bradyarrhythmias may be reduced by pretreatment with atropine (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Intramuscular Use: If necessary, succinylcholine may be given intramuscularly to infants, older pediatric patients or adults when a suitable vein is inaccessible. A dose of up to 3 to 4 mg/kg may be given, but not more than 150 mg total dose should be administered by this route. The onset of effect of succinylcholine given intramuscularly is usually observed in about 2 to 3 minutes.

Compatibility and Admixtures: Succinylcholine is acidic (pH 3.5) and should not be mixed with alkaline solutions having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions). Admixtures containing 1 to 2 mg/mL may be prepared by adding 1 g Quelicin to 1000 or 500 mL sterile solution, such as 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Admixtures of Quelicin must be used within 24 hours after preparation. Aseptic techniques should be used to prepare the diluted product. Admixtures of Quelicin should be prepared for single patient use only. The unused portion of diluted Quelicin should be discarded.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Propofol

Propofol

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (See PRECAUTIONS section.)

Propofol blood concentrations at steady state are generally proportional to infusion rates, especially in individual patients. Undesirable effects such as cardiorespiratory depression are likely to occur at higher blood concentrations which result from bolus dosing or rapid increases in the infusion rate. An adequate interval (3 to 5 minutes) must be allowed between dose adjustments to allow for and assess the clinical effects.

When administering propofol injectable emulsion by infusion, syringe or volumetric pumps are recommended to provide controlled infusion rates. When infusing propofol injectable emulsion to patients undergoing magnetic resonance imaging, metered control devices may be utilized if mechanical pumps are impractical.

Changes in vital signs indicating a stress response to surgical stimulation or the emergence from anesthesia may be controlled by the administration of 25 mg (2.5 mL) to 50 mg (5 mL) incremental boluses and/or by increasing the infusion rate of propofol injectable emulsion.

For minor surgical procedures (e.g., body surface) nitrous oxide (60% to 70%) can be combined with a variable rate propofol injectable emulsion infusion to provide satisfactory anesthesia. With more stimulating surgical procedures (e.g., intra-abdominal), or if supplementation with nitrous oxide is not provided, administration rate(s) of propofol injectable emulsion and/or opioids should be increased in order to provide adequate anesthesia.

Infusion rates should always be titrated downward in the absence of clinical signs of light anesthesia until a mild response to surgical stimulation is obtained in order to avoid administration of propofol injectable emulsion at rates higher than are clinically necessary. Generally, rates of 50 to 100 mcg/kg/min in adults should be achieved during maintenance in order to optimize recovery time.

Other drugs that cause CNS depression (hypnotics/sedatives, inhalational anesthetics, and opioids) can increase CNS depression induced by propofol. Morphine premedication (0.15 mg/kg) with nitrous oxide 67% in oxygen has been shown to decrease the necessary propofol injection maintenance infusion rate and therapeutic blood concentrations when compared to non-narcotic (lorazepam) premedication.

Induction of General Anesthesia

Adult Patients: Most adult patients under 55 years of age and classified as ASA-PS I or II require 2 to 2.5 mg/kg of propofol injectable emulsion for induction when unpremedicated or when premedicated with oral benzodiazepines or intramuscular opioids. For induction, propofol injectable emulsion should be titrated (approximately 40 mg every 10 seconds) against the response of the patient until the clinical signs show the onset of anesthesia. As with other sedative-hypnotic agents, the amount of intravenous opioid and/or benzodiazepine premedication will influence the response of the patient to an induction dose of propofol injectable emulsion.

Elderly, Debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV Patients: It is important to be familiar and experienced with the intravenous use of propofol injectable emulsion before treating elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients. Due to the reduced clearance and higher blood concentrations, most of these patients require approximately 1 to 1.5 mg/kg (approximately 20 mg every 10 seconds) of propofol injectable emulsion for induction of anesthesia according to their condition and responses. A rapid bolus should not be used, as this will increase the likelihood of undesirable cardiorespiratory depression including hypotension, apnea, airway obstruction, and/or oxygen desaturation. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.)

Pediatric Patients: Most patients aged 3 years through 16 years and classified ASA-PS I or II require 2.5 to 3.5 mg/kg of propofol injectable emulsion for induction when unpremedicated or when lightly premedicated with oral benzodiazepines or intramuscular opioids. Within this dosage range, younger pediatric patients may require higher induction doses than older pediatric patients. As with other sedative-hypnotic agents, the amount of intravenous opioid and/or benzodiazepine premedication will influence the response of the patient to an induction dose of propofol injectable emulsion. A lower dosage is recommended for pediatric patients classified as ASA-PS III or IV. Attention should be paid to minimize pain on injection when administering propofol injectable emulsion to pediatric patients. Boluses of propofol injectable emulsion may be administered via small veins if pretreated with lidocaine or via antecubital or larger veins. (See PRECAUTIONS - General.)

Neurosurgical Patients: Slower induction is recommended using boluses of 20 mg every 10 seconds. Slower boluses or infusions of propofol injectable emulsion for induction of anesthesia, titrated to clinical responses, will generally result in reduced induction dosage requirements (1 to 2 mg/kg). (See PRECAUTIONS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.)

Cardiac Anesthesia: Propofol injectable emulsion has been well-studied in patients with coronary artery disease, but experience in patients with hemodynamically significant valvular or congenital heart disease is limited. As with other anesthetic and sedative-hypnotic agents, propofol injectable emulsion in healthy patients causes a decrease in blood pressure that is secondary to decreases in preload (ventricular filling volume at the end of the diastole) and afterload (arterial resistance at the beginning of the systole). The magnitude of these changes is proportional to the blood and effect site concentrations achieved. These concentrations depend upon the dose and speed of the induction and maintenance infusion rates.

In addition, lower heart rates are observed during maintenance with propofol injectable emulsion, possibly due to reduction of the sympathetic activity and/or resetting of the baroreceptor reflexes. Therefore, anticholinergic agents should be administered when increases in vagal tone are anticipated.

As with other anesthetic agents, propofol injectable emulsion reduces myocardial oxygen consumption. Further studies are needed to confirm and delineate the extent of these effects on the myocardium and the coronary vascular system.

Morphine premedication (0.15 mg/kg) with nitrous oxide 67% in oxygen has been shown to decrease the necessary propofol injectable emulsion maintenance infusion rates and therapeutic blood concentrations when compared to non-narcotic (lorazepam) premedication. The rate of propofol injectable emulsion administration should be determined based on the patient’s premedication and adjusted according to clinical responses.

A rapid bolus induction should be avoided. A slow rate of approximately 20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (0.5 to 1.5 mg/kg) should be used. In order to assure adequate anesthesia, when propofol injectable emulsion is used as the primary agent, maintenance infusion rates should not be less than 100 mcg/kg/min and should be supplemented with analgesic levels of continuous opioid administration. When an opioid is used as the primary agent, propofol injectable emulsion maintenance rates should not be less than 50 mcg/kg/min, and care should be taken to ensure amnesia. Higher doses of propofol injectable emulsion will reduce the opioid requirements (see TABLE 4). When propofol injectable emulsion is used as the primary anesthetic, it should not be administered with the high-dose opioid technique as this may increase the likelihood of hypotension (see PRECAUTIONS - Cardiac Anesthesia).
TABLE 4. CARDIAC ANESTHESIA TECHNIQUES   a OPIOID is defined in terms of fentanyl equivalents, i.e.,     1 mcg of fentanyl                                 =                       5 mcg of alfentanil (for bolus)                                                                  =                       10 mcg of alfentanil (for maintenance)                                                                 OR                                                                  =                       0.1 mcg of sufentanil  b Care should be taken to ensure amnesia.
Primary Agent

Rate

Secondary Agent/Rate (Following Induction with Primary Agent)

Propofol Injectable Emulsion

OPIOIDa/0.05 - 0.075 mcg/kg/min (no bolus)

  Preinduction

  Anxiolysis

25 mcg/kg/min

  Induction

0.5 - 1.5 mg/kg

Over 60 sec

  Maintenance

  (Titrated to Clinical Response)

100 - 150 mcg/kg/min

OPIOIDb

Propofol Injectable Emulsion/50 - 100 mcg/kg/min (no bolus)

  Induction

25 - 50 mcg/kg

  Maintenance

0.2 - 0.3 mcg/kg/min

Maintenance of General Anesthesia

Adult Patients: In adults, anesthesia can be maintained by administering propofol injectable emulsion by infusion or intermittent I.V. bolus injection. The patient’s clinical response will determine the infusion rate or the amount and frequency of incremental injections.

Continuous Infusion: Propofol injectable emulsion 100 to 200 mcg/kg/min administered in a variable rate infusion with 60% to 70% nitrous oxide and oxygen provides anesthesia for patients undergoing general surgery. Maintenance by infusion of propofol injectable emulsion should immediately follow the induction dose in order to provide satisfactory or continuous anesthesia during the induction phase. During this initial period following the induction dose, higher rates of infusion are generally required (150 to 200 mcg/kg/min) for the first 10 to 15 minutes. Infusion rates should subsequently be decreased 30% to 50% during the first half-hour of maintenance. Generally, rates of 50 to 100 mcg/kg/min in adults should be achieved during maintenance in order to optimize recovery times.

Other drugs that cause CNS depression (hypnotics/sedatives, inhalational anesthetics, and opioids) can increase the CNS depression induced by propofol.

Intermittent Bolus: Increments of propofol injectable emulsion 25 mg (2.5 mL) to 50 mg (5 mL) may be administered with nitrous oxide in adult patients undergoing general surgery. The incremental boluses should be administered when changes in vital signs indicate a response to surgical stimulation or light anesthesia.

Pediatric Patients: Propofol injectable emulsion administered as a variable rate infusion supplemented with nitrous oxide 60% to 70% provides satisfactory anesthesia for most children 2 months of age or older, ASA-PS I or II, undergoing general anesthesia.

In general, for the pediatric population, maintenance by infusion of propofol injectable emulsion at a rate of 200 to 300 mcg/kg/min should immediately follow the induction dose. Following the first half-hour of maintenance, infusion rates of 125 to 150 mcg/kg/min are typically needed. Propofol injectable emulsion should be titrated to achieve the desired clinical effect. Younger pediatric patients may require higher maintenance infusion rates than older pediatric patients. (See Clinical Trials - TABLE 2.)

Propofol injectable emulsion has been used with a variety of agents commonly used in anesthesia such as atropine, scopolamine, glycopyrrolate, diazepam, depolarizing and nondepolarizing muscle relaxants, and opioid analgesics, as well as with inhalational and regional anesthetic agents.

In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid bolus doses should not be used, as this will increase cardiorespiratory effects including hypotension, apnea, airway obstruction, and oxygen desaturation.

Monitored Anesthesia Care (MAC) Sedation

Adult Patients: When propofol injectable emulsion is administered for MAC sedation, rates of administration should be individualized and titrated to clinical response. In most patients, the rates of propofol injectable emulsion administration will be in the range of 25 to 75 mcg/kg/min.

During initiation of MAC sedation, slow infusion or slow injection techniques are preferable over rapid bolus administration. During maintenance of MAC sedation, a variable rate infusion is preferable over intermittent bolus dose administration. In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose administration should not be used for MAC sedation. (See WARNINGS.) A rapid bolus injection can result in undesirable cardiorespiratory depression including hypotension, apnea, airway obstruction, and oxygen desaturation.

Initiation of MAC Sedation: For initiation of MAC sedation, either an infusion or a slow injection method may be utilized while closely monitoring cardiorespiratory function. With the infusion method, sedation may be initiated by infusing propofol injectable emulsion at 100 to 150 mcg/kg/min (6 to 9 mg/kg/h) for a period of 3 to 5 minutes and titrating to the desired clinical effect while closely monitoring respiratory function. With the slow injection method for initiation, patients will require approximately 0.5 mg/kg administered over 3 to 5 minutes and titrated to clinical responses. When propofol injectable emulsion is administered slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, most patients will be adequately sedated, and the peak drug effect can be achieved while minimizing undesirable cardiorespiratory effects occurring at high plasma levels.

In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose administration should not be used for MAC sedation. (See WARNINGS.) The rate of administration should be over 3-5 minutes and the dosage of propofol injectable emulsion should be reduced to approximately 80% of the usual adult dosage in these patients according to their condition, responses, and changes in vital signs. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.)

Maintenance of MAC Sedation: For maintenance of sedation, a variable rate infusion method is preferable over an intermittent bolus dose method. With the variable rate infusion method, patients will generally require maintenance rates of 25 to 75 mcg/kg/min (1.5 to 4.5 mg/kg/h) during the first 10 to 15 minutes of sedation maintenance. Infusion rates should subsequently be decreased over time to 25 to 50 mcg/kg/min and adjusted to clinical responses. In titrating to clinical effect, allow approximately 2 minutes for onset of peak drug effect.

Infusion rates should always be titrated downward in the absence of clinical signs of light sedation until mild responses to stimulation are obtained in order to avoid sedative administration of propofol injectable emulsion at rates higher than are clinically necessary.

If the intermittent bolus dose method is used, increments of propofol injectable emulsion 10 mg (1 mL) or 20 mg (2 mL) can be administered and titrated to desired clinical effect. With the intermittent bolus method of sedation maintenance, there is increased potential for respiratory depression, transient increases in sedation depth, and prolongation of recovery.

In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose administration should not be used for MAC sedation. (See WARNINGS.) The rate of administration and the dosage of propofol injectable emulsion should be reduced to approximately 80% of the usual adult dosage in these patients according to their condition, responses, and changes in vital signs. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.)

Propofol injectable emulsion can be administered as the sole agent for maintenance of MAC sedation during surgical/diagnostic procedures. When propofol injectable emulsion sedation is supplemented with opioid and/or benzodiazepine medications, these agents increase the sedative and respiratory effects of propofol injectable emulsion and may also result in a slower recovery profile. (See PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions.)

ICU Sedation: (See WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION - Handling Procedures.)

Abrupt discontinuation of propofol injectable emulsion prior to weaning or for daily evaluation of sedation levels should be avoided. This may result in rapid awakening with associated anxiety, agitation, and resistance to mechanical ventilation. Infusions of propofol injectable emulsion should be adjusted to assure a minimal level of sedation is maintained throughout the weaning process and when assessing the level of sedation. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Adult Patients: For intubated, mechanically ventilated adult patients, Intensive Care Unit (ICU) sedation should be initiated slowly with a continuous infusion in order to titrate to desired clinical effect and minimize hypotension. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.)

Most adult ICU patients recovering from the effects of general anesthesia or deep sedation will require maintenance rates of 5 to 50 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 3 mg/kg/h) individualized and titrated to clinical response. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.) With medical ICU patients or patients who have recovered from the effects of general anesthesia or deep sedation, the rate of administration of 50 mcg/kg/min or higher may be required to achieve adequate sedation. These higher rates of administration may increase the likelihood of patients developing hypotension.

Dosage and rate of administration should be individualized and titrated to the desired effect, according to clinically relevant factors including the patient’s underlying medical problems, preinduction and concomitant medications, age, ASA-PS classification, and level of debilitation of the patient. The elderly, debilitated, and ASA-PS III or IV patients may have exaggerated hemodynamic and respiratory responses to rapid bolus doses. (See WARNINGS.)

Propofol injectable emulsion should be individualized according to the patient’s condition and response, blood lipid profile, and vital signs. (See PRECAUTIONS - Intensive Care Unit Sedation.) For intubated, mechanically ventilated adult patients, Intensive Care Unit (ICU) sedation should be initiated slowly with a continuous infusion in order to titrate to desired clinical effect and minimize hypotension. When indicated, initiation of sedation should begin at 5 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/h). The infusion rate should be increased by increments of 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 0.6 mg/kg/h) until the desired level of sedation is achieved. A minimum period of 5 minutes between adjustments should be allowed for onset of peak drug effect. Most adult patients require maintenance rates of 5 to 50 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 3 mg/kg/h) or higher. Dosages of propofol injectable emulsion should be reduced in patients who have received large dosages of narcotics. Conversely, the propofol injectable emulsion dosage requirement may be reduced by adequate management of pain with analgesic agents. As with other sedative medications, there is interpatient variability in dosage requirements, and these requirements may change with time. (See SUMMARY OF DOSAGE GUIDELINES.) Evaluation of level of sedation and assessment of CNS function should be carried out daily throughout maintenance to determine the minimum dose of propofol required for sedation (see Clinical Trials - Intensive Care Unit (ICU) Sedation). Bolus administration of 10 or 20 mg should only be used to rapidly increase depth of sedation in patients where hypotension is not likely to occur. Patients with compromised myocardial function, intravascular volume depletion, or abnormally low vascular tone (e.g., sepsis) may be more susceptible to hypotension. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

SUMMARY OF DOSAGE GUIDELINES

Dosages and rates of administration in the following table should be individualized and titrated to clinical response. Safety and dosing requirements for induction of anesthesia in pediatric patients have only been established for children 3 years of age or older. Safety and dosing requirements for the maintenance of anesthesia have only been established for children 2 months of age and older.

For complete dosage information, see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.

INDICATION

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

Induction of General Anesthesia

Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age: 40 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (2 to 2.5 mg/kg).

Elderly, Debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV Patients: 20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (1 to 1.5 mg/kg).

Cardiac Anesthesia: 20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (0.5 to 1.5 mg/kg).

Neurosurgical Patients: 20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (1 to 2 mg/kg).

Pediatric Patients - healthy, from 3 years to 16 years of age: 2.5 to 3.5 mg/kg administered over 20 to 30 seconds.

(See PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY - Pediatrics.)

Maintenance of General Anesthesia: Infusion

Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age: 100 to 200 mcg/kg/min (6 to 12 mg/kg/h).

Elderly, Debilitated, ASA-PS III or IV Patients: 50 to 100 mcg/kg/min (3 to 6 mg/kg/h).

Cardiac Anesthesia: Most patients require:

Primary Propofol Injectable Emulsion with Secondary Opioid -100 to 150 mcg/kg/min.

Low-dose Propofol Injectable Emulsion with Primary Opioid - 50 to 100 mcg/kg/min. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, TABLE 4.)

Neurosurgical Patients: 100 to 200 mcg/kg/min (6 to 12 mg/kg/h).

Pediatric Patients - healthy, from 2 months of age to 16 years of age: 125 to 300 mcg/kg/min (7.5 to 18 mg/kg/h).

Following the first half hour of maintenance, if clinical signs of light anesthesia are not present, the infusion rate should be decreased. (See PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY - Pediatrics.)

Maintenance of General Anesthesia: Intermittent Bolus

Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age: Increments of 20 to 50 mg as needed.

Initiation of MAC Sedation

Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age: Slow infusion or slow injection techniques are recommended to avoid apnea or hypotension. Most patients require an infusion of 100 to 150 mcg/kg/min (6 to 9 mg/kg/h) for 3 to 5 minutes or a slow injection of 0.5 mg/kg over 3 to 5 minutes followed immediately by a maintenance infusion.

Elderly, Debilitated, Neurosurgical, or ASA-PS III or IV Patients: Most patients require dosages similar to healthy adults. Rapid boluses are to be avoided. (See WARNINGS.)

Maintenance of MAC Sedation

Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age: A variable rate infusion technique is preferable over an intermittent bolus technique. Most patients require an infusion of 25 to 75 mcg/kg/min (1.5 to 4.5 mg/kg/h) or incremental bolus doses of 10 mg or 20 mg.

In Elderly, Debilitated, Neurosurgical, or ASA-PS III/IV Patients: Most patients require 80% of the usual adult dose. A rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose should not be used. (See WARNINGS.)

Initiation and Maintenance of ICU Sedation in Intubated, Mechanically Ventilated

Adult Patients – Because of the residual effects of previous anesthetic or sedative agents, in most patients the initial infusion should be 5 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/h) for at least 5 minutes. Subsequent increments of 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 0.6 mg/kg/h) over 5 to 10 minutes may be used until desired clinical effect is achieved. Maintenance rates of 5 to 50 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 3 mg/kg/h) or higher may be required.

Evaluation of clinical effect and assessment of CNS function should be carried out daily throughout maintenance to determine the minimum dose of propofol injectable emulsion required for sedation.

The tubing and any unused portions of propofol injectable emulsion should be discarded after 12 hours because propofol injectable emulsion contains no preservatives and is capable of supporting growth of microorganisms. (See WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.)

Administration with Lidocaine: If lidocaine is to be administered to minimize pain on injection of propofol, it is recommended that it be administered prior to propofol administration or that it be added to propofol immediately before administration and in quantities not exceeding 20 mg lidocaine/200 mg propofol.

Compatibility and Stability: Propofol injectable emulsion should not be mixed with other therapeutic agents prior to administration.

Dilution Prior to Administration: Propofol injectable emulsion is provided as a ready-to-use formulation. However, should dilution be necessary, it should only be diluted with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, and it should not be diluted to a concentration less than 2 mg/mL because it is an emulsion. In diluted form it has been shown to be more stable when in contact with glass than with plastic (95% potency after 2 hours of running infusion in plastic).

Administration with Other Fluids: Compatibility of propofol injectable emulsion with the coadministration of blood/serum/plasma has not been established. (See WARNINGS.) When administered using a y-type infusion set, propofol injectable emulsion has been shown to be compatible with the following intravenous fluids.
– 5% Dextrose Injection, USP – Lactated Ringers Injection, USP – Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection – 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP – 5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP
Handling Procedures

General

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Clinical experience with the use of in-line filters and propofol injectable emulsion during anesthesia or ICU/MAC sedation is limited. Propofol injectable emulsion should only be administered through a filter with a pore size of 5 micron or greater unless it has been demonstrated that the filter does not restrict the flow of propofol injectable emulsion and/or cause the breakdown of the emulsion. Filters should be used with caution and where clinically appropriate. Continuous monitoring is necessary due to the potential for restricted flow and/or breakdown of the emulsion.

Do not use if there is evidence of separation of the phases of the emulsion.

Rare cases of self-administration of propofol injectable emulsion, by health care professionals have been reported, including some fatalities. (See DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE.)

Strict aseptic technique must always be maintained during handling. Propofol injectable emulsion is a single-use parenteral product which contains benzyl alcohol 1.5 mg/mL and sodium benzoate 0.7 mg/mL to inhibit the rate of growth of microorganisms, up to 12 hours, in the event of accidental extrinsic contamination. However, propofol injectable emulsion can still support the growth of microorganisms as it is not an antimicrobially preserved product under USP standards. Accordingly, strict aseptic technique must still be adhered to. Do not use if contamination is suspected. Discard unused portions as directed within the required time limits (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION – Handling Procedures). There have been reports in which failure to use aseptic technique when handling propofol injectable emulsion was associated with microbial contamination of the product and with fever, infection/sepsis, other life-threatening illness, and/or death.

Propofol injectable emulsion, with benzyl alcohol, inhibits microbial growth for up to 12 hours, as demonstrated by test data for representative USP microorganisms.

Guidelines for Aseptic Technique for General Anesthesia/MAC Sedation

Propofol should be prepared for use just prior to initiation of each individual anesthetic/sedative procedure. The vial rubber stopper should be disinfected using 70% isopropyl alcohol. Propofol should be drawn into sterile syringes immediately after vials are opened. When withdrawing propofol from vials, a sterile vent spike should be used. The syringe(s) should be labeled with appropriate information including the date and time the vial was opened. Administration should commence promptly and be completed within 12 hours after the vials have been opened.

Propofol injectable emulsion should be prepared for single-patient use only. Any unused portions of propofol injectable emulsion, reservoirs, dedicated administration tubing and/or solutions containing propofol injectable emulsion must be discarded at the end of the anesthetic procedure or at 12 hours, whichever occurs sooner. The I.V. line should be flushed every 12 hours and at the end of the anesthetic procedure to remove residual propofol injectable emulsion.

Guidelines for Aseptic Technique for ICU Sedation

Propofol injectable emulsion should be prepared for single-patient use only. When propofol injectable emulsion is administered directly from the vial, strict aseptic techniques must be followed. The vial rubber stopper should be disinfected using 70% isopropyl alcohol. A sterile vent spike and sterile tubing must be used for administration of propofol injectable emulsion. As with other lipid emulsions, the number of I.V. line manipulations should be minimized. Administration should commence promptly and must be completed within 12 hours after the vial has been spiked. The tubing and any unused portions of propofol injectable emulsion must be discarded after 12 hours.

If propofol injectable emulsion is transferred to a syringe or other container prior to administration, the handling procedures for General Anesthesia/MAC Sedation should be followed and the product should be discarded and administration lines changed after 12 hours.
Labetalol Hydrochloride...

Labetalol Hydrochloride

Labetalol hydrochloride injection is intended for intravenous use in hospitalized patients. DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED depending upon the severity of hypertension and the response of the patient during dosing.

Patients should always be kept in a supine position during the period of intravenous drug administration. A substantial fall in blood pressure on standing should be expected in these patients. The patient’s ability to tolerate an upright position should be established before permitting any ambulation, such as using toilet facilities.

Either of two methods of administration of labetalol hydrochloride injection may be used: a) repeated intravenous injections, b) slow continuous infusion.

Repeated Intravenous Injection

Initially, labetalol hydrochloride injection should be given in a dose of 20 mg labetalol HCl (which corresponds to 0.25 mg/kg for an 80 kg patient) by slow intravenous injection over a 2-minute period.

Immediately before the injection and at 5 and 10 minutes after injection, supine blood pressure should be measured to evaluate response. Additional injections of 40 mg or 80 mg can be given at 10 minute intervals until a desired supine blood pressure is achieved or a total of 300 mg labetalol HCl has been injected. The maximum effect usually occurs within 5 minutes of each injection.

Slow Continuous Infusion

Labetalol hydrochloride injection is prepared for continuous intravenous infusion by diluting the contents with commonly used intravenous fluids (see below). Examples of methods of preparing the infusion solution are:

The contents of either two 20 mL vials (40 mL), or one 40 mL vial, are added to 160 mL of a commonly used intravenous fluid such that the resultant 200 mL of solution contains 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride, 1 mg/mL. The diluted solution should be administered at a rate of 2 mL/min to deliver 2 mg/min.

Alternatively, the contents of either two 20 mL vials (40 mL), or one 40 mL vial, of labetalol hydrochloride injection are added to 250 mL of a commonly used intravenous fluid. The resultant solution will contain 200 mg of labetalol hydrochloride, approximately 2 mg/3 mL. The diluted solution should be administered at a rate of 3 mL/min to deliver approximately 2 mg/min.

The rate of infusion of the diluted solution may be adjusted according to the blood pressure response, at the discretion of the physician. To facilitate a desired rate of infusion, the diluted solution can be infused using a controlled administration mechanism, e.g., graduated burette or mechanically driven infusion pump.

Since the half-life of labetalol is 5 to 8 hours, steady-state blood levels (in the face of a constant rate of infusion) would not be reached during the usual infusion time period. The infusion should be continued until a satisfactory response is obtained and should then be stopped and oral labetalol hydrochloride started. The effective intravenous dose is usually in the range of 50 to 200 mg. A total dose of up to 300 mg may be required in some patients.

Blood Pressure Monitoring

The blood pressure should be monitored during and after completion of the infusion or intravenous injections. Rapid or excessive falls in either systolic or diastolic blood pressure during intravenous treatment should be avoided. In patients with excessive systolic hypertension, the decrease in systolic pressure should be used as indicator of effectiveness in addition to the response of the diastolic pressure.

Initiation of Dosing with Labetalol Hydrochloride Tablets

Subsequent oral dosing with labetalol hydrochloride tablets should begin when it has been established that the supine diastolic blood pressure has begun to rise. The recommended initial dose is 200 mg, followed in 6 to 12 hours by an additional dose of 200 or 400 mg, depending on the blood pressure response. Thereafter, inpatient titration with labetalol hydrochloride tablets may proceed as follows:
Inpatient Titration Instructions * If needed, the total daily dose may be given in three divided doses.
Regimen

Daily Dose*

200 mg b.i.d.

400 mg

400 mg b.i.d.

800 mg

800 mg b.i.d.

1600 mg

1200 mg b.i.d.

2400 mg

While in the hospital, the dosage of labetalol hydrochloride tablets may be increased at 1 day intervals to achieve the desired blood pressure reduction.

For subsequent outpatient titration or maintenance dosing see Labetalol Hydrochloride Tablets Product Information DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION for additional recommendations.

Compatibility with commonly used intravenous fluids

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Labetalol hydrochloride injection was tested for compatibility with commonly used intravenous fluids at final concentrations of 1.25 mg to 3.75 mg labetalol hydrochloride per mL of the mixture. Labetalol hydrochloride injection was found to be compatible with and stable (for 24 hours refrigerated or at room temperature) in mixtures with the following solutions:

Ringers Injection, USP

Lactated Ringers Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and Ringers Injection

5% Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection

5% Dextrose Injection, USP

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

2.5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.33% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Labetalol hydrochloride injection was NOT compatible with 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP. Care should be taken when administering alkaline drugs, including furosemide, in combination with labetalol. Compatibility should be assured prior to administering these drugs together.
Dextrose

Dextrose

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

As reported in the literature, the dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution in pediatric patients, particularly neonates and low birth weight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/hypoglycemia.

Drug Interactions

Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Milrinone Lactate

Milrinone Lactate

Milrinone lactate injection should be administered with a loading dose followed by a continuous infusion (maintenance dose) according to the following guidelines:

LOADING DOSE

50 mcg/kg: Administer slowly over 10 minutes

The table below shows the loading dose in milliliters (mL) of Milrinone lactate injection (1mg/mL) by patient body weight (kg).

Loading Dose (mL) Using 1 mg/mL Concentration

Patient Body Weight (kg)

kg

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

mL

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

The loading dose may be given undiluted, but diluting to a rounded total volume of 10 or 20 mL (see Maintenance Dose for diluents) may simplify the visualization of the injection rate.

MAINTENANCE DOSE

Infusion Rate

Total Daily Dose

(24 hours)

Minimum

0.375 mcg/kg/min

0.59 mg/kg

Administer as a continuous intravenous infusion.

Standard

0.5 mcg/kg/min

0.77 mg/kg

Maximum

0.75 mcg/kg/min

1.13 mg/kg

Milrinone lactate injection drawn from vials should be diluted prior to maintenance dose administration. The diluents that may be used are 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP. The table below shows the volume of diluent in milliliters (mL) that must be used to achieve 200 mcg/mL concentration for infusion, and the resultant total volumes.

Desired Infusion

Concentration

mcg/mL

Milrinone

1 mg/mL

(mL)

Diluent

(mL)

Total Volume

(mL)

200

10

40

50

200

20

80

100

The infusion rate should be adjusted according to hemodynamic and clinical response. Patients should be closely monitored. In controlled clinical studies, most patients showed an improvement in hemodynamic status as evidenced by increases in cardiac output and reductions in pulmonary capillary wedge pressure.

Note: See "Dosage Adjustment in Renally Impaired Patients." Dosage may be titrated to the maximum hemodynamic effect and should not exceed 1.13 mg/kg/day. Duration of therapy should depend upon patient responsiveness.

The maintenance dose in mL/hr by patient body weight (kg) may be determined by reference to the following table.

Milrinone Infusion Rate (mL) Using 200 mcg/mL Concentration

Maintenance Dose

(mcg/kg/min)

Patient Body Weight (kg)

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

0.375

3.4

4.5

5.6

6.8

7.9

9

10.1

11.3

12.4

13.5

0.4

3.6

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

13.2

14.4

0.5

4.5

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

16.5

18

0.6

5.4

7.2

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

16.2

18

19.8

21.6

0.7

6.3

8.4

10.5

12.6

14.7

16.8

18.9

21

23.1

25.2

0.75

6.8

9

11.3

13.5

15.8

18

20.3

22.5

24.8

27

When administering milrinone lactate by continuous infusion, it is advisable to use a calibrated electronic infusion device.

Dosage Adjustment in Renally Impaired Patients

Data obtained from patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance = 0 to 30 mL/min) but without congestive heart failure have demonstrated that the presence of renal impairment significantly increases the terminal elimination half-life of milrinone. Reductions in infusion rate may be necessary in patients with renal impairment. For patients with clinical evidence of renal impairment, the recommended infusion rate can be obtained from the following table:
Creatinine Clearance Infusion Rate
Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2)

Infusion Rate

(mcg/kg/min)

5

0.2

10

0.23

20

0.28

30

0.33

40

0.38

50

0.43

Intravenous drug products should be inspected visually and should not be used if particulate matter or discoloration is present.
Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate

Sodium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) is administered intravenously only after dilution in a larger volume of fluid. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the individual needs of the patient. Serum sodium should be monitored as a guide to dosage. Using aseptic technique, transfer the desired amount to other intravenous fluids to provide the appropriate number of milliequivalents (mEq) of sodium acetate.

Sodium Acetate Injection, USP (2 mEq/mL) in the Pharmacy Bulk Package is designed for use with manual, gravity flow operations and automated compounding devices for preparing intravenous nutritional admixtures. Admixtures must be stored under refrigeration and used within 24 hours after compounding.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Directions for Dispensing From Pharmacy Bulk Package

The Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in the Pharmacy Admixtures Service only. For hanger application, peel off the paper liner from both ends of the tape hanger to expose ¾ inch long adhesive portions. Adhere each end to the label on the bottle. The vials should be suspended as a unit in the laminar flow hood.

A single entry through the vial closure should be made with a sterile dispensing set or transfer device. Transfer individual doses to appropriate intravenous infusion solutions. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage and multiple entries will increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination.

The above process should be carried out under a laminar flow hood using aseptic technique. Discard any unused portion within 4 hours after initial closure entry.
Erythrocin Lactobionate...

Erythrocin Lactobionate

For the treatment of severe infections in adults and pediatric patients, the recommended intravenous dose of erythromycin lactobionate is 15 to 20 mg/kg/day. Higher doses, up to 4 g/day, may be given for severe infections.

Administration of doses of ≥4 g/day may increase the risk for the development of erythromycin-induced hearing loss in elderly patients, particularly those with reduced renal or hepatic function. Erythrocin Lactobionate-IV (erythromycin lactobionate for injection, USP) in the ADD-Vantage system must be administered by intermittent intravenous infusion only. Due to the irritative properties of erythromycin, IV push is an unacceptable route of administration.

Intravenous erythromycin should be replaced by oral erythromycin as soon as possible.

The drug should be administered as a single dose from the ADD-Vantage flexible diluent container. Discard any unused portion.

For intermittent infusion: administer one-fourth the total daily dose of erythromycin lactobionate by intravenous infusion in 20 to 60 minutes at intervals not greater than every six hours. The final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate is prepared to give a concentration of 1 to 5 mg/mL. No less than 100 mL of IV diluent should be used. Infusion should be sufficiently slow to minimize pain along the vein.

For treatment of acute pelvic inflammatory disease caused by N. Gonorrhoeae, in female patients hypersensitive to penicillins, administer 500 mg erythromycin lactobionate every six hours for three days, followed by oral administration of 250 mg erythromycin stearate or base every six hours for seven days.

For treatment of Legionnaires’ Disease: Although optimal doses have not been established, doses utilized in reported clinical data were 1 to 4 grams daily in divided doses.

Administration of doses of ≥4 g/day may increase the risk for the development of erythromycin-induced hearing loss in elderly patients, particularly those with reduced renal or hepatic function.

In the treatment of Group A beta-hemolytic streptococcal infections of the upper respiratory tract (e.g., tonsillitis or pharyngitis), the therapeutic dosage of erythromycin should be administered for ten days. The American Heart Association suggests a dosage of 250 mg of erythromycin orally, twice a day in long-term prophylaxis of streptococcal upper respiratory tract infections for the prevention of recurring attacks of rheumatic fever in patients allergic to penicillin and sulfonamides.4

In prophylaxis against bacterial endocarditis (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE) the oral regimen for penicillin allergic patients is erythromycin 1 gram, 1 hour before the procedure followed by 500 mg six hours later.5

Preparation of Solution:

The Erythrocin Lactobionate-IV ADD-Vantage vial may be used with either 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP in the ADD-Vantage flexible diluent container. The 500 mg ADD-Vantage vials must be used as single doses with the 100 mL ADD-Vantage flexible diluent containers. The resulting solution will contain erythromycin activity equal to approximately 5 mg/mL.

Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard any unused portion.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Use Vial in ADD-Vantage Flexible Diluent Container

To Open:

Peel overwrap at corner and remove solution container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
• Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: 1. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (See FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (See FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe.


                                   Figure 1                                                                    Figure 2
• Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (See FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (See FIGURE 4.)


                                       Figure 3                                                                         Figure 4
• Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. • Label appropriately.
To Reconstitute the Drug:
• Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. • With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (See FIGURE 5.) • Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (See FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. • Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.


                                              Figure 5                                                                     Figure 6

Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
• Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. • Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. • Close flow control clamp of administration set. • Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. • Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated.
NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.
• Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. • Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. • Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. • Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. • Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible containers in series connections.

Stability:

In 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP The final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate should be completely administered within 8 hours in order to assure proper potency.

In 5% Dextrose Injection, USP The final diluted solution of erythromycin lactobionate should be completely administered within 2 hours in order to assure proper potency.

No drug or chemical agent should be added to an Erythrocin Lactobionate-IV fluid admixture unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been determined.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Ropivacaine Hydrochlori...

Ropivacaine Hydrochloride

The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should always be used. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Ropivacaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. Patients in poor general condition due to aging or other compromising factors such as partial or complete heart conduction block, advanced liver disease or severe renal dysfunction require special attention although regional anesthesia is frequently indicated in these patients. To reduce the risk of potentially serious adverse reactions, attempts should be made to optimize the patient's condition before major blocks are performed, and the dosage should be adjusted accordingly.

Use an adequate test dose (3 mL to 5 mL of a short acting local anesthetic solution containing epinephrine) prior to induction of complete block. This test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in such a fashion as to have displaced the epidural catheter. Allow adequate time for onset of anesthesia following administration of each test dose.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored or that contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 7 DOSAGE RECOMMENDATIONS * = Not Applicable† = The dose for a major nerve block must be adjusted according to site of administration and patient status. Supraclavicular brachial plexus blocks may be associated with a higher frequency of serious adverse reactions, regardless of the local anesthetic used (see PRECAUTIONS).‡ = Median dose of 21 mg per hour was administered by continuous infusion or by incremental injections (top-ups) over a median delivery time of 5.5 hours.§ = Cumulative doses up to 770 mg of ropivacaine HCl; over 24 hours (intraoperative block plus postoperative infusion); Continuous epidural infusion at rates up to 28 mg per hour for 72 hours have been well tolerated in adults, ie, 2016 mg plus surgical dose of approximately 100 mg to 150 mg as top-up.

Conc.

Volume

mL

Dose

mg

Onset

min

Duration

hours

mg/mL

(%)

SURGICAL ANESTHESIA

Lumbar Epidural

Administration

Surgery

5

7.5

10

(0.5%)

(0.75%)

(1%)

15 to 30

15 to 25

15 to 20

75 to 150

113 to 188

150 to 200

15 to 30

10 to 20

10 to 20

2 to 4

3 to 5

4 to 6

Lumbar Epidural

Administration

Cesarean Section

5

7.5

(0.5%)

(0.75%)

20 to 30

15 to 20

100 to 150

113 to 150

15 to 25

10 to 20

2 to 4

3 to 5

Thoracic Epidural

Administration

Surgery

5

7.5

(0.5%)

(0.75%)

5 to 15

5 to 15

25 to 75

38 to 113

10 to 20

10 to 20

n/a*

n/a*

Major Nerve Block†

(eg brachial plexus block)

5

7.5

(0.5%)

(0.75%)

35 to 50

10 to 40

175 to 250

75 to 300

15 to 30

10 to 25

5 to 8

6 to 10

Field Block

(eg minor nerve blocks and infiltration)

5

(0.5%)

1 to 40

5 to 200

1 to 15

2 to 6

LABOR PAIN MANAGEMENT

Lumbar Epidural Administration

Initial Dose

2

(0.2%)

10 to 20

20 to 40

10 to 15

0.5 to 1.5

Continuous infusion‡

2

(0.2%)

6 to 14 mL/h

12 to 28 mg/h

n/a*

n/a*

Incremental injections (top-up)‡

2

(0.2%)

10 to 15 mL/h

20 to 30 mg/h

n/a*

n/a*

POSTOPERATIVE PAIN MANAGEMENT

Lumbar Epidural Administration

Continuous infusion§

2

(0.2%)

6 to 14 mL/h

12 to 28 mg/h

n/a*

n/a*

Thoracic Epidural Administration

Continuous infusion§

2

(0.2%)

6 to 14 mL/h

12 to 28 mg/h

n/a*

n/a*

Infiltration

2

(0.2%)

1 to 100

2 to 200

1 to 5

2 to 6

(eg, minor nerve block)

5

(0.5%)

1 to 40

5 to 200

1 to 5

2 to 6

The doses in the table are those considered to be necessary to produce a successful block and should be regarded as guidelines for use in adults. Individual variations in onset and duration occur. The figures reflect the expected average dose range needed. For other local anesthetic techniques standard current textbooks should be consulted.

When prolonged blocks are used, either through continuous infusion or through repeated bolus administration, the risks of reaching a toxic plasma concentration or inducing local neural injury must be considered. Experience to date indicates that a cumulative dose of up to 770 mg ropivacaine HCl administered over 24 hours is well tolerated in adults when used for postoperative pain management: ie, 2016 mg. Caution should be exercised when administering ropivacaine for prolonged periods of time, eg, greater than 70 hours in debilitated patients.

For treatment of postoperative pain, the following technique can be recommended: If regional anesthesia was not used intraoperatively, then an initial epidural block with 5 mL to 7 mL ropivacaine is induced via an epidural catheter. Analgesia is maintained with an infusion of ropivacaine HCl 2 mg/mL (0.2%). Clinical studies have demonstrated that infusion rates of 6 mL to 14 mL (12 mg to 28 mg) per hour provide adequate analgesia with nonprogressive motor block. With this technique a significant reduction in the need for opioids was demonstrated. Clinical experience supports the use of ropivacaine epidural infusions for up to 72 hours.
Bupropion Hydrochloride...

Bupropion Hydrochloride

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of intravenous or intramuscular dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of oral ketorolac tromethamine is only indicated as continuation therapy to intravenous or intramuscular dosing of ketorolac tromethamine. See package insert for ketorolac tromethamine tablets for transition from intravenous or intramuscular dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose oral ketorolac tromethamine.

Note: Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose.

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient.

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of intravenous or intramuscular dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION

Ketorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose on a regular or “prn” schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS – Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days.

When administering ketorolac tromethamine injection, the intravenous bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The intramuscular administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing intravenous or intramuscular. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.

Single-Dose Treatment: The following regimen should be limited to single administration use only

Intramuscular Dosing
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.
Intravenous Dosing
• Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg. • Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.
Multiple-Dose Treatment (Intravenous or Intramuscular)
• Patients <65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 120 mg. • For patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.
For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection

Ketorolac tromethamine injection should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The dose is dependent upon the age, weight and clinical condition of the patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Hospira, Inc.

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Hospira, Inc. Drugs